CO
0)
0)
(D
O
O
O>
Q-3
UJ <
340179006
NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS
FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
A COMPILATION
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF ENFORCEMENT
OFFICE OF GENERAL ENFORCEMENT
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
-------
HANDBOOK DISTh.^UTION RECORD
This edition of the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants - A Compilation
has been designed to permit selective replacement of outdated material as new standards are
proposed and promulgated or existing standards are revised. A NESHAP Handbook distribution
record has been established and will be maintained up to date so that future revisions and ad-
ditions to the document may be distributed to Handbook users: (These supplements will be
issued at approximately six-month intervals.) In order to enter the Handbook user's name and
address in the distribution record system, the card shown below must be filled out and mailed
to the address indicated on the reverse side of card. Any future change in name and/or address
should be sent to the following:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Library Services Office, MD-35
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
Attn: NESHAP Regulations Information
(cut along dotted line)
DISTRIBUTION RECORD CARD
NESHAP Handbook
User
Date
(Last name)
(First)
(Middle initial)
Address to send
future revisions
and additions
(Street)
(City)
(State)
(Zip code)
If address is an employer
or affiliate (fill in)
(Employer or Affiliate name)
I have received a copy of the NESHAP Handbook (EPA-340/1-79-006). Please send me any re-
visions and new additions to the Handbook.
-------
EPA-340/1-79-006
NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS
FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
A Compilation as of April 1,1979
by
PEDCo Environmental, Inc.
Cincinnati, Ohio 45246
Contract No. 68-01-4147
EPA Project Officers: Kirk Foster and Libby Scopino
Prepared for
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Enforcement
Office of General Enforcement
Division of Stationary Source Enforcement
Washington, D.C. 20460
A -, -«-7o U-S< Environmental Protection Agency
Apr.l 1979 Reglon 5, Library (5PL-16)
230 S. Dearborn Street, Room 1670
Chicago, IL 60604
-------
The Stationary Source Enforcement series of reports is issued by the
Office of General Enforcement, Environmental Protection Agency, to
assist the Regional Offices in activities related to enforcement of
implementation plans, new source emission standards, and hazardous
emission standards to be developed under the Clean Air Act. Copies of
Stationary Source Enforcement Reports are available - as supplies per-
mit - from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Admin-
istration, General Services Division, MD-35, Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina 27711, or may be obtained, for a nominal cost, from the
National Technical Information Service, 5285, Port Royal Road, Spring-
field, Virginia 22151.
n
-------
PREFACE
This document is a compilation of the National Emission Standards
for Hazardous Air Pollutants promulgated under Section 112 of the Clean
Air Act, represented in full as amended. The information contained
herein updates the original compilation published by the Environmental
Protection Agency in June 1977 (EPA 340/1-77-020).
The format of this document permits easy and convenient replacement
of material as new standards are proposed and promulgated or existing
standards revised. Section I is an introduction to the standards,
explaining their purpose and interpreting the working concepts which
have developed through their implementation. Section II contains a
"quick-look" summary of each standard, including the dates of proposal,
promulgation, and any subsequent revisions. Section III is the complete
standards with all amendments incorporated into the material. Section
IV contains the full text of all revisions, including the preamble
which explains the rationale behind each revision. Section V is all
proposed amendments to the standards. To facilitate the addition of
future materials, the punched, loose-leaf format was selected. This
approach permits the document to be placed in a three-ring binder or to
be secured by rings, rivets, or other fasteners; future revisions can
then be easily inserted.
-------
Future supplements to National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants - A Compilation will be issued on an as needed basis by the
Division of Stationary Source Enforcement. Comments and suggestions
regarding this document should be directed to: Standards Handbooks,
Division of Stationary Source Enforcement (EN-341), U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, D.C. 20460.
IV
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
I. INTRODUCTION TO NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS 1-1
AIR POLLUTANTS
II. SUMMARY OF STANDARDS AND REVISIONS II-l
III. PART 61 - NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR III-l
POLLUTANTS
Subpart A - General Provisions III-2
Subpart B - National Emission Standard for Asbestos III-6
Subpart C - National Emission Standard for Beryllium III-ll
Subpart D - National Emission Standard for Beryllium 111-13
Rocket Motor Firing
Subpart E - National Emission Standard for Mercury 111-14
Subpart F - National Emission Standard for Vinyl Chloride 111-16
Appendix A - Compliance Status Information III-A-1
Appendix B - Test Methods III-A-7
Method 101 - Reference method for determination of III-A-7
particulate and gaseous mercury emissions from
stationary sources (air streams).
Method 102 - Reference method for determination of III-A-13
particulate and gaseous mercury emissions from
stationary sources (hydrogen streams).
Method 103 - Beryllium screening method. III-A-19
Method 104 - Reference method for determination of III-A-20
beryllium emissions from stationary sources.
Method 105 - Method for determination of mercury in III-A-25
wastewater treatment plant sewage sludges.
Method 106 - Determination of vinyl chloride from III-A-27
stationary sources.
Method 107 - Determination of vinyl chloride content of III-A-29
inprocess wastewater samples, and vinyl chloride
content of polyvinyl chloride resin, slurry, wet cake,
and latex samples.
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Page
IV. REFERENCES (Full text of revisions) IV-1
V. PROPOSED AMENDMENTS V-l
VI
-------
I. INTRODUCTION
The 1970 Amendments ot the Clean Air Act are considered a landmark
in the nation's efforts to control air pollution. They established the
authority to control pollutants on the basis of their effects, sources,
and best means of control. Section 112 of that legislation provided for
establishment of National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants,
commonly referred to as NESHAPs. This manual is a compilation of those
emission standards.
A hazardous air pollutant is defined as "... an air pollutant to
which no ambient air quality standard is applicable and which in the
judgment of the Administrator causes, or contributes to, air pollution
which may reasonably be anticipated to result in an increase in mortality
or an increase in serious irreversible, or incapacitating reversible,
illness". Thus, the Administrator must prescribe a NESHAP for each hazardous
pollutant at a level judged to provide an ample margin of safety to protect
the public health. They may take the form of emission standards or design,
equipment, work practice, or operational standards if emission standards are
not feasible. The determination that a pollutant is hazardous precedes public
hearings and can be reversed only if hearing introduce contrary evidence.
Acquisition of the necessary health effects data to support the establishment of
a hazardous pollutant standard is difficult and time-consuming. However, the
NESHAPs are unique in that they apply to both new and existing sources.
1-1
-------
All new sources are subject to control immediately upon promulgation
of a standard and all existing sources are to be in compliance within
90 days of promulgation unless granted an extension. Furthermore, al-
though costs might be considered when determining what constitutes an
"ample margin of safety", such considerations are not explicitly required
by Section 112.
Section 112 of the Clean Air Act defines three steps to be followed
in the establishment of emission standards for hazardous pollutants.
The first requirement is that the Administrator publish a list of those
air pollutants for which he intends to establish emission standards. There
were eleven toxic substances appraised as candidates for the first
list of hazardous air pollutants: asbestos, arsenic, beryllium, cadmium,
chromium, lead, mercury, nickel, polychlorinated biphenyls, polycyclic
organic matter, and vanadium. Major selection criteria included (1) the
severity of the associated human diseases, (2} the length of time between
exposure and disease, with the longer periods considered especially
dangerous, (3) the portion of the total human intake relatable to air-
borne substances, and (4) the linkage between sources of emissions and
reported cases of diseases attributed to the pollutant. Consultations
were held with federal agencies, advisory committees, and other experts.
All consulted groups recommended that the initial list be limited to
asbestos, beryllium, and mercury. In addition, a National Academy of
Sciences study concluded that control of asbestos be undertaken as
quickly as possible, and the HEW report, "Hazards of Mercury", concluded
that it was urgent to use all possible means to reduce exposure to
1-2
-------
mercury immediately. Thus, an initial list containing asbestos, beryllium,
and mercury was published in the Federal Register on March 31, 1971.
The second step in establishing standards requires that, within 180
days after an air pollutant is included in a published list, the Administrator
publish proposed regulations establishing emission standards for such pollutant
together with a notice of public hearing within thirty days. Pursuant to
this requirement, proposed regulations for the control of emissions of
asbestos, beryllium, and mercury were published in the Federal Register on
December 7, 1971.
Following the required waiting periods and public hearings, the final
step, promulgation, took place on April 6, 1973. Clarifying regulations
were promulgated May 3, 1974. Since then the NESHAPs have undergone several
revisions, including the addition of regulations for vinyl chloride from
facilities that manufacture both vinyl chloride monomer and polyvinyl chloride
and the addition of benzene to the list of hazardous pollutant. In addition,
investigations are underway for several pollutiants to determine the optimum
control option for each.
This document contains all regulations promulgated under Section 112 of
the Clean Air Act, represented in full as amended. As more pollutants are
investigated and new technology developed, the National Emissions Standards
for Hazardous Air Pollutants will continue to be updated to achieve their
primary purpose of protecting the public health.
1-3
-------
SECTION II
SUMMARY OF
STANDARDS
AND REVISIONS
-------
II. SUMMARY OF STANDARDS AND REVISIONS
In order to make the information in this document more readily avail-
able, a table has been prepared which summarizes the National Emission
Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants since their inception in April 1973.
Although regulatory language is necessary to make the intent of the
regulation clear, it is difficult for anyone not familiar with these terms
to locate concise information. It is with this thought in mind that the
following table was developed. It includes the pollutant regulated, the
facilities which will be affected by the regulation, the emission stand-
ard for these facilities, and if there are sampling or monitoring require-
ments.
Since the NESHAP's affect both new and existing sources, all regulations
become effective the day of promulgation. To cite such promulgation, refer
to the volume and page of the Federal Register in which the rule appeared,
i.e. 36 FR 23239, meaning volume 36, page 23239 of the Federal Register.
The table gives such references for the proposal, promulgation, and subse-
quent revisions of the NESHAP's. The full text of all revisions and pro-
posed revisions can be located in Sections IV and V.
II-l
-------
Pollutant
Affected facilities
Emission standard
Sampling or
monitoring requirement
Subpart B - ASBESTOS
proposed
T2/7/71 (36 FR 23239}
Promulgated
4/6/73 (38 FR 8826)
Revised
5/3/74 (39 FR 15398)
10/14/75 (40 FR 48299)
3/2/77 (42 FR 12127)
8/17/77 (42 FR 41424)
3/3/78 (43 FR 8800)
5/19/78 (43 FR 26372)
Asbestos mills
Roadway surfacing
Manufacturing of products containing asbestos
(textiles; cement; fire-proofing and insulat-
ing materials; friction products; paper; mill-
board, felt; floor tiles; paints, coatings,
caulks, adhesives, sealants; plastic and
rubber materials; chlorine; shotgun shells;
asphaltic concrete)
Demolition and renovation
>80 m pipe, covered or coated
>15 m? duct, boiler, tank, reactor, turbine,
furnance, or structural member, covered or
coated
Spraying friable asbestos
1) Materials applied to equipment or machinery
with >1% asbestos on dry weight basis
2) Materials sprayed on buildings, structures
pipes, conduits
Fabricating (cement building products;
friction products; cement or silicate board
for ventilation hoods; ovens; electrical
panels; lab furniture; marine construction;
flow controls for molten metal industry
Friable insulating materials
Waste disposal
Waste disposal sites
No visible emissions, or meet equipment
specifications
Contain no asbestos except for temporary
use on area of asbestos ore deposits
No visible emissions, or meet equipment
specifications
No emissions to outside air; Friable
materials removed, wetted, or particles
mechanically collected
No visible emissions, or meet equipment
specifications
Materials must contain <]% asbestos on
dry weight basis
No visible emissions, or meet equipment
specifications
Contain no asbestos
No visible emissions
Deposit at acceptable disposal sites
Design and work practice requirements
No visible emissions
No requirement
No requirement
No requirement
No requirement
No requirement
No requirement
No requirement
No requirement
No requirement
No requirement
-------
NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS (Continued)
Pollutant
Affected facilities
Emission standard
Sampling or
monitoring requirement
oo
Subpart C - BERYLLIUM
Proposed
12/7/71 (36 FR 23239)
Promulgated
4/6/73 (38 FR 8826)
Revised
8/17/77 (42 FR 41424)
3/3/78 (43 FR 8800)
Subpart D - BERRYLLIUM
ROCKET MOTOR FITING
Proposed
12/7/71 (36 FR 23239)
Promulgated
4/6/73 (38 FR 8826)
Revised
8/17/77 (42 FR 41424)
3/3/78 (43 FR
Extraction plants
Ceramic plants
Foundries
Incinerators
Propellant plants
Machine shops (which process alloy containing
>5X beryl 1ium)
1) 10g/24 hr.
or
2) Ambient concentration in the vicinity,
of the stationary source of 0.01 ug/m ,
averaged over 30 day period
1) Source test
2) 3 years continuous
monitoring data
Rocket motor test sites
Closed tank collection of combustion products
75 MQ/min scm of air within 10 to 60 min,
accumulated during 2 consecutive weeks,
in area which could adversely affect
public health
2 g/hr, 10 g/day
Ambient concentrations
measured during and after
firing or propellant
disposal
Continuous sampling during
release
Subpart E - MERCURY
Proposed
12/7/71 (36 FR 23239)
Promulgated
4/6/73 (38 FR 8826)
Revised
10/14/75 (40 FR 48299)
8/17/77 (42 FR 41424)
3/3/78 (43 FR 8800)
Ore processing
Chlor-alkali manufacture
Sludge dryers or incinerators
2300 g/24 hr
3200 g/24 hr
Source test
Source test or sludge test
(Sources exceeding 1600
g/day must monitor once per
year)
-------
NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS (Continued)
Pollutant
Affected facilities
Emission standard
Sampling or
monitoring requirement
Subpart f - VINYL CHLORIDE
Proposed
12/24/75 (40 FR 59532)
Promulgated
10/21/76 (41 FR 46560)
Revised
12/3/76 (41 FR 53017)
6/7/77 (42 FR 29005)
8/17/77 (42 FR 41424)
3/3/78 (43 FR 8800)
Proposed revisions
6/2/77 (42 FR 28154)
Ethylene dichlonde manufacture
Vinyl chloride manufacture
Polyvinyl chloride manufacture
Reactor, stripper, mixing, weighing and
holding containers, monomer recovery system
Reactor opening loss
Reactor manual vent
Sources following stripper
Ethylene dichlonde, vinyl chloride and/or
polyvinyl chloride manufacture
Relief valve discharge
Loading and unloading lines
1) Ethylene dichlonde purification-
10 ppm*
2) Oxychlonnation reactor.
0.2 g/kg (0.0002 Ib/lb) of the 100c/i
ethylene dichlonde product
10 ppm*
10 ppm*
0.02 g vinyl chloride/kg
(0.00002 Ib vinyl chlonde/lb)
No emissions
For each calendar day:
1) Using stripping technology -
2000 ppm for polyvinyl chloride disper-
sion resins (excluding latex)
400 ppm each for other polyvinyl
chloride resins (including latex)
2) Other than stripping technology -
2 g/kg (0.002 Ib/lb) product for dis-
persion polyvinyl chloride resins
(excluding latex)
0.4 g/kg (0.0004 Ib/lb) product for
other polyvinyl chloride resins
(including latex)
No discharge
0.0038 m after each loading or unloading,
or 10 ppm when contained by a control
system
Source test
Continuous monitor
Source test
Continuous monitor
Source test
Continuous monitor
Source test
Continuous monitor
Source test
Continuous monitor
Source test
Source test
Equipment
Source test
Continuous monitor
-------
NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS (Continued)
Pollutant
Affected facil Hies
Emission standard
Sampling or
monitoring requirement
Slip gauges
Pump; compresser and agitator seal
Leakage from relief valves
Manual venting of gases
Opening of equipment
Samples (at least 10 percent by weight vinyl
chloride)
Leak detection and elimination
Inprocess wastewater
10 ppm from the required control system
10 ppm from the required control system
with seals
Rupture disk must be installed
10 ppm from a required control system
10 ppm from a required control system*
Returned to system
Implementation of an approved program
10 ppm before discharge
* Before opening any equipment for any
reason, the quantity of vinyl chloride
is to be reduced so that the equipment
contains no more than 2.0 percent by
volume vinyl chloride or 0.0950 m^
(25 gal) of vinyl chloride, whichever
is larger, at standard temperature and
pressure.
Source test
Continuous monitor
Source test
Continuous monitor
Equipment
Source test
Continuous monitor
Source test
Continuous monitor
Approved testing program
Source test
Continuous monitor
-------
SECTION III
NATIONAL EMISSION
STANDARD FOR
HAZARDOUS AIR
POLLUTANTS
-------
Title 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER 1—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS '
Subpart A—General Provisions
Sec.
61.01 Applicability.
61.02 Definitions.
61.03 Abbreviations.
61.04 Address.
61.05 Prohibited activities.
61.06 Determination of construction or
modification.
61.07 Application for approval of construc-
tion or modification.
61.08 Approval by Administrator.
61.09 Notification of startup.
61.10 Source reporting and waiver request.
61.11 Waiver of compliance.
61.12 Emission tests and monitoring.
61.13 Waiver of emission tests.
61.14 Source test and analytical methods.
61.15 Availability of Information.
61.16 State authority.
61.17 Circumvention. 7
Subpart B—National Emission Standard for
Asbestos
61.20
61.21
61.22
61 23
61.24
61.25
Applicability.
Definitions.
Emission standard.
Air-cleaning.
Reporting.
Waste disposal sites.7
Subpart C—National Emission Standard for
Beryllium
61.30 Applicability.
61.31 Definitions.
61.32 Emission standard.
61.33 Stack sampling.
61.34 Air sampling.
61 63 Emission standard for vinyl chloride
plants.
61.64 Emission standard for polyvinyl chlo-
ride plants.
61 65 Emission standard for ethylene di-
chloride, vinyl chloride and poly-
vinyl chloride plants
61.66 Equivalent equipment and procedures.
61.67 Emission tests.
61.68 Emission monitoring.
61 69 Initial report.
61.70 Semiannual report.
61.71 Becordkeeping.
Appendix A—Compliance Status Information
Appendix B—Test Methods.
Method 101—Reference method for determi-
nation of partlculate and gaseous mercury
emissions from stationary sources (air
streams).
Method 102—Reference method for determi-
nation of partlculate and gaseous mercury
emissions from stationary sources (hydro-
gen streams).
Method 103—Beryllium screening method.
Method 104—Reference method for determi-
nation of beryllium emissions from sta-
tionary sources.
Method 105—Method for determination of
mercury in wastewater treatment plant
sewage sludges.'
Method 106—Determination of vinyl chloride
from stationary sources. ^8
Method 107—Determination of vinyl chloride
of inprocess wastewater samples, and vinyl
chloride content of polyvinyl chloride
resin, slurry, wet cake, and latex samples.
28
AUTHORITY: Sec. 112. 301(a) of the Clean
Air Act aa amended [42 U.S.C. 7412,
7601(a)]. unless otherwise noted. 28,40,47
Subpart D—National Emission Standard for
Beryllium Rocket Motor Firing
61.40 Applicability.
61.41 Definitions.
61.42 Emission standard.
81.43 Emission testing—rocket firing or pro-
pellant disposal.
61.44 Stack sampling.
Subpart E—National Emission Standard for
Mercury
61.50 Applicability.
61.51 Definitions.
Emission standard.
Stack sampling.
Sludge sampling.'
61.52
61.53
61.54
61.55 Emission monitoring.7
Subpart F—National Emission.Standard for Vinyl
Chloride 28
61.60 Applicability.
3161 Definitions.
61.62 Emission standard
chloride plants.
for ethylene di-
III-l
-------
Subpart A—General Provisions
§ 61.01 Applicability.
The provisions of this part apply to
the owner or operator of any stationary
source for which a standard Is prescribed
under this part.
§ 61.02 Definition*.
As used In this part, all terms not de-
fined herein shall have the meaning given
them In the act:
(a) "Act" means the Clean Air Act (42
U.S.C. 1857etseq.).
(b) "Administrator" means the Ad-
ministrator of the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency or his authorized repre-
sentative. ..
(c) "Alternative method" means any
method of sampling and analyzing for
an air pollutant which is not a reference
method or an equivalent method but
which has been demonstrated to the
Administrator's satisfaction to produce,
in specific cases, results adequate for
his determination of compliance.2
(d) "Commenced" means that an own-
er or operator has undertaken a con-
tinuous program of construction or
modification or that an owner or operator
has entered into a contractual obligation
to undertake and complete, within a rea-
sonable time, a continuous program of
construction or modification.
(e) "Compliance schedule" means the
date or dates by which a source or cate-
gory of sources is required to comply with
the standards of this part and with any
steps toward such compliance which are
set forth in a waiver of compliance under
J 61.11.
(f) "Construction" means fabrication,
erection, or Installation of a stationary
source.
(g) "Effective date" la the date of
promulgation in the FEDERAL REGISTER
of an applicable standard or other regu-
lation under this part.
(h) "Equivalent method" means any
method of sampling and analyzing for
an air pollutant which has been demon-
strated to the Administrator's satisfac-
tion to have a consistent and quantita-
tively known relationship to the reference
method, under specified conditions.
(1) "Existing source" means any sta-
tionary source which Is not a new source.
(j) "Modification" means any physical
change in, or change In the method of
operation of, a stationary source which
Increases the amount of any hazardous
air pollutant emitted by such source or
which results In the emission of any
hazardous air pollutant not previously
emitted, except that:
(1) Routine maintenance, repair, and
replacement shall not be considered
physical changes, and
(2) The following shall not be con-
sidered a change In the method of
operation:
(1) An Increase In the production rate.
If such Increase does not exceed the op-
erating design capacity of the stationary
source;
(11) An increase in hours of operation.
(k) "New source" means any stationary
source, the construction or modification
of which is commenced after the publi-
cation in the FEDERAL REGISTER of pro-
posed national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants which will be
applicable to such source.
(1) "Owner or operator" means any
person who owns, leases, operates, con-
trols, or supervises a stationary source.
(m) "Reference method" means any
method of sampling and analyzing for an
air pollutant, as described in Appendix
B to this part.
(n) "Startup" means the setting in
operation of a stationary source for any
purpose.
(o) "Standard" means a national
emission standard for a nazardous air
pollutant proposed or promulgated under
this part.
(p) "Stationary source" means any
building, structure, facility, or installa-
tion which emits or may emit any air
pollutant which has been designated as
hazardous by the Administrator.
§ 61.03 Units and abbreviations.
Used in this part are abbreviations and
symbols of units of measure. These are
denned as follows :
(a) System International (SI) units
of measure:
A = ampere
Hz = hertz
J = Joule
K= degree Kelvin
kg = kilogram
m= meter
1^= cubic meter
mg = milligram = 10 > gram
mm — millimeter = ](>-' meter
Mg = megagTam=10" gram
mol=mole
N^newton
ng = nanogram — 10 -• gram
run = nanometer =] 0 ' meter
Pa = pascal
s= second
V=volt
W = watt
0 = omh
>ig = microgram = 10-" gram
(b) Other units of measure :
•C = degree Celsius (centigrade)
cfm = cubic leet per minute
cc = cubic centimeter
d=day
•F=degree Fahrenheit
ft2 = square leet
ft" = cubic feet
gal = gallon
In = Inch
In Hg = inches of mercury
In H2O = inches of water
1= liter
lb= pound
1pm = liter per minute
min = minute
ml = mUliliter= 10-» liter
oz Bounces
pslg = pounds per square inch gage
•R=; degree Rankine
*1 = micro-liter = 1(H liter
v/v= volume per volume
yd- = square yards
yr=year
(c) Chemical nomenclature:
Be = beryllium
Hg = mercury
HjO = water
(d) Miscellaneous:
act = actual
avg=average
I D. = inside diameter
M = molar
N = normal
O.D. = outside diameter
% = percent
std = standard
(Sections 112 and 301 (a) of the Clean Air
Act, as amended [43 U.S.C. 1857C-7,
1857g
-------
(A) (Reserved]
(B) State of Alabama, Air Pollution Con-
trol Division, Air Pollution Control Commis-
sion, 645 S. McDonough Street, Montgomery,
Alabama 361O4.25
(C) [Reserved)
(D)Artsona.30, 48
Maricopa County Department of Health
Services, Bureau of Air Pollution Control,
1825 East Roosevelt Street, Phoenix. Art*.
85006.
Pima County Health Department, Air
Quality Control District. 151 West Congress,
Tucson. Ariz. 88701.
(•) jINservsdi:
5,6,18,20,21,24,29,31,48
(P> Califoraia.
Bay Area Air Pollution Control District.
939 Ellis Street. San Francisco, Calif. 94109.
Del Norte County Air Pollution Control
District. Courthouse, Crescent City. Calif.
96531.
Fresno County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 515 South Cedar Avenue, Fresno,
Calif. 93702
Humboldt County Air Pollution Control
District, 5600 South Broadway. Eureka.
Calif. 95501.
Kem County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict. 1700 Flower Street (P.O. Box 997). Ba-
kersfield. Calif. 93302.
Madera County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 135 West Yosemite Avenue, Madera,
Calif. 93637.
Mendodno County Air Pollution Control
District, County Courthouse, Uklah, Calif.
•4582.
Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Con-
trol District, 420 Church Street (P.O. Box
487), Salinas. Calif. 93901.
Northern Sonoma County Air Pollution
Control District, 3313 Chanate Road. Santa
Rosa, Calif. 95404.
Sacramento County Air Pollution Control
District, 3701 Branch Center Road. Sacra-
mento. Calif. 95827.
San Diego County Air Pollution Control
District, 9150 Cheapiiake Drive, San Diego.
Calif. 92123.
San Joaquin County Air Pollution Control
District. 1801 East Haselton Street (P.O.
Box 2009). Stockton. Calif. 95201.
Santa Barbara County Air Pollution Con-
trol District. 4440 Calle Real. Santa Bar-
bara, Calif. 93110.
Shasta County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict. 1855 Placer Street, Redding. r-miM
98001.
South Coast Air Quality Management Dis-
trict. 9420 Telstar Avenue. El Monte, Calif.
91731.
Stanislaus County Air Pollution Control
District, 820 Scenic Drive, Modesto. Calif.
98350.
Trinity County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict. Box AJ. Weavenrffle, OaUf. MOM.
Ventura County Air PoBuUon Control
District. 625 East Santa Clara Street. Ven-
tura. Calif. 93001.
(O) State of Colorado. Colorado Air Pol-
tatlon Control Division. 4910 BMt llth Ave-
n«*. Denver. Colorado 80220.'
(H) State of Connecticut, Department
of environmental Preteetlast. State Office
Building. Hartford. Connecttea*- Ml 15."
(I) State of Delaware (for asbestos, beryl-
lium and mercury only): Delaware Depart-
ment of Natural Resources and Environ-
mental Control, Edward Tatnall Building,
Dover, Delaware 19901.46
(JHK) [reserved]
-------
§ 61.05 Prohibited activities.
(a) After the effective date of any
standard prescribed under this part, no
owner or operator shall construct or mod-
ify any stationary source subject to such
standard without first obtaining written
approval of the Administrator In accord-
ance with this subpart. except under an
exemption granted by the President
under section 112(c)(2) of the act.
Sources, the construction or modification
of which commenced after the publica-
tion date of the standards proposed to
be applicable to such source, are subject
to this prohibition.
(b) After the effective date of any
standard prescribed under this part, no
owner or operator shall operate any new
source In violation of such standard ex-
cept under an exemption granted by the
President under section 112(c) (2) of the
act.
(c) Ninety days after the effective date
of any standard prescribed under this
part, no owner or operator shall operate
any existing stationary source In viola-
tion of such standard, except under a
waiver granted by the Administrator in
accordance with this subpart or under
an exemption granted by the President
under section 112(c) (2) of the act.
(d) No owner or operator subject to
the provisions of this part shall fall to
report, revise reports, or report source
test results as required under this part.
§ 61.06 Determination of construction
or modification.
Upon written application by an owner
or operator, the Administrator will make
a determination of whether actions taken
or Intended to be taken by such owner
or operator constitute construction or
modification or the commencement
thereof within the meaning of this part.
The Administrator will within 30 days
of receipt of sufficient Information to
evaluate an application, notify the owner
or operator of his determination.
§ 61.07 Application for approval of
construction or modification.
(a) The owner or operator of any new
source to which a standard prescribed
under this part is applicable shall, prior
to the date -on which construction or
modification Is planned to commence, or
within 30 days after the effective date
In the case of a new source that already
has commenced construction or modifi-
cation and has not begun operation, sub-
mit to the Administrator an application
for approval of such construction or
modification. A separate application shall
be submitted for each stationary source.
(b) Each application shall Include:
(1) The name and address of the ap-
plicant.
(2) The location or proposed location
of the source.
(3) Technical Information describing
the proposed nature, size, design, operat-
ing design capacity, and method of oper-
ation of the source. Including a descrip-
tion of any equipment to be used for
control of emissions. Such technical In-
formation shall Include calculations of
emission estimates in sufficient detail to
permit assessment of the validity of such
calculations.
§ 61.08 Approval by Administrator.
(a) The Administrator will, within 80
days of receipt of sufficient Information
to evaluate an application under § 61.07,
notify the owner or operator of approval
or intention to deny approval of con-
struction or modification.
(b) If the Administrator determines
that a stationary source for which an
application pursuant to § 61.07 was sub-
mitted will, if properly operated, not
cause emissions in violation of a stand-
ard, he will approve the construction or
modification of such source.
(c) Prior to denying any application
for approval of construction or modifica-
tion pursuant to this section, the Admin-
istrator will notify the owner or operator
making such application of the Admin-
istrator's intention to issue such denial,
together with:
(1) Notice of the information and
findings on which such intended denial
is based, and
(2) Notice of opportunity for such
owner or operator to present, within such
time limit as the Administrator shall
specify, additional information or argu-
ments to the Administrator prior to final
action on such application.
(d) A final determination to deny any
application for approval will be In writ-
ing and will set forth the specific grounds
on which such denial Is based. Such final
determination will be made within 60
days of presentation of additional infor-
mation or arguments, or 60 days after
the final date specified for presentation,
if no presentation is made.
(e) Neither the submission of an ap-
plication for approval nor the Admin-
istrator's granting of approval to con-
struct or modify shall:
(1) Relieve an owner or operator of
legal responsibility for compliance with
any applicable provision of this part or
of any other applicable Federal, State.
or local requirement, or
(2) Prevent the Administrator from
Implementing or enforcing this part or
taking any other action under the act.
§61.09 Notification of startup.
(a) Any owner or operator of a source
which has an Initial startup after the
effective date of a standard prescribed
under this part shall furnish the Admin-
istrator written notification as follows:
(1) A notification of the anticipated
date of initial startup of the source not
more than 60 days nor less than 30 days
prior to such date
(2) A notification of the actual date
of Initial startup of the source within 15
days after such date.
(Sec. 114 of the
(42 DwB.C. 7414)).
Air Act M amended
§ 61.10 Source reporting and waiver re-
quest.
(a) The owner or operator of any
existing source, or any new source to
which a standard prescribed under this
part is applicable which had an initial
startup which preceded the effective date
of a standard prescribed under this part
shall, within 90 days after the effective
date, provide the following information
In writing to the Administrator:
(1) Name and address of the owner
or operator.
(2) The location of the source.
(3) The type of hazardous pollutants
emitted by the stationary source.
(4) A brief description of the nature,
size, design, and method of operation of
the stationary source including the op-
erating design capacity of such source.
Identify each point of emission for each
hazardous pollutant.
(5) The average weight per month of
the hazardous materials being processed
by the siurce, over the last 12 months
preceding the date of the report.
(6) A description of the existing con-
trol equipment for each emission point.
(i) Primary control devlce(s) for each
hazardous pollutant.
(11) Secondary control devlce(s) for
each hazardous pollutant.
(ill) Estimated control efficiency (per-
cent) for each control device.
(7) A statement by the owner or oper-
ator of the source as to whether he can
comply with the standards prescribed In
this part within 90 days of the effective
date.
(b) The owner or operator of an exist-
ing source unable to operate in compli-
ance with any standard prescribed under
this part may request a waiver of com-
pliance with such standard for a period
not exceeding 2 years from the effective
date. Any request shall be in writing and
shall Include the following information:
(1) A description of the controls to
be Installed to comply with the standard.
(2) A compliance schedule, including
the date each step toward compliance will
be reached. Such list shall Include as a
minimum the following dates:
(1) Date by which contracts for emis-
sion control systems or process modifica-
tions will be awarded, or date by which
orders will be Issued for the purchase
of component parts to accomplish emis-
sion control or process modification;
(11) Date of Initiation of onslte con-
struction or installation of emission con-
trol equipment or process change;
(ill) Date by which onsite construc-
tion or installation of emission contrc"
equipment or process modification is tc
be completed; and
(iv) Date by which final compliance Is
III-4
-------
to be achieved.
(3) A description of interim emission
control steps which will be taken during
the waiver period.
(c) Changes in the Information pro-
vided under paragraph (a) of this section
shall be provided to the Administrator
within 30 days after such change, except
that if changes will result from modifica-
tion of the source, as defined In § 61.02
(j), the provisions of § 61.07 and I 61.08
are applicable.
(d) The format for reporting under
this section is included as Appendix A of
this part. Advice on reporting the status
of compliance may be obtained from the
Administrator.
(Sec. 114 of the Clew Air Act u amended
(42 O8.C. 7414)). «t«
§61.11 Waiver of compliance.
(a) Based on the information provided
In any request under § 61.10, or other in-
formation, the Administrator may grant
a waiver of compliance with a standard
for a period not exceeding 2 years from
the effective date of such standard.
(b) Such waiver will be In writing and
will:
(1) Identify the stationary source
covered.
t2) Specify the termination date of
the waiver. The waiver may be termi-
nated at an earlier date if the conditions
specified under paragraph (b) (3) of this
section are not met.
(3) Specify dates by which steps to-
ward compliance are to be taken; and
Impose such additional conditions as the
Administrator determines to be neces-
sary to assure installation of the neces-
sary controls within the waiver period,
and to assure protection of the health
of persons during the waiver period.
(c) Prior to denying any request for
a waiver pursuant to this section, the
Administrator will notify the owner or
operator making such request of the Ad-
ministrator's intention to issue such
denial, together with:
d) Notice of the information and
findings on which such intended denial
is based, and
(2) Notice of opportunity for such
owner or operator to present, within
such time limit as the Administrator
specifies, additional information or argu-
ments to the Administrator prior to final
action on such request.
(d) A final determination to deny any
request for a waiver will be in writing
and will set forth the specific grounds on
which such denial is based. Such final
determination will be made within 60
days after presentation of additional in-
formation or arguments, or 60 days after
the final date specified for such presen-
tation, if no presentation is made.
(e) The granting of a waiver under
this section shall not abrogate the Ad-
ministrator's authority under section 114
of the act.
§ 61.12 Emission tests and monitoring.
(a) Emission tests and monitoring
shall be conducted and reported as set
forth in this part and Appendix B to this
part.
(b) The owner or operator of a new
source subject to this part, and at the
or operator of an existing source sub-
ject to this part, shall provide or cause
to be provided, emission testing facili-
ties as follows:
(1) Sampling ports adequate for test
methods applicable to such source.
(2) Safe sampling platform (s).
(3) Safe access to sampling plat-
form (s) .
(4) Utilities for sampling and testing
equipment.
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act u amended
(42 UJS.C. 7414)). W*
§ 61.13 Waiver of emission tests.
(a) Emission tests may be waived
upon written application to the Admin-
istrator if, in his judgment, the source
is meeting the standard, or If the source
is operating under a waiver of compliance
or has requested a waiver of compliance.
(b) If application for waiver of the
emission test Is made, such application
shall accompany the information re-
quired by § 61.10. The appropriate form
is contained in Appendix A to this part.
(c) Approval of any waiver granted
pursuant to this section shall not abro-
gate the Administrator's authority under
the act or In any way prohibit the Ad-
ministrator from later canceling such
waiver. Such cancellation will be made
only after notice Is given to the owner
or operator of the source.
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act M amended
<42 DJS.C. 7414». 40.47
§ 61.14 Source test and analytical meth-
ods.
(a) Methods 101, 102, and 104 in Ap-
pendix B to this part shall be used for
all source tests required under this part,
unless an equivalent method or an al-
ternative method has been approved by
the Administrator.
(b) Method 103 in Appendix B to this
part is hereby approved by the Admin-
istrator as an alternative method for
sources subject to § 61.32(a) and § 61.42
(b).
(c) The Administrator may, after no-
tice to the owner or operator, withdraw
approval of an alternative method
granted under paragraphs (a), (b) or
(d) of this section. Where the test results
using an alternative method do not ade-
quately indicate whether a source is In
compliance with a standard, the Ad-
ministrator may require the use of the
reference method or its equivalent.7
(d) Method 105 In Appendix B to this
part is hereby approved by the Adminis-
trator as an alternative method for
sources subject to § 61.52(b) 1
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended
(42U.S.C. 7414)). W*
§ 61.15 Availability of information.2
The availability to the public of in-
formation provided to, or otherwise ob-
tained by, the Administrator under this
part shall be governed by Part 2 of this
chapter.
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended
(42 U.S.C. 7414)). tofl
§61.16 State authority.
(a) The provisions of this part shall
not be construed In any manner to pre-
clude any State or political subdivision
thereof from:
(1) Adopting and enforcing any emis-
sion limiting regulation applicable to a
stationary source, provided that such
emission limiting regulation is not less
stringent than the standards prescribed
under this part.
(2) Requiring the owner or operator
of a stationary source, other than a sta-
tionary source owned or operated by the
United States, to obtain permits, licenses,
or approvals prior to initiating construc-
tion, modification, or operation of such
source.
(Sec. 116, Clean Air Act ai amended (42
U.S.C. 7418)). *M'
§61.17 Circumvention.7
No owner or operator subject to the
provisions of this part shall build, erect,
install, or use any article machine,
equipment, process, or method, the use of
which conceals an emission which would
otherwise constitute a violation of an
applicable standard. Such concealment
includes, but is not limited to, the use of
gaseous dilutants to achieve compliance
with a visible emissions standard, and
the piecemeal carrying out of an opera-
tion to avoid coverage by a standard that
applies only to operations larger than a
specified size.
III-5
-------
Subpart B—National Emission Standard
for Asbestos
§ 61.20 Applicability.
The provisions of this subpart are ap-
plicable to those sources specified in
{ 61.22.
§ 61.21 Definitions.
Terms used in this subpart are defined
in the act, in subpart A of this part, or in
this section as follows:
(a) "Asbestos" means actinolite, amo-
site, anthophyllite, chrysotile, crocidolite,
tremolite.
(b) "Asbestos material" means as-
bestos or any material containing as-
bestos.
(c) "Particulate asbestos material"
means finely divided particles of asbestos
material.
(d) "Asbestos tailings" means any
solid waste product of asbestos mining or
milling operations which contains as-
bestos.
(e) "Outside air" means the air out-
side buildings and structures.
(f) "Visible emissions" means any
emissions which are visually detectable
without the aid of instruments and which
contain particulate asbestos material.
(g) "Asbestos mill" means any facility
engaged In the conversion or any Inter-
mediate step In the conversion of asbestos
ore Into commercial asbestos. Outside
storage of asbestos materials Is not con-
sidered a part of such facility.2
(h) "Commercial asbestos" means any
variety of asbestos which is produced by
extracting asbestos from asbestos ore.2
(1) "Manufacturing" means the com-
bining of commercial asbestos, or In the
case of woven friction products the com-
bining of textiles containing commercial
asbestos, with any other material (s), in-
cluding commercial asbestos, and the
processing of this combination into a
product as specified in § 61.22(c).2
(j) "Demolition" means the wrecking
or taking out of any load-supporting
structural member and any related re-
moving or stripping of friable asbestos
materials.2-7
(k) "Friable asbestos material" means
any material that contains more than 1
percent asbestos by weight and that can
be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to
powder, when dry, by hand pressure.7
(1) "Control device asbestos waste"
means any asbestos-containing waste
material that is collected in a pollution
control device.7
-------
the exception of the information re-
quired by paragraphs (d)(2) (ill), (vi),
(vli), (viii), and (ix) of this section, and
shall state the measured or estimated
amount of friable asbestos materials
which is present. Techniques of esti-
mation shall be explained. V-49
(2) Written notice of intention to de-
molish or renovate shall be provided to
the Administrator by the owner or opera-
tor of the demolition or renovation oper-
ation. Such notice shall be postmarked
or delivered to the Administrator at least
10 days prior to commencement of demo-
lition, or as early as possible prior to
commencement of emergency demolition
subject to paragraph (d) (6) of this sec-
tion, and as early as possible prior to
commencement of renovation. Such no-
tice shall include the following informa-
tion:
(i) Name of owner or operator.
(ii) Address of owner or operator.
(iii) Description of the building,
structure, facility, or installation to be
demolished or renovated, including
the size, age, and prior use of the
structure, and the approximate
amount of friable asbestos materials
present.49
(iv) Address or location of the build-
ing, structure, facility, or installation.
(v) Scheduled starting and comple-
tion dates of demolition or renovation.
(vi) Nature of planned demolition or
renovation and method(s) to be em-
ployed.
(vii) Procedures to be employed to
meet the requirements of this paragraph
and paragraph (j) of this section.
(viii) The name and address or loca-
tion of the waste disposal site where the
friable asbestos waste will be deposited.
(ix) Name, title, and authority of the
State or local governmental representa-
tive who has ordered a demolition which
is subject to paragraph (d) (6) of this
section.
(3) (i) For purposes of determining
whether a planned renovating operation
constitutes a renovation within the
meaning of this paragraph, the amount
of friable asbestos material to be re-
moved or stripped shall be:
(A) For planned renovating opera-
tions involving individually non-sched-
uled operations, the additive amount of
friable asbestos material that can be pre-
dicted will be removed or stripped at a
source over the maximum period of time
for which a prediction can be made. The
period shall be not less than 30 days and
not longer than one year.
(B) For each planned renovating op-
eration not covered by paragraph (d) (3)
(i)(A), the total amount of friable as-
bestos material that can be predicted
will be removed or stripped at a source.
(ii) For purposes of determining
whether an emergency renovating op-
eration constitutes a renovation within
the meaning of this paragraph, the
amount of friable asbestos material to
be removed or stripped shall be the total
amount of friable asbestos material that
will be removed or stripped as a result
of the sudden, unexpected event that
necessitated the renovation.
(4) The following procedures shall be
used to prevent emissions of partlculate
asbestos material to outside air:
(i) Friable asbestos materials, used
on any pipe, duct, boiler, tank, reactor.
turbine, furnace, or structural
member, shall be removed from any
building, structure, facility or installa-
tion subject to this paragraph. Such
removal shall occur before wrecking or
dismantling of any portion of such
building, structure, facility, or installa-
tion that would break up the friable
asbestos materials and before wreck-
ing or dismantling of any other por-
tion of such building, structure, facili-
ty, or installation, that would preclude
access to such materials for subse-
quent removal. Removal of friable as-
bestos materials used on any pipe,
duct, or structural member which are
encased in concrete or other similar
structural material is not required
prior to demolition, but such materials
shall be adequately wetted whenever
exposed during demolition.49
(ii) Friable asbestos materials used
on pipes, ducts, boilers, tanks, reac-
tors, turbines, furnaces, or structural
members shall be adequately wetted
during stripping, except as provided in
paragraphs (d)(4)(iv), (d)(4)(vi), or
(dXvii) of this section.49
(iii) Pipes, ducts, boilers, tanks, reac-
tors, turbines, furnaces, or structural
members that are covered or coated
with friable asbestos materials may be
taken out of any building, structure,
facility, or installation subject to this
paragraph as units or in sections pro-
vided the friable asbestos materials ex-
posed during cutting or disjoining are
adequately wetted during the cutting
or disjoining operation. Such units
shall not be dropped or thrown to the
ground, but shall be carefully lowered
to ground level.49
(iv) The stripping of friable asbestos
materials used on any pipe, duct,
boiler, tank, reactor, turbine, furnace,
or structural member that has been
removed as a unit or in sections as pro-
vided in paragraph (d)(4)(iii) of this
section shall be performed in accord-
ance with paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this
section. Rather than comply with the
wetting requirement, a local exhaust
ventilation and collection system may
be used to prevent emissions to the'
outside air. Such local exhaust ventila-
tion systems shall be designed and op-
erated to capture the asbestos particu-
late matter produced by the stripping
of friable asbestos materials. There
shall be no visible emissions to the
outside air from such local exhaust
ventilation and collection systems
except as provided in paragraph (f) of
this section.49
(v> All friable asbestos materials that
have been removed or stripped shall be
adequately wetted to ensure that such
materials remain wet during all remain-
ing stages of demolition or renovation
and related handling operations. Such
materials shall not be dropped or thrown
to the ground or a lower floor. Such ma-
terials that have been removed or
stripped more than 50 feet above
ground level, except those materials re-
moved as units or in sections, shall be
transported to the ground via dust-tight
chutes or containers.
(vi) Except as specified below, the wet-
ting requirements of this paragraph are
suspended when the temperature at the
point of wetting is below 0°C (32°F).
When friable asbestos materials are not
wetted due to freezing temperatures, such
materials on pipes, ducts, boilers, tanks,
reactors, turbines, furnaces, or structural
members shall, to the maximum extent
possible, be removed as units or in sec-
tions prior to wrecking. In no case shall
the requirements of paragraphs (d) (4)
(iv) or (d) (4) (v) be suspended due to
freezing temperatures.
(vii) For renovation operations, local
exhaust ventilation and collection sys-
tems may be used, instead of wetting as
specified in paragraph (d) (4) (ii), to pre-
vent emissions of particulate asbestos
material to outside air when damage to
equipment resulting from the wetting
would be unavoidable. Upon request and
supply of adequate information, the Ad-
ministrator will determine whether dam-
age to equipment resulting from wetting
to comply with the provisions of this par-
agraph would be unavoidable. Such local
exhaust ventilation systems shall be de-
signed and operated to capture the asbes-
tos particulate matter produced by the
stripping and removal of friable asbestos
material. There shall be no visible emis-
sions to the outside air from such local
exhaust ventilation and collection sys-
tems, except as provided in paragraph
(f) of this section. 2-7
(5) Sources subject to this paragraph
are exempt from the requirements of
§1 61.05(a), 61.07, and 61.09.
(6) The demolition of a building, struc-
ture, facility, or installation, pursuant to
an order of an authorized representative
of a State or local governmental agency,
issued because that building is structur-
ally unsound and in danger of imminent
collapse is exempt from all but the fol-
lowing requirements of paragraph (d) of
this section:
(i) The notification requirements spec-
ified by paragraph (d) (2) of this section;
(ii) The requirements on stripping of
friable asbestos materials from previously
removed units or sections as specified in
paragraph (d) (4) (iv) of this section;
(iii) The wetting, as specified by para-
graph (d) (4) (v) of this section, of fri-
removed or stripped;
(iv) The portion of the structure being
demolished that contains friable asbes-
tos materials shall be adequately wetted
during the wrecking operation. 7
(e) Spraying. There shall be no visi-
ble emissions to the outside air from
the spray-on application of materials
containing more than 1 percent asbes-
tos, on a dry weight basis, .used on
equipment and machinery, except as
provided in paragraph (f) of this sec-
tion. Materials sprayed on buildings,
structures, structural members, pipes,
and conduits shall contain less than 1
percent asbestos on a dry weight basis!"
III-7
-------
(1) Sources subject to this paragraph
are exempt from the requirements of
§61.05(a), §61.07, and § 61.09.
(2) Any owner or operator who in-
tends to spray asbestos materials
which contain more than 1 percent as-
bestos on a dry weight basis on equip-
ment and machinery shall report such
intention to the Administrator at least
20 days prior to the commencement of
the spraying operation. Such report
•hall include the following Informa-
tion: 7-49
(i) Name of owner or operator.
(11) Address of owner or operator.
(ill) Location of spraying operation.
(iv) Procedures to be followed to meet
the requirements of this paragraph.
(3) The spray-on application of ma-
terials in which the asbestos fibers are
encapsulated with a bituminous or re-
•inous binder during spraying and
which are not friable after drying is
exempted from the requirements of
paragraphs (e) and (e)(2) of this sec-
tion.4'
(f) Rather than meet the no-visible-
emission requirements as specified by
paragraphs (a), (c), (d), (e), (h), (j),
and (k) of this section, an owner or op-
erator may elect to use the methods spec-
ified by § 61.23 to clean emissions con-
taining particulate asbestos material be-
fore such emissions escape to, or are
vented to. the outside air.
(g) Where the presence of uncomblned
water is the sole reason for failure to
meet the no-visible-emission require-
ment of paragraphs (a), (c), (d), (e),
(h), (J), or (k) of this section, such fail-
ure shall not be a violation of such emis-
sion requirements. 2,7
(h) Fabricating: There shall be no
visible emissions to the outside air, ex-
cept as provided in paragraph (f) of this
section, from any of the following op-
erations if they use commercial asbestos
or from any building or structure in
which such operations are conducted.
(1) The fabrication of cement building
products.
(2) The fabrication of friction prod-
ucts, except those operations that pri-
marily Install asbestos friction materials
on motor vehicles.
(3) The fabrication of cement or sili-
cate board for ventilation hoods; ovens;
electrical panels; laboratory furniture;
bulkheads, partitions and ceilings for
marine construction; and flow control
devices for the molten metal Industry.
(1) Insulating: Molded insulating ma-
terials which are friable and wet-applied
insulating materials which are friable
after drying, installed after the effective
date of these regulations, shall contain
no commercial asbestos. The provisions
of this paragraph do not apply to insu-
lating materials which are spray applied;
such materials are regulated under
t 81.22(6).
(j) Waste disposal for manufacturing,
fabricating, demolition, renovation and
spraying operations: The owner or op-
erator of any source covered under the
provisions of paragraphs (c), (d), (e),
or (h) of this section shall meet the fol-
lowing standards:
(1) There shall be no visible emissions
to the outside air, except as provided in
paragraph (j)(3) of this section, dur-
ing the collection; processing, Including
incineration; packaging; transporting;
or deposition of any asbestos-containing
waste material which is generated by
such source.
(2) All asbestos-containing waste ma-
terial shall be deposited at waste dis-
posal sites which are operated in accord-
ance with the provisions of § 61.25.
(3) Rather than meet the requirement
of paragraph (j) (1) of this section, an
owner or operator may elect to use
either of the disposal methods specified
under (j)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section,
or an alternative disposal method which
has received prior approval by the Ad-
ministrator:
(i) Treatment of asbestos-containing
waste material with water:
(A) Control device asbestos waste shall
be thoroughly mixed with water into a
slurry and other asbestos-containing
waste material shall be adequately
wetted. There shall be no visible emis-
sions to the outside air from the collec-
tion, mixing and wetting operations, ex-
cept as provided in paragraph (f) of this
section.
(B) After wetting, all asbestos-con-
taining waste material shall be sealed
into leak-tight containers while wet, and
such containers shall be deposited at
waste disposal sites which are operated
in accordance with the provisions of
§ 61.25.
(C) The containers specified under
paragraph (J) (3) (1) (B) of this section
shall be labeled with a warning label
that states;
CAUTION
Contains Asbestos
Avoid Opening or Breaking Container
Breathing Asbestos Is Hazardous
to Your Health
Alternatively, warning labels specified
by Occupational Safety and Health
Standards of the Department of Labor,
Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
istration (OSHA) under 29 CFR 1910.-
93a(g) (2) (11) may be used.
(11) Processing of asbestos-containing
waste material into non-friable forms:
(A) All asbestos-containing waste
material shall be formed Into non-friable
pellets or other shapes and deposited at
waste disposal sites which are operated
in accordance with the provisions of
{61.25.
(B) There shall be no visible emis-
sions to the outside air from the collec-
tion and processing of asbestos-
containing waste material, except as
specified In paragraph (f) of this section.
(4) For the purposes of this para-
graph (J), the term all asbestos-con-
taining waste material as applied to
demolition and renovation operations
covered by paragraph (d) of this sec-
tion includes only friable asbestos waste
and control device asbestos waste.
(k) Waste disposal for asbestos mills:
The owner or operator of any source
covered under the provisions of para-
graph (a) of this section shall meet the
following standard:
(1) There shall be no visible emis-
sions to the outside air, except as pro-
vided in paragraph (k) (3) of this section,
during the collection, processing, pack-
aging, transporting or deposition of
any asbestos-containing waste mate-
rial which is generated by such source.
(2) All asbestos-containing waste ma-
terial shall be deposited at waste
disposal sites which are operated in ac-
cordance with the provisions of § 61.25.
(3) Rather than meet the requirement
of paragraph (k) (1) of this section, an
owner or operator may elect to meet
the following requirements in para-
graphs (k)(3) (i) and (11), or use an
alternative disposal method which has
received prior approval by the Admin-
istrator :
(i) There shall be no visible emissions
to the outside air from the transfer of
control device asbestos waste to the
tailings conveyor, except as provided In
paragraph (f) of this section. Such waste
shall be subsequently processed either
as specified In paragraph (k) (3) (ii) of
this section or as specified in paragraph
(j)(3) of this section.
(ii) All asbestos-containing waste
material shall be adequately mixed, with
a wetting agent recommended by the
manufacturer of the agent to effectively
wet dust and tailings, prior to deposition
at a waste disposal site. Such agent shall
be used as recommended for the partic-
ular dust by the manufacturer of the
agent. There shall be no discharge of
visible emissions to the outside air from
the wetting operation except as specified
in paragraph (f) of this section. Wetting
may be suspended when the ambient
temperature at the waste disposal site la
less than —9.5°C (ca. 15°F). The ambient
air temperature shall be determined by
an appropriate measurement method
with an accuracy of ±1°C (±2°F) and
recorded at least at hourly Intervals dur-
ing the period that the operation of the
wetting system is suspended. Records ol
such temperature measurements shall be
retained at the source for a minimum of
two years and made available for Inspec-
tion by the Administrator.
(1) The owner of any inactive waste
disposal site, which was operated by
sources covered under 8 61.22 (a), (c) or
(h) and where asbestos-containing waste
material produced by such sources was
deposited, shall meet the following
standards:
(1) There shall be no visible emissions
to the outside air from an Inactive waste
disposal site subject to this paragraph,
except as provided in paragraph (1) (5)
of this section.
(2) Warning signs shall be displayed
at all entrances, and along the property
line of the site or along the perimeter of
the sections of the site where asbestos-
containing waste material was deposited,
at Intervals of 100 m (ca. 330 ft) or less,
except as specified in paragraph (1)(4)
III-8
-------
of this section. Signs shall be posted in
such a manner and location that a person
may easily read the legend. The warning
signs required by this paragraph shall
conform to the requirements of 20" x 14"
upright format signs specified in 29 CPR
1910.145(d) (4) and this paragraph. The
signs shall display the following legend
In the lower panel, with letter sizes and
styles of a visibility at least equal to those
specified in this paragraph.
LEGEND
ASBESTOS WASTE DISPOSAL SITE
Do Not Create Dust
Breathing Asbestos Is Hazardous
to Your Health
Notation
1" Sans Serif, Gothic or Block
%" Sans Serif, Gothic or Block
14 Point Gothic
Spacing between lines shall be at least
equal to the height of the upper of the
two lines.
(3) The perimeter of the site shall be
fenced in a manner adequate to deter
access by the general public, except as
specified in paragraph (1) (4) of this
section.
(4) Warning signs and fencing are not
required where the requirements of
paragraphs (1)(5) (i) or (li) of this sec-
tion are met, or where a natural barrier
adequately deters access by the general
public. Upon request and supply of ap-
propriate information, the Adminis-
trator will determine whether a fence or
a natural barrier adequately deters ac-
cess to the general public.
(5) Rather than meet the requirement
of paragraph (1) (1) of this section, an
owner may elect to meet the require-
ments of this paragraph or may use an
alternative control method for emissions
from Inactive waste disposal sites which
has received prior approval by the
Administrator.
(1) The asbestos-containing waste
material shall be covered with at least
15 centimeters (ca. 6 inches) of com-
pacted non-asbestos-containing mate-
rial, and a cover of vegetation shall be
grown and maintained on the area ade-
quate to prevent exposure of the asbes-
tos-containing waste material; or
(11) The asbestos-containing waste
material shall be covered with at least 60
centimeters (ca. 2 feet) of compacted
non-asbestos-containing material and
maintained to prevent exposure of the
asbestos-containing waste; or
(ill) For Inactive waste disposal sites
for asbestos tailings, a resinous or petro-
leum-based dust suppression agent which
effectively binds dust and controls wind
erosion shall be applied. Such agent shall
be used as recommended for the partic-
ular asbestos tailings by the dust sup-
pression agent manufacturer. Other
equally effective dust suppression agents
may be used upon prior approval by the
Administrator. For purposes of this para-
graph, waste crankcase oil Is not con-
sidered a dust suppression agent.7
§ 61.23 Air-cleaning.
If air-cleaning is elected, as permit-
ted by §§61.22(f) and 61.22(d) (4) (Iv),
the requirements of this section must be
met.7
(a) Fabric filter collection devices
must be used, except as noted In para-
graphs (b) and (c) of this section. Such
devices must be operated at a pressure
drop of no more than 4 Inches water gage,
as measured across the filter fabric. The
airflow permeability, as determined by
ASTM method D737-69, must not exceed
30 ft'/min/ft1 for woven fabrics or 36
ft'/mln/ft' for felted fabrics, except that
40 ft'/min/ft1 for woven and 45 ft*/
mln/fi' for felted fabrics Is allowed for
filtering air from asbestos ore dryers
Each square yard of felted fabric must
weigh at least 14 ounces and be at least
one-sixteenth Inch thick throughout.
Synthetic fabrics must not contain fill
yarn other than that which is spun.
(b) If the use of fabric filters creates
a fire or explosion hazard, the adminis-
trator may authorize the use of wet col-
lectors designed to operate with a unit
contacting energy of at least 40 Inches
water gage pressure.
(c) The administrator may authorize
the use of filtering equipment other than
that described in paragraphs (a) and (b)
of this section if the owner or operator
demonstrates to the satisfaction of the
administrator that the filtering of par-
ticulate asbestos material Is equivalent
to that of the described equipment.
(d) All air-cleaning equipment au-
thorized by this section must be properly
Installed, used, operated, and maintained.
Bypass devices may be used only during
upset or emergency conditions and then
only for so long as It takes to shut down
the operation generating the partlculate
asbestos material.
§ 61.24 Reporting.
The owner or operator of any existing
source to which this subpart is applicable
shall, within 90 days after the effective
date, provide the following Information
to the administrator:
(a) A description of the emission con-
trol equipment used for each process;
(b) If a fabric filter device Is used to
control emissions, the pressure drop
across the fabric filter in Inches water
gage.
(1) If the fabric filter device utilizes a
woven fabric, the airflow permeability
in ft'/mln/ft'; and, If the fabric is syn-
thetic, Indicate whether the fill yarn Is
spun or not spun.
(2) If the fabric filter device utilizes
a felted fabric, the density In oz/yd', the
minimum thickness In Inches, and the
airflow permeability in ft'/mln/ft*.
(c) For sources subject to §§61.22(J)
and61.22(k):
(1) A brief description of each process
that generates asbestos-containing waste
material.
(2) The average weight of asbestos-
containing waste material disposed of,
measured in kg/day.
(3) The emission control methods
used in all stages of waste disposal.
(4) The type of disposal site or incin-
eration site used for ultimate disposal,
the name of the site operator, and the
name and location of the disposal site.7
(d) For sources subject to 8 61.22(1):
(1) A brief description of the site.
(2) The method or methods used to
comply with the standard, or alternative
procedures to be used.7
(e) Such information shall accom-
pany the information required by § 61.10.
The Information described in this section
shall be reported using the format of
Appendix A of this part.
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act as amended (42
U.S.C. 7414))4°.47
§ 61.25 Waste disposal sites.
In order to be an acceptable site for
disposal of asbestos-containing waste
material under §61.22 (j) and (k), an
active waste disposal site shall meet the
requirements of this section.
(a) There shall be no visible emissions
to the outside air from any active waste
disposal site where asbestos-containing
waste material has been deposited, except
as provided in paragraph (e) of this
section.
(b) Warning signs shall be displayed
at all entrances, and along the property
line of the site or along the perimeter of
the sections of the site where asbestos-
containing waste material Is deposited,
at Intervals of 100 m (ca. 330 ft) or less
except as specified in paragraph (d) of
this section. Signs shall be posted in such
a manner and location that a person may
easily read the legend. The warning
signs required by this paragraph shall
conform to the requirements of 20" x 14"
upright format signs specified in 29 CFR
1910.145(d>(4) and this paragraph. The
signs shall display the following legend
in the lower panel, with letter sizes and
styles of a visibility at least equal to
those specified in this paragraph.
UOIND
AMIITOI WASTE DISPOSAL am
Do Not Create Dust
Breathing Aibeitos
i* Hazardoui to Tour Health
Notation
1" San* Serif, Gothic or Block
%" Sans Serif, Gothic or Block
14 Point Gothlr.
Spacing between lines shall be at least
equal to the height of the upper of the
two lines.
(c) The perimeter of the disposal site
shall be fenced in order to adequately
deter access to the general public except
as specified in paragraph (d) of this
section.
(d) Warning signs and fencing are
not required where the requirements of
paragraph (e)(l) of this section are
met, or where a natural barrier ade-
quately deters access to the general
public. Upon request and supply of ap-
propriate information, the Admlnlstra-
III-9
-------
tor will determine whether a fence or a
natural barrier adequately deters access
to the general public.
(e) Rather than meet the require-
ment of paragraph (a) of this section, an
owner or operator may elect to meet
the requirements of paragraph (e) (1) or
(e) (2) of this section, or may use an al-
ternative control method for emissions
from active waste disposal sites which
has received prior approval by the
Administrator.
(1) At the end of each operating day,
or at least once every 24-hour period
while the site is in continuous operation,
the asbestos-containing waste material
which was deposited at the site during
the operating day or previous 24-hour
period shall be covered with at least 15
centimeters (ca. 6 inches) of compacted
non-asbestos-containing material.
(2) At the end of each operating day,
or at least once every 24-hour period
while the disposal site is in continuous
operation, the asbestos-containing waste
material which was deposited at the site
during the operating day or previous 24-
hour period shall be covered with a res-
inous or petroleum-based dust suppres-
sion agent which effectively binds dust
and controls wind erosion. Such agent
shall be used as recommended for the
particular dust by the dust suppression
agent manufacturer. Other equally ef-
fective dust suppression agents may be
used upon prior approval by the Admin-
istrator. For purposes of this paragraph,
waste crankcase oil is not considered a
dust suppression agent.
111-10
38 FR 8826, 4/6/73 (1)
as amended
39 FR 15398, 5/3/74 (2)
40 FR 48299, 10/14/76 (7)
42 FR 12127, 3/2/77 (36)
42 FR 41424, 8/17/77 (40)
43 FR 8800, 3/3/78 (47)
43 FR 26372, 6/19/78 (49)
-------
Subpart C—National Emission Standard
for Beryllium
§ 61.30 Applicability.
The provisions of this subpart are ap-
plicable to the following stationary
sources:
(a) Extraction plans, ceramic plants,
foundries, incinerators, and propellant
plants which process beryllium ore, beryl-
lium, beryllium oxide, beryllium alloys,
or beryllium-containing waste.
(b) Machine shops which process
beryllium, beryllium oxides, or any alloy
when such alloy contains more than 5
percent beryllium by weight.
g 61.31 Definitions.
Terms used in this subpart are de-
fined in the act, in subpart A of this
part, or In this section as follows:
(a) "Beryllium" means the element
beryllium. Where weights or concentra-
tions are specified, such weights or con-
centrations apply to beryllium only,
excluding the weight or concentration of
any associated elements.
(b) "Extraction plant" means a fa-
cility chemically processing beryllium
ore to beryllium metal, alloy, or oxide,
or performing any of the intermediate
steps in these processes.
(c) "Beryllium ore" means any natu-
rally occurring material mined or
gathered for its beryllium content.
(d) "Machine shop" means a facility
performing cutting, grinding, turning,
honing, milling, deburring, lapping,
electrochemical machining, etching, or
other similar operations.
(e) "Ceramic plant" means a manu-
facturing plant producing ceramic items.
(f) "Foundry" means a facility en-
gaged in the melting or casting of
beryllium metal or alloy.
(g) "Beryllium-containing waste"
means material contaminated with
beryllium and/or beryllium compounds
used or generated during any process or
operation performed by a source subject
to this subpart.
. (h) "Incinerator" means any furnace
used in the process of burning waste for
the primary purpose of reducing the
volume of the waste by removing com-
bustible matter.
(i) "Propellant" means a fuel and oxl-
dizer physically or chemically combined
which undergoes combustion to provide
rocket propulsion.
(]) "Beryllium alloy" means any metal
to which beryllium has been added in
order to increase its beryllium content
and which contains more than 0.1 per-
cent beryllium by weight.
(k) "Propellant plant" means any
facility engaged in the mixing, casting,
or machining of propellant.
§ 61.32 Emission standard.
(a) Emissions to the atmosphere from
stationary sources subject to the provi-
sions of this subpart shall not exceed 10
grams of beryllium over a 24-hour period,
except as provided in paragraph (b) of
this section.
(b) Bather than meet the require-
ment of paragraph (a) of this section,
an owner or operator may request ap-
proval from the Administrator to meet
an ambient concentration limit on beryl-
lium in the vicinity of the stationary
Bource of 0.01 /jg/m"t averaged over a
30-day period.
(1) Approval of such requests may be
granted by the Administrator provided
that:
(i) At least 3 years of data is avail-
able which in the judgment of the Ad-
ministrator demonstrates that the fu-
ture ambient concentrations of beryllium
in the vicinity of the stationary source
will not exceed 0.01 ng/m*, averaged over
a 30-day period. Such 3-year period shall
be the 3 years ending 30 days before the
effective date of this standard.
(ii) The owner or operator requests
such approval in writing within 30 days
after the effective date of this standard.
(iii) The owner or operator submits a
report to the Administrator within 45
days after the effective date of this
standard which report includes the fol-
lowing information:
(a) Description of sampling method
including the method and frequency of
calibration.
(b) Method of sample analysis.
(c) Averaging technique for determin-
ing 30-day average concentrations.
(d) Number, Identity, and location
(address, coordinates, or distance and
heading from plant) of sampling sites.
(e) Ground elevations and height
above ground of sampling Inlets.
(/) Plant and sampling area plots
showing emission points and sampling
sites. Topographic features significantly
affecting dispersion Including plant
building heights and locations shall be
Included.
(0) Information necessary for esti-
mating dispersion Including stack height.
Inside diameter, exit gas temperature,
exit velocity or flow rate, and beryllium
concentration.
(ft) A description of data and proce-
dures (methods or models) used to de-
sign the air sampling network (i.e., num-
ber and location of sampling sites).
(i) Air sampling data indicating beryl-
lium concentrations In the vicinity of the
stationary source for the 3-year period
specified In paragraph (b)(l) of this
section. This data shal be presented
chronologically and include the beryl-
lium concentration and location of each
Individual sample taken by the network
and the corresponding 30-day average
beryllium concentrations.
(2) Within 60 days after receiving
such report, the Administrator will notify
the owner or operator In writing whether
approval is granted or denied. Prior to
denying approval to comply with the pro-
visions of paragraph (b) of this section,
the Administrator will consult with
representatives of the statutory source
for which the demonstration report
submitted.
(c) The burning of beryllium and/or
beryllium-containing waste, except pro-
pellants, Is prohibited except in incinera-
tors, emissions from which must comply
with the standard.
§ 61.33 Stack sampling.
(a) Unless a waiver of emission testing
Is obtained under § 61.13, each owner or
operator required to comply with
} 61.32 (a) shall test emissions from hla
source,
(1) Within 90 days of the effective
date in the case of an existing source or
a new source which has an Initial startup
date preceding the effective date; or
(2) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source which did not havt
an Initial startup date preceding the ef-
fective date.
(b) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(c) Samples shall be taken over such a
period or periods as are necessary to ac-
curately determine the maximum emis-
sions which will occur in any 24-hour
period. Where emissions depend upon the
relative frequency of operation of differ-
ent types of processes, operating hours,
operating capacities, or other factors,
the calculation of maximum 24-hour-
perlod emissions will be based on that
combination of factors which is likely to
occur during the subject period and
which result In the maximum emissions.
No changes in the operation shall be
made, which would potentially Increase
emissions above that determined by the
most recent source test, until a new emis-
sion level has been estimated by calcula-
tion and the results reported to the Ad-
ministrator.
(d) All samples shall be analyzed and
beryllium emissions shall be determined
within 30 days after the source test. All
determinations shall be reported to the
Administrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the close of the next busi-
ness day following such determination.
(e) Records of emission test results
and other data needed to determine total
emissions shall be retained at the source
and made available, for Inspection by the
Administrator, for a minimum of a years.
(See. 114 of the Clean Air Act u amended
<4JUJB.C.7414».«Cw
§61.84 Air sampling.
(a) Stationary sources subject to
I 61.32 (b) shall locate air sampling sites
in accordance with a plan approved by
the Administrator. Such sites shall be
located in such a manner as is calculated
to detect maximum concentrations of
beryllium in the ambient air.
(b) All monitoring sites shall b* op-
erated continuously except for a reaaon-
III-ll
-------
able time allowance for Instrument main-
tenance and calibration, for changing
filters, or for replacement of equipment
needing major repair.
(c) Filters shall be analyzed and con-
centrations calculated within 30 day*
after filters are collected. Records of
concentrations at all sampling sites and
other data needed to determine such con-
centrations shall be retained at the source
and made available, for Inspection by the
Administrator, for a minimum of 2 yean.
(d) Concentrations measured at all
sampling sites shall be reported to the
Administrator every 30 days by a regis-
tered letter.
(e) The Administrator may at any time
require changes In, or expansion of, the
sampling network.
(Bee. 114 of the Clean Air Act M
<«0,a.C.74U».«W/
38 FR 8826, 4/6/73 (1)
as amended
42 FR 41424, 8/17/77 (40)
43 FR 8800, 3/3/78 (47)
IIN2
-------
Subpart D—National Emission Standard
for Beryllium Rocket Motor Firing
16L.40 Applicability.
The provisions of this subpart are ap-
plicable to rocket motor test sites.
161.41 Definition*.
Terms used in this subpart are defined
in the Act, in Subpart A of this part, or
In this section as follows:'
-------
Subpwt E—National Emimion Standard
for Mercury
(61.50 Applicability.
The provisions of this subpart are ap-
plicable to those stationary sources which
process mercury ore to recover mercury,
use mercury chlor-alkall cells to produce
chlorine gas and alkali metal hydroxide,
and incinerate or dry wastewater treat-
ment plant sludge.
161.51 Definition!.
Terms used in this subpart are defined
In the act, in subpart A of this part, or in
this section as follows:
(a) "Mercury" means the element mer-
cury, excluding any associated elements,
and includes mercury in particulates, va-
pors, aerosols, and compounds.
(b) "Mercury ore" means a mineral
mined specifically for its mercury con-
tent.
(c) "Mercury ore processing facility"
means a facility processing mercury ore
to obtain mercury.
"End box" means a container(s)
located on one or both ends of a mercury
chlor-alkali electrolyzer which serves
as A connection between the electrolyzer
and denuder for rich and stripped
amalgam.
"End box ventilation system"
menus a ventilation system which col-
lects mercury emissions from the end-
boxes, the mercury pump sumps, and
their water colection systems.
(k) "Cell room" means a structure(s)
housing one or more mercury electro-
lytic chlor-alkali cells.
(1) "Sludge" means sludge produced by
a treatment plant that processes munici-
pal or industrial waste waters. '
(m.) "Sludge dryer" means a device
used to reduce the moisture content of
sludge by heating to temperatures above
65'C (ca. 1£0°F) directly with combus-
tion gases.'
§ 61.52 Emission standard.
(a) Emissions to the atmosphere from
mercury ore processing facilities and
mercury cell chlor-alkali plants shall not
exceed 2300 grams of mercury per 24-
hour period.
(b) Emissions to the atmosphere from
sludge incineration plants, sludge drying
plants, or a combination of these tlwt
process wastewater treatment plant
sludges shall not exceed 3200 grams of
mercury per 24-hour period.
§61.53 Stack sampling.
(a) Mercury ore processing facility.
(1) Unless a waiver of emission testing
is obtained under § 61.13, each owner
or operator processing mercury ore shall
test emissions from his source,
(i) Within 90 days of the efitective
date in the case of an existing source or
a new source which has an initial start-
up date preceding the effective date; or
(ii) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source which did not have
an initial startup date preceding the ef-
fective date.
(2) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(3) Samples shall be taken over such
a period or periods as are necessary tc
accurately determine the maximum
emissions which will occur in a 24-hour
period. No changes in the operation shall
be made, which would potentially in-
crease emissions above that determined
by the most recent source test, until the
new emission level has been estimated by
calculation and the results reported to
the Administrator.
(4) All samples shall be analyzed, and
mercury emissions shall be determined
within 30 days after the source test. Each
determination will be reported to the Ad-
ministrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the close of the next busi-
ness day following such determination.
(5) Records of emission test results
and other data needed to determine total
emissions shall be retained at the source
and made available,.for inspection by the
Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(b) Mercury chlor-alkall plant—hy-
drogen and end-box ventilation gas
streams.
(1) Unless a waiver of emission test-
ing is obtained under § 61.13, each owner
or operator employing mercury chlor-
alkali cell(s) shall test emissions from
his source,
(i) Within 90 days of the effective
date in the case of an existing source or
a new source which has an initial startup
date preceding the effective date; or
(ii) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source which did not have
an initial startup date preceding the ef-
fective date.
(2) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(3) Samples shall be taken over such
a period or periods as are necessary to
accurately determine the maximum emis-
sions which will occur in a 24-hour
period. No changes in the operation shall
be made, which would potentially in-
crease emissions above that determined
by the most recent'source test, until the
new emission has been estimated by cal-
culation and the results reported to the
Administrator.
(4) All samples shall be analyzed and
mercury emisions shall be determined
within 30 days after the source test. All
the determinations will be reported to
the Administrator by a registered letter
dispatched before the close of the next
business day following-such determina-
tion.
(5) Kecords of emission test results
and other data needed to determine total
emissions shall be retained at the source
and made available, for inspection by
the Administrator, for a minimum of
2 years.
(c) Mercury chlor-alkali plants—
cell room ventilation system.
(1) Stationary sources using mercury
chlor-alkali cells may test cell room
emissions in accordance with paragraph
(c) (2) of this section or demonstrate
compliance with paragraph (c) (4) of this
section and assume ventilation emissions
of 1,300 gms/day of mercury.
(2) Unless a waiver of emission test-
ing is obtained under § 61.13, each owner
or operator shall pass all cell room air
hi forced gas streams through stacks
suitable for testing,
(i) Within 90 days of the effective date
in the case of an existing source or a new
source which has an initial startup date
preceding the effective date; or
(ii) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source which did not have
an initial startup date preceding the
effective date.
(3) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test, .so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(4) An owner or operator may carry
out approved design, maintenance, and
housekeeping practices. A list of ap-
proved design, maintenance, and house-
keeping practices may be obtained from
the Administrator.
(d) Sludge incineration and drying
plants.
(1) Unless a waiver of emission testing
is obtained under | 61.13, each owner or
operator of a source subject to the stand-
ard in § 61.52(b) shall test emissions from
that source. Such tests shall be conducted
in accordance with the procedures e.ct
forth either in paragraph (d) of this
section or in § 61.54.
(2) Method 101 in Appendix B to this
part shall be used to test emissions as
follows:
(i) The test shall be performed wilhm
90 days of the effective dale of tluve
regulations in the case of an existing
source or a new source which has an
initial startup date preceding the effec-
tive date.
(ii) The test shall be performed within
90 days of startup in the case of a new
source which did not have an initial
startup date preceding the effective date.
I I I -1 4
-------
(3) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test. 7
(4) Samples shall be taken over such
a period or periods as are necessary to
determine accurately the maximum
emissions which will occur in a 24-hour
period. No changes shall be made in the
operation which would potentially in-
crease emissions above the level deter-
mined by the most recent stack test, un-
til the new emission level has been esti-
mated by calculation and the results re-
ported to the Administrator.7
(5) All samples shall be analyzed, and
mercury emissions shall be determined
within 30 days after the stack test. Each
determination shall be reported to the
Administrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the close of the next busi-
ness day following such determination:
(6) Records of emission test results
and other data needed to determine total
emissions shall be retained at the source
and shall be made available, for inspec-
tion by the Administrator, for a mini-
mum of 2 years.7
(Sec. 114 of the
(42 U.S.C. 7414)).
Air Act u amended
§ 61.54 Sludge sampling.7
(a) As an alternative means for
Demonstrating compliance with 5 61.52
b), an owner or operator may use
Method 105 of Appendix B and the proce-
dures specified in this section.
(1) A sludge test shall be conducted
within 90 days of the effective date of
these regulations in the case of an exist-
ing source or a new source which has an
Initial startup date preceding the effec-
tive date; or
(2) A sludge test shall be conducted
within 90 days of startup in the case of a
new source which did not have an Initial
startup date preceding the effective date.
(b) The Administrator shall be notified
at least 30 days prior to a sludge sampling
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test.
tc) Sludge shall be sampled according
to paragraph (c)(l) of this section,
sludge charging rate for the plant shall
be determined according to paragraph
(c) (2) of this section, and the sludge
analysis shall be performed according to
paragraph (c) (3) of this section.
(1) The sludge shall be sampled after
dewatering and before Incineration or
drying, at a location that provides a
representative sample of the sludge that
is charged to the incinerator or dryer.
Eight consecutive grab samples shall be
obtained at intervals of between 45 and
60 minutes and thoroughly mixed into
one sample. Each of the eight grab sam-
ples shall have a volume of at least 200
ml but not more than 400 ml. A total of
hree composite samples shall be. ob-
dined within an operating period of 24
hours. When the 24-hour operating pe-
riod Is not continuous, the total sam-
pling period shall not exceed 72 hours
after the first grab sample Is obtained.
Samples shall not be exposed to any con-
dition that may result in mercury con-
tamination or loss.
(2) The maximum - 24-hour period
sludge Incineration or drying rate shall
be determined by use of a flow rate meas-
urement device that can measure the
mass rate of sludge charged to the in-
cinerator or dryer with an accuracy of
±5 percent over its operating range.
Other methods of measuring sludge mass
charging rates may be used If they have
received prior approval by the Adminis-
trator.
(3) The handling, preparation, and
analysis of sludge samples shall be ac-
complished according to Method 105 in
Appendix B of this part.
(d) The mercury emissions shall be
determined by use of the following
equation:
Euf=l X 10-' cQ
where
Etf»=Mer
-------
Subpart F—National Emission Standard
for Vinyl Chloride «
§ 61.60 Applicability.
(a) This subpart applies to plants
which produce:
(1) Ethylene dichloride by reaction of
oxygen and hydrogen chloride with
ethylene,
(2) Vinyl chloride by any process,
and/or
(3) One or more polymers containing
any fraction of polymerized vinyl chlo-
ride,
(b) This subpart does not apply to
equipment used in research and develop-
ment if the reactor used to polymerize
the vinyl chloride processed in the equip-
ment has a capacity of no more than
0,19m" (50gal).
ic) Sections of this subpart other than
88 61.61; 61.64 (a)(l), (b), (c>, and (d);
61.67; 61.68; 61.69; 61.70; and 61.71 do
not apply to equipment used in research
and development if the reactor used to
polymerize the vinyl chloride processed
in the equipment has a capacity of
greater than 0.19 m" (50 gal) and no
more than 4.07 m" (1100 gal) ,38
§61.61 Definitions.
Terms used in this subpart are denned
in the Act, in Subpart A of this part, or
in this section as follows:
(a) "Ethylene dichloride plant" in-
cludes any plant which produces ethyl-
ene dichloride by reaction of oxygen and
hydrogen chloride with ethylene.
(b) "Vinyl chloride plant" includes
any plant which produces vinyl chloride
by any process.
(c) "Polyvinyl chloride plant" includes
any plant where vinyl chloride alone or
in combination with other materials is
polymerized.
(d) "Slip gauge" means a gauge which
has a probe that moves through the gas/
liquid interface in a storage or transfer
vessel and indicates the level of vinyl
chloride in the vessel by the physical
state of the material the gauge dis-
charges.
(e> "Type of resin" means the broad
classification of resin referring to the
basic manufacturing process for produc-
ing that resin, including, but not limited
to, the suspension, dispersion, latex, bulk,
and solution processes.
(f) "Grade of resin" means the sub-
division of resin classification which de-
scribes it as a unique resin, i.e., the most
exact description of a resin with no fur-
ther subdivision.
(g) ''Dispersion resin" means a resin
manufactured in such away as to form
fluid dispersions when dispersed in a
plasticizer or plasticizer/diluent mix-
tures,
(h) "Latex resin" means a resin which
is produced by a polymerization process
which initiates from free radical catalyst
sites and is sold undried.
(i) "Bulk resin' 'means a resin which
is produced by a polymerization process
in which no water is used.
(j) "Inprocess wastewater" means any
water which, during manufacturing or
processing, comes into direct contact
with vinyl chloride or polyvinyl chloride
or results from the production or use of
any raw material, intermediate product,
finished product, by-product, or waste
product containing vinyl chloride or
polyvinyl chloride but which has not
been discharged to a wastewater treat-
ment process or discharged untreated as
wastewater.
(k) "Wastewater treatment process"
includes any process which modifies
characteristics such as BOD, COD, TSS,
and pH, usually for the purpose of meet-
ing effluent guidelines and standards; it
does not include any process the purpose
of which is to remove vinyl chloride from
water to meet requirements of this
subpart.
(1) "In vinyl chloride service" means
that a piece of equipment contains or
contacts either a liquid that is at least
10 percent by weight vinyl chloride or a
gas that is at least 10 percent by volume
vinyl chloride.
(m) "Standard operating procedure"
means a formal written procedure offi-
cially adopted by the plant owner or
operator and available on a routine basis
to those persons responsible for carrying
out the procedure.
(n) "Bun" means the net period of
time during which an emission sample is
collected.
(o) "Ethylene dichloride purification"
includes any part of the process of ethyl-
ene dichloride production which follows
ethylene dichloride formation and in
which finished ethylene dichloride is
produced.
(p) "Vinyl chloride purification" in-
cludes any part of the process of vinyl
chloride production which follows vinyl
chloride formation and in which finished
vinyl chloride is produced.
(q) "Reactor" includes any vessel in
which vinyl chloride is partially or totally
polymerized into polyvinyl chloride.
(r) "Reactor opening loss" means the
emissions of vinyl chloride occurring
when a reactor is vented to the atmos-
phere for any purpose other than an
emergency relief discharge as defined in
§61.65(a).
(si "Stripper" includes any vessel in
which residual vinyl chloride is removed
from polyvinyl chloride resin, except
bulk resin, in the slurry form by the use
of heat and/or vacuum. In the case of
bulk resin, stripper includes any vessel
which is used to remove residual vinyl
chloride from polyvtnyl chloride resin
immediately following the polymeriza-
tion step in the plant process flow.
(t) "Standard temperature" means a
temperature of 20° C (69° P).38
(u) "Standard pressure" means a
pressure of 760 mm of Hg (29.92 in. of
Hg) .3«
§ 61.62 Emission standard for ethylene
dichloride plants.38
(a) Ethylene dichloride purification:
The concentration of vinyl chloride in
all exhaust gases discharged to the at-
mosphere from any equipment used In
ethylene dichloride purification is not
to exceed 10 ppm, except as provided in
§61.6,5(a). This requirement does not
apply to equipment that has been opened,
is out of operation, and met the require-
ment in |61.65(b) (6)(i) before being
opened.
(b) Oxychlorination reactor: Except
as provided in §61.65(a), emissions of
vinyl chloride to the atmosphere from
each oxychlorination reactor are not to
exceed 0.2 g/kg (0.0002 Ib/lb) of the 100
percent ethylene dichloride product from
the oxychlorination process.
§ 61.63 Emission standard for vinyl
chloride plants.
An owner or operator of a vinyl chlo-
ride plant shall comply with the require-
ments of this section and 8 61,65.
(a) Vinyl chloride formation and puri-
fication: The concentration of vinyl
chloride in all exhaust gases discharged
to the atmosphere from any equipment
used in vinyl chloride formation and/or
purification is not to exceed 10 ppm, ex-
cept as provided in § 61.65(a). This re-
quirement does not apply to equipment
that has been opened, is out of operation,
and met the requirement in § 61.65(b)
(6) (i) before being opened.
§ 61.64 Emission standard for polyvinyl
chloride plants.
An owner or operator of a polyvinyl
chloride plant shall comply with the re-
quirements of this section and 9 61.65.
(a) Reactor. The following require-
ments apply to reactors;
(1» The concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride in all exhaust gases discharged to
the atmosphere from each reactor is not
to exceed 10 ppm, except as provided in
paragraph (a) (2) of this section and
§61.65(a).
(2) The reactor opening loss from each
reactor is not to exceed 0.02 g vinyl
chloride/kg (0.00002 Ib vinyl chloride/
Ib) of polyvinyl chloride product, with
the product determined on a dry solids
basis. This requirement applies to any
vessel which is used as a reactor or as
both a reactor and a stripper. In the
bulk process, the product means the
gross product of prepolymerization and
postpolymerization.
(3) Manual vent valve discharge: Ex-
cept for an emergency manual vent valve
discharge, there is to be no discharge to
the atmosphere from any manual vent
valve on a polyvinyl chloride reactor in
vinyl chloride service. An emergency
manual vent valve discharge means a
discharge to the atmosphere which could
not have been avoided by taking meas-
ures to prevent the discharge. Within 10
111-16
-------
days of any discharge to the atmosphere
from any manual vent valve, the owner
or operator of the source from which the
discharge occurs shall submit to the Ad-
ministrator a report in writing contain-
ing information on the source, nature
and cause of the discharge, the date and
time of the discharge, the approximate
total vinyl chloride loss during the dis-
charge, the method used for determining
the vinyl chloride loss, the action that
was taken to prevent the discharge, and
measures adopted to prevent future dis-
charges.
(b) Stripper. The concentration of
vinyl chloride in all exhaust gases dis-
charged to the atmosphere from each
stripper is not to exceed 10 ppm, except
as provided in §61.65(a). This require-
ment does not apply to equipment that
has been opened, is out of operation, and
met the requirement in § 61.65(b) (6) (1)
before being opened.
(c) Mixing, weighing, and holding
containers. The concentration of vinyl
chloride in all exhaust gases discharged
to the atmosphere from each mixing,
weighing, or holding container in vinyl
chloride service which precedes the
stripper (or the reactor if the plant has
no stripper) in the plant process flow is
not to exceed 10 ppm, except as provided
in § 61.65(a). This requirement does not
apply to equipment that has been
opened, is out of operation, and met the
requirement in § 61.65(b) (6) (i) before
being opened.
(d) Monomer recovery system. The
concentration of vinyl chloride in all ex-
haust gases discharged to the atmos-
phere from each monomer recovery sys-
tem is not to exceed 10 ppm, except as
provided in 8 61.65(a). This requirement
does not apply to equipment that has
been opened, is out of operation, and met
the requirement in 8 61.65(b) (6) (i) be-
fore being opened.
(e) Sources following the stripper(s).
The following requirements apply to
emissions of vinyl chloride to the at-
mosphere from the combination of all
sources following the stripper(s) [or the
reactor(s) if the plant has no strip-
per (s)] in the plant process flow in-
cluding but not limited to, centrifuges,
concentrators, blend tanks, filters, dry-
ers, conveyor air discharges, baggers,
storage containers, and inprocess waste-
water:
(1) In poly vinyl chloride plants using
stripping technology to control vinyl
chloride emissions, the weighted average
residual vinyl chloride concentration in
all grades of polyvinyl chloride resin
processed through the stripping opera-
tion on each calendar day, measured
immediately after the stripping opera-
tion is completed, may not exceed:
(i) 2000 ppm for polyvinyl chloride
dispersion resins, excluding latex resins;
(ii) 400 ppm for all other poly vinyl
chloride resins, including latex resins,
averaged separately for each type of res-
in; or
(2) In polyvinyl chloride plants con-
trolling vinyl chloride emissions with
technology other than stripping or in
addition to stripping, emissions of vinyl
chloride to the atmosphere may not
exceed:
(1)2 g/kg (0.002 Ib/lb) product from
the stripper(s) for reactor(s) if the
plant has no stripper(s) 1 for dispersion
polyvinyl chloride resins, excluding latex
resins, with the product determined on a
dry solids basis;
(ii) 0.4 g/kg (0.0004 Ib/lb) product
from the strippers for reactor(s) if the
plant has no stripper(s)! for all other
polyvinyl chloride resins, including latex
resins, with the product determined on
a dry solids basis.
§ 61.65 Emission standard for olhylcne
dichloride, vinyl chloride iind poly-
vinyl chloride plants.
An owner or operator of an ethylene
dichloride, vinyl chloride, and/or poly-
vinyl chloride plant shall comply with
the requirements of this section.
(a) Relief valve discharge. Except for
an emergency relief discharge, there is
to be no discharge to the atmosphere
from any relief valve on any equipment
in vinyl chloride service. An emergency
relief discharge means a discharge which
could not have been avoided by taking
measures to prevent the discharge. With-
in 10 days of any relief valve discharge,
the owner or operator of the source from
which the relief valve discharge occurs
shall submit to the Administrator a re-
port in writing containing information
on the source, nature and cause of the
discharge, the date and time of the dis-
charge, the approximate total vinyl chlo-
ride loss during the discharge, the meth-
od used for determining the vinyl chlo-
ride loss, the action that was taken to
prevent the discharge, and measures
adopted to prevent future discharges.
(b) Fugitive emission sources. (1)
Loading and unloading lines: Vinyl
chloride emissions from loading and un-
loading lines in vinyl chloride service
which are opened to the atmosphere af-
ter each loading or unloading operation
are to be minimized as follows:38
(i) After each loading or unloading
operation and before opening a loading
or unloading line to the atmosphere, the
quantity of vinyl chloride in all parts of
each loading or unloading line that are
to be opened to the atmosphere is to be
reduced so that the parts combined con-
tain no greater than 0.0038 m1 (0.13 ft')
of vinyl chloride, at standard tempera-
ture and pressure; and
(ii) Any vinyl chloride removed from
a loading or unloading line in accord-
ance with paragraph (b)(l)(i) of this
section is to be ducted through a control
system from which the concentration of
vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does
not exceed 10 ppm, or equivalent as pro-
vided in S 61.66.
(2) Slip gauges. During loading or un-
loading operations, the vinyl chloride
emissions from each slip gauge in vinyl
chloride service are to be minimized by
ducting any vinyl chloride discharged
from the slip gauge through a control
system from which the concentration of
vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does
not exceed 10 ppm, or equivalent as pro-
vided in § 61.66.
(3) Leakage from pump, compressor,
and agitator seals:
(i) Rotating pumps. Vinyl chloride
emissions from seals on all rotating
pumps in vinyl chloride service are to be
minimized by installing sealless pumps,
pumps with double mechanical seals, or
equivalent as provided in 8 61.66. If
double mechanical seals are used, vinyl
chloride emissions from the seals are to
be minimized by maintaining the pres-
sure between the two seals so that any
leak that occurs is into the pump; by
ducting any vinyl chloride between the
two seals through a control system from
which the concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride in the exhaust gases does not ex-
ceed 10 ppm; or equivalent as provided
inS61.66.
(ii) Reciprocating pumps. Vinyl chlo-
ride emissions from seals on all recipro-
cating pumps in vinyl chloride service
are to be minimized by installing double
outboard seals, or equivalent as provided
in a 61.66. If double outboard seals are
used, vinyl chloride emissions from the
seals are to be minimized by maintaining
the pressure between the two seals so
that any leak that occurs is into the
pump; by ducting any vinyl chloride be-
tween the two seals through a control
system from which the concentration of
vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does
not exceed 10 ppm; or equivalent as
provided in § 61.68.
(Hi) Rotating compressor. Vinyl
chloride emissions from seals on all ro-
tating compressors in vinyl chloride
service are to be minimized by installing
compressors with double mechanical
seals, or equivalent as provided in 8 61.66.
If double mechanical seals are used, vinyl
chloride emissions from the seals are to
be minimized by maintaining the pres-
sure between the two seals so that any
leak that occurs is into the compressor;
by ducting any vinyl chloride between
the two seals through a control system
from which the concentration of vinyl
chloride in the exhaust gases does not
exceed 10 ppm; or equivalent as provided
in I 61.66.
(iv) Reciprocating compressors. Vinyl
chloride emissions from seals on all re-
ciprocating compressors in vinyl chloride
service are to be minimized by installing
double outboard seals, or equivalent as
provided in § 61.66. If double outboard
seals are used, vinyl chloride emissions
from the seals are to be minimized by
maintaining the pressure between the
two seals so that any leak that occurs is
into the compressor; by ducting any
vinyl chloride between the two seals
through a control system from which the
concentration of vinyl chloride in the
exhaust gases does not exceed 10 ppm;
or equivalent as provided in § 61.68.
(v) Agitator. Vinyl chloride emissions
from seals on all agitators in vinyl chlo-
ride service are to be minimized by in-
111 -1 7
-------
stalling agitators with double mechani-
cal seals, or equivalent as provided in
§ 61.66. If double mechanical seals are
used, vinyl chloride emissions from the
seals are to be minimized by maintaining
the pressure between the two seals so
that any leak that occurs is into the agi-
tated vessel; by ducting any vinyl chlo-
ride between the two seals through a
control system from which the concen-
tration of vinyl chloride in the exhaust
gases does not exceed 10 ppm; or equiva-
lent as provided in § 61.66.
(4) Leakage from relief valves. Vinyl
chloride emissions due to leakage from
each relief valve on equipment in vinyl
chloride service are to be minimized by
installing a rupture disk between the
equipment and the relief valve, by con-
necting the relief valve discharge to a
process line or recovery system, or equiv-
alent as provided in § 61.66.
(5) Manual venting of gases. Except
as provided in § 61.64(a) (3), all gases
which are manually vented from equip-
ment in vinyl chloride service are to be
ducted through a control system from
which the concentration of vinyl chloride
in the exhaust gases does not exceed 10
ppm; or equivalent as provided in | 61.66.
(6) Opening of equipment. Vinyl
chloride emissions from opening of
equipment (including loading or unload-
ing lines that are not opened to the at-
mosphere after each loading or unload-
ing operation) are to be minimized as
follows:
(i) Before opening any equipment for
any reason, the quantity of vinyl chlo-
ride is to be reduced so that the equip-
ment contains no more than 2.0 percent
by volume vinyl chloride or 0.0950 m3 (25
gal) of vinyl chloride, whichever is
larger, at standard temperature and
pressure; and
(ii) Any vinyl chloride removed from
the equipment in accordance with para-
graph (b) (6) (i) of this section is to be
ducted through a control system from
which the concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride in the exhaust gases does not exceed
10 ppm, or equivalent as provided in
§ 61.66.
(7) Samples. Unused portions of sam-
ples containing at least 10 percent by
weight vinyl chloride are to be returned
to the process, and sampling techniques
are to be such that sample containers in
vinyl chloride service are purged into a
closed process system.
(8) Leak detection and elimination.
Vinyl chloride emissions due to leaks
from equipment in vinyl chloride service
are to be minimized by instituting and
implementing a formal leak detection
and elimination program. The owner or
operator shall submit a description of
the program to the Administrator for
approval. The program is to be sub-
mitted within 45 days of the effective
date of these regulations, unless a waiver
of compliance is granted under § 61.11.
If a waiver of compliance is granted, the
program is to be submitted on a date
scheduled by the Administrator. Ap-
proval of a program will be granted by
the Administrator provided he finds:
(i) It includes a reliable and accurate
vinyl chloride monitoring system for de-
tection of major leaks and identification
of the general area of the plant where a
leak is located. A vinyl chloride monitor-
ing system means a device which obtains
air samples from one or more points on
a continuous sequential basis and ana-
lyzes the samples with gas chromatog-
raphy or, if the owner or operator as-
sumes that all hydrocarbons measured
are vinyl chloride, with infrared spectro-
photometry, flame ion detection, or an
equivalent or alternative method.
(ii) It includes a reliable and accurate
portable hydrocarbon detector to be used
routinely to find small leaks and to pin-
point the major leaks indicated by the
vinyl chloride monitoring system. A
portable hydrocarbon detector means a
device which measures hydrocarbons
with a sensitivity of at least 10 ppm
and is of such design and size that it can
be used to measure emissions from local-
ized points.
(iii) It provides for an acceptable cali-
bration and maintenance schedule for
the vinyl chloride monitoring system and
portable hydrocarbon detector. For the
vinyl chloride monitoring system, a daily
span check is to be conducted with a
concentration of vinyl chloride equal to
the concentration defined as a leak ac-
cording to paragraph (b) (8) (vi) of this
section. The calibration is to be done
with either:
(A) A calibration gas mixture pre-
pared from the gases specified in sections
5.2.1 and 5.2.2 of Test Method 106 and
in accordance with section 7.1 of Test
Method 106, or 38
(B) A calibration gas cylinder stand-
ard containing the appropriate concen-
tration of vinyl chloride. The gas com-
position of the calibration gas cylinder
standard is to have been certified by the
manufacturer. The manufacturer must
have recommended a maximum shelf life
for each cylinder so that the concentra-
tion does not change greater than ±5
percent from the certified value. The date
of gas cylinder preparation, certified
vinyl chloride concentration and recom-
mended maximum shelf life must have
been affixed to the cylinder before ship-
ment from the manufacturer to the
buyer. If a gas chromatcgraph is used as
the vinyl chloride monitoring system,
these gas mixtures may be directly used
to prepare a chromatograph calibration
curve as described in section 7.3 of Test
Method 106. The requirements in sec-
tion 5 2.3.1 and 5.2.3.2 of Test Method
106 for certification of cylinder stand-
ards and for establishment and verifica-
tion of calibration standards are to be
followed.38
(iv) The location and number of points
to be monitored and the frequency of
monitoring nrovided for in the program
are acceptable when they are compared
with the number of pieces of equipment
in vinyl chloride service and the size and
physical layout of the plant.
(v) It contains an acceptable plan of
action to be taken when a leak is de-
tected.
(vi) It contains a definition of leak
which is acceptable when compared with
the background concentrations of vinyl
chloride in the areas of the plant to be
monitored by the vinyl chloride monitor-
ing system. Measurements of background
concentrations of vinyl chloride in the
areas of the plant to be monitored by the
vinyl chloride monitoring system are to
be included with the description of the
program. The definition of leak for a
given plant may vary among the differ-
ent areas within the plant and is also to
change over time as background con-
centrations in the plant are reduced.
(9) Inprocess wastewater. Vinyl chlo-
ride emissions to the atmosphere from
inprocess wastewater are to be reduced
as follows:
(i) The concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride in each inprocess wastewater stream
containing greater than 10 ppm vinyl
chloride measured immediately as it
leaves a piece of equipment and before
being mixed with any other inprocess
wastewater stream is to be reduced to no
more than 10 ppm by weight before being
mixed with any other inprocess wastewa-
ter stream which contains less than 10
ppm vinyl chloride; before being exposed
to the atmoshere; before being dis-
charged to a wastewater treatment proc-
ess; or before being discharged untreated
as a wastewater. This paragraph does
apply to water which is used to displace
vinyl chloride from equipment before it
is opened to the atmosphere in accord-
ance with § 61.64(a) (2) or paragraph
(b) (6) of this section, but does not apply
to water which is used to wash out equip-
ment after the equipment has already
been opened to the atmosphere in ac-
cordance with §61.64(a)(2) or para-
graph (b) (6) of this section.30
(ii) Any vinyl chloride removed from
the inprocess wastewater in accordance
with paragraph (b) (9) (i) of this section
is to be ducted through a control system
from which the concentration of vinyl
chloride in the exhaust gases does not
exceed 10 ppm, or equivalent as provided
in § 61.66.
(c) The requirements in paragraphs
(b)(l), (b)(2), (b)(5), (b)(6), (b)(7)
and (b) (8) of this section are to be in-
corporated into a standard operating
procedure, and made available upon re-
quest for inspection by the Administra-
tor. The standard operating procedure is
to include provisions for measuring the
vinyl chloride in equipment s±4.75 ms
(1,250 gal) in volume for which an emis-
sion limit is prescribed in § 61.65(b) (6)
(i) prior to opening the equipment and
using Test Method 106, a portable hydro-
carbon detector, or an equivalent or al-
ternative method. The method of meas-
urement is to meet the requirements in
§ 61.67(g) (5) (i) (A) or (g) ((5) (i) (B) 30
(Sec. 114 of the Clewi Air Act u amended
(43 OJ3.C. 7414». W*
111-18
-------
§ 61.66 Equivalent equipment and pro-
cedures.
Upon written application from an own-
er or operator, the Administrator may
approve use of equipment or procedures
which have been demonstrated to his
satisfaction to be equivalent in terms of
reducing vinyl chloride emissions to the
atmosphere to those prescribed for com-
pliance with a specific paragraph of this
subpart. For an existing source, any re-
quest for using an equivalent method as
the initial measure of control is to be
submitted to the Administrator within
30 days of the effective date. For a new
source, any request for using an equiva-
lent method is to be submitted to the
Administrator with the application for
approval of construction or modification
required by § 61.07.
§ 61.67 Emission tesls.
(a) Unless a waiver of emission testing
is obtained under § 61.13, the owner or
operator of a source to which this sub-
part applies shall test emissions from
the source,
(1) Within 90 days of the effective date
in the case of an existing source or a
new source which has an initial startup
date preceding the effective date, or
(2) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source, initial startup of
which occurs after the effective date.
(b) The owner or operator shall pro-
vide the Administrator at least 30 days
prior notice of an emission test to afford
the Administrator the opportunity to
have an observer present during the test.
(c) Any emission test is to be con-
ducted while the equipment being tested
is operating at the maximum production
rate at which the equipment will be op-
erated and under other relevant condi-
tions as may be specified by the Adminis-
trator based on representative perform-
ance of the source.
(d) [Reserved!38
(e) When at all possible, each sample
is to be analyzed within 24 hours, but in
no case in excess of 72 hours of sample
collection. Vinyl chloride emissions are
to be determined within 30 days after the
emission test. The owner or operator
shall report the determinations to the
Administrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the close of the next busi-
ness day following the determination.38
(f) The owner or operator shall retain
at the plant and make available, upon
request, for inspection by the Adminis-
trator, for a minimum of 2 years records
of emission test results and other data
needed to determine emissions.
(g) Unless otherwise specified, the
owner or operator shall use test Test
Methods in Appendix B to this part for
each test as required by paragraphs
(g)(l), (g)(2), (g)(3), (g)(4), and
(g) (5) of this section, unless an equiva-
lent method or an alternative method
has been approved by the Administrator.
If the Administrator finds reasonable
grounds to dispute the results obtained
by an equivalent or alternative method,
he may require the use of a reference
method. If the results of the reference
and equivalent or alternative methods
do not agree, the results obtained by the
reference method prevail, and the Ad-
ministrator may notify the owner or
operator that approval of the method
previously considered to be equivalent or
alternative is withdrawn.
(1) Test Method 106 is to be used to
determine the vinyl chloride emissions
from any source for which an emission
limit is prescribed in S861.62(a) or (b)
§ 61.63(a), or SS 61.64(a) (1), (b), (c), or
(d), or from any control system to which
reactor emissions are required to be
ducted in 5 61.64 (a) (2) or to which fugi-
tive emissions are required to be ducted
is § 61.65(b) (IHii), (b)(2), (b)(5),
(b) (6) (ii),or (b) (9) (ii).
(i) For each run, one sample is to be
collected. The sampling site is to be at
least two stack or duct diameters down-
stream and one half diameter upstream
from any flow disturbance such as a
bend, expansion, contraction, or visible
flame. For a rectangular cross section an
equivalent diameter is to be determined
from the following equation:
tion:
C| \J II \ fJ.\J\J f vg AW
/( V
10-"] |100]
equivalent diameter —2
(length) (width)
length |-width
The sampling point in the duct is to
be at the centroid of the cross section.
The sample is to be extracted at a rate
proportional to the gas velocity at the
sampling point. The sample is to be
taken over a minimum of one hour, and
is to contain a minimum volume of 50
liters corrected to standard conditions.
(ii) Each emission test is to consist of
three runs. For the purpose of determin-
ing emissions, the average of results of
all runs is to apply. The average is to be
computed on a time weighted basis.38
(iii) For gas streams containing more
than 10 percent oxygen the concentra-
tion of vinyl chloride as determined by
Test Method 106 is to be corrected to 10
percent oxygen (dry basis) for determi-
nation of emissions by using the follow-
ing equation:
) - Ci,
10.9
20.9 —percent O,
where:
Ci»,,>rr,., i?,n--The concentration of vinyl
chloride in the exhaust gases, corrected
to 10-percent oxygen.
Co — The concentration of vinyl chloride as
measured by Test Method 106.
20.9 _ Percent oxygen in the ambient air at
standard conditions.
10.9--Percent oxygen In the ambient air at
standard conditions, minus the 10.0-per-
cent oxygen to which the correction is
being made.
Percent Oj = Percent oxygen In the exhaust
gas a.s measured by Reference Method 3
In Appendix A of Part 60 of this chapte*8
(iv) For those emission sources where
the emission limit is prescribed in terms
of mass rather than concentration, mass
emissions in kg/100 kg product are to be
determined by using the following equa-
where:
Ca \ = kg vinyl chloride/100 kg product.
CV -The concentration of vinyl chloride as
measured by Test Method 106.
2.60 — Density of vinyl chloride at one
atmosphere and 20° C in kg/m ".
Q — Volumetric flow rate in m"/hr as de-
termined by Reference Method 2 of Ap-
pendix A to Part 60 of this chapter.
10-" ^Conversion factor for ppm.
Z — Production rate (kg/hr). 38
(2) Test Method 107 is to be used to
determine the concentration of vinyl
chloride in each inprocess wastewater
stream for which an emission limit is
prescribed in $ 61.65
-------
is to be made is to be specified by the
Administrator for each individual plant
at the time of the determination based
on the plant's operation. For a reactor
that is also used as a stripper, the deter-
mination may be made immediately fol-
lowing the stripping operation.
(1) Except as provided in paragraph
(g) (5) (11) of this section, the reactor
opening loss is to be determined using
the following equation:
W (2.60) (10-«) (Cb)
YZ
(b)UMii), and (b)(2), (b)(5), (b) (6)
(2)
30
where;
C=
W=
2.60 =
10"' =
C6=
kg vinyl chloride emissions/kg product.
Capacity of the reactor in rn».
Dcnsity of vinyl chloride at one atmosphere and
20° C In kg/m'.
Conversion factor for ppm.
ppm by volume vinyl chloride as determined by
Test Method 106 or a portable hydrocarbon
detector which measures hydrocarbons
with a sensitivity of at least 10 ppm.
Number of batches since the reactor was last
opened to the atmosphere.
AveraKO kg of polyvinyl chloride produced per
batch in the number of batches since the reactor
was last opened to the atmosphere.
(A) If Method 106 is used to deter-
mine the concentration of vinyl chloride
(Cb) , the sample is to be withdrawn at
a constant rate with a probe of sufficient
length to reach the vessel bottom from
the manhole. Samples are to be taken
for 5 minutes within 6 inches of the ves-
sel bottom, 5 minutes near the vessel
center, and 5 minutes near the vessel top.
(B) If a portable hydrocarbon detec-
tor is used to determine the concentra-
tion of vinyl chloride (Cb) , a probe of
sufficient length to reach the vessel bot-
tom from the manhole is to be used to
make the measurements. One measure-
ment will be made within 6 Inches of the
vessel bottom, one near the vessel center
and one near the vessel top. Measure-
ments are to be made at each location
until the reading is stabilized. All hydro-
carbons measured are to be assumed to
be vinyl chloride,
(C) The production rate of polyvinyl
chloride (Z) Is to be determined by a
method submitted to and approved by the
Administrator.
(11) A calculation based on the number
of evacuations, the vacuum Involved, and
the volume of gas in the reactor is hereby
approved by the Administrator as an al-
ternative method for determining reac-
tor opening loss for postpolymerization
reactors in the manufacture of bulk
resins.
(Sec. 114 of th«
(42 U.B.C. 7414)).
Air Act M IBMuted
§61.68 F.inisMon monitoring.
(a) A vinyl chloride monitoring sys-
tem is to be used to monitor on a con-
tinuous basis the emissions from the
sources for which emission limits are pre-
scribed in § 61.62(a) and (b), 5 61.63(a),
and 8 81.84(a) (1), (b), (c), and (d), and
for any control system to which reactor
emissions are required to be ducted In
8 61.64(a) (2) or to which fugitive emis-
sions are required to be ducted in § 61.65
(b) The vinyl chloride monitoring sys-
tem(s) used to meet the requirement in
paragraph (a) of this section is to be a
device which obtains air sampels from
one or more points on a continuous
sequential basis and analyzes the samples
with gas chromotography or, if the owner
or operator assumes that all hydrocar-
bons measured are vinyl chloride, with
infrared spectrophotometry, flame ion
detection, or an equivalent or alterna-
tive method. The vinyl chloride monitor-
ing system used to meet the requirements
in § 61.65(b) (8) (i) may be used to meet
the requirements of this section.
(c) A daily span check is to be con-
ducted for each vinyl chloride monitor-
ing system used. For all of the emission
sources listed in paragraph (a) of this
section, except the one for which an emis-
sion limit is prescribed in § 61.62(b) , the
dally span check is to be concducted with
a concentration of vinyl chloride equal
to 10 ppm. For the emission source for
which an emission limit is prescribed in
§ 61.62(b), the daily span check is to be
conducted with a concentration of vinyl
chloride which is determined to be
equivalent to the emission limit for that
source based on the emission test re-
quired by § 61.67. The calibration is to
be done with either :
(1) A calibration gas mixture pre-
pared from the gases specified in sections
5.2.1 and 5.2.2 of Test Method 106 and
In accordance with section 7.1 of Test
Method 106, or M
(2) A calibration gas cylinder stand-
ard containing the appropriate concen-
tration of vinyl chloride. The gas com-
position of the calibration gas cylinder
standard is to have been certified by the
manufacturer. The manufacturer must
have recommended a maximum shelf
life for each cylinder so that the concen-
tration does not change greater than
±5 percent from the certified value. The
date of gas cylinder preparation, certified
vinyl chloride concentration and recom-
mended maximum shelf life must have
been affixed to the cylinder before ship-
ment from the manufacturer to the
buyer. If a gas chromatograph Is used aa
the vinyl chloride monitoring system,
these gas mixtures may be directly used
to prepare a chromatograph calibration
curve as described in section 7.3 of Teat
Method 106. The requirements In sec-
tions 5.2.3.1 and 5.2.3.2 of Test Method
106 for certification of cylinder stand-
ards and for establishment and verifica-
tion of calibration standards are to be
followed.38
(See. 114 of tht
(43 OJ.C. 7414)).
Air Act u amended
§ 61.69 Initiul report.
(a) An owner or operator of any
source to which this subpart applies shall
submit a statement in writing notifying
the Administrator that the equipment
and procedural specifications in jj 81.65
(b)(6), (b)(7), and (b) (8) are being
implemented.
(b) (1) In the case of an existing
source or a new source which has an
initial startup date preceding the effec-
tive date, the statement is to be submit-
ted within 90 days of the effective date,
unless a waiver of compliance is granted
under § 61.11, along with the informa-
tion required under § 61.10. If a waiver
of compliance is granted, the statement
is to be submitted on a date scheduled
by the Administrator.
(2) In the case of a new source which
did not have an initial startup date pre-
ceding the effective date, the statement
is to be submitted within 90 days of the
initial startup date.
(c) The statement is to contain the
following information:
(DA list of the equipment installed
for compliance,
(2) A description of the physical and
functional characteristics of each piece
of equipment.
(3) A description of the methods
which have been incorporated into the
standard operating procedures for meas-
uring or calculating the emissions for
which emission limits are prescribed in
§61.65 (b) d)(i) and (b)(6)(i),
(4) A statement that each piece of
equipment is installed and that each
piece of equipment and each procedure
is being used.
SUS.tJ8.iRP ** **
§ 61.70 Scmlunnuul report.
(a) The owner or operator of any
source to which this subpart applies shall
submit to the Administrator on Septem-
ber 15 and March 15 of each year a report
in writing containing the information
required by this section. The first semi-
annual report is to be submitted follow-
ing the first full 6 month reporting period
after the initial report is submitted.10
(b) (1) In the case of an existing source
or a new source which has an Initial
startup date preceding the effective date,
the first report is to be submitted within
180 days of the effective date, unless a
waiver of compliance Is granted under
§61.11. If a waiver of compliance if
granted, the first report Is to be sub-
mitted on a date scheduled by the Ad-
ministrator.
(2) In the case of a new source which
did not have an initial startup date pre-
ceding the effective date, the first report
is to be submitted within 180 days of the
initial startup date.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, the
owner or operator shall use the Test
Methods in Appendix B to this part to
conduct emission tests as required by
paragraphs (c) (2) and (c) (3) of this
section, unless an equivalent or an alter-
native method has been approved by the
Administrator. If the Administrator
finds reasonable grounds to dispute the
results obtained by an equivalent or al-
ternative method, he may require the use
I 11-20
-------
of a reference method. If the results of
the reference and equivalent or alterna-
tive methods do not agree, the results
obtained by the reference method pre-
vail, and the Administrator may notify
the owner or operator that approval of
the method previously considered to be
equivalent or alternative is withdrawn.
(1) The owner or operator shall in-
clude in the report a record of any emis-
sions which averaged over any hour
period (commencing on the hour) are
in excess of the emission limits pre-
scribed in §§ 61.62(a) or (b), I 61.63(a),
or § 61.64(a) (1), (b), (c), or (d), or for
any control system to which reactor
emissions are required to be ducted in
§ 61.64(a) (2) or to which fugitive emis-
sions are required to be ducted in § 61.85
(b) (1) (ii), (b) (2), (b) (5), (b) (6) (ii), or
(b) (9) (ii). The emissions are to be meas-
ured in accordance with § 61.68.
(2) In poly vinyl chloride plants for
which a stripping operation is used to
attain the emission level prescribed in
561.64(e), the owner or operator shall
include in the report a record of the
vinyl chloride content in the polyvinyl
chloride resin. Test Method 107 is to be
used to determine vinyl chloride content
as follows:
(1) If batch stripping is used, one rep-
resentative sample of polyvinyl chloride
resin is to be taken from each batch of
each grade of resin Immediately follow-
ing the completion of the stripping op-
eration, and identified by resin type and
grade and the date and time the batch
is completed. The corresponding quan-
tity of material processed in each strip-
per batch is to be recorded and identi-
fied by resin type and grade and the
date and time the batch is completed?"
(11) If continuous stripping is used,
one representative sample of polyvinyl
chloride resin is to be taken for each
grade of resin processed or at Intervals
of 8 hours for each grade of resin which
is being processed, whichever is more fre-
quent. The sample is to be taken as the
resin flows out of the stripper and iden-
tified by resin type and grade and the
date and time the sample was taken.
The corresponding quantity of material
processed by each stripper over the time
period represented by the sample during
the eight hour period, is to be recorded
and identified by resin type and grade
and the date and time it represents,
(111) The quantity of material proc-
essed by the stripper is to be determined
on a dry solids basis and by a method
submitted to and approved by the Ad-
ministrator.
(Iv) At the prior request of the Ad-
ministrator, the owner or operator shall
provide duplicates of the samples re-
quired In paragraphs (c)(2)(l) and (c)
(2) (11) of this section.
(v) The report to the Administrator
by the owner or operator is to Include
the vinyl chloride content found in each
sample required by paragraphs (c) (2)
(1) and (c) (2) (ii) of this section, aver-
aged separately for each type of resin,
over each calendar day and weighted
according to the quantity of each grade
of resin processed by the stripper(s)
that calendar day, according to the fol-
lowing equation:
AT.
__
where:
A = 24-hour average concentration of type,
T i resin in ppm (dry weight basis).
Q- Total production of type T i resin over
the 24-hour period, in kg.
T <=Type of resin; i= 1,2 ... TO where m
is total number of resin types produced
during the 24-hour period.
(vi) The owner or operator shall re-
tain at the source and make available
for inspection by the Administrator for
a minimum of 2 years records of all data
needed to furnish the information re-
quired by paragraph (c) (2) (v) of this
section: The records are to contain the
following information:
(A) The vinyl chloride content found
in all the samples required in paragraphs
(c) (2) (i) and (c) (2) (ii) of this section,
identified by the resin type and grade
and the time and date of the sample, and
(B) The corresponding quantity of
polyvinyl chloride resin processed by the
stripper (s), identified by the resin type
and grade and the time and date it
represents.
(3) The owner or operator shall in-
clude in the report a record of the emis-
sions from each reactor opening for
which an emission limit Is prescribed In
! 61.64(a) (2) , Emissions are to be deter-
mined in accordance with § 61.67(g) (5),
except that emissions for each reactor
are to be determined. For a reactor that is
also used as a stripper, the determination
may be made immediately following the
stripping operation.
(Bee. 114 of the
(43 o-a.c. 7410).
Air Act w amended
+P0
QT,
M = Concentration of vinyl chloride in one
sample of grade G i resin, in ppm.
P = Production of grade G i resin repre-
sented by the sample, In kg.
Gt = Grade of resin; e.g., O ,, G ,, and G ,.
n = Total number of grades of resin pro-
duced during the 24-hour period. 3"
§ 61.71 Hecordkeepint;.
(a) The owner or operator of any
source to which this subpart applies shall
retain the following information at the
source and make it available for inspec-
tion by the Administrator for a mini-
mum of two years;
(1) A record of the leaks detected by
the vinyl chloride monitoring system as
required by § 61.65(b)(8), including the
concentrations of vinyl chloride
measured, analyzed, and recorded by the
vinyl chloride detector, the location of
each measurement and the date and ap-
proximate time of each measurement.
(2) A record of the leaks detected dur-
ing routine monitoring with the portable
hydrocarbon detector and the action
taken to repair the leaks, as required
by § 81,65(b) (8), Including a brief state-
ment explaining the location and cause
of each leak detected with the portable
hydrocarbon detector, the date and time
of the leak, and any action taken to
eliminate that leak!"
(3) A record of emissions measured
in accordance with § 61.68.3'
(4) A daily operating record for each
polyvinyl chloride reactor, including
pressures and temperatures,"
""" ——
38 FR 8826, 4/6/73 (1)
as amended
41 FR 46560, 10/21/76 (28)
41 FR 53017, 12/3/76 (30)
42 FR 29005, 6/7/77 (38)
42 FR 41424, 8/17/77 (40)
43 FR 8800, 3/3/78 (47)
111-21
-------
APPENDIX A
National Emission Standards for Hazardous A1r Pollutants
Compliance Status Information
I. SOURCE REPORT
INSTRUCTIONS: Owners or operators of. sources of
hazardous pollutants subject to the National
Emission Standards for Hazardous A1r Pollutants
ire required to submit the Information contained
In Section I to the appropriate U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency Regional Office prior to 90 days
after the effective date of any standards or amend-
ments which require the submission of such
Information.
A list of regional offices 1s provided In 161.04. ____________
A. SOURCE INFORMATION
1. Identification/Location - Indicate the name and address of each source.
1 2
Region
2022
AQCfc t
47Street Address (Location of Plant)S6 55
Dup 1-18 _ , ^ _ _
17 & City Name 34 SaTe 3539
_ 55 68
4UState Regis. Number54 NEDS X Ref.
8 77 79
69 'SIC E2 IT X7P 'Staff W
64 65
DUP1°* * V SIR B W
30 31 49
2, Contact - Indicate the MM and telephone number of the owner or operator
or otter responsible official whoa EPA may contact concerning this report.
Dap 1-18 4 1
19 Zb zlHM 73
44 46 -
Area Code 47Rubber54 . W
3. Source Description - Briefly state the nature of the source (e.g., *Chlor-
•Ual1 Pltnf or 'fUchine Shop*).
Duj> 1-18 4 I
1920 21Description50
4 58 9 13 000 00 1
ifc County " Source~Kumber 14" T6 17 fc 19"
23 26
City Code 27
Source Name -46
SIContinued 79 TSG
4. Alternative Mailing Address - Indicate an alternative
wiling address If correspondence 1s to be directed
to t location different than that specified above.
Dup 1-18 4 3
15 20 21 -Number Street or Box Number 4~5 55"
Dup 1-18 4 4 37 38
15 ?0 21 CTty 3"5 STate 41 Zip 4~4
5. Compliance Status - The emissions from this source can cannot meet
the emission limitations contained In the National EmTsslonTFandards on or
prior to 90 days after the effective date of any standards or amendments
Which require the submission of such Information.
Signature of Owner, Operator or Other Responsible Official
IIOTt:If tfte emissions from the source will exceed those limits set by the National
emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants, the source will be in violation and
Subject to Federal enforcement actions wless granted a Mlver ef co«*>llance by the
Administrator of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. The Information needed for
s«<* Mlvers 1a listed 1n Sect+on II of this form.
III-A-1
-------
I. PROCESS INFORMATION. P*rt B should be completed separately for etch point of
emission for each hazardous pollutant. ^Sources subject to 61.22(1} may Milt
number 4. below.]
Dup 1-13
14"T6
0 0 5
T7 T8 Tf 25"
sec
~Z7 25?9
NEDS X Itf
Iff IT
IS SIP
Pollutant Emitted - Indicate the type of hazardous pollutant emitted by the
process";; Indicate "AB" for asbestos, "BE" for berylllm, or "HG" for mercury.
32 33
PoTTuTant
34~
Regulation
EC
2. Process Descri
ption - Provide a brief description of each process (e.g.,
box" in a mercury chlor-alkall plant, "grinding machine* 1n
"hydrogen end - ,
a beryllium machine shop). Use additional sheets 1f necessary.
50
Dup 1-18
51
Dup 1-18
51
Process Description 74 a
6
VT
6
1T~
1
20 21
79
2
20 21
79
T
50
BO*
50
sir
3. Amount of Pollutant - Indicate the average weight of the hazardous material
named in Item i which enters the process 1n pounds per month (based on the
previous twelve months of operation).
Dup 1-18 6 3
19—?0
21
29
Ibs./mo.
36
4. Control Devices
T.Indicate the type of pollution control devices, 1f any, used to reduce
the emissions from the process (e.g., venturl scrubber, baghouse, wet
cyclone) and the estimated percent of the-pollutant which the device
removes from the process gas stream.
DUP 1-18 6 4
19 20 21
45 Primary Device Name
50"
PRIMARY CONTROL DEVICE:
66 70
64 Percent Removal 72
73
79
Dup 1-18 « 5
i? — fo
21
SECONDARY CONTROL DEVICES:
45
47 Secondary Device Name
64 66 70
» EFFIC.
72 79 BO
Efficiency
III-A-2
-------
k. Asbestos Cwlsslen Control Oevlcet Only
1. If i btghouse Is specified In Iteai 4i, give the following
InfonMtlon:
• The air flow peraeablUty 1n cubic feet per minute per square
foot of fabric area.
Air flow permeability • cfm/ft2
• The pressure drop 1n Inches water gauge acrqss the filter
at which the baghouse 1s operated.
Operating pressure drop • Inches w.g.
. If the baghouse material contains synthetic fill yarn, check
whether this material 1s // spun / / or not spun.
• If the baghouse utilizes a felted fabric, give the minimum
thickness 1n Inches and the density 1n ounces per square yard.
Thickness • Inches Density • oz/yd
•H. If a wet collection device Is specified 1n Item 4a, give the
designed unit contacting energy In Inches water gauge.
• Bn1t contacting energy « Inches w.g.
III-A-3
-------
C. DISPOSAL OF *S«ESTOS-COHTA.ININ6 HASTES, Pert C should be completed separately
Tor MCh asbestos-containing was-te generation operation arising from sources
subject to I61.22(a), (c), (e), and (h).
Oup 1-13 0 0 5
Hft 17 T8 7? 2B5CC 7? 2B~T9 3ff IT
NEDS X Ref CS SIP
A 8
32 S3 &haojletfonft W
PoUutant EC
1. Haiti Generation • Provide a brlif description of tach process that
generates asbestos-containing waste (e.g. disposal of control device wastes).
W~"" ProcessTJescrlpUon 79 BO"
2, Asbestos Concentration - Indicate the average percentage asbestos content
of these materials.
Dup 1-18 6 1 ASBESTOS CONCENTRATION; _ _
15 ZO 21 ft IS f6
50" W
3. Amount of Wastes - Indicate the average weight of asbestos-containing wastes
disposed of i measured In kg/day.
Oup 1-18 62 _ kg/day _
~ 2T 77 2? 34 W
4. Control Methods - Indicate the emission control methods used 1n ell stages
of waste disposal i from collection, processing,' and packaging to transporting
and deposition,
Dup 1-18 63 _ Primary Control Method
19 — ZQ 2T - ?3
4? 79 Bo"
2T - SO
ST - 79 W
6; Haste Disposal - Indicate the type of disposal site (sanitary landfill,
open, covered; or Incineration site (municipal, private) where the waste
1s disposed of and who operates the site (company, private, .municipal).
State the name and location of the site (closest city or town, county,
state).
Dup 1-18 6 5 TYPE OF SITE; _
1? 26 21 3"3 31 R>
6T 79 BO"
Blip 1-18 __«__ CPE1MTDR;
75 Zt) zi a at . w
78 XT
hip 1-ia 6 7 LOCATION;
fl 20 21 79
7i''Ti ro
III-A-4
-------
0. HASTE DISPOSAL SITES. Part 0 should bt completed itptritoly for tack ubtstot
tniu «*posai lit* svbjtct to MctfwM,22(1).
Cup 1.13 _ 0 0 5 _ _
14 16 17 16 TV 20 SEC Z? 2B ZS 3ff 3T
NEDSXKtf CS SIP
92 39
34 .Regulation w
Pollutant EC
WASTE DISPOSAL SITE __
68 «T
1, DMcr1ot1on - Provide i brltf description of thi lite, Including Ul tin ind
conriguntion, and tnt dlitanct to tht cloiijt city or town, clouit
rts1d«nci, and closist prloary road.
Oup 1-18 6 1 SITE DESCRIPTION
15 Tb 21 37 39 60
61 78 W
Oup 1-T8 6 2 DISTANCE! TOWHi K*
15 70 21 B 35 34 3? TO 4Z-T3
RESIDENCE; KM ROAD:
45 54 S8 50 62 K 65 68 71 7S
K M
Tl 78 W
2. InicUvaMon - After the site )s 1n«ct1vated, Indicate the method or methods
used to coitply with the standard and send a Ust of th« actions that will be
'undertaken to maintain the Inactivated site.
Dup K18 6 B HETHOlT/lHACTTre SITE:
18 Z6 21 '
a —7S W
III-A-5
-------
II. MftlVEP. •.EQUESTS
A. MAIVER OF COMPLIANCE. Owners or operators of sources unable to operate In
compliance with the National Emission Standards for Hazardous A1r Pollutants
prior to 90 days after the effective date of any standards or amendments which
require the submission of such Information may request a waiver of compliance
from the Administrator of the U.S. Environments! Protection Agency for th«
tine period necessary to Install appropriate control devices or make
•edifications to achieve compliance. The Administrator may grant a waiver
kf compliance with the standard for a period not exceeding two years from
the effective date of the hazardous pollutant standards, If he finds that
such period 1s necessary for the Installation of controls and that steps
Mill be taken during the period of the waiver to assure that the health
of persons will be protected from Imminent endangennent.
The report Information provided 1n Section I must accompany this application.
Applications should be sent to the appropriate EPA regional office.
1. Processes Involved - Indicate the process or processes emitting hazardous
pollutants to which emission controls are to be applied.
2. Controls
i. Describe the proposed type of control device to be added or
modification to be made to tht process to reduce the emissions
of hazardous pollutants to an acceptable level. (Use additional
sheets If necessary.)
b. Describe the measures that'will be taken during the waiver period
to assure that the health of persons will be protected from
Imminent endangement. (Use additional sheets 1f necessary.)
3. Increments of Progress - Specify tht dates by which thi following
Increments of progress will be met,
• Date by which contracts for emission control systems or process
modifications will be awarded! or date by which orders will be
Issued for the purchase of the component parts to accomplish
emission control or process modification,
Dup 1-16 0 1 7 . __
17 19 oT"5» SS To 61 */DY/YR
• Date of Initiation of on-slte construction or Installation of
emission control equipment or process change.
Dup 1-16 027
17 '19 53T4 5? BO 61 MO/DY/YR 86 BIT
• Date by which on-slte construction or Installation of emission control
equipment or process modification Is to be completed,
Dup 1-16 0 3_7 _ „
17 T9 5TH54 55 50 61 MO/DY/YR 56 co
• Date by which final compliance 1s to be achieved.
53~~54 55 BO 61 HO/OY/YR ?6 SO"
Dup 1-16 0 47
I. MAIVER OF EMISSION TESTS. A waiver of emission testing may be granted to
owners or operators of sources of beryl Him or mercury pollutants 1f, In
the Judgment of the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency
the emissions from the source comply with the appropriate standard or 1f
the owners or operators of the source have requested a waiver of compliance
or have been granted a waiver of compliance.
This application should accompany the report Information provided 1n
Section I.
1. Reason - State the reasons for requesting a waiver of emission testing.
If the reason stated 1s that the emissions from the source are within
the prescribed limits, documentation of this condition must be attached.
Bate Signature of the owner or operator
(Sec. 114 of the Cleui Air Act u amended
(42 O-B.C. 7414)). *»,47
III-A-6
-------
APFIMDIZ B—TSST METHODS
METHOD 101. (KRUNO! UITHOD FOB DBTIB-
M1NATION OF PARTICULATZ AND GASZOUS MER-
CtJ»T (MISSIONS FBOK STATIONAHT SOT7KCIS
(Am STMAMS)
1. Principle and applicability—1.1 Prin-
ciple. Particulate and gaseous mercury emis-
sions are isoklnetically sampled from the
source and collected in acidic Iodine mono-
chloride solution. The mercury collected (In
the mercuric form) Is reduced to elemental
mercury in basic solution by hdroxylamlne
sulfate. Mercury Is aerated from the solution
and analyzed using spectrophotometry.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica-
ble for the determination of partlculate and
gaseous mercury emissions when the carrier
gas stream Is principally air. The method is
for use In ducts or stacks at stationary
sources. Unless otherwise specified, * this
method Is not Intended to apply to gas
streams other than those emitted directly to
the atmosphere without further processing.
2. Apparatut—2.1 Sampling train. A sche-
matic of the sampling train used by EPA Is
shown In figure 101-1. Commercial models
of this train are available, although con-
struction details are described In APTD-
0581.1 and operating and maintenance proce-
dures are described in APTD-0576. The com-
ponents essential to this sampling train are
the following:
3.1.1 Noxtle. Stainless steel or glass with
sharp, tapered leading edge.
3.1,2 Probe. Sheathed Fyrex* glass. A
heating system capable of maintaining a
minimum gas temperature of 260* F at the
probe outlet during sampling may be used to
prevent condensation from occurring.
2.1.3 Pttot tube. Type 8 (Figure 101-2).
or equivalent, with a coefficient within 5 per-
cent over the working range, attached to
probe to monitor stack gas velocity.
2.1.4 Impingers. Four Qreenburg-Smlth
Implngers connected in series with glass ball
joint fittings. The first, third, and fourth Im-
pingers may be modified by replacing the
tip with a one-half inch ID glass tube ex-
tending to one-half inch from the bottom of
the flask.
2.1.5 Acid Trap. Mine Safety Appliances
Air Line Filter, Catalogue Number 81867,
with acid absorbing cartridge and suitable
connections, or equivalent.
2.1.6 Metering tyitem. Vacuum gauge,
leakless pump, thermometers capable of
measuring temperature to within 6* F, dry
gas meter with 2 percent accuracy, and re-
lated equipment, described in APTD-0581,
to maintain an isokinetlc sampling rate and
to determine sample volume.
2.1.7 Filter Holder (optional) -Pyrex glass.
A filter may be used in cases where the gas
stream to be sampled contains large quan-
PROBE
f*f STACK
M— WALL
HEATED AREA 'FILTER HOLDER THERMOMETER/CHECK
'(OPTIONAL) / 7 .VALVE
TYPES /
PITOT TUBE
IMPINGERS ICE BATH
BY-PASS.VALVE
THERMOMETERS'
Dm TEST METER
.CUUM
GAUGE
'ALVE
AIR-TlQHT
PUIT
Fioure 101*1. Mercury sampling train
Fijur» 101-2. Plloltl**
1 These documents are available for a nomi-
nal cost from the National Technical Infor-
mation Service, U.S. Department of Com-
merce, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Va.
22151.
' Mention of trade names or specific prod-
ucts does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
III-A-7
-------
litics of paniculate matter. The filter holder
must provide a positive seal against leakage
from outside or around the filter. A heating
system capable of maintaining the filter at
a minimum temperature of 250° P. should
be used to prevent condensation from occur-
ring.
2.1.8 Barometer. To measure atmospheric
pressure to ±0.1 in Hg.
2.2 Measurement of stack conditions
{stack pressure, temperature, moisture and
Telocity)—2.21 Pilot tube. Type S, or
equivalent, with a coefficient within S percent
over the working range.
2 2.2 Differential pressure gauge. Inclined
manometer, or equivalent, to measure veloc-
II y held to within 10 percent of the minimum
value. Mlcromanometers should be used If
warranted.
2 2.3 Temperature gauge. Any tempera-
ture measuring device to measure stack tem-
perature to within 1 • P.
224 Pressure gauge. Pltot tube and In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
stack pressure to within 0.1 In Hg.
2.2 6 Moisture determination. Wet and
dry bulb thermometers, drying tubes, con-
densers, or equivalent, to determine stack
gas moisture content to within 1 percent.
2.3 Sample recovery—2.3.1 Leakless glass
sample bottles. 500 ml and 100 ml with Teflon,
lined tops.
2.3.2 Graduated cylinder. 250 ml.
2 3.3 Plastic jar. Approximately 800 ml.
2.4 Analysis—2.4.1 Spectrophotometer.
To measure absorbance at 253.7 nm. Perkln
Elmer Model 303, with a cylindrical gas cell
(approximately 1.5 In. O.D. X 7 In.) with
quartz glass windows, and hollow cathode
source, or equivalent.
2.4.2 Gas sampling bubbler. Tudor Scien-
tific Qlass Co., Smog Bubbler, Catalogue No.
TP-1150, or equivalent.
2.4.3. Recorder. To match output of spee-
trophotometer.
3. Reagents—3.1 Stock reagents—3.1.1
Potassium iodide. Reagent grade.
3.1.2 Distilled water—3.1.3 Potassium
iodide solution, 25 percent. Dissolve 250 g
of potassium iodide (reagent 3,1.1) In dis-
tilled water and dilute to 1 to 1.
3.1.* Hydrochloric acid. Concentrated.
3.1.0. Potassium iodate. Reagent grade.
3.1.6 Iodine monochloride (ICl) l.OM. To
BOO ml. of 25% potassium Iodide solution
(reagent 3.1.3), add 800 ml. of concentrated
hydrochloric acid. Cool to room temperature.
With vigorous stirring, slowly add 135 g. of
potassium Iodate and continue stirring until
all free Iodine has dissolved to give a clear
orange-red solution. Cool to room tempera-
ture and dilute to 1800 ml. with distilled
water. The solution should be kept In amber
bottles to prevent degradation.
3.1.7 Sodium hydroxide pellets. Reagent
grade.
3.1.8 Nitric acid. Concentrated.
3.1.9 Hydroxylamine sul/ate. Reagent
grade.
3.1.10 Sodium chloride. Reagent grade.
3.1.11 Mercuric chloride. Reagent grade.
3.2 Sampling—3.2.1 Absorbing solution,
0.1M ICl. Dilute 100 ml. of the l.OM Id
stock solution (reagent 3.1.8) to 1 to 1
with distilled water. The solution should be
kept in glass bottles to prevent degradation.
This reagent should be stable for at least 3
months; however, periodic checks should be
performed to Insure quality.
3.22 Waili acid. 1:1 V/V nitric acid—
water.
3.2.3 Distilled, deionized water.
3.2.4 Silica gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16
mesh dried at 350° P. for 2 hours.
3.2.5 Filter (optional). Glass fiber, Mine
Safety Appliances 1106BH, or equivalent. A
filter may be necessary in cases where the
gas stream to be sampled contains large
quantities of partlculate matter.
3.3 Analysis—3.3.1 Sodium hydroxide,
10 N.—Dissolve 400 g of sodium hydroxide
pellets in distilled water and dilute to 1 to 1.
3.3 2 Reducing agent, 12 percent hydrox-
ylamine sulfate, 12 percent sodium chlo-
ride.—To 60 ml of distilled water, add 12 g
of hydroxylamlne sulfate and 12 g of sodium
chloride. Dilute to 100 ml. This quantity Is
sufficient for 20 analyses and must be pre-
pared daily.
3.3.3 Aeration gas.—Zero grade air.
3.3.4 Hydrochloric acid, 0.3N.—Dilute 25.5
ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid to 1 to
1 with distilled water.
3.4 Standard mercury solutions—3.4.1
Stock solution.—Add 0.1354 g of mercuric
chloride to 60 ml of 0.8N hydrochloric acid.
After the mercuric chloride has dissolved,
add 0.3N hydrochloric acid and adjust the
volume to 100 ml. One ml of this solution
is equivalent to 1 mg of free mercury.
3.4.2 Standard solutions.—Prepare cali-
bration solutions by serially diluting the
stock solution (3.4.1) with 0.3N hydrochlo-
ric acid. Prepare solutions at concentrations
In the linear working range for the Instru-
ment to be used. Boutlons of 0.2 /itg/ml, 0.4
/ig/ml and 0.6 /ig/ml have been found ac-
ceptable for most instruments. Store all
solutions in glass-stoppered, glass bottles.
These solutions should be stable for at least
3 months; however, periodic checks should
be performed to insure quality.
4. Procedure.—4.1 Guidelines for source
testing are detailed in the following sections.
These guidelines are generally applicable;
however, most sample sites differ to some
degree and temporary alterations such as
stack extensions or expansions often are re-
quired to ensure the best possible sample
site. Further, since mercury Is hazardous,
care should be taken to minimize exposure.
Finally, since the total quantity of mercury
to be collected generally is small, the test
must be carefully conducted to prevent con-
tamination or loss of sample.
4.2 Selection of a sampling site and mini-
mum number of traverse points:
4.2.1 Select a suitable sampling site that
Is as close as is practicable to the point of
atmospheric emission. If possible, stacks
smaller than 1 foot in diameter should not
be sampled.
4.2.2 The sampling site should be at least
eight stack or duct diameters downstream
and two diameters upstream from any How
disturbance such as a bend, expansion, or
contraction. For a rectangular cross section.
determine an equivalent diameter from tlie
following equation:
2LW
where :
D<— Equivalent diameter.
L = Length.
W = Width.
4.2.3 When the above sampling site cri-
teria can be met, the minimum number of
traverse points is four (4) for stacks 1 foot
In diameter or less, eight (8) for stacks larger
than 1 foot but 2 feet In diameter or less, mid
twelve (12) for stacks larger than 2 feet.
4.2.4 Some sampling situations may ren-
der the above sampling site criteria imprac-
tical. When this is the case, choose a con-
venient sampling location and use figure
101-3 to determine the minimum number of
traverse points. However, use figure 101-3
only for stacks 1 foot in diameter or larger.
4.2.5 To use figure V01-S, first measure
the distance from the chosen sampling loca-
tion to the nearest upstream and downstream
disturbances. Divide this distance by the
diameter or equivalent diameter to deter-
mine the distance in terms of pipe diameters.
Determine the corresponding number of
traverse points for each distance from fig-
ure 101-3. Select the higher of the two num-
bers of traverse points, or a greater value,
such that for circular stacks the number Is
a multiple of four, and for rectangular stacks
the number follows the criteria of section
4.3.2.
4.2.6 If a selected sampling point is closer
than 1 inch from the stack wall, adjust the
location of that point to ensure that the
sample is taken at least 1 inch away from
the wall.
4.3 Cross sectional layout and location of
traverse points:
4.3.1 For circular stacks locate the trav-
erse points on at least two diameters accord-
ing to figure 101-4 and table 101-1. The
traverse axes shall divide the stack cross
section into equal parts.
NUMBER OF DUCT DIAMETERS UPSTREAM
(DISTANCE A)
2.5
FROM POINT OF ANY TYPE OF
DISTURBANCE (BEND. EXPANSION, CONTRACTION, ETC.)
NUMBER OF DUCT DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM*
(DISTANCE •
Figure 102-3. Minimum of traverse points.
III-A-8
-------
Table 101-1. Location of traverse points In circular stacks
(Percent of stack diameter from Inside wall to traverse point)
Traverse
point
number
on a
diameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Number of traverse points on a diameter
2
14.6
85.4
4
6.7
25.0
75.0
93.3
6
4.4
14.7
29.5
70.5
85.3
95.6
8
3.3
10.5
19.4
32.3
67.7
80.6
89.5
96.7
10
2.5
8.2
14.6
22.6
34.2
65.8
77.4
85.4
91.8
97.5
12
2.1
6.7
11.8
17.7
25.0
35.5
64.5
75.0
82.3
88.2
93.3
97.9
H
1.8
5.7
9.9
14.6
20.1
26.9
36.6
63.4
73.1
79.9
85.4
90.1
94.3
98.2
16
1.6
4.9
•8.5
12.5
16.9
22.0
28.3
37.5
62.5
71.7
78.0
83.1
87.5
91.5
95.1
98.4
18
1.4
4.4
7.5
10.9
14.6
18.8
23.6
29.6
38.2
61.8
70.4
76,4
81.2
85.4
89.1
92.5
95.6
98.6
20
1.3
3.9
6.7
9.7
12.9
16.5
20.4
25.0
30.6
38.8
61.2
69.4
75.0
79.6
83.5
87.1
90.3
93.3
96.1
98.7
22
1.1
3.5
6.0
8.7
11.6
14.6
18.0
21.8
26.1
31.5
39.3
60.7
68.5
73.9
78.2
82.0
85.4
88.4
91.3
94.0
96.5
98.9
24
1.1
3.2
5.5
7.9
10.5
13.2
16.1
19.4
23.0
27.2
32.3
39. 8
60.2
67.7
72.8
77.0
80.6
83.9
86.8
89.5
92.1
94.5
96.8
98.9
Figure 101-4. Cross section of circular alack showing location of
traverse points on perpendicular dlametere.
9
'"™"— "
*
1
• 1
. 1
1
"""""""T
I
a t
. i .
• ! •
!
r
• i •
Figure 1014. Crew swilon of rectangular tuck divided Into 12 tqial
tnu, wlUi traveres pofoti at cenlrold of each area.
4.3.2 For rectangular stacks divide the
cross section Into as many equal rectangular
areas as traverse points, such that the ratio
of the length to the width of the elemental
areas Is between one and two. Locate the
traverse points at the centrold of each equal
area according to figure 101-5.
4.4 Measurement of stack conditions:
4.4.1 Set up the apparatus aa shown in
figure 101-2. Make sure all connections are
tight and leak-free. Measure the velocity
head and temperature at the ttaverse points
specified by section 4.2 and 4.3.
4.4.2 Measure the static pressure in the
stack.
4.4.3 Determine the stack gas moisture.
4.4.4 Determine the stack gas molecular
weight from the measured moisture content
and knowledge of the expected gas stream
composition. A standard Orsat analyzer has
been found valuable at combustion sources.
In all cases, sound engineering judgment
should be used.
III-A-9
-------
4.5 Preparation of sampling train:
4.5.1 Prior to assembly, clean all glassware
(probe, Implngers, and connectors) by rinsing
•with wash aold, tap water, 0.1M 101, tap
water, and finally distilled water. Place 100
ml of O.lM IC1 In each of the first three
implngors, and place approximately 200 g of
prewelKhed silica gel In the fourth Implnger.
Save 80 ml of *he O.lM IC1 as a blank In the
sample analysis. Set up the train and the
probe as In figure 101-1.
4.5.2 If the gas stream to Be sampled Is
excessively dirty or moist, the first Implnger
may clog or become dilute too rapidly for
sufficient testing. A filter can be placed ahead
of the Implngers to collect the partlculates.
An Initial empty Impinger may also be used
to remove excess moisture. If a filth Implnger
is required, the final Implnger may have to
be carefully taped to the outside of the
•ample box.
4.5.3 Leak check the sampling train at the
•ampllng site. The leakage rat« should not
be in excess of 1 percent c. the desired sam-
pling rate. If condensation in the probe or
filter Is a problem, probe and filter heaters
will be required. Adjust the beaten to pro-
vide a temperature of at least 350' F. Place
crushed Ice around the Implngers. Add more
ice during the test to keep the temperature
of the gases leaving the last Implnger at 70* F
or less.
4.6 Mercury train operation:
4.6.1 For each run, record the data re-
quired on the example sheet shown In figure
101-6. Take readings at each sampling point
at least every & minutes and when signifi-
cant changes in stack conditions necessitate
additional adjustments in flow rate.
4.6.2 Sample at a rate of 0.5 to 1.0 cfm.
Samples shall be taken over such a period
or periods as are necessary to accurately
determine the maximum emissions which
would occur In a 34-hour period. In the case
of cyclic operations, sufficient tests shall be
made so as to allow accurate determination
or calculation ol the emissions which will
occur over the duration of the cycle. A mini-
mum sample time of S, hour* Is recommended.
In some Instances, high mercury concentra-
tions can prevent sampling In one run for
the desired minimum time. This is indicated
by reddening in the first Implnger as free
iodine Is liberated. In .this case, a run may
be divided Into two or more subruns to en-
sure that the absorbing solutions are not
depleted.
LOCATION
OrEUTO*
IAWUK
tmiioi
UETEIUH
C FACTOII
TUVtHE FOOT
MJMMR
TOTAL
IAMF1INO
TIME
III, rill.
STATIC
mtauK
|fsl. h. HJ
tTACT
TUKM1U«
ITil. * F
ICHEHATIC OF HACK CM»S SECTION
VflOCITY
HEAD
I
Mr delivery pressure and the ncecllo vtiHc
to obtain a constant airflow ol about 13 to
1/mln. The analysis tube should be bypassed
except during aeration. Purge the equipment
lor 2 minutes. Prepare a sample of mercury
standard solution (3.4.2) according to section
4.8.3. Place the analysis tube In the line,
and aerate until a mtximum peak height ia
reached on the recorder. Remove the analysis
tube, flush the lines, and rinse the analysis
tube with distilled water. Repent with an-
other sample of u-.e same standard solution.
This purge and analvsls cvcle is to be re-
peated until peak heights are reproducible.
4.8.3 Sample preparation.—Just prior to
analysis, transfer » sample aliquot of up
to 60 ml to the cleaned 100 ml analysis lulu1
Adjust the volume- to (SO ml with O.IM 1ft
If required. Add 6 ml of 10 N sodium liv-
droxide, cap tube with n clean glass stopper
and shake vigorously. Prolonged, vigorous
shaking at this point Is necessary to obtain
an accurate analysis. Add 8 ml ol the re-
ducing agent (reagent 3,3.2), cap tube with
a clean glass stopper and shake vigorously
and Immediately In sample line.
4.8.4 Mercury determination —After the
system has been stabilised, prepare samples
Irom the sample bottle according to section
4,8.3. Aerate the sample until a maximum
peak height Is reached on the recorder. The
mercury content Is determined by compar-
ing the peak heights ol the samples to the
peak heights ol the calibration solutions. II
collected samples are out of the linear range,
the samples should be diluted. Prepare a
blank Irom the 100 ml bottle according to
section 4.8 3 and analyze to determine the
reagent blank mercury level.
5. Calibration.—5,1 Sampling train —
6.1J Uso standard methods and equipment
as detailed in APTD 0578 to calibrate the
rate meter, pltot tube, dry gas meter, and
probe heater (11 used). Recalibrate prior to
each test series.
6,2 Analysis.—521 Prepare a calibra-
tion curve lor the spectrophotometer using
the standard mercury solutions. Plot the
peak heights read on the recorder vers-us the
concentrations of mercury In the standard
solutions. Standards should be interspersed
with the samples since the calibration can
change slightly with time. A new calibration
CUTVO should be prepared for each new set
ol samples run.
8. Calculations.—6.1 Average dry gas
met«r temperature, stack temperature, stack
pressure and average orifice pressure drop
See data sheet (flg. 101-6).
6,2 Dry gas volume.—Correct the sample
volume measured by the dry gas meter to
stack conditions by xifeing equation 101-2.
T. V ""+13.C.)
• 11, ' It' Jt^ jj^
oq 101 2
where:
V.^VolmiK1 olp 11 s.i'iiptp tluotiu!'. Hit' inj J.M-'. In
(stuck oacwl,tioii>), ft'.
Vn =Volume off A" '•"iiplc rlirotitli Ihi'iliy fa- nn ti r
(lIK'lCVlMUlUlK'US), H'
T, -= A\t'ni^c ti'inpci.itim1 of ^Liick IMS"!!,
Tm — AvtMU^r fliy n is imHiT trnipcr.itun1, ° H.
Pv*,~ Barometric pressure at the orifice
meter, InHg.
AH = Average pressure drop across the ori-
fice meter, InH.O.
13.6 = Specific gravity ol mercury.
P, = Staok pressure, Pb.r±statlc pressure,
InHg.
III-A-10
-------
8.3 Volumt of water vapor.
T.
'K.V..
P.
eq. 101-3
where:
Vw." Volume of water vapor In the gas sample (stack
conditions), ft*.
KV.0.00267
' whon tlloBO Ulllu *re UMdl
l'i" Total volume of liquid collated In Implngon
mul silica go\ (mo figure 101-7), ml.
7', • Avnrtmo stiwk KIM tainiwraturo, °R.
7',-Mtiu'k imwtmro, J'».f ± itntlo jiretwure, In. Ify.
0.4 Total iciw volume.
l'i.i.i 'V..+Vr. oq. 10M
Whnro:
V'w.i™ Total volume of gal sample (stock condition!),
ft*.
V» -Volume of gas through gas meter (stack condi-
tions), ft«.
Vw," Volume of wator vapor la gas sample (stack
conditions), ft*.
PIMM.
INITIAL
LIQUID COLLECTED
TOTAL VOLUME COLLECTED
vocuue or LIQUID
»ATE«COUICT1O
IMPINOIII
VOLUK,
' nl
WLICAOB.
OTIOHT,
' g
r| ^
coNvoiT WIBHT Of WATEH TO VOLUME ir dividing total weight
INCREASE Sr DENIITT OF WATER. 11 (/mil:
> VOLUME WATER, nl
Figure 101-7. Anilyilcil ditt.
8.B Stock gM velocity. Use equation 101-0
to calculate the itack gaa velocity.
when1:
(I'«)«TI.» Averape stack
eq. 101-5
ity, feet per second.
C,
)
, when
these units are used,
Pilot tube coefficient, dlmenslonlesi.
.-Average stack gas temperature, °B.
.-Average square root of the velocity heed
of stock gas (In. HiO)'/i (see fig. 101-6),
Pi- Stack pressure, Pb.,±itatlc pressure, In. Hg.
Mi-Molecular weliht of stack gas (wet basis),
the Humiliation of the products of the
molecular weight of each component
multiplied by its volumetric proportion
in the mixture, Ib./lb. mole.
Figure 101-8 shows a sample recording sheet
for velocity traverse data. Use the average*
In the lost two columns of figure 101-8 to
determine the average stack gas velocity from
equation 101-6.
6.6 Mercury collected. Calculate the total
weight of mercury collected by using equa-
tion 101-6.
where:
Wi= total weight of mercury collected,
PLANT.
DATE_
RUN N0._
STACK DIAMETER. In..
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE. In. H0U
STATIC PRESSURE IN STACK (Pg), In. Hg..
OPERATORS
SCHEMATIC OF STACK
CROSS SECTION
Traverse point
number
Velocity head,
In. H20
AVERAGE:
Stack Temperature
Figure 101-8. Velocity traverse data.
in-A-n
-------
Vi = Total volume of condensed moisture
and IC1 In sample bottle, ml.
Ci =Oonoentration of mercury meaaured In
sample bottle, ng/tal.
Vt.— Total volume of IC1 used in sampling
(Implnger contents and all waslx
amounts), ml.
C i.- Blank concentration of mercury in IC1
solution, (ig/ml,
V/ — Total volume of IC1 used In filter bottle
(If used), ml.
Ci CoiiconirnlUm of mercury \\\ niter
bottle (if UHod). ji|r/ml.
(i.7 Tottvl mercury emission. Culculftt* the
total amount of mercury emitted from each
stack, per day by equation 101-7. This equa-
tion Is applicable for continuous operations.
For cyclic operations, use only the time per
day each stack Is In operation. The total
mercury emissions from a source will be the
summation of results from all stacks.
pllng Measurements, Paper presented at the
Annual Meeting oT Che Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-16, 1970.
11. Bmlth,"W. S.,etal..Stack Q«s Sampling
Improved and Simplified with New Equip-
ment, APOA paper Ho. »T-1W, 1W7.
12. Smith, W. 8., R. T. Sblgehara, and W.
V. Todd, A Method of Interpreting Stack
Sampling Data, Paper presented at th« 83d
Annual Meeting ot the All Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis. Mo., June 14-19, 1970.
13. Specifications for Incinerator Testing at
Federal Facilities PHB, NOAFO, 1807.
14. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks
for Partlculate Matter, tn: 1671 Book of
ASTM Standards, part 33, Philadelphia, 1671,
ASTM Designation D-2928-71.
15. Vennard, J. K., Elementary Fluid Me-
chanics, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, 1947.
p
K
•where:
fi
W,(ti,).T,./4.w86,400 seconds/day
-- 57 - — X - 7"^ - ; -
Vuu, 10" fig/g.
eq. 101-7
Rate of emission, g/day.
Total weight of mercury collected, pg.
Vtoui=Total volume of gas sample (Black conditions),
ft».
Mm. "Average stack gas velocity, feet per second.
A,-* Stack area, ft".
6.8 Isoklnetlc variation (comparison ot
velocity of gas In probe tip to stack velocity) ,
eq. 101-8
where:
/= Percent of isokincttc sampling.
Vi<,t.i=Total volume of giu sample (stack conditions),
ft".
A," Probe tip nrerv, ft5.
$"Siunplinf! time, sec.
{''•).TI. "Average stack pis vului'lty, feet pa second.
7. Evaluation of results—T.l Determina-
tion of compliance, — 7.1.1 Each performance
test shall consist of three repetitions of the
applicable test method. For the purpose of
determining compliance with an applicable
national emission standard, the average of
results of all repetitions shall apply.
7.2 Acceptable itoMnetio results.— 7.2.1
The following range sets the limit on accept-
able Isoklnetlc sampling results:
If 90%a£l-£llO%, the results are accept-
able; otherwise, reject the test and repeat.
8. References. — 1. Addendum to Specifica-
tions for Incinerator Testing at Tederal
Facilities, PHS, NCAPC, Dec. 6, 1867.
2. Determining Dust Concentration in a
Oas Stream, ASME Performance Test Code
No. 27, New Tork, N.T., 1957. •
3. Devorkln, Howard, et al., Air Pollution
Source Testing Manual, Air Pollution Con-
trol District, Los Angeles, Calif., Nov. 1963.
4. Batch, W. R. and W. L. Ott, "Determina-
tion of Sub-Microgram Quantities of Mercury
by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry,"
Anal. Chem., 40:2085-87, 1968.
5. Mark, L. 8., Mechanical Engineers' Band-
book, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York,
N.Y., 1951.
6. Martin, Robert M., Construction Details
of Isokinetlo Source Sampling Equipment,
Environmental Protection Agency, APTD- '
0581.
7. Methods for Determination of Velocity,
Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Oases,
Western Precipitation Division of Joy Mfg.
Co., Los Angeles, Calif. Bui. WP-60, 1968.
8. Perry, J. H., Chemical Engineers' Hand-
book, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York,
N.Y., 1960.
9. Rom, Jerome J., Maintenance, Calibra-
tion, and Operation of Isoklnetlc Source Sam-
pling Equipment, Environmental Protection
Agency, APTD-0576.
10. Shlgehara, R. T., W. F. Todd, and W. 8.
Smith, Significance of Errors In Stack Sam-
III-A-12
-------
METHOD 101. UrKMNCI 1CXTHOD FOB DXTK*-
«nfATTOK or MmooMn AMD «AMK>US MI>-
CTDRT ESB8BIOH8 I9O1C SffiiTIOlIAHY SOBBCM
rifHaataitif- la Princi-
ple.—Partlculate and gaseous mercury emis-
sions are isoklnetloally sampled from the
source and collected In acidic iodine mono-
chloride solution. The mercury collected (in
the mercuric form) is reduced to elemental
mercury in basic solution by hydroxylamlae
sulfate. Mercury is aerated from the solution
and analysed using speetropbotometry.
oedures are described In APTD-0678. The
components essential to this sampling Win
are tike following:
1.B AppHoaWity.—This method is appli-
cable rot the determination of partlculate
and caseous mercury emissions when tlie
carrier *as stream is principally hydroKeu.
The method U for us* in duets or stackx at
stationary souroM. Unless otherwise wpewuoci.
this method is not Intended to apply to RAN
streams other than those emitted directly to
the atmosphere without furttoer processing.
a. .Apparatus—3.1 Sampling train.—A sche-
matic of the sampling train used by EPA
Is shown in figure 103-1. Commercial models
of this train are available, although complete
construction details are described In APTD-
05811 sad operating and maintenance pro-
PROBE Yf STACK
Lr™"-
TYPES
PITOTTUBE
IMPINGERS ICE BATH
BY-PASS.VALVE
CHECK
•VALVE
VACUUM
LINE
VACUUM
GAUGE
MAIN VALVE
DRY TEST METER
AIR-TIGHT
PUMP
•Figure 102-1. Mercury sampling train
2.1.1 JJozzle, Stainless steel or glass with
•harp, tapered leading edge.
3.1.2 Prooe. Sheathed Pyrez* glass.
2.1.3 Pitot tube. Type S (figure 102-2), or
equtralent, with a uueffluleut -wtthm 5 per-
cent over the working range, attached to
probe to monitor st*dk gas velocity.
2.1.4 Impingert. Four Oreenburg-Smlth
Implngers connected ta series with glass ball-
joint fittings. The first, third, and fourth
Implogers mar be modified by replacing the
tip with one-half Inch ID glass tube extend-
ing to one-half Inch from the bottom of the
flask.
2.1.6 Acid trap. Mine safety appliances air
line filter, catalogue No. 81867, with acid ab-
sorbing cartridge and suitable connections, or
equivalent.
2.1.6 Metering system. Vacuum gage, leak-
less pump, thermometers capable of measur-
ing temperature to within B*T, dry gas meter
with 8 percent accuracy, and related equip-
ment, described In APTD-0681, to maintain
an isokinetic sampling rate and to determine
sample volume.
2.1.7 Barometer. To measure atmospheric
pressure to ± 0.1 in hg.
TUBING ADAPTER
1 These documents are available for a nomi-
nal cost from the National Technical In-
formation Service, U.S. Department of Com-
merce, 6286 Port Royal Road, Springfield/ Va.
22161.
• Mention of trade names or commercial
products does not constitute endorsement
by the Environmental Protection Agency.
PljufHM-8. PHct luta
III-A-13
-------
3,3 Measurement of ttaok condition*
(stack pressure, temperature, moisture, an*
velocity)—3.3.1 Pitot tube. Type 8. or
equivalent, with a coefficient within B per-
cent over theworklng range.
2.2.2 Differential pressure gage. Inclined
manometer, or equivalent, to measure veloc-
ity head to within 10 percent of the mini-
mum value. Mieromanometers should be used
if warranted.
2.2.3 Temperature gage. Any tempera-
ture-measuring device to measure stack tem-
perature to within 1* P.
2.2.4 Pressure gate. Pitot tube and in-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
stack pressure to within 0.1 in hg.
2.2.8 Moisture determination. Drying
tubes, condensers, or equivalent, to deter-
mine stack gas moisture content in hydrogen
to within 1 percent.
2.3 Sample recovery—2.3.1 Leakiest glass
sample bottles. 500 ml and 200 ml with Tef-
lon-lined tops.
2.3.2 Graduated cylinder. 250 ml.
2.33 Plastic jar. Approximately 300 ml.
2,4 Analysis—2.4.1 Spectrophotometer.
To measure absorbance at 353.7 nm. Perkln
Elmer model 303, with a cylindrical gas cell
(approximately 1.5 In o.d. x 7 In) with quart*
glass windows, and hollow cathode source, or
equivalent.
2,4.3 Qas sampling bubbler. Tudor Scien-
tific Oo. Smog Bubbler, catalogue No. TP-
1150, or equivalent.
2.4.3 Recorder. To match output of
spectrophotometer.
3. Reagents.—3,1 Stock reagents.—3.1.1
Potassium iodide. Reagent grade.
3.1.2 Distilled water.
3.14 Potassium Iodide solution, 15 per-
cent.—Dissolve 350 g of potassium Iodide (re-
agent 8.1.1) in distilled water and dilute to
1 tol.
3.1.4 Hydrochloric acid. Concentrated.
3.1.5 Potaiiium iodate. Reagent grade.
3.1.6 Iodine monochloride (SCI) UtM,
To 800 ml of 25 percent potassium Iodide
solution (reagent 3.1.3), add 800 ml of con-
centrated hydrochloric acid. Cool to room
temperature. With vigorous stirring, slowly
add 135 g of potassium Iodate and continue
stirring until all free Iodine has dissolved to
give a clear orange-red solution. Cool to room
temperature and dilute to 1,800 ml with dis-
tilled water. The solution should be kept in
amber bottles to prevent degradation.
3,1.7 Sodium hydroxide pellets. Reagent
grade.
3.1.8 »«r«c acid. Concentrated.
3,1,0 Hydroxt/lamine sul/ate. Reagent
grade.
3.1.10 Sodivm chloride. Reagent grade.
3.1.11 Mercuric chloride. Reagent grade.
3.2 Sampling. 3.2.1 Absorbing solution,
0.1M id. Dilute 100 ml of the l.OM IC1 stock
solution (reagent 3.1.6) to 11 with distsUled
water. The solution should be kept in glass
bottles to prevent degradation. This reagent
should be stable for at least 3 months; how-
ever, periodic checks should be performed to
insure quality.
3.3.3 Wash acid. 1:1 V/V nitric acid-water.
3.2.3 Distilled, deionieed water.
3.2.4 Bilica gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16
mesh, dried at 850 «F for 3 hours.
3.3. Analysis—3.3.1 Sodium hydroxide,
ION. Dissolve 400 g of sodium hydroxide pel-
lets In distilled water and dilute to 1 1.
3.3.3 Reducing agent, 11 percent hydrox-
1/lamine sulfate, 12 percent sodium chloride.
To 60 ml of distilled water, add 19 g of hy-
droxylamine sulfate and 13 g of sodium chlo-
ride. Dilute to 100 ml. This quantity is
sufficient tor 30 analyses and must be pre-
pared daily.
3.8.3 Aeration gat. Zero grade air.
8.8.4 Hydrochloric acid. 0.3N. Dilute 25.6
ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid to 1 1
with distilled water.
8.4 Standard mercury solutions—3.4.1
Stock solution. Add 0.1354 g of mercuric
chloride to 80 ml of 0.3H hydrochloric aold.
After the mercuric chloride has dissolved,
add 0.3N hydrochloric acid and adjust the
volume to 100 ml. One ml of this solution
is equivalent to 1 mg of free mercury.
3.4.3 Standard solutions. Prepare cali-
bration solutions by serially diluting the
stock solution (8.4.1) with 0.3N hydrochloric
aold. Prepare solutions at concentrations in
the linear working range for the Instrument
to be used. Solutions of 0.3 Kg/ml, 0.4 *g/ml
and 0.6 jig/ml have been found acceptable
for most instruments. Store all solutions in
glass-stoppered, glass bottles. These solutions
should be stable for at least a months; how-
ever, periodic checks should be performed
to insure quality.
4. Procedure. 4.1 Guidelines for source
testing are detailed In the following sections.
These guidelines are generally applicable;
however, most sample sites differ to some de-
gree and temporary alterations such as stack
extensions or expansions often are required
to insure the best possible sample site. Fur-
ther, since mercury is hazardous, care should
be taken to minimize exposure. Fnally, since
the total quantity of mercury to be collected
generally is small, the test must be cart-
fully conducted to prevent contamination or
loss of sample.
4.3 Selection of a sampling site and mini-
mum number of traverse points.
4.3.1 Select a suitable sampling site that
is as close as is practicable to the point of
atmospheric emission. If possible, stacks
smaller than 1 foot in diameter should not
be sampled.
4.9.2 The sampling site should be at least
eight stack or duet diameters downstream
and two diameters upstream from any flow
disturbance such at a bend, expansion or
contraction. For rectangular cross section,
determine an equivalent diameter from the
following equation:
Z>.=
U.W
eq.103-1
•rw
where:
rj.=equivalent diameter,
L=length.
W=width.
4.2.3 When the above sampling site crite-
ria can be met, the minimum number of
traverse points is four (4) for stacks 1 foot In
diameter or less, eight (8) for stacks larger
than 1 foot but 3 feet In diameter or less, and
twelve (13) for stacks larger than a feat.
4.3.4 Borne sampling situation* may ren-
der the above sampling site criteria imprac-
tical. When this Is the case, choose a con-
venient sampling location and use figure
103-8 to determine the minimum number of
traverse points. However, use figure 103-8
only for stacks 1 foot in diameter or larger.
4.2.8 To use figure 103-8, first measure the
distance from the chosen sampling location
to the nearest upstream and downstream dis-
turbances. Divide this distance by the di-
ameter or equivalent diameter to determine
the distance In terms of pipe diameters. De-
termine the corresponding number of trav-
erse points for each distance from figure
103-8. Select the higher of the two numbers
of traverse points, or a greater value, such
that for circular stacks the number I* a mul-
tiple of four, and for rectangular stacks the
number follows the criteria of section 4.8.9.
NUMBER W DUCT DIAMETERS UPSTREAM'
(DISTANCE A)
•MOM POINT OP AW TOI OP
DinUNUNCl IKND. KXMWION, CONTRACTION, ETC,)
NMiBI W DUCT DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM'
{DISTANCES)
Flflun 104-3. Minimum number cftravtrtapolrti.
XT a selected sampling point Is closer
loob from stack wall, adjust the looa-
tion of that point to insure that the sample
is taken at lea* 11Mb away from the will.
III-A-14
-------
4,3
tkxul layout Hd looatton of
4.S.1 For circular stack* locate the tra-
verse point* on at least two rtlametets ac-
cording to figure lOft-4 and table 100-1. The
traverse axes snail divide tbe •tack-cross Mo-
tion Into equnl part*.
4.3.2 For rectangular stacks divide the
oroe«-*ection into a* many equal rectangular
areas as traverse point*, such that the ratio of
the length to the width of the elemental areas
is between one and two. Locate tbe traverse
points at the centrold of each equal ana ac-
cording to figure 102-B.
4.4 Measurement of stack conditions.
4.4.1 Set up ttte apparatus «• shown in
figure US-4. Make mire all conn*otwn* are
tight and leak AM. Measure tbe velocity bead
and temperature at tbe -traverse points speci-
fied by section 44 and 4.S.
4.4.2 Measure the static pressure to the
•tack.
4.4.3 Determine tbe itack gai nwUture.
FtoMUi-4. OrotiMcM«nitlrnftrm«tighsxtintoeffltn«
wuh MV
et MA
Tabla 102-1. Location of traveTM point* In eirctil«r
(Parcant of stack dlwatar frm Inlte vail to tmarh
Travtrsa
point
number
on a
diameter
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
2
14 6
85.4
4
6.7
25.0
75.0
93.3
Nui
6
4 4'
14.7
29.C
70.5
85.3
95.6
nbar o
•8
3.3
10.5
19.4
32.3
67.7
80.6
89.5
96.7
f trav
10
t.«j
8.2
14.6
22.6
34.2
0^
77.4
85.4
91.8
97.5
ar«p<
12
t.l
«,7
11.4
17.7
25.0
35.5
64.5
W.O
82.3
88.2
93.3
97.9
)1nti i
14
1.8
5.7
9.9
14 .«
20.1
26.9
36.6
«3.4
73.1
79.9
85.4
90.1
94.3
48.2
)n a d
1«
1.6
4,4
8.5
It.S
16.9
22.0
28 J
37.5.
62.5
71.7
78.0
83.]
o7.5
91.5
95,1
98,4
Janata
.w
1.4
4.4
7.5'
10.9
14.6
18.8
23.6
29. <
38.2
61.8
70.4
76.4
81.2
85.4
89.1
92.5
95.6
98,6
r
9
J.J
J.t
' tJ
9.7
12.9
16.5
20.4'
«.-0
30.6
38.«
61.2
69.4
75.0
79.6
83.5
87.1
90.3
93.3
96,1
98.7
M
1.1
9.5
C.O
8.7
11.6
14.6
18.0
21 .6
26.1
31.5
39.3
60,7
68.5
7J.S
78.2
82.0
8S.4
88.4
91.3
94.0
96.6
98.9
14
1 1
1.2
?.S
7.9
10.5
13.2
16.1
19.4
23.0
27.2
31.3
31.8
69.2
67.7'
72,8
77,0
88.6
81.9
a.s
89.5
92.1
94.5
96.8
98.9
444 Determine tbe stack
**hti
aneTtagjfledgitf the opMtrt •*•-__--
QQBjpojaieiBn. Buuud sngtaeertng Judgment
44 PisjpsraUonof «ampllng train.
444 MMT to ejssartm, «Uan all glaw-
•) »7
tap water, and finally
KXsUMKJlin
distilled
,t*r,«.iu
of preweighed eiiioa
« she flmt three
MO g.
•he fourth la-
flat*. Save 80 ml of the oaicici as« Wank
m etae sample aaalytl*. Set up tbe train and
the probe as in figure Mft-1.
43.2 Leak cheek tbe campling train at
«* sampling sfte. TiMleafeage rate ebouM
VP* MBT •» MMMB •» m yWHn« Of tbe) Q^Wil^Ql
sampling rate, toaoe cnsAetf Ice around «M
imvi>iiii. Add mot* •» during the run to
*eep 4be teaperejtui* of tbe gaees leaving
the last impinger at 70* F or tan.
4.6 Merctuy tralix operation.
44.1 Safety procedures. It is imperative
that tbe sampler conduct the source test
under conditions of utmost safety, since
hydrogen and air mixtures are explosive. The
sample train essentially is leakiest M that
attention to safe operation can be concen-
trated at the inlet and outlet. The following
epeelac Items are recommended:
4,0.1.1 Operate only tbe vacuum pump
during tfce Met The other electrical equip-
ment, *«. heaters, fans «nd timers, normally
are not essential to the success of a hydro-
gen stream test.
44.1J Mai tbe sample port to minimise
leekaje of hydrogen from the stack.
4.«.1.S Tent stapled hydrogen at least
10 feet away from the train. This can be
accomplished easily by attaching a %-ln i.d.
Tygoa tube to the exhaust from tb» orifice
44,9 For each rua, record the data re-
quired on the sample sheet shown In figure
US-CM Take readings at each sampling point
at Jeaet «reiy 8 JBtaertes «a4 wbea elgnMoant
dlttoaal aajmtmente In Bowvate.
4.64 Sample at a rate of 0.5 to 1.0 cfm.
Samples shall be taken over such a period
or periods as are necessary to accurately
determine the maximum emissions which
would occur in a 34-hour period. In the case
of cyclic operations, sufficient tests shall be
made to as to •allow aoousate determination
or oeicvdatton of the emission* which will
•oowovsr the duration of tb» cycle. A mlnl-
nramwmple time of a hours I* recommended.
In come Instances; high mercury concentra-
tions oan prevent sampling In one run tor
HM deeli-Bd minimum time. This is indicated
by reddening in the first impinger as f rV*
1e«tne 1s liberated. In this oase, a run may
be divided Into two or more subruns to Insure
that the absorbing solution* are not depleted.
III-A-15
-------
RANT
lOCATia
4
WEUTtt
DATE
•mitt. ^
UUKCIOIM.
KTOlia
win
vauM
IVM.ir
AMMMTMNMIIM
"*~"™>"~"" i I,,
NOmEDIAMtm,(n.__
OMUMITOMMTUI
ATWOAtlum
mut(
An.
A.9.
OUTUT
A««.
UVUM
TOMMTUI.
•f
^M»
^H«
•«••
•^^
^^W
MKMB
TOJKHAIVM.
•f
F,e1d dit*
4.6.4 To begin sampling, position the noz-
Ele at the first traverse point with the tip
pointing directly into the gas stream. Imme-
diately start the pump and adjust the flow
to Isoklnetlc conditions. Sample for at least
• minutes at each traverse point; sampling
time must be the same for each point. Main-
tain Isoklnetlc sampling throughout the sam-
pling period, using the following procedures.
4.6.4.1 Nomographs which aid In the rapid
adjustment of the sampling rate without
other computations are In AFTD-0676 and
are available from commercial suppliers. The
available nomographs, however, are set up
for use In air streams, and minor changes are
required to provide applicability to hydrogen.
4.6.4.2 Calibrate the meter box orifice. Use
the techniques as described In APTD-0576.
4.6.4.3 The correction factor nomograph
discussed in APTIM>576 and shown on the
reverse side of commercial nomographs will
not be used. In Its place, the correction factor
will be calculated using equation 102-2.
C=0.01
cc,Af.)« P.
Pm M.
eq. 102-2
where:
G=Correction factor.
Cj>=Pitot tube coefficient.
Afc=M6le fraction dry gas.
P,=Stack pressure, InHg.
pm=Meter pressure, InHg.
7™=Meter temperature, °R.
M< = Molecular weight of stack gas (from
4.4.4), Ib/lb mole.
AH @= Meter box calibration factor, ob-
tained in step 4.6.4.2.
4.6.4.4 Set the calculated correction factor
on the front of the operating nomograph.
Select the proper nozzle and set the K-footor
on the nomograph as detailed in APTD-0676.
4.6.4.5 Bead the velocity head In the stack
at each sample point from the manometer In
the meter box. Convert the hydrogen AP to
an equivalent value for air by multiplying by
a ratio of the molecular weight of air to hy-
drogen at the stack moisture content. Insert
this value of A? onto the nomograph and
read off AH. Again, convert the Ml, which to
an air equivalent value, to the AJ? for hydro-
gen by dividing by 13. This factor includes
the ratio of the dry molecular weights and a
correction for the different orifice calibration
factors for hydrogen and air. This procedure
is diagrammed below:
Observe Al'
Bead ofl
Multlply
by
>Divideby 13= WH to be used on meter bou
4.6.4.6 Operate the sample train at the
calculated AH at each sample point.
4.6.S Turn off the pump at the conclusion,
of each run and record the final readings.
Immediately remove the probe and nozzle
from the stack and handle In accordance with
the sample recovery process described in sec-
tion 4.7.
4.7 Sample recovery.
4.7.1 (All glass storage bottles and the
graduated cylinder must be precleaned as In
section 4.5.1). This operation should be per-
formed in an area free of possible mercury
contamination. Industrial laboratories and
ambient air around mercury-using facilities
are not normally free of mercury contamina-
tion. When the sampling train Is moved, care
must be exercised to prevent breakage and
contamination.
4.7.3 Disconnect the probe from the 1m-
plnger train. Place the contents (measured
to ±1 ml) of the first three Implngers into
a 600 ml sample bottle. Rinse the probe and
all glassware between It and the back half
of the third Implnger with two 60 ml por-
tions of 0.1M IC1 solution. Add these rinses
to the first bottle. For a blank, place 80 ml
of the 0.1M IC1 in a 100 ml sample bottle.
Place the silica gel in the plastic jar. Seal and
secure all containers for shipment. If an ad-
ditional test Is desired, the glassware can be
carefully double rinsed with distilled water
and reassembled. However, If the glassware is
to be out of use more than 2 days, the initial
acid wash procedure must be followed.
4.8 Analysis—4.8.1 Apparatus prepara-
tion.—Clean all glassware according to the
procedure of section 4.6.1. Adjust the instru-
ment settings according to the Instrument
manual, using an absorption wavelength of
263.7 nm.
4.8.3 Analysis preparation.—Adjust the
air delivery pressure and the needle valve to
obtain a constant air flow of about 1.3 l/mln.
The analysis. tube should be bypassed ex-
cept during aeration. Purge the equipment
for 3 minutes. Prepare a sample of mercury
standard solution (3.4.2) according to sec-
tion 4.8.3. Place the analysis tube In the line,
and aerate until a maximum peak height is
reached on the recorder. Remove the analy-
sis tube, flush the lines, and -rinse the
analysis tube with distilled water. Repeat
With another sample of the same standard
solution. This purge and analysis cycle is to
be repeated until peak heights are repro-
ducible.
4.8.3 Sample preparation.—Just prior to
analysis, transfer a sample aliquot of up to
50 ml to the cleaned 100 ml analysis tube.
Adjust the volume to 50 ml with 0.1M IC1
if required. Add 6 ml of 10 N sodium hydrox-
ide, cap tube with a clean glass stopper and
shake vigorously. Prolonged, vigorous shak-
ing at this point Is necessary to obtain an
accurate analysis. Add 6 ml of the reducing
agent (reagent 3.3.2), cap tube with a clean
glass stopper and shake vigorously and im-
mediately place in sample line.
4.8.4 Mercury determination.—After the
system has been stabilized, prepare samples
from the sample bottle according to section
4.8.3. Aerate the sample until a maximum
peak height Is reached on the recorder. The
mercury content Is determined by comparing
the peak heights of the samples to the peak
heights of the calibration solutions. If col-
lected samples are out of the linear range.
the samples should be diluted. Prepare a
blank from the 100 ml bottle according to
section 4.8.3 and analyze to determine the
reagent blank mercury level.
5. Calibration.—6.1 Sampling Train. 5.1.1
Use standard methods and equipment as de-
tailed In APTD-0576 to calibrate the rate
meter, pltot tube and dry gas meter. Recali-
brate prior to each test series.
8.3 Analysis.—6.2.1 Prepare a calibra-
tion curve for the spectrophotometer using
the standard mercury solutions. Plot the
peak heights read on the recorder versus the
concentration of mercury in the standard
solutions. Standards should be interspersed
with the samples since the calibration can
change slightly with time. A new calibration
curve should be prepared for each new set
of samples run.
6. Calculations—6.1 Average dry gas meter
temperature, stack temperature, stack pres-
sure and average arlflce pressure drop.—See
data sheet (fig. 102-6).
6.2 Dry gas volume.—Correct the sample
volume measured by the dry gas meter to
stack conditions by using equation 102-3.
Fm =
T..
'Tm
13.6/
P.
cq. 102 3
where
V«, =Volume of KIIS sample through the diy n.is m.-i.-r
(stack tmiclit'ons), It."
Vm = Volume of gas sample through the
dry gas meter (meter conditions),
It3.
T, = Average temperature of stack gas, °R.
Tm=Average dry gas meter temperature,
°R.
Pbir —Barometric pressure at the orifice
meter, InHg.
AH = Average pressure drop across the ori-
fice meter, InHaO.
13.6=Speclflc gravity of mercury.
/»,= Stack pressure, Pb.r±statlc pressure,
inHg.
III-A-16
-------
6.3 Volume of wafer
where:
K«.« Volume of water vapor in the gat sample (stack
conditions), ft".
K.~O.OUi07 — ^-j-^jvj-,-,
i these units arc used.
I'l. Tntul volume of liquid collivtod In implngers
tind tlhru tci'l lse<> ll|;im« 10^ 7), nil.
'I'. Aviini|i« stack K»K InulwatiMT, "It,
/'. Ktm*k pn'.stuiv, /'i.«, > I't-ilte piv-wure-, In. lit'-
6.4 Total gas volume.
Vto«i = rm.4r,. eq. 102-5
where:
Vt.tii=total volume of gas sample (stack
conditions) , ft*.
V». -Volume of gas through dry gas meter (stock
conditions), ft'.
V., -Volume of water vapor in gas sample (stack
conditions), ft'.
nmu.
INITIAL
LIQUID COUECTED
TOTU. VOUJW COLUCTEO
VOUJW OF LIQUID
WATER COLLECTED
WINGED
VOLUME.
•il
MICA GEL
•CK1HT.
t
'1 -
CONVHT «EIGMT OF w*TE« TO VOLUME IT dividing total weight
INCKASE n DENSm OF *ATE« {1 ('mil.
: VOLUME »»1E« ml
Flgura 102-f. Analytical data.
6.5 Stock gas velocity—Use aquation
102-6 to calculate the stack gas velocity.
eq 102-6
where:
(PI) m. — Average stack gas velocity, feet per second.
v ma K ( Ib-lnHg V/».
K, -W-M^,,.^ jb moie°-R-inH'O /
these units arc used.
C, = Pi tot tube coefficient, dimensionlcss.
(T,),.,. =Average stack gss temperature, °R.
tf&f)u,.—Average square root of the velocity head of
stack las (inHiO)'/1 (see figure 102-8).
F, — Stack pressure, />b«r±static pressure, in
A/. = Molecular weight of sto^-k pas (wot basts),
the summation of the products of the
molecular weight oj each component
multiplied by its volumetric proportion
in the mixture. lb/lb-uiole.
Figure 102-8 shows a sample recording sheet
for velocity traverse data. Use the averages In
the last two columns of figure 102-8 to de-
termine the average stack gas velocity from
equation 102-6.
6.6 Mercury collected. Calculate the total
weight of mercury collected by using eq.
102-7.
PLANT
eq. 102-4 DATE.
RUN NO.
STACK DIAMETER, In.
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE, In.
STATIC PRESSURE IN STACK (Pfl), In. M»._
OPERATORS
SCHEMATIC OF STACK
CROSS SECTION
Traverse point
number
Velocity bead,
AVERAGE:
Stack Temperature
Figure 102-6. Velocity traverse data.
III-A-17
-------
» eq. 109-7
where;
Wt=Totol weight of mercury collected, #g.
V i=Total volume ot condensed moisture
and 101 in sample bottle, ml.
C i=Concentration ot mercury measured in
sample bottle, #g/ml.
V1.=Total volume of 101 used in sampling
(Implnger contents and all wash
amounts), ml.
C&--Blank concentration of mercury In 101
solution, Ag/ml.
6.7 Total mercury emission.—Calculate
the total amount of mercury emitted from
each stack per day by equation 109-8. This
equation is applicable for continuous opera-
tions. For cyollo operations, use only the time
per day eaoh stock Is in operation. The total
mercury emissions from a source -will be the
summation of results from all stacks.
P TFi("«).T,. A. w86,400 seconds/day
K !^ -rr — f\ - ,
eq. 102-8
whore;
J!—Rate ot emission, g/day.
If i-Total weight of mercury collected, «ig.
Vioni-Total volume of gas sample (stack conditions),
ft',
(DI)»I. -Average stack gas velocity, feet per second.
X, - Stock are*, ft'.
6.8 fsofcinetio variation (comparison of
velocity of gas in proof tip to stack velocity).
4.® (».)».. eq. 102-9
where:
/-Percent of Isoklnetlo sampling.
Vi.i.1 - Total volume of gas sample (stack conditions),
It'.
A,-Probe Up area, ft'.
9- Sampling time, sec.
(r,).,,,-Average stack gas velocity, feet per second.
7. Evaluation of results.—7.1 Determina-
tion of compliance.—7.1.1 Each performance
test shall consist of three repltltlons of the
applicable test method. For the purpose of
determining compliance with an applicable
national emission standard, the average of
results of all repetitions shall apply.
7.3 Acceptable iaoMnetio results.—7.3.1
The following range sets the limit on ac-
ceptable isoklnetlo sampling results: If
90% ^1^110%, the results are acceptable;
otherwise, reject the tost and repeat.
8. Reference*.—l. Addendum to Specifi-
cations for Incinerator Testing at Federal
Facilities, PHS. NCAPO, Dec. 6, 1967.
a. Determining Dust Concentration In a
Gas Stream, A8MB Performance Test Code
No. 37, New York, N.Y., 1967.
3. Devorkln, Howard, et al., Air Pollution
Source Testing Manual, Air Pollution Con-
trol District, Los Angeles, Calif., Nov. 1968.
4. Hatch, W. R. and W. L. Ott, "Determina-
tion of Sub-Mlcrogram Quantities of Mer-
cury by Atomic Absorption Bpeotrophotom-
etry," Anal. Chem., 40: 3086-87, 1968.
6. Mark, L. S., Mechanical Engineers'
Handbook, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York, N.Y., 1961.
6. Martin, Robert M,, Construction Details
of Isoklnetlo Source Sampling Equipment.
Environmental Protection Agency, APTD-
OB81.
7. Methods for Determination of Velocity,
Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Oases,
Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manu-
facturing Co., Los Angeles, Calif. Bull. WP-BO.
1968.
8. Perry, J. R., Chemical Engineers' Hand-
book, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York,
N.Y., 1960.
9. Rom, Jerome J., Maintenance, Calibra-
tion, and Operation of Isoklnetlo Source
Sampling Equipment, Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, APTD-OS76.
10. Shlgehara, R. T., W. F. Todd, and W. S.
Smith, Significance of Errors in Stack Bam*
pllng Measurement!, Paper presented at the
Annual Meeting ot the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-19,1970.
11. Bmlth, W. S., et al., Stack Gas Sam-
pling Improved and Simplified with New
Equipment, APOA paper No. 67-119, 1967.
13. Smith, W. B., R. T. Shigehara, and W. F.
Todd, A Method of Interpreting Stack Sam-
pling Data, Paper presented at the 63d An-
nual Meeting ot the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-19, 1970.
18. Specifications for Incinerator Tasting
at Federal Facilities PBS, NOAPO, 1967.
14. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks
for partlculate Matter, In: 1971 Book of
ASTM Standards, part 38, Philadelphia, 1971,
A8TM Designation D-3938-71.
16. Vennard, J. S., Elementary Fluid Me-
chanics, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, 1947.
III-A-18
-------
IIKTKOO 10*. mrmuit SCJUBHINO MCTHOD
1. Principle and applicability.—1.1 Prin-
ciple.—Beryllium emissions are Isokinetlcally
sampled from three point* In a duot or stack.
The collected sample is analyzed for beryl-
lium using an appropriate technique.
1.2 Applicability.—This procedure details
guidelines and requirement* for method*
acceptable for use in determining beryllium
emissions in ducts or stack* at stationary
sources, as specified under the provisions of
I 81.14 of the regulations.
3. Apparatu+~3.1 Sampling train.—A
schematic of the required sampling train
configuration 1* shown in figure 103-1. 'The
essential component* of the train are the
following:
9.1.1 Noxzle.—Stainless steel, or equiva-
lent, with sharp, tapered leading edge.
3.1.3 Probe.—Sheathed Pyrex > glass.
3.1.3 FUter.—Mllllpore AA, or equivalent,
with appropriate filter bolder that provide*
a positive seal against leakage from outside
or around the filter. It is suggested that ft
Whatman 41, or equivalent, be placed imme-
diately against the back side of the Mllllpore
filter a* a guard against breakage of the
Milllpore. -Include the Whatman 41 in the
analysis. Equivalent filters must be at least
99.98 percent efficient (DOP Test) and
amenable to the analytical procedure.
NIHMtMP
FlguntOI-1. Bwyniun KrHnlng iMlhod: Ugiplt U«ln MkmMlg.
3.1.4 Utter-pump system.—Anj system
that will maintain Uoklnetlo sampling rate,
determine sample volume, and is capable of
a sampling rate of greater than 0.6 cfm.
3.3 Measurement of stack condition*
(rtoofe preuvre, temperature, moisture and
velocity) .—The following equipment shall be
used in tbe manner specified In section 4.8.1.
9.3.1 Fitot tub«.—Type B, or equivalent,
with a coefficient within B percent over the
working range.
3.9.3 Differential preiture gauge.—In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
velocity head to within 10 percent of the
minimum Talue.
8.3.8. Temperature gauge.—Any tempera-
ture measuring device to measure stack tem-
perature to within 5* F.
9.9.4 Pressure gauge.—Any device to
measure stack pressure to within O.l in. Hg.
3.3.5 Barometer.—To measure atmos-
pheric pressure to within 0.1 In. Hg.
3.3.6 Moisture determination.—Wet and
dry bulb thermometers, drying tubes, con-
densers, or equivalent, to determine stack gas
moisture content to within 1 percent.
, 3.3 Sample recovery.—3.3.1 Probe clean-
ing equipment.—Probe brush or cleaning rod
at least as long as probe, or equivalent. Clean
cotton balls, or equivalent, should be used
with the rod.
3.8.3 teakless glass sample bottles.
3.4 Analysis.—3.4.1 Equipment neces-
sary to perform an atomic absorption.
speotrographlc, fluorometrlc, chromato-.
graphic, or equivalent analysis.
3. Reagents.—3.1 Sample recovery.—3.1.1
Acetone.—Reagent grade.
3.1.3 Waih acid.—1:1 V/V hydrochloric
acid-water.
8.3 Analysis.—3.3.1 Reagent* as neces-
sary for the selected analytical procedure.
4. Procedure.—4.1 Guidelines for source
testing are detailed in the following sections.
These guidelines are generally applicable;
however, most sample sites differ to some de-
gree and temporary alterations such a* stack
extensions or expansions often are required
to insure the best possible sample site. Fur-
ther, since beryllium Is hazardous, care
should be taken to minimize exposure.
Finally, since the total quantity of beryllium
to be collected Is quite small, the test must
be carefully conducted to prevent contami-
nation or loss of sample.
4.3 Selection of a sampling site and num-
ber of runt.—1.3.1 Select a suitable sam-
pling site that is as close as practicable to the
point of atmospheric emission. If possible,
stacks smaller than 1 foot In diameter should
not be sampled.
4.3.3 The sampling site should be at least
eight stack or duct diameters downstream
and two diameters upstream from any flow
disturbance such as a bend, expansion or
contraction. For rectangular cross-section,
determine an equivalent diameter using the
following equation:
D.= i
eq. 103-1
> Mention of trade name* or specific prod-
uct* doe* not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
-L+W '
where:
D.=equivalent diameter
t-length
W=width
4.3.8 Some sampling situations may ren-
der the above sampling site criteria imprac-
tical. When this Is the case, an alternate
site may be selected but must be no less
than two diameters downstream and one-
half diameter upstream from any point of
disturbance. Additional sample runs are rec-
ommended at any sample site not meeting
the criteria of section 4.3.3.
4.3.4 Three run* shall constitute a test.
The run* shall be conducted at three dif-
ferent point*. The three points shall pro-
portionately divide the diameter, I.e. be lo-
cated at 35, 60 and 76 percent of the diameter
from the inside wall. For horizontal ducts,
the diameter shall be in the vertical direc-
tion. For rectangular ducts, sample on a line
through the centroid and parallel to a side.
If additional runs are required per section
4.3.3, proportionately divide the duct to ac-
commodate the total number of runs.
4.8 Measurement of stack conditions.
43.1 Measure the stack gas pressure, mois-
ture, and temperature, using the equipment
described in i 3.3. Determine the molecular
weight of the stack gas. Sound engineering
estimate* may be made in lieu of direct
measurements. The basis for such estimates
•hall be given in the test report.
4.4 Preparation of sampling train.—
4.4.1 Assemble the sampling train as shown
in figure 103-1. It Is recommended that »U
glassware be precleaned by soaking In wash
acid for 2 hours.
4.4.2 Leak check the sampling train at the
sampling site. The leakage rate should not be
in excess of 1 percent of the desired sample
rate.
4 5 Beryllium train operation.—4.6.1 For
each run, measure the velocity at the selected
sampling point. Determine the Isoklnetlc
sampling rate. Record the velocity head and
the required sampling rate.
4 5.2 Place the nozzle at the sampling
point with the tip pointing directly Into the
gas stream. Immediately start the pump and
adjust the flow to Isoklnetlc conditions. At
the conclusion of the test, record the sam-
pling rate. Again measure the velocity head
at the sampling point. The required Isoklnetlc
rate at the end of the period should not have
deviated more than 20 percent from that
originally calculated
4.6 3 Sample at a minimum rate of 0.6
ftVmln. Samples shall be taken over such a
period or periods as are necessary to deter-
mine the maximum emissions which would
occur In a 34-hour period. In the case of
cyclic operations, sufficient tests shall be
made so as to allow determination or calcu-
lation of the emissions which would occur
over the duration of the cycle. A minimum
sampling time of 3 hour* is recommended.
4.6.4 All pertinent data should be in-
cluded in the test report.
4.8 Sample recovery. — 4.6.1 It is recom-
mended that all glassware be precleaned a*
in 1 4.4.1. Sample recovery should also be
performed In an area free of possible beryl-
lium contamination. When the sampling
train la moved, exercise care to prevent
breakage and contamination. Set aside a por-
tion of the acetone used in tbe sample re-
covery as a blank for analysis. The total
amount of acetone used should be measured
for accurate blank correction. Blanks can be
eliminated if prior analysis shows negligible
amounts.
4.6.3 Remove the filter and any loose par-
tlculate matter from filter holder and place
in a container.
4.6.3 Clean the probe with acetone and a
brush or long rod and cotton balls. Wash Into
the container. Wash out the filter holder
with acetone and add to the same container.
4.7 Analysis. — 4.7.1 Make the necessary
preparation of samples and analyze for beryl-
lium. Any currently acceptable method such
as atomic absorption, spectrographlc, fluoro-
metrlc, chromatographio, or equivalent may
be used.
6. Coiibrotion and standards — 5.1 5am-
pling train. — 5.1.1 As a procedural check,
sampling rate regulation should be compared
with a dry gas meter, splrometer, rotameter
(calibrated for prevailing atmospheric con-
ditions), or equivalent, attached to nozzle
inlet of the complete sampling train.
6.1.3 Data from this test and calculations-
should be shown In test report.
8.2 Analysis. — 6.3.1 Standardization is
made as suggested by the manufacturer of
the Instrument or the procedures for the
analytical method.
6. Calculations — 6.1 Total beryllium emis-
sion. Calculate the total amount of beryl-
lium emitted from each stack per day by
equation 103-3. This equation Is applicable
for continuous operations. For cyclic opera-
tions, use only the time per day each stack
Is in operation. The total beryllium emis-
sions from a source will be the summation
of results from all stacks.
K _ y t (".).„. A, 86,400 aoconds/day
whwe:
R- Rate of emission, g/day.
W- Total [weight o( beryllium collootod,^.
VU.i-Total volume of gw mmplod, ft,'.
(».).,« .-Average stack KM velocity, toot per second.
/I, -Stack ana. ft'.
7. Test report. 7.1 A test report shall be
prepared which shall Include as a minimum:
7.1.1 A detailed description of the sam-
pling train used and result* of the proce-
dural check with all data and calculations
made.
7.1.2 All pertinent data taken during
test, the basis for any estimates made* cal-
culations, and results.
7.1.3 A description of the test site, in-
cluding a block diagram with a brief de-
scription of the process, location of the sam-
ple points In the cross section, dimensions
and distances from any point of disturbance.
III-A-19
-------
METHOD 104. REFERENCE METHOD FOR DETER-
MINATION or miyiJuuM EMISSIONS FROM
STATIONARY 8OTTBCX8
1. Principle and applicability—1.1 Prin-
ciple.—Beryllium emissions are isoklnetlcal-
ly sampled from the source, and the collected
sample is digested in an acid solution and
analyzed by atomic absorption spectropho-
tometry.
1.3 Applicability.—This method is appli-
cable for the determination of beryllium
emissions in ducts or stacks at stationary
sources. Unless otherwise specified, this
method is not Intended to apply to gas
streams otber than those emitted directly
to the atmosphere without further
processing.
2. Apparatus—2.1 Sampling train.—A
schematic of the sampling train used by
EPA Is shown In figure 104-1. Commercial
models of this train are available, although
construction details are described In AFTD-
0681.1 and operating and maintenance pro-
cedures are described in APTD-0576. The
components essential to this sampling train
are the following:
2.1.1 Nozzle.—Stainless steel or glass with
sharp, tapered leading edge.
2.1.2 Probe.—Sheathed Pyrex a glass. A
heating system capable of maintaining a
minimum gas temperature in the range of
the stack temperature at the probe outlet
during sampling may be used to prevent
condensatdon from occurring.
HEATED AREA F.ILTER HOLDER THERMOMETER CHECK
xVALVE
TYPES
PITOT TUBE
IMPINGERS ICE BATH
BY-PASS.VALVE
.VACUUM
LINE
THERMOMETERS
VACUUM
GAUGE
MAIN VALVE
DRY TEST METER AIR-TIGHT
PUMP
Figure 104-1. Beryllium sampling train
3.1.3 Pitot tube.—Type S (figure 104-2),
or equivalent, with a coefficient within S per-
cent over the working range, attached to
probe to monitor stack gas velocity.
2.1.4 Filter holder.—Pyrex glass. The filter
holder must provide a positive seal against
leakage from outside or around the filter.
A heating system capable of maintaining the
filter at a minimum temperature in the range
of the stack temperature may be used to
prevent condensation from occurring.
2.1.5 Im.pin.geri.—Four Greenburg-Smlth
implngers connected In series with glass ball
joint fittings. The first, third, and fourth
Implngers may be modified by replacing the
tip with a Va-lnch l.d. glass tube extending
to one-half inch from the bottom' of the
flask.
2.1.6 Metering system.—Vacuum gauge,
leaklesj) pump, thermometer* capable of
measuring temperature to within 6* f, dry
gas meter with 9 percent accuracy, and re-
lated equipment, described in AFTD-0881,
to maintain an isoklnetlc sampling rate and
to determine sample volume.
2.1.7 Barometer.—To measure atmos-
pheric pressure to ± 0.1 In Hg.
2.2 Measurement of stack conditions
(stack pressure, temperature, moisture and
velocity)—2.2.1 Pitot tube.—Type S, or
equivalent* with a coefficient within 5 percent
over the working range.
2.2.2 Differential pressure gauge.—In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
velocity head to within 10 percent of the
minimum value.
1 These documents are available for a nom-
inal cost from the National Technical In-
formation Service, U.S. Department of Com-
merce, S98S Port Royal Road, Springfield,
Va. 22181.
1 Mention of trade names on specific prod-
uct! does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
III-A-20
-------
however, meet sample ••*•• differ to BOOM
degree and temporary alterations such M
stack extensions or expansions often are re-
quired to insure the best possible sample
site. Further, since beryllium Is hazardous,
oare should be taken to minimize exposure.
Finally, since the total quantity of beryllium
to be collected Is quite small, the test must
be Carefully conducted to prevent contami-
nation or loss of sample.
4.2 Selection of a sampling site and mini-
mum number of traverse points.
4.2.1 Select a suitable sampling site that
Is as close as practicable to the point of at-
mospheric emission. If possible, stacks
'Figure 104-2. Pilot tub* • nanometer assembly.
2.2.3 Temperature gage.—Any tempera-
ture measuring device to measure stack tem-
perature to within 5* F.
2.2.4 Pressure gage.—Pilot tube and In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
stack pressure to within 0.1 In Hg.
2.2.8 Moisture determination.—Wet and
dry bulb thermometers, drying tubes, con-
densers, or equivalent, to determine stack
gas moisture content to within 1 percent.
2.3 Sample recovery—2.3.1 Probe clean-
ing rod.—At least as long as probe.
2.3.2 Leakless glass sample bottles.—500
ml.
2.3.3 Graduated cylinder.—250 ml.
2.3.4 Plastic jar.—Approximately 300 ml.
2.4 Analysis—2.4.1 Atomic absorption
spectrophotometer.—To measure absorbanoe
at 234.8 nm. Perkln Elmer Model 303, or
equivalent, with N,O/acetylene burner.
2.4.2 Hot plate.
2.4.3 Perchloric acid fume hood.
3. Reagents—3.1 Stock reagents.—3.1.1
''ydrochloric acid.—Concentrated.
3.1.2 Perchloric acid.—Concentrated, 70
percent.
3.1.3 Nitric acid.—Concentrated.
3.1.4 Sulfuric acid.—Concentrated.
3.1.5 Distilled and deionized water.
3.1.6 Beryllium powder.—98 percent mlnl-
rmjm purity.
3.2 Sampling—3.2.1 Filter. — Mllllpore
AA, or equivalent. It Is suggested that a
Whatman 41 filter be placed immediately
against the back side of the Mllllpore filter
as a .guard against breaking the Mlllipore
filter. In the analysis of the filter, the What-*
man 41 filter should be Included with the
Mllllpore filter.
3.2.2 Silica gel.—Indicating type, 6 to 16
mesh, dried at 350° F for 2 hours.
3.2.3 Distilled and deionized water.
3.3 Sample recovery—3.3.1 Distilled and
deionized water.
3.3.2 Acetone.—Reagent grade.
3.3.3 Wash actd.—l.l V/V hydrochloric
acid-water.
3.4 Analysis.—3.4.1 Sulfuric acid solu-
tion, 12 N.—Dilute 333 ml of concentrated
sulfuric acid to 1 1 with distilled water.
3.4.2 25 percent V/V hydrochloric acid-
water.
3.5 Standard beryllium solution—3.5.1
stock solution.—1 jig/ml beryllium. Dis-
solve 10 mg of beryllium In 80 ml of 12 N
sulfuric acid solution and dilute to a volume
of 1000 ml with distilled water. Dilute a 10 ml
aliquot to 100 ml with 25 percent V/V hydro-
chloric acid, giving a concentration of 1
ig/ml. This dilute stock solution should be
prepared fresh dally. Equivalent strength (in
beryllium) stock solutions may be prepared •
from beryllium salts as Bed, and Be(NO.),
(98 percent minimum purity).
\. Procedure. 4.1 Guidelines for source
jtlng are detailed In the following sections.
These guidelines are generally applicable;
smaller than 1 foot in diameter should not
be sampled.
4.3.2 The sampling site should be at least
8 stack or duct diameters downstream and
9 diameters upstream from any flow disturb-
ance such as a bend, expansion or contrac-
tion. For a rectangular cross-section, deter-
mine an equivalent diameter from the
following equation:
D,=2LW
l+W
where:
D,=equivalent diameter
L=length
W=wldth
eq. 104-1
NUMBER OF DUCT DIAMETERS UPSTREAM'
(DISTANCE A)
FROM POINT Or ANY TypEO*
DISTURBANCE (B(NO. EXPANSION CONTRACTION,
NUMBER OF DUCT DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM
(DISTANCE B)
Figure 101-3. Minimum number ot traveise points.
Figure 104-4. Croat section ot circular Hack showlng'locMloit ot
Iravane points on perpendicular dl»roet»rt.
••
«
•
i i
• i • •
— H-
• I • •
I _{
[ I
. I . , .
Flgun 1044. Croit ration of raotingular ituK divided Into 12 to.wl
•via), with Invtru polnte M etnlrold ol each am.
4.9.3 When the above sampling site cri-
teria can be met, the minimum number of
traverse points Is four (4) for stacks 1 foot
In diameter or less, eight (8) for stacks larger
than 1 foot but a feet In diameter or less, and
twelve (19) for stacks larger than a feet.
4.2.4 Some sampling situations may ren-
der the above sampling site criteria Imprac-
tical. When this Is the cose, choose a con-
venient sampling location and use figure
104-3 to determine the minimum number
of traverse points. However, use figure 104-3
only for stacks 1 foot In diameter or larger.
4.2.6 To use figure 104-3, first measure
the distance from the chosen sampling lo-
cation to the nearest upstream and down-
stream disturbances. Divide this distance by
the diameter or equivalent diameter to deter-
mine the distance in terms of pipe diameters.
Determine the corresponding number of
traverse points for each distance from fig-
ure 104-3. Select the higher of the two num-
bers of traverse points, or a greater value,
such that for circular stacks the number Is
a multiple of four, and for rectangular stacks
the number follows the criteria of section
4.3.2.
4.2.6 If a selected sampling point Is closer
than 1 Inch from the stack wall, adjust the.
location of that point to ensure that the
sample is taken at least 1 inch away from the
wall.
4.3 Cross-sectional layout and location of
traverse points.
III-A-21
-------
i
rv>
ro
Table 104-1. Location of traverse points in circular stacks
(Percent of stack diameter from Inside wall to traverse point)
Traverse
point
number
on a
diameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
IS
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Number of traverse points on a diameter
2
14.6
85.4
4
6.7
25.0
75.0
93.3
6
4.4
14.7
29.5
70.5
85.3
95.6
8
3.3
10.5
19.4
32.3
67.7
80.6
89.5
96.7
Ho
2.5
8.2
14.6
22.6
34.2
65.8
77.4
85.4
91.8
97.5
12
2.1
6.7
11.8
17.7
25.0
35.5"
64.5
75.0
82.3
88.2
93.3
97.9
14
1.8
5.7
9.9
14.6
20.1
26.9
36.6
63.4
73.i
79.9
85.4
90.1
94.3
98.2
16
1.6
4.9
8.5
12.5
16.9
22.0
28.3
37.5
62.5
71.7
78.0
83.1
87.5
91.5
95.1
SB.*
18
1.4
4.4
7.5
10.9
14.6
18.8
23.6
29.6
38.2
61.8
70.4
76.4
81.2
85.4
8&.1
92.5
95.6
98.6
20
1.3
3.9
6.7
9.7
12.9
16.5
20.4
2r.o
30.6
36.8
61.2
69.4
75.0
79.6
83.5
87.1
90.3
93.3
96.1
98.7
22
1.1
3.5
6.0
8.7
11.6
14.6
18.0
21.8
26.1
31.5
39.3
60.7
68.5
73.9
78.2
82.0
85.4
88.4
91.3
94.0
96.5
98.9
24
1.1
3.2
5.5
7.9
10.5
13.2
16.1
19.4
23.0
27.2
32.3
39.8
60.2
67.7*
72.8
77.0
80.6
83.9
86.8
89.5
92.1
94.5
96.8
98.9
4,8.1 For circular stacks locate the tra-
verse points on at least two diameters accord-
ing to figure 104-4 and table 104-1. The tra-
verse axes shall divide the stack cross section
Into equal parts.
4.3.2 For rectangular stacks divide the
cross section Into as many equal rectangular
areas as traverse points, such that the ratio
of the length to the width ol the elemental
areas is between 1 and 3. Locate the traverse
points at the centrold of each equal area
according to figure 104-6.
4.4 Measurement of stack conditions.—
4.4.1 Set up the apparatus as shown in fig-
ure 104-2. Make sure all connections are
tight and leak free. Measure the velocity
head and temperature at the traverse points
specified by |{ 4.2 and 43.
4.4.2 Measure the static pressure la the
stack.
4.44 Determine the stack gas moisture.
4.4.4 Determine the stack gas molecular
weight from the measured moisture content
and knowledge of the expected gas stream
composition. A standard Orsat analyser has
been found valuable at combustion sources.
In all cases, sound engineering judgment
should be used.
4.5 Preparation of umpUng trw»».—4.5.1
Prior to assembly, clean all glassware (probe,
Imptngers, and connectors) by seating In
wash add for » boon. Place 100 aril of dis-
tilled water In each of the first two impring-
ers, leave the third Implnger empty, and place
approximately 200 g of preweighted silica gel
In the fourth Implnger. Save a portion of the
distilled water as a blank in the sample
analysis. Set up the train and the probe as
in figure 104-1.
4.3.2 Leak check the sampling train at the
sampling site. The leakage rate should not be
in excess of 1 percent of the desired sampling
rate. If condensation in the probe or filter Is
A problem, probe and filter heaters will be
required. Adjust the heaters to provide &
temperature at or above the stack tempera-
ture. However, membrane filters such as the
Milllpore AA are limited to about 225° F. If
the stack gas is in excess of about 200° F.,
consideration should be given to an alternate
procedure such as moving the filter holder
downstream of the first Impinger to insure
that the filter does not exceed its tempera-
ture limit Place crushed ice around the 1m-
pingers. Add more ice during the test to keep
the temperature of the gases leaving the last
impinger at 70° F. or less.
4.6 Beryllium train operation.—4.6.1 For
each run, record the data required oil the
example sheet shown in figure 104-6. Take
readings at each sampling point at least
every 5 minutes and when significant changes
in stack conditions necessitate additional ad-
justments in flow rate.
4.6.2 Sample at a rate of 0.5 to 1.0 ft.Vmln.
Samples shall be taken over such a period or
periods as are necessary to accurately deter-
mine the maximum emissions which would
occur in a 24-hour period. In the case of
cyclic operations, sufficient tests shall be
made so as to allow accurate determination
or calculation of the emissions which will
occur over the duration of the cycle. A mini-
mum sample time of 2 hours is recommended.
SCHEWHC OF STAC* CUSS SKTKM
JTAHC
nc
r$>. !
vttocm
HUO.
KM.
(•HI.
to.HjO
. i Held data
4.63 To begin sampling, position the noz-
zle at the first traverse point with the tip
pointing directly Into the gas stream. Imme-
diately start the pump and adjust the flow
to teoklnetlc conditions. Sample for at least
5 rntyT*"" ** each, traverse point; sampling
«nn» must be the same for each point. Main-
tain Isoklnetic ttiitrp11"c throughout the sam-
pling period. Homographs which aid in the
rapid adjustment of the sampling rate with-
out otber computations are in APTD-O67B
and are available from commercial suppliers.
Note that standard monographs are applica-
ble only for type S pitot tubes and air or a
stack gas with an equivalent density. Con-
tact EPA or the sampling train supplier for
Instructions when the standard monograph
Is not applicable.
4.6.4 Turn off the pump at the conclusion
of each run and record the final readings.
Immediately remove the probe and nozzle
-------
from the stack and bandit In accordance with
the sample recovery process described In 14.7.
4.7 Sample recover*.—4.7.1 (All glass)
storage bottles and the graduated cylinder
must be precleaned as In 14.5.1.) This opera-
tion should be performed In an area free of
possible beryllium contamination. When the
sampling train is moved, care must be exer-
cised to prevent breakage and contamination.
4.7.3 Disconnect the probe from the 1m-
plnger train. Remove the filter and any loot*
particulate matter from the filter holder and
place In a sample bottle. Place the content!
(measured to ±1 ml) of the first three 1m-
pingers Into another sample bottle. Rinse the
probe and all glassware between It and the
back half of the third Implnger with water
and acetone, and add this to the latter sam-
ple bottle. Clean the probe with a brush or a
long slender rod and cotton balls. Use acetone
while cleaning, Add these to the sample bot-
tle. Retain a sample of the water and acetone
as a blank. The total amount of wash water
and acetone used should be measured for ac-
curate blank correction. Place the silica gel
in the plastic Jar. Seal and secure all sample
containers for shipment. If an additional test
is desired, the glassware can be carefully dou-
ble rinsed with distilled water and reassem-
bled. However, If the glassware Is to be out of
use more than 3 days, the Initial acid
wash procedure must be followed.
4.8. Analysis.
4.8.1 Apparatus preparation.—Clean all
glassware according to the procedure of sec-
tion 4.5.1. Adjust the instrument settings
according to the Instrument manual, using
an absorption wavelength of 334.8 nm.
4.8.3 Sample preparation.—The digestion
of beryllium samples le accomplished in part
in concentrated perchloric acid. Caution;
The analyst must Insure that the sample is
heated to light brown fumes after the Initial
nitric acid addition; otherwise, dangerous
perchlorates may result from the subsequent
perchloric acid digestion. Perchloric add also
should be used only under a perchloric acid
hood.
4.8.3.1 Transfer, the filter and any loose
particulate matter from the sample container
to a 150 ml beaker. Add 35 ml concentrated
nitric acid. Heat on a hotplate until light
brown fumes are evident to destroy all or-
ganic matter, Cool to room temperature and
add 5 ml concentrated sulfurlo acid and 6
ml concentrated perchloric acid. Then pro-
ceed with step 4.8.3.4.
4.8.3.3 Place a portion of the water and
acetone sample Into a 150 ml beaker and put
on a hotplate. Add portions of the remainder
as evaporation proceeds and evaporate to dry-
ness. Oool the residue and add 35 ml concen-
trated nitric acid. Heat on a hotplate until
light brown fumes are evident to destroy any
organic matter, cool to room temperature
and add 5 ml concentrated sulfurlo acid, and
6 ml concentrated perchloric MM. then pro-
ceed with step 4JJM.
4.8JJ weigh the tpent silica gel and re-
port to the nearest gram.
4.8.9.4 Samples from 4.8.1.1 and 4,8.8.8
may be combined here for ease of analysis.
Replace on a hotplate and evaporate to dry-
ness In a perchloric acid hood. Oool and dis-
solve the residue In 10.0 ml of 88 percent
V/V hydrochloric acid. Sample* are now
ready for the atomic absorption unit. The
beryllium concentration of the sample must
be within the calibration range of the unit.
If necessary, further dilution of sample with
as percent V/V hydrochloric acid must be
performed to bring the sample within the
calibration range.
4.8.8 Beryllium determination.— Analyse
the samples prepared in 4.8.3 at 3344 nm
using a nitrous oxide/acetylene flame. Alumi-
num, silicon and other elements can inter-
fere with this method if present in large
quantities. Standard method! are available,
however, to effectively eliminate these Inter-
ferences (see Reference 8).
6. OoHora'tion— 8.1 Sampling train.—
8.1.1 Use standard method* and equipment
as detailed In APTD-0579 to calibrate the rate
meter, pltot tube, dry gas meter and probe
heater (if used). Recalibrate prior to each
test series. ,
S.3 Analyti*.— B.3.1 Standardization is
made with the procedure as suggested by the
manufacturer with standard beryllium solu-
tion. Standard solutions will be prepared
from the stock solution by dilution with 95
percent V/V hydrochloric acid. The linearity
of working range should be established with
a series of standard solutions. If collected
samples are out of the linear range, the
samples should be diluted. Standards should
be interspersed with the samples since the
calibration can change slightly with time.
6. Calculation* — e.l Average dry got meter
temperature, itack temperature, ttacfc pres-
sure and average orifice pretture drop.— See
data sheet (figure 104-«) .
0.3 Dry gat volume. — Correct the sample
volume measured by the dry gas meter to
stack conditions by using equation 104-9.
where:
V,
6 J Volume of iMter Mpor.
ej» ejs> « A fl
P.
eq. ',104-2
, -Volume ofgu mania through the dryg: 1 meter
(iteok condition*) . If. . <
.-Volume ot gas sample through the dry g\.,; meter
(meter condition!}, ft". , s\
T.- Average temperature of stack gai, *H. ',>•,
T.- Average dry gas meter temperature, *B. >
P>M- Barometric pressure at the orifice outer, -t, ftg.
An- Averts* pnenin drep aoroee the orifice Mv-r,.
in
Vi^- Volume of water
.i.jr ,,, 104_3
vapor In the gas sample (•*•*
[pressure,
6.4 Total got volume
when theM units are nsMl.
. of liquid collected In Implwn
(MS figure 1M-7), ml.
•fcMo'tt.l.ng.
cq. 104-4
Vmit-Total volume ofgu soraplo (stuck condition*),
fjjl,
V. -Volume of gat through dry KM meter (Hack
. condition!), It*.
V».-Volum« of water vapor In gai mmple (stuck
1 condition*), ft*.
8.6 Stack gai velocity,
Use equation 104-6 to calculate the stack
gas velocity.
eq. 104-5
wbm.
(r.)»T,.-Average stack gai velocity, (cat per
Moondi
»• MiuJL f Ib-lnHg V/» ^
'"Tec Ub mole-oR-lnHiO / '
these units are used.
C,-Pltot tube coefficient, dlmendonless.
(T,) .TI,-Average stack gas temperature, °R.
(VAp).»i,-Average square root of the velocity head
of itaokgas (lnHiO)i/> (see figure 1M-S).
.Pi-Stack pressure, Fb.ristaUe pressure, in
Hg.
M.-Molecular weight of stack gas (wet basis).
the summation ot the products of the
molecular weight of each component
multiplied by Its volumetric proportion
In the mixture, Ib/lb-mole.
FINAL
INITIAL
LIQUID COUiStlD
TOTAL VOLUM COLUCTID
VOLIM OT LIQUID
•ATU COUICTIO
NNNOM
VOLUM,
N
MICA ML
MIONT,
f
«•! -
•GONvciirMKiHTorwATiiiTOvoLUMisr dividing total wight
INCttAHITOfWirYOf W*Tt». It |/«l|> * *
IS. 8-8peclflo gnvlty of mercury. • v
P, - Stack preenire, P»w ± static pi-enure, In H» \
VOUWillATDI. ml
^ Figure 104-r. Anelytloil d«U.
III-A-23
-------
PLANT.
DATE_
64 Itokinetic variation (comparison of
Velocity of gas In probe tip to stack velocity).
RUN NO.
STACK DIAMETER, In..
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE, in. Hfl.
STATIC PRESSURE IN STACK (Pg), in. Hg._
OPERATORS
SCHEMATIC OF STACK
CROSS SECTION
Traverse point
number
Velocity head,
in. HjO
AVERAGE:
Stack Temperature
Figure 104-8. Velocity traverse data.
Figure 104-8 shows a sample recording
•beet for velocity traverse data. Use the aver-
ages In the last two columns of figure 104-8
to determine the average stack gas velocity
from equation 104-6.
6.6 Beryllium collected.—Calculate the
total weight of beryllium collected by using
equation 104-6.
W< = ViCi-V,C.-V.C..-eq. 104-fl
where:
W i = Total weight of beryllium collected,
eg.
Vi=Total volume of hydrochloric acid
from step 4.8.2.4, ml.'
Ci = Concentration of beryllium found In
sample, Mg/ml.
V« = Total volume of water used In sam-
pling (Implnger content* plus all
wash amount*), ml.
C.=Blank concentration of beryllium In
water, «/ml.
7.= Total volume of acetone used in sam-
pling (all wash amounts) , ml.
Co = Blank concentration of beryllium In
acetone, /tg/ml.
6.7 Total beryllium emissions. — Calculate
the total amount of beryllium emitted from
each stack per day by equation 104-7. This
equation Is applicable for continuous opera-
tions. For cyclic operations, use only the time
per day each stack Is in operation. The total
beryllium emissions from a source will be the
summation of results from all stacks.
n
TT|(g.),T, A, 86,400 seconds/day
F«^ X 10)•»..« Average stack gas velocity, f«it per second.
7. Evaluation of results—7.1 Determina-
tion of compliance.—7.1.1 Each performance
test shall consist of three repetitions of the
applicable test method. For the purpose of
determining compliance with an applicable
national emission standard, the average of
results of all repetitions shall apply.
7.3 Acceptable isokinetic results.—7.2.1
The following range sets the limit on accept-
able isokinetic sampling results:
If 60 percent £1^110 percent, the results
are acceptable; otherwise, reject the test and
repeat.
7. References.—1. Addendum to Specifica-
tions for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facil-
ities, PBS, NCAPC, December 6, 1967.
2 Amos, M. D., and Willis, j. B., "Use of
High-Temperature Pre-Mixed Flames in
Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy," Spectro-
chlm. Acta, 22: 1325,1966.
3. Determining Dust Concentration in a
Gas Stream, ASMS Performance Test Code
No. 37, New York, N.Y., 1957.
4. Devorkln, Howard et al., Air Pollution
Source Testing Manual, Air Pollution Control
District, Los Angeles, Calif. November 1963.
6. Fleet. B., Liberty, K. V., and West, T. S.,
"A Study of Borne Matrix Effects in the Deter-
mination of Beryllium by Atomic Absorption
apeetroacopy in the Nitrous Oxide-Acetylene
name," Talanta, 17: 203,1970.
«. Mark, L. S., Mechanical Engineers'
Handbook, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York, N.Y., 1961.
7. Martin, Robert M., Construction Details
of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment,
Environmental Protection Agency, APTD-
0881.
B. Methods for Determination of Velocity,
Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Oases,
Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manu-
facturing Co., LOB Angelos, Calif. Bulletin
WP-60, 1968.
9. Perkin Elmer Standard Conditions (Rev.
March 1971).
10. Perry, J. H., Chemical Engineers' Hand-
book, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York, N.Y.. 1960.
11. Bern, Jerome J., Maintenance, Calibra-
tion, and Operation of Isokinetlc Source
Sampling Equipment, Environmental Pro-
tection Agency, APTD-0578.
12. Shigehara, R. T., W. F. Todd, and W. S.
Smith, Significance ol Errors in Stack Sam-
pling Measurements, Paper presented at the
annual meeting ol the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14^19, 1970.
13. Smith, W. S. et al., Stack Oas Sam-
pling Improved and Simplified with New
Equipment, APCA Paper No. 67-119, 1967.
14. Smith, W. S., R. T. Shigehara, and
W. F. Todd, A Method ol Interpreting Stack
Sampling Data, Paper presented at the 63d
annual meeting of the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-19, 1970.
IB. Specifications lor Incinerator Testing
at Federal Faculties, PHS, NCAPC, 1967.
16. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks
for Particulate Matter, In: 1971 Book of
ASTM standards, Part 23, Philadelphia. 1971,
ASTM Designation D-2928-71.
17. Vennard, J. K. Elementary Fluid Me-
obanlcs. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, 1947.
III-A-24
-------
KBTROD !•«. METHOD VOS. BSmOtMIMAnoK OT
MXBCUBT Ot WASIrWATH TUATMCNT VLAMT
•XWAOI SLUDQKS '
1. Principle and applicability. 1.1 Prin-
ciple—A weighed portion of the sewage
•ludge sample Is digested In aqua regla for
2 minutes at B6°C. followed by oxidation •
with potassium permanganate. Mercury in
the digested sample Is then measured by the
conventional spectrophotometer cold vapor
technique. An alternative digestion involving
the use of an autoclave is described in para-
graph 4.5.2 of this method.
13 Applicability—This method Is appli-
cable for the determination of total organic
and inorganic mercury content In sewage
sludges, soils, sediments, and bottom-type
materials. The normal range of this method
Is 0.2 to 5 Mg'g. The range may be extended
above or below the normal range by Increas-
ing or decreasing sample size and through In-
strument and recorder control.
2. 'Apparatus. 2.1 Analysis—The conven-
tional cold vapor technique (5) Is used to
analyze the sample.
2.1.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrophoto-
meter '—Any atomic absorption unit having
an open sample presentation area in which
to mount the absorption cell is suitable. In-
strument settings recommended by the par-
ticular manufacturer should be followed
2.1.2 Mercury Hollow Cathode Lamp—
Westlnghouse WL-22617, argon filled, or
equivalent.
2.1.3 Recorder—Any multlrange, variable-
speed recorder that is compatible with the
UV detection system is suitable.
2.1.4 Absorption Cell—Standard spectro-
photometer cells 10 cm long, having quartz
end windows may be used. Suitable cells may
be constructed from plexiglass tubing, 2.5
cm O.D. x 11.4 cm (ca. 1" O.D. x 4%"). The
ends are ground perpendicular to the longi-
tudinal axis, and quartz windows |2.5 cm
•tlamcter x 0 16 cm thickness (ca. 1" diameter
M Instruments designed .specifically for the
measurement of mercury using- the cold
vapor technique are commercially available
-nd may be substituted for the atomic
lorptlon spectrophotometer.
••11. The lamp Is positioned so as not to Inter-
fere with the measurement and to shine on
the absorption cell maintaining the air tem-
perature about 5*C above ambient.
S. Reagent}. 3.1 Analysis.
811 Aqua Regia—Prepare immediately
before use by carefully adding three volumes
of concentrated HC1 to one volume of con-
centrated HNOV
3.1.2 Sulfurlc Acid, 0.5N—Dilute 14.0 ml
«f concentrated, sutfurlc acid to 1.0 liter.
3.1.3 Stannous Sulfate—Add 25 g stan-
nous snlfate to 250 ml of 0.5N sulfurlc acid.
This mixture Is a suspension and should be
•t'rred continuously during u?e. Stannous
ohlorlde may be used in place of the Stannous
•ulfate.
8.1.4 Sodium "Chloride—Hydroxylamlr.e
Sulfate Solution—Dissolve 12 prams of so-
dium chloride and 12 grams of hydroxylamlne
•ulfate In distilled water and 'dilute to 100
ml. Hydroxvlamlne hydrochloride mav be
used In place of the hydroxylamlne sulfate.
8.1.5 Potassium Permanganate—5% solu-
tion, w/v. Dissolve 5 grams of r>ota«slum per-
manpanate in 100 ml of distilled water1.
8.1.6 Stock Mercury Solution—Dissolve
0.1354 grams of reagent grade mercuric chlo-
ride (Assay >95%) In 75 ml of distilled
water. Add 10 ml of concentrated nitric acid
and adjust the volume to 100.0 ml. 1 ml = l
•teFTcr.
8 1.7 WorMpg Mercurv Solution—Make
successive dilutions of the stock mercury
solution to obtain a working standard con-
taining 0.1 ,,g per ml. This worMng standard
a->d the dilutions of the stock mercurv solu-
tion should be prepared fresh dMly. Acidity
•of the working standard should be main-
tained at 0.15% nitric acid. This acid should
be added to the flask as needed before the
•ddltlrn of the aliquot. Mercuric solutions
should not be prepared in plastic containers
4. Procedures. Simples for mercury analy-
sts are subject to contamination from a
vsrtetv of sources. Extreme care must be
taken to prevent contamination. Certain in-
terferences may occur during the arValysls
procedures. Extreme caution must be taken
to avoid inhilatlon of mercury.
4.1 Sample Handling and Preservation.
4 1.1 Because of the extreme sensitivity
of the analytical procedure and the om-
nlure«-e-ice of mercury, care must be taken
to avoid extraneous contamination. Sim-
pllng devices, sample containers, and re-
agents should be ascertained to be free of
significant amounts of mercury, the sample
should not be exposed to any condition In
the laboratory that may result In contact or
airborne mercury contamination. Samole
containers to be used for collection and shlp-
-ment of mercury samoles should be properly
cleaned before u«e. The=e 'hould be ringed
with at least 20% v/v HNO. followed by
dl-tllled water.
4.1.2 While the sample may be an?lyzed
without drying, it has been found to be more
convenient to analyze a dry samale. Moisture
may be driven off in a drying oven at a tem-
perature of 60'C. No significant mercury
losses have been observed by using this dry-
ing steo. The dry sample should be pulver-
ized and thoroughly mixed before the aliquot
is weighed.
4.2 Interferences.
421 Interferences that may occur In
sludee samples are sulfides, high copper, high
chlorides, etc. A discussion of possible in-
.ierferences and suggested preventative meas-
ures to be taken Is given In Reference (8) (7).
4.2.2 Volatile materials which absorb at
the 253.7 nm will cause a positive Interfer-
ence. In order to remove any interfering
volatile materials, the dead air space in the
BOD bottle should be purged with nitrogen
before the addition of stannous sulfate.
4.3 Handling Sample Mercury Vapors
After Analysis.
4 J.I Because of toe toxic nature of mer-
cury vapor, precaution must be taken to
•void Its inhalation. Therefore, a bypass
'MbauM be Included in the analysis system
to either vent the mercury vapor into an
exhaust hood or pass the vapor through some
absorbing media, such as :
(a) equal volumes of 0.1N KMNO< and 10 r/c
(b) 0.25 % Iodine in a 3% KI solution.
A specially treated charcoal that will absorb
mercury vapor is also available fronvBarne-
bey and Cheney, E. 8th Ave. and North Gas-
sidy Bt, Columbus, Ohio 43219, Catalog No.
680-13 or No. 580-22."
4.4 Calibration,
4.44 Transfer 0, 0.6, 1.0, 2.0, 6.0 and 10 ml
allquots of the working mercury solution
containing 0 to 1.0 ug of mercury to a series
of 300-ml BOO bottles. Add enough dls-
tnied water to each bottle to make a total
volume of 10 ml. Add 6 ml of aqua regla and
beat > minutes in a water bath at 95«C. Allow
the sample to cool and add 60 ml distilled
water and 16 ml of KMnO4 solution to each
bottle and return to the water bath for 30
minutes. Cool and add 8 ml of sodium chlo-
rtde-hydroxylamine sulfate solution to re-
duce the excess permn.ngn.nft.te. Add 60 ml of
distilled water. Treating each bottle individ-
ually, add 6 ml of stannous sulfate solution
and immediately attach the bottle to the
aeration apparatus. At this point, the sample
Is allowed to stand qultely without manual
•Citation. The circulating pump, which has
previously been adjusted to a rate of 1 liter
per minute, Is allowed to run continuously.
The absorbance, as exhibited either on the
spectrophotometer or the recorder, will In-
crease and reach maximum within 30 sec-
onds. As scon as the recorder pen levels off,
approximately 1 minute, open the bypass
valve and continue the aeration until the
abaorbance returns to Its minimum value.
Close the bypass valve, remove the fritted
tubing from the BOD bottle and continue
the aeration. Proceed with the standards and
construct a standard curve by plotting peak
height versus mlcrograms of mercury.
4.6 Analysis.
4.6.1 Weigh triplicate 0.2g± 0.001 g por-
tions of dry sample and place In bottom of
a BOD bottle. Add 5 ml of distilled water
and 5 ml of aqua regla. Heat 2 minutes in a
water bath at 95°C. Cool and add 50 ml dis-
tilled water and 16 ml potassium per-
manganate solution to each sample bottle.
Mix thoroughly and place in the water bath
for 30 minutes at 95°C. Cool and add 6 ml of
sodium chloride-hydroxylamlne sulfate to re-
duce the excess permanganate. Add 55 ml of
distilled water. Treating each bottle indi-
vidually, add 5 ml of stannous sulfate and
immediately attach the bottle to the aera-
tion apparatus. With each sample, continue
as described in paragraph 4.4.1 of this
method.
4.5.2 An alternative digestion procedure
using an autoclave may also be used. In this
method 6 ml of concentrated HjSO, and 2 ml
of concentrated HNO, are added to the 0.2
grams of sample. 6 ml of saturated KMnO,
solution are added and the bottle is covered
with a piece of aluminum foil. The samples
are autoclaved at 121 'C and 2.1 kg/cm' (ca.
16 pslg) for 16 minutes. Cool, make up to a
volume of 100 ml with distilled water, and
add 6 ml of sodium chlortde-hydroxylamlne
•ulfate solution to reduce the excess per-
manganate. Purge the dead air space and
continue as described in paragraph 4.4.1 of
this method.
• Mention of trade names or specific prod-
ucts does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
III-A-25
-------
0. Calculation. 6.1 Measure the peak
height of the unknown from the chart and
read the mercury value from the standard
curve.
E.2 Calculate the mercury concentration
in the sample by the formula:
_ jig Hg In the aliquot
Ag g/gm~ wt. of the allquotTn"g
6.3 Report mercury concentrations as fol-
lows: Below 0.1 Ag/g; between 0.1 and 1 /ig/g,
to the nearest 0.01 Ag/g; between 1 and 10
Ag/g, to nearest 0.1 fig; above 10 ns/g, to
nearest /ig.
6. Precision and accuracy. 6.1 According
to the provisional method In reference num-
ber 5, the following standard deviations on
replicate sediment samples have been re-
corded at the Indicated levels: 0.29 Ag/g±0.02
and 0.82 Ag/g±0.03. Recovery of mercury at
these levels, added as methyl mercuric chlo-
ride, was 97 and 94%, respectively.
7. References.
1. Bishop, J. N. "Mercury In Sediments,"
Ontario Water Resources Comm., Toronto,
Ontario, Canada, 1971.
2. Salma, M. Private communication, EPA
Cal/Nov Basin Office, Alameda, California.
3. Hatch, W. R., and Ott, W. L. "Determina-
tion of Sub-Mlcrogram Quantities of Mer-
cxiry by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotom-
etry," Ana. Chem. 40, 2085 (1968).
4. Bradenberger, H. and Bader, H. "The
Determination of Nanogram Levels of Mer-
cury In Solution by a Flameless Atomic Ab-
sorption Technique," Atomic Absorption
Newsletters, 101 (1967).
B. Analytical Quality Control Laboratory
(AQCL), Environmental Protection Agency,
Cincinnati, Ohio, "Mercury In Sediment
(Cold Vapor Technique),* Provisional
Method, April 1973.
8. Kopp, J. F., Longbottom, M. 0. and
Lobrlng, L. B. "Cold Vapor Method for De-
termining Mercury," Journal AWWA, 64, 1
(1973), pp. 30-36.
7. "Manual of Method! for Chemical Anal-
ysis of Water and Wastes," Environmental
Protection Agency, fcPA-«35/3-74-003, pp.
118-138.
III-A-26
-------
METHOD 100—DETERMINATION or VINYL
CHLORIDE PROM STATIONARY SOURCES
INTRODUCTION
Performance of this method should not be
Attempted by persons unfamiliar with the
operation of a gas chromatograph, nor by
those who are unfamiliar with source sam-
pling, as there are rmny details that are
beyond the scope of this presentation. Care
must be exercised to prevent exposure of
sampling personnel to vinyl chloride, a car-
cinogen.
1. Principle and Applicability.
1.1 An integrated bag sample of stack
gas containing vinyl chloride (chloroethene)
is subjected to chromatographlc analysis, us-
ing a flame lonlzatlon detector. 38
1.2 The method Is applicable to the meas-
urement of vinyl chloride In stack gases from
ethylene dichlorlde, vinyl chloride and poly-
vinyl chloride manufacturing processes, ex-
cept where the vinyl chloride is contained In
particulate matter.
a. Range and Sensitivity.
The lower limit of detection will vary ac-
cording to the chromatograph used. Values
reported Include 1 x 10-' mg and 4 X 10-»
mg.
8, Interferences. Acetaldehyde, which can
occur In some vinyl chloride sources, will In-
terfere with the vinyl chloride peak from
the Ohromasorb 102l column. See sections
4.8.9 and 8.4. If resolution of the vinyl
chloride peak is still not satisfactory for a
particular sample, then chromatograph pa-
rameters can be further altered with prior
approval of the Administrator. If alteration
of the chromatograph parameters falls to
resolve the vinyl chloride peak, then sup-
plemental confirmation of the vinyl chloride
peak through an absolute analytical tech-
nique, such as mass spectroscopy, must be
performed.3'
4. Apparatus.
4,1 Sampling (Figure 108-1 ).38
4.1.1 Probe—Stainless steel, Pyrex glass,
or Teflon tubing according to stack temper-
ature, each equipped with a glass wool plug
to remove partlculate matter,
4.1.3 Sample line—Teflon, 6.4 mm outside
diameter, of sufficient length to connect
probe to bag. A new unused piece Is employed
for each series of bag samples that constitutes
an emission test.
4.1.3 Male (2) and female (2) stainless
steel quick-connects, with ball checks (one
pair without) located as shown In Figure
108-1."
4.1.4 Tedlar bags, 100 liter capacity—To
contain sample. Teflon bags are not accept-
able. Alumlnlzed Mylar bags may be used,
provided that the samples are analyzed
within 24 hours of collection.
4.1.S Rigid leakproof containers for 4.1.4,
with covering to protect contents from sun-
light.
4.1,6 Needle valve—To adjust sample flow
rate.
4.1.7 Pump—Leak-free. Minimum capac-
ity 2 liters per minute.
4.1.8 Charcoal tube—To prevent admis-
sion of vinyl chloride to atmosphere In vicin-
ity of samplers.
4.1.9 Flow meter—For observing sample
flow rate; capable of measuring a flow range
from 0.10 to 1.00 liter per minute.
4.1.10 Connecting tubing. Teflon, 6.4
mm outside diameter to assemble sample
train (Figure 106-1).38
1 Mention of trade names on specific prod-
ucts does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
4.1.11 Pitot tube—Type S (or equivalent),
attached to the probe so that the sampling
flow rate can be regulated proportional to
the stack gas velocity.
4.2 Sample recovery.
4.2.1 Tubing—Teflon, 6.4 mm outside
diameter, to connect bag to gas chromato-
graph sample loop. A new unused piece is
employed for each series of bag samples that
constitutes an emission test, and is to be dis-
carded upon conclusion of analysis of those
bags.
4.3 Analysis.
4.3.1 Oas chromatograph—With flame
lonlzatlon detector, potentlometrlc strip
chart recorder and 1.0 to 5.0 ml heated sam-
pling loop In automatic sample valve.
4.3.2 ChromatograpMc column. Stainless
steel, 2 mx3.2 mm, containing 80/100 mesh
Chromasorb 102. A secondary column of OE
SF-96, 20 percent on 60/80 mesh AW Chroma-
sorb P, stainless steel, 2 mx3.2 mm or Pora-
pak T, 80/100 mesh, stainless steel, 1 mx3.2
mm Is required If acetaldehyde Is present. If
used, a secondary column Is placed after the
Chromasorb 102 column. The combined-
columns should then be operated at 120' Or*
4.3.3 Flow meters (2)—Rotameter type,
0 to 100 ml/min capacity, with flow control
valves.
4,3.4 Oas regulators—For required gas
cylinders.
4.3.5 Thermometer—Accurate to one de-
gree centigrade, to measure temperature of
heated sample loop at time of sample Injec-
tion,
4.3.8 Barometer—Accurate to 5 mm Hg, to
measure atmospheric pressure around gas
chromatograph during sample analysis.
4.3,7 Pump—Leak-free, Minimum capac-
ity 100 ml/mln.
4.4 Calibration.
4.4.1 Tubing—Teflon, 6.4 mm outside
diameter, separate pieces marked for each
calibration concentration,
4.4.2 Tedlar bags—Slxteen-inch square
size, separate bag marked for each calibra-
tion concentration.
4.4.3 Syringe—0.5 ml, gas tight.
4,4,4 Syringe—BO/4, gas tight,
4,4,8 Flow meter—Rotameter type, 0 to
1000 ml/mln range accurate to ±1%, to
meter nitrogen In preparation of standard
gas mixtures,
4.4,8 Stop watch—Of known accuracy, to
time gas flow in preparation of standard gas
mixtures,
6, Reagents. It Is necessary that all rea-
gents be of chromatographlc grade.
6.1 Analysis.
5.1.1 Helium gas or nitrogen gas—Zero
grade, for chromatographlc carrier gas.
5.1.2 Hydrogen gas—Zero grade.
5.1.3 Oxygen gas, or Air, as required by
the detector—Zero grade.
5.2 Calibration. Use one of the following
options: either 5.2.1 and 5.2.2, or 5.2.3.38
5.2.1 Vinyl chloride, 99.9+ percent. Pure
vinyl chloride gas certified by the manufac-
turer to contain a minimum of 99.9 percent
vinyl chloride for use In the preparation of
standard gas mixtures In Section 7.1. If the
gas manufacturer maintains a bulk cylinder
supply of 99.9+ percent vinyl chloride, the
certification analysis may have been per-
formed on this supply rather than on each
gas cylinder prepared from this bulk supply.
The date of gas cylinder preparation and the
certified analysis must have been affixed to
the cylinder before shipment from the gas
manufacturer to the buyer. 58
5.2.2 Nitrogen gas. Zero grade, for prepa-
ration of standard gas mixtures.•">
5.2.3 Cylinder standards (3). Gas mix-
ture standards (50, 10, and 5 ppm vinyl
chloride In nitrogen cylinders) for which the
gas composition has been certified by the
manufacturer. The manufacturer must have
recommended a maximum shelf life for each
cylinder so that the concentration does not
change greater than ±5 percent from the
certified value. The date of gas cylinder prep-
aration, certified vinyl chloride concentra-
tion and recommended maximum shelf life
must have been affixed to the cylinder before
shipment from the gas manufacturer to the
buyer. These gas mixture standards may be
directly used to prepare a chromatograph
calibration curve as described In section 7.3?8
5.2.3.1 Cylinder standards certification.
The concentration of vinyl chloride in nitro-
gen In each cylinder must have been certified
by the manufacturer by a direct analysis of
each cylinder using an analytical procedure
that the manufacturer had calibrated on the
day of cylinder analysis. The calibration of
the analytical procedure shall, as a minimum,
have utilized a three-point calibration curve.
It is recommended that the manufacturer
maintain two calibration standards and use
these standards in the following way: (1) A
high concentration standard (between 50 and
100 ppm) for preparation of a calibration
curve by an appropriate dilution technique;
(2) a low concentration standard (between
5 and 10 ppm) for verification of the dilution
technique used. 38
5.2.3.2 Establishment and verification of
calibration standard*. The concentration of
each calibration standard must have been
established by the manufacturer using
reliable procedures, Additionally, each
calibration standard must have been veri-
fied by the manufacturer by one of the
following procedures, and the agreement
between the initially determined concen-
tration value and the verification concen-
tratlon value must be within ± 5 percent:
(1) verification value determined by com-
parison with a calibrated vinyl chloride
permeation tube, (2) verification value
determined by comparison with a ga* mix-
ture prepared In accordance with the pro-
cedure described In section 7,1 and using
99.9+ percent vlnyle chloride, or (3) verifl-
cation value obtained by having the
calibration standard analyzed by the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards, All calibration
standards must be renewed on a time
interval consistent with the shelf life of
the cylinder standards sold.38
6. Procedure.
6.1 Sampling. Assemble the sample train
as In Figure 106-1. Perform a bag leak check
according to Section 7.4. Observe that all
connections between the bag and the probe
are tight. Place the end of the probe at the
centrold of the stack and start the pump
with the needle valve adjusted to yield a
flow of 0.5 1pm. After a period of time suffi-
cient to purge the line several times has
elapsed, connect the vacuum line to the
bag and evacuate the bag until the rotam-
eter indicates no flow. Then reposition the
sample and vacuum lines and begin the ac-
tual sampling, keeping the rate proportional
to the stack velocity. Direct the gas exiting
the rotameter away from sampling personnel.
At the end of the sample period, shut off the
pump, disconnect the sample line from the
bag, and disconnect the vacuum line from
the bag container. Protect the bag container
from sunlight.
6.2 Sample storage. Sample bags must be
kept out of direct sunlight. When at all
possible analysis Is to be performed within
24 hours, but In no case In excess of 72
hours of samcle collection. ^
6.3 Sample recovery. With a piece of Tef-
lon tubing Identified for that bag, connect a
III-A-27
-------
bag Inlet valve to the gas chromatograph
sample valve. Switch the valve to withdraw
gas from the bag through the sample loop.
Plumb the equipment so the sample gas
passes from the sample valve to the leak-free
pump, and then to a charcoal tube, followed
by a 0-100 ml/mln rotameter with flow con-
trol valve.
6.4 Analysis. Set the column temperature
to 100° C, the detector temperature to 150°
C, and the sample loop temperature to 70° C.
When optimum hydrogen and oxygen flow
rates have been determined verify and main-
tain these flow rates during all chromato-
graph operations. Using zero helium or
nitrogen as the carrier gas, establish a flow
rate In the range consistent with the manu-
facturer's requirements for satisfactory de-
tector operation. A flow rate of approxi-
mately 40 ml/mln should produce adequate
separations. Observe the base line periodi-
cally and determine that the noise level has
stabilized and that base line drift has ceased.
Purge the sample loop for thirty seconds at
the rate of 100 ml/mln, then activate the
sample valve. Record the Injection time (the
position of the pen on the chart at the time
of sample Injection), the sample number, the
sample loop temperature, the column tem-
perature, carrier gas flow rate, chart speed
and the attenuator setting. Record the lab-
oratory pressure. From the chart, select the
peak having the retention time correspond-
ing to vinyl chloride, as determined In Sec-
tion 7.2. Measure the peak area, Am, by use
of a disc Integrator of a planlmeter. Measure
the peak height, Hm. Record Am, Hm, -and
the retention time. Repeat the Injection at
least two times or until twp consecutive vinyl
chloride peaks do not vary In area more than
5%. The average value for these two areas
will be used to compute the bag concentra-
tion.35
Compare the ratio of Hm to Am for the vinyl
chloride sample with the same ratio for the
standard peak which Is closest In height. As
a guideline, If these ratios differ by more
than 10%, the vinyl chloride peak may not
be pure (possibly acetaldehyde Is present)
and the secondary column should be em-
ployed (see Section 4.3.2).
6.5 Measure the ambient temperature and
barometric pressure near the bag. (Assume
the relative humidity to be 100 percent.)
From a water saturation vapor pressure table,
determine and record the water vapor con-
tent of the bag.30
7. Calibration and Standards.
7.1 Preparation of vinyl chloride stand-
ard gas mixtures. Evacuate a slxteen-lnch
square Tedlar bag that has passed a leak
check (described In Section 7.4) and meter
In 5 liters of nitrogen. While the bag Is
filling, use the 0.5 ml syringe to Inject
250,ul of 99.8+ percent vlnvl chloride
through the wall of the bag. Upon with-
drawing the syringe needle, Immediately
cover the resulting hole with a piece of
adhesive tape. The bau now contains a
vinyl chloride concentration of 50 ppm. In
a like manner use the other syringe to
prepare gas mixtures having 10 and 5 ppm
vinyl chloride concentrations. Place each
bag on a smooth surface and alternately
depress opposite sides of the bag 50 times
to further mix the gases. These gas mixture
standards may be used for 10 days from the
date of preparation, after which time prep-
aration of new gas mixtures Is required.
(CAUTION.—Contamination may be a prob-
lem when a bag Is reused If the new gas
mixture standard contains a lower con-
centration than the previous gas mixture
standard did. )Ji
7.2 Determination of vinyl chloride re-
tention time. This section can be performed
simultaneously with Section 7.3. Establish
chromatograph conditions Identical with
M wooijff"
U 7
Fin Mitit -
Sanipl. Lint ., . .
Vicuun tin. N,,dl0 v.lv.
livtri
mot Tub.
luck fell
Inui»ud bij
rtin.
(1)
Mint'lon of tradi nn» en ipacifle product! don not wutltuu
•ndorucuuit by thi £iwiroamw»l Plot.cti
those In Section 6.3, above. Set attenuator
to X 1 position. Flush the sampling loop
with zero helium or nitrogen and activate
the sample valve. Record the Injection time,
the sample loop temperature, the column
temperature, the carrier gas flow rate, the
chart speed and the attenuator setting.
Record peaks and detector responses that
occur In the absence of vinyl chloride. Main-
tain conditions. With the equipment plumb-
Ing arranged Identically to Section 6.3, flush
the sample loop for 30 seconds at the rate of
100 ml/mln with one of the vinyl chloride
calibration mixtures and activate the sample
valve. Record the Injection time. Select the
peak that corresponds to vinyl chloride.
Measure the distance on the chart from the
Injection time to the time at which the peak
maximum occurs. This quantity, divided by
the chart speed. Is defined as the retention
time record.
7.3 Preparation of chromatograph cali-
bration curve. Make a gas chromatographlc
measurement of each gas mixture standard
(described In section 5.2.2 or 7.1) using con-
ditions Identical with those listed In sections
6.3 and 6.4. Flush the sampling loop for 30
seconds at the rate of 100 ml/mln with each
standard gas mixture and activate the sam-
ple valve. Record O«, the concentration of
vinyl chloride Injected, the attenuator set-
ting, chart speed, peak area, sample loop
temperature, column temperature, carrier
gas flow rate, and retention time. Record the
laboratory pressure. Calculate A,, the peak
area multiplied by the attenuator setting.
Repeat until two Injection areas are within
5 percent, then plot these points v. Cr. When
the other concentrations have been plotted,
draw a smooth curve through the points.
Perform calibration dally, or before and after
each set of bag samples, whichever Is more
frequent.38
7.4 Bag leak checks. While performance
of this section Is required subsequent to bag
use, It Is also advised that It be performed
prior to bag use. After each use, make sure
a bag did not develop leaks as follows. To leak
check, connect a water manometer and pres-
surize the bag to 5-10 cm HSO (2-4 In H2O).
Allow to stand for 10 minutes. Any displace-
ment In the water manometer Indicates a
leak. Also check the rigid container for leaks
In this manner.
(NOTE: An alternative leak check method
Is to pressurize the bag to 6-10 cm H,O or
2-4 In. HSO and allow to stand overnight.
A deflated bag Indicates a leak.) For each
sample bag In Its rigid container, place a
rotameter In-line between the bag and the
pump Inlet. Evacuate the bag. Failure of the
rotameter to register zero flow when the bag
appears to be empty Indicates a leak.
8. Calculations.
8.1 Determine the sample peak area ai
follows:
Ac=AmAi
Equation 106-1
where:
/I,-The sample peak area.
Xm-The measured peak area.
-4,'-The attenuation factor.
8.2 Vinyl chloride concentrations, from
the calibration curve described In Section
7.3, above, select the value of Cc that cor-
responds to Ac, the sample peak area. Cal-
CcP,Tj
Where: Equation 106-2
But >The water vapor content of the bag samble, as
analysed.
C6-The concentration of vinyl chloride In the bag
sample In ppm.
C.-The concentration of vinyl chloride Indicated by
the gas chromatcgraph, In ppm.
P,-Thn reference pressure, the laboratory pressure
recorded during calibration, mm Hg.
Ti-The sample loop temperature on the absolute
scale at the time of analysis, °K.
P,=The laboratory pressure at time of analysis, mm
Hg.
TV-Trie reference temperature, the sample loop
temperature recorded during calibration, °K'
9. References.
1. Brown, D. W., Loy, E. W. and Stephen-
son, M. H. "Vinyl Chloride Monitoring Near
the B. F. Goodrich Chemical Company In
Louisville, Kentucky." Region IV, U.S. Envi-
ronmental Protection Agency, Surveillance
and Analysis Division, Athens, Georgia, June
24, 1974.
2. "Evaluation of A Collection and Analy-
tical Procedure for Vinyl Chloride In Air,"
by G. D. Clayton and Associates, December
13, 1974. EPA Contract No. 68-02-1408, Task
Order No. 2, EPA Report oN. 75-VCL-l.
3. "Standardization of Stationary Source
Emission Method for Vinyl Chloride," by Mid-
west Research Institute, 1976. EPA Contrac'
No. 68-02-1098, Task Order No. 7.
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act u amended
(42 UJS.C. 7414)). 40,47
III-A-28
-------
METHOD 107—DETERMINATION or VINYL CHLO-
RIDE CONTENT or INPROCESS WASTEWATER
SAMPLES, AND VINYL CHLORIDE CONTENT or
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RESIN, SLURRY, WET
CAKE, AND LATEX SAMPLES
INTRODUCTION
Performance of this method should not be
attempted by persons unfamiliar with the
operation of a gas chromatograph, nor by
those who are unfamiliar with sampling, as
there are many details that are beyond the
scope of this presentation, Care must be
exercised to prevent exposure of sampling
personnel to vinyl chloride, a carcinogen.
1. Principle and Applicability.
1.1 The basis for this method relates to
the vapor equilibrium which Is established
between RVCM, PVC, resin, water, and air
in a closed system. It has been demonstrated
that the RVCM in a PVC resin will equili-
brate in a closed vessel quite rapidly, pro-
vided that the temperature of the PVC resin
is maintained above the glass transition
temperature of that specific resin.
1.2 This procedure is suitable for deter-
mining the vinyl chorlde monomer (VCM)
content of Inprocess wastewater samples, and
the residual vinyl chloride monomer
(RVCM) content of poly vinyl chloride
(PVC) resins, wet cake, slurry, and latex
samples. It cannot be used for polymer in
fused forms, such as sheet or cubes. If a
resolution of the vinyl chloride peak is not
satisfactory for a particular sample, then
chromatograph parameters may be altered
provided that the precision and reproducl-
blllty of the analysis of vinyl chloride cylin-
der standards are not Impaired. If there is
reason to believe that some other hydro-
carbon with an Identical retention time is
present In the sample, then supplemental
confirmation of the vinyl chloride peak
through an absolute analytical technique,
such as mass spectroscopy, should be per-
formed.38
2. Range and Sensitivity.
The lower limit of detection of vinyl chlo-
ride will vary according to the chromato-
graph used. Values reported Include 1 x 10-7
mg and 4 x 10-7 rag. With proper calibration,
the upper limit may be extended as needed.
3. Precision and Reproduclblllty.
An interlaboratory comparison between
seven laboratories of three resin samples,
each split Into three parts, yielded a standard
deviation of 2.63% for a sample with a mean
of 2.09 ppm, 4.10% for a sample with a mean
of 1.68 ppm, and 5.29% for a sample with a
mean of 62.66 ppm.
4. Safety.
Do not release vinyl chloride to the labora-
tory atmosphere during preparation of stand-
ards. Venting or purging with VCM/air mix-
tures must be held to a minimum. When
they are required, the vapor must be routed
to outside air. Vinyl chloride, even at low
ppm levels, must never be vented Inside the
laboratory. After vials have been analyzed,
the pressure within the vial must be vented
prior to removal from the Instrument turn-
table. Vials must be vented Into an activated
charcoal tube using a hypodermic needle to
prevent release of vinyl chloride Into the
laboratory atmosphere. The charcoal must
be replaced prior to vinyl chloride break-
through.
6. Apparatus.
5.1 Sampling.
5.1.1 Bottles—60 ml (2 oz), with waxed
lined screw on tops, for PVC samples.
6.1.2 Vials—50 ml Hypo-vials," sealed with
Teflon faced Tuf-Bond discs for water sam-
ples.
6.1.3 Electrical tape—or equivalent, to
prevent loosening of bottle tops.
6.2 Sample recovery.
5.2.1 Vials—With seals and caps, Perkln-
Elmer Corporation No. 105-0118, or equiva-
lent.
6.2.2 Analytical balance—Capable of
weighing to ±0.001 gram.
6.3.3. Syringe, 100 01—Precision Series
"A" No. 010025, or equivalent.
6.2.4 Vial Sealer, Perkln-Elmer No. 106-
0106 or equivalent.
6.3 Analysis.
5.3.1 Gas chromatograph—Perkln-Elmer
Corporation Model F-40 head-space ana-
lyzer, No. 104-0001, or equivalent.
6.3.2 Chromatographic column. Stainless
steel, 2 m x 3.2 mm, containing 0.4 percent
Oarbowax 1500 on Carbopak A, Perkln-Elmer
Corporation No. 105-0133, or equivalent.
Carbopak C can b« used In place of Carbopak
A. If methanol and/or aeetaldehyde Is pres-
ent in the sample, a pair of Poropak Q col-
umns in series (1 m x 3.2 mm followed by
2 m x 3.2 mm) with provision for backflush
of the first column has been shown to pro..
vide adequate separation of vinyl chloride?
6.3.3 Thermometer—0 to 100° C, accurate
to ±0.1° C, Perkln-Elmer No. 106-0109 or
equivalent.
6.3.4. Sample tray thermostat system—
Perkln-Elmer No. 106-0103, or equivalent.
6.3.5 Septa—Sandwich type, for auto-
3 mm, Perkln-Elmer No. 106-
preparatlon of a calibration curve by an ap-
propriate dilution technique; (3) a low con-
centration standard (between 60 and BOO
ppm) for verification of the dilution tech-
nique used.38
6.2.1.3 Establishment anil verification of
calibration standards. The concentration of
each calibration standard must have been
established by the manufacturer using reli-
able procedures. Additionally, each calibra-
tion standard must have been verified by the
manufacturer by one of the following proce-
dures, and 'the agreement between the Ini-
tially determined concentration value and
the verification concentration value must be
within ±6 percent: (1) Verification value de-
termined by comparison with a gas mixture
standard generated in a similar manner to
the procedure described in section 7.1 of
Method 106 for preparing gas mixture stand-
ards using 99.9+ percent vinyl chloride, or
(3) verification value obtained by having the
calibration standard analyzed by the Nation-
al Bureau of Standards. All calibration stand-
ards must be renewed on a time interval
consistent with the shelf life of the cylinder
standards sold.38
7. Procedure.
7.1 Sampling.
7.1.1 PVC sampling—Allow the resin or
slurry to flow from a tap on the tank or silo
immedlatelytlghtly cap the bottlewrap
= - recorder — Hewlett -
Packard Model 3380A, or equivalent.
6.3.7 Filter drier assembly (3)—Perkln-
Elmer No. 2230117, or equivalent.
8.3.8 Soap film flowmeter—Hewlett Pack-
ard No. 0101-0113, or equivalent.
6.4 Calibration.
6.4.1 Regulators—for required gas cylin-
ders,
6. Reagents.
6.1 Analysis.
6.1.1 Hydrogen gas—zero grade.
6.1.2 Nitrogen gas—zero grade.
6.1.3 Air—zero grade.
8.2 Calibration.
6.2.1 Cylinder standards (4). Gas mixture
standards (50, 600, 2,000, and 4,000 ppm vinyl
chloride In nitrogen cylinders) for which the
gas composition has been certified by the
manufacturer. Lower concentration stand-
ards should be obtained If lower concentra-
tions of vinyl chloride samples are expected,
as the Intent Is to bracket the sample con-
centrations with standards. The manufac-
turer must have recommended a maximum
shelf life for each cylinder so that the con-
centration does not change greater than ±5
percent from the certified value. The date
of gas cylinder preparation, certified vinyl
chloride concentration and recommended
maximum shelf life must have been affixed
to the cylinder before shipment from the
manufacturer to the buyer. 38
6.2.1.1 Cylinder standards certification.
The concentration of vinyl chloride In nitro-
gen in each cylinder must have been certi-
fied by the manufacturer by a direct analysis
of each cylinder using an analytical proce-
dure that the manufacturer had calibrated
on the day of cylinder analysis. The calibra-
tion of the analytical procedure shall, as a
minimum, have utilized a three-point cali-
bration curve. It Is recommended that the
manufacturer maintain two calibration
standards and use these standards in the
following way: (1) A high concentration
standard (between 4,000 and 8,000 ppm) for
1 Mention of trade names on specific prod-
ucts does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
identifying label on each bottle, and record
the date, time, and sample location both on
the bottles and In a log book.
7.1.2 Water sampling—Prior to use, the
50 ml vials (without the discs) must be
capped with aluminum foil and muffled at
400'C for at least one hour to destroy or
remove any organic matter that could In-
terfere with analysis. At the sampling loca-
tion fill the vials bubble-free, to overflowing
so that a convex meniscus forms at the top.
The excess water Is displaced as the sealing
disc is carefully placed, Teflon side down, on
the opening of the vial. Place the aluminum
seal over the disc and the neck of the vial
and crimp Into place. Affix an Identifying
label on the bottle, and record the date, time,
and sample location both on the vials and
In a log book. All samples must be kept re-
frigerated until analyzed.
7.2 Sample recovery. Samples must be run
within 24 hours.
7.2.1 Resin samples—The weight of the
resin used must be between 0.1 and 4.6 grams.
An exact weight must be obtained (±0.001
gram) for each sample. In the case of sus-
pension resins a volumetric cup can be pre-
pared which will hold the required amount
of sample. The sample bottle Is opened, and
the cup volume of resin is added to the tared
sample vial (Including septum and alumi-
num cap). The vial is immediately sealed
and the exact sample weight Is then obtained.
Report this value on the data sheet as It is
required for calculation of RVCM. In the
case of relatively dry resin samples (water
content <0.3 weight %), 100 ,(1 of distilled
wat=r must be injected Into the vial, after
sealing and weighing, using a 100 ul syringe.
In the case of dispersion re°lns, the cup
cannot be used. The sample is Instead
weighed approximately in an aluminum dish,
transferred to the tared vial and weighed
accurately In the vial. The sample is then
placed In the Perkin-Elmer head space ana-
lyzer (or equivalent) and conditioned for one
hour at 90»C.
NOTE: Some aluminum vial caps have a
center section which must be removed prior
to placing into sample tray. If not removed,
ITI-A-2Q
-------
serious damage to the Injection needle will
occur.
7.2.2 Suspension resin slurry and wet cake
samples—Slurry must be filtered using a
small Buchner funnel with vacuum to yield
wet cake. The filtering process must be con-
tinued only as long as a steady stream of
water Is exiting from the funnel. ExcesMve
filtration time could result In some loss of
VCM. The wet cake sample (0.10 to 4.5 grams)
Is added to a tared vial (Including septum
and aluminum cap) and Immediately sealed.
Sample weight Is then determined to 3 deci-
mal places. The sample Is then placed In the
Perkin-Elmer head space analyzer (or equiva-
lent) and conditioned for one hour at 90°C.
A sample of wet cake Is used to determine
TS (total solids). This Is required for calcu-
lating the RVCM.
7.2.3 Dispersion resin slurry samples.—
This material should not1 be filtered. Sample
must be thoroughly mixed. Using a tar«d
vial (Including septum and aluminum cap)
add approximately 8 drops (0.25 to 0.35
grains) of slurry or latex using a medicine
dropper. This should be done Immediately
after mixing. Seal the vial as soon as possible.
Determln? sample weight accurate to 0.001
grams. Total sample weight must not exceed
0.50 grams. Condition the vial for one hour
at BO°C In the analyzer. Determine the TS
on the slurry sample (Section 7.3.5).
7.2.4 Inprocess wastewater samples—
Using a tared vial (including septum and
aluminum cap) quickly add approximately
1 cc of water using a medicine dropper. Seal
the vial as soo-i as possible. Determine
sample weight accurate to o.ooi gram. Con-
dition the vial for two hours at 90'C in the
analyzer.
7.3 Analysis.
7.3.1 Preparation of gas chromatograph—
Install the chromatographic column and con-
dition overnight at 1508C. Do not connect the
exit end of the column to the detector while
conditioning.
7,3.1.1 Flow rate adjustments—-Adjust
flow rates as follows:
a. Nitrogen carrier gas—Set regulator on
cylinder to read 50 pslg. Set regulator on
ohromatograph to 1.3 kg/cm-. Normal flows
at thii pressure should be 25 to 40 ec/minute.
Check with bubble flow mater.
b. Burner air supply—Set regulator on cyl-
inder to read BO pslg. Set regulator on
ohromatograph to supply air to burner at a
rate between 250 and 300 ce/minute. Check
with bubble flowmeter.
c. Hydrogen supply—Set regulator on cyl-
inder to read 30 psig. Set regulator on
chromatograph to supply approximately
35;t6 ce/mlnute. Optimize hydrogen flow to
yield the most sensitive detector response
without extinguishing the flame. ChecK flow
with bubble meter and record this flow
7.3.1.2 Temperature adjustments—Set
temperatures as follows:
a. Oven (chromatographic column), 50°
C.
b. Dosing line, 140° C.
c. Injection block, 140° C.
d. Sample chamber, water temperature,
90° C + 1.00 C.
7.3.1.3 Ignition of flame lonization detec-
tor—Ignite the detector according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
7.3.1.4 Amplifier balance—Balance the
amplifier according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
7.3.2 Programming the chromatograph—
Program the chromatograph as follows:
a. I—Dosing time—The normal setting Is
2 seconds.
b. A—Analysis time—The normal setting
is 8 minutes. Certain types of samples con-
tain high boiling materials which can cause
Interference wtlh the vinyl chloride peak on
sample line from the cylinder must be
purged (Into hoed) for several minutes prior
to filling vials. After purging, reduce the flow
rate to approximately 800-1000 cc/mln. Place
end of tubing Into vial (near bottom) and
after one minute slowly remove tubing. Place
septum in vial as socn as possible to mini-
mize mixing air with sarr.ple. After the stand-
ard vials are sealed, Inject 100^,1 of distilled
water.
8.2 Preparation of chromatograph calibra-
tion curve.
Prepare two 50 ppm, two 500 ppm, two 200X1
ppm, and two 4000 ppm standard samples.
Bun the calibration samples in exactly the
same manner as regular samples. Plot A.,
the integrator area counts for ea?h standard
sample vs Cc, the concentration of vinyl
chloride in each standard sample. Draw ft
line of best fit through the points.
9. Calculations.
9.1 Response factor.
From the calibration curve described in
Section 8.2, above, select the value of Cc
that corresponds to A. for each sample. Com-
pute the response factor, Rr, for each sample,
as follows:
ff/-4-" Equation 107-1
(^ c
9.2 Residual vinyl chloride monomer con-
centration, or vinyl chloride monomer Con-
centration.
Calculate C,,, as follows:
n _A,PafM,V,
v/ r ucs~
+*ra)
subsequent analyses. In these cases the
analysis time must be adjusted to eliminate
the Interference. An automated backflush
system can also be used to solve this prob-
lem.
c. B—Flushing—The normal setting Is 0.2
minutes.
d. TV—stabilization time. The normal set-
ting is 0.2 minutes.38
e. X—Number of analyses per sample—The
normal setting is 1.
7.3.3 Preparation of sample turntable—Be-
fore placing any sample Into turntable, be
certain that the center section of the alu-
minum cap has been removed. The numbered
simple bottles should be placed In the cor-
responding numbered positions In the turn-
table. Insert samples In the following order:
Positions 1 & 2—Old 2000 ppm standards
for conditioning. These are necessary only
after the analyzer has not been used for 24
hours or longer.
Position 3—50 ppm standard, freshly pre-
pared,
Position 4—500 ppm standard, freshly pre-
pared.
Position 5—2000 ppm standard, freshly
prepared.
Position 8—4000 ppm standard, freshly pre-
pared.
Position 7—Sample No. 7 (This is the first
sample of the day, but is given as 7 to be con-
sistent with the turntable and the Integrator
printout.)
After all samples have been positioned, in-
eert the second set of 50, 600, 2000, and 4000
ppm standards. Samples, Including stand-
ards must be conditioned in the bath of
90* C for 1 hour (not to exceed 5 hours).
7.3.4 Start chromatograph program—
When all samples, including standards, have
been conditioned at 90' C for 1 hour, start
the analysis program according to the manu-
facturers' instructions. These instruction*
must be carefully followed when starting
and stopping program to prevent damage to
the dosing assembly.
7.3.5 Determination of total solids (TS).
For wet cake, slurry, resin solution, and
PVC latex samples, determine T8 for each
sample by accurately weighing approxim-
ately 3 to 4 grams of sample in an aluminum
pan before and after placing in a draft
oven (108 to 110' C). Samples must be dried
to constant weight. After first weighing re-
turn the pan to the oven for a short pe-
riod of time and then rewelgh to verify com-
plete dryress, TS is then calculated as the
final sample weight divided by initial sam-
ple weight.
6. Calibration.
Calibration is to be performed each eight-
hour period when the Instrument is used.
Each day, prl^r to running samples, the col-
umn should be conditioned by running two
of the previous days 2000 ppm standards.
8.1 Preparation of Standards,
Calibration standards are prepared by fill-
Ing the vials with the vinyl chloride/nitro-
gen standards, rapidly seating the septum
and sealing with the aluminum cap. Use a
stainless steel line from the cylinder to the
vial. Do not use rubber or tygon tubing. The
Equation 107-3
I m,
The following general equation can be used for any sample which contains VCM, PVO and
water.
Equation 107-2
where ;
C,,,= Concentration of vinyl chloride
in the sample, in ppm.
Pa —Laboratory atmosphere pres-
sure, mm Hg.
Ti = Koom temperature, °K.
W,= Molecular weight of VCM
(02.5).
V» -Volume of vapor phase (vial volume
less sample volume) .
m i - Weight of sample, grams,
fi'-.-Otvs constant [83,300 (oc-mm-mole-
degrees Kelvin) ]
K= Henry's Law constant. For VOM in PVO
at 80' C, Jf=8.52 x 10-« = K,>, For VOM in
1 CQ (approximate) waste water sample at
90° C, K = 50 X 10-«==K w.
T , — Equilibration temperature, 'K.
If the following conditions are met, Equa-
tion 107-2 can be simplified as follows:
1. T, = 22°C (296° K)
2. r» = 90° (383" K)
3. P. = 750 mm Hg.
where
V ,. = Vial volume, co (23.5) .
6. Sample contains less than 0.5 percent
water.
Equation 107-4
III-A-30
-------
where: Result* calculated using Equation 107-4
TS=Total solids, represent concentration based on the total
NOTB: K . must be determined for samples 8amPle- To obtftln regult8 based on ArV PVC
with a vapor volume to liquid volume ratio content, divide by TS.
other than 22.5 to 1. This ratio can be ob- For a l-cc wastewater sample (that is,
talned by adjusting the sample weight 22.5 to 1 vapor volume to liquid volume
through giving consideration to the total ratio), K « Is B.O x 10-". Thus, Equation 107-
solids and density of the PVC. ' 4 can be simplified to the following:
. f5.988XlO-»
+ (2.066X10-') I Equation 107-5
(Sees. 113 and 301 (a) of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.8.C. 18S7c-7 and TBS7g(a) .)38
10. References.
a. Residual Vinyl Chloride Monomer Con-
tent of Polyvlnyl Chloride Resins and Wet
Cake Samples, B. F. Goodrich Chemical Co.
Standard Test Procedure No. 1005-T. B. P.
Goodrich Technical Center, Avon Lake, Ohio.
January 30, 1975.
b. Berens, A. R., "The Solubility of Vinyl
Chloride In Polyvlnyl Chloride," ACS-Divl-
slon of Polymer Chemistry, Polymer Pre-
prints 15 (2) : 197, 1974.
c. Berens, A. R., "The Diffusion of Vinyl
Chloride In Polyvlnyl Chloride," ACS-Divl-
slon of Polymer Chemistry, Polymer Pre-
prints IS (2): 203, 1974.
d. Berens, A. R., L, B. Crlder, C. J. Toma-
nek and J. M. Whitney, Analysis for Vinyl
Chloride in PVC Powders by Head-Space Oas
Chromatography," to be published.
(Sec. 114 of the Clean Air Act u amended
. 7414)).
III-A-31
-------
SECTION IV
FULL TEXT
OF
REVISIONS
-------
IV. FULL TEXT OF REVISIONS
Reference Page
36 FR 5931, 3/31/71 - List of Hazardous Air Pollutants
36 FR 23239, 12/7/71 - Proposed Standards for Asbestos,
Beryllium and Mercury
1 38 FR 8826, 4/6/73 - National Emission Standards 1
Promulgated for Asbestos, Beryllium, and Mercury
2 39 FR 15398, 5/3/74 - Amendments to Standards for 32
Asbestos, Beryllium, and Mercury
3 39 FR 37987, 10/25/74 - Region V Office: New Address 34
39 FR 38064, 10/25/74 - Proposed Amendments to Standards
for Asbestos and Mercury
4 40 FR 18170, 4/25/75 - Delegation of Authority to State 34
of Washington
5 40 FR 42195, 9/11/75 - Delegation of Authority to State 35
of California
6 40 FR 45171, 10/1/75 - Delegation of Authority to State 36
of California
7 40 FR 48299, 10/14/75 - Amendments to Standards for 37
Asbestos and Mercury
8 40 FR 48348, 10/15/75 - Delegation of Authority to 57
State of New York
9 40 FR 50719, 10/31/75 - Delegation of Authority to 57
State of Colorado
10 40 FR 58646, 12/18/75 - Delegation of Authority to 58
Washington Local Agencies
40 FR 59532, 12/24/75 - Proposed Standards for Vinyl
Chloride
11 40 FR 59729, 12/30/75 - Delegation of Authority to State 58
of Maine
40 FR 60079, 12/31/75 - Notice of Public Hearing on
Proposed Vinyl Chloride Standard
12 41 FR 1914, 1/13/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 59
of Michigan
iV-i
-------
Reference Page
41 FR 2430, 1/16/76 - Notice of Availability of Vinyl
Chloride EIS for Review and Comments
13 41 FR 4264, 1/29/76 - Delegation of Authority to 59
Washington Local Agencies
14 41 FR 7750, 2/29/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 60
Oregon
15 41 FR 8346, 2/26/76 - Delegation of Authority to 60
Commonwealth of Virginia
16 41 FR 11820, 3/22/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 60
of Connecticut
17 41 FR 19633, 5/13/76 - Delegation of Authority to Common- 61
wealth of Massachusetts and State of New Hampshire
18 41 FR 21450, 5/26/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 62
of California
19 41 FR 24885, 6/21/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 62
of Georgia
20 41 FR 27967, 7/8/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 63
of California
21 41 FR 33264, 8/9/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 63
of California
22 41 FR 34629, 8/16/76 - Delegation of Authority to the 64
U.S. Virgin Islands
23 41 FR 36918, 9/1/76 - National Emission Standards, Avail- 64
bility of Information
24 41 FR 40108, 9/17/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 64
of California
25 41 FR 40468, 9/20/76 - Degelation of Authority to State 65
of Alabama
26 41 FR 43149, 9/30/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 65
of Indiana
27 41 FR 44859, 10/13/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 65
of North Dakota
28 41 FR 46560, 10/21/76 - National Emission Standards 66
Promulgated for Vinyl Chloride.
29 41 FR 48343, 11/3/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 80
of California
iv-ii
-------
Reference Page
30 41 FR 53017, 12/3/76 - Delegation of Authority to 80
Pima County Health Department; Arizona
41 FR 53017, 12/3/76 - Correction to Vinyl Chloride 80
Emission Standards Promulgated on October 21, 1976
31 41 FR 54758, 12/15/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 81
of California
32 41 FR 56805, 12/30/76 - Delegation of Authority to State 81
of North Carolina
33 42 FR 1215, 1/6/77 - Delegation of Authority to State 82
of Vermont
34 42 FR 4124, 1/24/77 - Delegation of Authority to State 82
of South Carolina
35 42 FR 6812, 2/4/77 - Delegation of Authority to the City 82
of Philadelphia and the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
42 FR 12122, 3/2/77- Proposed Amendment to National Emission
Standards for Asbestos
36 42 FR 12127, 3/2/77 - Amendment to National Emission 83
Standards for Asbestos
37 42 FR 16778, 3/30/77 - Correction to Region V Address and 84
Delegation of Authority to State of Wisconsin
42 FR 28154, 6/2/77 - Proposed Amendment to National
Emission Standard for Vinyl Chloride
38 42 FR 29005, 6/7/77 - Corrections and Amendments to 84
Standard for Vinyl Chloride
42 FR 29332, 6/8/77 - Addition of Benzene to List of
Hazardous Air Pollutants
39 42 FR 37387, 7/21/77 - Delegation of Authority to the 88
State of New Jersey
42 FR 40452, 8/10/77 - Proposed Amendments to National
Emission Standard for Vinyl Chloride; Extension of Comment
Period
40 42 FR 41424, 8/17/77 - Authority Citations; Revision 89
41 42 FR 44544, 9/6/77 - Delegation of Authority to the State 89
of Montana
iV-iii
-------
Reference
42 FR 44823, 9/7/77 - Proposed Amendments to National Emis-
sion Standard for Vinyl Chloride; Extension of Comment
Period
42 FR 45705, 9/12/77 - Notice of Delegation of Authority
to the State of Indiana
42 42 FR 51574, 9/29/77 - National Emission Standards, Units 90
and Abbreviations
42 FR 58543, 11/10/77 - Proposed Development of Asbestos
Standard for the Production and Use of Crushed Stone
43 42 FR 62137, 12/9/77 - Delegation of Authority to the 90
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico
42 FR 64145, 12/22/77 - Notice of Delegation of Authority
to the State of Georgia
42 FR 64735, 12/28/77 - Notice of Delegation of Authority
to the Commonwealth of Kentucky
44 43 FR 10, 1/3/78 - Delegation of Authority to the State 91
of Minnesota
45 43 FR 3361, 1/25/78 - Delegation of Authority to the 91
Commonwealth of Kentucky
46 43 FR 6770, 2/16/78- Delegation of Authority to the 92
State of Delaware
47 43 FR 8800, 3/3/78 - Revision of Authority Citations 92
48 43 FR 20987, 5/16/78 - Delegation of Authority to 93
State/Local Air Pollution Control Agencies in Arizona,
California, and Nevada
49 43 FR 26372, 6/19/78 - Amendments to Asbestos Standard 94
50 43 FR 47692, 10/16/78 - Delegation of Authority for State 97
of Rhode Island
51 44 FR 7714, 2/7/79 - Delegation of Authority to State of 97
Texas
iv-iv
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Title 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER 1—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Asbestos, Beryllium, and Mercury
On March 31, 1971 (36 FR 5931), pur-
suant to section 112 of the Clean Air Act,
as amended, the Administrator published
an initial list or three hazardous air pol-
lutants which, in his judgment may
cause, or contribute to, an Increase in
mortality or an increase in serious ir-
reversible, or incapacitating reversible,
illness. The pollutants were asbestos,
beryllium, and mercury. On December 7,
1971 (36 FR 23239), the Administrator
proposed standards for these pollutants.
Interested persons participated in the
rulemaking by giving testimony at public
hearings and by sending comments to
EPA. Public hearings were held in New
York City on January 18, 1972, and in
Los Angeles on February 15 and 16, 1972.
A third hearing, scheduled to be held
In Kansas City, on February 1, 1972, was
canceled because of a lack of requests to
participate. Sixty-eight persons gave
testimony at the public hearings, and 56
persons sent comments to EPA. Repre-
sented were industries, universities, gov-
ernmental agencies—Federal, State, and
local, and environmental groups. Copies
of the public hearing records are avail-
able at all EPA Regional Offices and at
the Division of Stationary Source En-
forcement, room 3220, 401 M Street SW.,
Washington, D.C. 20460, where copies of
the comments received are also available.
The bases for the Administrator's de-
terminations that asbestos, beryllium,
and mercury are hazardous, the deriva-
tions of the standards now adopted, the
Environmental Protection Agency's re-
sponses to the significant comments
received, and the principal revisions to
the proposed standards are summarized
below. A more detailed statement is
available on request from the Emission
Standards and Enginerlng Division, En-
vironmental Protection Agency, Re-
search Triangle Park, N.C. 27711, Atten-
tion: Mr. Don Goodwin. In addition, the
Administrator Is Issuing Information on
control techniques for asbestos, beryl-
lium, and mercury as directed by section
112(b)(2) of the act. Copies of these
documents may be obtained free of
charge from EPA Regional Offices.
- ASBESTOS
Asbestos is a hazardous air pollutant
within the meaning of section 112. Many
persons exposed to asbestos dust de-
veloped asbestosls when the dust concen-
tration was high or the duration of ex-
posure was long 11-7). A large number
of studies have shown that there is an
association between occupational ex-
posure to asbestos and a hlgher-than-
expected incidence of bronchial cancer
(8-30). Asbestos also has been identified
as a causal factor In the development of
mesothellomas, cancers of the mem-
Referencw at end of article.
branes lining the chest and abdomen
(30-47). There are reports of mesothell-
oma associated with nonoccupational
exposures in the neighborhood of as-
bestos sources (38, 42, 43, 46). An out-
standing feature has been the long
period, commonly over 30 yean, between
the first exposure to asbestos and the ap-
pearance of a tumor (.49, 50). There is
evidence which indicates that meeothli-
omas occur after much less exposure to
asbestos dust than the exposure associ-
ated with asbestos (61, 52).
It Is not practicable, at this time, to
establish allowable numerical concentra-
tions or mass emission limits for asbestos.
Satisfactory means of measuring ambient
asbestos concentrations have only re-
cently been developed, and satisfactory
means of measuring asbestos emissions
are still unavailable. Even If satisfactory
means of measuring asbestos emissions
did exist, the previous unavailability of a
satisfactory means of measuring ambient
levels of asbestos makes it Impossible to
estimate even roughly the quantitative
relationship between asbestos-caused ill-
ness and the doses which caused those ill-
nesses. This is a major problem, since
some asbestos caused Illnesses have a 30-
year latency period.
EPA considered the possibility of ban-
ning production, processing, and use of
asbestos or banning all emissions of as-
bestos Into the atmosphere, but rejected
these approaches. The problem of meas-
uring asbestos emissions would make the
latter approach impossible to enforce.
Either approach would result in the pro-
hibition of many activities which are
extremely important; moreover, the
available evidence relating to the health
hazards of asbestos does not suggest that
such prohibition la necessary to protect
public health. For example, demolition of
any building containing asbestos fire-
proofing or insulating materials would
have to be prohibited as would the use of
materials containing even trace amounts
of asbestos which could escape into the
atmosphere.
Finally, the available evidence suggests
a gradient of effects from direct occupa-
tional, to indirect occupational exposure,
to families of workers exposed to asbestos
and persons in the neighborhood of as-
bestos sources—in all of which situa-
tions asbestos concentrations are un-
doubtedly high by comparison with most
community air. This suggests that there
are levels of asbestos exposure that will
not be associated with any detectable
risk, although these levels are not
known (53).
It is probable that the effects of as-
bestos Inhalation are cumulative; that Is,
low-level and/or intermittent exposure
to asbestos over a long time may be
equally as Important in the etiology of
asbestotlc disease as high level and/or
continuous exposure over a shorter pe-
riod. On the other hand, the available
evidence does not Indicate that levels
of asbestos In most community air cause
asbestotio disease. Taking both these
considerations into account, the Admin-
istrator has determined that, in order to
provide an ample margin of safety to
protect the public health from asbestos,
It Is necessary to control emissions from
major man-made sources of asbestos
emissions into the atmosphere, but that
It is not necessary to prohibit all
emissions.
In this determination, the Administra-
tor has relied on the National Academy
of Sciences' report on asbestos (53),
which concludes: "Asbestos is too Im-
portant in our technology and economy
for its essential use to be stopped. But,
because of the known serious effects of
uncontrolled inhalation of asbestos min-
erals in industry and uncertainty as to
the shape and character of the dose-
response curve in man, it would be highly
imprudent to permit additional contami-
nation of the public environment with
asbestos. Continued use at minimal risk
to the public requires that the major
sources of man-made asbestose emission
into the atmosphere be defined and con-
trolled."
The. means of control used are limita-
tions on visible emissions with an option
In some oases to use designated control
equipment, requirements that certain
procedures be followed, and prohibitions
on the use of certain materials or of cer-
tain operations. These means of control
are required because of the impossibility
at this time of prescribing and enforc-
ing allowable numerical concentrations
or mass emission limitations known to
provide an ample margin of safety. The
alternative of no control of the sources
subject to this standard was rejected
because of the significant health hazard
of unregulated emissions of asbestos into
the atmosphere from the designated
major sources.
It is the Administrator's judgment
that the asbestos sources subject to this
standard we the major sources of as-
bestos emissions, In the absence of quan-
titative emission data, the Administra-
tor's judgment was based on an national
inventory of sources and emissions of
asbestos (54) and other reports (S3, 55).
The asbestos emissions and emission
factors presented in the national inven-
tory were based on information obtained
from production and reprocessing com-
panies. This information Included pro-
duction' figures, estimates of control
equipment efficiency and material bal-
ances; it did'not Include emission test
results. The major sources of asbestos
emissions were considered to fall into five
categories: (1) Mining and milling; (2)
manufacturing; (3) fabrication; (4) de-
molition; and (5) spraying, In deter-
mining which of these major sources
should be covered by the standard pro-
mulgated herein, the Administrator con-
sidered the effect other Federal regula-
tions will have on the emissions from
such sources and the proximity of such
sources to the public. In addition, the
Administrator considered comments on
the proposed standard and additional
technical data not available before pro-;
posal. The following paragraphs explain
these considerations and the changes
made to the standard between proposal
and final promulgation.
The promulgated standard applies to
asbestos mills, selected manufacturing
operations, the use of spray-on asbestos
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 36, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1*73
IV-1
-------
MILES AND REGULATIONS
materials, demolition operations, and the
surfacing of roadways with asbestos tail-
ings. The Administrator will continue to
investigate other existing and new
sources of asbestos emission and if any
of them are found to be major sources,
the standard will be revised to cover
them.
As applied to mines, the proposed
standard would have limited the emis-
sions from drilling operations and pro-
hibited visible emissions of participate
matter from mine roads surfaced with
asbestos tailings. The Bureau of Mines
has prescribed health and safety regula-
tions (30 CFR 55.5) for the purpose of
protecting life, the promotion of health
and safety, and the prevention of acci-
dents In open pit metal and nonmetalllc
mines. As related to asbestos mines, these
regulations prohibit persons working in
a mine from being exposed to asbestos
concentrations which exceed the thresh-
old limit value adopted by the American
Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hyglenlats, The regulations specify that
respirators shall not be used to prevent
persons from being exposed to asbestos
where environmental measures are avail-
able. For drilling operations, the regula-
tions reaulre that the holes be collared
and drilled wet The regulations recom-
mend that haulage roads, rook transfer
points, crushers, and other points where
dust (asbestos) is produced sufficient to
cause a health or safety haeard be wetted
down as often as necessary unless the
dust is controlled adequately by other
means. In the judgment of the Admin-
istrator, Implementation of these regu-
lations will prevent asbestos mines from
being a major source which must be cov-
ered by the standard promulgated here-
in. Furthermore, the public is sufficiently
removed from the mine work environ-
ment that their exposure should be slg-
nlncsntly less than that of the workers
in the work environment. Accordingly.
the promulgated standard does not apply
to drilling operations or roadways at
mine locations.
For asbestos mills, the proposed stand-
ard would have applied to ore dumps,
open storage areas for asbestos materials,
tailings dumps, ore dryers, air for proc-
essing ore, air for exhausting parttculate
material from work areas, and any mill-
ing operation which continuously gen-
erates inplant visible emissions. The
promulgated standard prohibits visible
emissions from any part of the mill, but
it does not apply to dumps of asbestos
tailings or open storage of asbestos ores.
The Bureau of Mines' regulations pre-
viously referenced and regulations issued
by the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (20 CFR 1910.93a) pro-
tect workers from the hazards of air con-
taminants in the work environment. The
Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
istration regulations were promulgated
on June 7, 1972. The regulations are in-
tended to protect the health of employees
from asbestos exposure by means of en-
gineering controls (i.e. isolation, enclo-
sures, and dust collection) rather than by
personal protective equipment. It is the
judgment of the Administrator that
measures taken to comply with the Bu-
reau of Mines and Occupational Safety
and Health Administration regulations to
protect the health of persons who work
in proximity to dumps and open storage
areas wfll prevent the dumps and storage
areas from being major sources of asbes-
tos emissions.
The proposed standard would have ap-
plied to buildings, structures, or facilities
within which any fabricating or manu-
facturing operation is carried on which
involves the use of asbestos materials.
Comments received on the proposed
standard indicated that the requirements
for fabricating and manufacturing oper-
ations were confusing. Much of the con-
fusion was created by the use of terms
such as "any," "continuously," and
"forced gas streams." The promulgated
standard is more definitive as to applica-
bility of the provisions. The promulgated
standard prohibits visible
operations
which, in the Judgment of the Adminis-
trator, are major sources of asbestos. The
promulgated standard does not cover
fabrication operations. Of aQ fabrication
operations, only those operations at new
construction sites are considered to be
major sources of asbestos emissions. The
Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
istration regulations specify that all
band- or power-operated tools (l.e. saws,
scorers, abrasive wheels, and drills)
which produce asbestos dust be provided
with dust collection systems. In the Judg-
ment of the Administrator, implementa-
tion of these regulations will prevent
fabrication operations from being a
major source which must be covered by
the standard promulgated herein.
The proposed standard would have
prohibited visible emissions of asbestos
parttDolate material from the repair or
demolition of any building or structure.
other than a single-family dwelling.
Comments indicated that the no visible
•mission requirement would prohibit re-
pair or fHtrtftlMon in many situations,
since it would be impracticable, if not
impossible, to do such work without cre-
ating visible emissions. Accordingly, the
promulgated standard specifies certain
work practices which must be followed
when demolishing certain buildings or
structures. The standard covers Institu-
tional, industrial, and commercial build-
ings or structures, including apartment
houses having more than four dwelling
units, which contain friable asbestos ma-
terial. This coverage la based on the Na-
tional Academy of Sciences' report (53)
which states, "In general, single-family
residential structures contain only small
amounts of asbestos insulation. Demoli-
tion of industrial *"d commercial build-
Ings that have been flreproofed with
asbestos-containing materials will prove
to be an emission source in the future,
requiring control measures." Apartment
houses with four dwelling units or less are
considered to be equivalent to single-
family residential structures. The stand-
ard requires that the Administrator be
notified at least 30 days prior to the com-
mencement of demolition.
The proposed standard would have
limited emissions
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
standardized reference method has not
been developed to quantitatively deter-
mine the content of asbestos in a ma-
terial, there are acceptable methods
available, based on electron microscopy,
which Independent laboratories have de-
veloped. Determining the asbestos con-
tent of a material with these methods
costs approximately $300, and the result*
are accurate within plus or minus 50
percent; these limits on accuracy were
taken into account in establishing the
1-percent limitation.
The proposed standard would have
prohibited the surfacing of any roadway
with asbestos tailings. The promulgated
standard applies to all roadways except
those on ore deposits; these roadways are
temporary, and control measures taken
to comply with the Bureau of Mines reg-
ulations prevent them from being a
major source which must be covered by
the standard promulgated herein. At this
time, the application of asbestos tailings
to public roadways is not widely prac-
ticed, but because of the close proximity
of roads to the public, a ban on using
asbestos tailings on roadways is Included
in the promulgated standard to avoid a
future problem and stop the practice
where It Is followed. The term "surfac-
ing" is defined to include the deposit of
asbestos tailings on roadways covered
with snow or ice; therefore, this practice
is prohibited.
Consideration was given to including
provisions in the standard requiring
proper disposal of the asbestos material
generated during demolition and col-
lected in control devices used to comply
with the requirements of tills standard.
It was decided that this was not neces-
sary because the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration regulations
(29 CPR 1910.93a(h» Include house-
keeping and waste disposal requirements.
These regulations require that any as-
bestos waste, consigned for disposal, be
collected and disposed of in sealed Im-
permeable bags or other closed, imperme-
able containers.
The potential environmental impact of
the promulgated standard was evalu-
ated, and it was concluded that the
standard will not cause any adverse ef-
fects. The potentially adverse environ-
mental effects of the standard are:
(1) The asbestos-materials which will
be collected In control devices and gen-
erated during demolition will have to be
disposed of or recycled.
(2) Materials, such as mineral wool,
ceramic wool, and fiberglass, will be sub-
stituted for asbestos presently contained
in spray-applied flreprooflng and insulat-
ing materials.
In some manufacturing operations, a
major portion of the asbestos-material
collected, by fabric filters is either re-
cycled to the process or is marketed for
other uses. For example, one asbestos tex-
tile mill recycles large quantities of
longer-fiber asbestos for process use and
sells more than 90 percent of the remain-
ing collected materials to a brake lining
manufacturer. Consequently, a signifi-
cant portion of the increased quantities
of "waste" asbestos materials which will
result from the Implementation of the
standard will not require disposal. Where
disposal Is required, the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration regu-
lations (29 CPR 1910.93a(h» require
that any asbestos waste, consigned for
disposal, be collected and disposed of In
sealed Impermeable bags or other closed,
impermeable containers. The contamina-
tion of ground water supplies with asbes-
tos from landfill disposal is not consid-
ered a potential problem.
The substitution of ceramic wool, min-
eral wool, and fiberglass for asbestos Is
not now known to be a problem. There
is no evidence that these materials cause
health effects in the concentrations found
In occupational or ambient environments.
Although the standard was not based
on economic considerations, EPA is
aware of the Impact (55) and considers It
to be reasonable. Costs among the various
sources covered by the standard are quite
variable. Although the standard may ad-
versely affect some individual plants or
companies which are marginal opera-
tions, It appears that such effects will be
minimal and the impact to the asbestos
Industries as a whole will not be large.
I. Oookt. W. B.: nbrosls of tht Lungs dut
to tht Inhalation of Arttttot Duet. Brit. Med.
J.. 3,147,1934.
I. Oookt, W. B.: Pulmonary Aabettotls.
Brit, Mtd. J., 1,1034-1035,1987.
3, Dreesttn, W. 0., J. M. Dallavalle, T. I.
BdwarCU, J. W. Miller, and R. R. Baytrs: A
Study of AsbMtos in tht Asbtstot Ttxtut In-
dustry Public BMlth Bull. 341. Washington,
U.S. Oovtrmntnt Printing Office, 1988,136 pp.
4, McDonald, 8,: History of Pulmonary At-
btitotU, Brit. Mtd. J,, 8, 1085-1036, 1937.
5. Mtrewethtr, X. R. A.: Th« Ooeurrsno* of
Pulmonary Flbrotls and Othsr Pulmonary
Affections in AsbMtos Worksrs, J. Ind.
Hyg., II, 198-338, and II, 889-857, 1980.
I. milt, R. O.! Pulmonary Asbtitosli: Re-
port of a oast. Minn, Mtd., 11, 495-499,1980.
7. Boptr, W. B.: Pulmonary Atbthtoslt. A
report of a oast and a mitw. Am. Rtv.
Tubtro., 12, 671-584,1980.
I. Bbnstr, O. M., ,3. 8. Pauldi, and M. J.
Sttwart: Ooeupatlonal Oanotr of tht Urinary
Bladdtr In Dytttuffs Operative! and of tht
Lung in ArtMtot Textile Worktn and Iron-
ort Mintn. Am. J. Olln. Path., 15, 190-184,
1955.
9, Braun, D. 0., and T. D. Truan: An
Bpldtmlologloal Study of Lung Oanotr In At-
btstot Mintn. Arch. Ind. Htalth, 17, 084-
663, 1968.
10. Buchanan, W. D.: Asotitoslr and Pri-
mary Intrathoraolo NtoplMmi. Ann. N.T.
Aoad. Sol., 131. 507-618,1966.
11. Cordova, J. P., K. Tttluk, and R. P.
Knudtton: Asbtstotis and Oarolnomai of tht
Lung. Oanotr, 15. 1181-1187. 1963.
It. Doll, R.: Mortality from Lung Oanotr in
Asbestos Worktrs. Brit. J. Ind. Mtd., 11,81-S6,
1955.
IS. Dunn, 3. I., Jr., and J. M. Wtlr: A
Protpeotwt Study of Mortality of Several Oc-
cupational Groups—Special Emphasis on
Lung Oanotr. Aroh. Envlr. Btalth, 17, 71-76,
1968.
14. Dunn, J. X., Jr., and J. M. Wtlr: Oanotr
Experience of Several Occupational Groups
Pollowtd Protptctlvely. Am. J. Pub. Htalth,
85, 1867-1875, 1968,
15. Xlwood, P. 0., and A. L. Ooohrant: A
Follow-up Study of Worktrs from an Asbestos
Factory. Brit. J. Ind. Mtd., II, 804-407, 1964.
It. Xnttrllnt, V. X.: Mortality Among As»
btstos Product Worktrs In tht Unlttd Statts.
Ann. N.T. Aoad. Sol., Ill, 160-166, 1966.
17. Xnttrllnt, P. X., and M. A. Ktndrick:
Asbtstot-dust Exposures at Various Levelt
and Mortality. Aroh. Bnvlr. Htalth, 15, 181-
186, 1967.
II. Oloynt, S. R.: Pntumoeonlotls: A Rti-
tological Survty of Necropsy Material In 1,205
Oasts. Lanctt, 1, 810-414, 1961.
It. Isstlbaohtr, N. J., M. Klaus, and R. L.
Hardy: Acbtstosis and Broncbogtnlo Carci-
noma: Rtport of on* autoptltd east and re-
Tltw of tht arallablt literature. Am. J. Med.,
15 791—783,1968.
10. Jacob, 8., and M. Anspaeh: Pulmonary
NtoplMla Among Drttdtn Asbtttot Workers.
Ann. N.T. Aoad. Sol., Ill, 686-548, IMS.
11. Klelnfeld, M.. J. Mttsttt, and O. Kooy-
man: Mortality Experience in a Group of At-
btitos Worktrs. Arch. Knrtr. Htalth, 15,177-
180,1967.
11. Knox. J. P., R. 8. Doll, and I. D. Hill:
Cohort Analysis of Ohangts In Incidence of
Bronchial Carcinoma In a Textile Aabettos
Factory. Ann. N.T. Aoad. Set., Ill, 536-836,
1966.
11. Knox, J. P., 8. Holme*, R. Doll, and I. D.
Hul: Mortality from Lung Cancer and Other
Oaustt Among Worktrs In an Asbettot Textile
Factory. Brit. J. Ind. Mtd., 15, 398-803, 1968.
14. Lltbtn, J.: MaUgnancltt in Asbtttot
Worktrs. Aroh. Xnrtr. Htalth, 11. 619-031,
1966.
1C. Lynch, K. M., and W. A. Smith: Pul-
monary Asbtstotis, in, Carcinoma of Lung In
Atbtstos-sulooals. Am. J. Oanotr, 14, 60-04,
1835.
M. Manouso, T. P., and A. A. El-Attar:
Mortality Pattern In a Cohort of Asbtttot
Worktrs. J, Oooup. Mtd., 9, 147-103, 1967.
17. McDonald, J. 0., A. D. McDonald, D. W.
Olbbi, J. Bitmlatyckl, and 0. I. Rosslttr:
Mortality In tht Ohrysotlls Asbtttot Mints
and Mills of Quebec, Aroh. Xnrtr, Htalth, 11,
6T7-486,1071.
II. Mtrtwtthtr, I, R. A.; AsbtttosU and
Carcinoma.of tht Lung. In: Annual report or
tht ehlsf Insptotor of faetoritR for tht your
1847. London: M. T. Stationary Office, 1MV,
TO PP.
19. Ntwhoutt, M. I.! A Btudy of tht Mor-
tality of Worktrs in an Asbtstot Factory. Brit.
J. Ind. Mtd., M, 894-801,1969.
JO. Stukoff, I. J., J. Ohurg, and X. 0. Ham-
mond: Asbtttot Xxpoiurt and Ntoplasla.
JAMA, 111, 99-36,1964.
11. Borow, M., A. Oonston, L. L. Uvorntse,
and N. Bchaltt: Mttothtlloma and Itt Associ-
ation with Asbtitot. JAMA, 101, 587-691,
1967.
11. Xlmts, P. 0.. W. T. X. MoOaughty, and
O. L. Wade: Diffuse Mttothtlloma of tht
Pleura and Asbtttos. Brit. Mtd. J., 1. 850-
888, 1966.
11. Xlmts, P. 0., and O. L. Wadt: Relation-
ship Between Xsposurt to Asbtttot and
Pltural Malignancy In Belfast. Ann. N.T.
Aoad. Sol., Ill, 849-687, 1965.
14. Xntleknap, J. B., and W. N. Bmither:
Ptrttontal Tumor In Asbtstotis. Brit. J. Ind.
Med., 11,80-81,1964.
15. Fowler, P. B. S., J. 0. Sloper, and E. O.
Warner: Xxpoture to Aibeitot and Metothell-
oma of the Pleura. Brit. Med. J., 1, 311-313,
1964.
IS. Hammond, Z. 0., I. J. Bellkoff, and J.
Ohurg: Neoplasla Among Insulation Workers
in the Unlttd Statts with Special Reference
to Intraabdomlnal NeoplMla. Ann. N.T. Aoad.
Sol., Ill, 619-635,1065.
17. Hourlhant, D. 0*8.: Tht Pathology of
Mttothtlioma and an AnalytU of Their Ai-
•ooteMon with Asbestos Exposure. Thorax, 18,
808-976, 1904.
II. Lltbtn, J., and R. Plstawka: Mttothtll-
oma and Asbestos Xnoturt. Aroh. Xnvlr.
Htalth, 14, 659-668, 1907.
M. Mann, R. K., J. L. Oroth, and W. M.
O'DonntU: Metotbtlloma Associated with
Aibtttotis. Oanotr, U, 881-036,1960.
•IDIRAl RIOISTIR, VOL. 38, NO. 66—fllDAV, APRIL 4, 1973
IV-3
-------
40. McCaughey, W. T. E., O. L. Wade, and
P. C. Elmes: Exposure to Asbestos Dust and
Diffuse Pleura! Mesothellomas. Brit. Med. J.,
2, 1397, 1962.
41. McDonald, A. D., A. Harper, O. A. El-
Attar, and J. C. McDonald: Epidemiology of
Primary Malignant Mcsothelial Tumors In
Canada. Cancer, 28, 914-919, 1970.
42. Newhousc, M. L., and H. Thompson:
Epidemiology of Mesothellal Tumors In the
London Area. Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sol., 132, 879-
688. 1965.
43. Owen, W. O.: Mesothellal Tumors and
Exposure to Asbestos Dust. Ann. N.Y. Acad.
Scl., 132, 074-679, 1065.
44. SellkolT. I. J., J. Churg. and E. C. Ham-
mond: Relation Between Exposure to As-
bestos and Mesothelloma. New Eug. J. Med.,
272, 660-565, 1965.
45. Wright, O. W.: Asbestos and Health In
1969. Am. Rev. Resp. Dls., 100, 467-479, 1969.
46. Sellkoff, I. J., E. C. Hammond, and J.
Churg: Asbestos Exposure, Smoking, and
Neoplasla. JAMA, 204, 106-112. 1«68.
47. Wagner, J. C., C. A. Bleggs, and P.
Marchand: Diffuse Pleural Mesothelloma and
Asbestos Exposure In the North Western
Cape Province. Brit. J. Ind. Med., 17, 260-271,
1960.
48. Champion, P.: Two cases of Malignant
Mesothelloma After Exposure to Asbestos.
Am. Rev. Resp. Dls., 103, 821-826, 1971.
49. Sellkoff, I. J., and E. C. Hammond: En-
vironmental Epidemiology. III. Community
Effects of Nonoccupatlonal Environmental
Asbestos Exposure. Am. J. Pub. Health, 58,
1658-1666, 1968.
50. Wagner, J.C.: Epidemiology of Diffuse
Mesothellal Tumors: Evidence of an Associa-
tion from Studies in South Africa and the
United Kingdom. Ann. N.T. Acad. Scl., 132,
675-578, 1965.
51. National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health: Occupational Exposures
to Asbestos (Criteria for a Recommended
Standard). Washington, U.8. Department of
Health. Education, and Welfare (PHS,
HSMHA), 1972 (HSM 72-10267).
52. Sellkoff, I. J., W. J. Nicholson, and A. M.
Langer: Asbestos Air Pollution. Arch. Envir.
Health, 25, 1-13, 1972.
53. National Academy of Sciences: Asbestos
(The Need for and Feasibility of Air Pollu-
tion Controls). Washington, National Acad-
emy of Sciences, 1971, 40 pp.
54. National Inventory of Sources and
Emissions—Cadmium, Nickel, and Asbestos.
Report by W. E. Davis & Associates under
contract to the Department of Health, Edu-
cation, and Welfare (Contract No. CPA 22-
69-131). Feb. 1970.
55. Research Triangle Institute: Compre-
hensive Study of Specified Air Pollution
Sources to Assess the Economic Impact of Air
Quality Standards—Asbestos, Beryllium, Mer-
cury. Report prepared under contract to the
Environmental Protection Agency (Contract
No. 68-02-0088). Aug. 1972.
BERYLLIUM
Beryllium Is a hazardous air pollutant
within the meaning of section 112. The
proven effects of airborne beryllium ma-
terials on human health Include both
acute and chronic lethal Inhalation ef-
fects (1, 2), as well as skin and conjunc-
tival effects (2). Insufficient data are
available to incriminate beryllium as a
human carcinogen u. 2), but the lack of
of any mechanism for the total elimina-
tion of beryllium body burdens, and the
resulting possibly long residence time
may enhance the opportunity for cancer
induction. The Beryllium Registry now
contains over 820 proven cases of beryl-
lium-related disease (3), but since many
References at end of article.
RULES AND REGULATIONS
of these were most likely due to exposure
prior to the institution of controls, proper
assessment of the period of exposure is
not always possible (1, 2); it is known,
however, that chronic beryllium disease
is associated not only with activities in-
volving extraction processes, but also that
64 registry cases resulted from exposure
during machining operations on beryl-
lium materials (3). There are at least 45
cases of nonoccupationallylncurred dis-
eases on file with the registry, of which
approximately half have been fatal (J),
and retrospective studies of the concen-
trations of beryllium that resulted in
some cases of chronic beryllium disease
from nonoccupational exposure nave
concluded that the lowest concentration
which produced disease was greater than
0.01 pg/m* and probably less than 0.10
Mg/m§ (4).
In 1949, when it became apparent that
beryllium was a toxic material, the
Atomic Energy Commission adopted a
limit for beryllium concentrations in
community air (i.e., 0.01 us of beryllium
per cubic meter of air averaged over a 30-
day period) (2). Beryllium refining com-
panies holding contracts with the ABC to
operate AEC-owned refinery facilities
and expand their own refinery capacity
to meet AEC's beryllium requirements,
were required to observe the community
air limit. With the termination of these
contracts In the 1961-63 period due to
a reduction In ABC requirements for
beryllium, the refineries were no longer
subject to the AEC community alrs limit.
The AEC's health and safety require-
ments, however, have continued to apply
to all AEC-owned facilities, some of
which fabricate and assemble beryllium
parts.
In the period since the Implementation
at the AEC guideline, no reported cases
of chronic beryllium disease have oc-
curred as a result of community exposure,
and the Committee on Toxicology of the
National Academy of Sciences concluded
that the AEC guideline limit represents a
safe level of exposure (I).
Accordingly, the Administrator has de-
termined that in order to provide an
ample margin of safety to protect the
public health from beryllium, sources of
beryllium dust,' fume, or mist emissions
into the atmosphere should be controlled
to insure that ambient concentrations
of beryllium do not exceed 0.01 /ig/m'—
30-day average.
The beryllium standard covers extrac-
tion plants, foundries, 'ceramic manufac-
turing plants, machine shops (processing
beryllium or beryllium alloys containing
in excess of 5 percent beryllium) and
disposal of beryllium-containing wastes.
Most affected beryllium sources are lim-
ited to emissions of not more than 10
grams per day. This level was determined
through dispersion estimates as the level
which would protect against the occur-
rence of 30-day average ambient concen-
trations exceeding 0.01 MB/m1. The
sources covered by the standard are the
only known ones that could result in am-
bient beryllium concentrations In excess
of 0.01 Mg/m'. The assumptions and equa-
tions used to make the dispersion es-
timates are given in the Background In-
formation Report for Asbestos, Beryl-
lium, and Mercury (APTD-0753), pub-
lished at the time the standards were
proposed.
Rocket testing facilities are required
to meet the limit of 75 microgram-min-
utes per cubic meter, accumulated dur-
ing any period of 2-consecutive weeks.
The limit for rocket testing facilities is
the same as that developed in 190C by
the Committee on Toxicology of the Na-
tional Academy of Sciences for protec-
tion of off-site personnel from intermit-
tent exposures to soluble beryllium com-
pounds arising from the firing of rocket
motors U).
The proposed standard did not include
a provision on open burning of beryllium-
containing waste. The promulgated
standard includes a ban on open burning
of beryllium-containing waste. This
change was made because information
received after proposal Indicated that
such sources can cause ambient concen-
trations of beryllium in excess of 0.01
ftg/m1 and because it is not possible to
control the emissions from open burning.
The promulgated standard does allow
disposal of beryllium-containing waste
in incinerators which are controlled so
as not to exceed the 10-gram-per-day
limit. The disposal of beryllium-contain-
ing explosive waste to included in the
standard covering rocket testing.
The proposed standard would have
covered all machining operations which
use alloys containing any amount of be-
ryllium. Comments were received which
claimed that numerous machining opera-
tions use alloys containing low concen-
trations of beryllium and do not exceed
the 10-gram-per-day emission limita-
tion. An Investigation of these com-
ments revealed that alloys which include
beryllium either contain a large amount
(greater than 60 percent) or a small
amount (less than 5 percent), and that
approximately 8,000 machining opera-
tions use the low beryllium content al-
loys. Tests were conducted by the Agency
to determine the beryllium emissions
from the operations which use the low
beryllium content alloys (e.g. stamping,
tube drawing, milling, and sawing). The
results indicated that even if the emis-
sions were vented to the outside air,
which they ordinarily are not, they would
be significantly below the 10-gram-per-
day emission limitation. After consider-
ing these results and the administrative
burden if the standard applied to such
a large number of sources, the proposed
standard was changed to exempt the
machining operations which use alloys
containing less than 5-percent beryllium.
The proposed standard would have al-
lowed all sources of beryllium to choose
between meeting the 10-gram-per-day
emission limit and complying by use of
ambient monitoring to insure that the
0.01 Mg/m' 30-day average is never ex-
ceeded. After reconsidering the proposed
standard and the difficulty inherent In
using ambient air quality data, as op-
posed to emission data, as a regulatory
tool, it was decided to limit the use of
ambient data as a means of compliance
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 38, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-4
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
to those sources which have demon-
strated over a reasonable past period
that they can meet and have met the
ambient limitation. Therefore, the stand-
ard being promulgated herein allows the
ambient option only to existing sources
which have 3 years of current ambient
air quality data which demonstrate to
the Administrator's satisfaction that the
0.01 ng/m1 level can be met in the vicinity
of the source. A minimum of 3 years of
data was judged to be necessary to dem-
onstrate that the ambient guideline of
0 01 jig/m' (30-day average) can be met
because of the possibility of monthly,
seasonal, and even annual variations In
ambient levels caused by variations In
meteorology and production. The exist-
ing sources which could qualify or this
option are four beryllium extraction
plants and, possibly, a small number of
machine shops. These sources were de-
signed or modified to facilitate compli-
ance with the 0.01 M8/m ambient limit.
The potential environmental Impact of
this standard was evaluated and it was
concluded that the standard will not
cause any adverse effects. Beryllium is
a very expensive material, and most gas
streams emitting significant quantities
of beryllium are controlled with high ef-
ficiency dry collectors, and the collected
material is recycled or sold back to the
primary producers. Wet collectors are
rarely used strictly as an air pollution
control device, but more often as an ex-
traction process control device allowing
recycle of waste liquids to the process.
Absolute filters are often used as final
filters and collect small quantities of
beryllium from very low concentration
gas streams. These filters are usually
buried in company owned or segregated
dumps or stored in unused mines or
buildings. Most of the solid wastes are
prepackaged prior to burial to prevent
escape of beryllium to the environment.
Although the standard is not based on
economic considerations, EPA is aware of
the economic impact (5) of the stand-
ard. Since most of the sources of beryl-
lium emissions are already controlled and
in compliance with the standard, the
economic impact will be very small.
1. Committee on Toxicology, National Acad-
emy of Sciences: Air Quality Criteria lor
Beryllium and Ita Compounds. Report pre-
pared under contract to the U.S. Public
Health Service (Contract N7onr-291(61) ),
Washington, March 1, 1966.
2. National Institute lor Occupational
Safety and Health: Occupational Exposure to
Beryllium (Criteria for a Recommended
Standard). Washington, U.S. Department of
Health, Education, and Welfare (PHS,
HSMHA) , 1973 (HSM 72-10268) .
3. Massachusetts General Hospital, U.S.
Beryllium Case Registry, Boston, Mass.
4. Elsenbud, M., R. C. Wanta, C. Dustan,
L. T. Steadman, W. B. Harris, and B. 8. Wolf:
Nonoccupatlonal Berylllosis. J. Ond. Hyg.
Toxicol., 31, 382-294, 1949.
5 Research Triangle Institute: Compre-
hensive Study of Specified Air Pollution
Sources to Assess the Economic Impact of Air
Quality Standards — Asbestos, Beryllium, Mer-
cury. Report prepared under contract to the
Environmental Protection Agency (Contract
No. 68-02-0088) . August 1972.
MERCURY
Mercury is a hazardous air pollutant
within the meaning of section 112. Ex-
posure to metallic mercury vapors may
cause central nervous system injury, and
renal damage (1, 3). Experience with
mercury vapor comes almost exclusively
from animal experiments and industrial
exposures. Animal (rat) data indicate a
risk of accumulation in critical systems
upon prolonged exposure, with a poten-
tial, for example, for selective brain dam-
age (2, 3)'. Prolonged exposure to about
100 micrograms mercury per cubic meter
of air Involves a definite risk of mercury
intoxication (3).
To determine the ambient air level of
mercury that does not Impair health, the
airborne burden must be considered to-
gether with the water- and food-borne
burdens. An expert group concluded,
based on its analysis of several episodes
of mercury poisoning in Japan, that 4
micrograms of methylmercury per kilo-
gram of bodywelght per day would result
In the intoxication of a sensitive adult;
application of a safety factor of 10 yielded
an acceptable exposure of about 30 mi-
crograms per day for a 70-kilogram man,
and this level is also believed to provide
satisfactory protection against genetic
lesions, and poisoning of the fetus and
of children «).
It should be noted that methylmercury
Is considered to be by far the most haz-
ardous mercury compound, particularly
via the ingestion of fish in which it has
been concentrated through the food
chain, (3,5). The Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, in view of the present lim-
ited knowledge as to the effects of in-
haled mercury in the general population,
and in order to best assure the requisite
"ample margin of safety to protect the
public health," has concluded that it is
prudent to consider exposures to methyl -
mercury (diet) and mercury vapor (air)
to be equivalent and additive. It has been
estimated that from average diets, over
a considerable period, mercury Intakes of
10 micrograms per day may be expected
(6), so that, in order to restrict total
Intake to 30 micrograms per day, the
average mercury Intake from ah- would
have to be limited to 20 micrograms per
day. Assuming Inhalation of 20 cubic
meters of air per day, the air could con-
tain an average daily concentration of
no more than 1 microgram of mercury
per cubic meter.
The standard promulgated herein reg-
ulates the only two sources, mercury ore
processing faculties and mercury cell
chlor-alkali plants, which have been
found to emit mercury in a manner that
could cause the ambient concentration to
exceed the Inhalation effects limits of 1
microgram per cubic meter. The stand-
ard limits emissions from these facilities
to not more than 2,300 grams per day.
The emission limit of 2,300 grams per
day was derived from dispersion esti-
mates as the level which would protect
against the violation of an average daily
ambient concentration of 1 microgram
per cubic meter. -The assumptions and
References at end of article.
equations used to make the dispersion
estimates are given in the Background
Information Report for Asbestos, Beryl-
lium, and Mercury (APTD-0753), pub-
lished at the time the standards were
proposed.
Many mercury cell chlor-alkali plant
cell rooms present severe source testing
problems due to their design and con-
struction. Such sources may either recon-
struct the cell room so that accurate
source tests can be made or employ
housekeeping and maintenance practices
that minimize mercury emissions from
the cell room. Source test data and cal-
culations have indicated that when such
practices are used, 1,300 grams per day
is a reasonable estimate of emissions
from the cell room. Therefore, when this
option is chosen, an emission of 1,300
grams per day will be assigned to the cell
room. This permits emissions of not more
than 1,000 grams per day from the hydro-
gen and end box ventilation streams com-
bined.
Compliance with the standard will be
determined by the EPA reference method
or EPA-approved substitute methods.
Where a chlor-alkali plant chooses the
housekeeping and maintenance practices
option, determination of compliance of
the cell room emission will be based on
the use of EPA-approved practices. A list
of approved practices may be obtained
from EPA on request to regional offices.
The only major change to the mercury
standard Is the Introduction of the above
option of assigning an emission number
to the cell room provided certain house-
keeping and maintenance requirements
are met. When this option is chosen, test-
ing is not required for emissions from the
cell room. This option Is offered because
comments, testimony, and EPA source
testing experience Indicated that most
existing cell rooms cannot be accurately
tested for mercury emissions. Accurate
emission tests are unduly complicated
and costly because of the cell room
configuration.
Some of the changes suggested In writ-
ten comments and public hearing testi-
mony were considered by EPA but not
made. The most significant one Involved
the environmental chemistry of mercury,
that is, environmental mercury In the at-
mosphere is transformed to mercuric
oxide by the action of ultraviolet radia-
tion, and since mercuric oxide is not as
toxic as elemental mercury, the stand-
ard should be less stringent. This argu-
ment is based on laboratory experiments
under controlled conditions with gener-
ated radiation. The reaction cited in the
testimony occurs when elemental mer-
cury is irradiated with ultraviolet light
with a wavelength of 2,537 angstrom (A).
Naturally occurring ozone in the upper
atmosphere absorbs light in the ultra-
violet region below 3,000 A; (7) hence the
wavelength of ultraviolet necessary for
the reaction is absent in the ambient at-
mosphere, and the reaction does not pro-
ceed at as high a rate as Implied by the
submitted testimony. Field measurements
of both mercury vapors and paniculate
mercury to ambient air indicate that as
much as 86 percent of the mercury de-
KDERAl REGISTER, VOL 38, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-5
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
tected was in an elemental vapor form
(data collected by EPA at the Federal
Building In Moundsvllle, W. Va.).
OHe Environmental Protection Agency
recognises that mercury and lt§ com-
pounds constitute a multimedia eonta-
pounds constitute a multimedia contam-
ination problem, I.e.. strong evidence
alter Ita natural distribution in the en-
vironment; that such uses may cause or
hasten additional deposits Into water
or soil over and above those occurring
naturally, thereby building up environ-
mental concentrations; and the mercury
levels accumulate In the biota, with the
result that potentially dangerous residue
levels are reached m foods consumed by
mpn and mlmMT,
Current data on the environmental
transport of mercury do not permit a
clear assessment of the effect of mercury
emissions into the atmosphere on the
mercury content in the aquatic and ter-
restrial environments. Results of ongoing
research will determine If there Is a need
for more comprehensive control of mer-
cury emissions into the air. The stand-
ard promulgated herein Is Intended to
protect the public health from the effects
of inhaled mercury.
The environmental Impact of this
standard was evaluated and It was con-
cluded that the standard will not cause
any adverse effects since the control of
mercury emissions to the atmosphere
will have only minimal impact on other
areas of environmental concern. The
simplest control for mercury emissions to
the atmosphere is cooling to condense
the mercury. This cooling can be indirect
or direct. By Indirect cooling, the mer-
cury condenses and is retained for re-
cycle or sale. By direct cooling with a
water scrubber, the water is usually re-
circulated after using centrifugal or
gravitational separation to remove the
mercury. The water cannot be reused
Indefinitely and eventually requires addi-
tional treatment to remove the mercury.
In most cases, such treatment facilities
are already being utilized to meet water
quality standards.
A widely used control device for par-
ttculate mercury emissions is the mist
eliminator. Residues in these devices are
removed by gravity and washing with a
recycled liquid. Another control method
is chemical scrubbing. In this system.
scrubbing liquids are continuously made
up while waste materials are usually re-
cycled to the process feed solutions. Re-
cycling of these liquids avoids significant
contamination of water with mercury
residues.
The use of adsorption beds is a highly
efficient control method for removing
mercury from gas streams. Two primary
types are available: (1) Chemically
treated activated carbon beds, and (2)
molecular sieves. Most of the mercury
collected by activated carbon can be re-
claimed by retorting the carbon but this
usually destroys the carbon structure
and necessitates disposal. Some small
amount of residual mercury will remain
with the carbon, but It is tightly bound
and is not easily transferred into the air
or water. Regenerative molecular sieves
do not cause a waste disposal problem
because the sieves can be regenerated
In place without retorting and oaa be
reused many times.
Although the standard was not band
on economic considerations, XPA Is
aware of the Impact (I) and considers it
to- be reasonable. Because mercury is an
international commodity, world prices
determine the fortunes of the domestic
mercury mining industry. Historically,
mercury prices fluctuate greatly in re-
sponse to small changes in demand or
supply. Domestic mercury mines are con-
sidered high-cost producers in relation to
foreign producers. Because the average
price has dropped from $404 per flask
in 1060 to approximately $330 currently,
the number of domestic mercury mines
in operation has dropped sharply from
100 in 1069 to six or seven in March 1073.
As long as the price of mercury remains
below marginal costs of production (gen-
erally about $400) , the remaining domes-
tic mines will be ill equipped to absorb
any cost Increases.
The total chlor-alkall industry com-
prises 68 plants. Approximately 28 are
mercury cell plants and account for
about 27 percent of the C.8. production
of chlorine and caustic.
The future of the chlorine-caustic In-
dustry appears healthy. Demand for
chlorine is expected to grow at an annual
rate of 6 percent projected from 1071.
Demand for caustic soda will grow at
least at "At same rate as chlorine, and
perhaps {aster. Prices for chlorine and
sodium hydroxide have been rising
steadily through the sixties into 1071.
Based on these trends, the cost of control
to comply with the mercury standard will
be passed forward to the consumer. Use-
of these two basic commodities is so di-
verse that any price increases will be
well dispersed through all manufacturing
activities.
REmlNCM
1. Report of an International Committee:
Maximum Allowable Concentrations of mer-
cury Compound*. Arab. Bnvtr. Health, 19, 881-
805. December 1689.
2. CUrkson. T. W.: The Pharmacology of
Mercury Compound*. Ann. Rev. Pharmacol-
0(7.11,870-406,1972.
J. Frtberg, L., and J. Voetal (Eds.) -• Mer-
cury in the Environment — A Toxlcologlcal
and Bpidemlologlcal Appraisal. Prepared by
the Kscollnaka Institute Department of En-
vironmental Hygiene (Stockholm) for the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (Office
of Air Programs), November 1971.
4. Methylmercury in Pish; a Toxlcologlc-
Spldemlologic Evaluation of Risks. Report
from an expert group. Nord, Hyg. Tladkr.
(Stockholm), Supplement 4, 1971 (English
translation).
5. Kelson. N.. T. C. Byerly. A. C. Kolbye, Jr..
L. T. Kurland, R. B. Shapiro, 8. I. Bhibko,
W. R. Stickle, J. E. Thompson, L. A. Van Den
Berg, and A. 'Welseler: Hazards of Mercury
(special report to the Secretary's Pesticide
Advisory Committee, Department of Hearth,
Education, and Welfare, November 1970).
Envir. Res.. 4. l-«9, 1971.
9. WeetoB. O.: Mercury IB Toodstuffs— Is
There a Qreat Risk of PoUontagl VAR FODA,
4, 1-fl, 1B6B.
7. Lelghtoa, P. A.: Photochemistry of Air
Pollution. Academic Press, 1961.
I. Research Triangle Institute: Compre-
hensive Study of Specified Air Pollution
Sources to Assess the Economic Impact of
Air Duality Standards—Asbestos, Beryllium,
Mercury. Report prepared under contract to
the Environmental Protection Agency (Con-
tract No. 88-09-0088). August 1972.
OCMKML PROVISIONS
The standards promulgated below are
applicable to new, modified, and existing
sources. Any new or modified source must
comply with the standards upon begin-
ning operation. Any existing source must
comply with the standards within 90
days after promulgation, unless a waiver
of compliance is granted.
After considering the proposed general
provisions and the comments received on
them, the Administrator made several
changes which arc included in the stand-
ards promulgated below. A new section
was added to specifically require new sta-
tionary sources to notify the Administra-
tor before beginnning operation. The
requirements for source reporting and
request for waiver of compliance were
combined into one section. The time for
submitting the source report was ex-
tended from 30 to 90 days to provide
sources with more time to complete the
information required. Appendix A was
added to provide sources a description
and format of the information required.
The proposed standards required all
sources of mercury and beryllium to test
their emissions within 3 months of the
effective date and at least once every 3
months thereafter; a provision was in-
cluded to allow the Administrator to
waive the periodic tests for sources in
compliance with a standard. The stand-
ards promulgated below require the ini-
tial test within 90 days of the effective
date and Include a provision to allow the
Administrator to waive this requirement
if the source Is meeting the standard or
has requested a waiver of compliance.
Periodic tests are not required unless
specifically requested by the Administra-
tor. The Administrator may cancel a
waiver of emission tests and may require
a test under the authority of section 114
of the Act at any time. Appendix A speci-
fies the information which a.source must
provide the Administrator when applying
for a waiver of initial emission testing.
The standards promulgated below do
not require the owner or operator to
request a waiver of compliance before a
specific date. However, the owner or op-
erator should submit the request within
30 days after the effective date of the
regulation to be assured that action will
be taken on the waiver application prior
to the 90th day after the effective date.
Continued operation in excess of a stand-
ard after the 90th day without a waiver
is a violation of the act.
The Administrator may grant an exist-
ing source a waiver, permitting a period
of up to 2 years for compliance, provided
that steps will be taken during the waiver
period to assure that the health of per-
sons will be protected from imminent
endangerment and provided that such
period is necessary for the installation of
controls. To be granted a waiver of com-
pliance, a source must submit a written
request to the Administrator and pro-
vide certain Information to assist the
Administrator In making a judgment.
FEDERAL KE0ISTER, VOL, 31, NO. 66—«IDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Within 60 days after receiving a request,
the Administrator will notify the owner
or operator of approval or Intention to
deny the waiver. Any waiver of com-
pliance granted by the Administrator will
be in writing and specify conditions the
source must meet during the waiver
period. If the Administrator Intends to
deny a request, the owner or operator
will be given a specified time to provide
additional information or arguments
prior to final action on the request. Final
action on a request will be In writing by
the Administrator, and if denied, will In-
clude reasons for denial.
The President may exempt any new,
modified, or existing stationary source
from compliance with the standards for
a period of up to 2 years, provided the
technology Is not available to implement
the standards and the operation of such
source is required for reasons of national
security. Also, the President may grant
exemptions for additional periods of 2
years or less.
The construction of a new source or
modification of an existing source cov-
ered by these standards cannot begin
without approval of the Administrator.
To obtain approval, the owner or opera-
tor of such sources must apply in writing
to the Administrator. Within 60 days,
the Administrator will notify the owner
or operator of approval or intention to
deny approval. If the Administrator In-
tends to deny approval, a specified time
will be given to provide additional Infor-
mation or arguments prior to final action
on the application. The final action on
any application will be In writing by the
Administrator, and If denied, will In-
clude the reasons for denial.
Although the demolition of buildings
or structures containing asbestos ma-
terial and the spraying of asbestos ma-
terial will In many cases be modifications
of existing stationary sources, the Ad-
ministrator's approval is not required be-
fore beginning such operations. Section
112(c)(l) of the act specifies that no
person may construct any new source or
modify any existing source"* * * unless
the Administrator finds that such source
If properly operated will not cause emis-
sions in violation of such standard." The
demolition and spraying provisions are
expressed in terms of procedures to be
followed. Therefore, If the source is prop-
erly operated, it will be complying with
the standard, and there is no need for
the Administrator to make a finding with
respect to each new source subject to
these provisions.
Each source covered by these stand-
ards is required to submit to the Admin-
istrator within 90 days after promulga-
tion certain Information pertaining to Its
operation. Changes in the Information
must be submitted within 30 days after
the change, except where the change Is
considered a modification. Then the re-
quirements for a modified source are
applicable.
Three terms are associated with deter-
mining compliance by means of source
testing: (1) Reference method, (2)
equivalent method, and (3) alternative
method. Reference methods are the pre-
ferred methods of sampling and analyz-
ing used to determine compliance. The
reference methods for beryllium and
mercury are Included in appendix B to
this part. An equivalent method is any
method of sampling and analyzing which
has been demonstrated to the Admin-
istrator's satisfaction to have a con-
sistent and quantitatively known rela-
tionship to the reference method under
specified conditions. An alternative
method is any method of sampling and
analyzing which does not meet all the
criteria for equivalency but which can be
used in specific cases to determine com-
pliance. Alternative methods may be ap-
proved by the Administrator for source
testing; however, in cases where deter-
minations of compliance using an alter-
native method are disputed, use of the
reference method or its equivalent will
be required by the Administrator. An ap-
proved alternative method for beryllium
is Included in appendix B hereto.
All emission data provided to or ob-
tained by the Administrator in carrying
out these regulations will be available to
the public. Records, reports, or informa-
tion other than trade secrets will be
available to the public.
Pursuant to section H2(d) (1) of the
act, the Environmental Protection
Agency Intends to delegate the author-
ity to implement and enforce national
emission standards (except with respect
to stationary sources owned or operated
by the United States) for hazardous air
pollutants to any State which submits an
adequate procedure to the Administrator.
The requisite procedure for requesting
such delegation will be Issued in the
future by the Environmental Protection
Agency.
The regulations for the national emis-
sion standards for asbestos, beryllium,
and mercury are hereby promulgated ef-
fective upon promulgation (April 6,
1973).
Dated: March 30, 1973.
ROBERT W. FBI,
Acting Administrator,
Environmental Protection Agency.
A new Part 01 is added to Chapter 1,
Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, at
follows:
Subpart A—General Provision!
Sec.
61.01 Applicability.
B1.02 Definitions.
61.03 Abbreviations.
61.04 Address.
61.06 Prohibited activities.
61.06 Determination of eonstructon or
modification.
61.07 Application for approval of construc-
tion or modification.
61.08 Approval by Administrator.
61.09 Notification of startup.
61.10 Source reporting and waiver request.
61.11 Waiver of compliance.
61.13 Emission tests and monitoring.
61.13 Waiver of emission tests.
61.14 Source test and analytical methods.
61.10 Availability of Information.
61.16 State authority.
Sutapart B—National Emission Standard for
Asbestos
61.20 Applicability.
61.21 Definitions.
Bee.
61.32 Emission standard.
61.33 Air cleaning.
61.34 Reporting.
Subpart C—National Emission Standard for
Beryllium
61.30 Applicability.
61.81 Definitions.
61.39 Emission standard.
61.83 Btaok sampling.
61.84 Air sampling.
Subpart D—National Emission Standard for
Beryllium Rocket Motor Firing
61.40 Applicability.
61.41 Definitions.
61.42 Emission standard.
61.43 Emission testing—rocket firing or pro-
pellant disposal.
61.44 Stack sampling.
Subpart E—National Emission Standard for
Mercury
61.BO Applicability.
61.51 Definitions.
61.62 Emission standard.
61.63 Stack sampling.
Appendix A—Compliance Status Information.
Appendix B—Test Methods.
Method 101—Reference method for determi-
nation of partlculate and gaseous mercury
emissions from stationary sources (air
streams).
Method 103—Reference method for determi-
nation of partlculate and gaseous mercury
emissions from stationary sources (hydro-
gen streams).
Method 108—Beryllium screening method.
Method 104—Reference method for determi-
nation of beryllium emissions from sta-
tionary sources.
AuTHomnr: 49 U.S.C. 18B7C-7.
Subpart A—General Provisions
161.01 Applicability.
The provisions of this part apply to
the owner or operator of any stationary
source for which a standard Is prescribed
under this part.
161.02 Definitions.
As used in this part, all terms not de-
fined herein shall have the meaning given
them in the act:
(a) "Act" means the Clean Air Act (42
U.8.C. 1887etseq.).
(b) "Administrator" means the Ad-
ministrator of the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency or his authorized repre-
sentative.
(c) "Alternative method" means any
method of sampling and analyzing for an
air pollutant which does not meet all of
the criteria for equivalency but which has
been demonstrated to the Administra-
tor's satisfaction to, in specific cases, pro-
duce results adequate for his determina-
tion of compliance.
(d) "Commenced" means that an own-
er or operator has undertaken a con-
tinuous program of construction or
modification or that an owner or operator
has entered into a contractual obligation
to undertake and complete, within a rea-
sonable time, a continuous program of
construction or modification.
(e) "Compliance schedule" means the
date or dates by which a source or cate-
gory of sources is required to comply with
ibe. standards of this part and with any
steps toward such compliance which are
Bet forth in a waiver of compliance under
161.11.
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 31, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-7
-------
HIRES AND tEGULMlONS
(f> "Construction" means fabrication,
erection, or Installation of a stationary
source.
(g) "Effecttra date" Is the date of
promulgation In the FEDIIUI RMISTU
of an applicable standard or other regu-
lation under this part.
(b) "Equivalent method" means any
method of sampling and analyzing for
an air pollutant which has been demon-
strated to the Administrator's satisfac-
tion to have a consistent and quantita-
tively known relationship to the reference
method, under specified conditions.
(1) "Existing source" means any sta-
tionary source which is not a new source.
(j) "Modification" means any physical
change in, or change In the method of
operation of, a stationary source which
increases the amount of any hazardous
air pollutant emitted by such source or
which results In the emission of any
hazardous air pollutant not previously
emitted, except that:
(1) Routine maintenance, repair, and
replacement shall not be considered
physical changes, and
(2) The following shall not be con-
sidered a change in the method of
operation:
(1) An Increase in the production rate,
if such increase does not exceed the op-
erating design capacity of the stationary
source:
(11) An increase In hours of operation.
(k) "New source" means any stationary
source, the construction or modification
of which is commenced after the publi-
cation in the FEDERAL REGISTER of pro-
posed national emission standards for
hazardous ah* pollutants which will be
applicable to such source.
(1) "Owner or operator" means any
person who owns, leases, operates, con-
trols, or supervises a stationary source.
(m) "Reference method" means any
method of sampling and analyzing for
an air pollutant, as described In ap-
pendix B to this part.
(n) "Startup" means the setting in
operation of a stationary source for any
purpose.
(o) "Standard" means a national
emission standard for a hazardous air
pollutant proposed or promulgated under
this part.
(p) "Stationary source" means any
building, structure, facility, or installa-
tion which emits or may emit any ah*
pollutant which has been designated as
hazardous by the Administrator.
§ 61.03 Abbreviations.
The abbreviations used In this part
have the following meanings:
•C—Degrees Centigrade.
cfm—Cubic feet per minute.
ft'—Square feet.
ft'—Cubic feet.
•P—Degrees Fahrenheit.
in—Inch.
1—Liter.
• ml—MUlillter.
M—Molar.
m'—Cubic meter.
nm—Nanometer.
oz—Ounces.
v/v—Volume per volume.
3rd'— Square yards.
w.g.— Water cave.
InHg— Inches et mercury.
InHO— Inches of water.
g— Grams,
N— Normal.
•R — Degree Ranklne.
min — Minute
sec—Second.
avg.— Average.
I.D.— Inside diameter.
O.D.— Outside dlamrtw.
fg— Micrograms (W* gram).
%— Percent.
Hg— Mercury.
Be — Beryllium.
§61.04 AddreM.
AH requests, reports, applications, sub-
mlttals, and other communications to
the Administrator pursuant to this part
shaQ be submitted In duplicate and ad-
dressed to the appropriate regional office
of the Environmental Protection Agency,
to the attention of the Director, Enforce-
ment Division. The regional offices are as
follows:
Region I (Connecticut, Maine, Massa-
chusetts, Mew Hampshire, Rhode Island,
Vermont), John F. Kennedy Federal
Building, Boston, Mass. 03203.
Region n (New York, New Jersey,
Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands), Federal
Office Building, 36 Federal Plan Each application shall include:
(1) The name and address of the ap-
plicant.
(2) The location or proposed location
of the source.
<3) Technical information describing
the proposed nature, size, design, operat-
ing design capacity, and method of oper-
ation of the source, including a descrip-
tion of any equipment to be used for
control of emissions. Such technical in-
formation shall include calculations of
emission estimates in sufficient detail to
permit assessment of the validity of such
calculations.
§ 61.08 Approval by AdminiMralor.
(a) The Administrator will, within 60
days of receipt of sufficient information
to evaluate an application under | 61.07,
notify the owner or operator of approval
or intention to deny approval of con-
struction or modification.
• (b) If the Administrator determines
that a stationary source for which an
No. 66—Pt. II 2
KOUAL REGISTER, VOL. 38, NO. 6*—HtH>AY, ANM, t, 5973
IV-8
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
application pursuant to I 61.07 was sub-
mitted will, If properly operated, not
cause emissions In violation of a stand-
ard, he will approve the construction or
modification of such source.
(c) Prior to denying any application
for approval of construction or modifica-
tion pursuant to this section, the Admin-
istrator will notify the owner or operator
making such application of the Admin-
istrator's intention to Issue such denial,
together with:
(1) Notice of the Information and
findings on which such intended denial
is based, and
(2) Notice of opportunity for such
owner or operator to present, within such
time limit as the Administrator shall
specify, additional information or argu-
ments to the Administrator prior to final
action on such application.
(d) A final determination to deny any
application for approval will be In writ-
ing and will set forth the specific grounds
on which such denial is based. Such final
determination will be made within 60
days of presentation of additional Infor-
mation or arguments, or 60 days after
the final date specified for presentation,
if no presentation is made.
(e) Neither the submission of an ap-
plication for approval nor the Admin-
istrator's granting of approval to con-
struct or modify shall:
(1) Relieve an owner or operator of
legal responsibility for compliance with
any applicable provision of this part or
of any other applicable Federal, State,
or local requirement, or
(2) Prevent the Administrator from
Implementing or enforcing this part or
taking any other action under the act.
§ 61.09 Notification of startup.
(a) Any owner or operator of a source
which has an Initial startup after the
effective date of a standard prescribed
under this part shall furnish the Admin-
istrator written notification as follows:
(1) A notification of the anticipated
date of initial startup of the source not
more than 60 days nor less than 30 days
prior to such date.
(2) A notification of the actual date
of initial startup of the source within 15
days after such date.
§ 61.10 Source reporting and waiver re-
quest.
(a) The owner or operator of any
existing source, or any new source to
which a standard prescribed under this
part is applicable which had an Initial
startup which preceded the effective date
of a standard prescribed under this part
shall, within 90 days after the effective
date, provide the following Information
In writing to the Administrator:
(1) Name and address of the owner
or operator. *
(2) The location of the source.
.(3) The type of hazardous pollutants
emitted by the stationary source.
(4) A brief description of the nature,
size, design, and method of operation of
the stationary source including the op-
erating design capacity of such source.
Identify each point of emission for each
hazardous pollutant.
(5) The average weight per month of
the hazardous materials being processed
by the source, over the last 12 months
preceding the date of the report.
(6) A description of the existing con-
trol equipment for each emission point.
(1) Primary control devlce(s) for each
hazardous pollutant.
(11) Secondary control devlce(s) for
each hazardous pollutant.
(ill) Estimated control efficiency (per-
cent) for each control device.
(7) A statement by the owner or oper-
ator of the source as to whether he can
comply with the standards prescribed in
this part within 90 days of the effective
date.
(b) The owner or operator of an exist-
ing source unable to operate in compli-
ance with any standard prescribed under
this part may request a waiver of com-
pliance with such standard for a period
not exceeding 2 years from the effective
date. Any request shall be in writing and
shall Include the following information:
(1) A description of the controls to
be installed to comply with the standard.
(2) A compliance schedule, Including
the date each step toward compliance will
be reached. Such list shall Include as a
minimum the following dates:
(1) Date by which contracts for emis-
sion control systems or process modifica-
tions will be awarded, or date by which
orders will be issued for the purchase
of component parts to accomplish emis-
sion control or process modification;
(11) Date of initiation of onsite con-
struction or Installation of emission con-
trol equipment or process change; •
(ill) Date by which onsite construc-
tion or installation of emission control
equipment or process modification is to
be completed; and
(iv) Date by which final compliance Is
to be achieved.
(3) A description of interim emission
control steps which will be taken during
the waiver period.
(c) Changes In the information pro-
vided under paragraph (a) of this section
shall be provided to the Administrator
within 30 days after such change, except
that if changes will result from modifica-
tion of the source, as defined in {61.02
(J), the provisions of I 61.07 and I 61.08
are applicable.
(d) The format for reporting under
this section is included as appendix A of
this part. Advice on reporting the status
of compliance may be obtained from the
Administrator.
§61.11 Waiver of compliance.
(a) Based on the Information provided
in any request under I 61.10, or other in-
formation, the Administrator may grant
a waiver of compliance with a standard
for a period not exceeding 2 years from
the effective date of such standard.
(b) Such waiver will be in writing and
will:
(1) Identify the stationary source
covered.
(2) Specify the termination date of
the waiver. The waiver may be termi-
nated at an earlier date if the conditions
specified under paragraph (b) (3) of this
section are not met.
(3) Specify dates by which steps to-
ward compliance are to be taken; and
impose such additional conditions as the
Administrator determines to be neces-
sary to assure Installation of the neces-
sary controls within the waiver period,
and to assure protection of the health
of persons during the waiver period.
(c) Prior to denying any request for
a waiver pursuant to this section, the
Administrator will notify the owner or
operator making such request of the Ad-
ministrator's intention to issue such
denial, together with:
(1) Notice of the information and
findings on which such Intended denial
is based, and
(2) Notice of opportunity for such
owner or operator to present, within
such time limit as the Administrator
specifies, additional information or argu-
ments to the Administrator prior to final
action on such request.
(d) A final determination to deny any
request for a waiver will be In writing
and will set forth the specific grounds on
which such denial is based. Such final
determination will be made within 60
days after presentation of additional in-
formation or arguments, or 60 days after
the final date specified for such presen-
tation, If no presentation is made.
(e) The granting of a waiver under
this section shall not abrogate the Ad-
ministrator's authority under section 114
of the act.
§ 61.12 Emission tetU and monitoring.
(a) Emission tests and monitoring
shall be conducted and reported as set
forth in this part and appendix B to this
part.
(b) The owner or operator of a new
source subject to this part, and at the
request of the Administrator, the owner
or operator of an existing source sub-
ject to this part, shall provide or cause
to be provided, emission testing facili-
ties as follows:
(1) Sampling ports adequate for test
methods applicable to such source.
(2) Safe sampling platform(s).
(3) Safe access to sampling plat-
form (s).
(4) Utilities for sampling and testing
equipment.
§ 61.IS Waiver of emission test*.
(a) Emission tests may be waived
upon written application to the Admin-
istrator If, in his judgment, the source
is meeting the standard, or if the source
is operating under a waiver of compliance
or has requested a waiver of compliance.
(b) If application for waiver of the
emission test is made, such application
shall accompany the information re-
quired by I 61.10. The appropriate form
is contained in appendix A to this part.
(c) Approval of any waiver granted
pursuant to this section shall not abro-
gate the Administrator's authority under
the act or in any way prohibit the Ad-
ministrator from later canceling such
waiver. Such cancellation will be made
only after notice 1s given to the owner
or operator of the source.
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 39, NO. 6A—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-9
-------
RULES AND Rf OULATIONS
§ 61.14 Source te»l and analytical meth-
od*.
(a) Methods 101, 102, and 104 In ap-
pendix B to this pan shall be vied for
all source tests required under this part,
unless an equivalent method or an al-
ternative method has been approved by
the Administrator.
(b) Method 103 in appendix B to this
part is hereby approved by the Admin-
istrator as an alternative method for
sources subject to I 61.32(a) and i «1.42
(b).
(c) The Administrator may, after no-
tice to the owner or operator, withdraw
approval of an alternative method
granted under paragraph (a) or (b) of
this section. Where the test results using
an alternative method do not adequately
Indicate whether a source is in compli-
ance with a standard, the Administrator
may require the use of the reference
method or its equivalent.
§61.15 Availability of information.
(a) Emission data provided to, or oth-
erwise obtained by, the Administrator in
accordance with the provisions of this
part shall be available to the public.
(b) Any records, reports, or informa-
tion, other than emission data, provided
to, or otherwise obtained by, the Admin-
istrator in accordance with the provisions
of this part shall be available to the pub-
lic, except that upon a showing satisfac-
tory to the Administrator by any person
that such records, reports, or informa-
tion, or particular part thereof (other
than emission data), If made public,
would divulge methods or processes en-
titled to protection as trade secrets of
such person, the Administrator will con-
sider such records, reports, or informa-
tion, or particular part thereof, confi-
dential in accordance with the purposes
of section 1005 of title 18 of the United
States Code, except that such records, re-
ports, or information, or particular part
thereof, may be disclosed to other officers,
employees, or authorized representatives
of the United States concerned with car-
rying out the provisions of toe act or
when relevant in any proceeding under
the act.
§ 61.16 State authority.
(a) The provisions of this part shall
not be construed in any manner to pre-
clude any State or political subdivision
thereof from:
(1) Adopting and enforcing any emis-
sion limiting regulation applicable to a
stationary source, provided that such
emission limiting regulation is not less
stringent than the standards prescribed
under this part.
(2) Requiring the owner or operator
of a stationary source, other than a sta-
tionary source owned or operated by the
' United States, to obtain permit*, license*,
or approvals prior to initiating construc-
tion, modification, or operation of such
source.
Subpart B—National Emission Standard
fortafawtos
§61.20 Applicability.
The provisions of this lubpart are ap-
plicable to those sources specified In
161.32.
§61.21 Definitions.
Terms used in this subpart are defined
in the act, in subpart A of this part, or in
this section as follows:
(a) "Asbestos" means actlnollte, amo-
site, anthophylllte, chrysotile, croddolite,
tremolite.
(b) "Asbestos material" means as-
bestos or any material containing as-
bestos.
(c) "Partfculate asbestos material"
means finely divided particles of asbestos
material.
••*• any
emissions which are visually detectable
without the aid of Instruments and which
contain parttculate asbestos material.
g 61.22 EmiMioa standard.
(a) Asbestos mills: There shall be no
visible emissions to the ouUlde air from
any asbestos mm except as provided In
paragraph (f) of this section. Outside
storage of asbestos materials is not con-
sidered a part of an asbestos m'H-
(b) Roadways: The surfacing of road-
ways with asbestos tailings is prohibited,
except for temporary roadways on an
area of asbestos ore deposits. The deposi-
tion of asbestos tailings on roadways cov-
ered with snow or ice is considered "sur-
facing."
(c) Manufacturing: There shall be no
visible (missions to the outside air, ex-
cept as provided in paragraph of
this section, from any building or struc-
ture In which the following operations
are conducted or directly from any of the
following operations if they are con-
ducted outside of buildings or structures.
<1> The manufacture of cloth, cord,
wicks, tubing, tape, twine, rope, thread,
yarn, roving, lap, or other textile ma-
terials.
(2) The manufacture of cement prod-
ucts.
(3) The manufacture of flreprooflng
f nrf insulating mstfir^i*
(4) The manufacture of friction
products.
(6) The manufacture of paper, mill-
board, and felt.
(6) The manufacture of floor tile.
(7) The manufacture of paints, coat-
ings, caulks, adhesive*, sealants..
(8) The manufacture of plastics and
rubber materials.
(*) The manufacture of chlorine.
(d) Demolition: Any owner or opera-
tor of a demolition operation who intends
to demolish any institutional, commer-
cial, or Industrial bunding (including
apartment buildings having more Chan
four dwelling units), structure, faculty,
installation, or portion thereof which
contains any boiler, pipe, or load-sup-
porting structural member that is insu-
lated or fireproofed with friable asbestos
material shall comply with the require-
ments set forth in this paragraph.
(1) Notice of intention to demolish
shall be provided to the Administrator
at least 20 days prior to commencement
of such demolition or anytime prior to
commencement of demolition subject to
paragraph (d) (4) of this section.
Such notice shall include the following
information:
(1) Name of owner or operator.
(11) Address of owner or operator.
(ill) Description of the building, struc-
ture, facility, or Installation to be de-
molished.
(Iv) Address or location of the build-
Ing, structure, facility or installation.
(v) Scheduled starting and completion
dates of demolition.
(vl) Method of demolition to be em-
ployed.
(vii) Procedures to be employed to
meet the requirements of this paragraph.
(2) The following procedures shall be
used to prevent emissions of participate
asbestos material to outside air:
(i) Friable asbestos materials, used to
Insulate or fireproof any boiler, pipe, or
-load-supporting structural member, shall
be wetted and removed from any build-
Ing, structure, facility, or installation
subject to this paragraph before wreck-
Ing of load-supporting structural mem-
bers is commenced. The friable asbestos
debris shall be wetted adequately to in-
sure that such debris remains wet during
all stages of demolition and related han-
dling operations.
(11) No pipe or load-supporting struc-
tural member that is covered with fri-
able asbestos Insulating or flreprooflng
material shall be dropped or thrown to
the ground from any building, structure,
.facility, or installation subject to this
paragraph, but shall be carefully low-
ered or taken to ground level.
(Ill) No friable asbestos debris shall be
dropped or thrown to the ground from
any building, structure, facility, or In-
stallation subject to this paragraph or
from any floor to any floor below. For
buildings, structures, facilities, or In-
stallations, 60 feet or greater in height,
friable asbestos debris shall be trans-
ported to the ground via dust-tight
chutes or containers.
(3) Sources subject to this paragraph
are exempt from the requirements of
»|61.05(a>, 61.07, and 61.09.
(4) Any owner or operator of a demoli-
tion operation who intends to demolish a
building, structure, facility, or Installa-
tion to which the provisions of this para-
graph would be applicable but which has
been declared by proper State or local
authority to be structurally unsound and
which is In danger of imminent collapse
Is exempt from the requirements of this
paragraph other than the reporting re-
quirements specified by paragraph (d)
(1) of this section and the wetting of
friable asbestos debris as specified by
paragraph (d) (3) (1) of this section.
KDUAl HGISm. VOL Jl, NO. 66—«IDAY, APtlL ft, 1973
IV-10
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Spruylag; There slvall be no vUlblc
emissions to the outside air from the
spray-on application of materials con-
taining more than 1 percent asbestos, on
a dry weight basis, used to insulate or
fireproof equipment and machinery, ex-
cept as provided in paragraph (f) of this
section. Spray-on materials used to insu-
late or fireproof buildings, structures,
pipes, and conduits shall contain less
than 1 percent asbestos on a dry weight
basis.
(1) Sources subject to this paragraph
are exempt from the requirements of
S61.05(a),t 61.07, and | 61,09.
(2) Any owner or operator who Intends
to spray asbestos materials to insulate or
fireproof buildings, structures, pipes, con-
duits, equipment, and machinery shall
report such intention to the administra-
tor at least 20 days prior to the com-
mencement of the spraying operation.
Such report shall include the following
Information:
(i) Name of owner or operator.
(ii) Address of owner or operator.
(ill) Location of spraying operation.
(iv) Procedures to be followed to meet
the requirements of this paragraph.
(f) Rather than meet the no-visible-
emlsslon requirements of paragraphs (a),
(c), and (e) of this section, an owner or
operator may elect to use the methods
specified by (61.23 to clean emissions
containing partlculate asbestos material
before such emissions escape to, or are
vented to, the outside air.
§ 61.23 Air-cleaning.
If air-cleaning is elected, as permit-
ted by ! 61.22(f), the requirements of this
section must be met.
(a) Fabric filter collection devices
must be used, except as noted in para-
graphs (b) and (c) of this section. Such
devices must be operated at a pressure
drop of no more than 4 inches water gage,
as measured across the filter fabric. The
airflow permeability, as determined by
ASTM method D737-69, must not exceed
30 ft'/min/ft' for woven fabrics or 35
ft'/min/ft' for felted fabrics, except that
40 ft'/min/ft' for woven and 48 ft'/
min/ft* for felted fabrics is allowed for
filtering air from asbestos ore dryers.
Each square yard of felted fabric must
weigh at least 14 ounces and be at least
one-sixteenth inch thick throughout.
Synthetic fabrics must not contain fill
yarn other than that which is spun.
(b) If the use of fabric filters creates
a fire or explosion bazard, the adminis-
trator may authorize the use of wet col-
lectors designed to operate with a unit
contacting energy of at least 40 inches
water gage pressure.
(c) The administrator may authorize
the use of filtering equipment other than
that described In paragraphs (a) and (b)
of this section if the owner or operator
demonstrates to the satisfaction of the
administrator that the filtering of par-
tlculate asbestos material is equivalent
to that of the described equipment.
(d) All air-cleaning equipment au-
thorized by this section must be properly
installed, used, operated, and maintained.
Bypass devices may be used only during
upset or emergency conditions and then
only for so long as It takes to shut down
the operation generating the partlculate
asbestos material.
§ 61.24 Reporting.
The owner or operator of any existing
source to which this subpart is applicable
shall, within 80 days after the effective
date, provide the following information
to the administrator:
(a) A description of the emission con-
trol equipment used for each process;
(b) If a fabric filter device is u«ed to
control emissions, the pressure drop
across the fabric filter in inches water
gage.
(1) If the fabric filter device utilizes a
woven fabric, the airflow permeability
in ft'/min/ft1; and, if the fabric is syn-
thetic, indicate whether the fill yarn is
spun or not spun.
(2) If the fabric filter device utilizes
a felted fabric, the density in oz/yd', the
minimum thickness In inches, and the
airflow permeability in ft'/min/ft'.
(c) Such information shall accompany
the Information required by 161.10. The
appropriate form is contained in appen-
dix A to this part.
Subpart C—National Emjnlon Standard
for Beryllium
§ 61.80 Applicability.
The provisions of this subpart are ap-
plicable to the following stationary
sources:
(a) Extraction plans, ceramic plants,
foundries, incinerators, and propellant
plants which process beryllium ore, beryl-
lium, beryllium oxide, beryllium alloys,
or beryllium-containing waste.
(b) Machine shops which process
beryllium, beryllium oxides, or any alloy
when such alloy contains more than 5
percent beryllium by weight.
§ 61.S1 Definitions.
Terms used in this subpart are de-
fined in the act, in subpart A of this
part, or in this section as follows:
(a) "Beryllium" means the element
beryllium. Where weights or concentra-
tions are specified, such weights or con-
centrations apply to beryllium only,
excluding the weight or concentration of
any associated elements.
(b) "Extraction plant" means a fa-
cility chemically processing beryllium
ore to beryllium metal, alloy, or oxide,
or performing any of the intermediate
steps in these processes.
(c) "Beryllium ore" means any natu-
rally occurring material mined or
gathered for its beryllium content.
(d) "Machine shop" means a facility
performing cutting, grinding, turning,
honing, milling, deburring, lapping,
electrochemical machining, etching, or
other similar operations.
(e) "Ceramic plant" means a manu-
facturing plant producing ceramic items.
(f) "Foundry" means a facility en-
gaged In the melting or casting of
beryllium metal or alloy.
(g) "Beryllium-containing waste"
means material contaminated with
beryllium and/or beryllium compounds
used or generated during any process or
operation performed by a source subject
to this subpart.
(h) "Incinerator" means any furnace
used in the process of burning waste for
the primary purpose of reducing the
volume of the waste by removing com-
bustible matter.
(1) "Propellant" means a fuel and oxl-
dizer physically or chemically combined
which undergoes combustion to provide
rocket propulsion.
(J) "Beryllium alloy" means any metal
to which beryllium has been added in
order to increase its beryllium content
and which contains more than 0.1 per-
cent beryllium by weight.
"Propellant plant" means any
facility engaged in the mixing, casting,
or machining of propellant.
I 61.32 Emliiion standard.
(a) Emissions to the atmosphere from
stationary sources subject to the provi-
sions of tills subpart shall not exceed 10
trams of beryllium over a 24-hour period,
except as provided in paragraph (b) of
this section.
(b) Rather than meet the require-
ment of paragraph (a) of this section,
an owner or operator may request ap-
proval from the Administrator to meet
an ambient concentration limit on beryl-'
lium In the vicinity of the stationary
source of 0.01 pg/m', averaged over a
30-day period.
(1) Approval of such requests may be
granted by the Administrator provided
that:
(i> At least 3 years of data is avail-
able which in the judgment of the Ad-
ministrator demonstrates that the fu-
ture ambient concentrations of beryllium
In the vicinity of the stationary source
will not exceed 0.01 /*/»', averaged over
a 30-day period. Such 3-year period shall
be the 8 yean ending 80 days before the
effective date of this standard.
(11) The owner or operator requests
such approval in writing within 30 days
after the effective date of this standard.
(ill) The owner or operator submits a
report to the Administrator within 45
days after the effective date of this
standard which report includes the fol-
lowing information:
(a) Description of sampling method
including the method and frequency of
calibration.
(b) Method of sample analysis.
(c) Averaging technique for determin-
ing 30-day average concentrations.
(d) Number, identity, and location
(address, coordinates, or distance and
heading from plant) of sampling sites.
(e) Ground elevations . and height
above ground of sampling inlets.
(/) Plant and sampling area plots
showing emission points and sampling
sites. Topographic features significantly
affecting dispersion including plant
building heights and locations shall -be
Included.
(0) Information necessary for esti-
mating dispersion including stack height,
inside diameter, exit gas temperature,
exit velocity or flow rate, and beryllium
concentration.
(fc) A description of data and proce-
dures (methods or models) used to de-
sign the air sampling network (i.e., num-
ber and location of sampling sites).
FIDIRAL MOUTH, VOL. II, NO. 66—«IDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-11
-------
(O Air sampling data IndicaOng beryl-
lium concentrations in the vicinity of the
stationary source for the 3-year period
specified to paragraph (b) (1) of this
section. This data shall be presented
chronologically and Include the beryl-
lium concentration and location of each
individual sample taken by the network
and the corresponding 30-day .average
beryllium concentrations.
(2) Within 60 days after receiving
such report, the Administrator will notify
the owner or operator in writing whether
approval Is granted or denied. Prior to
denying approval to comply with the pro-
visions of paragraph (b) of this section,
the Administrator will consult with
representatives of the stationary source
for which the demonstration report was
submitted.
(c) The burning of beryllium and/or
beryllium-containing waste, except pro-
pellants, Is prohibited except in incinera-
tors, emissions from which most comply
with the standard.
§ 61.33 Suck sampling.
(a) Unless a waiver of emission testing
is obtained under { 61.13, each owner or
operator required to comply with
{ 61.32 (a) shall test emissions from his
source,
(1) Within 00 days of .the effective
date in the case of an existing source or
a new source which has an initial startup
date preceding the effective date; or
(2) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source which did not have
an Initial startup date preceding the ef-
fective date.
(b) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(c) Samples shall be taken over such a
period or periods as are necessary to ac-
curately determine the maximum emis-
sions which will occur in any 24-hour
period. Where emissions depend upon the
relative frequency of operation of differ-
ent types of processes, operating hours,
operating capacities, or other factors,
• the calculation of maximum 24-hour-
period emissions will be based on that
combination of factors which Is likely to
occur during the subject period and
which result in the maximum emissions.
No changes In the operation shall be
made, which would potentially Increase
emissions above that determined by the
most recent source test, until a new emis-
sion level has been estimated by calcula-
tion and the results reported to the Ad-
ministrator.
(d) All samples shall be analyzed and
beryllium emissions shall be determined
within 30 days after the source test. All
determinations shall be reported to the
Administrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the close of the next busi-
ness day following such determination.
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
(g) "Denuder" means a horizontal or
vertical container which is part of a mer-
cury chlor-alkall cell and in which water
and alkali metal amalgam are converted
to alkali metal hydroxide, mercury, and
hydrogen gas in a short-circuited, elec-
trolytic reaction.
(h) "Hydrogen gas stream" means a
hydrogen stream formed in the chlor-
aikali cell denuder.
(i) "End box" means a contalner(s)
located on one or both ends of a mercury
chlor-alkali electrolyzer which serves
as a connection between the electrolyzer
and denuder for rich and stripped
amalgam.
(j) "End box ventilation system"
means a ventilation system which col-
lects mercury emissions from the end-
boxes, the mercury pump sumps, and
their water colection systems.
(k) "Cell room" means a structure(s)
housing one or more mercury electro-
lytic chlor-alkali cells.
§ 61.52 Emission standard.
Emissions to the atmosphere from sta-
tionary sources subject to the provisions
of this subpart shall not exceed 2,300
grams of mercury per 24-hour period.
§61.53 Stack sampling.
(a) Mercury ore processing facility.
(1) Unless a waiver of emission testing
is obtained under ! 61.13, each owner
or operator processing mercury ore shall
test emissions from his source,
(1) Within 90 days of the effective
date in the case of an existing source or
a new source which has an initial start-
up date preceding the effective date; or
(ii) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source which did not have
an initial startup date preceding the ef-
fective date.
(2) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(3) Samples shall be taken over such
a period or periods as are necessary to
accurately determine the maximum
emissions which will occur in a 24-hour
period. No changes in the operation shall
be made, which would potentially In-
crease emissions above that determined
by the most recent source test, until the
new emission level has been estimated by
calculation and the results reported to
the Administrator.
(4) All samples shall be analyzed, and
mercury emissions shall be determined
within 30 days after the source test. Each
determination will be reported to the Ad-
ministrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the close of the next busi-
ness day following such determination.
(5) Records of emission test results
and other data needed to determine total
emissions shall be retained at the source
and made available, for inspection by the
Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(b) Mercury chlor-alkali plant—hy-
drogen and end-box ventilation gas
streams.
(1) Unless a waiver of emission test-
Ing is obtained under 9 61.13, each owner
or operator employing mercury chlor-
alkali cell(s) shall test emissions from
his source,
(1) Within 90 days of the, effective
date in the case of -an existing source or
a new source which has an initial startup
date preceding the effective date; or
(11) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source which did not have
an Initial startup date preceding the ef-
fective date.
(2) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(3) Samples shall be taken over such
a period or periods as are necessary to
accurately determine the maximum emis-
sions which will occur In a 24-hour
period. No changes in the operation shall
be made, which would potentially in-
crease emissions above that determined
by the most recent source test, until the
new emission has been estimated by cal-
culation and the results reported to the
Administrator.
(4) All samples shall be analyzed and
mercury emislons shall be determined
within 30 days after the source test. All
the determinations will be reported to
the Administrator by a registered letter
dispatched before the close of the next
business day following such determina-
tion.
(5) Records of emission test results
and other data needed to determine total
emissions shall be retained at the source
and made available, for inspection by
the Administrator, for a minimum of
2 years.
(c) Mercury chlor-alkall plants—
cell room ventilation system.
(1) Stationary sources using mercury
ohlor-alkali cells may test cell room
emissions in accordance with paragraph
(c)(2) of this section or demonstrate
compliance with paragraph (c) (4) of this
section and assume ventilation emissions
of 1,300 gms/day of mercury.
(2) Unless a waiver of emission test-
Ing is obtained under S 61.13, each owner
or operator shall pass all cell room air
In forced gas streams through stacks
suitable for testing,
(1) Within 90 days of the effective date
In the case of an existing source or a new
source which has an Initial startup date
preceding the effective date; or
(11) Within 00 days of startup in the
case of a new source which did not have
an initial startup date preceding the
effective date.
(3) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(4) An owner or operator may carry
out approved design, maintenance, and
housekeeping practices. A list of ap-
proved design, maintenance, and house-
keeping practices may be obtained from
the Administrator.
APPENDIX A
National Emission Standard! for Hmrdous Air Pollutants
Compliance Status Information
I. SOURCE REPORT
Instructions; Owners or operators
of sources of hazardous pollutants
subject to the National Emission
Standards for Hazardous A1r
Pollutants are required to submit
the Information contained In1
Section I to the appropriate
Environmental Protection Agency
Regional Office before (date which
1
HrL i
19
1 '„! '
AQCR
EPA USE ONLY
t ... 1 ...
C SC
28
. . 1 . , . 1 NDC
HP CTY
13,
, |
80
| I
1s 90 days after the standards -are promulgated). A listing of regional offices
Is provided In I 61.04.
A. SOURCE INFORMATION.
1. Identification/Location
source.
Indicate the name and address of each
A49 , . . . ^l
lIuHBER STREET ADDRESS
BT9
JB34 B
L ' ' ..J.., '
~~ ZIP COBS
I
1
UNTY
2. Contact - Indicate the name and telephone number of the owner or
operator or other responsible official when EPA may contact con-
cerning this report.
B39 B53
^^BI^B^^^^t^^|^iJ^|ft^J(^t^ti>(iJ^^i^^^»MJ
NAME
B54
B69
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 38, NO. 66—FRIDAY, Afllt 6,
IV-13
-------
3. Source Description - Briefly state the nature of the source (e.g.*
"Chior-«lkali Plant", or "Machine Shop").
C43
i i I
4. Alternative Hailing Address - Indicate an.alternative wiling address
•if correspondence 1s to be directed to a location different than
that specified above.
NUMBER
STREET ADDRESS
CS4
C78 C79 075
lluJ ' '
STATE
IPCl
D79
HP CODE
5. Compliance Status - The emissions from this source can cannot
met the emission limitations contained 1n the National Emission
Standards on or before (date which Is 90 days after the promulgation
of the standards).
signature or owner, operator or other
responsible official
M MfftE: If the emissions from the source will exceed those Units set
< by the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants,
I the source will be 1n violation and subject to Federal enforcement
I-* actions unless granted a waiver of compliance by the Administrator
** of the Environmental Protection Agency. The Information needed
for such waivers Is listed 1n Section II of this form.
614615 £46
jEPA USE ONLY | V I ] .
653.
SOT
I. PROCESS INrtWWnoif. Part B should be eaapleted separately for each
point of emission for each hazardous pollutant.
1. Process Description - Provide a brief description of each process
(e.g.. "hydrogen end box* In a mercury dilor-alkall plant.
^grinding Machine" 1n a beryllium Machine shop). Use additional
sheets If necessary.
621
i 1
_i_
2. Pollutant Emitted - Indicate the type of hazardous pollutant emitted
by the process. Indicate "AB" for asbestos. "BE" for beryl 11m. or
"H6" for Mercury.
619 GOT.
3. Amount of Pollutant - Indicate the average wight of the hazardous
Material named In 1te» 2 which enters the process 1n pounds per
Month (based on the previous twelve Months of operation).
G54
I ,
660
4. Control Devices
a. Indicate the type of pollution control devices. If any, used
to reduce the emissions from the process (e.g., venturi
scrubber, baghouse. wet cyclone) and the estimated percent
of the pollutant which the device removes fro* the process
gas stream.
HIS
R34 N51 163
-^Ac&rtaht
EFFICIENCY
EFFIC
b. Asbestos Emission Control Devices Only
1. If a baghoase is specified In 1tai4a ft ve tto fbltartH
Information:
Hie air flow permeability 1n cubic feet per •Ma per
square foot of fabric area:
Mr flow penaaablHty -
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 38, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6. 1973
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
3-5
i
!R| A. ^1
!«|_t 9 if
O-
•O
i ••
J3
g-
K
L>
DC
I, Is
iufiij
8|^8%&=«
S,
JfilUkf
O V) « O »
-------
Hate by which on-slte construction or Installation of arfssfo..
control equipment or process Modification 1s to be covpleted.
infnr im vAn
03
Data by which final cctoliance 1s to be achieved.
159.
. . . . .
I, It . _ I I_TI 04
MnH m YEW
Signature of owner or operator
MOVER OF EMISSION TESTS. A waiver of emission testing May be granted
to OMiers or operators of sources of berylllw or Mercury pollutants If,
1n the Judgment of the Administrator of the Environmental Protection
Agency the emissions from the source conply with the appropriate
standard or If the owners or operators of the source have requested a
waiver of compliance or have been granted a waiver of alliance.
This application should accompany the reporting Information provided
in Section I.
i - State the reasons for requesting a waiver of emission
testing. If the reason stated 1s that the emissions from the
source Is within the prescribed Units, docunentatlon of this
condition Bust be attached.
H
<
I
Araannx B—TEST METHODS
METHOD 2O1. """*-"*MiT METHOD POft DETEB-
MMATIDir OV PAEnCDLATE AMD GASBOU8 ME>-
CDBT EMISSIONS FROM STAT1OJIABT BOUKCES
Mention of trade names or specific prod-
ucts does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
Fljm 101-2. Pilot I
2.1.7 Filter Holder (optional) -Pyrex gluts.
A filter may be used in cases where the gas
stream to be sampled contains large quan-
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 38, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
-------
titles of paniculate matter. The filter holder
must provide » positive seal against leakage
from outside or around the niter. A heating
system capable of maintaining the filter at
a minimum temperature of 360* F. should
be used to prevent condensation from occur-
ring.
2.1.8 Barometer. To measure atmospheric
pressure to ±0.1 In Hg.
2.2 Jfeoauremcnt of stack condition}
(stack pressure, temperature, moisture and
velocity)— 2.2.1 Pitot tube. Type B, or
equivalent, with a coefficient within « percent
over the working range.
2.2.2 Differential pressure gauge. Inclined
manometer, or equivalent, to measure veloc-
ity held to within 10 percent of the minimum
value. Mlcromanometers should be used if
warranted.
2.2.3 Temperature gauge. Any tempera-
ture measuring device to measure stack tem-
perature to within 1 • P.
2.2.4 Pressure gauge. Pltot tube and In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
stack pressure to within 0.1 In Hg.
2.2.5 Moisture determination. Wet and
dry bulb thermometers, drying tubes, con-
densers, or equivalent, to determine stack
gas moisture content to within 1 percent.
2.3 Sample recovery—2.3.1 LeaMess glass
sample bottles. 600 ml and 100 ml with Teflon
lined tops.
2.32 Graduated cylinder. 350 ml.
2.3.3 Plastic jar. Approximately 300 ml.
2.4 Analysis—2.4.1 Spectrophotometer.
To measure absorbance at 253.7 nm. Perkln
Elmer Model 303, with a cylindrical gas oeU
(approximately 1.5 in. OX), x 7 In.) with
quartz glass windows, and hollow cathode
source, or equivalent.
2.4.2 Oat sampling bubbler. Tudor Scien-
tific Glass Co., Smog Bubbler, Catalogue No.
TP-1150, or equivalent.
2.4.3. Recorder. To match output of Spec-
trophotometer.
3. Reagents—3.1 Stock reagents—3.1.1
Potassium Iodide. Reagent grade.
3.1.2 Distilled water—3.1.8 Potassium
iodide solution. 25 percent. Dissolve 960 g
of potassium Iodide (reagent 8.1.1) In dis-
tilled water and dilute to 1 to 1.
3.1.4 Hydrochloric acid. Concentrated.
3.1.5. Potassium iodate. Reagent grade.
3.1.8 Iodine monochloride (ICl) l.Oit. To
800 ml. of 35% potassium Iodide solution
(reagent 3.1.3), add 800 ml. of concentrated
hydrochloric acid. Cool to room temperature.
With vigorous stirring, slowly add 185 g. of
potassium Iodate and continue stirring until
all free iodine has dissolved to give a clear
orange-red solution. Cool to room tempera-
ture and dilute to 1800 ml. with distilled
water. The solution should be kept In amber
bottles to prevent degradation.
3.1.7 Sodium hydroxide pellets. Reagent
grade.
3.1.8 Nitric acid. Concentrated.
3.1.9 Bydroxylamine tulfate. Reagent
grade.
3.1.10 Sodium chloride. Reagent grade.
3.1.11 Mercuric chloride. Reagent grade.
3.2 Sampling—35.1 Atisoroing solution,
0.1M ICl. Dilute 100 ml. of the l.OM ICl
stock solution (reagent 3.1.8) to 1 to 1
with distilled water. The solution should be
kept in glass bottles to prevent degradation.
This reagent should be stable for at least 9
months; however, periodic checks should be
performed to Insure quality.
3.2.2 Wash acid. 1:1 V/V nitric acid-
water.
3.2.3 Distilled, deionized water.
3.2.4 Silica gel. Indicating type, 6 to 18
mesh dried at 850' F. for 3 hours.
3.2.5 Filter (optional). Glass fiber, Mine
Safety Appliances 1106BH, or equivalent. A
filter may be necessary in cases where the
gas stream to be sampled contains large
quantities of partlculate matter.
RULES AND REGULATIONS
3.3 Analysis—3.3.1 Sodium hydroxide,
to N.—Dissolve 400 g of sodium hydroxide
pellets in distilled water and dilute to 1 to 1.
8.3.2 Reducing agent. It percent hydro*-
ylamine tulfate, 12 percent sodium ohio-
ride.—To 60 ml of distilled water, add 13 g
of hydroxylamlne sulfate and 12 g of sodium
chloride. Dilute to 100 ml. This quantity is
sufficient for 90 analyses and must be pre-
pared dally.
3.3.3. Aeration gas.—Zero grade air.
8.3.4 Hydrochloric acid, O.SN.—-Dilute 95.5
ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid to 1 to
1 with distilled water.
3.4 Standard mercury solutions—3.4.1
Stock solution.—Add 0.1354 g of mercuric
chloride to 80 ml of O.SN hydrochloric acid.
After the mercuric chloride has dissolved,
add O.SN hydrochloric acid and adjust the
volume to 100 ml. One ml of this solution
Is equivalent to 1 mg of free mercury.
3.4.3 Standard solutions.—Prepare cali-
bration solutions by serially diluting the
stock solution (3.4.1) with 0.3N hydrochlo-
ric acid. Prepare solutions at concentrations
in the linear working range for the Instru-
ment to be used. Boutlons of 0.3 0g/ml, 0.4
0g/ml and 0.6 jig/ml have been found ac-
ceptable for most instruments. Store all
solutions In glass-stoppered, glass bottles.
These solutions should be stable for at least
9 months; however, periodic checks should
be performed to insure quality.
4. Procedure.—4.1 Guidelines for source
testing are detailed in the following sections.
These guidelines are generally applicable;
however, most sample sites differ to some
degree and temporary alterations such as
stack extensions or expansions often are re-
quired to ensure the best possible sample
site. Further, since mercury Is hazardous,
care should be taken to minimize exposure.
Finally, since the total quantity of mercury
to be collected generally Is small, the test
must be carefully conducted to prevent con-
tamination or loss of sample.
4.2 Selection of a sampling site and mini-
mum number of traverse points:
4J.I Select a suitable sampling site that
is as close as is practicable to the point of
atmospheric emission. If possible, stacks
•mailer than 1 foot in diameter should not
be sampled.
4.3.2 The sampling slto should be at least
eight stack or duct diameters downstream
and two diameters upstream from any flow
disturbance such M a bend, expansion, or
contraction. For a rectangular cross section,
determine an equivalent diameter from the
following equation:
91W
cq' )tn
where :
£t=Equivalent dtameter.
l=Length.
W=Wldth.
4.3.8 When the above sampling site cri-
teria can be met, the minimum number of
traverse points Is four (4) for stacks 1 fool
in diameter or less, eight (8) for stacks larger
than 1 foot but 3 feet In diameter or less, and
twelve (13) for stacks larger than 3 feet.
4.3.4 Some sampling situations may ren-
der the above sampling site criteria imprac-
tical. When this is the case, choose a con-
venient sampling location and use figure
101-8 to determine the minimum number of
traverse points. However, use figure 101-3
only for stacks 1 foot In diameter or larger.
4.2.5 To use figure M)l-8, first measure
the distance from the chosen sampling loca-
tion to the nearest upstream and downstream
disturbances. Divide tins distance by the
diameter or equivalent diameter to deter-
mine the distance in terms of pipe diameters.
Determine the corresponding number of
traverse points for each distance from fig-
ure 101-8. Select the higher of the two num-
bers of traverse points, or a greater value,
such that for circular stacks the number is
a multiple of four, and for rectangular stacks
the number follows the criteria of section
4.3.2.
4.2.6 If a selected sampling point is closer
than 1 inch from the stack wall, adjust the
location of that point to ensure that the
•ample is taken at least 1 inch away from
the wall.
4.8 Cross sectional layout and location of
traverse points:
4.3.1 For circular stacks locate the trav-
erse points on at least two diameters accord-
ing to figure 101-4 and table 101-1. The
traverse axes snail divide the stack cross
Motion Into equal parts.
NUMBER OF DUCT DIAMETERS UPSTREAM
(DISTANCE A)
20
10
•MOM raiinr or ANY TYK OF
DISTURBANCEIIEND, EXPANSION, CONTRACTION, ETC,)
10
NUMBER OF DUCT DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM*
{DISTANCE •
Figure 102-3. Minimum of traverse points.
FEDERAL RIOISTER, VOL 38, NO. 6*—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-17
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Table 101-1. Location of traverse points 1n circular stacks
(Percent of stack diameter from Inside wall to traverse point)
Traverse
point
number
on a
diameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Number of traverse points on a diameter
2
14.6
85.4
4
6.7
25.0
75.0
93.3
6
4.4
14.7
29.5
70.5
85.3
95.6
8
3.3
10.5
19.4
32.3
67.7
80.6
89.5
96.7
10
2.5
8.2
14.6
22.6
34.2
65.8
77.4
85.4
91.8
97.6
12
2.1
6.7
11.8
17.7
25.0
35.5
64.5
75.0
82.3
88.2
93.3
97.9
14.
1.8
5.7
9.9
14.6
20.1
26.9
36.6
63.4
73.1
79.9
85.4
90.1
94.3
98.2
16
1.6
4. .9
8.5
12.5
16.9
22.0
28.3
37.5
62.5
71.7
78.0
83.1
87.5
91.5
95.1
98.4
18
1.4
4.4
7.5
10.9
14.6
18.8
23.6
29.6
38.2
61.8
70.4
76,4
81.2
85.4
89.1
92.5
95.6
98.6
20
1.3
3.9
6.7
9.7
12.9
16.5
20.4
25.0
30.6
38.8
61.2
69.4
75.0
79.6
83.5
87.1
9Q.3
93.3
96.1
98.7
22
1.1
3.5
6.0
8.7
11.6
14.6
18.0
21.8
26.1
31.5
39.3
60.7
68.5
73.9
.78.2
82.0
85.4
88.4
91.3
94.0
96.5
98.9
24
1.1
3.2
5.5
7.9
10.5
13.2
16.1
19.4
23.0
27.2
32.3
39.fi
60.2
67.7'
72.8
77.0
80.6
83.9
86.8
89.5
92.1
94.5
96.8
98.9
f dun 101.4. oran NtllM of tliwtv ill* ihwl* Uettlw *
tttwN poM* M pofmdlwlv tflMMn,
r\m 1W* Onw wcllon of fwtfuvulv Mtk OvMri InU II ami
arau, with tnvtiN potnu it tmtrelTol art WM. *^
4.3.2 For rectangular atacki divide the
croai aeetlon Into M many equal rectangular
areas M traverse polnti, auch that the ratio
of the length to the width of the elemental
areaa la between one and two. Locate the
traverae point* at the oentrold of each equal
area according to figure 101-5.
4.4 Measurement of stack conditions:
4.4.1 Bet up the apparatui ai shown In
figure 101-3. Make aure all connections are
tight and leak-tree. Measure the velocity
head and temperature at the traverse points
specified by section 4.3 and 4.8.
4.4.3 Measure the static pressure In the
stack.
4.4.8 Determine the stack gas moisture.
4.4.4 Determine the stack gas molecular
weight from the measured moisture content
and knowledge of the expected gas stream
composition. A standard Orsat analyzer has
been found valuable at combustion sources.
In all eases, sound engineering judgment
should be used.
KOIRAl BJOISTIR, VOU 31, NO. 66—TODAY, AMUl 6, 1973
IV-18
-------
4,5 Preparation of sampling train:
4.8.1 Prior to assembly, clean all glassware
(probe, Implngers, and connectors) by rinsing
with wash aold, tap water, C.1M IO1, tap
wnter, and finally distilled water. Place 100
ml of 0.1M IC1 In each of the first three
Implngers, and place approximately 300 g of
prewelt'hed silica gel in the fourth Implnger.
Save 60 ml of the 0.1M ICl as a blank in the
sample analysis. Set up the train and the
probe as in figure 101-1.
4.6.2 If the gas stream to M sampled is
excessively dirty or moist, the first Implnger
may clog or become dilute too rapidly for
sufficient testing. A filter can be placed ahead
of the Implngers to collect the partlculates.
An initial empty implnger may also be used
to remove excess moisture. If a fifth implnger
Is required, the final implnger may have to
be carefully taped to the outside of the
sample box.
4.5.3 Leak check the sampling train at the
sampling site. The leakage rate should not
be in excess of 1 percent of the desired sam-
pling rate. If condensation in the probe or
niter is a problem, probe and filter heaters
will be required. Adjust the beaten to pro-
vide a temperature of at least 360* F, Place
crushed ice around the implngers. Add more
•ULES AND HESITATIONS
ice during the test to keep the temperature
of the gases leaving the last implnger at 70* F
or less.
4.8 Mercury train operation:
4.6.1 For each run, record the data re-
quired on the eumpl* sheet shown in figure
101-6, Take readings at e*ch sampling point
at least every 6 minutes and when signifi-
cant changes in stack conditions necessitate
additional adjustments in flow rate,
4.6.3 Sample at a rate of 0.8 to IX) cfm.
Samples shall be taken over such a period
or periods as are necessary to accurately
determine the maximum emissions which
would occur in a 34-hour period. In the case
of cyclic operations, sufficient tests shall be
made so as to allow accurate determination
or calculation of the emissions which will
occur over the duration of the cycle. A mini-
mum sample time of 3 hour* is recommended.
In some instances, high mercury concentra-
tions can prevent sampling in one run for
the desired minimum time. This Is Indicated
by reddening in the first Implnger as free
Iodine is liberated. In .this case, a run may
be divided into two or more subruns to en-
sure that the absorbing solutions are not
depleted.
lOCATIW
CKMin
"
•AUM1I
M MO
i*Ttimiyo_
um.Uj
»"«"•
IMVUMKim
NUMK*
AVfNAOC
luniNO
IMC
|.|, Ml
STATIC
muuK
|F|I. fc. H|
r»ci
mnuium
(1,1. 'F
luotmie nMUM____
«MM» HonnM, «___
Human Urmia __
MtUMANnn.ta,
tcwuiic OF n»a cmi HCTICN
vnocm
MAO
evnaNTiAi
ACWII
enncf
MTIU
i*»v>
OASSAWII
vauM
Wri.ll1
mm Hum nniNO_____
AT on OAI Hen*
•an
!»• »."••'
An.
An.
OUTUT
imj.'f
A>1.
UMUK»
UVUMIIM.
•wwon
•F
F4ur* 101*. Held dlta
4.6.3 To begin sampling, position the
nozzle at the first traverse point with the tip
pointing directly into the gas stream. Im-
mediately start the pump and adjust the
flow to tsokinetlo conditions. Sample for at
least 5 minutes at each traverse point; samp-
ling time must be the same for each point.
Maintain isoklnetlc sampling throughout the
sampling period. Nomographs which aid in
the rapid adjustment of the sampling rate
without other computations are in APTD-
0576 and are available from commercial sup-
pliers. Note the standard nomographs are
applicable only for type 8 pltot tubes and
air or a stack gas with an equivalent density.
Contact EPA or the sampling train supplier
for instructions when the standard nomo-
graph Is not applicable.
4.6.4 Turn off the pump at the conclusion
of each run and record the final readings.
Immediately remove the probe and nozzle
from the stack and handle in accordance
with the sample recovery process described
in section 4.7.
4.7 Sample recovery:
4.7.1 (All glass storage bottles and the grad-
uated cylinder must be precleaned as In sec-
tion 4.5.1). This operation should be per-
formed In an area free of possible mercury
contamination. Industrial laboratories and
ambient air around mercury-using faculties
are not normally free of mercury contamina-
tion, When the sampling train is moved, care
must be exercised to prevent bnakage and
contamination.
4.7.3 Disconnect the probe from the 1m-
pfnger train. Place the contents (measured to
±1 ml) of the first three implngers Into a
600 ml sample bottle. Rinse the probe and all
glassware between It and the back half of
the third implnger with two 60 ml portions
of 0.1M ICl solution. Add these rinses to the
first sample bottle. For a blank, place 60 ml
of the O.lM ICl In a 100 ml sample bottle. If
used, place the filter along with 100 ml of
O.lM ICl in another 100 ml sample bottle.
Retain a filter blank. Place the silica gel in
the plastic jar. Seal and secure all containers
for shipment. If an additional test is desired,
the glassware can be carefully double rinsed
with distilled water and reassembled. Bow-
ever, if the glassware Is to be out of use more
than 3 days, the initial acid wash procedure
must be followed.
4.6 Analysis:
4.6.1 Apparetvt preparation.—clean nil
glassware according to the procedure of sec-
tion 4.5.1. Adjust the Instrument SOUIIIRS ac-
cording to the instrument mnmml, ualiiR nn
absorption wavelength of 35U.7 um.
4.8.9 4na!ytfi preparation,—Adjust tii<<
air delivery pressure and the needle vniu>
to obtain a constant airflow of about 1.3 to'
1/mln. The analysis tube should be bypassed
except during aeration. Purge the equipment
lor 3 minutes. Prepare a sampl* of mercury
standard solution (1.4.3) according to section
4,8.8, Place the analysis tube In the hue,
and aerate until a mlximum peak height is
reached on the recorder. Remove the analynls
tube, flush the lines, and rinse the analysis
tube with distilled water. Repeat with an-
other sample of the same standard solution.
This purge and analysis cycle Is to be re-
peated until peak heights are reproducible-.
4.8.8 Sample preparation.—Just prior to
analysis, transfer a sample aliquot of up
to 60 ml to the denned 100 ml analysis tube.
Adjust the volume to 50 ml with O.lM ICl
if required. Add 5 ml of 10 N sodium hy-
droxide, cap tube with a clean glass stopper
and shake vigorously. Prolonged, vigorous
shaking at this point is necessary to obtain
an accurate analysis. Add 8 ml of the re-
ducing agent (reagent 3.8.3), cap tube with
a clean glass stopper and shake vigorously
and Immediately in sample line.
4.8.4 Mercury determination.—After the
system has been stabilized, prepare samples
from the sample bottle according to section
4.8.8. Aerate the sample until a maximum
peak height Is reached on the recorder. The
mercury content is determined by compar-
ing the peak height* of the samples to the
peak heights of the calibration solutions. If
collected samples are out of the linear range.
the samples should be diluted. Prepare a
blank from tb» 100 ml bottle according to
section 4.8.8 and analyze to determine the
reagent blank mercury level,
8. Calibration.—6.1 Sampling train.—
6.1 J Use standard methods and equipment
a* detailed in APTD-0576 to calibrate the
rate meter, pltot tube, dry gas meter, and
probe heater (If used). Recalibrate prior to
each test series.
6.3 JnaiytU.—5.2.1 Prepare a calibrn-
tlon curve for the spectropbotometer using
the standard mercury solutions. Plot the
peak heights read on the recorder versus the
concentrations of mercury in the standard
solutions. Standards should be interspersed
with the samples since the calibration can
ohezig* slightly with time. A new calibration
curve should be prepared for each new set
of samples run.
6. Calculations.—6.1 Average dry gas
meter temperature, stack temperature, stack
pressure and average orifice pressure drop.
See data sheet (fig. 101-6).
6.1 Dry got volume,—Correct the sample
volume measured by the dry gas meter to
stack conditions by using equation 101-2.
eq. 101-2
where:
V«,-Volume of gas sample through the dry p;ii ni<'lrr
(stack conditions). It".
V. -Volume of gas sample throufh the dry ;n« m«trr
(meter conditions), ft'.
T. -Average temperature of itack KM, °R.
Tm -Average dry gas meter temperature, °R.
Pb.f=Barometric pressure at the orifice
meter, InHg.
AJf=Average pressure drop across the ori-
fice meter. inHnO.
18.6 a Specific gravity of mercury.
PisStaek pressure, P».r±statlc pressure,
InHg.
HDIIAL mum, VOL. 18, tfO. *6—flMDAY, AMHL «, 1V73
IV-19
-------
6.3 Volume of water vapor.
Fw.-*.F..|j eq. 101-3
* •
when:
Vr.—Volume of water vapor In the gas sample (stack
conditionJ), lt>.
KV<-0.00207 —'-—' -, when those units ore used.
ini.~~ it
l'i.—Tnlf»l volume of liquid eollMted In Implngore
wild 1111011 KO! (Hoc figure 101-7), mL
7',- Avorago stuck KIU temperature, °H.
7',-Hiiu-k jiriwsiirii, J'i., ± Hullo pressure, In. UK.
0.4 Tola! KIU volume.
V'i*.i-.V..+Vr. eq. Wi-4
Wlioro:
VIM.!-Total volume of gas sample (stack oondltlons),
ft».
Vm,- Volume of gas through gas meter (stack eondl-
Vr.-Volume of water vapor In gas sample (stack
conditions), ft«.
FINAL
INITIAL
LIQUID COLUCTEO
TOTAL VOLUME COLLECTED
VOLUME OF LIQUID
•ATEI COLLECTED
IMPMOEI
VOLUME.
ml
tucAoB.
WEIGHT.
•
1" ml
CONVERT HEIGHT OF WATEI TO VOLUME n dividing total weight
INCREASE II DCIBITT OF WATER. II B/ml):
11 t/ml)
VOLUME WATEH. ml
Figure 101-7. Analytics! dau.
0.5 Stack gaa velocity. Use equation 101-8
to calculate the stack gas velocity.
eq. 101-5
where:
(r.).«. -= Averase stack gas velocity, feet per second.
i- ... .- ft- / lb.-ln.Hg \t/i
A'"85-53iic:(>lb.mole.°R-in.H.o; ' Wben
these units are used.
C,-Pitot tube coefficient, dimenslonless.
(Titm. -Average stack gas temperature, °R.
( VAP).TI.= Average square root of the velocity head
of stack gas (in. H|O}>1 (see fig. 101-8).
P,= Stack pressure, Pb.,±statlc pressure, In. Hg.
^.-Molecular weight of stack gas (wet basis),
the Rumination of the products of the
molecular weight of each component
multiplied by Its volumetric proportion
in the mixture, Ib./lb. mole.
Figure 101-8 shows a sample recording sheet
for velocity traverse data. Use the averages
In the last two columns of figure 101-8 to
determine the average stack gas velocity from
equation 101-5.
6.8 Mercury collected. Calculate the total
•weight of mercury collected by using equa-
tion 101-6.
where:
.. eq.
i = total weight of mercury collected,
RULES AND REGULATIONS
PLANT
DATE
RUN NO.
STACK DIAMETER, In..
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE, In. Hfc.
STATIC PRESSURE IN STACK (P^), In. Hg..
OPERATORS__
SCHEMATIC OF STACK
CROSS SECTION
Traverse point
number
Velocity head,
In. H20
AVERAGE:
Stack Temperature
Figure 101-8. Velocity traverse data.
FEDERAL IEOISTER, VOL 36, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-20
-------
Vi= Total volume of condensed moisture
and IC1 In sample bottle, ml.
C i = Concentration of mercury measured In
sample bottle, *g/ml.
V»=Total volume of SCI wed In sampling
(Implnger contents and all wafli
amounts), ml.
Ct= Blank concentration of mercury InlCl
solution, pg/ml.
Vr = Total volume of IC1 used In filter bottle
(If used), ml.
Cr -Cnncnnlrntlnii of mercury in filter
bottle (It us»d),
(1.7 Total mercury emission. Calculate the
total amount of mercury emitted from each
•tack per day by equation 101-7. This equa-
tion Is applicable for continuous operations.
For cyclic operations, use only the time per
day each stack is In operation. The total
mercury emissions from a source will be the
summation of results from all stacks.
p_ W'Cg.W A. 86,400 seconds/day
•WES AND tEGULAJIONS
pllng Measurements, Paper presented at the
Annual Meeting oT Che Mr Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-16, 1*70.
11. Bmlth,-W.S., etal., -Stack Oro Sampling
Improved and Simplified with New Equip-
ment, APCA paper l?o.Vr-11V, 1*07.
12. Smith, W. 8., B. T. BhtgOun, and W.
T. Todd, A •Method of Interpreting Stack
Sampling Data, Paper presented at the 03d
Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis. Mo., June 14-18, 1970.
18. Specifications tor Incinerator Testing at
Federal Facilities PHS, KOAPO, 1987.
14. Standard Method for Sampling Stocks
for Paniculate Matter, In: 1671 Book of
ASTM standards, part 33, Philadelphia, 1671,
A8TM Designation 0-9638-71.
16. Vennard, J. K., Elementary Fluid Me-
chanics, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, 1947.
IfXTHOD 102. UTKBCNCI KXTHOD FOB DETKR-
JtiMATTON OF PAS.1HU1AR AMD GASEOUS MEK-
COT HUSSIONS sssoic .STAIIOMABT sopmcis
pie. — Partlculate and gaseous mercury emis-
sions are Isoklnetlcally sampled from the
•ounce and collected In acidic iodine mono-
chloride solution. The mercury collected (In
the mercuric form) is reduced to elemental
mercury In basic solution by hydroxylamlne
sulfate. Mercury is aerated from the solution
and analyzed using speotrophotometry.
1.3 Applicability.— This method is appli-
cable for the determination of paniculate
and flMeous mercury emissions when Uie
carrier gas stream Is principally JiydroKeu.
The method is for use IB duets or itackH nt
stationary sourer* Unless otherwise
eq. 101-7
where:
R— Rate of emission, g/day.
Wi- Total weight of mercury collected, *g.
Vi*,i- Total volume of gas sample (mack conditions;,
ft'.
(r.).Yi.-Average stack gas velocity, feet per second.
A, -Stack area, IV.
6.8 Isoklnetlc variation (comparison of
Telocity of gas in probe tip to stack velocity) .
1. Principle and appUcnWHttj— 1 J Princi-
Am®(v.)m. eq. 101-8
where:
7- Percent of isoklnetlc sunpUni:.
v urt.i- Total volume of BUS sample (stack conditions),
ft'.
X.-Probe tip area, ft'.
ffi-Sampling time, scr.
(i't)»»«."Average Rtauk gas vduflty, luci pur second.
7. Evaluation of results—7.1 Determina-
tion of compliance.—7.1.1 Each performance
test shall consist of three repetitions of the
applicable test method. For the purpose of
determining compliance with an applicable
national emission standard, the average of
results of all repetitions shall apply.
7.2 Acceptable itokinetie result*.—7.2.1
The following range sets the limit on accept-
able tsoktnetlc sampling results:
If 90%^I^110%, the results are accept-
able; otherwise, reject the test and repeat.
8. References.—1. Addendum to Specifica-
tions for Incinerator Testing at Federal
Facilities, PHS, NCAPC, Dec. 6,1967.
2. Determining Dust Concentration In a
Gas Stream, ASME Performance Test Code
No. 27, New York, N.Y., 1967. •
3. Devorkin, Howard, et al., Air Pollution
Source Testing Manual, Air Pollution Con-
trol District, Los Angeles, Calif., Nov. 1963.
4. Hatch, W. It. and W. L. Ott, "Determina-
tion of Sub-Microgram Quantities of Mercury
by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry,**
Anal. Chem., 40:2036-87,1968.
6. Mark, L. B., Mechanical Engineers' Hand-
book, McOraw-Hlll Book Co., Inc., New York,
N.Y., 1861.
6. Martin, Robert M., Construction Details
of Isoklnetlc Source Sampling Equipment,
Environmental Protection Agency, APTD-
0681.
7. Methods for Determination of Velocity,
Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Oases,
Western Precipitation Division of Joy Mfg.
. Co., Los Angeles, Calif. Bui. WP-60,1968.
8. Perry, J. H., Chemical Engineers' Hand-
book, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York,
N.Y., 1960.
8. Bom, Jerome J., Maintenance, Calibra-
tion, and Operation of Isoklnetlc Source Sam-
pling Equipment, Environmental Protection
Agency, APTD-0576.
10. Shlgehara, B. T., W. P. Todd, and W. 8.
Smith, Significance of Errors 'in Stack 8am-
PROBE
TYPES
PITOT TUBE
.
this method Is not Intended to apply to RUM
streams other than those emitted directly to
the atmosphere without further processing.
9. Apparatus— 2 J Sampling train.— A sche-
matic of the sampling train used by EPA
is shown in figure 102-1. Commercial models
of this train are available, although complete
construction details are described in APTD-
0681 ,» aad operating and maintenance pro-
cedures are described In APTD-0576. The
components essential to this sampling train
are the following:
CHECK
VALVE
VACUUM
LINE
IMPINGEKS ICE BATH
BY-PASS VALVE
THEMMMETEIK
GAUGE
ALVE
DRY TEST METER
AIR-TIGHT
PUMP
W2-1. Mercury sampling train
2.1.1 Jvoaele. Stainless steel or glass with
sharp, tapered leading edge.
2.1.2 Prooe. Sheathed Pyrex* glass.
2.13 Pitot tube. Type B (figure W>2-2), or
equivalent, with a weffluleut -within 6 per-
cent over the working range, attached to
probe to monitor stack gas velocity.
2.1.4 Impingeri. Four Oreenburg-Smlth
Implngers connected In series with glass ball-
Joint fittings. The first, third, and fourth
implogars mar &• modified by replacing the
tip with one-half Inch ID glass tube extend-
ing to one-half inch from the bottom of the
flask.
9.1.6 Acid trap. Mine safety appliances air
line filter, catalogue No. 81867, with acid ab-
sorbing cartridge and suitable connections, or
equivalent.
2.1.6 Metering system. Vacuum gage, leak-
less pump, thermometers capable of measur-
ing temperature to -within B*F, dry gas meter
with £ percent accuracy, and related equip-
ment, described In APTD-0581, to maintain
an kMklaetle sampling rate and to determine
samrtln volume.
2.1.7 Barometer. To measure atmospheric
pressure to ± 0.1 In hg.
1 These documents are available for a nomi-
nal cost from the National Technical In-
formation Service, UJ3. Department of Com-
merce, 6286 Port Eoyal Road, Springfield, Va.
22161.
'Mention of trade names or commercial
products does not constitute endorsement
by the Environmental Protection Agency.
Flour* 1M-2,
FEDGtM. MGISTEt, VOL -Si, NO. ««—TCIDAY, /MH. *, W3
IV-21
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
3.2 Measurement of stack condition*
(stock preiaure, temperature, moitturs, and
wetocity)—a.3.1 Pitot tube. Type 8, or
equivalent, with a eoefflolent within 8 per-
cent over theworklng range.
3.3.3 Differential pr«i»ure gage. Inclined
manometer, or equivalent, to measure veloc-
ity head to within 10 percent of the mini-
mum value. Micromanometers should be used
if warranted.
32.3 Temperature gage. Any tempera-
ture-measuring device to measure stack tem-
perature to within 1*7.
2.2.4 Pressure gage. Pltot tube and In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
stack pressure to within 0.1 in hg.
2.2.6 Moisture determination. Drying
tubes, condensers, or equivalent, to deter-
mine stack gas moisture content in hydrogen
to within 1 percent.
2.3 Sample recovery—3.3.1 Leakiest glait
sample bottle*. 800 ml and 200 ml with Tef-
lon-lined tops.
2.3.3 Graduated cylinder. 260 ml.
2.3.3 Plaitic far. Approximately 800 ml.
2.4 AnaZyais—2.4.1 Spectropfcotometer.
To measure absorbance at 363.7 nm. Perkin
Elmer model 303, with a cylindrical gas cell
(approximately 1.6 in o.d. x 7 In) with quart!
glass windows, and hollow cathode source, or
equivalent.
2.4.2 Oai sampling bubbler. Tudor Scien-
tific Oo. Smog Bubbler, catalogue No. TP-
1160, or equivalent.
3.4.3 Recorder. To match output of
spectrophotometer.
8. Reagent!.—3.1 Stock reagents.—4.1,1
Potassium iodide. Reagent grade.
8.1.3 Distilled water.
8.1 A Potassium Iodide solution, 15 per-
cent.—Dissolve 360 g of potassium iodide (re*
agent 8.1.1) in distilled water and dilute to
Itol.
3.1.4 Hydrochloric acid. Concentrated.
3.1.8 PotoMium iodote. Reagent grade.
3.1.6 Iodine monooMoride (701) IjOM.
To 800 ml of 38 percent potassium iodide
solution (reagent 8.1.3), add 800 ml of con-
centrated hydrochloric acid. Oool to room
temperature. With vigorous stirring, slowly
add 186 g of potassium iodate and continue
stirring until all free iodine has dissolved to
give a clear orange-red solution. Oool to room
temperature and dilute to 1,800 ml with dis-
tilled water. The solution should be kept In
amber bottles to prevent degradation,
3.1,7 Sodium hydroxide petleti. Reagent
grade.
3.1.8 Nitric acid. Concentrated.
3.1.8 Hydroxylamine rulfate. Reagent
grade.
3.1.10 Sodium chloride. Reagent grade.
3.1.11 Mercuric chloride. Reagent grade.
3,2 Sampling. 3.2.1 Absorbing solution,
OJJtf 701. Dilute 100 ml of the l.OM IO1 stock
solution (reagent 3.1.8) to 11 with dlstsllled
water. The solution should be kept in glass
bottles to prevent degradation. This reagent
should be stable for at least 3 months; how-
ever, periodic checks should be performed to
insure quality.
3.3.3 Wash acid. 1:1 V/V nitric acid-water.
8.2,3 DUtilled, ctefoniMd water.
3.3.4 Silica gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16
mesh, dried at 360 'P for 3 hours.
3.3. Analysts—9.9.1 Sodium hydroxide,
ION. Dissolve 400 g of sodium hydroxide pel-
lets in distilled water and dilute to 1 1.
8.3.3 Reducing agent, It percent hydrox-
ylamins sulfate, it percent sodium eMortd*.
To 80 ml of distilled water, add 19 g of hy-
.droxylamine sulfate and 13 g of sodium chlo-
ride. Dilute to 100 ml. This quantity to
sufficient for 30 analyses and must be pre-
pared dally.
8.8.3 Aeration gat. Zero grade air.
3.3.4 Hydrochloric acid, 0.3N. Dilute 36.6
ml of concentrated hydrochloric add to 1 1
with distilled water.
8.4 Standard mercury solution*—8.4.1
Stock solution. Add 0.1864 g of mercuric
chloride to 80 ml of OJN hydrochloric acid.
After the mercuric chloride has dissolved,
add 0.8N hydrochloric acid and adjust the
volume to 100 ml. Oat ml of this solution
Is equivalent to 1 mg of free meroury.
8.4.3 Standard solutions. Prepare cali-
bration solutions by serially diluting the
stock solution (8.4.1) with 0.3N hydrochloric
acid. Prepare solutions at concentrations in
the linear working range for the Instrument
to be used. Solutions of 0.3 Mg/ml, 0.4 *g'/ml
and 0.6 pg/ml have been found acceptable
for most instruments. Store all solutions in
glass-stoppered, glass bottles. These solutions
should be stable for at least 3 months; how-
ever, periodic checks should be performed
to Insure quality.
4. Procedure. 4.1 Guidelines for source
testing are detailed in the following sections.
These guidelines are generally applicable;
however, most sample sites differ to some de-
gree and temporary alterations such as stack
extensions or expansions often are required
to insure the best possible sample site. Fur-
ther, since mercury is hazardous, care should
be taken to minimiBS exposure. Pnally, since
the total quantity of meroury to be collected
generally is small, the test must be care-
fully conducted to prevent contamination or
loss of sample.
4.9 Selection of a sampling site and mini-
mum number of traverse points.
4.3.1 Select a suitable sampling site that
is as close as to practicable to the point of
atmospheric emission. If possible, stacks
smaller than l foot in diameter should not
be sampled.
4.3.3 The sampling site should be at least
eight stack or duct diameters downstream
and two diameters upstream from any flow
disturbance such as a bend, expansion or
contraction. For rectangular cross section,
determine an equivalent diameter from the
following equation:
eq.103-1
mf~T"
where:
dcequlvalent diameter.
Is length.
W=width.
4.3 A When the above sampling site crite-
ria can be met, the minimum number of
traverse points Is four (4) for slacks l foot in
diameter or less, eight (8) for stacks larger
than 1 foot but 3 feet in diameter or less, and
twelve (13) for stacks larger than 9 feet.
4.9.4 Some sampling situations may ren-
der the above sampling site criteria imprac-
tical. When this is the case, choose a con-
venient sampling location and use figure
103-8 to determine the minimum number of
traverse points. However, uss figure 103-8
only for stacks l foot in diameter or larger.
4.2.6 To use figure 103-8, first measure the
dlstanos from the ohossn sampling location
to the nearest upstream and downstream dis-
turbances. Divide this distance by the di-
ameter or equivalent diameter to determine
the distance in terms of pipe diameters. De-
termine the corresponding number of trav-
erse points for each distance from figure
109-8. Select the higher of the two numbers
of traverse points, or a greater value, such
that for circular stacks the number to ft mul-
tiple of four, and for rectangular staoks the
number follows ths criteria of section 4.8.3.
NUMHR Of DUCT DIAMETERS UPSTREAM
(DISTANCE A)
O.I
•PROU POINT OP ANY WE OP
OUTUMANCI (BEND, EXPANSION, CONTRACTION, 170.)
NUMstX OP DUCT DIAMETER! DOWNSTREAM*
(DISTANCE I)
Plain 1044. MlnlmannuRtor of tmwM points.
4J« If*I
atto
1 laab from steak w«u, adjust the loca-
tion of that point to Insure that the sample
to taken at least l inch away from the wall.
PtOIRAL PJOISTU, VQt M. NO, 44—PUDAY, APIII •, 1*73
IV-2 2
-------
WILES AND RiOULATIOMS
4.3 Oroee-eecUonal layout and location of
travene points.
4.S.1 for circular stacks locate the tra-
vene points on at least two rtlsmsiets ao-
eording to figure 108-4 and table 108-1. The
traverse axes shall divide tbe staeksvlag*i. ** «onnectors) by
[•with w*st\*otd. lap ejatar.o.iM ici,
tap water, and finally distilled watte. Place
tM sal of MM 101 in •aoh of the first three
feapiBsjsr&j SUM! plsioe stg^proxlsaatoly 8ftO g.
of preweighed silica gel In tbe tourtb, im-
plafar. Save 80 ml of the CUM 1C1 as a blank
•1% ^H^ sample atialy*** Set up ^f train and
tbe probe as in Mgwn W8-1.
44.3 Leak check tbe sampling train at
UN sampling site. The leakage rate should
wrt tat m settees e>f 1 percent of the deslnd
sampling rate. Place oresflmfl ice around tbe
tmptnsjers. Add mon toe during tbe run to
keep 1be temperatun of the gases leaving
the last implnger at 70* F or lees.
4.0 Mercury train operation.
4JB.1 Safety procedurei. It Is imperative
that the sampler conduct tbe source test
uadsff oondltlons of utmost safety, sines
.hydrogen and air mixtures an explosive. The
•ample train essentially is leakless, so that
attention to safe operation can be concen-
trated at the inlet and outlet. The following
•peoimc items an recommended:
4.6.1.1 Operate only the vacuum pump
during the test. The other electrical equip-
ment, e«. heaters, fans «nd ttoers, normally
an not essential to the success of a hydro-
tea stream test.
44.14 Mai DM sample port to minimlBe
leatosje of hydnten from tbt stack.
44.1,8 Tent sampled hydrogen at least
10 feet away from the train. This ean be
accomplished easily by attaching a ft-in i.d.
Tygom tube to the exhaust from th» orifice
444 Tor each run, noord the data re-
qulnd on the sample sheet shown la figure
IM-a*. Take readings at aach sampling point
at least wrtnr • asmutes aad whin sltniftoant
dittonsU adjustments ro Bow rate.
t.64 lample at a rate of 0.5 to 1.0 aim.
•ampies shall be taken over such a period
or periods as an necessary to accurately
determine the maximum •missions which
would ooeur la a 94-hoor perked. In the case
of cyclic operations, sufficient tests shall be
jaade «e as to Allow aoomaU determination
•or «eic«aatton «f the omUsenns which will
•oew ««tr th* d«re*ton of the cycle. A minl-
nrem«SBtple-ttme ot 1 hours Is recommended.
In eome Instances; high mercury concentra-
tions «an prevent sampling in one run for
th* dartsull mtmnm-i time. This is indicated
by reddening in the first Impmger as free
lottine 1s liberated. In this ease, a run may
be divided Into two or more suhnans to insure
that the alaaerbing solutions an not depleted.
MOISW, VOL Jf. sML 44—ItWAr, AMJl «, If 73
IV-2 3
-------
RULBS AND REGULATIONS
fLMIT
IOCAIIO
»
moat*
Dm
IAMII
01 MO
unuiaiiio.
•ran**
1-
eiACTM.,. , , „
TUVCWPOMT
MMM
•
TOTAL
AVtUOl
IAMIM
TM
W.l*t
HATH
MMM
Ptl.tt.Hl.
T»wrw
SCMHAne W STAOI CMH •«!«
WMtn
HUD
1*11.
BMMfflM.
«ems
esnei
MM
OWUSK1
tumimau.m.
noau Duum, !«.____.
OMMSUTOMWrMI
ATMrtAiurm
san(
AX.
All.
eunir
tut-
UISUM
TIMAIM.
•» ,
4.8,4 To begin Mmpling, position the noz-
zle at the first traverse point with the tip
pointing directly into the gu stream, imme-
diately start the pump and adjust the flow
to isokinetio condition*. Sample for at leait
6 minutes at each traverse point; sampling
time must be the same (or each point. Main*
tain Uoklnetio sampling throughout the sam-
pling period, using the following procedures.
4.0.4.1 Nomographs which aid In the rapid
adjustment of the sampling rate without
other computations are in APTD-0676 and
are available from commercial suppliers. The
available nomographs, however, are set up
for use In air streams, and minor changes are
required to provide applicability to hydrogen.
4.6.4.3 Calibrate the meter box orifice. Use
the techniques as described in APTD-0876.
4.8.4.3 The correction factor nomograph
discussed in APTD-0676 and shown on the
reverse side of commercial nomographs will
not be used. In it* place, the correction factor
will be calculated using equation 103-3,
C-0.01
p.
eq. 102-2
where:
0=Correction factor.
Or=PI tot tube coefficient.
Jtf<=Mole fraction dry gae.
P.=8 tack pressure, inHg.
Pm=Meter pressure, InHg.
7m=Meter temperature, «H.
Af. = Molecular weight of stack gaa (from
4.4.4), Ib/lb mole.
AJf@= Meter box calibration factor, ob<
talned In step 4.6.4.2,
4.6.4.4 Set the calculated correction factor
on the front of the operating nomograph.
Select the proper nozzle and set the S-faotor
on the nomograph as detailed in APTD-0676.
4.6.4.6 Bead the velocity head in the stack
at each sample point from the manometer in
the meter box. Convert the hydrogen AP to
an equivalent value for air by multiplying by
*• ratio of the molecular weight of air to hy-
drogen at the stack moisture content. Insert
this value of AP onto the nomograph and
read off AH. Again, convert the AW, which is
an air equivalent value, to the Aff for hydro-
gen by dividing by 13. This factor includes
the ratio of the dry molecular weight* and a
correction for the different orifice calibration
factor* for hydrogen and air. This procedure
is diagrammed below:
Obiem AP-MulUply (
by \ Af Wat /•«• nomograph.
Read 08 AH-*Dlvid»>yl»-ir,H to btuwdoa meter bo*
4,6,4,6 Operate the sample train at the
calculated Air at each sample point.
4.6,8 Turn off the pump at the conclusion
of each run and record the final readings.
Immediately remove the probe and nosasle
from the stack and handle in accordance with
the sample recovery process described in sec-
tion 4,7.
4.7 Sample recovery.
4,7.1 (All glass storage bottles and the
graduated cylinder must be precleaned as in
section 4,6.1). This-operation should be per-
formed in an area free of possible mercury
contamination. Industrial laboratories and
ambient air around mercury-using facilities
are not normally free of mercury contamina-
tion, When the sampling train is moved, care
must be exercised to prevent breakage and
contamination.
4.7.3 Disconnect the probe from the lm-
plnger train. Place the contents (measured
to ±1 ml) of the first three implngers into
a 600 ml sample bottle. Rinse the probe and
all glassware between it and the back half
of the third implnger with two 60 ml por-
tions of 0.1M 101 solution. Add these rinses
to the first bottle. For a blank, place 80 ml
of the 0.1M 101 in a 100 ml sample bottle.
Place the silica gel in the plastic jar. Seal and
secure all containers for shipment. If an ad-
ditional test is desired, the glassware can be
carefully double rinsed with distilled water
and reassembled. However, if the glassware is
to be out of use more than 3 days, the initial
acid wash procedure must be followed.
4.8 Analysis—4.8.1 Apparatus prepara-
tion.—Clean all glassware according to the
procedure of section 4.6.1. Adjust the Instru-
ment settings according to the Instrument
manual, using an absorption wavelength of
968.7 nm.
4.8.3 Analytic preparation, — Adjust the
air delivery pressure and the needle valve to
obtain a constant air flow of about 1,3 1/rnin.
The analysis tube should be bypassed ex-
cept during aeration. Purge the equipment
for a minutes. Prepare a sample of mercury
standard solution (3.4.3) according to sec-
tion 4.8.3. Place the analysis tube in the line,
and aerate until a maximum peak height is
reached on the recorder. Remove the analy-
sis tube, flush the lines, and -rinse the
analysis tube with distilled water. Repeat
with another sample of the same standard
solution. This purge and analysis cycle is to
be repeated until peak heights are repro-
ducible.
4.8.3 Sample preparation, — Just prior to
analysis, transfer a sample aliquot of up to
60 ml to the cleaned 100 ml analysis tube.
Adjust the volume to 60 ml with 0.1M IC1
if required. Add 6 ml of 10 H sodium hydrox-
ide, cap tube with a clean glass stopper and
shake vigorously. Prolonged, vigorous shak-
ing at this point i* necessary to obtain an
accurate analysis. Add 0 ml of the reducing
agent (reagent 8.3.3) , cap tube with a clean
•glass stopper and shake vigorously and im-
mediately place In sample line.
4.8.4 Mercury determination. — After the
system ha* been stabilized, prepare samples
from the sample bottle according to section
4.8.3. Aerate the sample until a maximum
peak height i* reached on the recorder. The
mercury content is determined by comparing
the peak heights of the samples to the peak
height* of the calibration solutions. If col-
lected samples are out of the linear range,
the samples should be diluted. Prepare a
blank from the 100 ml bottle according to
section 4.8.8 and analyse to determine the
reagent blank mercury level.
O. Calibration,— 6.1 Sampling Train, 6.1.1
Use standard methods and equipment as de-
tailed in APTD-0676 to calibrate the rate
meter, pltot tube and dry gas meter. Recali-
brate prior to each test series.
6.3 Analyilt.— 0,3.1 Prepare a calibra-
tion curve for the spectrophotometer using
the standard mercury solutions. Plot the
peak heights read on the recorder versus the
concentration of mercury in the standard
solutions. Standards should be interspersed
with the samples since the calibration can
change slightly with time, A new calibration
curve should be prepared for each new set
of samples run.
6. Calculation* — 6.1 Average dry gat meter
temperature, itaek temperature, itaek pres-
sure and averape orifice pressure drop.— See
datasheet (fig. 103-6).
6.2 Dry gat volume. — Correct the sample
volume measured by the dry gas meter to
stack conditions by using equation 103-3.
wliore
Vio. -
V.'.
Ti
7m
Pb.r
AH
13.6
P
IP.
cq. 102 3
Volume of pis sample tliroii|.'li tin1 dry cm mHcT
(stuck I'cmditluiiiO, (I,1
= Volume of gu sample through the
dry gas meter (meter conditions),
ft".
— Average temperature of stack gas, °R.
= Average dry gas meter temperature,
«R.
= Barometric pressure at the orifice
meter, inHg.
= Average pressure drop across the ori-
fice meter, lnH3O.
= Speclnc gravity of mercury.
= Stack pressure, Pmr± static pressure,
InHg.
No. 66—Pt.
KDfRAL REGISTER, VOL. 31, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-24
-------
tULES AND EMULATIONS
6.3 Volume of water vapor,
F..-Jr.r,.|i eq.102-4
whore:
V.-Volume of water vapor In tbo gal samplt (stack
conditions), ft>.
X.
»'l.
.ti? —-r-'-Jr.-'i wlir" Hie" uniu arc used.
Jill. — H
iiil volume of liquid collivtnl In Isiplngcn
mill sllicii iifl (Wi1 Ilitini1 10.' 7), ml.
'I'. Av {lUilr pi'i'ftaurt', In. lly.
6.4 Total gat volume.
Fto,.i"=rm.4 T'w, eq. 102-5
where:
Viot«i=:total volume of gas sample (stack
conditions), ft'.
TV-Volume of gas through dry gu meter (stack
conditions", ft'.
V.-Volume, of water vapor In gu samplt ((tack
condition*), It".
FINAL
INITIAL
LIQUID COLLICTID
TOTU VOLUMt CflUICIlD
VOLUMI Of LIQUID
*»n« COLLICTID
tVINOM
voiuw,
Ml
KIM UL
KIOMT,
t
f •!
eoNvtiT MIOHT w »A7[« TO voLUMc i» dividing toUl Might
INCMAN rr MMm or W»TI», n g '»n.
Flgm 109-1 Analytical d«u.
6.8 Stock gat velocity — Use equation
102-0 to calculate the stack gas velocity,
whore:
eq 1G2-6
', feet ffi second.
these onlti arc uwd.
-Pilot tubo coefficient, dLmenslonlcsi.
-Avenge stock fa temperature, *R.
- Averafe iquare root o( tlic velocity head of
(tack (fei (tnHiO)i/> (K* figure 102-8).
-Stack pressure, /^istntlc pressure, la
H*.
-Molecular weight of «to>'k pat (wot bull),
th« summation of the products of tbe
moluculiir wnlnlit of mu>h oomponont
multiplied by Iti volumetric proportion
in tlic mixture, Ib/lLvuiOle.
Figure 102-8 ahowi a sample recordlag sheet
for velocity traverse data. Use the averages In
the last two columns of figure 102-8 to de-
termine the average stack gas velocity from
equation 102-6.
6.6 Mercury collected. Calculate the total
weight of mercury collected by using eq.
102-7.
PLANT.
DATE_
RUN NO.
STACK DIAMETER, In..
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE, In.
STATIC PRESSURE IN STACK (Pg), In. Mj._
OPERATORS
SCHEMATIC OF STACK
CROSS SECTION
Trevarae point
number
Velocity bMd,
AVERAGE:
Suck Temperature
Figure 102-4. Velocity traverse data,
fWERAL RMISTII, VOL. II, NO. 66—MIDAY, APRIl 4, If73
TV- 75
-------
IULES AND REGULATIONS
TPi = ViCi — V»0» eq. 109-7
where:
Win Total weight of mercury collected. eg.
Vis Total volume of condensed moisture
and 101 in sample bottle, ml.
Ci=Concentration of mercury measured in
sample bottle, *g/ml.
V»=Total volume of 101 used in sampling
(impinger contents and all wash
amounts), ml.
C»=Blank concentration of mercury in 101
solution, «ig/ml.
6.7 Total mercury emittlon.—Calculate
the total amount of mercury emitted from
each stack per day by equation 103-8. This
equation is applicable for continuous opera-
tions. For cyclic operations, use only the time
per day each stack is in operation. The total
mercury emissions from a source will be the
summation of results from all stacks.
P Tri(g.).T,.X.w8e,400 seconds/day
/J ••'••"•••TSS1™™"™^™^ ^ • «u _/—
where:
eq. 102-8
A •Hate of emission, (/day.
Wi-Total weight of mercury collected, tf.
ViM.i-Total volume of (u sample (itaek oonoitloni),
ft'.
(A) MI.-Average (took gat velocity, leet per stoond.
A,-Stack ares, IP.
6.8 Jtofctnttic variation (oompariton of
velocity of gat in probe tip to ttaefc velocity).
7
where:
.® («,)«,. eq. 102-9
7-Percent of Itooneno sampling.
VM.I-TOU! volume ofgu sample (liaokoonalUoM),
X,-Probe Up wes, ft*.
• •Sampling time, MO.
0>.) MI,-Average itaok gai velocity, leet per teoond.
7. evaluation of retultt.—7.1 Determina-
tion of compliance.—7.1.1 Xaoh performance
test shall consist of three repltltlons of the
applicable test method. For the purpose of
determining compliance with an applicable
national emission standard, the average of
results of all repetitions shall apply.
7.3 Acceptable- itofctnetto rwuKl,—7,9.1
The following range sets the limit on ac-
ceptable iaoklaetio sampling results: If
90%«sl««110%, the results are acceptable;
otherwise, reject the test and repeat.
6. Jt«/«renoM.—1, Addendum to Bpeolfl-
eatlons for Incinerator Testing at Federal
Facilities, PHS, NCAPO, Dec. «, 1007.
3. Determining Dust Concentration in a
Qas Stream, A8ME Performance Test Code
No. 37, New York, N.Y., 1957.
3. Devorkln, Howard, et al., Air Pollution
Source Testing Manual, Air Pollution Con-
trol District, Los Angeles, Oalif., Nov. 1963.
4. Hatch, W. R, and W. L. Ott, "Determina-
tion of Bub-Mlcrogram Quantities of Mer-
cury by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotom-
etry," Anal. Ohem., 40: 3086-87, 1968.
S. Mark, L. 8., Mechanical Engineers'
Handbook, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York, N.Y., 1981.
8. Martin, Robert M., Construction Details
of Isoklnetlc Source Sampling Equipment,
Environmental Protection Agency, APTD-
0581.
7. Methods for Determination of Velocity,
Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Oases,
Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manu-
facturing Co., Los Angeles, Calif. Bull. WP-50,
1968.
8. Perry, J. H., Chemical Engineers' Hand-
book, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York,
N.Y., 1960.
9. Rom, Jerome J., Maintenance, Calibra-
tion, and Operation of Isokinetlc Source
Sampling Equipment, Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, APTD-0576.
10. Shlgehara, R. T., W. F. Todd, and W. S.
Smith, Significance of Errors in Stack Sam-
pling Measurements, Paper presented at the
Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-19,1970.
11. Smith, W. BH »t al., Stack Oat Sam-
pling Improved and Simplified with New
Equipment, APCA paper No. 67-119, 1967.
13. Smith, W. S., R. T. Shlgehara, and W. F.
Todd, A Method of Interpreting Stack Sam-
pling Data, Paper presented at the 68d An-
nual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-19,1970.
18. Specifications for Incinerator Testing
at Federal Faculties PHS, NOAPO, 1967.
14. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks
for Paniculate Matter, In: 1971 Book of
A8TM Standards, part 33, Philadelphia, 1971,
ASTM Designation D-3938-71.
15. Vennard, J. K., Elementary Fluid Me-
chanics, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, 1947.
aorrxoa 101. MBTWD-M ecuBmtra KVTBOD
1. Principle and applicability.—l.l Prin-
ciple .-"•Beryllium innfiisil^ni are isoklnetloaUy
sampled from three points in a duct or stack.
The collected sample U analysed for beryl-
lium using an appropriate technique.
13 Applicability.—This procedure details
guidelines and requirements for methods
acceptable for us* in determining beryllium
emissions in ducts or stacks at stationary
sources, as specified under the provisions of
161.14 of the regulations.
9. Apparatus—<3.1 Sampling train,—A
schematic of the required sampling train
configuration is shown in figure 10S-1. 'The
essential components of the train are the
following:
3.1.1 Wo«ai«.-at*lnle*s steel, or equiva-
lent, with sharp, tapered leading edge.
8.1.9 Probe,—«heathed Pyres' glass.
8.14 filter.—UUlipore AA, or equivalent,
with appropriate filter bolder that provides
a positive seal against leakage from outside
or around the filter. It Is suggested that a
Whatman 41, or equivalent, be placed Imme-
diately against the back side of the MUllpore
filter as a guard against breakage of the
Millipore.-Include the Whatman 41 in the
analysis. Equivalent filters must be at least
99.96 percent efficient (OOP Test) and
amenable to the analytical procedure.
•isms'
FlguntM-1.
mUMa'; uw>« Imln eetaatlto.
3.1.4 Utter-pump tyttem.— Any system
that will maintain Isoklnetlc sampling rate,
determine sample volume, and is capable of
a sampling rate of greater than 0.6 ofm.
3.3 Ueaturement of stock condition!
(itack prewure, temperature, mototure and
velocity) .—The following equipment shall be
used in the manner specified In section 4.8.1.
2.2.1 Pitot tube.— Type 8. or equivalent,
with a coefficient within 5 percent over the
working range.
2.2.2 Differential pretture gauge. — In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
velocity head to within 10 percent of the
value*
9.9.3. Temperature gauge.—Any tempera-
ture measuring device to measure stack tem-
perature to within >• F,
8.3.4 Pretture gauge.—Any device to
measure stack pressure to within 0.1 in. Hg.
8.9.5 Barometer.—To measure atmos-
pheric pressure to within 0.1 In. Hg.
3.3.6 Jfoitture determination.—Wet and
dry bulb thermometers, drying tubes, con-
densers, or equivalent, to determine stack gas
moisture content to within 1 percent.
8.8 Sample recovery.—8.8.1 Probe clean -
ing equipment.—Probe brush or cleaning rod
at least as long as probe, or equivalent. Clean
cotton balls, or equivalent, should be used
with the rod.
2.8.3 Leafcletr glau sample bottles.
3.4 Analytit.—3.4.1 Equipment neces-
sary to perform an atomic absorption,
spectrographic, fluorometric, ohromato-
graphlc, or equivalent analysis.
8. Reagent t.—3.1 Sample recovery.—3.1.1
Acetone .—Reagent grade.
8.1 J Wath. acid.—1:1 V/V hydrochloric
acid-water.
8.3 Analytii.—-8.3.1 Reagents as neces-
sary for the selected analytical procedure.
4. Procedure,—4.1 Guidelines for source
testing are detailed In the following sections.
These guideline* art generally applicable;
however, most sample sites differ to some de-
gree and temporary alterations such as stack
extensions or expansions often are required
to Insure the best possible sample site. Fur-
ther, since beryllium if hazardous, care
should be taken to minimise exposure.
Finally, since the total quantity of beryllium
to be collected is quite small, the teat must
be carefully conducted to prevent contami-
nation or loss of sample.
4J> Selection of a tamplinp tits and num-
ber of runt,—4.9.1 Select a suitable sam-
pling site that Is as close as practicable to the
point of atmospheric •mission, If possible,
stacks smaller tfrftn 1 foot In diameter should
not be sampled.
4.3 J The sampling site should be at least
eight stack or duet diameters downstream
and two diameters upstream from any flow
disturbance such as a bend, expansion or
contraction. For rectangular cross-section,
determine an equivalent diameter using the
following equation:
eq.103-1
> Mention of trade names or specific prod-
ucts does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
where:
01 a equivalent diameter
txsiength
W=width
4JJ Some sampling situations may ren-
der the above sampling site criteria imprac-
tical. When this is the case, an alternate
cite may be selected but must be no less
than two diameters downstream and one-
half diameter upstream from any point of
disturbance. Additional sample runs are rec-
ommended at any sample site not meeting
the criteria of section 4 .33.
4.3,4 Three runs shall constitute a test,
The runs shall be conducted at three dif-
ferent points. The three point* shall pro-
portionately divide the diameter, i.e. be lo-
cated at 35, 50 and 76 percent of the diameter
from the inside wall. For horizontal ducts,
the diameter shall be in the vertical direc-
tion. For rectangular ducts, sample on a line
through the oentrold and parallel to a side.
If additional runs are required per section
433, proportionately divide the duct to ac-
commodate the total number of runs.
44 Ueaturement of ttocfc conditions.
4.8.1 Measure the stack gas pressure, mois-
ture, and temperature, using the equipment
described In I 3.3. Determine the molecular
weight of the stack gas. Sound engineering
estimates may be made in lieu of direct
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 38, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
IV-2 6
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
measurement*. The bull for rich estimates
•ball be given In the test report.
4.4 Preparation of tampling train.—
4.4.1 Assemble the sampling timln u shown
in figure 108-1. It Is recommended feat eJl
glassware be precleaned by soaking la wash
•eld for 3 hour*.
4,4.3 Leak check the sampling train at the
tampling tlte. The leakage rate ihould not be>
in excess of 1 percent of the desired sample
rate.
4.8 Beryllium train operation. — 4.6.1 For
each run, measure the velocity at the selected
sampling point. Determine the Isoklnetlc
sampling rate. Record the velocity head and
the required sampling rate.
4.6.2 Place the nocxle at the sampling
point with the tip pointing directly into the
gas stream, Immediately start the pump and
adjust the flow to Isoklnetlc conditions. At
the conclusion of the test, record the sam-
pling rate. Again measure the velocity bead
at the sampling point. The required Isoklnetlc
rate at the end of the period should not have
deviated more than 20 percent from that
originally calculated.
4.6.8 Sample at a minimum rate of 0.6
ft'/mln. Samples shall be taken over such a
period or periods as are necessary to deter-
mine the maximum emissions which would
occur in a 94-hour period. In the ease of
cyclic operations, sufficient tests shall be
made so as to allow determination or calcu-
lation of the emissions which would ooour
over the duration of the cycle, A minimum
tampling time of 9 hours is recommended.
4.5,4 All pertinent data should be In-
cluded in the test report.
4.6 Sample recovery.— 4,6.1 It Is recom-
mended that all glassware be precleaned u
In 14.4.1. Sample recovery should also be
performed In an area free of possible beryl-
lium contamination. When the sampling
train is moved, exercise care to prevent
breakage and contamination. Bet aside a por-
tion of the acetone used In the sample re-
covery as a blank tot analysis. The total
amount of acetone used should be measured
for accurate blank correction. Blanks can be
eliminated If prior analysis shows negligible
amounts.
4.6.9 Remove the niter and any loose par-
ticulate matter from filter holder aad place
In a container.
4.6.8 Clean the probe with acetone aad a
brush or long rod and cotton balls. Wash Into
the container. Wash out the filter bolder
with acetone and add to the same container.
4.7 Analyni*.— 4.7.1 Make the necessary
preparation of samples and analyze for beryl-
lium. Any currently acceptable method such
as atomic absorption, spectrographlc, nuoro-
metrlo, ohromatographte, or equivalent may
Tr,(B.)»,.A.^86,400 seconds/day
"
R- fUta of tmMon, (/day.
W,-Totol w*t(ht ol beryllium oollooled, M,
VM.i - Total volumi of iu iamp)«d, ft*.
(«,)i,..-Av«i«« itaek IM vtlooltjr, tat por Moond.
A.-Buck am, ft'.
7. re it report. 7.1 A test report shall be
prepared which shall include as a minimum:
7.1.1 A detailed description of the sam-
pling train used and results of the proce-
dural check with all data and calculations
made. ,
7.13 All pertinent data taken during
test, the basis for any estimates made'cal-
culations, and results.
7.1.3 A description of the test site, in-
cluding a block diagram with a brief de-
scription of the process, location of the sam-
ple points in the cross section, dimensions
and distances from any point of disturbance.
KXTHOD 104. MtmXNCI METHOD TO* ORTB-
aaMAnoif or s*»Tixitm nmaiom rmoM
•TATIONABT SOTWCIB
1. Principle and applicability—1.1 Prin-
ciple,—Beryllium emissions are isoklnetlcal-
ly sampled from the source, and the collected
6. Calibration and rtantfarcb— 6.1 Sam-
pling train. — 6.1.1 As a procedural check,
sampling rate regulation should be compared
with a dry gas meter, spirometer, rotameter
(calibrated for prevailing atmospheric con-
ditions), or equivalent, attached to nonle
inlet of the complete sampling train.
6.1.2 Data from this test and calculations-
should be shown la test report.
6.3 xnalyii*.— 6.3.1 Standardization is
made as suggested by the manufacturer of
the Instrument or the procedures for the
analytical method.
6. Calculation*— «.l Total beryllium emi*-
sion. Calculate the total amount of beryl-
lium emitted from each stack per day by
equation 103-3. This equation Is applicable
for continuous operations. For cyclic opera-
' tlons, use only the time per day each stack
Is In operation. The total beryllium emis-
sions from a source will be the summation
of results from all stacks.
aple is digested In an acid solution and
analyzed by atomic absorption spectropho-
tometry.
U Applicability.—This method is appli-
cable for the determination of beryllium
emissions la duets or stacks at stationary
sources. Unless otherwise specified, this
method U not Intended to apply to gas
streams other than those emitted directly
to the atmosphere 'without further
processing.
9, .Apparatus—2.1 Sampling train.—A
schematic of the sampling train used by
SPA Is shown in figure 104-1. Commercial
models of this train are available, although
construction details are described in APTD-
0681,* and operating and maintenance pro-
cedures are described In APTD-0676. The
components essential to this tampling train
are the following:
3.1.1 Nozzle.—Stainless steel or glass with
sharp, tapered leading edge.
3.1.3 Probe.—Sheathed Pyrex* glass, A
heating system capable of maintaining a
minimum gas temperature In the range of
the stack temperature at the probe outlet
during tampling may be used to prevent
condensation from occurring.
HEATED AREA HLTW HOLDER THERMOMETER
TOES
PITOTTUBE
IMPINQEm ICEIATH
•V+AttVALVE
CHECK
,VAWE
VACUUM
LINE
VACUUM
GAUGE
'ALVE
THEIWOMETEK'
DRY TEST METER AIR-TIGHT
Flour* 104-1. Beryllium sampling train
Pitot tube,—Type 8 (figure 104-3),
or equivalent, with a coefficient within 6 per-
cent over the working range, attached to
probe to monitor stack gas velocity.
3.1.4 Filter tolder.—Pyrex glass. The filter
holder mutt provide a positive seal against
leakage from outtide or around the filter.
A heating system capable of maintaining the
filter at a minimum temperature in the range
of the stack temperature may be used to
prevent condensation from occurring.
3.1.8 Jmpinper*.—Four Oreenburg-Bmlth
implngers connected in series with glass ball
Joint fittings. The first, third, and fourth
implngers may be modified by replacing the
tip with a ft-inch l.d, glass tube extending
to one-half inch from the bottom of the
to p^ritmin an Isoklnetlc sampling rate and
to determine sample volume.
3.1.7 Barometer.—To measure atmos-
pheric pressure to ± 0.1 In Kg.
9.1 Vewurement of stocfc condition*
(ttoofc pressure, temperature, moiiture and
velocity)—2J.I Pitot tube.—Type 8, or
equivalent,, with a coefficient within 6 percent
over the working range.
3.3.3 Differential pressure paupe.—In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
velocity head to within 10 percent of the
9.1.6 Jfeterinf tyitem.—Vacuum gauge,
leakless pump, thermometers capable of
measuring temperature to within 6* F, dry
gas meter with a percent accuracy, and re-
lated equipment, described in APTD-0881,
»These documents are available for a nom-
inal cost from the National Technical In-
formation Service, XJJ3. Department of Com-
merce, 6306 Port Royal Road, Springfield,
Va. 33161.
• Mention of trade names on specific prod-
ucts does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
IfDIRAL UOISTU, VOL. 18, NO. 66—WIDA.Y, APRIL 6, 1973
IV- 2 7
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
however, most sample site* differ to some
degree and temporary alteration* such a*
stack extensions at expansions often are re-
quired to Insure the best possible sample
site. Further, since beryllium Is hazardous,
care should be taken to minimise exposure.
Finally, since the total quantity of beryllium
to be collected is quite small, the test must
be carefully conducted to prevent contami-
nation or toss of aample.
4.2 Selection of a sampling site and mini-
mum number of traverse points.
4.3.1 Select a suitable sampling site that
Is as close a* practicable to the point of at-
mospheric •mission. If possible, •tacks
smaller than 1 foot In diameter should not
be sampled.
4.2.3 The turnpike site should be at least
a stack or duct diameters downstream and
9 diameters upstream from any flow disturb-
ance such a* a bend, expansion or contrac-
tion. For a rectangular cross-section, deter-
mine an equivalent diameter from the
following equation:
•q. 104-1
L+W
where:
£.=equivalent diameter
I=Iength
VT=wldth
•Fljun 104-2. Pilot lub« • Miwmttr mirnbly,
2.2.3 Temperature gage.—Any tempera-
ture measuring device to measure stack tem-
perature to within S* F.
2.2.4 Pressure gage.—FUat tube and In-
clined manometer, or equivalent, to measure
stack pressure to within 0.1 In Hg.
2.2.6 Moisture determination.—Wet and
dry bulb thermometers, drying tubes, con-
densers, or equivalent, to determine stack
gas moisture content to within 1 percent. •
2.3 Sample recovery—2.3.1 Probe clean*
ing rod.—At least as long as probe.
2.3.2 Leakless glass tample bottles.—600
ml.
2.3.3 Graduated cylinder.—260 ml.
2.3.4 Plastic jar.—Approximately 800 ml.
2.4 Analysis—2.4.1 Atomic 'absorption
spectrophotometer.—To measure abeorbanoe
at 234.8 nm. Perkln Elmer Model 803, or
equivalent, with N,O/acetylene burner.
2.4.2 Hot plate.
2.4.3 Perchloric acid fume hood.
3. Reagents—3.1 Stock reagents.—3.1.1
Hydrochloric add.—Concentrated.
3.1.2 Perchloric acid.—Concentrated, 70
percent.
3.1.3 Nitric acid.—Concentrated.
3.1.4 Sulfuric acid.—Concentrated.
3.1.5 Distilled and deionized water.
3.1.0 Beryllium powder.—98 percent mini-
mum purity.
3.2 Sampling—3.2.1 Filter. — Mllllpore
AA, or equivalent. It Is suggested that a
Whatman 41 Alter be placed immediately
against the back side of the Mllllpore filter
as a .guard against breaking the Mllllpore
filter. In the analysis of the filter, the What->
man 41 filter should be Included with the
Mllllpore filter.
3.2.2 Silica gel.—Indicating type, 6 to 18
mesh, dried at 360* F for 2 hours.
3.2.3 Distilled and deionized water.
3.3 Sample recovery—3.3.1 Distilled and
deionized water.
3.3.2 Acetone.—Reagent grade.
3-3.3 Wash acid.—1.1 V/V hydrochloric
acid-water.
3.4 Analysis.—3.4.1 Sulfuric acid solu-
tion, 12 N.—Dilute 333 ml of concentrated
sulfurlc acid to 1 1 with distilled water.
3.4.2 25 percent V/V hydrochloric acid-
water.
3.6 Standard beryllium solution—3.6.1
stock solution.—l jig/ml beryllium. Dis-
solve 10 mg of beryllium in 80 ml of 12 N
suit uric acid solution and dilute to a volume
of 1000 ml with distilled water. Dilute a 10 ml
aliquot to 100 ml with 26 percent V/V hydro-
chloric acid, giving a concentration of 1
Ag/ml. This dilute stock solution should be
prepared fresh dally. Equivalent strength (in
beryllium) stock solutions may be prepared •
from beryllium salts as Bed, and Be (NO.),
(98 percent minimum purity).
4. Procedure. 4.1 Guidelines for source
testing are detailed in the following sections.
These guidelines are generally applicable;
NUMBER OF DUCT DIAMETER UPSTREAM'
(DISTANCE A)
0.4
60
FROM POINT Or ANY TYPE 0>
DISTURBANCE (BEND. EXPANSION, CONTRACTION, ETC>
4UMBER OF DUCT DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM
(DISTANCE B)
Figure 101-3. Minimum numoet ot traverse points.
Figure 104-4.
ftvwM poinu on pfrpondlculw dlMiltra.
Flgin 1044. Crew Mellon of nctuigulv tack dlvMri Into 11 «**l
em|, with nvKW point* U ooMrold of own *TM.
4.2.3 When the above sampling site cri-
teria can be met, the minimum number of
traverse points is four (4) for stacks 1 foot
in diameter or less, eight (8) for stacks larger
than 1 foot but a feet In diameter or less, sad
twelve (12) for stacks larger than a feet.
4.2.4 Some sampling situations may ren-
der the above sampling site criteria Imprac-
tical. When this is the case, choose a con-
venient sampling location and use figure
104-8 to determine the minimum number
of traverse points. However, use figure 104-3
only for stacks 1 foot in diameter or larger.
4.2.6 To use figure 104-3, first measure
the distance from the chosen sampling lo-
cation to the nearest upstream and down-
stream disturbances. Divide this distance by
the diameter or equivalent diameter to deter-
mine the distance in terms of pipe diameters.
Determine the corresponding number of
traverse points for each distance from fig-
ure 104-8. Select the higher of the two num-
bers of traverse points, or a greater value,
such that for circular stacks the number 1*
a multiple of four, and for rectangular stacks
the number follow* the criteria of section
4.3.2.
4.2.8 If a selected sampling point is closer
than 1 Inch from the stack wall, adjust the.
location of that point to ensure that the
•ample Is taken at least 1 inch away from the
wall.
43 Cross-sectional layout and location of
traverse points.
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 38, NO. 66—«IDAY, APtIL 6, 1973
IV-2 8
-------
H
ro
VO
Table 104-1. Location of traverse potnts 1n circular stacks
(Percent of stack diameter from Inside wall to traverse point)
Traverse
point
nwber
on a
dlaneter
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Number of traverse points on a diameter
2
14 fi
85.4
4
6.7
25.0
75.0
93.3
6
4.4
14.7
29.5
70.5
85.3
95.6
8
3.3
10.5
19.4
32.3
67.7
80.6
89.5
96.7
10
2.5
8.2
14.6
22.6
34.2
65.8
77.4
85.4
91.8
97.5
12
2.1
6.7
11.8
17.7
25.0
35.5
64.5
75.0
82.3
88.2
93.3
97.9
14
1.8
5.7
9.9
14.6
20.1
26.9
36.6
63.4
73.1
79.9
85.4
90.1
94.3
98.2
16
1.6
4.9
8.5
12.5
16.9
22.0
28.3
37.5
62.5
71.7
78.0
83.1
87.5
91.5
9C.1
».4
18
1.4
4.4
7.5
10.9
14.6
18.8
23.6
29.6
38.2
61.8
70.4
76.4
81.2
85.4
89,1
92.5
95.6
98.6
20
1.3
3.9
6.7
9.7
12.9
16.5
20.4
2RO
30.6
38.8
61.2
69.4
75.0
79.6
83.5
87.1
90.3
93.3
96.1
98.7
22
1.1
3.5
6.0
8.7
11.6
14.6
18.0
21.8
26.1
31.5
39.3
60.7
68.5
73.9
78.2
82.0
85.4
88.4
91.3
94.0
96.5
98.9
24
1 i
3.2
5.5
7.9
10.5
13.2
16.1
19.4
23.0
27.2
32.3
39.8
60.2
67.7'
72.8
77.0
80.6
83.9
86.8
89.5
92.1
94.5
96.8
98.9
4.3.1 For circular steaks locate the tra-
verse points on at least two diameters accord-
ing to figure 104-4 and table 104-1. The tra-
verse area snail divide the stack cross section
Into equal parts.
4.3.2 For rectangular stacks divide the
cross section Into as many equal rectangular
areas as traverse points, such that the ratio
of the length to the width of the elemental
areas Is between 1 and 2. Locate the traverse
points at the centrold of each equal, area
according to figure 104-6.
4.4 Measurement of stack conditions.—
4.4.1 Set up the apparatus as shown In fig-
ure 104—2. Make sure all connections are
tight and leak free. Measure the velocity
head and temperature at the traverse points
specified by II 4.2 and 43.
4.4.2 Measure the static pressure In the
stack.
4.4 A Determine the stack gas moisture.
4.4.4 Determine the stack gas molecular
weight from the measured moisture content
and knowledge of the expected gas stream
composition. A standard Orsat analyzer has
been found valuable at combustion sources.
In all cases, sound engineering Judgment
should be used.
4.6 Preparation of lamplhig tratn.—4.8.1
Prior to assembly, clean all glassware (probe,
Implngers, and connectors) by soaking In
wash acid for 2 hours. Place 100 mil of dis-
tilled water in each of the first two Impring-
ers, leave the third implnger empty, and place
approximately 200 g of prewelghted silica gel
In the fourth Implnger. Save a portion of the
distilled water as a blank In the sample
analysis. Set up the train and the probe as
In figure 104-1.
4.5.2 Leak check the sampling train at the
sampling site. The leakage rate should not be
In excess of 1 percent of the desired sampling
rate. If condensation In the probe or filter Is
a problem, probe and filter heaters will be
required. Adjust the heaters to provide a
temperature at or above the stack tempera-
ture. However, membrane filters such as the
Milllpore AA are limited to about 226" F. If
the stack gas is in excess of about 200° F.,
consideration should be given to an alternate
procedure such as moving the filter holder
downstream of the first implnger to Insure
that the filter does not exceed its tempera-
ture limit. Place crushed ice around the Im-
plngers. Add more ice during the test to keep
the temperature of the gases leaving the last
implnger at 70° F. or less.
4.6 Beryllium train operation.—4.6.1 For
each run, record the data required on the
example sheet shown in figure 104-6. Take
readings at each sampling point at least
every 5 minutes and when significant changes
In stack conditions necessitate additional ad-
justments in flow rate.
4.6.2 Sample at a rate of 0.5 to 1.0 ft.'/mln.
Samples shall be taken over such a period or
periods as are necessary to accurately deter-
mine the maximum emissions which would
occur in a 24-hour period. In the case of
cyclic operations, sufficient tests shall be
made so as to allow accurate determination
or calculation of the emissions which will
occur over the duration of the cycle. A mini-
mum sample time of 2 hours to recommended.
»!••*»-
CMCK>I_
KmMic or n*c> aea KCTIOH
nme
nc
r,i.
met
raraniuc
vaocitt
HUD.
OHWJVU
FUwfO*«.iF1eld data
4.6.3 To begin sampling, position the noz-
zle at the first traverse point with the tip
pointing directly Into the gas stream. Imme-
diately start the pump and adjust the flow
to teokinetlc conditions. Sample for at least
ft minutes at each, traverse point; sampling
time must be the same for each point. Main-
tain Isokinetlo sampling throughout the sam-
pling period. Nomographs which aid in the
rapid adjustment of the sampling rate with-
out other computations are In APTD-0576
and are available from commercial suppliers.
Note that standard monographs are applica-
ble only for type 8 pilot tubes and air or a
stack gas with an equivalent density. Con-
tact EPA or the sampling train supplier for
instructions when the standard monograph
Is not applicable.
4.6.4 Turn off the pump at the conclusion
of each run and record the final readings. •
Immediately remove the probe and nozzle
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 38, NO. 66—FRIDAY, APRIL 6, 1973
-------
RULIS AND RIOULATIONS
from the stack and handle in accordance with
the sample recovery process described in 14.7.
4.7 Sample recovery.—-4.7.1 (All glass
storage bottles and the graduated cylinder
must be precleaned as In I 4.6.1.) This opera-
tion should be performed in an are* free of
possible beryllium contamination. When tbe
sampling train is moved, care must be exer-
cised, to prevent breakage and contamination.
4.7.3 Disconnect the probe from the Un-
pin ger train. Remove the filter and any loose
particulate matter from the filter holder and
place in a sample bottle. Place the contents
(measured to ±1 ml) of the first three 1m-
plngers into another sample bottle. Rinse tbe
probe and all glassware between It and the
back half of the third Implnger with water
and acetone, and add this to the latter sam-
ple bottle. Clean the probe with a brush or a
long slender rod and cotton balls. Use acetone
while cleaning. Add these to the sample bot-
tle. Retain a sample of the water and acetone
as a blank. The total amount of wash water
and acetone used should be measured for ac-
curate blank correction. Place the silica gel
in the plastic jar. Seal and secure all sample
containers for shipment. If an additional test
is desired, the glassware can be carefully dou-
ble rinsed with distilled water and reassem-
bled. However, If the glsksware is to be out of
use more than 9 days, the initial acid
wash procedure must be followed.
4.8. Analysis.
4.8.1 Apparatut preparation.—Clean all
glassware according to the procedure of sec-
tion 4.5.1. Adjust the Instrument settings
according to the Instrument manual, using
an absorption wavelength of 3344 nm.
4.8.9 Sample preparation.—The digestion
of beryllium samples Is accomplished In part
in concentrated perchloric add. Caution:
The analyst must Insure that the sample is
heated to light brown fumes after the Initial
nitric acid addition; otherwise, dangerous
perchlorates may result from the subsequent
perchloric acid digestion. Perchloric acid also
should be used only under a perchloric add
hood.
4.8.9.1 Transfer, the filter and any loose
particulate matter from the sample container
to a 160 ml beaker. Add 85 ml concentrated
nitric acid. Heat on a hotplate until light
brown fumes are evident to destroy all or-
ganic matter. Cool to room temperature and
add 6 ml concentrated suKurlc acid and 0
ml concentrated perchloric acid. Then pro-
ceed with step 4.8.9.4.
4.8.3.2 Place a portion of the water and
acetone sample into a 180 ml beaker and put
on a hotplate. Add portions of the remainder
as evaporation proceeds and evaporate to dry-
ness. Cool the residue and add 88 ml concen-
trated nitric acid. Heat on a hotplate until
light brown fumes are evident to destroy any
organic matter. Cool to room temperature
and add 5 ml concentrated sulfuric acid, and
8 ml concentrated perchloric acid. Than pro-
ceed with step 44.9.4.
4.8.8.8 Weigh the spent silica gel and re-
port to the nearest gram.
4.8.9.4 Samples from 44.9.1 and 44.94
may be combined here for MM of analyst!.
Replace on a hotplate and evaporate to dry-
ness in a perchloric acid hood. Cool and dis-
solve the residue In 10.0 ml of 96 peroent
V/V hydrochloric Mid. Samples are now
ready for the atomic absorption unit. Tbe
beryllium concentration of tbe sample must
be within tbe calibration range of tbe unit.
If necessary, further dilution of sample with
98 peroent V/V hydrochloric acid must be
performed to bring tbe, sample within tbe
calibration range.
4.84 BerylMum determination. — Analyse
the samples prepared In 444 at 9844 nm
using a nitrous oxide/acetylene flame. Alumi-
num, silicon • and other elements can inter-
fere with this method If present In large
quantities. Standard methods are available,
however, to effectively eliminate these Inter-
ferences (see Reference 8).
8. Coiibration — 8.1 ' Sampling train.—
8.1.1 Use standard methods and equipment
as detailed in APTD-OB76 to calibrate tbe rate
meter, pltot tube, dry gas meter and probe
heater (if used). Recalibrate prior to each
test series.
84 AnotyrU.— B4.1* BtandardiMtlon Is
made with the procedure as suggested by the
manufacturer with standard beryllium solu-
tion. standard solutions will be prepared
from the stock solution by dilution with 96
peroent V/V hydrochloric acid. Tbe linearity
of working range should be established with
a series of standard solutions. If collected
samples are out of the linear range, tbe
samples should be diluted. Standards should
be Interspersed with tbe samples sines tbe
calibration can change slightly with time.
6. Calculation*— 6.1 Averap* dry gtu meter
temperature, stack temperature, (took prei-
(ure and average ori/lce pressure drop— See
date sheet (figure 104-8).
8.9 Dry gat volume.— Correct tbe sample
volume measured by the dry gas meter to
stack conditions by using equation 104-3.
84 Volume of water vapor.
•*«. mr » Tt
where:
eq. 104-2
Ti-Avenge temperttnn of itsok gu, *B.
T.-Avenge dry gu meter temptnture, «B.
fty-Berometrio pnsran at the orlfloe meter, in Hg.
AH-Avenge pneeun drop eoroei the orifice meter,
U. 6M8peclflo gnvltr of nerowy.
ft-Stick preeran, Pku * etetto pnenre, In Hg.
»S-
r vspor In UM gu suiipli> i
X.-O.Ooa»7 '^jjffi-, when tbeet unto on> inM.
Vi.-ToUl volunM of Hqold eolleoted In lmplm<..n
and iUlo»gel (seeflgor* 10e-7), ml.
9A Total got volume.
F,.»,-r..+ F.. eq. 104-4
Vtmi-Totel vohUM of gu sunplA (itaok condition*),
ft*.
* •• *** *uck
V.,-Volnm* of water vspot In sis Minpl* (tlnck
oonoiUons), If.
64 Stock gat velocity.
Ose equation 104-8 to calculate the stack
gas velocity.
who*:
eq. 104-5
(»,).,..-Arerige tteek gat velocity, feet per
these unite are uetd.
C,-Pltot tube coefficient, duaenstonlen.
(T.).,,,-Average Meok gu temperstun, *R.
•^•Avenge eqnsre root of tbe velocity head
of itsok gu (lnHiO)i/> dee figure 10e-«).
J><>8tsok preetun, An±statto prenun, In
JA-lloleonlsr weight of Mspk gu (wet bull).
the iunun»Qon of tbe produoti of the
molecular weight of esoh oompoumt
multiplied by Ita volumetric proportion
In the mlitun, lb/lb-mole.
rout.
WITIM.
LMwoeooltno
lOMlVOUMeOUKTID
VOUMWIMU<0
wnieouieno
avwMn
VOUMt,
M
euokea
MMHT,
p
r| -
total Mlaht
MC«AHlr..OWHnW«ATM. II (MM * *"
• VOUMMTBI.Iri
Flour. 164-T. Anelytloil dm.
HDMM noiSTN, VOL 98, NO. 66—WIDAY,.AFtll 6, 1»7S
IV-30
-------
tUlB AND tlOUUTIONS
PLANT
DATE
RUN NO.
STACK DIAMETER. In..
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE, in. Ho,,,
STATIC PRESSURE IN STACK (Pg), In.
OPERATORS
SCHEMATIC OF STACK
CROSS SECTION
Traverse point
number
Velocity heed,
In. Hj,0
Suck Temperature
AVERAGE:
Figure 104-8. Velocity traverse data.
Figure 104-8 shows a sample recording
•beet for velocity traverse data. Use the aver-
ages In the last two columns of figure 104-8
to determine the average stack gas velocity
from equation 104-0.
6.6 Beryllium collected.—Calculate the
total weight of beryllium collected by using
equation 104-6.
where:
W i=Total weight of beryllium collected,
Vi=Total volume of hydrochloric acid
from step 4.8.2.4, ml.
Ci=Concentration of beryllium found In
sample, jig/ml.
V. = Total volume of water used In sam-
pling (Implnger contents plus all
wash amounts), ml.
Cm—Blank concentration of beryllium In
water.,
F.=Total volume of acetone used In sam-
pling (all mill i amounts), ml,
C.=Blank concentration of beryllium In
acetone, «/ml.
6.7 Total beryllium emitiloni.—-Calculate
the total amount of beryllium emitted from
each stack per day by equation 104-7. This
equation is applicable for continuous opera-
tions. For cyclic operation*, use only the time
per day each stack Is In operation. The total
beryllium emissions from a source will be the
summation of results from all stacks.
R-.
((".).*. A, 86,400 seconds/day
where:
R- Bate of emission, (/day.
r,-ToUl weight of beryllium collected,
i-ToUl TolouM of rat sampl* '
eq. 10*-7
)>Ti,oAv*nc* Xsek (•> velodty, twt per sieond
X.-8uok ma, ft*.
KDEkAl UOISTH, VOL 31, NO. 6*—WIDAY, APIIl «, 1973
IV-31
-------
WHS ADD tlOUUTIONS
44 fsofcinettc variation (comparison of
.Mtootiy a/ gat in probe tip to Hack velocity) .
I 100V..»i
eq. 104-R
fe»Pereut of ItoUmae avnplln«.
•Total Talumtolctieunpb dluck conditions).
X.-Prob» tip ana, ft'.
€>-8»mplln» Urn*, too.
,"AT«n«« MMk gu Telocity, frot per second.
7. evaluation o/ retutt*— 7.1 Determina-
Mm o/eomplianee.— 7.1.1 Each performance
tatt ahan consist of three repetition* of the
applicable teit method. For the purpose of
determining oomplianoe with an applicable
national emission standard, the average of
results of all repetitions shall apply.
7.2 4oo»ptabl« itofcinetio r«»u«».— 7.2.1
The following range sets the limit on accept-
able iaoklnetio sampling results:
If BO percent ^1^110 percent, the results
are acceptable; otherwise, reject the test and
18. Smith, W. S. et al., Stack Oas Sam-
pling Improved and Simplified with New
Equipment, APCA Paper No. 67-119, 1867.
14. Smith, W. S., R. T. Shigehara, and
W. F. Todd, A Method of Interpreting Stack
Sampling Data, Paper presented at the 63d
»T»mT«i meeting of the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-19, 1B70.
16. Specification! for Incinerator Testing
at Federal Facilities, PBS, NCAPC, 1967.
16. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks
tor Fartloulate Matter. In: 1971 Book of
ASTM standards, Part 83, Philadelphia. 1971,
ABTM Designation 0-9938-71.
17. Vennard, J. K. Elementary Fluid Me-
chanics. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
Tork, 1947.
[FR Doc. 78-6433 Filed 4-5-73i8:45 am]
T. B*7ere*ce«.—1. Addendum to Specifica-
tions for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facil-
ities. PKS, NCAPO. December 6,1967.
8. Amos, M. D., and WUUs, 3. 8., "Use of
High-Temperature Pre-Ulzed Flames in
Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy," Speotro-
ehlm. Acta, 83: 1886,1966.
8. Determining Dust Concentration In a
Qas Stream, ASMS Performance Test Code
Ho. 97, Hew York, N.T., 1967.
4. Derorkln, Howard et al., Air Pollution
Source Tasting Manual, Air Pollution Control
Dfctriot, Los Angeles, Calif. November 1963.
•. Fleet, B.. Liberty. K. V., and Watt, T. 8..
•A Matty of Borne Matrix Effects in the Deter-
mlMtlirn of Beryllium by Atomic Absorption
•peatroacopy In the Nitrous Oxide-Acetylene
Maa»," Talanta, 17: 901,1970.
«. Mark, L, 8., Meohanlcal Engineers'
Btnftbook, MoOraw-HUl Book Co., Inc., New
York, M.T., 1961.
T. Martin, Robert M., Construction Details
of Iaoklnetio Source Sampling Equipment,
Bnvtronmental Protection Agency, AFTD-
8. Methods for Determination of Velocity,
Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Oases,
Western Precipitation Divlalon of Joy Manu-
facturing Co., Los Angeles, Calif. Bulletin
WP-60, 1968.
6. Perkin Elmer Standard Conditions (Rev.
March 1971).
10. Perry, J. H., Chemical Engineers' Hand-
book, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York, H.T., 1960.
11. Bern, Jerome J., Maintenance, Calibra-
tion, and Operation of Isokinetlo Source
trampling Equipment, Environmental Pro-
tection Agency, APTD-OB78.
18. Bhlgehara, R. T., W. F. Todd, and W. 8.
Smith, Significance of Errors in Stack Sam-
pling Measurements, Paper presented at the
annual meeting of the Air Pollution Control
Association, St. Louis, Mo., June 14-19, 1970.
•BDItAL tNISTH, VOL. 18, NO. 64—WIDAY, ANIL 4, 1973
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
AROS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Asbestos, Beryllium, and Mercury
Pursuant to section 113 of the Clean
Air Act, as amended (42 U.8.C. 1857c-7),
the Administrator of the Environmental
Protection Agency promulgated national
emission standards for the hazardous air
pollutants asbestos, beryllium, and mer-
cury on April 6, 1973 (38 FR 8820). The
subsequent enforcement of these regula-
tions has demonstrated a need for the
clarifying revisions which follow. These
revisions are necessary to advise the
public of how the regulations are being
interpreted In Agency enforcement ac-
tivities. The revisions promulgated here-
in do not alter the stringency of the
regulations.
A change to Subpart A, General Pro-
visions, which applies to all affected
sources, Is promulgated. The definition of
"alternative method" Is revised to Indi-
cate more clearly that It Is not a "refr
erence method" or "equivalent method"
and to make the definition consistent
with that used In 40 CPR Part 60, Stand-
ards of Performance for New Stationary
Sources.
IV-3 2
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
The applicability of the asbestos reg-
ulation is discussed in the following
documents which are available on request
from the Emission Standards and Engi-
neering Division, Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina 27711, Attention: Mr.
Don R. Goodwin:
1. Preamble to the proposed regulation (36
FR 23239)
2. Background Information document for
the proposed regulation (APTD-0763)
3. Preamble to the promulgated regulation
(38 FR 8820)
4. Background Information document for
the promulgated regulation (APTD-1503)
Comments from the owners or operators
of affected sources and from Agency re-
gional enforcement personnel have indi-
cated, however, that the intent should
be specifically expressed in the text of the
regulation. Considering this, the Agency
determined that the text of the promul-
gated regulation should be revised and
four definitions are added to clarify the
applicability of 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart
B, National Emission Standard for
Asbestos.
The definition of "commercial as-
bestos" is added to distinguish between
asbestos that is produced as a product
and asbestos that occurs as a contam-
inant ingredient In other materials, and
to make it clear that materials that con-
tain asbestos as a contaminant only are
not covered. Questions were raised con-
cerning the applicability of the standard
to manufacturing operations that use
talc and vermiculite. As Indicated on
page 6 of the background Information
report for the proposed standards
(APTD-0753), talc mines were not
covered by the proposed standards; this
was also Intended to Indicate that manu-
facturing operations that use talc or
other materials contaminated with as-
bestos were not covered by the asbestos
standard. In addition, the Information
available to the Agency at the time of
promulgation (April 6, 1973) did not
demonstrate that the mining and mill-
ing of such materials or manufacturing
operations using such materials were
major sources of asbestos emissions. The
Department of the Interior and the De-
partment of Health, Education and Wel-
fare are studying the health effects of
asbestos in talc. The revisions promul-
gated herein merely clarify the regu-
lations promulgated April 6,1973, and do
not Involve prejudgments concerning the
outcome of Investigations now underway.
Asbestos is also a contaminant in taco-
nite ore. EPA at this time believes that
asbestos releases from the milling of such
ores should be covered by the hazardous
air pollutant regulations and intends In
the near future to propose for comment
regulations which would accomplish this.
Because the revisions here being promul-
gated are only clarifications of the
Agency's intentions at the time the initial
hazardous air pollutant regulations for
asbestos were published and because they
are not being proposed for comment, EPA
believes that It Is not appropriate to In-
clude restrictions on releases of asbestos
from taconlte milling operations in these
revisions.
The regulation promulgated on April 6,
1973, did not include a definition for
"asbestos mill" or "manufacturing" oper-
ation, and questions arose concerning
whether certain operations at these facil-
ities are covered by the regulation, and
whether the regulation applies to all mill-
ing and manufacturing operations that
process ore or materials that contain as-
bestos. The definition of "asbestos mill"
is added to clarify that the regulation
covers ore crushing and conveying of
asbestos tailings to disposal piles but does
not cover open storage areas and asbestos
tailings disposal piles. This was explained
in the preamble to the promulgated regu-
lations (38 PR,8821) and on pages 30
and 31 of the background Information
report (APTD-1503). The definition ex-
cludes the milling of ores that contain
asbestos minerals only as a contaminant
as previously discussed under the defini-
tion of "commercial asbestos." As noted
earlier, the Agency intends to propose
regulations covering taconlte milling
operations.
The definition of "manufacturing" Is
added to clarify that the regulation ap-
plies to only those sources within the spe-
cified categories of affected manufactur-
ing facilities that process commercial
asbestos into a product. Operations
which process (cut, shape, assemble,
mix, or otherwise alter) a manu-
factured product that contains com-
mercial asbestos at a separate location
are not intended to be covered by the
regulation, and are classified as fabricat-
ing rather than manufacturing opera-
tions. The information available to EPA
prior to promulgation was that new con-
struction sites were the only major
sources of asbestos emissions from fabri-
cation operations and that these sources
were adequately regulated by Occupa-
tional Safety and Health Administration
standards. This was explained in the pre-
amble to the promulgated regulation (38
FR 8821) and on page 32 of the back-
ground Information report (APTD-
1503).
Some questions have arisen concern-
Ing what operations constitute demoli-
tion. The definition of "demolition" is
added to clarify that demolition occurs
only In situations where load-supporting
structural members are wrecked or re-
moved. Accordingly, the standard does
not apply to remodeling and renovation
operations in which load-supporting
structural members are not wrecked.
The time allowed owners or operators
to notify the Administrator prior to com-
mencement of a demolition operation is
changed from 20 days to 10 days, and the
time basis' for the notification is clarified
to be the postmark date of the notice.
Experience has shown that 20 days' no-
tice is not necessary to provide sufficient
time for effective enforcement of the
regulation, and the shorter time will be
more convenient to demolition contrac-
tors.
Some questions have arisen concerning
whether all of the friable asbestos ma-
terials on pipes, boilers, or load-support-
ing structural members had to be wet-
ted and stripped off prior to demolition.
The wording in § 61.22(d) (2) (i) of the
promulgated regulation states that the
friable asbestos material has to be re-
moved, but does not specify the proce-
dure- to be used. A statement Is added
to clarify that it Is not necessary for
friable asbestos material to be removed
or stripped from boilers, pipes, or load-
supporting structural members prior to
the removal of these items as units or
In sections, provided that the asbestos
material exposed during removal Is
wetted. As required in { 61.22(d) (2) (111),
such units or sections must subsequently
be carefully lowered or taken to the
ground level.
A paragraph is added to clarify that
the regulation is not violated when un-
comblned water is the sole reason a
source fails to meet the no-visible-emls-
slons requirement. This makes the no-
visible-emissions regulation consistent
with other similar Agency regulations.
The Agency is presently studying the
extent of asbestos emission from dumps
of asbestos tailings and open storage of
asbestos ores, disposal of asbestos waste
material, and asbestos fabricating oper-
ations. Beryllium and mercury emissions
resulting from the incineration of sewage
sludge are also being studied. These in-
vestigations are Hearing completion and
the Agency will determine whether it is
necessary to regulate these sources of
hazardous pollutants to provide an
ample margin of safety to protect the
public health. The revisions to the reg-
ulations promulgated herein merely
clarify the regulations promulgated April
6, 1973, and do not preclude subsequent
revisions to the regulations as indicated
by the studies described above.
The Agency finds that good cause
exists for not proposing these revisions
and for making them effective upon pub-
lication since (1) the revisions make cer-
tain clarifications, but do not change the
substance of the national emission
standards for asbestos, beryllium, and
mercury; and (2) there is a pressing
need to promulgate these revisions so
that the asbestos standard can be uni-
formly Interpreted by industry personnel
and enforced by the Agency. Therefore,
the Administrator has determined that
it is unnecessary to publish a notice of
proposed rulemaking or delay the effec-
tive date of this amendment and for the
reasons cited has not done so.
The amendment of these regulations
is promulgated pursuant to section 112
of the Clean Air Act, as amended (42
U.S.C. 1857c-7), and is effective upon
promulgation.
Dated: April 29,1974.
JOHN QUARLES,
Acting Administrator.
Part 61. Chapter I, Title 40, Code of
Federal Regulations Is amended by re-
vising Subparts A and B as follows:
Subpart A—General Provisions
1. Section 61.02 Is amended by revis-
ing paragraph (c) to read as follows;
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 39, NO. 17—FRIDAY, MAY 3, 1974
IV-3 3
-------
8 61.02
Definition!.
• *
(c) "Alternative method" means any
method of sampling and analyzing for
an air pollutant which Is not a reference
method or an equivalent method but
which has been demonstrated to the
Administrator's satisfaction to produce,
in specific cases, results adequate for
his .determination of compliance.
• • • • *
Subpart B—National Emission Standard
for Asbestos
2. Section 61.21 is amended by adding
paragraphs (g), (h), (1), and (j). The
added paragraphs read as follows:
§61.21 Definitions.
(g) "Asbestos mill" means any facility
engaged In the conversion or any Inter-
mediate step In the conversion of asbestos
ore into commercial asbestos. Outside
storage of asbestos materials is not con-
sidered a part of such facility.
(h) "Commercial asbestos" means any
variety of asbestos which is produced by
extracting asbestos from asbestos ore.
286-3] ;
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL,
PROTECTION AGENCY
•UICHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS
PART 82—APPROVAL AND PROMULGA-
TION OF IMPLEMENTATION PLANS
PART 60—CTANDARDS OF PERFORM-
ANCE FOR NEW STATIONARY SOURCES
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLU-
TANTS
Region V Office: New Address
.. The Region V Office of EPA has been
relocated. The new address is: EPA, Re-
gion V, Federal Building, 230 South Dear-
.bora, Chicago, Illinois 60604. This change
revises Region V's office address appear-
ing In II 62.16, 60.4 and 61.04 of Title 40,
Code of Federal Regulations.
Dated: October 21,1974.
ROGER STRELOW,
Assistant Administrator for
Air and Waste Management.
Parts 62, 60 and 61, Chapter I, Title 40
of the Code of Federal Regulations are
amended as follows:
§§52.16,00.4,61.04 [Amended]
1. The address of the Region V office is
revised to read:
Region V (Illinois, Indiana, Minnesota, Ohio,
WfeconUn) federal Building, 330 South
Dearborn, Chicago, Illinois 6080S.
[FB Doc.74-34919 Filed 10-34-74:8:46 am]
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 39, NO. 906-
-FRIDAY, OCTOIEU 25, -1974
(d) • • •
(1) Written notice of intention to
demolish shall be provided to the Ad-
ministrator by the owner or operator
of the demolition operation. Such notice
shall be postmarked at least 10 days prior
to commencement of such demolition,
or anytime prior to commencement of
demolition subject to paragraph (d) (4)
of this section. Such notice shall Include
the following Information:
(1) Name of owner or operator.
(ii) Address of owner or operator.
(ill) Description of the building,
structure, facility, or installation to be
demolished.
(iv) Address or location of the build-
Ing, structure, facility or installation.
(v) Scheduled starting and comple-
tion dates of demolition.
(vi) Method of demolition to be em-
ployed.
(vii) Procedures to be employed to
meet the requirements of this paragraph.
(2) • • •
FEDERAL REGISTER. VOL 39, NO. 87—FRIDAY, MAY 3, 1974
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authoi "y to State of
Washington
Pursuant to the delegation of authority
for the national emission standards for
IV-3 4
-------
hazardous air pollutants- (NESHAPS) to
the State of Washington on February 28.
7975, EPA ia today amending 40 CFR
61.04 Address. A Notice announcing this
delegation was published on April 1, -1975
(40 PR 14632). The amended {61.04 Is
set forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause for
making this rulemalcing effective imme-
diately as the change is an administra-
tive change and not one of substantive
content. It Imposes no additional sub-
stantive burdens on the parties affected.
This ruleniaking Is effective imme-
diately, and is issued under the authority
of section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended. 42 U.S.C. 18B7c-7.
Dated April 21,1975.
ROOM STBZLOW,
Assistant Administrator for
Air and Waste Management.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations Is amended
as follows:
Subpart A—General Provisions
1. Section 61.04 is revised to read as
follows:
§61.04 Addret*.
(a) All requests, reports, applications,
submlttals, and other communications to
the Administrator pursuant to this part
shall be submitted in duplicate and ad-
dressed to the appropriate Regional Of-
fice of the Environmental Protection
Agency, to the attention of the Director,
Enforcement Division. The regional of-
rices are as follows:
Betflon I (Connecticut, Maine, Mew Hamp-
shire, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Ver-
mont), John F. Kennedy Federal Building,
Bonbon; Massachusetts 02203.
Beglon II (New York, New Jersey, Puerto
Rico, Virgin Island*), Federal Office Build-
ing, 30 Federal Plaza (Foley Square), New
Torn, N.Y. 10007.
Region IH (Delaware, District of Columbia,
?eanr Tirana, Maryland, Virginia, W**t Vir-
ginia), Curtta Building, Sixth and Walnut
St»8*t«, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19108.
Region. IV (Alabama, Florida, Georgia, Ml*-
•Uttopl, Kentucky, North Carolina, South
Carolina, Tennessee), Suite 800, 1421 Peach-
tree Street, Atlanta. Georgia 30300.
Region V (nilnoia, Indiana, Minnesota,
Viohlgan, Ohio, Wisconsin), 1 North Wacker
Drive, Chicago, ttnnols 60600.
Region VI (Arkansas, Louisiana, New
Mexico, Oklahoma, Texas), 1600 Patterson
Street, Dallas, Texas 75201.
Beglon vn (Iowa, Kansas, Missouri, Ne-
braska). 1735 Baltimore Street, Kansas City,
Missouri 63108.
Region VTn (Colorado, Montana, North Da-
kota, South Dakota, Utah, Wyoming), 1M
Lincoln Towers, i860 Lincoln Street, Denver,
Colorado 80203.
Region IX (Arizona, California, Hawaii.
Nevada, Guam, American Samoa), 100 Cali-
fornia Street, Ban Francisco, California 841IL
Region X (Washington, Oregon, Idaho,
Alaska). 1200 Sixth Avenue, Seattle, Wash-
ington 98101.
(b) Section 112 «d) directs the Admin-
istrator to delegate to each State, when
appropriate, the authority to Implement
ytd enforce the national emission stand-
ards for hazardous air pollutants for sta-
tionary sources located in such State.
RULES AND REGULATIONS
4
All information required to be submitted
to EPA under paragraph (a) of this sec-
tion, must also be submitted to the ap-
propriate State Agency of any State to
which this authority has been delegated
(provided, that each specific delegation
may exempt sources from a certain fed-
eral or State reporting requirement). The
appropriate mailing address for those;
States whose delegation request has been
approved is as follows:
(A)-(Z) {reserved ].
(AA)-(W) [reserved].
WW-Washington; State of Washington,
Department of Ecology, Olympla, Washington
98604.
(XX)-(ZZ) [reserved].
(AAA)-(DDD) [reserved],
[PR Doc.75-10798 Filed 4-24-73;8:M ami
FEDIRAL RIOISTM, VOL. 40, NO. 81-
-MtOAY, ANIL 24, 1973
FtDMAl MOItTU, VOL 40, NO. 177-
-THURSOAY, SE'TIMIR 11,
; {FRL 498-5]
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Cali-
fornia on Behalf of Bay Area, Monterey
Bsy Unified, Humboldt County and Del
Norte County Air Pollution Control Dlf
trictc
Pursuant to the delegations of au-
thority for national emission standards
for hazardous air pollutants . (NES
HAPS) to the State of California on
behalf of the Bay Area and Monterey
Bay Unified. Air Pollution Control Dis-
tricts (dated May 23. 1975), and on be-
half of the Humboldt County and Del
Norte County Air Pollution Control Dis-
tricts (dated July 10, 1916), EPA Is to-
day amending ,40 CFR 61.04, Address,
to reflect these delegations. Notices an-
nouncing these delegations are pub-
lished today in the Notices Section of
this issue. The amended {61.04 Is set
forth below. It adds the addresses of the
Bay Area, Monterey Bay Unified, Hum-
boldt County, and Del Norte County
Air Pollution Control Districts, to which
must be addressed all reports, requests
applications, submittals, and communi-
cations pursuant to this part by sources
subject to the NESHAPS located within
these Air Pollution Control Districts.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective imme-
diately In that It is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are Imposed on the parties affected. The
delegations which are reflected by this
administrative amendment were effec-
tive on May 23, 1975 (Bay Area and
Monterey Bay Districts), and on July 10,
1978 (Humboldt County and Del Norte
County Districts), and it serves .00
purpose to delay the technical change
of this addition of the Air Pollution Dis-
trict addresses to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
This rulemalcing Is effective immedi-
ately, and Is issued under the authority
of section 112 of the Clean Ah- Act,' as
amended. 42 UJS.C. 18570-7..
Dated: September 6,1975.
STAWMY W. LECRO,
Assistant Administrator for
Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter 1, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations Is amended
as follows:
1. In 161.04 paragraph (b) Is amended
by revising rabparagraph (F), to read as
follows:
fl 61.04 Address.
• • • • •
(b) • • •
(A)-(B) • • •
(F) Oaltfomik.
Bay ATM Air Pollution 'Control District,
930 «U1» St., San Francisco, CA 94109.
Del Morte County Air Pollution Control
Dtetotot, Courthouse. Orescent City, CA
96681.
• Humboldt County Air Pollution Control
District, 6900 s. Broadway, Eureka, OA 96501.
Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Con-
trol District, 420 Church St. (P.O. Box 487),
Salinas, CA 98901.
IFBDoe.76-34203 Filed «-10-75;8:45 am]
IV-3 5
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Trinity County Air Pollution Control DIs-
trlct, Box AJ, WMnrarvUle. CA 06003.
• • • « «
(FB Doc.75-26272 Piled 0-30-78:8:46 am)
I [FRL 438-4)
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND.
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Cali-
fornia on Behalf of Kern County and
Trinity County Air Pollution Control Drt-
tricts
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of California on behalf of the
Kern County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict and the Trinity County Air Pollu-
tion Control District, dated August 18,
1975. EPA is today amending 40 CPB
61.04, Address, to reflect this delegation.
A Notice announcing this delegation is
published today at 40 FB 45221. The
amended § 61.04 is set forth below. It
adds the addresses of the Kern County
and Trinity County Air Pollution Con-
trol Districts, to which must be addressed
all reports, requests, applications, sub-
mlttals, and communications pursuant
to this part by sources subject to the
NESHAPS located within these Air Pol-
lution Control Districts.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective im-
mediately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
August 18, 1975, and it serves no purpose
to delay the technical change of this ad-
dition of the Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict addresses to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended. 42 U.S.C. 1857C-7.
Dated: September 25, 1975.
STANLEY W. LEGNO,
Assistant Administrator for
Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In § 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparagraph F, to read as
follows:
§61.04 Address.
• * * * •
(b) • • •
(A)-(E) • • •
F—California—
Bay Area Air Pollution Control District,
939 Ellis St.. San Francisco, CA 94109.
Del Norte County Air Pollution Control
District, Courthouse, Crescent City, CA
05531.
Humboldt County Air Pollution Control
District, 5600 S. Broadway, Eureka, CA 95501.
Kern County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 1700 Flower St. (P.O. Box 997), Bakers-
field, CA 93302.
Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Control
District, 420 Church St. (P.O. Box 487), Sa-
linas, CA 93901.
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 40, NO. 191—WEDNESDAY, OCTODER 1, 1975
IV-3 6
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
' Title 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
[PRL 431-2]
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Amendments to Standards for Asbestos '
and Mercury
On October 25, 1974 (39 FR 38064),
pursuant to section 112 of the Clean Air
Act, as amended, the Administrator pro-
posed amendments to national emission
staridards for the hazardous air pollu-
tants asbestos and mercury. The Ad-
ministrator also proposed amendments to
Appendix B, Test Methods, of this part.
Interested persons representing indus-
try, trade associations, environmental
groups, and Federal, State and local gov-
ernments participated in the rulemaking
by sending comments to the Agency.
Commentators submitted 40 letters,
many with multiple comments. The com-
ments have been considered, and the
proposed amendments have been reeval-
uated. Each comment, some of which
were submitted by more than one party,
has been separately addressed in writing
by the Agency. The Freedom of Informa-
tion Center, Room 202 West Tower, 401
M Street, SW, Washington, D.C. has
copies of the comment letters received
and a summary of the issues and Agency
responses available for public inspection.
In addition, copies of the issue summary
and Agency responses may be obtained
upon written request from the EPA Pub-
lic Information Center (PM-215), 401 M
Street, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20480
(specify Public Comment Summary—
Proposed Amendments to National Emis-
sion Standards for Hazardous Air Pol-
lutants—Asbestos and Mercury) • Where
determined by the Administrator to be
appropriate, changes have been made to
the proposed amendments, and the re-
vised version of the amendments to the
national emission standards for asbestos
and mercury is promulgated herein. The
principal changes to the proposed
amendments and the Agency's responses
to the major comments received are sum-
marized below.
Copies of Background Information on
National Emission Standards for Haz-
ardous Air Pollutants—Proposed Amend-
ments to Standards for Asbestos and
Mercury (EPA-450/2-74-009a) which ex-
plains the basis for the proposed amend-
ments are available on request from the
Emission Standards and Engineering Di-
vision, Research Triangle Park, North
Carolina 27711, Attention: Mr. Don R.
Goodwin.
ASBESTOS
CHANGES TO PROPOSED AMENDMENTS
Manufacturing. The Agency received
numerous comments stating that the
proposed amendments should apply only
to asphalt concrete manufacturing plants
that use asbestos. This was the Agency's
intent. Section «1.22(c> has been revised
by the addition of the wording, "that use
commercial asbestos."
Demolition and Renovation. A com-
ment was received during review of the
amendments within the Agency that
ducts can be insulated with amounts of
friable asbestos material similar to those
on boilers, tanks, reactors, turbines, fur-
naces and structural members, and
should be covered by the demolition and
renovation regulations.'Since demolition
and renovation operations can involve
ducts insulated with appreciable quanti-
ties of friable asbestos material, "ducts"
has been added to the list of apparatus
that are covered by the amendments.
The comment was made that the quan-
tity of friable asbestos material proposed
as the minimum amount for establish-
ing renovation operations as major
sources of asbestos subject to the pro-
posed amendments was arbitrary, but
should also apply to demolition opera-
tions. The Agency explained in the pre-
amble to the proposed amendments that
this amount of asbestos is typically con-
tained in a four-unit apartment build-
ing, which is the maximum size for apart-
ment buildings excluded from the demoli-
tion provisions. Therefore, the minimum
quantity of friable asbestos material cov-
ered by the demolition and renovation
provisions is essentially equivalent. The
Agency considered applying regulations
only to demolition operations in which
more than a specifled amount of friable
asbestos material was involved, prior to
promulgation of demolition provisions on
. April 6,1973 (38 FR 8820). This approach
was rejected primarily because it would
complicate enforcement procedures.
However, the Agency realizes that certain
commercial buildings contain smaller
amounts of, friable asbestos material
than the lower size cutoff limit proposed
for renovating operations. On reevalua-
tion, the Agency concluded that the
available information justifies changing
the proposed amendment to allow exemp-
tion of demolition operations involving
less than 80 meters of friable asbestos
pipe insulation and less than 15 square
meters of friable asbestos material used
to insulate or fireproof any duct, boiler,
tank, reactor, turbine, furnace or struc-
tural member. The owner or operator of
a demolition operation desiring this ex-
emption must notify the Administrator,
at least 20 days prior to beginning demo-
lition, of the measured or estimated
amount of friable asbestos material in-
volved in the demolition. This will permit
the exception to be Implemented without
requiring prior inspection of every site
by Agency personnel, which would be an
excessive enforcement burden. This dif-
fers from the reporting requirements of
the renovation provisions of the amend-
ments. The nature of renovation opera-
tions necessitates a greater familiarity on
the part of the operator with the quanti-
ties of friable asbestos materials present
than for demolition operations. For this
reason, the Agency believes that it is not
necessary to require reports from all ren-
ovation operations In order to ensure ef-
fective enforcement of the renovation
provisions that apply to only larger reno-
vation operations.
Several comments were received which
stated that operating machinery could be
damaged by wetting procedures during
certain renovation operations. The wet-
ting during renovation of a heated boiler,
near sensitive electric equipment, and
over operating machinery in an indus-
trial plant were mentioned as specific ex-
amples. One comment also stated that
portable local exhaust ventilation sys-
tems are effective alternatives to wet-
ting. The proposed amendments have
been changed to allow the use of local
exhaust ventilation systems when dam-
age to equipment from wetting is un-
avoidable, provided that the system cap-
tures the asbestos participate material
produced during the removal of friable
asbestos material and discharges no visi-
ble emissions from its exhaust. The Ad-
ministrator will make determinations,
upon request, of whether damage to
equipment from wetting would be un-
avoidable.
Several comments were received which
stated that the proposed frequency for
submitting to the Agency written notices
of intention to perform repetitive reno-
vation work at a single facility was ex-
cessive. One commentator suggested that
definitions for "emergency renovation"
and "routine maintenance renovation"
be included, and that a yearly filing of
intention to renovate should be allowed
for each industrial plant. It is evident
from the comments received that some
plants perform renovation operations,
very frequently, such as twice a week.
The proposed reporting requirements for
such plants would be excessive. The pro-
posed amendment has been changed so
that these requirements are reduced, and
the applicability of the requirement is
more clearly defined by adding more de-
tailed language and definitions for "plan-
ned renovation" and "emergency renova-
tion" operations. Additionally, the ap-
plicability of the amendment has been
clarified by specifying how the quanti-
ties of asbestos involved in "planned
renovation" and "emergency renovation"
are to ,be determined. The basic charac-
teristic that distinguishes the two types
of renovation operations is the degree of
predictability of their occurrence. The
amount of friable asbestos material that
will be removed or stripped within a
given period of time can be predicted
for planned renovation operations, in-
cluding both scheduled and non-sched-
uled, operations, whereas no such predic-
tion can be made for emergency renova-
tion operations. The given period of time
for predicting purposes has been speci-
fied to be between 30 days and one year
for planned renovation operations in-
volving individually non-scheduled op-
erations. A reporting time shorter than
30 days would require the submission
and review of a large number of reports,
and predictions over periods longer than
one year could give inaccurate predic-
tions of friable asbestos material to be
removed. In emergency renovation oper-
ations, the amount of friable asbestos
material that is subject to the amend-
ment is the total amount of such mate-
KDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 40. NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER 14, 1975
IV-3 7
-------
RULES AND REGULATION.
rial that wfll be removed or stripped as a
mult of the individual emergency.
One commentator stated that the pro-
posed amendment covering renovation
could be circumvented by the carrying out
of small portions, which are individually
aot subject to the amendment, of a larger
operation. Section 61.17 has been added
to the General Provisions to explicitly
prevent this potential circumvention and
to apply In general to circumvention of
all standards promulgated under this
part.
One commentator stated that a re-
quirement In | «1.22(d) (3) (71) of the
proposed amendments was inconsistent
and should toe revised. This section re-
quired that friable asbestos material re-
moved from buQdlngB greater than 50
feet In height be transported to the
ground via dust-tight chutes or contain-
ers/The cited inconsistency arises be-
cause this requirement applied at all
heights, including those less than 50 feet,
tor a building 50 feet or gretaer in height,
whereas it did not apply to buildings less
than 60 feet in height. The requirement
has been changed so that it applies only
to materials that have been removed or
•tripped at more than 50 feet above
ground level.
Several minor changes have been made
m response to comments. Language has
been added to allow delivery of notices
of intention to renovate or demolish to
the Administrator by means other than
the VS. mall. There Is a minor clarifying
language change between I 61.22(d) (2)
(i) of the proposed demolition provisions
and the corresponding provision, f 61.22
(d) (4) (i), of the regulations promulgated
hereto. A comment suggested the term
"adequately wetted" should be defined
and differentiated from "thoroughly wet-
ted." since both terms appeared in the
proposed amendments. The use of these
terms has been reevaluated, and a defini-
tion of "adequately wetted" has been
added. The term "thoroughly wetted"
has been ' deleted and the term "ade-
quately wetted" has been used through-
out.
The Agency has made a revision in the
proposed requirement (| 61.22(d) (!) 1 for
notification of intention to perform reno-
vation or demolition operations. An addi-
tional reporting requirement for the
name and location of the waste disposal
site where demolition and renovation
waste will be deposited has been added to
assist in enforcing the waste disposal pro-
visions of the amendments.
Spraying. During review of the amend-
ments within the Agency, a question
arose concerning whether the waste gen-
erated by operations that use spray-on
materials which contain less than one
percent of asbestos by weight to insulate
or fireproof "buildings, structures, pipes
and conduits was covered by the asbestos
waste disposal amendment t|61.22(j)].
The spraying provisions do not apply to
such operations, though reports of the
operations were required by the stand-
ard promulgated on April 6,1873. There-
fore, the waste disposal processes asso-
ciated with these operations are not regu-
lated by the waste disposal amendments.
Based on Agency enforcement experi-
ence since promulgation of the standard
on April 6, 1973, the required reporting
of spraying operations where less than 1
percent asbestos material is used Is felt
to be unnecessary. Accordingly, the
Agency has revised the reporting require-
ments of paragraph 61.22(e) to apply
only to spray-on Insulation and fireproof-
ing material that contains more than one
percent asbestos by weight.
Waste Disposal. The proposed amend-
ments would have applied directly to all
waste disposal sites that accept asbestos
waste from any emission source covered
under the asbestos standard. The Agency
estimated that approximately 2500 dis-
posal sites would be covered. Review of
these proposed amendments within the
Agency indicated that enforcement would
have required a disproportionate com-
mitment of Agency resources. Alterna-
tive means of controlling asbestos emis-
sions from waste disposal sites were
therefore examined.
The number of acceptable waste dis-
posal sites that meet the criteria in { 61.-
23(J>(3) of the proposed amendments,
which are similar to the criteria for san-
itary landfills, has increased significantly
within the past several years and the
trend Is continuing in that direction.
This trend is noted in a recent publica-
tion ("Waste Age," January 1975). This
Indicates that acceptable sites (i.e., pri-
vate and municipal sanitary landfills)
which follow practices that reduce as-
bestos emissions will be available for dis-
posal of asbestos-containing waste.
Therefore, it was determined that an ef-
fective means of reducing emissions from
waste disposal sites without undue en-
forcement burdens would be to require
already-regulated asbestos waste genera-
tors to dispose of asbestos-containing
wastes at properly operated disposal sites.
This is provided for In the amendments
herein promulgated.
The Agency's greatest concern is with
disposal sites which accept large quan-
tities of asbestos waste. In most cases,
companies which generate large quan-
tities of asbestos-containing waste also
own and operate their own disposal sites
because of convenience and economics.
For example, all domestic asbestos mills
operate their own tailings disposal sites.
The Agency anticipates that these large
waste generators will operate their dis-
posal sites In the future in compliance
with the proposed I 61.22(1) In order to
meet the requirement that they dispose
of their waste at a acceptable sites.
Inactive disposal sites may also be ma-
jor emission sources if they contain large
amounts of asbestos waste. It Is likely
that at Inactive sites containing small
amounts of asbestos waste the asbestos is
covered by non-asbestos waste, and the
chance of significant asbestos emissions
is small. It was decided to require that
those Inactive sites which are known to
contain large quantities of asbestos com-
ply with the standards specified in sec-
tion 61.22(1) to reduce asbestos emis-
sions. This category of asbestos waste
disposal sites is usually operated by the
sources that generate the asbestos-con-
taining wastes, as noted above. Accord-
ingly, the amendments promulgated here-
in apply to inactive disposal sites that
have previously been operated by certain
sources covered by the asbestos stand-
ard. The owner of such an Inactivated
site must comply with the amendments
regardless of whether or not he gener-
ated the waste or operated the disposal
site when It was active. This category of
sites includes asbestos mill tailings dis-
posal sites, and the large disposal sites
at asbestos manufacturing and fabricat-
ing plants which have caused concern
>n the past. The owners or operators of
spraying, demolition and renovation op-
erations have not operated disposal sites
in the past and are not expected to do so
in the future. Due to the nature of such
operations, the wastes generated are de-
posited at waste disposal sites which ac-
cept mostly non-asbestos-containing
waste. As a result, the asbestos waste Is
effectively covered, thereby preventing
emissions even In open dumps. For these
reasons, inactive waste disposal sites that
have been used by spraying, renovation
and demolition are not regulated.
The amendments promulgated herein
will control Inactive asbestos waste dis-
posal sites that contain large quantities
of asbestos waste. The Agency's enforce-
ment resources will be more effectively
utilized since approximately 2000 waste
disposal sites will not be directly regu-
lated by the promulgated amendments.
This should facilitate enforcement and
protection of the public health.
The comment was made that the pro-
posed permanent posting of warning
signs at inactive asbestos waste disposal
sites would be overly restrictive. The
warning signs were Intended primarily to
warn the general public of the potential
hazards that could result from creating
dust by such disturbances as walking on
exposed asbestos waste. If the disposal
site is properly covered over as required
by the alternative methods of complying
with the proposed amendment for waste
disposal sites, such minor disturbances
will not generate asbestos emissions. Ac-
cordingly, the proposed amendment has
been changed, and warning signs are not
required If an Inactive disposal site ap-
plies and properly maintains a covering
of compacted non-asbestos-containing
material at least 60 centimeters (ca. 2
feet) in depth, or at least 15 centimeters
(ca. 6 inches) in depth with a cover of
vegetation. The proposed amendment
would have also required that active as-
bestos waste disposal sites post warning
signs. The amendments promulgated
herein do not apply directly to active dis-
posal sites, and the specified operating
practices for acceptable disposal sites do
not require the posting of warning signs
provided an appropriate cover of at least
15 centimeters (ca. 6 inches) of non-as-
bestos-containing material is applied to
the active portion of the site at the end
of each operating day. Comments were
received that suggested the Agency
should allow the use of existing natural
barriers as substitutes for fences that are
Intended to deter access to some types of
asbestos waste disposal sites. The Agen-
FEDERAL REOISTIR, VOL. 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER 14, 1*75
IV-38
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
cy agrees that certain natural barriers,
such as deep ravines and steep clifla, can
be as effective as fences In deterring ac-
cess. The proposed amendment has been
changed to suspend the requirements for
fences, and also warning signs, when a
natural barrier provides an adequate de-
terrent to public access. Upon request
and supply of appropriate Information,
the Administrator will determine wheth-
er a specific type of fence or a natural
barrier adequately deters access to the
general public. In response to another
comment, the proposed amendment for
fencing of asbestos waste disposal sites
has been revised to allow fences to be
placed either along the property line of
an affected source that contains a waste
disposal site or along the perimeter of the
disposal site itself. Either type of fence
provides the necessary deterrent to public
access to the disposal site.
Several comments were received on the
proposed prohibition of incineration of
containers that previously contained
commercial asbestos. One commentator
stated that the prohibition seemed un-
desirable because asbestos is thermally
degraded at a temperature of 600* C. The
Agency considered: (a) the uncertainty
that the feed material to an Incinerator
will be uniformly heated to the combus-
tion chamber temperature, the un-
certainty concerning the decomposition
temperature of asbestos, and (c) the re-
sults of a stack gas test that detected
emissions of asbestos from a sintering
process in which the temperature at-
tained was well above 600* C, in evaluat-
ing the comment. The Agency concluded
that the available data do not justify
changing the proposed regulation on
grounds that the asbestos is thermally
degraded in the combustion process. An-
other comment suggested that incinera-
tion should be permitted, provided there
are no visible emissions of asbestos par-
ticulate matter from the Incinerator. In-
formation presented to the Agency after
proposal Indicated that some sman in-.
cinerators, such as those operated by
asbestos manufacturing plants, can be
operated with no visible emissions. The
proposed prohibition on Incineration of
containers that previously held commer-
cial asbestos has been deleted. The pro-
visions of the amendments for the dis-
posal of asbestos-containing waste mate-
rials apply in particular to the disposal
of containers that previously held com-
mercial asbestos. Therefore, these con-
tainers can be incinerated under the
amendments, provided the Incineration
operation does not discharge visible
emissions.
Two commentators suggested that the
proposed amendments should not require
that EPA warning labels be attached to
containers of asbestos waste in addition
to the warning labels specified In regula-
tions issued by the U.S. Department of
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA). The Agency
agrees that both labels adequately con-
vey the desired information; therefore,
the proposed amendment has been
changed to allow the OSHA warning
label to be used In place of the EPA
warning labeL
Several commentators requested that
the proposed alternative method of com-
pliance Included in the asbestos wast*
disposal amendments, which specified
that the waste be formed Into non-friable
pellets, be changed to accommodate
shapes other than pellets. The precise
sice and shape of the processed, non-
friable waste is not important, and the
amendment has been reworded to ex-
plicitly permit the forming of asbestos
wastes Into pellets or any other shapes.
A comment was made during review
within the Agency that asbestos-contain-
ing wastes subject to the proposed
amendment are sometimes used to sur-
face roadways and that this practice
should be prohibited. The Agency agrees
that the use of asbestos-containing
wastes on roadways can cause asbestos
emissions similar to those caused by the
use of asbestos tailings on roadways,
which is prohibited by the asbestos
standard. Vehicular traffic on roadways
can pulverize asbestos waste and liberate
fibers that can become airborne in the
wake of moving vehicles and by the wind.
The use of asbestos-containing wastes
has therefore been prohibited from use
on roadways.
The proposed amendment for waste
disposal at asbestos mills included a pro-
vision requiring no visible emissions to
the outside air from the deposition of
asbestos ore tailings onto a disposal pile.
An alternative method of compliance
required that the waste be adequately
wetted with a dust suppressant agent
prior to deposition. Two commentators
stated that an exemption from the wet-
ting requirement of the alternative
method Is needed when the temperature
at the disposal site is below freezing, to
prevent freezing of the tailings and per-
mit continued operation of the asbestos
mill at such low temperatures. The inves-
tigation carried out by the Agency prior
to proposal of the amendment indicated
that wetting of asbestos tailings it the
only presently available method for effec-
tively controlling participate emissions
from the deposition operation. In re-
sponse to the comments received, the
Agency further Investigated the cold
weather operational problems of disposal
systems for wetted asbestos tailings. Dis-
cussions were held with operators of three
Canadian asbestos mills that frequently
operate under cold weather conditions
and have Installed tailings wetting sys-
tems, with a firm that Is experienced In
designing systems to suppress dust gen-
erated by materials conveying operations,
and with several non-asbestos mineral
mining facilities that operate wetting
systems for crushing and conveying oper-
ations. The investigation revealed that
several Canadian asbestos mills are pres-
ently experimenting with wet tailings
disposal systems to extend operation to
temperatures substantially below freez-
ing. However, the Agency is aware of no
such system that has operated in a con-
tinuous manner at temperatures below
-9.5'C U5°P). Accordingly, the Agency
has-concluded that wet tailings disposal
systems for asbestos mills are not avail-
able for disposal site temperatures below
—8.5 °C (1S°P), and the proposed amend-
ment has been changed to provide an
exemption for wetting of tailings below
this temperature. Only one existing do-
mestic asbestos mill is expected to use
the exemption to a slgnlfloant extent.
An examination of hourly temperatures
representative of the location of that
plan, and extending over a period of one
year, showed that hourly temperatures
are below 1ST for approximately 7 per-
cent of the time.
Asbestos emissions at asbestos mill
tailings disposal piles are contributed by
the tailing conveying operation, the
deposition operation, and wind entraln-
ment of asbestos-containing partlculate
from the surface of the disposal pile. The
first emission source is subject to pre-
viously promulgated regulations (38 PR
8820), and the latter two sources are sub-
ject to the amendments promulgated
herein. The major sources of asbestos
emissions from process gas streams at
asbestos mills, namely effluents from
crushers, dryers and milling equipment,
are also covered by the previously prom-
ulgated regulations (38 PR 8820). The
amendments promulgated herein, In-
cluding an exemption from wetting of
asbestos tailings at temperatures below
-9.5* C (15* P), together with the stand-
ards promulgated on April 6,1973 (38 PR
8820), represent use of the best available
technology for control of emissions from
asbestos mills. This is consistent with the
determination of the Administrator that
best available technology should be used
to control major sources of asbestos
emissions to protect the public health
with an ample margin of safety.
The reporting format of Appendix A
has been changed by the addition of
paragraphs "C" and "D", to accommo-
date the addition of disposal of asbestos-
containing wastes and certain Inactive
asbestos waste disposal sites to the
amendments. The additional Informa-
tion required is essential for determining
compliance with the regulations. Ap-
pendix A has also been revised Into anew
computer format which will promote
more effective enforcement of the regula-
tions. Section 61.24 has been revised to
reflect the additional reporting Informa-
tion requested in Appendix A.
ADDITIONAL COMMENTS
Manufacturing and Fabrication. One
comment questioned the need for In-
cluding asphalt concrete manufacturing
plants in the proposed amendments. The
rationale for including asphalt concrete
plants as major sources of asbestos is
discussed in the background Informa-
tion document for the proposed amend-
ments (EPA-460/2-74-009a>. Two com-
mentators suggested that the manufac-
ture of asphalt concrete containing less
than 3 to 5 percent asbestos In the total
mixture should be exempt from the regu-
lations. However, asbestos asphalt con-
crete typically contains 1 to 2 percent
asbestos, and-the Agency determined
that asbestos asphalt concrete operations
using even these low percentages of
asbestos are major sources. No data or
Information were received that would
indicate asphalt concrete plants are not
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER 14, 1975
IV-3 9
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
major sources, and the regulations pro-
mulgated herein apply to such sources.
The Agency received two comments that
the individual emission sources within
an asbestos asphalt •concrete plant which
are subject to the proposed amendments
should be specified. The Agency feels that
revisions are not necessary. Only com-
ponent operations that may emit asbes-
tos are covered by the provisions; for
example, if no asbestos is added to the
aggregate dryer, the emissions from the
dryer alone are not covered.
The possibility that the enforcement
of the amendments promulgated herein
for asphalt concrete plants may be in
conflict with the enforcement of new
source performance standards for as-
phalt concrete plants was raised by one
commentator. It is possible that both the
new source performance standard and
the national emission standard for asbes-
tos will apply simultaneously to emissions
from some operations at some new and
modified plants. Where this occurs, the
visible emission standard promulgated
herein applies to asbestos participate
matter, even though it is more restric-
tive than the opacity regulation of the
new source performance- standard. A
more stringent standard is justified when
asbestos is being processed because of
the hazardous nature of asbestos.
Comments were received that the pro-
posed definition of "fabricating" needed
to be clarified. The Agency reviewed the
definition and determined that changes
In the definition are not necessary. Fabri-
cating includes any type of processing,
excluding field fabrication, performed on
manufactured products that contain
commercial asbestos. The Agency ac-
knowledges that some component proc-
esses of asbestos fabricating operations
could generate visible emissions in such
a manner that the visible emissions do
not contain asbestos generated by the
process, though the commentators did
not cite any specific examples. The Agen-
cy has observed this type of process In
asbestos manufacturing operations. For
example, visible emissions of organic
materials are sometimes generated dur-
ing the curing of asbestos friction prod-
ucts in operations where asbestos is
bound into a matrix of non-asbestos
material but the asbestos Is not trans-
ferred into the emission stream. Such
operations are in compliance with the
standard of no visible emissions contain-
ing participate asbestos material.
One commentator stated that some
field fabrication operations release
significant amounts of asbestos. The
Agency's Investigation prior to proposal
of the amendments showed that there is
only limited field fabrication of asbestos
products other than insulating products.
The fabrication of friable asbestos in-
sulation was determined to be the only
major asbestos field fabrication source,
and this is regulated by prohibiting the
use of such materials after the effective
date of the amendments promulgated
herein. In the judgment of the Adminis-
trator, the comment did not contain suf-
ficient information to justify Including
other categories of asbestos field fabrica-
tion in the amendments. One commenta-
tor recommended that the Agency im-
pose a standard of 0.03 grain per cubic
foot for asbestos emissions in addition to
the no-visible-emission standard. It is
the judgment of the Agency that there
are no sufficiently reliable emislon meas-
urement techniques to provide a basis for
such a numerical standard and the set-
ting of numerical standards should be
delayed until accurate asbestos measur-
ing techniques are available.
Demolition and Renovation. Comments
were received which suggested that the
proposed renovation provisions should
not apply to operations carried out with-
in buildings, or to operations regulated
by the Occupational Safety and Health
Administartion (OSHA) -for worker ex-
posure to asbestos. The Agency recognizes
that there may be less asbestos emis-
sions from stripping of friable asbestos
materials within a structure than from
stripping in an unenclosed area. However,
asbestos from the stripping operation
carried out within a building or structure
can be discharged into the outside air
from building ventilation systems, win-
dows and doors. Further, the disposal of
friable asbestos waste materials gener-
ated by renovation operations, which in-
cludes the transport of waste materials
to a disposal site, is an emission source
that needs to be controlled regardless of
whether the renovation Is performed in
the outside air or in buildings. In the
judgment of the Administrator, the con-
trol of such asbestos emissions is neces-
sary and is part of the best available con-
trol technology. The OSHA regulations
(29 CFR 1910.93a) require that, ". . . in-
sofar as practicable . . .," asbestos mate-
rial be removed while wetted effectively
to prevent emission of asbestos in excess
of the specified OSHA exposure limit, but
also specifically require that employees
shall be provided with respiratory equip-
ment for all spraying, demolition and re-
moval of asbestos materials. The purpose
of the OSHA standard, to protect em-
ployees' health, can be achieved by the
use of respiratory equipment, even in
those situations where wetting is not im-
plemented and emissions may produce
concentrations in excess of the OSHA ex-
posure limit. The extent to which the re-
sulting concentrations in the outside air
are protective of public health is un-
known. Accordingly, the proposed reno-
vating provisions do not exempt opera-
tions that are controlled by OSHA regu-
lations.
Two commentators stated that the al-
ternative to the we'tting requirement In
the demolition provisions at sub-freezing
temperatures should be allowed at all
temperatures. In contrast, another com-
mentator suggested that suspension of
the wetting requirements at sub-freez-
ing temperatures should be subject to a
permit procedure that would discourage
demolition at sub-freezing temperatures.
The alternative was proposed because, In
the Judgment of the Agency, worker
safety would be unduly jeopardized by
the unsafe footing caused by ice forma-
tion from water use under freezing con-
ditions. The proposed alternative is less
restrictive on demolition contractors
than a second course of action that was
considered, namely the prohibition of
demolition under freezing conditions. The
proposed alternative suspends only a
portion of the wetting requirements
under freezing conditions. Pipes, ducts,
boilers, tanks, reactors, turbines, fur-
naces and structural members Insulated
or flreproofed with friable asbestos ma-
terials must be removed from-the build-
ing in sections, to the maximum extent
practicable, before wrecking of the build-
ing. The stripping of asbestos materials
from the previously removed sections
must be accompanied by wetting at all
temperatures, and the resulting asbestos
waste materials must be wetted at all
temperatures. These procedures do not
jeopardize worker safety. Therefore, the
promulgated demolition provisions are
based on the use of the best available
emission control methods at all tempera-
tures, and these methods are different for
non-freezing and freezing conditions.
Another comment indicated that
sprayed fireprooflng was the only type
of asbestos material that could cause as-
bestos emissions to the atmosphere dur-
ing demolition operations, and that
molded insulation is not readily released
into the air. The Agency has inspected
both types of materials and has found
that some types of molded insulation
and plaster that contain asbestos are
friable. Therefore, buildings containing
these materials are covered by the
amendments promulgated herein.
Comments were received that the
Agency has a responsibility to develop
asbestos measurement methods and de-
termine by use of measurement methods
whether demolition is a major source of
asbestos emissions. The Agency keeps
abreast of newly developed measurement
techniques in the asbestos industry, and
the development of asbestos measure-
ment techniques isturrently being fund-
ed by the Agency. No new information on
measurement techniques was received in
the comments. The Agency previously
made the determination that building
demolition is a major source of asbestos
emissions, and no new information has
been submitted to demonstrate that it is
not a major source. Demolition and ren-
ovation operations generate short-term
exposures of urban populations to asbes-
tos. Since promulgation of the demoli-
tion regulations on April 6, 1973, new
biological evidence supporting the signif-
icance of single short-term exposures of
asbestos has been obtained One-day in-
halation exposures in animal experiments
have produced an Increase In the in-
cidence of mesothelioma. (Wagner, J. C.,
Berry, G., and Timbrell, V., "The Effects
of the Inhalation of Asbestos In Rats",
Br. J. Cancer 29, pp. 252-269, 1974). A
copy of this article is available for Inspec-
tion at the Public Information Reference
Center, Room 2404, Waterside Mall, 401
M Street, SW, Washington, D.C. 20460. It
can be concluded that human asbestos
exposure f6r periods typically required to
perform demolition and renovation oper-
ations is hazardous. Therefore, the
Agency has not changed its prior deter-
mination that building demolition is a
major source of asbestos emissions. An-
other commentator was concerned that
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER 14, 1975
IV-40
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
the demolition sources now covered by
the asbestos standard as major sources
were not defined as major sources by the
National Academy of Sciences (NA8)
study, which was cited by the Agency M
a basis for the demolition regulation.
The NAS study did not define categories
of asbestos materials other than sprayed
flreproofing as major emission sources
because data were available at that time
on flreprooflng only. The Agency had
concluded prior to proposing asbestos
standards on December 7, 1971 that any
friable asbestos material used for insu-
lation or fireprooflng has a comparable
potential to create asbestos emissions
upon demolition or renovation as sprayed
fireprooflng, and therefore these mate-
rials are also covered by the regulations.
Several comments were received stat-
ing that the definitions of "friable as-
bestos material," "asbestos," and "as-
bestos material" are vague and subjective
and remain constitutionally deficient for
a regulation enforceable by criminal pro-
ceedings. The Agency reevaluated the
definitions and concluded that they are
sufficiently clear that the owners or op-
erators subject to the amendments can
reasonably be expected to understand
these terms. Owners or operators should
be able to identify covered material and
comply with the regulations on the basis
of the definitions supplied.
Comments were made suggesting the
Agency describe more specifically a prop-
er wetting operation. The purpose of the
wetting requirements is to reduce the
amount of asbestos dust generated dur-
ing demolition operations. Many differ-
ent procedures would accomplish this;
therefore, the Agency believes that spec-
ifying such procedures is neither nec-
essary nor appropriate. A new definition
of "adequately wetted" was added to the
regulations promulgated herein. The
Agency believes that owners or operators
of demolition operations are familiar
with proper wetting procedures.
Two comments were made stating that
the proposed demolition and renovation
amendments are not emission standards
and that asbestos emissions must be
proved in determining compliance with
the regulations. Congress has specified
that EPA should set emission standards
for hazardous air pollutants. EPA,
charged with implementing this require-
ment, has determined that the term
"emission standard" includes work prac-
tice requirements designed to limit emis-
sions. The position taken by the Admin-
istrator on this issue in the promulga-
tion of the original regulations on
asbestos on AprU 6, 1973 (38 FR 8820)
is unchanged here. The demolition and
renovation regulations require certain
work procedures to be followed. These
methods of control are required because
of the impossibility at this time of pre-
scribing and enforcing allowable numeri-
cal concentrations or mass emission
limitations. One difficulty in prescribing
a numerical emission standard is the rel-
ative inaccuracy of asbestos analytical
methods. Dr. Arnold Brown, testifying in
a recent court case Involving asbestos
emissions [United Slates et alv. Reserve
Mining Co. et al, 498 F.2d 1073,1079, (8th
Clr., 1974) ] stated, "It Is reasonable to
assume an error In the count of fibers
In both water and air of at least nine
times op the high side to one-ninth on
the low side." Further testifying on the
same subject, Dr. Brown stated, "... I
do not recall having been exposed to a
procedure with an error this large, and
which people have seriously proposed a
number based on this very poor proce-
dure." Moreover, there is no place to
measure the total emissions from a
demolition or renovation operation. The
Agency has determined that violations of
the work practices specified in the
demolition section will result in emissions
of asbestos. Considering ttKse facts, the
prescription of work practices is not only
a legally permissible form of an emission
standard, but also the only practical and
reasonable form.
Waste Disposal. A number of com-
mentators questioned the relationship
between the proposed . no-visible-emis-
sions requirements in the proposed
asbestos waste disposal provisions and
the alternative methods for complying
with the requirement. The following
points were included in the comments:
1. Can any of a variety of waste dis-
posal methods be used to meet the no-
visible-emissions limit?
2. Various other methods of disposal
should be specified as alternatives.
3. The inclusion of a no-visible-emis-
sions requirement in portions of the
alternative methods of compliance is a
paradox.
4. Various alternatives are either not
feasible or are unnecessary for some
specific waste disposal operations.
As stated in g§ 61.22 (j) and (k) of the
proposed and promulgated amendments,
a requirement for affected sources that
dispose of asbestos waste is no visible
emissions during waste disposal opera-
tions. This provides affected sources flex-
ibility in developing and using those dis-
posal techniques most suitable to individ-
ual needs. The Agency recognizes that
the best available disposal methods for
some of the sources may not be capable
of preventing visible emissions during a
minor portion of some of the disposal
operations. Therefore, alternative meth-
ods of compliance that represent the best
available disposal methods have been In-
cluded in the regulations. Sources are not
required to use these methods; they may
use other methods that achieve no visible
emissions. However, sources may elect to
use one of the specified alternatives.
Some of these alternatives result in no
visible emissions; others may not. For
those alternative methods that may not
be capable of preventing visible emissions
during all portions of the waste disposal
process, a requirement has nevertheless
been Included that there be no visible
emissions from those portions of the
process that can achieve this perform-
ance level. The listing of a particular
method of waste disposal as an alterna-
tive method of compliance does not Im-
ply that the method is universally ap-
plicable or that the use of the method
is necessary to achieve no visible emis-
sions.
Some comments questioned whether
the proposed amendments would apply
to asbestos waste disposal sites that were
Inactivated prior to the publication of
the proposed amendments. Regulations
established under section 112 of the Act
are applicable to both existing sources
and new sources. The amendments cover
previously inactivated sites as well as
sites that become Inactive in the future.
However, the proposed amendments have
been revised as discussed in "Changes to
the Proposed Amendments" so that only
owners of sites which have been oper-
ated by asbestos mills, manufacturing
plants, and fabricating plants subject to
the asbestos standard must comply with
the asbestos amendments proposed here-
in for inactive asbestos waste disposal
sites.
Several commentators suggested that
certain types of asbestos waste disposal
sites should be excluded from the pro-
posed amendments, depending upon the
the rate at which asbestos waste is de-
posited at the site, the percentage of
the total waste that is asbestos, the fria-
bility of the asbestos waste, and the ex-
tent to which the site is in active opera-
tion. These comments were considered,
but no changes in the proposed amend-
ments were made as a result of the
Agency's revaluation. It would be ex-
tremely difficult to enforce regulations
that depend on the rate or asbestos con-
tent of waste deposition. Further, the
provisions promulgated herein shift the
focus of the waste disposal requirements
away from the site operator to the gen-
erator of the waste. Because of this, the
burden of the requirements on a waste
disposal site operator who accepts only
a very small quantity of asbestos waste,
and who the commentators desire to
exclude from the regulations, is largely
removed.
A comment was made that the pro-
posed amendments could cause consid-
erable hardship to small users of asbestos
because some waste disposal sites may
no longer accept, asbestos wastes. There
are an estimated 5,000 waste disposal
sites in the U.S. which meet the stand-
ards of a sanitary landfill. A properly
operated sanitary landfill complies with
the soil-covering requirements of the
amendments, and therefore will be af-
fected only slightly by handling asbestos
wastes. Accordingly, the Agency believes
that small manufacturers and users of
asbestos will not encounter severe prob-
lems in complying with the amendments
for waste disposal sites.
Two commentators were concerned
that the proposed waste disposal provi-
sions would cause serious problems in
contract hauling arrangements; and in
the use of private landfills, municipal
landfills, and waste disposal sites leased
by generators of the asbestos waste.
Since the generator of the waste has
the direct responsibility for compliance
during the transport of waste and for
disposing of the waste at a properly oper-
ated disposal site, the Agency believes
that problems in contract hauling arr
rangements can be avoided If the gener-
ator Institutes proper waste handling
practices. The Agency also believes that
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY. OCTOBER 14, 1975
IV-41
-------
RITLK AND IBGULATIONS
the deletion la the promulgated amend-
ments of BOOM of the proposed require-
ments for posting of warning signs wffl
remove many of the potential problems
that were of concern. Further changes
to the proposed amendments wen judged
unnecessary because they Impose few
additional requirements on disposal
sites, such as municipal sanitary landfill
sites, that are properly operated.
A comment suggested that bags which
previously .held commercial asbestos
should be exempt if the bags have been
cleaned sufficiently so that shaking the
bags will not generate visible emissions
of .asbestos partlculate matter. Even if
such wastes do not produce visible emis-
sions during the subsequent processing,
transporting and depositing operations
at a waste disposal site, there is a need
for ensuring proper ultimate waste dis-
posal because such bags still are likely to
contain residual asbestos. The Agency
believes that regulations are needed for
this purpose and 'also for the purpose of
ensuring that emissions from the cited
method of cleaning bags are properly
controlled. Accordingly, the disposal of
bags that have been cleaned in the man-
ner described has not been exempted
from the amendments promulgated
herein.
Comments were received which stated
that the proposed waste disposal provi-
sions would probably preclude the dis-
posal of waste asbestos cement pipe In
commercial landfills. It Is the Agency's
judgment that commercial landfills
which comply with the regulations will
be available. Further, the pipe crushing
operation that is conventionally carried
out during compaction at the disposal
site can alternatively be performed and
controlled by gas cleaning equipment at
a stationary crusher.
CHANGES TO PROPOSED AMENDMENTS
The proposed definition of "sludge
dryer" has been revised to Indicate more
clearly that only sludge drying opera-
tions that are directly heated by com-
bustion gases are covered by the amend-
ment. The amendment does not apply to
devices that are indirectly heated, such
as secondary mercury recovery furnaces.
'A comment suggested that dally sludge
sampling and analysis should be required
to reveal potential variations In mercury
content of the sludge. The daily averages
of sludge mercury content are not ex-
pected to vary significantly, and the
Agency believes that the added cost to
the owners or operators of such sources
for dally sampling and analysis of sludge
is not justified. Variations In mercury
concentration of sludge can occur over
longer periods of time, however, and a
requirement has been added that all fa-
cilities for which emissions are in excess
of 1600 grams per day as determined by
the initial compliance test must monitor
on a yearly basis with the sludge sam-
pling method. In addition, the Agency
has authority to request sludge sampling
and analysis, or stack sampling, and will
exercise this authority whenever there
are indications that a change In mer-
cury concentration of the stodge has
occurred that would significantly in-
crease mercury emissions.
One commentator suggested several
revisions to procedures in the proposed
sludge testing method, Method 105. The
procedures were reevaluated, and the
method has been changed where appro-
priate. The proposed section 8.1.3 of
Method 105 specified a 10 percent solu-
tion of stannous chloride as an alterna-
tive to stannous sulfate. One comment
stated tiiat it was inappropriate to re-
quire any solution percentage. The
Agency agrees, and the requirement has
been deleted. Another comment sug-
gested that tiie required use of mercuric
chloride of Bureau of Standards purity
to prepare the mercury stock solution Is
not necessary because ttie precision of
the method does not demand such purity.
The Agency agrees with this comment,
and the method has been changed to
permit the use of reagent grade mercuric
chloride. The comment was made that
mercuric solutions should not be pre-
pared in plastic containers. The Agency
is in general agreement with this and
a statement to this effect has been added
to Method 105. Section 4.1.1 of the
method specifies that the, ". . . sam-
pling devices, glassware and reagents
should be ascertained free of significant
amounts of mercury." A major source of
mercury contamination occurs when
sample solutions and reagents come into
contact with mercury-contaminated con-
tainers. A comment Indicated that a spe-
cific quantity should be stated to indicate
how much mercury is considered "sig-
nificant." The Agency believes that the
specification of an amount of mercury
contamination is Inappropriate because
such an amount would be very difficult to
measure. The mercury contamination of
containers can be reduced to an insig-
nificant amount by properly cleaning
such containers before use. The proposed
paragraph has therefore been changed
to specify that sample containers shall
be properly cleaned before use by tins-
Ing with nitric add, followed by rinsing
with distilled water. Another comment
suggested that the possible Interferences
with the analyst; of mercury in sludge
should be delineated and that preventa-
ttve measures should be given. In re-
sponse, two references in which such In-
terferences are discussed have been
added to Method 105.
ADDITIONAL COMMENTS
The Agency has determined that an
ambient air mercury concentration of 1
mlcrogram per cubic meter averaged
over a 30-day period will protect the
public health with an ample margin of
safety. The maximum allowable mer-
cury emission for sludge Incineration and
drying plants was calculated, by use of
meteorological modeling techniques us-
ing restrictive dispersion conditions, that
would not result In this ambient concen-
tration being exceeded. The resulting
maximum allowable emission is 3200
grams of mercury per day. Numerous
comments were received that questioned
the methodology used to calculate this
emission limitation. Several comments
questioned the derivation of the ambient
concentration of 1 mlcrogram per cubic
meter, 80-day average, and indicated
that this level should be lower. The
Agency evaluated these comments, but
determined that no new information had
been presented that had not been pre-
viously considered in the derivation of
this allowable concentration. Another
commentator stated that tide restrictive
meteorological conditions used for sew-
age sludge Incineration and drying plants
do not represent the "worst case" mete-
orological conditions, and discussed a
specific existing facility as an example.
The Agency analyzed this comment con-
sidering the meterologlcal conditions and
topography at the specific site mentioned
in the comment and concluded that, even
with a mercury emission of 3200 grains
per day, the public will be protected with
an ample margin of safety mt the cited
facility. A copy of the Agency response
to this comment is available for inspec-
tion at the Public Information Reference
Center, Room 2404 Waterside Mall, 401
M St., Wash., D.C. 20460. The Agency
knows of no sludge Incineration or drying
facility where the ambient guideline level
of one mlcrogram of mercury per cubic
meter, 30-day average, will be exceeded.
The following comments stating that the
proposed emission limit is too stringent
or that additional studies are needed
before promulgation were received:
1. The proposed emission limit pro-
vides an excessive safety factor for some
plant locations. ~
2. The proposed emission limit should
be based on plant size, allowing larger
emissions for larger plants.
3. The Intent of the proposed amend-
ment seems to be to limit the size of new
plants and require disposal of sludge
by alternative methods.
4. The regulation seems to be exces-
sively stringent In order to simplify the
administration of the standard for mul-
tiple sources.
fi. There is not enough information to
justify promulgating the amendment at
this time; the promulgation should be
delayed until further studies are made.
In contrast, several comments sug-
gested that the proposed emission limit
was too lenient. Since the emission limi-
tation 1* related to an ambient concen-
tration, it would be inappropriate to
allow higher emissions for larger plants.
Concerning plant location, It would be
impractical to specify a different emis-
sion limitation for each present or future
plant location which reflected local
meteorological conditions. Moreover, sec-
tion 112 of the Act provides for a na-
tional standard, and the Administrator
has set this standard at a level which
will prevent exceeding the specified safe
ambient level at all locations. The
Agency determined that there is suffi-
cient information to justify promulgat-
ing emission regulations for sludge in-
cinerators and no data or information
were presented that would justify chang-
ing the mercury emission limit of 3200
grams per day.
A comment was made that the Impact
of multiple sources of mercury emis-
sions was not addressed In the derivation
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 40, NO. .199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER 14, 1973
IV-42
-------
of the national crnlr.slon r.l.nndard for
mercury. While tlic ntandurd does not
Include sjitcifil provisions for multiple
sources, It docs provide a largo wifcty
factor at many filter, and thin provides a
mtw.urc of protection ngalnst the mul-
tiple r;ourcc problem. The Agency knows
of no location where existing multiple
sources of mercury will cnusc the am-
bient guideline level of one mlcrogram
of mercury per cubic meter, 30-day aver-'
age, to be exceeded. The Agency must
approve all new construction or modifi-
cation of sources regulated by the
mercury standard. During the review of
such construction or modification, the
Agency will assess the impact that the
new or modified sources have on the
ambient mercury concentration. If the
Agency discovers a situation where a
source can cause the guideline ambient
concentration to be exceeded, the na-
tional emission standard will be reevalu-
ated. In addition, local planning agencies
have the capability to prevent multiple
source pollution problems through
proper land use planning. The Agency
urges these local agencies to consider
the impact of multiple sources on such
problems as mercury air pollution when
making planning decisions.
Comments were received that ques-
tioned whether all sludge Incineration
and drying plants are major sources of
mercury emissions that must demon-
strate compliance with the standard. All
of these facilities have the potential to
emit mercury; the amount of mercury
that is emitted depends upon the
mercury content of the sludge and the
sludge incineration or drying rate. Ac-
cordingly, all such facilities must dem-
onstrate compliance with the* emission
limitation promulgated herein.
A comment was received that the
economic Impact of the proposed amend-
ments on some large facilities may be
large, since there may be few or no alter-
natives for sludge disposal. The Agency
estimates that the largest mercury emis-
sion from an existing sludge Incinerator
or dryer Is approximately 500 grams per
day, which Is approximately one-sixth of
the maximum allowable emission. The
time period over which sludge genera-
tion would Increase in excess of, six-fold
should provide sufficient lead time for
planning an economically feasible alter-
nate disposal method, If it Is required.
The Agency therefore does not foresee a
significant economic impact for the near
future at any sludge incineration or
drying plant.
Several comments stated that other
sources such as ore processing plants,
mercury compound manufacturing
plants. Industrial waste Incinerators,
coal-flred power plants, and rooms
painted with mercury-containing paints
should be investigated and regulated If
necessary. The Agency previously inves-
tigated mercury emissions from nonfer-
rous smelting plants, secondary mercury
production plants, coal-fired power
plants, and solid waste incineration
plants, and determined that these
sources do not emit mercury in such
quantities that they are likely to cause
the ambient mercury concentration to
RULES AND REGULATIONS
exceed one mlcronram per cubic meter.
Tlio ARcncy has rcKiilatod all sources
that rrtfiy rcif.onably bo expected to
cause nn ambient mercury concentra-
tion of as much as one mlcroRrnm per
cubic meter, 30-day average. However,
the Agency will continue a policy of In-
vestigating any source of mercury that
It has reason to believe has the potential
to endanger the public health.
Another comment stated that the
Agency should give specific succcstions,
or references should be provided, for dis-
posing of mercury-containing sludccs on
land in a manner that would protect
water resources. The Agency's Office of
Water and Hazardous Materials is pre-
paring technical publications on various
alternatives for the disposal of sludges,
and such materials should be available
in the near future.
Several comments were made on the
mercury collection efficiency of water
scrubbers. One commentator suggested
that the mercury collection efficiency of
individual water scrubbers should be as-
sumed to be zero for purposes of deter-
mining compliance, until positively
proven otherwise. Another commentator
stated that the proposed sludge sampling
method should take into account the
amount of mercury that would be col-
lected by a scrubber. The Agency has de-
termined that the requirements of the
standard are adequate. No credit for
mercury removed by water scrubbers is
allowed when compliance is .determined
by sludge sampling and analysis; how-
ever, if the mercury stack .measurement
method is used to determine compliance,
only the amount of mercury' emitted to
the outside air is measured and any mer-
cury collection by the system is taken
into account. The Agency has determined
that sludge sampling and analysis can
be used as an alternative method to de-
termine maximum mercury emissions,
because it Is sufficiently accurate. The
method is also inexpensive when com-
pared to a complete stack test.
The following comments were received
which suggested changes to Method 105
for sludge sampling:
1.' A 5 percent potassium permanganate
solution Is difficult to prepare, and a
saturated solution should be required.
2. Potassium permanganate should be
used to stabilize, mercury solutions.
3. Hydroxylarrdne hydrochlorlde can
be used in place of the uncommon salt
sodium chloride-hydroxylamine sulfate
to reduce excess potassium permanga-
nate.
Solutions of 5 percent potassium per-
manganate can be prepared at room
temperature. The Agency has no experi-
ence in using potassium, permanganate
to stabilize mercury solutions, and has
not used hydroxylamlne hydrochlorlde
to reduce excess potassium permanga-
nate. The method has proved to be sat-
isfactory without the use of the suggested
reagents. The Agency believes that the
suggested changes are not necessary and
the method has not been revised to ac-
commodate these suggestions.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND ENERGY IMPACT
Environmental impact statements
must accompany national emission
standards for hazardous all
approved for proposal after October 14,
1974. Tlic amendment.'! recommended for
promulgation were approved for proposal
prior to this date, and an environmental
impact statement has not been prepared.
The environmental Impact of the Htand-
ards has been assessed, however, and it
discussed in the background informa-
tion document
-------
RWCS AND IEGOIATIONS
2. The authority citation at tbe end
of tbe table of section* for Part 41 is
revised to read as follows:
AOTHOBIXT: Saw. 113 and 114 of ttM Clean
Air Act. M amended by MC. 4.
(t), (u). (v), and (w). The revised and
added paragraphs read as follows:
§61.21 Definition*.
• • • • •
(j) "Demolition" means the wrecking
or taking' out of any load-supporting
structural member and any related re-
moving or stripping of friable asbestos
materials.
(k) "Friable asbestos material" means
any material that contains more than 1
percent asbestos by weight and that can
be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to
powder, when dry, by hand pressure.
(1) "Control device asbestos waste"
means any asbestos-containing waste
material that Is collected In a pollution
control device.
(m) "Renovation" means the remov-
ing or stripping of friable asbestos mate-
rial used to Insulate or fireproof any
pipe, duct, boiler, tank, reactor, turbine,
fuiTiace, or structural member. Opera-
MODS in which toad-supporting struc-
tural members are wrecked or taken out
are excluded.
, (f), and (g) and
adding paragraphs (h), (1), (j), (k), and
(1). The revised and added paragraphs
read as follows:
§ 61.22 Emission •tnndard.
• • • • •
(b) Roadways: The surfacing of road-
ways with asbestos tailings or with as*
bestos-contalnlng waste that Is gener-
ated by any source subject to paragraphs
(c), (d), (e) or (h; of this section is
prohibited, except for temporary road-
ways on an area of asbestos ore deposit*.
The deposition of asbestos tailings or as-
bestos-containing waste on roadways
covered with snow or toe is considered
"surfacing."
(c) Manufacturing: There shall be no
visible emissions to the outside air, ex-
cept as provided in paragraph (f) of this
section, from any of the following op-
erations if they use commercial asbestos
or from any building or structure in
which such operations are conducted.
• • • • •
(10) The manufacture of shotgun
shells.
(11) The manufacture of asphalt con-
crete.
(d) Demolition and renovation: The
requirements of this paragraph shall
apply to any owner or operator of a
demolition or renovation operation who
intends to demolish any institutional.
commercial, or industrial building (in-
cluding apartment buildings having more
than four dwelling units), structure.
facility, installation, or portion thereof
which contains any pipe, duct, boiler,
tank, reactor, turbine, furnace,, or struc-
tural member that Is insulated or fire-
proofed with friable asbestos material,
except as provided In paragraph (d) (1)
of this section; or who intends to reno-
vate any institutional, commercial, or In-
dustrial building, structure, facility, in-
stallation, or portion thereof where more
than 80 meters (ca. 260 feet) of pipe in-
sulated or flreproofed with friable as-
bestos material are stripped or removed,
or more than IS square meters (ca. 160
square feet) of friable asbestos material
used to Insulate or fireproof any duct,
boiler, tank, reactor, turbine, furnace, or
structural member are stripped or re-
moved,
(l)(i) The owner or operator of a
demolition operation is exempted from
the requirements of this paragraph pro-
vided, (1) the amount of friable asbestos
material In the building or portion
thereof to be demolished is less than 80
meters (ca. 260 feet) used to Insulate
pipes, and less than IS square meters (ca.
160 square feet) used to insulate or fire-
proof any duct, boiler, tank, reactor, tur-
bine, furnace, or structural member, and
(2) the notification requirements of par-
agraph (dHlHli) are met
(11) Written notification shall be post-
marked or delivered to the Administrator
at least 20 days prior to commencement
of demolition and shall Include the In-
formation required by paragraph (d) (2)
of this section, with the exception of the
Information required by paragraphs (d)
(2) (111), (vl).
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
lition, or as early as possible prior to
commencement of emergency demolition
subject to paragraph (d) (6) of this sec-
tion, and as early as possible prior to
commencement of renovation. Such no-
tice shall Include the following Informa-
tion:
(1) Name of owner or operator. -
(11) Address of owner or operator.
(ill) Description of the building, struc-
ture, facility, or installation to be de-
molished or renovated. Including the
size, age. and prior use of the structure.
and the approximate amount of friable
asbestos material used for Insulation and
flreprooflng.
(Iv) Address or location of the build-
ing, structure, facility, or Installation.
(v) Scheduled starting and comple-
tion dates of demolition or renovation.
(vl) Nature of planned demolition or
renovation and method (s) to be em-
ployed.
(vll) Procedures to toe employed to
meet the requirements of this paragraph
and paragraph (j) of this section.
(vill) The name and address or loca-
tion of the waste disposal site where the
friable asbestos waste will be deposited.
(Ix) Name, title, and authority of the
State or local governmental representa-
tive who has ordered a demolition which
Is subject to paragraph (d) (6) of this
section.
(3) (1) For purposes of determining
whether a planned renovating operation
constitutes a renovation within the
meaning of this paragraph, the amount
of friable asbestos material to be re-
moved or stripped shall be:
(A) For planned renovating opera-
tions Involving Individually non-sched-
uled operations, the additive amount of
friable asbestos material that can be pre-
dicted will be removed or stripped at a
source over the maximum period of time
for which a prediction can be made. The
period shall be not less than 30 days and
not longer than one year.
(B) For each planned renovating op-
eration not covered by paragraph (d) (3)
(1) (A), the total amount of friable as-
bestos material that can be predicted
will be removed or stripped at a source.
(11) For purposes of determining
whether an emergency renovating op-
eration constitutes a renovation within
the meaning of this paragraph, the
amount of friable asbestos material to
be removed or stripped shall be the total
amount of friable asbestos material that
will be removed or stripped as a result
of the sudden, unexpected event that
necessitated the renovation.
(4) The following procedures shall be
used to prevent emissions of participate
asbestos material to outside air:
(i) Friable asbestos materials, used
to Insulate or fireproof any pipe, duct,
boiler, tank, reactor, turbine, furnace,
or structural member, shall be removed
from any building, structure, facility or
Installation subject to this paragraph.
Booh removal shall occur before wreck-
ing or dismantling of any portion of
raeh bunding, structure, facility, or in-
stallation that would break up the frt-
abto asbestos materials and before
wrecking or dismantling of any other
portion of such building, structure.
facility, or installation that would pre-
clude access to such materials for sub-
sequent removal. Removal of friable
asbestos materials used for Insulation
or flreprooflng of any pipe, duct, or
structural member which are encased in
concrete or other similar structural ma-
terial Is not required prior to demoli-
tion, but such material shall be ade-
quately wetted whenever exposed dur-
ing demolition.
(11) Friable asbestos materials used
to Insulate or fireproof pipes, ducts,
boilers, tanks, reactors, turbines, fur-
naces, or structural members shall be
adequately wetted during stripping, ex-
cept as 'provided in paragraphs (d) (4)
(Iv), (d)(4)(vi) or (d)(4)(vii) of this
section.
(ill) Pipes, ducts, boilers, tanks, re-
actors, turbines, furnaces, or structural
members that are insulated or fire-
proofed with friable asbestos materials
may be taken out of any building, struc-
ture, facility, or Installation subject to
this paragraph as units or in sections
provided the friable asbestos materials
exposed during cutting or disjointing are
adequately wetted during the cutting
or disjointing operation. Such unite
shall not be dropped or thrown to the
ground, but shall be carefully lowered
to ground level.
(iv) The stripping of friable asbestos
materials used to Insulate or fireproof
any pipe, duct, boiler, tank, reactor, tur-
bine, furnace, or structural member that
has been removed as a unit or in sections
as provided In paragraph (d) (4) (ill) of
this section shall be performed in ac-
cordance with paragraph (d) (4) (11) of
this section. Rather than comply with
the wetting requirement, a local exhaust
ventilation and collection system may
be used to prevent emissions to the out-
side .air. Such local exhaust ventilation
systems shall be designed and operated
to capture the asbestos particulate mat-
ter produced by the stripping of friable
asbestos material. There shall be no
visible emissions to the outside air from
such local exhaust ventilation and col-
lection systems except as provided In
paragraph (f) of this section.
(v) All friable asbestos materials that
have been removed or stripped shall be
adequately wetted to ensure that such
materials remain wet during all remain-
Ing stages of demolition or renovation
and related handling operations. Such
materials shall not be dropped or thrown
to the ground or a lower floor. Such ma-
terials that have been removed or
stripped more than- 50 feet above
ground level, except those' materials re-
moved as units or in sections, shall be
transported to the ground via dust-tight
chutes or containers.
(vl) Except as specified below, the wet-
ting requirements of this paragraph are
suspended when the temperature at the
point of wetting is below 0°C (32°F).
When friable asbestos materials are not
wetted due to freezing temperatures, such
materials on pipes, ducts, boilers, tanks,
reactors, turbines, furnaces, or structural
members shall, to the maximum extent
possible, be removed as units or in sec-
tions prior to wrecking. In no case shall
the requirements of paragraphs (d) (4)
(Iv) or (d) (4) (v) be suspended due to
freezing temperatures.
(vil) For renovation operations, local
exhaust ventilation and collection sys-
tems may be used, Instead of wetting as
specified In paragraph (d) (4) (ii), to pre-
vent emissions of particulate asbestos
material to outside air when damage to
equipment resulting from the wetting
would be unavoidable. Upon request and
supply of adequate information, the Ad-
ministrator will determine whether dam-
age to equipment resulting from wetting
to comply with the provisions of this par-
agraph would be unavoidable. Such local
exhaust ventilation systems shall be de-
signed and operated to capture the asbes-
tos particulate matter produced by the
stripping and removal qt friable asbestos
material. There-shall be no visible emis-
sions to the outside air from such local
exhaust ventilation and collection sys-
tems, except as provided In paragraph
(f) of this section.
(5) Sources subject to this paragraph
are exempt from the requirements of
{§ 61.05(a), 61.07, and 61.09.
(6) The demolition of a building, struc-
ture, facility, or installation, pursuant to
an order of an authorized representative
of a State or local governmental agency,
issued because that building is structur-
ally unsound and In danger of imminent
collapse is exempt from all but the fol-
lowing requirements of paragraph (d) of
this section:
(1) The notification requirements spec-
ified by paragraph (d) (2) of this section;
(ii) The requirements on stripping of
friable asbestos materials from previously
removed units or sections as specified hi
paragraph (d) (4) (Iv) of this section;
(ill) The wetting, as specified by para-
graph (d) (4) (v) of this section, of fri-
able asbestos materials that have been
removed or stripped;
(iv) The portion of the structure being
demolished that contains friable asbes-
tos materials shall be adequately wetted
during the wrecking operation.
(e) • • •
(2) Any owner or operator who in-
tends to spray asbestos materials which
contain more than 1 percent asbestos on
a dry weight basis to Insulate or fireproof
equipment and machinery shall report
such Intention to the Administrator at
least 20 days prior to the commencement
of the spraying operation. Such report
shall Include the following information:
* • •
(f) Rather than meet the no-visible-
emission requirements as specified by
paragraphs (a), (c), (d), (e), (h), (j),
and (k) of this section, an owner or op-
erator may elect to use the methods spec-
ified by 101.23 to clean emissions con-
taining particulate asbestos material be-
fore such emissions escape to, or are
vented to. the outside air.
(g) Where the presence of uncombined
water is the sole reason for failure to
meet the no-vlslble-emlsslon require-
ment of paragraphs (a), (c), (d), (e),
HDIUL IIOISTH, VOL 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBll 14, 1975
IV-4 5
-------
(fe>, (J). or Ok) of this Motion, such faD-
nreshtJl not be a violation of such emis-
sion nqulnmenU.
(h) Fabricating: There *hafl be no
visible emlMlons to the outside air, ex-
cept as provided In paragraph (f) of this
•notion, from any of the following op-
erations if they use commercial asbestos
or from any building or structure in
which rach operations are conducted.
(1) The fabrication of cement building
products.
(2) The fabrication of friction prod-
ucts, except those operations that pri-
marily install asbestos friction materials
OB motor vehicle*.
The fabrication of cement or atU-
eate board for Mutilation hood*; ovens;
electrical panels; laboratory furniture;
bulkheads, partitions and ceilings for
marine construction; and flow control
devices for the molten metal industry,
(1) Insulating: Molded insulating ma-
terials which are friable and wet-applied
Insulating materials which are friable
after drying. Installed after the effective
date of these regulations, shall contain
no commercial asbestos. The provisions
of this paragraph do not apply to insu-
lating materials which are spray applied;
such materials are regulated under
(j) Waste disposal for manufacturing.
fabricating, demolition, renovation and
spraying operations: The owner or op-
erator of any source covered under the
provisions of paragraphs (c), (d), (e>,
or (h) of this section shall meet the fol-
lowing standards,:
(1) There shall be no visible emissions
to the outside air, except as provided in
paragraph (j)(3) of this section, dur-
ing the collection; processing. Including
incineration; packaging; transporting;
or deposition of any asbestos-containing
waste material which is generated by
such source.
(2) All asbestos-containing waste ma-
terial shall be deposited at waste dis-
posal sites which are operated in accord-
ance with the provisions of I 61.25.
(3) Rather than meet the requirement
of paragraph (j) (1) «f this section, an
owner or operator may elect to use
either of the disposal methods specified
under (JH3H1) and (11) of this section,
or an alternative disposal method which
has received prior approval by the Ad-
ministrator:
(1) Treatment of asbestos-containing
waste material with water:
(A) Control device asbestos waste shell
be thoroughly mixed with water Into a
slurry and other asbestos-containing
waste material shall be adequately
wetted. There shall be no visible emis-
sions to the outside air from the collec-
tion, mixing and wetting operations, ex-
cept as provided in paragraph (f ) of this
section,
(B) After wetting, all asbestos-con-
taining waste material shall be sealed
into leak-tight containers while wet, and
such containers shall be deposited ait
waste disposal sites which are operated
in accordance with the provisions of
161.15.
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
haa received prior approval by the
Administrator.
(i) The asbestos-containing waste
material shall be covered with at least
IB.centimeters (ca. 6 inches) of com-
pacted non-asbestos-containing mate-
rial, and a cover of vegetation shall be
grown and maintained on the area ade-
quate to prevent exposure of the asbes-
tos-containing waste material; or
(11) The asbestos-containing waste
material shall be covered with at least 60
centimeters (ca. 2 feet) of compacted
non-asbestos-containing material and
maintained to prevent exposure of the
asbestos-containing waste; or
(111) For inactive waste disposal sites
for asbestos tailings, a resinous or petro-
leum-based dust suppression agent which
effectively binds dust and controls wind
erosion shall be applied. Such agent shall
be used as recommended for the partic-
ular asbestos tailings by the dust sup-
pression agent manufacturer. Other
equally effective dust suppression agents
may be used upon prior approval by the
Administrator. For purposes of this para-
graph, waste crankcase oil Is not con-
sidered a dust suppression agent.
7. The first sentence in ! 61.23 Is re-
vised as follows:
§ 61.23 Air-Cleaning.
If air-cleaning is elected, as permitted
by ||61.22(f> and 61.22(d)(4)(iv), the
requirements of this section must be met.
• * •
8. The first sentence In | 61.24 Is re-
vised and redeslgnated as paragraph (e)
and new paragraphs (c) and (d) are
added as follows:
§ 61.24 Reporting.
• • » • •
(c) For sources subject to it 61.22(J)
and 61.22 (k):
(1) A brief description of each process
that generates asbestos-containing waste
material.
(2) The average weight of asbestos-
containing waste material disposed of,
measured in kg/day.
(3) The emission control methods
used in all stages of waste disposal.
(4) The type of disposal site or incin-
eration site used for ultimate disposal,
the name of the site operator, and the
name and location of the disposal site.
(d) For sources subject to I 61.22(1):
(DA brief description of the site.
(2) The method or methods used to
comply with the standard, or alternative
procedures to be used.
(e) Such information shall accom-
pany the information required by { 61.10.
The Information described In this section
shall be reported using the format of
Appendix A of this part.
9. A new section 61.25 Is added to sub-
part B as follows:
% 61.25 Waste disposal site*.
In order to be an acceptable site for
disposal of asbestos-containing waste
material under {61.22 (j) and (k), an
active waste disposal site shall meet the
requirements of this section.
(a) There shall be no visible emissions
to the outside air from any active waste
disposal site where asbestos-containing
waste material has been deposited, except
as provided in paragraph (e) of this
section.
(b) Warning signs shall be displayed
at all entrances, and along the property
line of the site or along the perimeter of
the sections of the site where asbestos-
containing waste material Is deposited,
at Intervals of 100 m (ca. 330 ft) or less
except as specified in paragraph (d) of
this section. Signs shall be posted in such
a manner and location that a person may
easily read the legend. The warning
signs required by this paragraph shall
conform to the requirements of 20" xl4"
upright format signs specified In 29 CFB
1910.145(d) (4) and this paragraph. The
signs shall display the following legend
in the lower panel, with letter sizes and
styles of a visibility at least equal to
those specified in this paragraph.
ASBESTOS W*an DISPOSAL SITE
Do Mot Great* Dust
Breathing Asbestos
IB Hazardous to Tour Health
Notation
1" Sans Serif, Gothic or Block
K" sans Serif, Gothic or Block
14 Point Gothic
Spacing between lines shall be at least
equal to the height of the upper of the
two lines.
(c) The perimeter of the disposal site
shall be fenced in order to adequately
deter access to the general public except
as specified In paragraph (d) of this
section,
(d) Warning signs and fencing are
not required where the requirements of
paragraph (e) (1) of this section are
met, or where a natural barrier ade-
quately deters access to the general
public. Upon request and supply of ap-
propriate information, the Administra-
tor will determine whether a fence or a
natural barrier adequately deters access
to the general public.
(e) Rather than meet the require-
ment of paragraph (a) of this section, an
owner or operator may elect to meet
the requirements of paragraph (e) (1) or
(e) (2) of this section, or may use an al-
ternative control method for emissions
from active waste disposal sites which
has received prior approval by the
Administrator.
(1) At the end of each operating day,
or at least once every 24-hour period
while the site is in continuous operation,
the asbestos-containing waste material
which was deposited at the site during
the operating day or previous 24-hour
period shall be covered with at least 15
centimeters (ca. 6 inches) of compacted
non-asbestos-containing material.
(2) At the end of each operating day,
or at least once every 24-hour period
while the disposal site is In continuous
operation, the asbestos-containing waste
material which was deposited at the site
during the operating day or previous 24-
hour period shall be covered with a res-
inous or petroleum-based dust suppres-
sion agent Which effectively binds dust
and controls wind erosion. Such agent
•hall be used as recommended for the
particular dust by the dust suppression
agent manufacturer. Other equally ef-
fective dust suppression agents may be
used upon prior approval by the Admin-
istrator. For purposes of this paragraph,
waste crankcase oil is not considered a
dust suppression agent.
Subpart E—National Emission Standard
for Mercury
10. Section 61.50 Is revised to read as
follows:
§ 61.50 Applicability.
The provisions of this subpart are ap-
plicable to those stationary sources which
process mercury ore to recover mercury,
use mercury chlor-alkali cells to produce
chlorine gas and alkali metal hydroxide,
and Incinerate or dry wastewater treat-
ment plant sludge.
11. Section 61.51 is amended by adding
paragraphs (1) and (m) as follows;
§ 61.51 Definitions.
(1) "Sludge" means sludge produced by
a treatment plant that processes munici-
pal or Industrial waste waters.
(m) "Sludge dryer" means a device
used to reduce the moisture content of
sludge by heating to temperatures above
65°c (oa. 150*F) directly with combus-
tion gases.
12. Section 61.52 is revised to read as
follows:
% 61.52 Emission standard.
(a) Emissions to the atmosphere from
mercury ore processing facilities and
mercury cell chlor-alkali plants shall not
exceed 2300 grams of mercury per 24-
hour period.
(b) Emissions to the atmosphere from
sludge- incineration plants, sludge drying
plants, or a combination of these that
process wastewater treatment plant
sludges shall not exceed 3200 grams of
mercury per 24-hour period.
13. Section 61.53 is amended by adding
paragraph (d) as follows:
§ 61.53 Stack sampling.
• • • • •
(d) Sludge Incineration and drying
plants.
(1) Unless a waiver of emission testing
is obtained under I 61.13, each owner or
operator of a source subject to the stand-
ard In { 61.52 (b) shall test emissions from
that source. Such tests shall be conducted
• in accordance with the procedures set
forth either in paragraph (d) of this
section or in I 61.54.
(2) Method 101 In Appendix B to this
part shall be used to test emissions as
follows:
(i) The test shall be performed within
90 days of the effective date of these
regulations In the case of an existing
source or a new source which has an
Initial startup date preceding the effec-
tive date.
(ii) The test shall be performed within -
90 days of startup In the case of a new
source which did not have an initial
startup date preceding the effective date.
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER M, 197S
IV-4 7
-------
(3) The Administrator shall be noti-
fied at least 30 days prior to an emission
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test.
(4) Samples shall be taken over such
a period or periods as are necessary to
determine accurately the maximum
emissions which will occur in a 24-hour
period: No changes shall be made in the
operation which would potentially in-
crease emissions above the level deter-
mined by the most recent stack test, un-
til the new emission level has been esti-
mated by calculation and the results re-
ported to the Administrator.
(5) All samples shall be analyzed, and
mercury emissions shall be determined
within 30 days after the stack test. Each
determination shall be reported to the
Administrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the close of the next busi-
ness day following such determination.
(6) Records of emission test results
and other data needed to determine total
emissions shall be retained at the source
and shall be made available, for inspec-
tion by the Administrator, for a mini-
mum of 2 years. v
14. Sections 61.54 and 61.55 are added
as follows:
§ 61.54 Sludge sampling.
(a) As an alternative means for
demonstrating compliance with } 61.52
(to), an owner or operator may use
Method 105 of Appendix B and the proce-
dures specified in this section.
(1) A sludge test shall be conducted
within 90 days of the effective date of
these regulations In the case of an exist-
ing source or a new source which has an
initial startup date preceding the effec-
tive date; or
(2) A sludge test shall be conducted
within 90 days of startup in the case of a
new source which did not have an initial
startup date preceding the effective date.
(b) The Administrator shall be notified
at least 30 days prior to a sludge sampling
test, so that he may at his option observe
the test.
-—Mercury emissions, g/day.
c <=Mercury concentration of sludge on »
dry solids basis, *g/g (ppm).
Q =Sludge charging rate, kg/day.
(e) No changes In the operation of a
plant shall be made after a sludge test
has been conducted which would poten-
tially increase emissions above the level
determined by the most recent sludge
test, until the new emission level has
been estimated by calculation and the
results reported to the Administrator.
(f) All sludge samples shall be ana-
lyzed for mercury content within 30 days
after the sludge sample is collected. Each
determination shall be reported to the
Administrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the close of the next busi-
ness day following such determination.
(g) Records of sludge sampling, charg-
ing rate determination and other data
needed to determine mercury content
of wastewater treatment plant sludges
shall be retained at the source and made
available, for inspection by the Admin-
istrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
§ 61.55 Emission monitoring.
(a) Wastewater treatment plant sludge
incineration and drying plants. All such
sources for which mercury emissions ex-
ceed 1600 g/day, demonstrated either by
stack sampling according to J 61.53 or
sludge sampling according to i 61.54,
shall monitor mercury emissions at Inter-
vals of at least once per year by use of
Method 105 of Appendix B, or the proce-
dures specified in g 61.54(c) and (d). The
results of monitoring shall be reported
and retained according to S 61.53 (d) (5)
and (6), or § 61.54(f) and (g).
15. Appendix A is revised to a new re-
porting format, and sections (I) (C) and
(I) (D) are added as follows:
APPENDIX A
National Emission Standards for Hazardous A1r Pollutants
Compliance Status Information
I. SOURCE REPORT
INSTRUCTIONS! Owners or operators of. sources of
hazardous pollutants subject to the National
Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
are required to submit the Information contained
In Section I to the appropriate U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency Regional Office prior to 90 days
after the effective date of any standards or amend-
ments which require the submission of such
Information.
A list of regional offices Is provided 1n 161.04.
A. SOURCE INFORMATION
1. identification/Location - Indicate the name and address of each souret.
1 2
RigTon
20 22
AWT"
State
23
5 8
County
26
City Code
27 -
_9 18
Source Hunter
Source
000
tt T6
Name
00
IT — n»
46
TT
47—Street Address [Location of Plant) & 55
Oup 1-18
>6 '
City Name
tO State Regis, numoer
-•-
59 SIC
TZ W A/P
34 State 35^
S5 58
ft NEDS XReT.
77 79
"Staff ' W
Dupl-16
if
c?
30
31
I?
49
2, Contact - Indicate the name and telephone number of the owner or operator
or other responsible official whon EPA may contact concerning this report.
.FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER 14, 1975
IV-4 8
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Dup 1-18 41 „ „ -^
15 Zo 2T K5m «
44 46 -
Area Code 47Number54 BO
3. Source Description - Briefly state the nature of the source (e.J., •Chlor-
alktll Plant' or 'Machine Shop').
Dup 1-18 4 ?
15 Zi) 21 Description 50
51 Contl nued 75 58"
4. Alternative Mailing Address - Indicate an alternative
mailing address If correspondence 1s to be directed
to a location different than that specified above.
Dup 1-18 4 3
15?0 21NumberStreet or Box Number45 80
15 20 21 cTty35 Stale 41 Zip 44 BO"
5. Compliance Status - The emissions from this source can cannot meet
the emission limitations contained In the National EmTss1on~TFandards on or
prior to 90 days after the effective date of any standards or amendments
Which require the submission of such Information.
STgnature of Owner. Operator or Other Responsible Official
TOTE:If the emissions from the source will exceed those limits set by the National
ImTsslon Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants, the source will be In violation and
subject to Federal enforcement actions unless granted a waiver of compliance by the
Administrator of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. The Information needed for
such waivers Is listed In Section II of this form.
B. PROCESS INFORMATION. Part B should be completed separately for each point of
emission for each hazardous pollutant. [Sources subject to 61.22(1) nay o»1t
number 4. below.]
Dup 1-13 0 0 5 _
•ft T6 17 T8 1? 25 5CC27 25 25 W JT
NEDS X Ref LS SIP
FEDERAL REGISTEI, VOL 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBEI 14, 1975
IV-4 9
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
1. Pollyt«nt Emitted - Indicate the type of hazardous pollutant emitted by the
'process, indicate W for asbestos, "BE" for beryllium, or "HS" for mercury*
32 33
PoTTuTant
Regulation
47
EC
2, Process Description - Provide a brief description of each process (e.g..
•hydrogen end box" In a mercury chlor-alkall plant, "grinding machine" In
a beryllium machine shop). Use additional sheets If necessary.
£D~
Process Description
T4
Dup 1-18 61
50
51
Dup 1-18
75 W
6 2
15—?0 ZT
sr
75 TST
3, Amount of Pollutant - Indicate the average weight of the hazardous material
named in Item 1 which enters the process In pounds per month (based on th«
previous twelve months of operation).
Dup 1-18 63
15—2D
zr
27
Ibs./mo.
4, Control Devices
a"i Indicate the type of pollution control, devices, 1f any, used to reduca .
the emissions from the process (e.g., venturl scrubber, baghouse, wet
cyclone) and the estimated percent of the'pollutant which the device
removes from the process gas stream.
DUD V18 6 «
15 ZU 21
45 PrU^ry Device Name
PRIMARY CONTROL DEVICE?
43
66 70
64 Percent Removal
r**
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Dup 1-18 6 5
IS—TO
21
47 Secondary Device Name
SECONDARY CONTROL RfVlCtS:
4S
64 66 70
Percent Rnmnval
* CFFIC.
72 ' 79 WS
efficiency
b, Asbestos Emission Control Devices Only
1. If * baghouse Is specified In Item 4a, give the following
Information:
• The *1r flow permeability 1n cubic feet per minute per squirt
foot of fabric area.
Air flow permeability • cfm/ft2
• The pressure drop In Inches water gauge acrqss the filter
at which the baghouse 1s operated.
Operating pressure drop « Inches w.g.
• If the baghouse material contains synthetic fill yarn, check
whether this material Is / / spun / / or not spun.
• -If the baghouse utilizes a felted fabric, give the minimum
thickness In Inches and the density 1n ounces per square yard,
Thickness • Inches Density • oz/yd*
11. If a wet collection device 1s specified In Item 4a, give th«
designed unit contacting energy 1n Inches water gauge.
• Unit contacting energy • Inches w.g.
C. DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING WASTES. Part C should be completed separately
for each asbestos-contaTnfng waste generation operation arising from source!
subject to I61.22(a), (c). (e), and (h).
Dup 1-13
A B
32 33 34
Pollutant
00 5
16 17 18 19" 20" SCC
Regulation 48 49
EC
27 2& 29 3D* JT
NEDS X Ref CS SIP
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 40, NO. W—TUESDAY, OCTOIER 14, If71
IV-51
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
1. Waste Generation - Provide a brief description of each process that
generates asbestos-containing waste (e.g. disposal of control device wastes).
5D Process Description 79 OT
2. Asbestos Concentration - Indicate the average percentage asbestos content
of these materials.
Dup 1-18 61 ASBESTOS CONCENTRATION; _
13 — 2"0 21 - 4"3 45 4*8
3. Amount of Wastes - Indicate the average weight of asbestos-containing wastes
disposed of, measured 1n kg/day.
Dup 1-18 62 _ kg/day
19 — 70 21 27 29 3'4 OT
4. Control Methods - Indicate the emission control methods used 1n all stages
of waste disposal, from collection, processing, and packaging to transporting
and deposition.
Dup 1-18 6 3 _ Primary Control Method _
19 70 21 33
43 7-5 35-
Dup 1-18 6 4 _
19 TO 21 '50
51 ' 79 Bff
5; Waste, Disposal - Indicate the type of disposal site (sanitary landfill,
open, covered) or incineration site (municipal, private) where the waste
1s disposed of and who operates the site (company, private, municipal).
State ttye name and location of the site (closest city or town, county,
state).
Dup 1-18 6 5 TYPE OF SITE; _
19 ZD 21 J3 315 5tt
51 75 Eff
KDERAL REGISTER. VOL 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY. OCTOBER 14, 197S
IV-5 2
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Dup 1-18
61
Dup 1-18
6 6 OPERATOR!
19 20 zi a a]
79 bo
6 7 LOCATION:
19 id 21 29
60
31 70
71 79 SO"
D. WASTE DISPOSAL SITES. Part D should be completed separately for each asbestos
waste disposal site subject to section 61.22(1).
Dup 1-13 0 0 5
n T6 17 IB TT 2IT 5CC27 25 29 30" 3T
NEDS X Ref CS SIP
< B
32 33 3? Regulation 4"8 Vf
Pollutant EC
WASTE DISPOSAL SITE
SO58 BO"
1. Description - Provide a brief description of the site, Including Us size and
configuration, and the distance to the closest city or town, closest
residence, and closest primary road.
Dup 1-18 61 SITE DESCRIPTION
15 20 21 37 35 50
51 79 BJT
Dup 1-18 6 2 DISTANCE! TOWN: K H
15 Zb 21 ?9 35 34 36 TO 42 T3
RESIDENCE; K H ROAD:
45 54 SB 50 62 53 65 59 71 75
K H
77 78 KT
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER 14. 1975
IV-5 3
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
2. Innctl Nation - After the site Is Inactivated. Indicate the wit hod or methods
useTTo"comply with the standard and send a list of the actions that Mill be
undertaken to maintain the Inactivated site.
Dup 1-18 6 8 _ HfTH/E SITEl
IS ?0 21
64 ' 79
II. WAIVER REQUESTS
A. WAIVER OF COMPLIANCE. Owners or operators of sources unable to operate In
compliance with the National Emission Standards for Hazardous A1r Pollutants
' prior to 90 days after the effective date of. any standards or amendments which
require the submission of such Information may request a waiver of compliance
from the Administrator of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency for the
time period necessary to Install appropriate control devices or make
modifications to achieve compliance. The Administrator may grant a waiver
of compliance with the standard for a period not exceeding two years from
the effective date of the hazardous pollutant standards, If he finds that
such period Is necessary for the Installation of controls and that steps
will be taken during the period of the waiver to assure that the health
of persons wlll'be protected from Imminent endangerment.
The report Information provided 1n Section I must accompany this application.
Applications should be sent to the appropriate EPA regional office.
Processes Involved - Indicate the process or processes en
pollutants to which emission controls are to be applied,
a. Describe the proposed type of control device to be added or
modification to be made to the process to' reduce the emissions
of-hazardous pollutants to an acceptable level; (Use additional
sheets 1f necessary.)
b. Describe the measures that Will bt taken during the waiver period
to assure that the health of persons will be protected from
Imminent endangerment. (Use additional sheets If necessary.)
8, Increments of Progress - Specify the dates By which the following
Increments of progress will be met,
• Date by which contracts for emission control systems or process
modifications will be awarded; or date by which orders will be
Issued for the purchase o'f the component parts to accomplish
emission control or process modification.
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 40, NO. 199—TUESDAY, OCTOBER 14, 1975
1-54
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Dup 1-16
sr
To 61 HB/UY/riT
T6 55
Date of Initiation of on-s1te construction or Installation of
emission control equipment or .process change.
Dup 1-16
0 2 7
17 T9 53T4
TO 61 HO/DY/YR 0*6 50"
• Date by which on-s1te construction or Installation of emission control
equipment or process modification 1s to be completed,
Dup 1-16
53T4
55£o 61
Date by whUh final compliance Is to be achieved.
MO/DY/YR
T6 UO"
Dup 1-16
0 4 7
5JT4
TO 61 MO/DY/fK
S6
WAIVER OF EMISSION TESTS. A waiver of emission testing may be granted to
owners or operators ofTources of beryllium or mercury pollutants If, In
the judgment of the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency
the emissions from the source comply with the appropriate standard or 1f
the owners or operators of the source have requested a waiver of compliance
or have been granted a waiver of compliance.
This application should accompany the report Information provided 1n
Section I.
1.
Reason - State the reasons for requesting a waiver of emission testing.
If the reason stated Is that the'emissions from the source are within
the prescribed limits, documentation of this condition must be attached.
Date
APPENDIX B—TEST METHODS
10. Method 105 is added to Appendix B as
follows:
METHOD 108. METHOD FOX DETERMINATION OF
MERCURY IN WASTEWAVER TREATMENT PLANT
SEWAOE SLUDGES
1. Principle and applicability. 1.1 Prin-
ciple—A weighed portion of the sewage
sludge sample'Is digested In aqua regla for
3 minutes at 9S'C, followed by oxidation
with potassium permanganate. Mercury In
the digested sample Is then measured by the
conventional spectrophotometer cold vapor
technique. An alternative digestion Involving
the use of an autoclave Is described In para-
graph 4.6.2 of this method.
1.9 Applicability—This method Is appli-
cable for the determination, of total organic
and Inorganic mercury content In sewage
sludges, soils, sediments, and bottom-type
materials. The normal range of this method
Is 0.2 to 5 «g/g. The range may be extended
above or below the normal range by Increas-
ing or decreasing sample size and through In-
strument and recorder control.
2. Apparatus. 2.1 Analysis—The conven-
tional cold vapor technique(5) la used to
analyze the sample.
2.1.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrophoto-
meter '—Any atomic absorption unit having
an open sample presentation area In which
to mount the absorption cell Is suitable. In-
strument settings recommenced by the par-
ticular manufacturer should be followed.
1 Instruments designed specifically for the
measurement of mercury using the cold
vapor technique are commercially available
.nd may be substituted for the atomic
absorption spectrophotometer.
6Y tfieTowner. or operator
2.1.2 Mercury Hollow Cathode Lamp —
Wostlnghouse WL-22847, argon 'filled, or
equivalent.
2.1.3 Recorder— Any multlrange, vnrlable-
speed recorder that la compatible with the
UV detection system Is suitable.
2.1.4 Absorption Cell — Standard spectro-
photometer cells 10 cm long, having quartz
end windows may be used. Suitable cells may
be constructed from plexiglass tubing, 2.5
cm O.D. x 11.4 cm (ca. 1" O.D. x 4V4"). The
ends are ground perpendicular to the longi-
tudinal axis, and quartz windows (2.5 cm
diameter x 0.16 cm, thickness (ca. 1" diameter
x M«" thickness) ] are cemented In place.
Oas Inlet and outlet ports (also, of plexiglass
but 0.6 cm O.D. (ca. Vi" O.D.) 1 are attached
approximately 1.3 cm (V4") from each end.
The cell Is strapped to a burner for support
and aligned In the light beam to give the
maximum t'rnnsmlttance. NOTE: Two 5.1 cm
x 5.1 cm (ca. 2" x 2") cards with 2.5 cm
(ca. 1") diameter holes may be placed over
each end of the cell to assist In positioning
the cell for maximum transmlttance.
2.1.5 Air Pump— Any peristaltic pump
capable of delivering 1 liter of air per minute
may be used. A Masterflex pumn with elec-
tronic speed control has been found to be
satisfactory. (Regulated compressed air con
be usod In an open one-pass system.)
2 1.6 Flowmeter — Capable of mep.surirtg
an air flow of 1 liter per minute.
2.1.7 Aera'.lon Tubing— Tygon tublrg Is
vsed for passage of the mrrci ry vapor from
the sample bottle to the absorption cell and
return. Straight gloss tubing terminating In
a coarse porous frit Is used for spnrglrg air
I "to the sample..
2.1.8 Drying Tube — 15 cm long x 1 9 cm
diameter (ca. 6" long x %" dlarr.cter) tube
containing 20 grams of the deslccant mag-
nesium perchloratc. The apparatus Is Assem-
ft* nhown In Figure 105 1. In plnrc of the
inncnrHlum porchlorute drying tube, ft Mnall
rending lamp with flOW bulb rriny bo used to
prevent condonnatlon of moisture Insldo the
cell. The lump IN portioned no a* not to Inter-
fore with the mcnnuremnnt and to shine on
the absorption coll maintaining the air tem-
perature nbout 5'C above ambient. •
3, nuagentt.a.l Analysis.
3.1.1 Aqua noRla—Prepare Immediately
before uso by carefully arid Ing three volumes
of concentrated HC1 to one volume of con-
centrated HNO,.
3.1.3 Sulfurlc Acid, O.ON—Dilute 14.0 ml,
of concentrated vulfurlc aeld to 1.0 liter.
3.1.3 Stainous Sulfatc—Add 25 R •tan-
nous sulfate to 2CO ml of 0.5N sulfurle aeld.
This mixture Is a snspon.slon nnd should be
r.tirred con tin nourly during u*e. Btannoui
chloride may bo used In place of the stannoui
sulfate.
3.1.4 Sodium Chloride—Hydroxylamlne
Sulfate Rolutlon—D'ssolve 12 rrams of so-
nium chloride and 12 grams of hydroxylnmln*
Milfale In distilled water and dilute to 100
ml. Hydroxylnmln< t'ydrochlorlde mav be
uspd In place of the'hydroxylamlne sulfate.
3,1.5 Potassium Permanganate—5% solu-
tion, w/v. Dissolve 6 prams of rotcwlum per-
mancrnnate In 100 ml'of distilled water,
R.I.6 Stock Mercury Solution—Dissolve
0,1354 prams of reagent grade mercuric chlo-
ride (Assay >95%) In 75 ml of distilled
water. Add 10 ml of concentrated rltrlc acid
and adjust, the volume to 100.0 ml. 1 ml = l
mtf H«r.
3.1.7 Working Mercurv Solution—MaVe
successive dilutions of the rtock mercury
solution to obtain a working standard con-
taining 0.1 ,,g per ml. This working standard
R"d the dilutions of the stock mercury folu-
tlon should be prepared fresh dMly. Acidity
of the working standard should be main-
tained at 0.15% nitric acid. This acid should
be added to the flask as needed before the
addition of the aliquot. Mercuric solutions
should not be prepared In plastic containers.
'4. Procedures. Simples for mercury analy-
sts are subject to contamination from a
variety of sources. Extreme care must be
taVen to prevent contamination. Certain In-
terferences may occur during the analysis
procedures. Extreme caution must be taken
to avoid Inhalation of mercury.
4.1 Sample Handling and Preservation.
4.1.1 Because of" the extreme sensitivity
of the analytical procedure and the om-
nlpre*ence of mercury, care must be'taken
to avoid extraneous ..contamination. Sam-
pling devices, sample containers, and re-
agents should be «.«cert«lnM to be frre of
significant amounts of mercury, the sample
should not be exposed to any condition In
the laboratory that may result In contact or
airborne mercury contamination. Sample
containers to be used for collection and ship-
ment of mercury samples should be properly
cleaned before u«e. These «hould be ringed
with at least 20% v/v HNO, followed by
di'tllled water.
4.1.2 While the sample may be analyzed
without drying, It has been found to be more
convenient to analyze a dry sample. Moisture
may be driven off In a drying oven at a tem-
perature of 60'C. No significant mercury.
lossei have been observed by using this dry-
l->g step. The dry sample should be pulver-
l7erl nnd thoroughly mixed before the aliquot
Is weighed.
4.2 Interferences.
4.2.1 interferences that may occur In
sludge samples are sulfldes, high copper, high
rhiTldes. etc. A discussion of possible In-
terferences and snpge«ted preventatlve meas-
ures to be taken Is given In Reference (6) (7).
4.2.2 Volatile materials which absorb »t
the 253.7 nm will cause a positive Interfer-
FEDERAl «EGISTE«, VOL 40, NQ. 199—TUESDAY. OCIO-.2
IV-5 5
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
•no*. In order to remove any interfering
volatile material!, the dead air space in the
BOD bottle ihould be purged with nitrogen
before the addition of stannous tulfate.
4.8 Handling Sample Mercury Vapon
Alter Analysis.
44.1 Because of the toxic nature of mer-
cury vapor, precaution must be taken to
avoid iti Inhalation. Therefore, a bypass
should be included in the analysis system
to either vent the mercury vapor into an
exhaust hood or pass the vapor through some
absorbing media, such as:
(a) equal volumes of 0.1N KMNOi and 10%
(b) 0.38% Iodine In a 3* D solution.
A specially treated charcoal that will absorb
mercury vapor is also available from Barne-
bey and Cheney, X. 8th Ave. and North Oas-
sldy at* Columbus. Ohio 43319, Catalog No.
680-13 or No. 680-99.'
4.4 Calibration.
4.4.1 Transfer 0. 0.8, 1.0, 9.0, 8.0 and 10 ml
aliquot* of the working mercury solution
*r*,t*.\ntng Q to 1.0 ug of mercury to a series
of 800-ml BOD bottles. Add enough dis-
tilled water to each bottle to make a total
volume of 10 mt Add 8 ml of aqua regla and
beat > minutes in a water bath at 98«C. Allow
the sample to oool and add 60 ml distilled
water and 18 ml of KMnO, solution to each
bottle and return to the water bath tor 80
minutes. Oool and add 6 ml of sodium ohlo-
ride-hydroxylamine sulfate solution to re-
• duce the excess permanganate. Add 80 ml of
distilled water. Treating each bottle Individ-
ually, add 6 ml of stannous sulfate solution
tad immediately attach the bottle to the
aeraUon apparatus. At this point, the sample
is allowed to stand qultely without »««»in«i
agitation. The circulating pump, which has
previously been adjusted to a rate of 1 liter
pet minute, is allowed to run continuously.
•Mention of trade names or specific prod-
vets does not constitute endorsement by the
Bnvlronmental Protection Agency.
The absorbanoe, as exhibited either on the
spectrophotometer or the recorder, will in-
crease and reach maximum within 30 sec-
onds. As soon as the recorder pen levels off,
approximately 1 minute, open the bypass
valve and continue the aeraUon until the
absorbanoe returns to its minimum 'value.
Close the bypass valve, remove the fritted
tubing from the BOD bottle and continue
the aeration. Proceed with the standards and
construct a standard curve by plotting peak
height versus mtcrograms of mercury.
4.8 Analysis.
4.0.1 Weigh triplicate OJg± 0.001 g por-
tions of dry sample 'and place in bottom of
a BOD bottle. Add 6 ml of distilled water
and 6 ml of aqua regla. Beat a minutes in a
water bath at 96«C. Cool and add 50 ml dis-
tilled water and 15 ml potassium per-
manganate solution to each sample' bottle.
Mix thoroughly and place in the water bath
tor 30 minutes at 95*0. Oool and add 6 ml of
sodium ohlorlde-hydroxylamine sulfate to re-
duce the excess permanganate. Add 86 ml of
distilled' water. Treating each bottle indi-
vidually, add 6 ml of stannous sulfate and
immediately attach the bottle to the aera-
tion apparatus. With each sample, continue
as described in paragraph 4.4.1 of this
method.
4.6.2 An alternative digestion procedure
using an autoclave may also be used. In this
method 8 ml of concentrated EJ9O. and 3 ml
of concentrated HNO, are added to the 0.3
grams of sample. 6 ml of saturated SMnO.
solution are added and the bottle is covered
with a piece of aluminum ton. The samples
are autoolaved at 191'0 and 3.1 kg/cm" (oa.
16 psig) for 18 minutes. Oool, make up to a
volume of 100 ml with distilled water, and
add 6 ml of sodium ohlorlde-hydroxylamioe
sulfate solution to reduce the excess per-
manganate. Purge the dead air space and
continue as described in paragraph 4,4.1 of
this method,
6. Calculation. 8.1 Measure the peak
height of the unknown from the chart and
read the mercury value from the standard
curve,
6.2 Calculate the mercury concentration
In the sample by the formula:
MS Ha.'gm-
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
8
PART 61— NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of
New York
Pursuant to the delegation of authority
for national emission standards for haz-
ardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to the
State of New York on August 6, 1975,
EPA is today amending 40 CFB 61.04,
Address, to reflect this delegation. A No-
tice announcing tills delegation is pub-
lished elsewhere in today's FEDERAL
REGISTER. The amended § 61.04, which
nclds the address of the New York Dc-
piu-tment of Environmental Conserva-
tion, to which all reports, requests, appli-
cations, submittals, and communications
to the Administrator pursuant to this
part must also be addressed, is set forth
below.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemixking effective imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
August 6, 1075, and it serves no purpose
to delay the technical change of this
addition of the State address to the Code
of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaklng is effective Immedi-
ately, and is Issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended.
43 U.S.C, 18570-7
Dated: October 4, 1075.
STANLEY W, Luono,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subpurat'i'aph (HH) to read
as follows:
§61.01 Address.
(b) • • *
(HH)— New York: New York State Depart-
ment of Environmental Conservation, 60 Wolf
Road, Albany, New York 12233, attention:
Division of Air Resources.
(PR Uoc.75-27581 Filed 10-14-75;8:« am]
FEPERAL REGISTER, VOL 40, NO. 200-
-WEDNISDAY, OCTOBER 15, 1975
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Colorado
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
l,,y for national emission standards for
hn/.nrdous nir pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of Colorado on August 27,1075,
EPA Is today amending 40 CFR 61.04.
Address, to reflect this delegation. A No-
tice announcing this delegation Is pub-
lished today in the Federal ReRlster, The
amended 9 61.04, which adds the address
of the Colorado Air Pollution Control
Division to which all reports, requests,
.'iImplications, submittals, and communi-
cations to the Administrator pursuant to
this part must also be addressed, is set
forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaklng effective Imme-
diately In that It Is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burden*
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
August 27, 1075, and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of
this addition of the State address to the
Codo of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaklng is effective immedi-
ately, and Is Issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended, 42 U.S.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: October 22, 1075,
STANLEY W. LEORO,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement,
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1, In II (11.04 pnrnitrtiph (b) is amended
by revising subpnrngraph (O> to read an
follows:
§61.01 Adilrow.
• • « * ,
(b> • * •
(O>— State of Colorado, Colorado Air
Pollution Control Division. 4210 East
llth Avenue, Denver, Colorado 80220.
• • » • «
|FB Doc.75-20237 Filed 10-30-75:8:46
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 40, NO. 711-
-rRIDAY, OCTOBER 31, 1975
-------
[FBI, 479-41
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STANt*
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to Washington
Local Agencies
Pursuant to section 112(d) of the
Clean Air Act, as amended, the Regional
Administrator of Region X, Environ-
mental Protection Agency (EPA), dele-
gated to the State of Washington De-
partment of Ecology on February 28,
1975, the authority to implement and
enforce the program for national emis-
sion standards for hazardous air pollu-
tants (NESHAPS). The delegation was
announced In the FBOUAL REGISTER on
April 1,1975 (40 FR 14632). On April 25,
1975 (40 FR 16169) the Assistant Admin-
istrator for Air and Waste Management
promulgated a change to 40 CFR 61.04,
Address, to reflect the delegation to the
State of Washington.
On September 22 and 23, 1975, the
State Department of Ecology requested
EPA's concurrence in the State's sub-
delegation of the NESHAPS program to
four local air pollution control agencies.
After reviewing the State's request, the
Regional Administrator determined that
the sub-delegations meet all the require-
ments outlined in EPA's delegation of
February 28, 1975. Therefore, the Re-
gional Administrator on October 15,1975,
concurred in the sub-delegations to the
four local agencies listed below with the
stipulation that all the conditions placed
on the original delegation to the State
shall also apply to the sub-delegations
to the local agencies. EPA is today
amending 40 CFR 61.04 to reflect the
State's sub-delegations.
The amended 5 61.04 provides that all
reports, requests, applications, submit-
to Is and communications required pur-
suant to Part 61 which were previously to
be sent to the Director of the State of
Washington Department of Ecology
(DOE) will now be sent to the Puget
Sound Air Pollution Control Agency
(P8APCA), the Northwest Air Pollution
Authority (NWAPA), the Spokane
County Air Pollution Authority (SCAPA)
or the Yaklma County Clean Air Au-
thority (YCCAA), as appropriate. It
should be noted that the delegation to
the YCCAA applies only to demolition
projects containing asbestos. Other
source categories located in Yaklma
County subject to the NESHAPS regula-
tion should continue to address all cor-
respondence to the Department of Ecol-
ogy. The amended section is set forth
below.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective im-
mediately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are Imposed on the parties aHected. The
delegations which are reflected by this
Administrative amendment were effec-
tive on September 22 to the YCCAA and
September 23 to the other three agencies,
and It serves no useful purpose to delay
the technical change of the addition of
RULES XNO REGULATIONS
the local agency addresses to the Cod*
of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective Immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended. 42 U.S.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: December 15, 1975.
STANLEY W. Liono,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement,
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In 161.04, paragraph (b) (WW) la
revised to read as follows:
g 61.04
(b)
(WW) (1) Washington; State of Wash-
ington, Department of Ecology, Olym-
pia, Washington 98504.
(ii) Northwest Air Pollution Author-
ity, 207 Pioneer Building, Second and
Pine Streets, Mount Vernon, Washing-
ton 98273.
(Ill) Puget Sound Air Pollution Con-
trol Agency, 410 West Harrison Street,
Seattle, Washington 98119.
(lv) Spokane County Air Pollution
Control Authority, North 811 Jefferson,
Spokane, Washington 99201.
(v) Yaklma County Clean Air Author-
ity, County Courthouse, Yaklma, Wash-
ington 98901.
• • • * «
|FRDoc.7S-34161 Piled 12-17-7B;8:45 am)
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 40, NO. 244-
-THURSDAY, DECEMBER II, 1973
474-3]
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Main*
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for National Emission Standards for'
Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS)
to the State of Maine on November 8,
1975, EPA is today amending 40 CTR
61.04, Address, to reflect this delegation.
A Notice announcing this delegation to
published today in the FEDERAL REG-
ISTER.' The amended { 61.04, which adds
the address ot the Maine Department of
Environmental Protection to which all
reports, requests, aopUcations, sub-
mittals, and communications to the Ad-
ministrator pursuant to this part must
also be addressed, is set forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaklng effective im-
mediately1 in that it is an administra-
tive change and not one of substantive
content. No additional substantive bur-
dens are Imposed on the parties affected.
The delegation which is reflected by this
administrative amendment was effective
on October 7, 1975, and it serves no
purpose to delay the technical change
of this addition of the State address to
the Code of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is Issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended.
(43 U.S.C. 18570-7)
Dated: December 22, 1975.
STANLEY W. LEORO,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement.
Fart 61 .of Chapter Z, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
In { 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparagraph (U) to read
as follows:
% 61.04 Addr««.
• • • * •
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
12 PART 61— NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to the State of
Michigan
Pursuant to the delegation of authority
for national emission standards for haz-
ardous air pollutant (NESHAPS) to the
State of Michigan on November 5, 1975,
EPA Is today amending 40 CPR 61.04,
Address, to reflect this delegation.1 The
amended Section 61.04, which adds the
address of the Air Pollution Control Divi-
sion, Michigan Department of Natural
Resources to that list of addresses to
which all reports, requests, applications,
submittals, and communications to the
Administrator pursuant to this part must
be sent, is set forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulernaklng effective imme-
diately In that It Is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are Imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this
administrative amendment was effective
on November 5, 1970, and it serves no
purpose to delay the technical change
of this addition of the State address to
the Code of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaklng Is effective Imme-
diately, and Is Issued under the authortly
of section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended. 42 U.S.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: December 31, 1975.
STANLEY W. LEORO,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement.
Part 81 of Chapter I. Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations Is amended
as follows:
1. In 8 61.04, paragraph fb) Is
amended by revising subparagraph X, to
read as follows:
61.04 Address.
* • • • »
(X) State of Michigan, Air Pollution Con-
trol Division, Michigan Department of Natu-
ral Resources, Stevens T. Mason Building,
Bth Floor, Lansing, Michigan 48926.
• • • * * •
[FR Doc.76-848 Filed 1-12-78;8:4S am]
13
>A Notice announcing this delegation li
published in the Notices section of this Issue.
FEDERAL HOISTIR, VOL 41, NO. I-
-TUESDAY, JANUARY 13, 1976
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to Washington
Local Agencies
Pursuant to section 112(d) of the CJean
Air Act, as amended, the Regional Ad-
ministrator of Region X, Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), delegated to
the State of Washington Department of
Ecology on February 28, 1975, the au-
thority to Implement and enforce the
program for national emission standards
for hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS).
The delegation was announced in the
FEDERAL REGISTER on April 1, 1975 (40
FR 14632). On April 25, 1975 (40 FR
18169) the Assistant Administrator for
Air and Waste Management promulgated
a change to 40 CFR 61.04, Address, to
reflect the delegation to the State of
Washington,
On October 23,1975, the State Depart-
ment of Ecology requested EPA's concur-
rence in the State's sub-delegation of the
NESHAPS program to two local air pol-
lution control agencies. Previously, EPA
concurred In the State's sub-delegation
to four local agencies. See 40 FR 58646,
December 18, 1975. After reviewing the
State's October 23 request the Regional
Administrator determined that the sub-
delegations met all the requirements
outlined in EPA's delegation of Febru-
ary 28,1975, Therefore, the Regional Ad-
ministrator on December 5, 1975, con-
curred In the sub-delegations to the two
local agencies listed below with the .stip-
ulation that all the conditions placed on
the original delegation to the State .shall
also apply to the sub-delegations to the
local agencies. EPA is today amending 40
CFR 61.04 to reflect the State's sub-
delegations.
The amended 9 61.04 provides that all
reports, requests, applications, submit-
tals and communications required pur-
suant to Part 61 which were previously
to be sent to the Director of the State of
Washington Department of Ecology
(DOE) will now be sent to the Olympic
Air Pollution Control Authority or the
Southwest Air Pollution Control Author-
ity, as appropriate. The amended sec-
tion is set forth below.
The Administrator finds Rood cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaklng effective imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are Imposed on the parties affected. The
delegations which are reflected by this
administrative amendment were effec-
tive on October 23, 1975 and It serves no
useful purpose to delay the technical
change of the addition of the local agency
addresses to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
Tins rulemaklng is effective immedi-
ately, and is Issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, M
amended. 42 U.S.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: January 24, 1976.
STANLEY W. LECRO,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations Is amended
as follows:
1. In {61.04, paragraph (b) IB
amended by adding subparagraphs
(WW) (vl) and (vil) to read as follows:
§ 61.04 Address.
• • • • »
(b> • ' *
(WW) * * •
(vl) Olympic Air Pollution Control Au-
thority, 120 East State Avenue, Olympia,
Washington 08601.
(vll) Southwest Air Pollution Control Au-
thority, Suite 7601 H, NE Hazel Dell Avenue,
Vancouver, Washington 98865.
* • • • •
|FB Doc 78-2674 Filed 1-28-78:8:46 ami
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 41, NO. 20— THURSDAY, JANUARY 2«,
CV-59
-------
14
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Oregon
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of Oregon on November 10.
1975, EPA Is today amending 40 CFR
61.04, Address, to reflect this delegation.
A Notice announcing this delegation is
published today at 41 PR 7749 in the
FEDERAL REGISTER. The amended £61.04,
which adds the address of Oregon De-
partment of Environmental Quality to
which all reports, requests, applications,
submittals, and communications pursu-
ant to this part must be addressed, is set
forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective im-
mediately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
November 10, 1975, and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of
this addition of the State address to the
Code of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended. 42 U.S.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: February 11,1976.
STANLEY W. LEGKO,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In § 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparagraph (MM) to read
as follows:
| 61.04 Address.
• • * * *
(b) * * *
(A)-(L) ' * *
(MM)—State of Oregon, Department
of Environmental Quality, 1234 SW Mor-
rison Street, Portland, Oregon 97205.
• • • • •
|FR Doc.76-4963 Filed 2-19-76:8.45 am]
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOl. 41, NO. 33-
-FRIDAY, FEBRUARY 20, 1976
RULES AND REGULATIONS
15
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to Commonwealth
of Virginia
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the Commonwealth of Virginia on De-
cember 30, 1975, EPA is today amending
40 CFR 61.04, Address, to reflect this
delegation. A Notice announcing this
delegation is published today at 41 FR
8416 In the FEDERAL REGISTER. The
amended 5 61.04, which adds the address
of the Virginia State Air Pollution Con-
trol Board to which all reports, requests,
applications, submittals, and communi-
cations to the Administrator pursuant to
this part must also be addressed, is set
forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective Imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are Imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
December 30, 1975, and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of
this address to the Code of Federal Reg-
ulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended, 42 UJ3.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: February 21, 1976.
STANLEY W. LEGRO,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In § 61.04, paragraph (b) is amend-
ed by revising subparagraph (W) to
read as follows:
861.01 Address.
(b) • • •
(A)-(UU) * • •
(W) Commonwealth of Virginia, Vir-
ginia State Air Pollution Control Board,
Room 1106. Ninth Street Office Build-
ing, Richmond. Virginia 33219.
[FR Doc.7«-«505 Filed 3-35-76;8:45 Mil]
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 41, NO. 39-
-1HURSDAV, FESRUARV 26, 1976
PART SI—NATIONAL EMISSION STAMC-
AMOS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of
Connecticut
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS)
to the State of Connecticut on Decem-
ber 9, 1975, EPA Is today amending 40
CFR 61.04. Address, to reflect this dele-
gation. A Notice announcing this delega-
tion is published today at (41 FR 11874)
In the FEDERAL REGISTER. The amended
I 61.04, which adds the address to the
Connecticut Department of Environ-
mental Protection to which all reports,
requests, applications, submittals, and
communications to the Administrator
pursuant to this part must also be ad-
dressed, is set forth below.
The Administrator finds good cauM
for foregoing prior public notice and
for making this rulemaking effective im-
mediately In that it is an administra-
tive change and not one of substantive
content. No additional substantive
burdens are Imposed on the parties af-
fected. The delegation which is reflected
by this administrative amendment was
effective on December 9, 1975, and it
serves no purpose to delay the technical
change of this addition of the State ad-
dress to the Code of Federal Regula-
tions.
This rulemaking is effective Immedi-
ately, and is Issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, M
amended.
(49 0J3.C. 18S7C-7)
Dated: March 15, 1976.
STANLEY W. Lxcao,
Atsittant Administrator
of Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations Is amended
ai follows:
In I 61.04 paragraph (b) Is amended
by revising subparagraph (H) to read M
follows:
161.04 Address.
• • • * »
(b) • • •
(H) State of Connecticut, Department
of Environmental Protection, State Offce
Building, Hartford, Connecticut Ml IB.
• « • • • /
[FR Doo.76-7968 Filed 8-18-7fl;8:4B «m]
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOl. 41, NO. 56-
-MONDAy, MARCH », We
IV-60
-------
tULES AND IEGULATIONS
17 (W.M0-*]
.MRT 61— NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Detegatkm of Authority to Commonwealth
OfMMMChUMttS
Funwuft to «M delegation of «o-
tborltr for National BotatoD 8teod-
anto (or Hazardous Air Pollutants
OQESHAPB) to the Commonwealth of
Massachusetts on January 23, 1976, EPA
to today amending 40 CFR 61.04, "Ad-
dress, to reflect this delegation. A Notice
announcing this delegation Is published
In the Notices section of today's FEDIRAL
RsoBTn. The amended { 61.04, which
adds the address of the Massachusetts
Engineering, Division of Air Quality
Control, to which all reports, requests,
applications, submlttals, and communi-
cations to the Administrator pursuant to
this part must also be addressed, Is set
forth below.
. The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
w»«irtngr this rulemaking effective im-
mediately In that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent No additional substantive burden*
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which Is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
January 23, 1976, and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of thta
addition of the State address to the Code
«C Federal Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective Immedi-
ately, and to issued under the authority
oT Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
42 UJB.C. 18670-7.
Dated: May 9, 1976.
BXAHLEY W. Ixomo,
Auittant Administrator
of Enforcement.
.Phi* 61 of Chapter X. Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations to amended
a* follows:
In 1 61.04- paragraph to amended
ky revising subparagraph (W) to read
as follows:
f 61.04 Addrcw.
.* • • » •
(b) • • •
(W) Massachusetts "Department of
fcvlronmental Quality Engineering.
Division of Air Quality Control, 600
Washington Street, Boston, Massachu-
setts Mill..
(VB Doo.Te-U8M FU*1 5-lft-7«;t:4ft am]
[FBL539-3]
PART-JB1—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of New
Hampshire
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of New Hampshire on Febru-
ary 17, 1976, EPA Is today amending 40
CFR 61.04, "Address." to reflect this dele-
gation. A Notice announcing this delega-
tion Is published in the Notices section of
today's FBDKHAL RIGISTKR. The amended
161.04, which adds the address of the
New Hampshire Air Pollution Control
Agency to which all reports, requests, ap-
plications, submittals, and communica-
tions to the Administrator pursuant to
this part must also be addressed is set
forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaklng effective imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and riot one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burden;;
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by tills ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
February 17, 1976, and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of this
addition of the State address to the Code
of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaking Is effective Immedi-
ately, and is issued under tha authority
of Section 112 of-the Clean Air Act, as
amended. 42 U.S.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: May 3,1876.
STANLEY W. LEGRO,
Assistant Administrator
for Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations Is amended
as follows:
In { 61.04 paragraph (b) Is amended
by revising subparagraph (EE) to read
as follows:
§ 61.04 AddroM.
* • » » •
(b) * • •
(EE) New Hampshire Air Pollution
Control Agency, Department of Health
and Welfare, State Laboratory Building,
Hazen Drive, Concord, New Hampshire
03301.
IPB Doc.76-13823 Filed 5-12-7fl;8:45 «n]
•aeisnt, VOL 4i, MO. w—THUMOAY, MAY 11, tw
IV-61
-------
It
PART «1—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
A?55 ro" HAZARDOUS AIM POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to Statt of Cali-
fornia on Bahalf of Ventura County and
Northern Sonoma County Air Pollution
Control Districts
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAP8) to
the State of California on behalf of the
Ventura County Air Pollution Control
District and the Northern Sonoma
County Air Pollution Control District,
dated February 2, 1976, EPA is today
amending 40 CFR 61.04, Address to re-
flect this delegation. A Notice announc-
ing this delegation Is published today in
the Notices section of this issue, The
amended I 61.04 is set forth below. It
adds the addresses of the Ventura
County and Northern Sonoma County
Air Pollution Control Districts, to which
must be addressed all reports, requests,
applications, submlttals, and communi-
cations pursuant to this part by sources
subject to the NESHAPS located within
these Air Pollution Control Districts.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaklng effective imme-
diately In that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent-No additional substantive burdens
are Imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
February 2, 1976, and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of this
addition of the Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict addresses to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations Is amended
as follows:
1. Section 61.04(b) is amended by
revising subparagranh (F) to read as
follows:
161.04 Address.
• • • • •
tb) • • •
(F) California—
Be,y Area Air Pollution Control District,
MO EUla St., Baa Franclsoo, CA 94109.
Del Nort* County Air Pollution Control
DUtrlct, Courthouse, Crescent City, CA
M031.
Humboldt County Air Pollution Control
Dtrtrlet, MOO 8. Broadway. Bureka, CA 95601.
Kara County Atr Pollution Control Dtotrlct,
1700 flower St. (P.O. Box 997), Bakenfleld,
OA9SM3.
IMISTi*. VOL. 41, NO. 103—WfDNESOAY, MAY 26, 1*76
RULIS AND REGULATIONS
Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Oontrel
District, 430 Church St. (P.O. Box 487), I*.
linns, CA 93901.
Northern Sonoma County Air Pollution
Control District, 8818 Ohanata Rd., Saata
Rosa, CA 95404.
Trinity County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, Box A J, Weavervule, OA 06008.
Ventura county Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 63B E. State Clara St., Ventura, OA
B3001. T>
This rule making is effective Immedi-
ately,
(Hoc. 113 of the Clean Air Act, as amende*
|48UB,C, 18870-7 J).
Dated: May 3,1976.
BxAin.rrW.Lmo,
Asiittant Admlfttotroior
/orJEn/proement.
|FR DOC 79-18386 Filed 8-88-70:8:4S am)
KOHAi MOUTH,
VOL 41, NO. 120-
-MONOAY. JUNI 11, 1976
1 9 TttJa 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
8UBCHAPTIR C—AIR PROGRAMS
[FR1, 864-4]
NEW SOURCE REVIEW
Delegation of Authority to the State of
Georgia
The amendments below institute cer-
tain address changes for reports and ap-
plications required from operators of new
sources, EPA has delegated to the State
of Georgia authority to review new and
modified sources. The delegated author-
ity includes the reviews under 40 CFR
Part S3 for the prevention of significant
deterioration. It also Includes the review
under 40 CFR Part 60 for the standards
of performance for new stationary
sources and review under 40 CFR Part
61 for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants.
A notice announcing the delegation of
authority is published elsewhere In the
Notices section this issue of the FEDERAL
REGISTER. These amendments provide
that all reports, requests, applications,
submlttals. and communications previ-
ously required for the delegated reviews
will now be sent instead to the Envi-
ronmental Protection Division, Georgia
Department of Natural Resources, 270
Washington Street SW., Atlanta, Georgia
30334, Instead of EPA's Region IV.
The Regional Administrator finds good
cause for foregoing prior public notice
and for making tills rulemaklng effective
immediately in that it is an administra-
tive change and not one of substantive
content. No additional substantive bur-
dens are Imposed on the parties affected.
The delegation which Is reflected by this
administrative amendment was effective
on May 3, 1976, and It serves no pur-
pose to delay- the technical change of
this addition of the State address to the
Code of Federal regulations.
This rulemaklng Is effective Immedi-
ately, and is Issued under the authority
of Sections 101, 110. 111. 112 and 301 of
the Clean Air Act, as amended 42 UJ3.C.
1857,18570- 6, 6, 7 and 1857g.
Dated: June 11,1976.
JACK E. RAVAN,
Regional AdmlnUtrator.
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
DELEGATION or AUTHORITY TO THE
STATE or GEORGIA
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40, Code of
Federal Regulations, is amended as fol-
lows:
3. In 9 61.04, paragraph (b> (L) Is re-
vised to read as follows:
§ 61.04 Address.
• • • » •
(b) • • •
(L) State of Georgia, Environmental Pro-
tection Division, Department of Natural Re-
sources, 370 Washington Street, S.W., At-
lanta, Georgia 30334.
* • • • •
[PR Doc.76-17911 Piled 8-18-76;8:4B am]
TV-ft?
-------
20
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Celt-
fomla on Behalf of Fresno, Mendoclno,
San Joaquln, and Saeramanto County
Air Pollution Control District!
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission atandards for
hazardous air pollutanta (NE8HAPS) to
the State of California on behalf of the
Fresno County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, the Mendoclno County Air Pollu-
tion Control District, the Baa Joaquln
County Air Pollution Control District,
and the Sacaramento County Air Pol-
lution Control District, dated March 39,
1976, EPA Is today amending 40 CPR
01.04, Address, to reflect this delegation.
A Notice announcing this delegation is
published today In the Notice Section
of this issue. The amended I 61,04 is set
forth below. It adds the addresses of the
Fresno County, Mendoclno County, Ban
Joaquln County, and Sacramento County
Air Pollution Control Districts, to which
must be addressed all reports, requests,
applications, aubmlttals, and commu-
nications pursuant to this pan by sources
subject to the NE8HAPS located within
these Air Pollution Control Districts.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior .public notice and for
making this nilemaUng effective im-
mediately In that it Is an administrative
change and not on* of substantive con-
tent No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which Is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment waa effective on
March 39,1976, and it serves no purpose
to delay the technical change of this ad-
dition of the Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict addresses to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
This rulemaking Is effective Immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of section 113 of the Clean Air Act, a*
amended [43 U.S.C. 1857c-7],
Dated: June 16,1976.
STANLEY W. LIORO,
Auiitant Administrator
for Enforcement.
Part 61 of Chapter X, Title 40, of the
Code of Federal Regulations, is amended
as follows:
1. In | 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparacraph F to read M
follows:
161.04 AddrcM.
• • * • •
(b) • • •
(A)-(E) • • •
(F) California:
Bay Area Air Pollution Control Dirtriet. Me
IUJ* St., Ban Francisco, OA 04109
Del Norte County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, Courthouse. Creacent City. CA 95681
Fresno County Air Pollution Control District,
S16 8. Cedar Avenue. Fresno. CA 93703
Humboldt County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict. 6600 & Broadway, Eureka, CA 96501
Kern County Air Pollution Control District,
1700 Flower St. (P.O. Box 997), Bakenfleld.
CA 93303
RULIS AND REGULATIONS
Mendoclno County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, County Courthouse, Uklah, OA 95481
Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Control
District, 430 Church St. (P.O. Box 487),
Salinas, OA 93901
Northern Sonoma County Air Pollution Con-
trol District, 8313 Chanate Bd., Santa Rosa,
CA 95404
Sacramento County Air Pollution Control
District, 3331 Stockton Bird, Sacramento,
OA 96897
Ban Joaquln County Air Pollution Control
District, 1801 I. EaMlton fit (P.O. Box
3008), Stockton, OA 95301
Trinity County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, Boi AJ. WeaTerrUle, OA 88008
Ventura County Air Pol)*ilon Control Dis-
trict, 836 I. Bant* Clara Bt, Ventura, OA
88001
• • • « •
|PB 000.76-18670 Filed 7-7-76:8:48 am]
HOIIAL UOISTIt, V0t 41, NO. 112
THURSDAY, JULY 8,
FiDERAL REGISTER, VOL 41, NO. 154
•MONDAY, AUGUST 9, 1976
21
[FRL597-2J
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Cali-
fornia on Behalf of Madera County Air
Pollution Control District
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of California on behalf of the
Madera County Air Pollution Control
District, dated May 12, 1976, EPA is today
amending 40 CFR 61,04, Address, to re-
flect this delegation. A Notice announc-
ing this delegation is published today In
the notices section of this Issue of the
FEDERAL REGISTER, Environmental Pro-
tection Agency, FRL 598-8. The amended
I! 61.04 is set forth below. It adds the ad-
dress of the Madera County to which
must be addressed all reports, requests,
applications, submittals, and communi-
cations pursuant to this part by sources
subject to the NESHAPS located within
Air Pollution Control District.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective imme-
diately In that it is an administrative
rhange and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
May 12,1976, and it serves no purpose to
delay the technical change of this addi-
tion of the Air Pollution Control District
address to the Code of Federal Regula-
tions.
This rule making la effective Immedi-
ately, and Is Issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, ns
amended [42 U.8.C. 1857C-7].
Dated: July 27,1976,
PAUL DCFALCO,
Regional Administrator,
Region IX, EPA.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
B" follows:
1. In I 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended'
by revising subparagraph F to read M
follows:
§61.04 AddrrM.
r — CALIFORNIA
Bny Area Pollution Control District, 939
Bills St., San Francisco, CA 94109
Del Norte County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, Courthouse, Crescent City, CA 95531
Fresno County Air Pollution Control District,
615 S, Cedar Avenue, Fresno, CA 93703
Humboldt County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 5600 8. Broadway, Eureka, CA 95501
Kern County Air Pollution Control District,
1700 Flower St. (P.O. Box 997), Bakersfleld,
CA 93302
Madera County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 135 W. Yosemlte Avenue, Madera,
CA 93637
Mendoclno County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, County Courthouse, Uklah, CA 95463
Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Control
District, 420 Church St. (P.O. Box 487),
Salinas, CA 03001
Northern Sonoma County Air Pollution Con-
trol District, 3313 Chanate Bd., Santa Rosa,
CA 95404
Sacramento County Air Pollution Control
District. 2221 Stockton Blvd , Sacramento,
CA 95827
San Joaquln County AJr Pollution Control
District, 1601 E. Hazelton St. (P.O. Box
2009), Stockton, CA 95201
Trinity County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, Box AJ, Weavervllle, CA 96093
Ventura County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 625 E. Santa Clara St., Ventura, CA
93001
|FR Doc.76-23147 Filed 8-6-76; 8: 45 am]
IV-6 3
-------
tULES AND lEGUlATIONS
22
IFHLeoo-81
PART 61— NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to the U.S.
Virgin Islands
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
to lor national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the UJS. Virgin islands on June 30, 1978,
EPA to today amending 40 CPR 61.04,
Address, to reflect this delegation. A No-
tice announcing this, delegation- is pub-
lished at page 34685 of today's Fnmu,
ItanmiL The amended 1 61.04, which
adds the address of the UA Virgin Is-
lands Department of -Conservation and
Cultural Affairs, to which all reports, re-
quests, applications, submlttals, and
to ttitt Administrator
23
pursuant to this part most also be ad-
dressed, to set forth below.
Hie Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and tor
TTvfnr.y ti-ifrt rulemaklng effective imme-
diately in that It to an admlntotMtive
change and not one of substantive con-
tent No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by ihto ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
June 30, 1976) and It serves no purpose
to delay the technical change of this
addition of the UJ3. Virgin Islands ad-
drees to the Code of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaklng to effective immedi-
ately, and to Issued under the authority
of Section 113 of the Clean Air Act, as
•mended.
(4* VA.O. 1MTO-7)
Dated: August 4, 1976.
• GflULD 141. P*""-"q.
SectonoZ Administrator,
JtevhmH.
Bart 61 tf Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations to amended
as follows:
1. to I 61.04 paragraph (
by revising subparagrapb (CCO to read
as follows:
161.04 AddreM.
• • • • •
(b) • • •
(BBB) • • •
— UJ3. Virgin Islands: TJ.S. Vir-
gin Islands Department of Conservation
and Cultural Affairs, P.O. Box 578, Char-
lotte Amalle, 8t. Thomas, U.B. Virgin
lalandTOOaol,
Doo.7e-988M Filed 8-13-7«;8:4S am]
-------
Tltfe 40— Protection ol Environment
CHAPTER I— ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
[FBI. 819-1]
SUBCHAPTER C— AIR PROGRAMS
PART 60— STANDARDS Of PERFORM-
ANCE FOR NEW STATIONARY SOURCES
PART 61— NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Reports and Applications From Operators
of New Sources; Address Changes
DELEGATION or AUTHORITY TO THI SXAT*
or ALABAMA
The amendments below institute cer-
tain address changes for reports and ap-
plications required from operators of new
sources. EPA has delegated to the State
of Alabama authority to review new and
modified sources. The delegated author-
ity includes the review under 40 CFB Part
60 for the standards of performance for
new stationary sources and review under
40 CFR Part 61 for national emission
standards for hazardous air pollutants.
A notice announcing the delegation of
authority is published elsewhere in this
issue of the FEDERAL REGISTER. These
amendments provide that all reports, re-
quests, applications, submlttals, and
communications previously reuired for
the delegated reviews will now be sent
Instead to the Air Pollution Control Divi-
sion, Alabama Air Pollution Control
Commission, 645 South McDonough
Street, Montgomery, Alabama 36104, In-
stead of EPA's Region IV.
The Regional Administrator finds good
cause for foregoing prior public notice
and for making this rulemaklng effective
Immediately in that It is an administra-
tive change and not one of substantive
content. No additional substantive bur-
dens are imposed on the parties affected.
The delegation which is reflected by thte
administrative amendment was effective
on August 5, 1876. and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of
this addition of the State adores* to the
Code of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaklng is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of sections 111, 112, and 301 of the Clean
Air Act, as amended 42 U.S.C. 1867,
1857C-5, 6, 7 and 1857g.
Dated: September 9, 1976.
JACK E. LAVAS,
Regional Administrator.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40, Code of
Federal Regulations, Is amended as fol-
lows:
2. In I 61.04, paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparagraph (B) to read as
follows :
§ 61.04 Address.
26
RULES AND REGULATIONS
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to the State of
Indiana
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of Indiana on April 21, 1976,
EPA is today amending 40 CFR 61.04,
Address, to reflect this delegation. A no-
tice announcing this delegation is pub-
lished Thursday, September 30, 1976 (41
FR 43237). The amended 5 61.04, which
adds the address of the Indiana Air Pol-
lution Control Board to that list of ad-
dresses to which all reports, requests, ap-
plications, submittals, and communica-
tions to the Administrator pursuant to
this part must be sent, is set forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaklng cffdctive im-
mediately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
April 21, 1976, and it serves no purpose
to delay the technical change of this
addition of the State address to the Code
of Federal Regulations.
This ruiemaking is effective Immedi-
ately.
(Sec. 112 of the denn All ji ns ninrndcd.
49 U.S.C. 1857C-7.)
Dated: September 22,1976.
GEORGE R. ALEXANDER. Jr.,
Regional Administrator.
Fart 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1, In 61.04, paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparagraph P, to read as
follows:
8 61.04 AHdr,-»«.
* * * • •
(b) • • •
(A)-(O) • • •
(P) State of Indiana. Indiana Air 1'ollu-
tloo Control Board, 1330 West Michigan
Street, Indianapolis, Indiana 46208.
|PB Doe.76-28507 Filed 9-29-78:8:45 am)
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 41, NO. 191
THURSDAY, SEPTEMBER 30, 197<
27
Title 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS
|FRL629-8|
PART 60— STANDARDS OF PERFORM-
ANCE FOR STATIONARY SOURCES
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLU-
TANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of
North Dakota
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for the standards of performance for
new sources (N8PS) and national emis-
sion standards for hazardous air pol-
lutants (NESHAPS) to the State of
North Dakota on August 30, 1976, EPA
is today amending respectively 40 CFR
60.4 and 61.04 Address, to reflect this
delegation. A notice announcing this del-
egation Li published today In the notices
section. The amended t! 60.4 and 61.04
which add the address of the North Da-
kota State Department of Health to
which all reports, requests, applications.
submittals, and communications to the
Administrator pursuant to these parts
must also be addressed, are set forth
below.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this ruiemaking effective imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
August 30, 1976, and It serves no purpose
to delay the technical change of thin
addition to the State address to the Code
of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaklng is effective Immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of sections 111 and 113 of the Clean Air
Act, as amended, (42 U.S.C. 1BS7C-6 and
-7).
Dated: October 1,1976.
JOHN A. GREEN,
Regional Administrator.
Parts 60 and 61 of Chapter I, Title 40
of the Code of Federal Regulations are
respectively amended as follows:
2. In 161.04, paragraph (b) Is
amended by revising -subparagraph (JJ)
to read as follows:
§61.04 Addrcie.
(b) • • »
(A)-(Z) • • •
(AA)-(ZZ) • • •
(JJ)—State of North Dakota, State Ds-
partment of Health. State Capitol, Bismarck,
"""•"i Dakota 08501.
(B) State of Alabama, Air Pollution Con-
trol Division, Air Pollution Control Commis-
sion. 646 8. McDonough Street, Montgomery,
Alabama 36104.
fSR Doc.78-27367 Filed 9-17-76:8:45 am]
HDHA1 RIGlSTit, VOL. 41, NO. Ill—MONDAY, SIPTIMMt 20,
IFB Doc.76-30020 Filed 10-13-76:8:45 am]
FEDERAL RIOISTM, VOL. 41, NO. 199—WiDNHOAY, OCTOMR 13, 1974
IV-6 5
-------
Title 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
•UBCHAPTCR C—AIR PROQRAM*
[FRL 818-1]
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND*
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Standard for Vinyl Chloride
On December 24, 1875, under section
112 of the Clean Air Act, as amended (42
U.S.C. 1857), the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency (EPA) added vinyl chloride
to the list of hazardous air pollutants
(40 PR 59477) and proposed a national
emission standard for It (40 FR 59532).
The standard covers plants which manu-
facture ethylene dlchloride, vinyl
chloride, and/or polyvlnyl chlorl^a,
EPA decided to regulate vinyl chloride
because It has been Implicated as the
causal agent of angiosarcoma and other
serious disorders, both carcinogenic and
noncardnogenlc, In people with occupa-
tional exposure and in animals with ex-
perimental exposure to vinyl chloride.
Reasonable extrapolations from these
findings cause concern that vinyl chlo-
ride may cause or contribute to the same
or similar disorders at present ambient
air levels. The purpose of the standard Is
to minimize vinyl chloride emissions
from all known process and fugitive
emission sources In ethylene dlchlorlde-
vlnyl chloride and polyvlnyl chloride
plants to the level attainable with best
available control technology. This will
have the effect of furthering the protec-
tion of public health by minimizing the
health risks to the people living in the
vicinity of these'plants and to any addi-
tional people who are exposed as a result
of new construction.
Interested parties participated in the
rulemaking by sending comments to EPA.
The comments have been carefully con-
sidered, and where determined by the
Administrator to be appropriate, changes
have been made to the regulation as pro-
mulgated.
SUMMARY OF THE STANDARD
In ethylene dichloride-vlnyl chloride
plants, the standard limits vinyl chloride
emissions from the ethylene dlchloride
and vinyl chloride formation and puri-
fication processes to 10 ppm. For the ox-
ychlorlnatlon process, vinyl chloride
emissions are limited to 0.2 g/kg of ethyl-
ene dichloride product.
In polyvlnyl chloride plants, the stand-
ard limits,vinyl chloride emissions from
equipment preceding and Including the
stripper In the plant process flow to 10
ppm. Emissions from equipment follow-
ing the stripper'are to be controlled by
stripping dispersion resins to 2000 ppm
and other resins to 400 ppm, or by using
equivalent controls. Vinyl chloride emis-
sions from reactor opening are to be re-
duced to 0.02 g/kg polyvinyl chloride
product.
In both ethylene dichlorlde-vinyl
chloride and polyvinyl chloride plants,
relief valve discharges and manual vent-
Ing of gases are prohibited except under
emergency conditions. Fugitive emissions
RULES AND REGULATIONS
are required to be captured and con-
trolled,
HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
EPA prepared a document entitled the
Quantitative Risk Assessment for Com'
munity Exposure to Vinyl Chloride which
estimates the risk from vinyl chloride
exposure to populations living In the vi-
cinity of vinyl chloride-emitting plants
before and after Implementation of con-
trols to meet the standard. There are no
dose-response data, for the concentra-
tions of vinyl chloride found in the am-
bient air. Therefore, assessments of risk
'•at ambient levels of exposure were ex-
trapolated from dose-response data from
higher levels of exposure using both a
linear model and a, log-probit model.
Extrapolations made with each of these
models entailed using different sets of
assumptions. Because different assump-
tions can be made In extrapolating to
low doses, the health risks are reported
in ranges.
, It was estimated that 4.6 million peo-
ple-live within 5 miles of ethylene dicho-
rlde-vinyl chloride and polyvlnyl chlo-
ride plants and that the average ex-
posure around these plants before instal-
lation of control* to meet the standard
is 17 parts per billion. The exposure
levels for uncontrolled plants were cal-
culated based on estimated 1974 emis-
sion levels. Using the linear dose-re-
sponse model, EPA found that the
rate of initiation of liver angiosarcoma
among people living around uncontrolled
plants Is expected to range from less than
one to ten cases of liter angiosarcoma
per year of exposure to vinyl chloride.
The log-probit model gave predictions
that are 0.1 to 0.01 times this rate. This
wide range is an indication of the un-
certainties In extrapolation to low doses.
Due to the long latency time observed In
cancer cases resulting from vinyl chloride
exposure, increases Initiated by exposure
this year will not be diagnosed until the
1990's or later. Vinyl chloride is also es-
timated to produce an equal number of
primary cancers at other sites, for a total
of somewhere between less than one and
twenty cases of cancer per year of ex-
posure among residents around plants.
The number of these effects is expected
to be reduced at least in proportion to the
reduction in the ambient annual average
vinyl chloride concentration, which is
expected to be 5 percent of the uncon-
trolled levels after the standard Is Im-
plemented. .
Changes In the standard since pro-
posal do not affect the level of control
required. Thus, the environmental Im-
pact of the promulgated standard is,
with one exception, the same as that
described in Chapter 6 of Volume I of
the Standard Support and Environmen-
tal Impact Statement. According to data
submitted by the Society of Plastics In-
dustry, Inc. (SPI), the impact on water
consumption in the draft environmental
impact statement was overstated. In es-
timating the impact on water consump-.
tlon, EPA based its estimates on worst
' case conditions. That is, EPA assumed
that those control systems with the
greatest water usage would be employed
and that there would be no recycling
of water. There is no regulation which
would require water recycling. Accord*
ing to SPI, the control system utilizing
the most water will not be used gener-
ally by the Industry and economic fac-
tors will cause plants to recycle much
of the water. Therefore, according to
SPI the impact of the standard on water
consumption will be negligible.
The environmental impacts of the
promulgated standard may be summar-
ized as follows: The primary environ-
mental impacts of the standard are ben-
eficial and will consist of vinyl chloride
emission reductions of approximately 94
percent at ethylene dlchloride-vinyl
chloride plants and 95 percent at poly-
vinyl chloride plants. Percentage num-
bers for both source categories are based,
on an estimated 80 percent reduction In
fugitive emissions and 1974 emission
levels.
The potential secondary environmen-
tal impacts of the standard are either
insignificant or will be minimized with-
out additional action, except for one ad-
verse impact. Hydrogen chloride is al-
ready emitted by process equipment at
ethylene dlchlorlde-vmyl chloride plants
and by other petrochemical plants in the
complexes where ethylene dichlorlde-
vinyl chloride plants are typically lo-
cated. An incinerator used to attain the
standard at an ethylene dichloride-vlnyl
chloride plant could increase hydrogen
chloride emissions by several fold. Typi-
cally, however, due to the corrosion prob-
lems which would otherwise occur both
on plant property and in the community,
plants use scrubbers to control already
existing hydrogen chloride emissions.
Hydrogen chloride emissions resulting
from control of vinyl chloride emissions
are expected to be controlled for the
same reason. If even a moderately effi-
cient scrubber (98 percent control) were
used to control the hydrogen chloride
emissions resulting from incineration of
vinyl chloride emissions, the Increase In
hydrogen chloride emissions from a typ-
ical ethylene dlchloride-vinyl chloride
plant due to the standard would be re-
duced to 35 percent. However, EPA plans
to further evaluate the need to control
hydrogen chloride emissions, since dif-
fusion model results indicate that under
"worst-case" meteorological conditions,
the hydrogen chloride emissions from
the process equipment and the incinera-
tor combined would cause maximum am-
bient concentrations of hydrogen chlo-
ride in the vicinity of ethylene dichlo-
ride-vinyl chloride plants to be in the
same range or somewhat higher than
existing foreign standards and National
Academy of Sciences (NAS) guidelines
for public exposure.
ECONOMIC IMPACT
In accordance with Executive Order
11821 and OMB circular A-107, EPA
carefully evaluated the economic and'
Inflationary impact of the proposed
standard and alternative control levels
and certified this in the preamble to the
proposed standard. These Impacts are
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 41, NO. 205—THURSDAY, OCTOBER 21, 1976
IV-6 6
-------
discussed la Chapter 7 of Volume 1 of
the Standard Support and Environmen-
tal Impact Statement. Comments on the
proposed standard have resulted In only
one major change In the economic Im-
pact analysis. SPA estimated that there
would be four plant closures as a result
of the promulgated standard. Of the four
plants Identified as possible closure can-
didates, one has given notice that it no
longer produces polyvlnyl chloride and
the other three have indicated that they
do not Intend to close as a result of the
standard.
The economic Impacts of the promul-
gated standard may be summarized as
follows: The total capital cost for exist-
ing plants to meet the standard is esti-
mated to be (198 million, of which $15
million is for ethylene dichloride-vinyl
chloride plants and (183 million Is for
polyvlnyl chloride plants. EPA estimates
that these plants will have to spend (70
million per year to maintain the required
emission levels. In addition, the total
capital cost for existing plants to meet
the EPA's 1983 water effluent guideline
limitations is expected to be (83 million
and the total ahnualized operation cost
Is (17 million. The costs to the Industry
of meeting the OSHA standard cannot be
quantified at this time, but they are ex-
pected to overlap to some degree with the
costs to meet EPA's fugitive emission
regulations. The costs of meeting the
fugitive emission regulations are Included
in the total costs cited above for meeting
the promulgated regulation. Broken out
separately, the capital cost of meeting
the fugitive emission regulations is (37
million and the annuallzed cost Is (25
million.
The standard is not expected to deter
construction of new ethylene dlchlorlde-
vlnyl chloride plants or most types of
new polyvlnyl chloride plants. For one
type of polyvinyl chloride plant (disper-
sion process) that represents 13 percent
of the industry production, the standard
would; significantly deter the construc-
tion of smaller plants.
.It is estimated that the price of poly-
vlnyl chloride resins will rise by approxi-
mately 7.3 percent In order to maintain
precontrol profitability and also to re-
cover the total annualized control costs
necessitated by the standard at ethylene
dlchloride-vlnyl chloride plants and poly-
vlnyl chloride plants. This Increase Is
estimated to translate into a maximum
consumer price Increase in goods fabri-
cated from polyvlnyl chloride resins of
approximately 3.S percent. Recovery of
effluent annuallzed costs plus mainte-
nance of precontrol profitability Is esti-
mated to add approximately 2 percent to
polyvlnyl chloride resin prices and result
In an additional maximum consumer
price Increase of 1 percent.
PUBLIC PARTICIPATION
During the public comment period, 50
comment letters on the proposed stand-
ard were received. There were 24 from
industry; 3 from environmental groups;
15 from Federal, State, and local agen-
cies; and 8 from Individual citizens. As
required by section 112 (b) (1) (B) of the
RULES AND REGULATIONS
, Act, a public hearing was held on the
proposed standard on February 3, 1978,
in Washington, D.C. Presentations were
made by the Environmental Defense
Fund, the Society of the Plastics Indus-
try, Inc., Dow Chemical Company, Dia-
mond Shamrock Corporation, and Air
Products and Chemicals, Inc. Copies of
the comment letters received, the public
hearing record,-and a summary of the
comments with EPA's responses are
available for public Inspection and copy-
Ing at the EPA Public Information Ref-
erence Unit, Room 2922 (EPA Library),
401 M Street, SW., Washington, D.C. In
addition, copies of the comment .sum-
mary and Agency responses may be ob-
tained upon written request from the
Public Information Center (PM-218),
Environmental Protection Agency, 401
M Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20400
(specify Standard Support and Environ-
mental Impact Statement, Emission
Standard for Vinvl Chloride, Volume //).
SIGNIFICANT COMMENTS AND CHANGES TO
TUB PROPOSED REGULATION
(1) Decision to list vinyl chloride at a
hazardous air pollutant. In general, the
commenters did not contest EPA's deci-
sion to list vinyl chloride as a hazardous
air pollutant. However, three comment-
ers (two companies and one Federal
agency) argued that EPA placed undue
emphasis on factors suggesting that vinyl
chloride presented a health risk and
Ignored factors suggesting that no sig-
nificant risk was involved. Under section
112, however, EPA could remove vinyl
chloride from the list of hazardous air
pollutants only If Information were pre-
sented to EPA that shows that vinyl
chloride Is clearly not a hazardous air
pollutant. As discussed more fully in the
comment summary, the commenters did
not provide conclusive evidence that vinyl
chloride is not a hazardous air pollutant
which causes or contributes to death or
serious Illness, nor did they conclusively
prove that the health risk factors em-
phasized by EPA were insignificant.
Several other commenters agreed with
EPA's decision to list vinyl chloride as a
hazardous air pollutant, but argued that
EPA had overstated the health problem,
the emission levels, and the projected
ambient air concentrations around un-
controlled plants. With regard to the al-
leged overstated health problem, the
commenters stated, for example, that the
U.S. worker EPA discussed as having
been exposed to vinyl chloride levels low-
er than those usually encountered In
polyvlnyl chloride production has been
dropped from the National Institute of"
Occupational Safety and Health's listing
of workers with anglosarcoma. EPA
agrees that there are questions concern-
Ing the level of exposure and In some
cases the pathology of these cases not
involved directly In polyvinyl chloride
and vinyl chloride production. These un-
certainties are stated In the appropriate
footnotes ot the Scientific and Technical
Assessment Report on Vinyl Chloride and
Polyvinyl Chloride (STAR) where the
angiosarcoma cases are listed. However,
in spite of these uncertainties, in view of
the possible exposure patterns, these
oases cannot be Ignored In the evaluation
of the potential public health problems.
With regard to the alleged overstated
emission levels, the uncontrolled emis-
sion levels reported by EPA were based
on 1974 data. This qualification was
stated wherever emission data were pre-
sented. EPA recognizes that emissions
have been reduced since that time, and
stated this in the preamble to the pro-
posed standard. EPA decided not to
gather more recent data on emission'
levels, because these emission levels are
expected to change, and gathering the
data would take considerable time, both
on the part of EPA and on the part of
industry. Since the purpose of the stand-
ard is to minimize emissions, these more
current data would not affect the stand-
ard itself. The 1974 emission levels were
also used in diffusion modeling to project
maximum ambient air concentrations
around uncontrolled plants. These maxi-
mum air concentrations would probably
be lower if 1976 emission levels were used.
This would reduce the relative Impact
of the standard below that described In
the Standard Support and Environment
tal Impact Statement, but would not
affect the basis of the standard itself. •
(2) Approach for Regulating Vinyl
Chloride Under Section 112. Two ap-
proaches other than using best avail-
able control technology were suggested
by the commenters for regulating vinyl
chloride under section 112. The first was
to ban polyvlnyl chloride products for
which substitutes are currently available
and to gradually phase out other poly-
vlnyl chloride products as substitutes
are developed. '
In the preamble to the proposed stand-
ard EPA specified its reasons for not set-
ting a zero emission limit for vinyl
chloride, as follows: (1) There are bene-
ficial uses of vinyl chloride products for
which desirable substitutes are not read-
ily available; (2) there are potentially
adverse health and environmental Im-
pacts from substitutes which have not
been thoroughly studied; (3) there are a
number of employees, particularly in the
fabrication industries, who would be-
come at least temporarily unemployed;
and (4) control technology Is. available
which is capable of substantially reduc-
ing emissions of vinyl chloride into the
atmosphere.
EPA agrees that substitutes do exist or
could be manufactured for most poly-
vinyl chloride uses. However, in general,
these substitutes do not have some of the
more desirable characteristics of poly-
vlnyl chloride, such as nonflammablllty.
If vinyl chloride and polyvlnyl chloride
were banned, other substitutes with
these more desirable characteristics
would likely be developed. There is a risk
that these substitutes would also hare
adverse health or environmental effects.
Since , control measures are available
which can reduce vinyl chloride emis-
sions by 90 percent or more, It does not
seem prudent to reduce emissions by the
remaining percentage and take the risk
of introducing new untested chemicals
into the environment
FIDIRAL RIGISTER, VOL «1, NO. 205—THURSDAY, OCTOtIR 21, 1»7*
IV-67
-------
Another approach suggested by the
commenters was to base the standard for
each Individual emission point on cost
versus benefit. Several of the fugitive
emission sources were named specifically
as ones for which the costs of control
were substantially higher than the bene-
fits. Although EPA did determine a cost-
benefit ratio for the controls required
for a number of emission points, EPA
does not believe such a ratio is an appro-
priate basis on which to set a standard.
Section 111 of the Clean Air Act provides
for the development of standards based
on best control technology (considering
costs). Even under section ill, however,
standards are not based on a fine bal-
ancing of costs versus benefits. Instead,
costs are considered in terms of the af-
fordability of the control technology re-
quired to achieve a given emission level
and the economic Impact of possible
standards on the industry In ques-
tion. Unlike section 111, section 112 does
not explicitly provide for consideration-
of costs, so It would clearly be inappro-
priate to consider costs to a greater ex-
tent under section 112 than would be
done under section 111. As discussed In
the preamble to the proposed standard
for vinyl chloride, EPA believes costs
may be considered under section 112, but
only to a very limited extent; i.e., to
assure that the costs of control technol-
ogy are not grossly disproportionate to
the amount of emission reduction
achieved. In comparison with other
emission points, the costs of controlling
the fugitive emission sources mentioned
by the commenters are relatively small
compared with the amount of emission
reduction achieved.
Several commenters recommended
adding to the regulation a provision for
excess emissions during startup, shut-
down, and malfunction. EPA considered
this comment, and decided that this
addition is not necessary for the vinyl
chloride standard. Startup and shutdown
of the process has essentially no effect
on emissions to the atmosphere for poly-
vinyl chloride production, and technology
exists to avoid excess emissions during
startup and shutdown at ethylene dl-
chloridevinyl chloride plants. We do not
believe plants should be allowed to emit
excess emissions during malfunctions,
and therefore are requiring them to shut
down immediately.
(3) Selection of source categories* In
the preamble to the proposed standard
EPA recognized that some small research
and development facilities • may exist
where the emissions of vinyl chloride are
insignificant and covering these facilities
under the standard would be unnecessary
and inappropriate. However, EPA did not
have sufficient Information available to
clearly define which facilities should be
excluded from the standard, and
encouraged Interested parties to submit
such Information during the comment
period. Based on the information sub-
mitted, EPA decided to exempt poly-
vinyl chloride reactors and associated
eqfiipment from applicability of all parts
of the standard if the reactors are used
In research and development and have a
KUII5 AND REGULATIONS
capacity of no more than 0.19 m' (50
gal). Reactors in this size range can gen-
erally be found in a laboratory, whereas
the larger reactors are typically pilot
scale facilities. Emissions from laboratory
scale equipment are relatively small, and
application of the controls required by
the standard would be expensive and Im-
practical. EPA also decided to exempt re-
search "and development facilities con-
taining reactors greater than 0.19 m" (50
gal) and no more than 4.07 m* (1100 gal)
in capacity from all parts of the standard
except the 10 ppm limit for reactors,
strippers, monomer recovery systems, and
mixing, weighing and holding containers.
EPA decided not to require these facili-
ties to meet other parts of the standard
because of the technical problems in-
volved In doing so. For example, the
standard for reactor opening Is based In
part on reducing the frequency of open-
ing the reactor. Research and develop-
ment reactors have to be opened after
every batch for thorough cleaning. Also,
stripping technology is developed indi-
vidually for each resin in research and
development equipment. Therefore, at-
tainment' of the stripping limitations In
the research and development equipment
would not always be possible. The 4.07
m* (1100 gal) figure was selected as an
upper cut-off point because there are no
commercial reactors smaller than this.
(4) Emission limits. The only major
change in the emission limits between
proposal and promulgation is the addi-
tion of a provision for emergency manual
venting of vinyl chloride from reactors
to the atmosphere. The proposed stand-
ard prohibited all manual venting to the
atmosphere. In the preamble to the pro-
posed standard, EPA invited interested
persons to comment on whether permit-
ting manual venting to the atmosphere
could result in overall lower emissions.
There are several methods available for
preventing relief discharges from reac-
tors, one of which is manual venting of
part of the reactor contents for purposes
of cooling and reduction in pressure
within the reactor. The higher the tem-
perature and pressure within the reac-
tor, the greater the amount of vinyl
chloride which has to be removed to
bring the reactor under control. Manual
venting can be done at a lower pressure
than the pressure required to open the
relief valve. For this reason manual vent-
ing can result in lower emissions than
would occur by allowing the reactor to
discharge through the relief valve. Fur-
thermore, a manual vent valve is under
the control of an operator and can be
closed. A relief valve may become clogged
with resin and not close. The result
would be loss of all the reactor contents.
The contents of a reactor can be man-
ually vented to a gasholder or other hold-
ing vessel. However, in some cases, such
as during severe weather conditions, sev-
eral reactors may be out of control at
one time. There would be insufficient
holding capacity under these conditions
to manually vent the contents of all the
reactors to a gasholder. Therefore, when
all other measures to prevent relief valve
discharges have been exhausted, manual
venting will be permitted as a last resort
before the relief valve opens. The same
notification procedures are required for
manual venting to the atmosphere as are
required for relief discharges.
There are several changes In the nu-
merical emission limits in the promul-
gated standard. Except for the standard
for reactor opening loss, these changes
simply involve conversion to the Interna-
tional System of Units (SI). There was
an error Involved In the original calcula-
tion used to derive the standard for reac-
tor opening. Correcting this error dou-
bles the allowable emissions. It Is em-
phasized that the change in this stand-
ard Is a correction, and not a change in
the intent for the degree of control re-
quired.
The proposed standard required the
Installation of a rupture disc beneath
each relief valve to prevent leakage from
the relief valve. A provision has been
added to the promulgated standard so
that a rupture disc is not required If
the relief valve is tied into a process line
or recovery system. In this case, any
leakage from the relief valve would .be
contained.
The regulation for obtaining vinyl
chloride samples has been changed to an
operating procedure. The proposed-
standard stated that there were to be
no emissions from taking the samples.
Several commenters pointed out that the
use of the word "no" would make this
regulation impractical to enforce. There-
fore, the promulgated standard specifies
the operating procedure which EPA orig-
inally Intended to be used to control
this source. This revision is only a change
in wording and does not represent ft
change in the level of the standard.
The regulation for taking samples ha*
also been revised to apply only to sam-
ples containing at least 10 percent by
weight vinyl chloride. This is consistent
with the other parts of the standard
which apply to equipment "In vinyl
chloride service." "In vinyl chloride serv-
ice" distinguishes between situation*
where vinyl chloride is clearly Involved'.
and situations where vinyl chloride Is ft
minor component or contaminant, and',
as defined in promulgated §61.61(1).
means that a piece of equipment' con-
tains or contacts either a liquid that to
at least 10 percent by weight vinyl chlo-
ride or a gas that is at least 10 percent
by volume vinyl chloride.
The proposed standard required a vinyl'
chloride monitoring system for continu-
ously measuring vinyl chloride levels both
within the plant (for leak detection) and
within stacks. The proposed standard did
not outline required specifications for the
monitoring system.-except that it was to
analyze the samples with gas chromatog-
raphy, or if all hydrocarbons were as-
sumed to be vinyl chloride, with Infrared
spectrophotometry, flame ion detection,
or equivalent. It required that each plant -
submit a description of its monitoring:
system to EPA, so that EPA could deter*;
mine whether it was acceptable or not.
Comments were received indicating s>
need for EPA to specify some criteria for
judging the. acceptability of monitoring
systems. The accuracy of the monitor*
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 41, NO. 205—THURSDAY, OCTOMR 21, 1976
IV-6 8
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
ing system would be related to the fre-
'quency of calibration. Therefore, EPA
has Included in the promulgated stand-
ard requirements for the frequency of
calibration and procedures to be carried
out in the calibration of the monitoring
instruments.
The portable hydrocarbon detector re-
quired by the proposed standard was re-
quired to have a sensitivity of 5 ppm>
Comments were received indicating that
instruments in this sensitivity range are
delicate and require continuing mainte-
nance. The portable hydrocarbon detec-
tor is required for. leak detection and for
measuring vinyl chloride concentrations
Inside the equipment before opening it.
A 5 ppm sensitivity is not needed in
either case, and the required sensitivity
has been changed to 10 ppm in the pro-
mulgated standard.
The proposed standard contained a
•ingle regulation for compressors. The
promulgated standard-has separate regu-
lations for rotating and reciprocating
compressors. This is consistent with hav-
• ing separate regulations for rotating and
reciprocating pumps in both the pro-
posed and promulgated standards.
Section 61.66 of the proposed standard
provided for the use of equivalent meth-
ods of control which have been approved
by EPA. The promulgated standard re-
quires that the plant owner or operator
submit a request for determination of
equivalency within 30 days of the pro-
mulgation date if the alternative control
method is intended as the initial means
of control. The purpose of this Is to pro-
vide time for EPA to evaluate the method
before the plant has to be in compliance
(for existing sources, 90 days after the
promulgation date). EPA also suggests
that this request for determination of
equivalency be accompanied by a re-
quest for waiver of compliance pursuant
to section 112(c)(l)(B)(ii) of the Act.
The request for a waiver for compliance
should provide for the case where EPA
determines that a method is not equiv-
alent and the plant needs to purchase
other equipment. In no case will the
waiver of compliance be extended beyond
two years from the date of promulga-
tion.
There art several wording clarifica-
tions which have been made in the pro-
mulgated standard. The definition for
"in vinyl chloride service" (J 60.61(1))
has been clarified by stating that it
means equipment that contacts vinyl
chloride as well as equipment that con-
tains vinyl chloride. This would include
such equipment as agitators.
Words have been added in 5§ 61.62,
01.63, and 61.64 to clarify that the 10
•apm emission limits do not have to be
met when equipment has already been
opened in compliance with the regula-
tion for opening of equipment. Equip-
ment that has met the opening of
equipment regulation can contain more
than 10 ppm vinyl chloride and would be
in violation of the standard if this
ctatement were not included.
The requirements for stripping poly-
vinyl chloride resins to specified levels
have been revised In ||01.«4(e), 61.07
jCg)(3)(il), and 61.70(c) (2) (1) so that
measurement of the vinyl chloride levels
in the resins is to be made immediately
after stripping is completed rather than
as the resin is being transferred out of
the stripper. This allows a plant to carry
out operations In a stripper after strip-
ping has been completed but before it is
transferred out of the stripper. This is
consistent with the original intent of the
standard.
The regulation for loading and unload-
ing lines in §61.65(b)(l) has been re-
vised to clarify that it applies only to
lines that are disconnected after each
loading or unloading operation. Perma-
nently installed pipelines that are opened
infrequently for Inspection or mainte-
nance, for example, are covered by the
opening of equipment regulation rather
than the loading and unloading line
regulation.
The regulation for Inprocess waste-
water in the proposed standard could
have been misinterpreted to require in-
dividual treatment of wastewater
streams. Section 61.65 (b) (9) (1) of the
promulgated standard clarifies that
wastewater streams that are required to
be treated (i.e., those containing greater
than 10 ppm vinyl chloride) can be com-
bined to be treated. However, waste-
water streams that contain greater than
10 ppm vinyl chloride cannot be com-
bined with wastewater streams that con-
tain less than 10 ppm vinyl chloride be-
fore treatment; I.e., dilution cannot be
used to meet the standard.
The commenters recommended several
changes in the emission limits which
have not been incorporated Into the
promulgated standard. These are dis-
cussed in the following paragraphs.
It was recommended that the require-
ment for double mechanical seals on
pumps, compressors, and agitators be re-
moved because the single seals currently
used on this •equipment have small emis-
sions and are more reliable than double
mechanical seals. EPA is aware that each
fugitive -emission source, such as one
pump, taken by Itself causes relatively
small emissions. Fugitive emissions con-
sidered as a whole are a significant
source of emissions, however, and the in-
tent of the standard is to reduce these.
Double mechanical seal pumps are com-
monly used in the industry for emission
reduction. Sealless pumps or equivalent
systems are available as options to double
mechanical seals.
The commenters recommended In-
creasing the averaging time for the 10
ppm limits and the emission limits for
reactor opening and stripping to 30 days.
Some of the commenters apparently
thought that the 10 ppm limits had to be
met on an instantaneous basis. However,
since the performance test for determin-
ing compliance consists of three runs for
a minimum of an hour each, the aver-
aging time for the 10 ppm limit is at least
three hours. Increasing the averaging
time to 30 days for any of the emission
limits would permit higher peak emis-
sion levels. EPA has determined that this
is neither desirable nor necessary.
Some commenters requested that the
stripping levels for dispersion resins be
made the same as for other resins and
others requested that they be made less
stringent. EPA decided not to make the
standard for stripping dispersion resins
the same as for other resins because there
Is sufficient evidence to indicate that
these resins are more difficult to strip
than other resins. With regard to mak-
ing the stripping levels for dispersion
resins less stringent, only one of the. eight
manufacturers of dispersion resins spe-
cifically commented that the dispersion
resin standard should be made less
stringent. Only two of several grades of
dispersion resins made by this company
. cannot meet the 2,000 ppm limit. The
proposed standard takes Into considera-
tion that some resins are more difficult
to strip than others by providing for
averaging among different resins.
(5) Testing, reporting, and record-
keeping. There are several relatively
minor changes in the testing, reporting,
and recordkeeping requirements. A pro-
vision has been added to 5 61.67 which
requires that stack gas samples taken
with Test Method 106 are to be analyzed
within 24 hours. This Is consistent with
the requirements In the proposed Test
Method 106. The promulgated standard
also'specifies that in averaging the re-
sults of the three runs required by Test
Method 106, a time-weighted average is
to be used.
One commenter requested that the
oxygen content and moisture content be
specified fof the 10 ppm concentration
standards. The proposed standard speci-
fied that the vinyl chloride concentration
is to be corrected to 10 percent oxygen
(wet basis) if combustion is used as the
control measure. In the promulgated
standard, this requirement has been ex-
panded to all control measures.
A provision has been added to the
promulgated standard which states that
if a reactor is also used as a stripper, the
reactor opening emissions may be deter-
mined Immediately following the strip-
ping operation. If a reactor is also used
as a stripper, the resin Is in the reactor
when it Is opened. This means that vinyl
chloride in the resin which has already
been stripped to acceptable levels can
escape from the resin and become part
of the reactor opening loss. It is EPA's
intent that once a resin has been stripped
to the required levels, that additional
controls are not required. Under the new
provision, vinyl chloride escaping from
the resin after it has been stripped to
acceptable levels is not counted as part
of the reactor opening loss.
A section requiring continuous moni-
toring of stack emissions has been added
to the promulgated standard. The con-
tinuous monitoring of stack emissions
was required in the proposed standard.
The addition of a specific paragraph for
emission monitoring serves only to
clarify the requirement.
The standard has been revised so that
the initial report requires a "description"
rather than a "detailed description"-'of
the equipment used to control fugitive
emissions. Several commenters pointed
out that a detailed description .would
contain proprietary information. EPA
agrees that a detailed description la the
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 41, NO. 205—THURSDAY,-OCTOBER 21, 1976
IV-69
-------
•UU8 AND IIOUUTIONS
ID aOOOrdanee Wtth 40 CFB Part t
ft believes to to
to section M of Test Method 106 the
requirement far an eatomatto integrator
hat tote replaood with a requirement for
» dtoe mtopmtor or piuJnwUr for i
change to in re-
tt which states that
propOMd standard required that
a tf'f"''Mi*1 npon be submitted every
IN days. DM promulgated standard
" dates for the submlttal of the
B also n>aomai that th* first
^ nport does not htm to to
Mbntttod onto at least six month* afUr
the tnlttal nport to submitted.
Tike standard has been revised to ettm-
tnato the requirement to record the cause
ot any leak detected by the vinyl eWo-
rld* detector, the action taken to repair
the teak, and the amount of time re-
quired to repair the teak. KPA to eon-
oeraed only that teaks are detected and
repaired. That thto has been done can be
established by looking at the strip chart
reoord of measurements made by the
vinyl chloride detector. These records are
stffl required for the portable hydrocar-
bon detector however.
Several commentators recommended
that the companies to allowed an extra
two weeks to submit to KPA date from
the initial performance tost They atoo
recommended that they submit the data
by regular mafl rather than registered
man. XPA has not adopted either of these
recommendations. A source is supposed
to to in compliance with the standard
within 90 days of the promulgation of
the standard. The standard requires that
the emission tests to done within the
90 day period, and permits an extra 30
days for determination of results. The
purpose of using registered man to to
document the fact that emission data
have been sent and received. This way
if the results are lost in the mafl, there
wm to no question that they were sent.
(6) Test method. Test Method 106 has
been changed to recognize that on a gas
chromatograph equipped with a Chrom-
osorb 103 column, acetaldehyde may
interfere with the vinyl chloride peak.
When a sample to expected to contain
acetaldehyde, a secondary column as de-
scribed in section 4.3.3 must to employed.
Mass spectroecopy or another absolute
analytical technique to required to con-
firm the vinyl chloride peak obtained
with the gas chromatograph, only If peak
resolution with the secondary column to
not successful.
In section 4.1.4, alumlnized Mylar bags
can to substituted for Tedlar bags. EPA
now has data to allow this substitution,
provided that the samples are analysed
within 24 hours of collection.
In section 5.1.3 of Test Method 106
the requirement to use "oxygen gas" has
been replaced with "oxygen gas or air, as
required by the detector." Several corn-
mentors stated that most gas chromato-
graphs are designed to use hydrogen and
air for their flame detectors. When used
in this way, they are capable of detect-
ing 0.5 ppm vinyl chloride in air. This to
sensitive enough for monitoring the 10
ppm emission limits stipulated in the
standard.
automatic integrators are unnecessarily
elaborate and expensive.
A new section 6.6 has been added to
Test Method 106 which requires deter-
mination of the water vapor content of
the sampling bag by measuring the am-
bient temperature and pressure near the
bag. The vinyl chloride concentration of
the bag can then to reported on a dry
basis. A provision for checking the rigid
container for leaks has been added to
section 7.4 of Test Method 106.
The only change in Test Method 107 to
the provision in Section 5.3 .2 for use of
Carbopak C as wen as Carbopak A.
AvTHoanr: Section 119 of the Clean Air
Art M added by wo. 4(a) of Pub. L. 91-604,
84 SUt. 1SBS (49 U.8.C. 1867»-7; Section 114
of th* Clean Air Act, M Milled by MO. 4(a)
of Pub. L. 01-604. 84 SUt. 1687, and amended
by Pub. L. 98-819, MO. 6(a) (4). 88 SUt. 989
(41 UJS.O. 18670-*); Section 801 (ft) of th*
Clean Air Act, M amended by MO. 15 (e) (9)
Of Pub. L. 81-604, 84 SUt 1718 (49 UJB.C.
lW7f<»».
Dated: October 12, 1978.
JOHJf QUAKLM,
Acting Administrator.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of federal Regulations Is amended
as follows. The table of sections for Part
61 is amended by adding a list of sections
for new > Subpart P and Part 61 to
amended by adding a new Subpart P
reading as follows:
Subpart F— National Emission Standard for Vinyl
Chloride
Bee.
61.60 Applicability.
61.61 Definition*.
61.63 Emission standard for ethylene dl-
ohloridj* plant*.
61.68 Emission standard for vinyl chloride
plant*.
Sl.64 Emission standard for polyvluyl chlo-
rid» plant*.
61 .68 emission standard for ethylene dl-
oblorlde, Tlnyl chloride and poly-
vlnyl chloride plant*.
61.66 Equivalent equipment and procedure*.
61.67 Emission test*.
61.68 Emission monitoring.
61.69 Initial report.
61.70 Semiannual report.
61.71 Reeordkeeplng.
: Section 119 of the Clean Air
Act a* added by MC. 4 (a) of Pub. L. 91-604,
84 SUt 1685 (43 TJ.S.C. 1867C-7) ; section 114
of the Clean Air Act, •* added by MO. 4(a)
of Pub. L. 91-604, 84 SUt. 1687, and amended
by Pub. L. 98-819, MO. 6 (a) (4). 88 SUt 988
(49 US.O. 1867o-«); Motion 801 (a) of the
Clean Air Act, a* amended by eec. 16 (e) (9)
of Pub. L. 91-604, 84 SUt 1713 (49 VM.C.
l»87g(a)).
Subpart F — National Emission Standard
for Vinyl Chloride
1 61.60 Applicability.
(a) This subpart applies to plants
which produce:
(1) Ethyleno dlchloride by reaction of
oxygen and hydrogen chloride with
ethylene,
(3) Vinyl chloride by any process,
and/or
(3) One or more polymers M^u^i^g
any fraction of polymerised vinyl chlo-
ride.
(b) This subpart does not apply to
equipment used in research and develop-
ment if the reactor used to polymerise
the vinyl chloride processed in the equip-
ment has a capacity of no more than
0.10m* (50 gal).
(c) Sections of this subpart other than
|61.64
-------
characteristics such as BOD, COD, TSS,
and pH, usually for the purpose of meet-
Ing effluent guidelines and standards; it
does not include any process the purpose
of which Is to remove vinyl chloride from
water to meet requirements of this
subpart..
(1) "In vinyl chloride service" means
that a piece of equipment contains or
contacts either a liquid that is at least
10 percent by weight vinyl chloride or a
gas that is at least 10 percent by volume
vinyl chloride.
(m) "Standard operating procedure"
means a formal written procedure offi-
cially adopted by the plant owner or
operator and available on a routine basis
to those persons resnonsible for carrying
out the procedure.
(n) "Run" means the net period of
time during which an emission sample Is
collected.
(o) "Ethylene dlchiorlde purification"
Includes any part of the process of ethyl-
ene dlchiorlde production which follows
ethylene dlchloride formation and In
which finished ethylene dichlorlde Is
produced.
(p) "Vinyl chloride purification" In-
cludes any part of the process of vinyl
chloride production which follows vinyl
chloride formation and In which finished
vinyl chloride Is produced.
(q) "Reactor" Includes any vessel in
which vinyl chloride is partially or totally
polymerized into polyvlnyl chloride.
(r) "Reactor opening loss" means the
emissions of vinyl chloride occurring
when a reactor Is vented to the atmos-
phere for any purpose other than an
emergency relief discharge as defined In
|61.65(a).
(s) "Stripper" Includes any vessel In
which residual vinyl chloride is removed
from polyvlnyl chloride resin, except
bulk resin, in the slurry form by the use
of heat and/or vacuum. In the case of
bulk resin, stripper Includes any vessel
which is used to remove residual vinyl
chloride from polyvlnyl chloride resin
immediately following the polymeriza-
tion step in the plant process flow.
§ 61.62 Emiulon itandard for elliyleno
dichlorlde planti.
An owner or operator of an ethylene
dichlorlde plant shall comply with the
requirements of this section and i 61.65.
(a) Ethylene dlchloride purification:
The concentration of vinyl chloride In
all exhaust gases discharged to the at-
mosphere from any equipment used In
ethylene dichlorlde purification Is 'not
to exceed 10 ppm, except as provided in
J61.6S(a). This requirement does not
apply to equipment that has been
opened, is out of operation, and met the
requirement in I 61.68(b) before being
opened.
(b) Oxychlorlnation reactor: Except
as provided in |61.6B(a), emissions of
vinyl chloride to the atmosphere from
each oxychlorlnation reactor are not to
exceed 0.2 g/kg the 100 percent ethylene
dichlorlde product from the oxychlorl-
nation process.
RULES AND REGULATIONS
g 61.63 F,inln«loit Miindiird Tor vinyl
chloride pluntii.
An owner or operator of a vinyl chlo-
ride plant shall comply with the require-
ments of this section and ( 61.65.
(a) Vinyl chloride formation and puri-
fication: The concentration of vinyl
chloride in all exhaust gases discharged
to the atmosphere from any equipment
used In vinyl chloride formation and/or
purification is not to exceed 10 ppm, ex-
cept as provided In ft 61.6B(a). This re-
quirement does not apply to equipment
that has been opened, is out of operation,
and met the requirement In ft 61.65(b)
(6Ml> before being opened.
§ 61.64 Eiiil*«loii Nliindurd fur polyvlnyl
chloride pliiuU.
An owner or operator of a polyvlnyl
chloride plant shall comply with the re-
quirements of this section and II 61.65.
(a) Reactor: The following require-
ments apply to reactors:
d> The concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride In all exhaust gases discharged to
the atmosphere from each reactor is not
to exceed 10 ppm, except as provided in
paragraph (a) (2) of this section and
§61.65(a).
(2) The reactor opening loss from each
reactor is not to exceed 0.02 g vinyl
chloride/Kg (0.00002 Ib vinyl chloride/
lb> of, poly vinyl chloride product, with
the product determined on a dry solids
basis. This requirement applies to any
vessel which is used as a reactor or as
both a reactor and a stripper. In the
bulk process, the product means the
gross product of prepolymerlzatlon and
postpolymerization.
(3) Manual vent valve discharge: Ex-
cept for an emergency manual vent valve
discharge, there Is to be no discharge to
the atmosphere from any manual vent
valve on a polyvlnyl chloride reactor In
vinyl chloride service. An emergency
manual vent valve discharge means a
discharge to the atmosphere which could
not have been avoided by taking meas-
ures to prevent the discharge. Within 10
days of any discharge to the atmosphere
from any manual vent valve, the owner
or operator of the source from which the
discharge occurs shall submit to the Ad-
ministrator a report in writing contain-
ing information on the source, nature
and cause of the discharge, the date and
time of the discharge, the approximate
total vinyl chloride loss during the dis-
charge, the method used for determining
the vinyl chloride loss, the action that
was taken to prevent the discharge, and
measures adopted to prevent future dis-
charges.
(b) Stripper: The concentration of
vinyl chloride in all exhaust gases dis-
charged to the atmosphere from each
stripper la not to exceed 10 ppm, except
as provided in | 61.65(a). This require-
ment does not apply to equipment that
has been opened, is out of operation, and
met the requirement in | 61.6S(b) (6) (1)
before being opened.
(c) Mixing, weighing, and holding
containers: The concentration of vinyl
chloride In all exhaust gases discharged
to the atmosphere from each mixing,
weighing, or holding container in vinyl
chloride service which precedes the
stripper (or the reactor if the plant has
no stripper) in the plant process flow is
not to exceed 10 ppm, except as provided
in § 61.65(a). This requirement does not
apply to equipment that has been
opened, Is out of operation, and met the
requirement in ft 61.65(b) (6X1) before
being opened.
(d) Monomer recovery system. The
concentration of vinyl chloride In all ex-
haust gases discharged to the atmos-
phere from each monomer recovery sys-
tem is not to exceed 10 ppm, except as
provided In ft 61.6B(a). This requirement
does not apply to equipment that has
been opened, is out of operation, and met
the requirement In ft 61.6S(b) (6) (i) be-
fore being opened.
(e) Sources following the stripper (s):
The following requirements apply to
emissions of vinyl chloride to the at-
mosphere from the combination of all
sources following the stripper(s) Cor the
reactor(s) If the plant has no strip-
per(s)] in the plant process flow in-
cluding but not limited to, centrifuges,
concentrators, blend tanks, filters, dry-
ers, conveyor air discharges,' baggers,
storage containers, and Inprocess waste-
water:
(1) In polyvlnyl chloride plants using
stripping technology to control vinyl
chloride emissions, the weighted average
residual vinyl chloride concentration in
all grades of polyvlnyl chloride resin
processed through the stripping opera-
tion on each calendar day, measured
immediately after the stripping opera-
tion is completed, may not exceed:
(1) 2000 ppm for polyvinyl chloride
dispersion resins, excluding latex resins;
(ii) 400 ppm for all other polyvlnyl
chloride resins, Including latex resins,
• averaged separately for each type of res-
in; or
(2) In polyvlnyl chloride plants con-
trolling vinyl chloride emissions with
technology other than stripping or In
addition to stripping, emissions of vinyl
chloride to the atmosphere may not
exceed:
(1)2 g/kg (0.002 Ib/lb) product from
the strlpper(s) [or reactor(s) If the
plant has no strlpper(s) ] for dispersion
polyvlnyl chloride resins, excluding latex
resins, with the product determined on a
dry solids basis;
(11) 0.4 g/kg (0.0004 Ib/lb) product
from the strippers [or reactor(s) If the
plant has no stripper (s)] for all other
polyvlnyl chloride resins, including latex
resins, with the product determined on
a dry solids basis.
§ 61.65 Emityion Mtmdttrd for rllivlrne
difhlorlde, vinyl chloride Hnd poly.
vinyl chloride plimli.
. An owner or operator of an ethylene
dichlorlde, vinyl chloride, and/or poly-
vinyl chloride plant shall comply with
the requirements of this section,
(a) Relief valve discharge: Except for
an emergency relief discharge, there Is
to be no discharge to the atmosphere
from any relief valve on any equipment
in vinyl chloride service. An emergency
relief discharge means a discharge which
could not have been avoided by taking
measures to prevent the discharge. With-
in 10 days of any relief valve discharge.
FIDIRAL RMISTIR, VOi. 41, NO. 705—THURSDAY, OCTOBIR 21, If76
IV-71
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
the owner or operator of the source from
which the relief valve discharge ooeun
•hall submit to the Administrator a re-
port In writing containing information
on the source, nature and cause of the
discharge, the date and time of the dis-
charge, the approximate total vinyl chlo-
ride loss during the discharge, the meth-
od used for determining the vinyl chlo-
ride loss, the action that was taken to
prevent the discharge, and measures
adopted to prevent future discharges.
(b) Fugitive emission sources:
(1) Loading and unloading lines: Vinyl
chloride emissions from loading and un-
loading lines which are opened to the
atmosphere after each loading or un-
loading operation are to be minimized
as follows:
(1) After each loading or unloading
operation and before opening a loading
or unloading line to the atmosphere, the
quantity of vinyl chloride in all parts of
each loading or unloading line that are
to be opened to the atmosphere is to be
reduced so that the parts combined con-
tain no greater than 0.0038 m' (0.13 ff)
of vinyl chloride, at standard tempera-
ture and pressure; and
(11) Any vinyl chloride removed from
a loading or unloading line in accord-
ance with paragraph (b) (1) (1) of this
section is to be ducted through a control
system from which the concentration of
vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does
not exceed 10 ppm, or equivalent as pro-
vided In | 61.«6.
(2) Slip gauges: During loading or un-
loading operations, the vinyl chloride
emissions from each slip gauge in vinyl
chloride service are to be minimized by
ducting any vinyl chloride discharged
from the slip gauge through a control
system from which the concentration of
vinyl chloride m the exhaust gases does
not exceed 10 ppm, or equivalent as pro-
vided in 101.66.
(3) Leakage from pump, compressor,
and agitator seals:
(1) Rotating pumps: Vinyl chloride
emissions from seals on all rotating
pumps in vinyl chloride service are to be
minimized by Installing sealless pumps,
pumps with double mechanical seals, or
equivalent as provided in {61.66. If
double mechanical seals are used, vinyl
chloride emission from the seals are to
be minimized by maintaining the pres-
sure between the two seals so that any
leak that occurs is into the pump; by
ducting any vinyl chloride between the
two seals through a control system from
which the concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride in the exhaust gases does not ex-
ceed 10 ppm; or equivalent as provided
in | 61.66.
(11) Reciprocating pumps: Vinyl chlo-
ride emissions from seals on all recipro-
cating pumps in vinyl chloride service
are to be minimized by installing double
outboard seals, or equivalent as provided
in 161.66. If double outboard seals are
used, vinyl chloride emissions from the
seals are to be minimized by maintaining
the pressure between the two seals so
that any leak that occurs is into the
pump; by ducting any vinyl chloride be-
tween the two seals through a control
system from which the concentration of
vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does
not exceed 10 ppm; or equivalent as
provided in (61.66.
(ill) Rotating compressor: Vinyl
chloride emissions from seals on an ro-
tating compressors in vinyl chloride
service are to be minimized by installing
compressors with double mechanical
seals, or equivalent as provided in I 61.66.
If double mechanical seals are used, vinyl
chloride emissions from the seals are to
be minimized by maintaining the pres-
sure between the two seals so that-any
leak that occurs is into the compressor;
by ducting any vinyl chloride between
the two seals through a control system
from which the concentration of vinyl
chloride in the exhaust gases does not
exceed 10 ppm; or equivalent as provided
in {61.66.
(iv) Reciprocating compressors: Vinyl
chloride emissions from seals on all re-
ciprocating compressors in vinyl chloride
service are to be minimized by installing
double outboard seals, or equivalent as
provided in {01.66. If double outboard
seals are used, vinyl chloride emissions
from the seals are to be minimized by
maintaining the pressure between the
two seals so that any leak that occurs is
into the compressor; by ducting any
vinyl chloride between the two seals
through a control system from which the
concentration of vinyl chloride In ttie
exhaust gases does not'exceed 10 ppm;
or equivalent as provided in § 61.06.
(v) Agitator: VinylTchloride emissions
from seals on all agitators in vinyl chlo-
ride service are to be minimized by in-
stalling agitators with-double mechani-
cal seals, or equivalent as provided in
| 61.00. If double mechanical seals are
used, vinyl chloride emissions from the
seals are to be minimized by maintaining
the pressure between the two seals so
that any leak that occurs Is into the agi-
tated vessel; by ducting any vinyl chlo-
ride between the two seals through a
control system from which the concen-
tration of vinyl chloride in the exhaust
gases does not exceed 10 ppm; or equiva-
lent as provided in 161.66.
(4) Leakage from relief valves: Vinyl
chloride emissions due to leakage from
each relief valve oh equipment In vinyl
chloride service are to be minimized by
installing a rupture disk between the
equipment and the relief valve, by con-
necting the relief valve discharge to a
process line or recovery system, or equiv-
alent as provided in I 61.66.
(S) Manual venting of gases: Except
as provided in I 61.64(a)(3), all gases
which are manually vented from equip-
ment in vinyl chloride service are to be
ducted through a control system from
which the concentration of vinyl chloride
in the exhaust gases does not exceed 10
ppm; or equivalent as provided in ! 61.66.
(6) Opening of equipment: Vinyl
chloride emissions from opening of
equipment (Including loading or unload-
ing lines that are not opened to the at-
mosphere after each loading or unload-
ing operation) are to be minimized M
follows:
(i) Before opening any equipment for
any reason, the quantity of vinyl chlo-
ride is to be reduced so that the equip-
ment contains no more than 3.0 percent
by volume vinyl chloride or 0.0950 m' (25
gal) of vinyl chloride, whichever is
larger, at standard temperature and
pressure; and
(11) Any vinyl chloride removed from
the equipment in accordance with para-
graph (b) (6) (i) of this section Is to be
ducted through a control system from
which the concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride in the exhaust gases does not exceed
10 ppm, or equivalent as provided in
S 61.66.
(7) Samples: Unused portions of sam-
ples containing at least 10 percent by
weight vinyl chloride are to be returned
to the process, and sampling techniques
are to be such that sample containers In
vinyl chloride service are purged into a
closed process system.
<8> Leak detection and elimination:
Vinyl chloride emissions due to leaks
from equipment in vinyl chloride service
are to be minimized by instituting and
Implementing a formal leak detection
and elimination program. The owner or
operator shall submit a description of
the program to the Administrator for
approval. The program is to be sub-
mitted within 45 days of- the effective
date of these regulations, unless a waiver
of compliance is granted under (01.11.
If a waiver of compliance is granted, the
program is to be submitted on a date
scheduled by the Administrator. Ap-
proval of a program will be granted by
the Administrator provided be finds:
(i) It includes a reliable and accurate
vinyl chloride monitoring system for de-
tection of major leaks and identification
of the general area of the plant where a
leak is located. A vinyl chloride monitor-
ing system means a device which obtains
air samples from one or more points on
a continuous sequential basis and ana-
lyzes the samples with gas chromatog-
raphy or, if the owner or operator as-
sumes that all hydrocarbons measured
are vinyl chloride, with infrared spectre-
photometry fiame ion detection, or an
equivalent or alternative method.
(ii) It Includes a reliable and accurate
portable hydrocarbon detector to be used
routinely to find small leaks and to pin-
point the major leaks Indicated by the
vinyl chloride monitoring system. A
portable hydrocarbon detector means a
device which measures hydrocarbons
with a sensitivity of at least 10 ppm
and is of such design and size that it can
be used to measure emissions from local-
ized points.
(ill) It provides for an acceptable cali-
bration and maintenance schedule for
the vinyl chloride monitoring system and
portable hydrocarbon detector. For the
vinyl chloride monitoring system, a daily
span check is to be conducted with a
concentration of vinyl chloride equal to
the concentration defined as a leak ac-
cording to paragraph (b) (8) (vl) of this
section. The calibration is to be done
with either:
(A) A calibration gas mixture pre-
pared from the gases specified in sections
6.2.1 and 6.2.3 of Test Method 106, or
FiDEKAl MOIST!*, VOL. 41, NO. US—THURSDAY, OCTOttt Jl,
IV-72
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
46567
IB) A calibration gas cylinder contain-
ing the appropriate concentration of
vinyl chloride. If a calibration gas cylin-
der is used, the analysis must be trace-
able to the National Bureau of Stand-
ards or to a gravimetrlcally calibrated
vinyl chloride permeation tube.
(iv) The location and number of points
to be monitored and the frequency of
monitoring provided for in the program
are acceptable when they are compared
with the number of pieces of equipment
In vinyl chloride service and the size and
physical layout of the plant.
(v) It contains an acceptable plan of
action to be taken when a leak is de-
tected.
(vi) It contains a definition of leak
which Is acceptable when compared with
the background concentrations of vinyl
chloride In the areas of the plant to be
monitored by the vinyl chloride monitor-
Ing system. Measurements of background
concentrations of vinyl chloride In the
areas of the plant to be monitored by the
vinyl chloride monitoring system are to
be included with the description of the
program. The definition of leak for a
given plant may vary among the differ-
ent areas within the plant and is also to
change over time as background con-
centrations in the plant are reduced.
(9) Inprocess wastewater: Vinyl chlo-
ride emissions to the atmosphere from
inprocess wastewater are to be reduced
as follows:
(1) The concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride in each Inprocess wastewater stream
containing greater than 10 ppm vinyl
chloride measured Immediately as It
leaves a piece of equipment and before
being mixed with any other Inprocess
wastewater stream Is to be reduced to no
more than 10 ppm by weight before being
mixed with any other inprocess wastewa-
ter stream which contains less than 10
ppm vinyl chloride; before being exposed
to the atmosphere, before being dis-
charged to a wastewater treatment proc-
ess; or before being discharged untreated
as a wastewater. The paragraph does
apply to water which is used to displace
vinyl chloride from equipment before It
Is opened to the atmosphere In accord-
ance with |61.64(a)(2) or paragraph
(b) (6) of this section, but does not apply
to water which is used to wash out equip-
ment after the equipment has already
been opened to the atmosphere in ac-
cordance with 161.64(a) (2) or para-
graph (b) (6) of this section.
(11) Any vinyl chloride removed from
the inprocess wastewater in accordance
with paragraph (b) (») (i) of this section
is to be ducted through a control system
from which the concentration of vinyl
chloride in the exhaust gases does not
exceed 10 ppm, or equivalent as provided
in I 01.66.
(c) The requirements in paragraphs
n»(l), (b)(2), 0»(5>, (b>(6), tt»(7>
and (b) (8) of this section are to be In-
corporated into a standard operating
procedure, anr made available upon re-
quest for inspection by the Administra-
tor. The standard operating procedure is
to include provisions for measuring the
vinyl chloride in equipment 5s4.75 m'
01250 gal in volume for which an mis-
sion limit is prescribed m f 61.650>> (6)
(i) prior to opening the equipment and
using Test Method 106, a portable hydro-
carbon detector, or an equivalent or al-
ternative method. The method of meas-
urement is to meet the requirements In
! 61.67^) (5) (1) (A) or (g) ((5) (i) (B).
§ 61.66 Equivalent equipment mid pro-
cedures.
Upon written application from an own-
er or operator, the Administrator may
approve use of equipment or procedures
which have been demonstrated to his
satisfaction to be equivalent In terms of
reducing vinyl chloride emissions to the
atmosphere to those prescribed for com-
pliance with a specific paragraph of this
subpart. For an existing source, any re-
quest for using an equivalent method as
the initial measure of control is to be
submitted to the Administrator within
30 days of the effective date. For a new
source, any request for using an equiva-
lent method is to be submitted to the
Administrator with the application for
approval of construction or modification
required by 161.07.
§ 61.67 Emi»»ion te»l*>.
(a) Unless a waiver of emission testing
is obtained under (61.13, the owner or
operator of a source to which this sub-
part applies shall test emissions from
the source,
(1) Within 90 days of the effective date
in the case of an existing source or a
new source which has an Initial startup
date preceding the effective date, or
(2) Within 90 days of startup in the
case of a new source, initial startup of
which occurs after the effective date.
(b) The owner or operator shall pro-
vide the Administrator at least 30 days
prior notice of an emission test to afford
the Administrator the opportunity to
have an observer present during the test.
(c) Any emission test is to be con-
ducted while the equipment being tested
Is operating at the maximum production
rate at which the equipment will be op-
erated and under other relevant condi-
tions as may be specified by the Adminis-
trator based on representative perform-
ance of the source.
(d) Each emission test is to consist
of three runs. For the purpose of deter-
mining emissions, the average of results
of all runs is to apply. The average is to
be computed on a time weighted basis.
(e) All samples are to be analyzed
within 24 hours, and vinyl chloride emis-
sions are to be determined within 30 days
after the emission tost. The owner or
operator shall report the determinations
to the Administrator by a registered
letter dispatched before the close of the
next business day following the deter-
mination.
(f) The owner or operator shall retain
at the plant and make available, upon
request, for inspection by the Adminis-
trator, for a minimum of 2 years records
of emission test results and other data
needed to determine emissions.
(g) Unless otherwise specified, the
owner or operator shall use test Test
Methods In Appendix B to this part for
each test as required by paragraph-.
(g)(l), (g)(2), (g)(3), (g)(4). ana
(g) (5) of this section, unless an equiva-
lent method or an alternative method
has been approved by the Administrator
If the Administrator finds reasonable
grounds to dispute the results obtained
by an equivalent or alternative method.
he may require the use of a reference
method. If the results of the reference
and equivalent or alternative methods
do not agree, the results obtained by the
reference method prevail, and the Ad-
ministrator may notify the owner or
operator that approval of the method
previously considered to be equivalent or
alternative is withdrawn.
(1) Test Method 106 Is to be used to
determine the vinyl chloride emissions
from any source for which an emission
limit is prescribed in JJ61.62(a) or (b>
i 61.63 , or H 61.64(a) (1) , (b) , (c> . or
(d) , or from any control system to which
reactor emissions are required to be -
ducted in ft 61.64(a) (2) or to which fugi-
tive emissions are required to be ducted
in SS61.65(b)(l)(li), (b><2>, (bH5>,
(b>(6)(il),or(b)(9)(ll).
(i) For each run, one sample is to be
collected. The sampling site is to be at
least two stack or duct diameters down-
stream and one half diameter upstream
from any flow disturbance such as a
bend, expansion, contraction, or visible
flame. For a rectangular cross section an
equivalent diameter is to be determined
from the following equation :
equivalent diameter = 2 ->.
length -i width
The sampling point in the duct is to
be at the centroid of the cross section
The sample is to be extracted at a rate
proportional to the gas velocity at the
sampling point. The sample is to be
taken over a minimum of one hour, and
is to contain a minimum volume of SO
liters corrected to standard conditions.
(11) For gas streams containing more
than 10 percent oxygen, the concentra-
tion of vlnyle chloride as determined by
Test Method 106 is to be corrected to 10
percent oxygen for determination of
emissions by using the following equa-
tion:
r
I kie
r
l-» nXir -
10-fl
nXir - -- - -
20.0 --permit Us
where:
Cl (correct ed)~Tll
-------
wus AND tiouunow
in kg/100
be determined Uf
equation:
kf protest «• to thfttto abov
IC» (8.60) 0 KM [MM
™ Z
as » stripper, the deter-
> made Immediately foi-
lowuf tbs atrippmc operation.
tt> BMopt M provided IB paragraph
(gXtXil) of thfe section, the reactor
opening loss is to be determined using
the following equation:
JT (8.60)
(
(9) TMt Method 107 to to be used to
determine the concentration of vinyl
chloride la each Inprocess wastewater
•tmm for which an emission limit ii
preecribed In | fll.M(b) (•) (i) .
(S) Where a •tripping operation i*
tiMd to attain the emission limit In 1 61.-
64(e), emissions are to be determined
using Test Method 107 as follows :
(1) The number of strippers and sam-
ples and the types and grades of resin to
be sampled are to be determined by the
Administrator for each individual plant
at the time of the test based on the
plant's operation.
(11) Each sample Is to be taken imme-
diately following the stripping operation.
(Ill) The corresponding quantity of
material processed by each stripper is to
be determined on a dry solids basis and
by a method submitted to and approved
by the Administrator.
(iv) At the prior request of the Ad-
ministrator, the owner or operator shall
provide duplicates of the samples re-
quired in paragraph (g)(3)(l) of this
section.
(4) Where control technology other
than or in addition to a stripping opera-
tion is used to attain the emission limit
in 1 61.84 (e), emissions are to be deter-
mined as follows: '
(1) Test Method 106 is to be used to
determine atmospheric emissions from
all of the process equipment simultane-
ously. The requirements of paragraph
(g) (1) of this section are to be met.
(11) Test Method' 107 Is to be used to
determine the concentration of vinyl
chloride in each Inprocess wastewater
stream subject to the emission limit pre-
scribed in 1 61.64(e) . The mass of vinyl
chloride In kg/ 100 kg product In each
in process wastewater stream is to be de-
termined by using the following equa-
tion:
vhwc
Oi-kf vinyl chloride/100 kf product.
C<»tb* eonotntntloa at rluyl oblorlde M meaiurtd
J?«vit*r flow rate in Vhi,'d«t«nnin«dln Moordtne*
wltt). t nutted which hu b«m Mbmltted to
«nd »ppro»»d b» th« Admlnlitrttor.
10"* • Coowiiou futor Tor DpBi.
Z-ProdncUon nta (kl/nr), dtttraliwd in teoord*
a&M with t mKhod which bu boen tubmltttd
and apprortd by tb» AdnJniitrator.
(5) The reactor opening loss for which
an emission limit is prescribed in 1 61.64
(a) (3) is to be determined. The number
of reactors for which the determination
Is to be made is to be specified by the
Administrator for each Individual plant
at the tune of the determination based
on the plant's operation. For a reactor
Id* amMona/ki product
r\ ahloridt at one atmotphtn and
YlBy?a2orld» at dtUrmlnad by
US or a portabla hydrocarbon
r which naaiana hydroeutoni
savsttMtgr «f at laaat 10 pp«.
WtU
- Number at batehM
JO »«.
~~~A Bot th« raaetor wal laat
Avvan ki of polyrtnyl ahlorid* produotd par
batch Intba nnmMr of batobM rinot tbt raaotot
wu iMt opanod to th« atmoipher*.
(A) If Method 106 is used to deter-
mine the concentration of vinyl chloride
(Cb) , the sample is to be withdrawn at
a constant rate with a probe of sufficient
length to reach the vessel bottom from
the manhole. Samples are to be taken
for 6 minutes within 6 Inches of the ves-
sel bottom, 6 minutes near the vessel
center, and 5 minutes near the vessel top.
(B) If a portable hydrocarbon detec-
tor is used to determine the concentra-
tion of vinyl chloride (Cb) , a probe of
sufficient length to reach the vessel bot-
tom from the manhole is to be used to
make the measurements. One measure-
ment will be made within 6 inches of the
vessel bottom, one near the vessel center
and one near the vessel top. Measure-
ments are to be made at each location
until the reading is stabilized. All hydro-
carbons measured are to be assumed to
be vinyl chloride.
(C) The production rate of polyvinyl
chloride (Z) is to be determined by a
method submitted to and approved by the
Administrator.
(11) A calculation based on the number
of evacuations, the vacuum Involved, and
the volume of gas in the reactor is hereby
approved by the Administrator as an al-
ternative method for determining reac-
tor opening loss for poetpolymerlzatlon
reactors in the manufacture of bulk
resins.
g 61.68 Emiiiaon monitoring.
(a) A vlnyle chloride monitoring sys-
tem Is to be used to monitor on a con-
tinuous basis the emissions from the
sources for which emission limits are pre-
scribed in I 61.62(a) and (b), I 61.63(a),
and I 61.64(a) (1) , (b) , (c) , and (d) , and
for any control system to which reactor
emission are required to be ducted In
|61.65(b>(l)(ii), and (b)(2>, (b)(5>,
(b) The vinyl chloride monitoring sys-
tem (s) used to meet the requirement in
paragraph (a) of this section is to be a
device which obtains air sampels from
one or more points on a continuous
sequential basis and analyzes the samples
with gas chromotography or, if the owner
or operator assumes that all hydrocar-
bons measured are vinyl chloride, with
Infrared spectrophotometry, flame ion
detection, or an equivalent or alterna-
tr«« method. The vinyl enloride monitor-
ing system used to meet the requiremente
m I 6l.68(b) (I) (1) me* be used to meet
th* requirementa of this section.
(e) A daily man check is to be con-
ducted for each vlnyle chloride monitor-
ing system used. For all of the emission
sources listed in paragraph (a) of this
section, except toe one for whloh an emis-
sion limit to prescribed in 1 61.63(b) , the
dally span check is to be conducted with
a concentration of vinyl chloride equal
to 10 ppm. For the emission source for
which an emission limit is prescribed in
I ei.eatb), the dally span cheek is to be
conducted with a concentration of vinyl
chloride which is determined to be
determined to be equivalent to the emis-
sion limit for that source based on the
emission test required by 167.67. The
calibration Is to be done with either:
(1), A calibration gas mixture pre-
pared from the gases specified in sections
5.2.1 and 6.2.3 of Test Method 106, or
(2) A calibration gas cylinder con-
taining the appropriate concentration of
vinyl chloride. If a calibration gas
cylinder is used, the analysis must be
traceable to the National Bureau of
Standards or to a gravlmetrically cali-
brated vinyl chloride permeation tube.
g 61.69 Initial report.
(a) An owner or operator of any
source to which this subpart applies shall
submit a statement In writing notifying
the Administrator that the equipment
and procedural specifications in II 61.65
(b)(6), (b)(7>, and (b) (8) are being
Implemented.
(b)(l) In the case of an existing
source or a new source which has an
Initial startup date preceding the effec-
tive date, the statement is to be submit-
ted within 90 days of the effective date,
unless a waiver of compliance is granted
under 161.11, along with the informa-
tion required under I 61.10. If a waiver
of compliance is granted, the statement
la to be submitted on a date scheduled
by the Administrator.
<2) In the case of a new source which
did not have an initial startup date pre-
ceding the effective date, the statement
is to be submitted within 90 days of the
Initial startup date.
(c) The statement is to contain the
following Information:
(1) A list of the equipment installed
for compliance,
(2) A description of the physical and
functional characteristics of each piece
of equipment.
(3) A description of the methods
which have been incorporated into the
standard operating procedures for meas-
uring or calculating the emissions for
which emission limits are prescribed in
1161.65 (b) (1X1) and (b)(6Xl),
(4) A statement that each piece of
equipment is installed and that each
piece of equipment and each procedure
is being used.
§ 61.70 Semiannual report.
(a) (2) is to be determined. The number
source to which this subpart applies shall
submit to the Administrator on Septem-
KDERAL REGISTER, VCL. 41, NO. 205—THURSDAY, OCTOBEK 21, 1*76
IV-74
-------
IULIS ANfr REGULATIONS
ber 15 and March 15 of each year a report
in writing containing the information
required by this lection. The flnt semi-
annual report it to be submitted follow-
ing the flnt full 6 month reporting period
after the Initial report is submitted.
(b) (1) In the case of an existing source
or a new source which hat an Initial
startup date preceding the effective date,
the first report is to be submitted within
180 days of the effective date, unless a
waiver of compliance is granted under
161.11. If a waiver of compliance is
granted, the first report is to be sub-
mitted on a date scheduled by the Ad-
ministrator.
(2) In the case of a new source which
did not have an initial startup date pre-
ceding the effective date* the first report
is to be submitted within 180 days of the
initial startup date.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, the
owner or operator shall use the Test
Methods in Appendix B to this part to
conduct emission tests as required by
paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3> of this
section, unless an equivalent or an alter-
native method has been approved by the
Administrator. If the Administrator
finds reasonable grounds to dispute the
results obtained by an equivalent or al-
ternative method, he may require the use
of a reference method. If the results of
the reference and equivalent or alterna-
tive methods do not agree, the results
obtained by the reference method pre-
vail, and the Administrator may notify
the owner or operator that approval of
the method previously considered to be
equivalent or alternative is withdrawn.
(1) The owner or operator shall in-
clude In the report a record of any emis-
sions which averaged over any hour
period (commencing on the hour) are
in excess of the emission limits pre-
scribed in II 61.62(a> or (b), 161.63(a),
or ||ei.64(a)(l), (b), (c),or (d), or for
any control system to which reactor
emissions are required to be ducted in
I 61.64(a> (2) or to which fugitive emis-
sions are required to be ducted in I 61.06
(b) (1) (11), (b) (2), (b) (5), (b) (6) (11), or
(b) (9) (11). The emissions are to be meas-
ured In accordance with I 61.68.
(2) In polyvlnyl chloride plants for
which a stripping operation is used to
attain the emlslson level prescribed in
I61.64(e), the owner or operator shall
Include in the report a record of the
vinyl chloride content in the polyvlnyl
chloride resin. Test Method 107 is to be
used to determine vinyl chloride content
as follows:
(1) If batch stripping is used, one rep-
resentative sample of polyvinyl chloride
resin is to be taken from each batch of
each grade of resin immediately follow-
ing the completion of the stripping,
and grade and the date and time the
batch is completed. The corresponding
quantity of material processed m each
stripper batch is to be recorded and Iden-
tified by resin type and grade and the
date and time the batch is completed.
(11) If continuous stripping is used,
one representative sample of polyvlnyl
chloride resin is to be taken for each
grade of resin processed or at Intervals
of 8 hours for each grade of resin which
is being processed, whichever is more fre-
quent. The sample is to be taken M the
resin flows out of the stripper and iden-
tified by resin type and grade and the
date and time the sample was taken.
The corresponding quantity of material
processed by each stripper over the tune
period represented by the sample during
the eight hour period, is to be recorded
and identified by resin type and grade
and the date and time it represents.
(ill) The quantity of material proc-
essed by the stripper is to be determined
on a dry solids basis and by a method
submitted to and approved by the Ad-
ministrator.
(iv) At the prior request of the Ad-
ministrator, the owner or operator shall
provide duplicates of the samples re-
quired in paragraphs (2) (1) and (c)
(2) (11) of this section.
(v) The report to the Administrator by
the owner or operator is to include the
vinyl chloride content found in all the
samples required in paragraphs (c) (2)
(1) and (c) (2) (11) of this section, aver-
aged separately for each type of resin,
over each calendar day and weighted ac-
cording to the quantity of each grade of
resin processed by the strlpper(s) that
calendar day, according to the following
equation:
AT,'
A -24-hour aver»gf concentration of type T, resin Ml
O^TofiSproductJon of trpe T, resin over tb* 24-hoor
period, in kf.
T,-Type of ruin; /-!,», . . . m whm • to total
number of redo type* produced during the 14-
hour period.
M-Concentration of vinyl chloride In one tampl* of
trade O, rain, in ppm.
/"-Production of trade 0\ resin represented by tb*
•unple, IB k|.
0i- Grade of rerin, e.f., OL 0i, tad Ot.
n-Total number offrtdet of nrin produced during
the 24-hour period.
(vl) The owner or operator shall re-
tain at the source and make available
for inspection by the Administrator for
a minimum of 2 years records of all data
needed to furnish the information re-
quired by. paragraph (c) (2) (v) of this
section: The records are to contain the
following information:
(A) The vinyl chloride content found
in all the samples required in paragraphs
(c) (2) (1) and (c) (2) (11) of this section,
identified by the resin type and grade
and the time and date of the sample, and
(B) The corresponding quantity of
polyvlnyl chloride resin processed by the
stripper (s), identified by the resin type
and grade and the time and date it
represents.
(S) The owner or operator shall In-
clude in the report a record of the emis-
sions from each reactor opening for
which an emission limit is prescribed in
I 61.64(a) (2). Emissions are to be deter-
mined in accordance with I 61.67(g> (5),
except that emissions for each reactor
are to be determined. For a reactor that is
also used as a stripper, the determination
may be made immediately following the
stripping operation.
161.71 Recordkeeping.
(a) The owner or operator of any
source to which this subpart applies shall
retain the following information at the
source and make it available for Inspec-
tion by the Administrator for a mini-
mum of two years;
(1) A record of the leaks detected by
the vinyl chloride monitoring system, as
required by I 61.6S(b)(8), including the
concentrations of vinyl chloride as
measured, analyzed, and recorded by the
vinyl chloride detector, the location of
each measurement and the date and ap-
proximate time of each measurement.
(2) A record of the leaks detected
during routine monitoring with the
portable hydrocarbon detector and the
action taken to repair the leaks, as re-
quired by |61.65(b)(8). including a
brief statement explaining the location
and cause of each leak detected with
the portable hydrocarbon detector, the
date and time of the leak and any action
taken to eliminate that leak measured in
accordance with I 61.68.
(3) For the relief discharges from
reactors subject to the provisions of
f 61.65(a), a daily operating record for
each reactor, Including pressures and
temperatures.
2. Appendix B is amended by adding
Test Methods 106 and 107 as follows:
METHOD 100—DETERMINATION or VINTL
CHLORIDE raom STATIONARY SOURCES
INTRODUCTION
Performance of thli method should not be
attempted by persons unfamiliar with the
operation of a gas chromatograph, nor by
those who are unfamiliar with source sam-
pling, as there are many details that are'
beyond the scope of this presentation. Care
must be exercised to prevent exposure of
sampling personnel to vinyl chloride, a car-
cinogen.
1. Principle and Applicability.
1.1 An Integrated bag sample of stack gas
containing vinyl chloride (chloroethylene)
is subjected to ohromatographlc analysis,
using a flame lonlzatlon detector.
1.9 • The method Is applicable to the meas-
urement of vinyl chloride In stack gases from
ethylen* dlchlortde, vinyl chloride and poly-
vlnyl chloride manufacturing processes, ex-
cept where the vinyl chloride U contained in
partlcuiate matter.
9. Range and Sensitivity.
The lower limit of detection will vary ac-
cording to the chromatograph used. Value*
reported Include 1 X 1C-1 mg and 4 x 10-'
mg.
8. Interferences.
Acetaldehyde, which can occur In some'
vinyl chloride sources, will Interfere with the
-vinyl chloride peak from the Chromosorb 109
column. See sections 4.8.9 and 6.4. If resolu-
tion of the vinyl chloride peak Is still not
satisfactory for a particular sample, then
ohromatograpb parameters can be further
altered with prior approval of the Admin-
istrator. If alteration of the chromatograph
parameters fails to resolve the vinyl ohloride
peak, then supplemental confirmation of the
vinyl chloride peak tbrough an absolute
analytical technique, such as man spectro-
scopy, must be performed.
4. Apparatus.
4.1 Sampling (Figure 1).
4.1.1 Probe—Stainless steel, Pyrex glass,
or Teflon tubing according to stack temper.
HDERAL RIOISTER, VOL 41, NO. JOS—THURSDAY, OCTOSIR 81, 1976
IV-75
-------
•ULES AND lEOUUTIONI
•tore, each •quipped with • glass wool plug
to remove paniculate matter.
4.1 J Sample line—Teflon, 6.4 mm outside
diameter, of sufficient length to oona*jct
probe to bag. A new unused piece tt employed
for e»eb eerie* of bag sample* that constitute*
an emission test.
4.14 Male (3) and female (9) stainless
steel quick-connect*, with ban check* too*
pair without) located as shown In Figure 1.
4.1.4 Tedlar bags, 100 liter capacity—To
contain sample. Teflon bags are not accept-
able. Alumlnlzed Mylar bag* may be used,
provided that the sample* are analyzed
•within 34 hours of collection.
4.14 Rigid leakproof containers for 4.1.4.
with covering to protect contents from sun-
light.
4.1.8 Needle valve—To adjust sample flow
rate.
4.1.7 Pump—Leak-free. Minimum capac-
ity 3 liters per minute.
4.1.8 Charcoal tube—To prevent admis-
sion of vinyl chloride to atmosphere In vicin-
ity of samplers.
4.19 Flow meter—For observing sample
flow rate; capable of measuring a flow range
from 0.10 to 1.00 liter per minute.
4.1.10 Connecting tubing—Teflon, 6.4 mm
outside diameter, to assemble sample train
(Figure 1).
4.1.11 Pltot tube—Type S (or equivalent),
attached to the probe so that the sampling
flow rate can be regulated proportional to
the stack gas velocity.
4.3 Sample recovery.
4.3.1 Tubing—Teflon, 6.4 """ outside
diameter, to connect bag to gas chromato-
graph sample loop. A new unused piece is
employed for each series of bag samples that
constitutes an emission test, and to to be dis-
carded upon conclusion of analysis of those
bags.
4.3 Analysis.
4.3.1 Gas chromatograph—With flame
lonlzatlon detector, potentlometrlc strip
chart recorder and 1.0 to S.O ml heated sam-
pling loop In automatic sample valve.
4.3.2 Chromatographic column—Stainless
steel, 3.0 x 3.3 mm, containing 80/100 mesh
Chroxnosorb 103. A secondary col urn of OB
EP-06, 30% on 60/80 mesh AW Chromoaorb
P, stainless steel, 3.0 m x 3.3 mm, will be
required If acetaldehyde Is present. If used,
the SP-96 column Is placed after the Chromo-
eorb 103 column. The combined columns
should then be operated at 110'C.
4.3.3 Flow meters (3)—Rotameter type,
0 to 100 ml/mln capacity, with flow control
valves.
4.3.4 Oas regulators—For required gas
cylinders.
4.3 S Thermometer—Accurate fay one de-
gree centigrade, to measure temperature of
heated sample loop at time of sample Injec-
tion.
4.3.6 Barometer—Accurate to 5 mm Hg, to
measure atmospheric pressure around gas
chromatograph during sample analysis.
4.3.7 Pump—Leak-free. Minimum capac-
ity 100 ml/mln.
4.4 Calibration.
4.4.1 Tubing—Teflon, 6.4 mm outside
diameter, separate pieces marked for each
calibration concentration.
4.44 Tedlar bag*—Sixteen-lnch square
size, separate bag marked for each calibra-
tion concentration.
4.4.8 Syringe—0.5 ml, gas tight.
4.4.4 Syringe—SOpl. gas tight.
4.44 Flow meter—Rotameter type, • to
1000 ml/mln mag* accurate to £1%. to
meter nitrogen in preparation of standard
gas mixtures.
4.4.6 Stop watch—Of known accuracy, to
Urn* gas flow la preparation of standard gas
i Mention of trade names on specific prod-
ucts does not constitute endorsement by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
8. Beagent*. tt 1* necessary that aU rea-
gent* be of Chromatographic grade.
8.1 Analysis.
8.1.1 Helium gas or nitrogen gas—Zero
grade, for ehromatographle carrier gas.
6.14 Hydrogen gas—Zero grade.
8.14 Oxygen gas, or Air, as required by
the detector—Zero grade.
Si Calibration.
8J.I Vinyl chloride, 99.9+%—For prep-
aration of standard ga* mixtures.
633 Calibration cylinder* (8), optional-
One each of 60, 10 and 8 ppm vinyl chloride
in nitrogen with certified analysis. Analysis
must be traceable to NB8 (National Bureau
of Standards) or to a gravlmetrlcally cali-
brated vinyl chloride permeation tube.
6.34 Nitrogen gas—Zero grade, for prep-
aration of standard gas mixtures.
6. Procedure.
6.1 Sampling. Assemble the sample train
as In Figure 100-1. Perform a bag leak check
according to Section 7.4. Observe that all
connections between the bag and the probe
are tight. Place the end of the probe at the
oentrold of the stack and start the pump
with the needle valve adjusted to yield a
flow of 0.6 1pm. After a period of time suffi-
cient to purge the line several times has
elapsed, connect the vacuum line to the
bag and evacuate the bag until the rotam-
eter indicate* no flow. Then reposition the
sample and vacuum lines and begin the ac-
tual sampling, keeping the rate proportional
to the stack velocity. Direct the gas exiting
the rotameter away from sampling personnel.
At the end of the sample period, shut off the
pump, disconnect the sample line from the
bag, and disconnect the vacuum line from
the bag container. Protect the bag container
from sunlight.
6.3 Sample storage. Sample bags must be
kept out of direct sunlight. When at all pos-
sible, analysis is to be .performed within 34
hours of sample collection.
6.3 Sample recovery. With a piece of Tef-
lon tubing identified for that bag, connect a
bag Inlet valve to the ga* chromatograph
sample valve. Switch the valve to withdraw
gas from the bag through the sample loop.
Plumb the equipment so the sample gtM
passes from the sample valve to the leak-free
pump, and then to a charcoal tube, followed
by a 0-100 ml/mln rotameter with flow con-
trol valve.
6.4 Analysis. Set the column temperature
to 100* C the detector temperature to ISO*
C, and the sample loop temperature to 70* C.
When optimum hydrogen and oxygen flow
rates have been determined verify and main-
tain these flow rates during all chromato-
graph operations. Using zero helium or
nitrogen as the carrier gas, establish a flow
rate In the range consistent with the manu-
facturer's requirement* for satisfactory de-
tector operation. A flow rate of approxi-
mately 40 ml/mln should produce adequate
separations. Observe the base line periodi-
cally and determine that the noise level ha*
stabilized and that base line drift has ceased.
Purge the sample loop for thirty seconds at
the rate of 100 ml/mln, then activate the
sample valve. Record the injection time (the
position of the pen on the chart at the time
of sample Injection), the sample number, the
sample loop temperature, the column tem-
perature, carrier gas flow rate, chart speed
and the attenuator setting. Record the Ub>
oratory pressure. From the ebwt, ••Me* tM
peak having the retention time ootreapoad-
ing to vinyl ehlortde. M determined IB Sec-
tion 74. Measure the peak area. A., by «•»
at KB, and a disc integrator or a plantanetor.
Measure the peak height, H.. Reeord A. and
the retention time. Repeat the injection a*
least two time* or tmtil two consecutive vinyl
chloride peaks do not vary In area more than
•%. The average value for these two areas
will be used to compute the bag concentra-
tion.
Compare the ratio of H« to Am for the vinyl
chloride sample with the Mine ratio for the
standard peak which I* closert la height. A*
a guideline, if these ratio* differ by nor*
than 10%, the vinyl chloride peak may not
be pure (possibly acetaldehyde 1* present)
and the secondary eolumn *bould be em-
ployed (see flection 444).
84 Measure the ambient temperature and
barometric pressure near the bag. (Assume
the relative humidity to be 100 percent.)
From a water saturation vapor pressure table.
determine the record and water vapor con-
tent of the bag.
7. Calibration and Standards.
7.1 Preparation of vinyl chloride standard
gas mixtures, evacuate a sixteen-lnch square
Tedlar bag that ha* passed a leak check
(described hi Section 7.4) and meter in 8.0
liters of nitrogen. While/the bag Is filling, u*e
the 04 ml syringe to Inject 360*1 of 90.9+ %
vinyl chloride through the wall of the bag.
Upon withdrawing the syringe needle, im-
mediately cover the resulting hole with a
piece of adhesive tape. This give* a concen-
tration of 80 ppm of vinyl chloride. In a like
manner use the other syringe to prepare dilu-
tions having 10 and 8 ppm vinyl ehlortde
concentrations. Place each bag on • smooth
surface and alternately depress opposite
sides of the bag 80 times to further mix the
gases.
7.3 Determination of vinyl chloride re-
tention time. This section can be performed
simultaneously with Section 7.8. Establish
chromatograph conditions identical with
those In Section 64, above. Set attenuator
to X 1 position. Flush the sampling loop
with zero helium or nitrogen and activate*
the sample valve. Record the injection time,
the sample loop temperature, the column
temperature, the carrier ga* flow, rate, the
chart speed and the attenuator setting.
Record peaks and detector responses that
occur In the absence of vinyl chloride. Main-
tain conditions. With the equipment plumb-
Ing arranged identically to Section 64, flush
the sample loop for 80 seconds at the rate of
100 ml/mln with one of the vinyl chloride
calibration mixtures and activate the sample
valve. Record the injection time. Select the
peak that corresponds to vinyl chloride.
Measure the distance on the chart from the
Injection time to the time at which the peak
maximum occurs. This quantity, divided by
the chart speed, is defined as the retention
time. Record.
7.8 Preparation of chromatograph cali-
bration curve. Make a gas ehromatographle
measurement of each standard ga* mixture
(described in Section 7.1) using conditions
identical with those listed In Section 84
above. Flash the sampling loop for 80 second*
at the rate of 100 ml/mln with each standard
gas mixture and activate the sample valve.
Record CH the concentrations of vinyl chlo-
ride injected, the attenuator setting, chart
speed, peak are*, sample loop temperature.
eolumn temperature, carrier ga* flow rate,
and retention time. Record the laboratory
pressure. Calculate A., the peak area multl-
FtDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 41, NO. 205—THURSDAY, OCTOKI 11, 197*
IV-76
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
piled by the attenuator setting. Repeat unto
two Injection area* are within t%, then plot
those point* TS O.. When the other concen-
trations have been plotted, draw a smooth
curve through the point*. Paiforiu calibra-
tion dally, or before and after each set of
bag samples, whichever is more frequent.
7.4 Bag leak checks. White performance
of this section Is required subsequent to bag
use. It is also advised that It be performed
prior to bag use. After each use, make sure
a bag did not develop leaks as follow*. To leak
check, connect a water manometer and pres-
surize the bag to 6-10 cm H,O (2-4 In H.O) .•
Allow to stand for 10 minutes. Any displace-
ment In the water manometer Indicates a
leak. Also check the rigid container for leaks
In this manner.
•> not cnutluu
r tr tk* lonrliniMMU mtttt
Equation 106-1
vhere:
X.-The sample peak ana.
A.-Tbe measured peak area.
Ar-Tbt attenuation teeter.
84 Vinyl chloride concentration. Froos
the calibration curve described In Section
TJ. above, select the value of O. that ear*
responds to A., the sample peak area. Dal--
eulate Ck as follows:
Equation 106-3
When:
B.i-Tbe water vapor content of tbe bet «amble, •
analyud.
C»-Tb» eoneeotntton of vinyl chloride la the bag
. C.-The concentration of •
'
h, la ppm.
enoe pressure, the laboratory
noorded daring eaUbration, mm Hi.
Ti-Tbe sample loop temperature on the abaotote
scale at tbe time of analyata, *K.
ft-Tb* laboratory preawn at ttme of analyaji, mm
TV-The reference temperature, tbe lampie loop
temperature recorded darlnf calibration, *K-
». References.
1. Brown, D. W., Loy, E. W. and Stephen-
son, M. H. "Vinyl Chloride Monitoring Near
the B. P. Goodrich Chemical Company la
Louisville. Kentucky." Region IV, UA Envi-
ronmental Protection Agency, Surveillance)
and Analysis Division, Athens, Georgia, June
34, 1074.
a. "Evaluation of A Collection and Analy-
tical Procedure for Vinyl Chloride la Air,"
by O. D. Clayton and Associates, December
18, 1074. EPA Contract No. 68-03-1408, Task
Order No. 3, EPA Report ON. 76-VCL-l.
3. "Standardization of Stationary Source
•mission Method for Vinyl Chloride," by Mid-
wart Research Instttute, 1978. EPA Contract
H». 68-03-1098. Task Order Ho. 7.
METHOD 107—DETEBM INATION or Vnm. CHLO-
mnm CONTENT or INPBOCEM WASTEWATKB
SAKPLEB, AND Vnm. CHLOUDE CONTENT OF
PoLTvnrrL OHLOUDI RESIN, SLUBBT, WET
CAKE, AND LATEX SAMPLES
nmoDucnoN
Performance of tbis method should not be
attempted by persons unfamiliar with the
operation of a gas chromatograph, nor by
those who are unfamiliar with sampling, as
there are many details that are beyond the
scope of this presentation. Care must be
exercised to prevent exposure of sampling
personnel to vinyl chloride, a carcinogen.
1. Principle and Applicability.
1.1 The basis for this method relates to
the vapor equilibrium which is established
between RVCM, PVC, resin, water, and air
In a closed system. It has been demonstrated
that the RVCM in a PVC resin will equili-
brate In a closed vessel quite rapidly, pro-
vided that the temperature of the PVC resin
is maintained above the glass transition
temperature of that specific resin.
13 This procedure to suitable for deter-
mining the vinyl chloride monomer (VCM)
content of inprocea* wastewater samples.
and the residual vinyl chloride monomer
(RVCM) content of polyvlnyl chloride (PVO)
resins, wet cake, slurry, and latex sample*.
It cannot be used for polymer In fused form.
such as sheet or cubes. If a resolution of the
vinyl chloride peak is not satisfactory for a
particular sample, then chromatograph
parameters may be altered with prior ap-
proval of the Administrator. If there Is rea-
son to believe that some other hydrocarbon
with an Identical retention time to present
in the sample, then supplemental confirma-
tion of the vinyl chloride peak through aa
absolute analytical technique, such a* mas*
spectroscopy, should b* performed,
3. Range and Sensitivity.
The lower limit of detection of vinyl chlo-
ride win vary according to the chromato-
graph used. Value* reported Include 1X10-*
mg and 4 x 10-' mg. With proper calibration,
the upper limit may be extended as needed.
3. Precision and Reproduclbnity.
An Intel-laboratory comparison between
seven laboratories of three resin samples,
each split Into three parts, yielded a standard
deviation of 2.63% for a sample with a mean
of 3.00 ppm, 4.16% for a sample with a mean
of 1.66 ppm, and 6.20% for a sample with a
mean of 62.66 ppm.
4. Safety.
Do not release vinyl chloride to the labora-
tory atmosphere during preparation of stand-
ards. Venting or purging with VCM/alr mix-
tures must be held to a minimum When
they are required, the vapor must be routed
to outside air. Vinyl chloride, even at low
ppm levels, must never be vented Inside the
laboratory. After vial* have been analyzed,
the pressure within the vial must be vented
prior to removal from the Instrument turn-
table. Vials must be vented Into an activated
charcoal tube using a hypodermic needle to
prevent release of vinyl chloride Into the
laboratory atmosphere. The charcoal must
be replaced prior to vinyl chloride break-
through.
6. Apparatus.
6.1 Sampling.
6.1.1 Bottles—60 ml (3 oz), with waxed
lined screw on tope, for PVC samples.
6.1.3 Vials—60 ml Bypo-vlals.i sealed with
Teflon faced Tuf-Bond discs for water sam-
ples.
8.1 A Electrical tape—or equivalent, to
prevent loosening of bottle tops.
6.3 Sample recovery.
6.3.1 Vials—With seals and caps, Perkln-
Elmer Corporation No. 106-0118, or equiva-
lent.
6.3.3 Analytical balance—Capable of
weighing to ±0.001 gram.
6.3.3. Syringe. 100 «l—Precision series
"A- No. 010036, or equivalent
'Mention of trad* name* OB spedflc prod-
uct* doe* not constitute endorsement by tbe
Environmental Protection Agency.
•JDHAl REGISTER, VOL 41. NO. >05—THURSDAY. OCTO8U 11. W*
IV-7 7
-------
•ULIS AND REGULATIONS
•J.4 Vial Sealer, Perkm-Bmer Wo. 105-
•100 or equivalent.
•3 Analysis.
•.8.1 Gas chromatograph—Ferkln-Elmer
Corporation Model F-40 bead-space ana- .
IjMr. No. 104-0001. or equivalent.
•.3.9 Ohromatographlo column—Stain-
tee* steel, a mxs.9 ff"«. containing 0.4%
Oarbowax 1600 on Carbopak A, Perkln-Elmer
Corporation No. 105-0133, or equivalent.
Oarbopak C can be ueed In place of Carbopak
A.
•.3.3 Thermometer—0 to 100* O, accurate
to ±0.1* O, Perkln-Elmer No. 106-0109 or
equivalent.
0.3.4. Sample tray thermostat system—
Perkln-Elmer No. 106-0103, or equivalent.
8.3.8 Septa—Sandwich type, for auto-
matic dosing, 13 mm, Ferkln-Elmer No. 105-
1008, or equivalent.
•.3.8 Integrator - recorder — Hewlett -
Packard Model 3380A, or equivalent.
6.3.7 Filter drier assembly (3)—Perkta-
Kmer No. 2230117, or equivalent.
•.3.8 Soap film flowmeter—Hewlett Pack-
ard No. 0101-0113. or equivalent.
•.4 Calibration.
8.4.1 Regulators—for required gas cyln-
ders.
6. Reagents.
6.1 Analysis.
•.1.1 Hydrogen gas—zero grade.
8.1.9 Nitrogen gas—zero grade.
9.13 Air—zero grade.
6.2 Calibration.
8.9.1 Standard cylinders (4)—one each
of 60, 600, 3000, and 4000 ppm vinyl chloride
In nitrogen, with certified analysis.
7. Procedure.
7.1 Sampling.
7.1.1 PVC sampling—Allow the resin or
•lurry to flow from a tap on the tank or silo
until the tap line has been well purged. Ex-
tend a 60 ml sample bottle under the tap, fill,
and immediately tightly cap the bottle. Wrap
electrical tape around the cap and bottle to
prevent the top from loosening. Place an
Identifying label on each bottle, and record
the date, time, and sample location both on
the bottles and In a log book.
7.1.2 Water sampling—Prior to use, the
60 ml vials (without the discs) must be
capped with aluminum foil and muffled at
400'C for at least one hour to destroy or
remove any organic matter that could In-
terfere with analysis. At the sampling loca-
tion fill the vials bubble-free, to overflowing
eo that a convex meniscus forms at the top.
The excess water Is displaced as the sealing
disc Is carefully placed, Teflon side down, on
the opening of the vial. Place the aluminum
seal over the disc and the neck of the vial
s>nd crimp Into place. Affix an Identifying
label on the bottle, and record the date, time,
and sample location both on the vials and
In a log book. All samples must be kept re-
frigerated until analyzed.
7.2 Sample recovery. Sample" must be run
within 94 hours.
7.2.1 Resin samples—The weight of the
resin used must be between 0.1 and 4.8 grams.
An exact weight must be obtained (±0.001
(ram) for each sample. In the case of sus-
pension resins a volumetric" cup can be pre-
pared which will hold the required amount
of sample. The sample bottle Is opened, and
the cup volume of resin is added to the tared
sample vial (Including septum and alumi-
num cap). The vial is immediately sealed
and the exact sample weight is then obtained.
Report this value on the data sheet as It Is
required for calculation of RVCM. In the
ease of relatively dry resin samples (water
content <0.3 weight %), 100 Ml of distilled
water must be injected into the vial, after
sealing and weighing, using a 100 ffl syringe.
In the case of dispersion resins, the cup
cannot be used. The sample is Instead
weighed approximately in an aluminum dish,
transferred to the tared vial and weighed
accurately in the vial. The sample Is then
placed in the Perkln-Elmer head space ana-
lyzer (or equivalent) and conditioned for on*
hour at 90«O.
Non: Some aluminum vial caps have a
center section which must be removed prior
to placing Into sample tray. If not removed,
serious damage to the Injection needle will
occur.
7.2.2 Suspension resin slurry and wet cake
samples—Slurry must be Altered using a
small Buchner funnel with vacuum to yield
wet cake. The filtering process must be con-
tinued only as long as a steady stream of
water is exiting from the funnel. Excessive
filtration time could result In some loss of
VCM. The wet cake sample (0.10 to 4.6 grams)
Is added to a tared vial (including septum
and aluminum cap) and Immediately sealed.
Sample weight Is then determined to 3 deci-
mal places. The sample is then placed In the
Perkln-Elmer head space analyzer (or equiva-
lent) and conditioned for one hour at 90°C.
A sample of wet cake is used to determine
TS (total solids). This Is required for calcu-
lating the RVCM.
7.2.3 Dispersion resin slurry samples.—
This material should not be" filtered. Sample
must be thoroughly mixed. Using a tared
vial (including septum and aluminum cap)
add approximately 8 drops (0.28 to 0.38
grams) of slurry or latex using a medicine
dropper. This should be.done Immediately
after mixing. Seal the vial as soon as possible.
Determine sample weight accurate to 0.001
grams. Total sample weight must not exceed
0.80 grama. Condition the vial for one hour
at 90«O In the analyzer. Determine the TS
on the slurry sample (Section 7.3.6).
7.2.4 Inprocess wastewater samples-
Using a tared vial (including septum and
aluminum cap) quickly add approximately
1 cc of water using a medicine dropper. Seal
the vial as soon as possible. Determine
sample weight accurate to 0.001 gram. Con-
dition the vial for two hours at 90'C hi the
analyzer.
73 Analysis.
7.3.1 Preparation of gas chromatograph—
Install the chromatographlc column and con-
dition overnight at 160*C. Do not connect the'
exit end of the column to the detector while
conditioning.
7.3.1.1 Flow rate adjustments—Adjust
flow rates as follows:
a. Nitrogen carrier gas—Set regulator on
cylinder to read 60 psig. Set regulator on
chromatograph to 1.3 kg/cm'. Normal flows
at this pressure should be 28 to 40 cc/mlnute.
Check with bubble flow meter.
b. Burner air supply—Set regulator on cyl-
inder to read 60 psig. Set regulator on
chromatograph to supply air to burner at a
rate between 260 and 300 cc/mlnute. Check
with bubble flowmeter.
8. Hydrogelwsupply—Set regulator on cyl-
inder to read 30 psig. Set regulator on
chromatograph to supply approximately
36±6 cc/mlnute. Optimize hydrogen flow to
yield the most sensitive detector response
without extinguishing the flame. Check flow
with bubble meter and record this flow
7.3.1.2 Temperature adjustments—Set
temperatures as follows:
a. Oven (chromatographio' column), 60*
0.
b. Dosing line, 140* O.
c. Injection block, 140* O.
d. Sample chamber, water temperature,
•0* C±1.0« O.
73.1.8 ignition of flam* lonlzatlon detec-
tor—Ignite the detector according to the
manufacturer's Instructions.
7.8.1.4 Amplifier balance—Balance the
amplifier according to the manufacturer's
Instructions.
73.9 Programming the chromatograph—
Program the chromatograph as follows:
a. I—Dosing time—The normal setting is
a seconds.
b. A—Analysis time—The normal setting
Is 8 minutes. Certain types of samples con-
tain high boiling materials which can cause
interference wtlh the vinyl chloride peak on
subsequent analyses. In these cases the
analysis time must be adjusted to eliminate
the Interference. An automated backflush
system can also be used to solve this prob-
lem. \
c. B—Flushing—The normal setting Is 0.9
minutes.
d. W—Stabilization time—The nomal set-
ting Is 0.2 minutes.
e. X—Number of analyses per sample—The
normal setting is 1.
7.3.3 Preparation of sample turntable—Be-
fore placing any sample into turntable, be
certain that the center section of the alu-
minum cap has been removed. The numbered
sample bottles should be placed In the cor-
responding numbered positions in the turn-
table. Insert samcles in the followlna order:
Positions 1 & 9—Old 9000 ppm standards
for conditioning. These are necessary only
after the analyzer has not been used for 24
hours or longer.
Position 3—60 ppm standard, freshly pre-
pared.
Position 4—600 ppm standard, freshly pre-
pared.
Position 6—2000 ppm standard, freshly
prepared.
Position 6—4000 ppm standard, freshly pre-
pared.
Position 7—Sample No. 7 (This Is the first
sample of the day, but is given as 7 to be con-
sistent with the turntable and the Integrator
printout.)
After all samples have been positioned, In-
sert the second set of 60, 600, 2000, and 4000
ppm standards. Samples, including stand-
ards must be conditioned In the bath of
90* C for 1 hour (not to exceed 6 hours).
7.3.4 Start chromatograph program—
When all samples, Including standards, have
been conditioned at 90* C for 1 hour, start
the analysis program according to the manu-
facturers' Instructions. These Instructions
must be carefully followed when starting
and stopping program to prevent damage to
the dosing assembly.
733 Determination of total solids (TS).
For wet cake, slurry, resin solution, and
PVC latex samples, determine TS for each
sample by accurately weighing approxim-
ately 3 to 4 grams of sample In an aluminum
pan before and after placing in a draft
oven (106 to 110* O). Samples must be dried
• to constant weight. After first weighing re-
turn the pan to the oven for a short pe-
riod of time and then rewelgh to verify com-
plete dryness. TS Is then calculated as the
final sample weight divided by initial sam-
ple weight.'"
8. Calibration.
Calibration is to be performed each eight-
hour period when the Instrument is used.
Each day, prior to running samples, the colt
umn should be conditioned by running two
of the previous days 9000 ppm standards.
8.1 Preparation of Standards.
Calibration standards are prepared by fill-
ing the vials with the vinyl chloride/nitro-
gen standards, rapidly seating the septum
and sealing with the aluminum cap. Use a
stainless steel Une from the cylinder to the
vial. Do not use rubber or tygon tubing. The
•ample line from the cylinder must be
rlDERAL RMISTII, VOL. 41, NO. JOS—THUMDAY, OCTOMR it, 197*
IV-7 8
-------
RULIS AND REGULATIONS
purged (Into hood) for several minutes prior
to filling vlale. After purging, reduce the flow
rat* to approximately 600-1000 oo/mtn. Place
end of tubing into vial (near bottom) and
after one minute ilowly remove tubing. Place
eeptum In vial M eoon as possible to mini-
mize mixing air with sample. After the stand-
ard vlali are eealed, inject 100«1 of dlitllled
water.
8.9 Preparation of ohromatograph oallbra
tion curve.
Prepare two 60 ppm, two 600 ppm, two 2000
ppm, and two 4000 ppm standard eamples.
Bun the calibration aamplee In exactly the
lame manner ai regular samples. Plot Ai,
the Integrator area counts for each standard
•ample TS 0,, the concentration of vinyl
chloride in each standard sample. Draw a
line of best fit through the points.
9. Calculations.
B.I Reeponse factor.
From the calibration curve described in
Section 8,9, above, select the value of 0.
that corresponds to A( for each sample. Com-
pute the response factor, Bt, for each sample,
as follows:
fi/-^-1 Equation 107-1
0.9 Residual vinyl chloride monomer con-
centration, or vinyl chloride monomer con-
centration. •
Calculate On. as follows:
"
Equation 107-2
where:
Crl.-Concentration of vinyl chloride In the sample,
In ppm.
P.-L»bor»tory atmosphere pressure, mm Eg,
Ti- Room temperature, *K.
M,-Moleoular weight of VOM («2.Q.
V,-Volume of vapor phase (vial volume less sample
volume).
mi-Weight of sample, crams.
JS-Oes constant (o2,MO).
JST-Henry'i L«w constant for VOM In PVO at
90*0, K-tMXIQ-i-K, for VOM In 1 oo
Approximate) wastewater sample at 90*0,
ri-EqulUbrttton temperature, *K.
If the following conditions are met, Equation 107-9
irhere ' '
V,-Vial volume, oo <».5).
I. Sample contains less than 0.8% water
C,,,-4-' (1.107X10-' I S-988X10"*'
"/ \ W|
Equation 107-3
The following conrral equation oan be used for any
sample whloh contains VOM, PVO and/or water.
A. P.
Equation 107-4
where:
TV-Total lolidi,
Note: K, must be determined.
Results calculated using Equation 107-4
represent concentration based on the total
sample. To obtain results based on dry PVO
content, divide by TS.
For a 1 oo (approximate) wastewater sample, Equation
107-4 can be sfmpUfled to the following:
t, P.-780 mm. HI.
Equation 107-5
10. References.
1. Residual Vinyl Chloride Monomer Con-
tent of Polyvlnyl Chloride Resins and Wet
Cake Samples, B. F. Ooodrloh Chemical Co.
Standard Test Procedure No. 100S-T. B. F.
Ooodrlch Technical Center, Avon Lake, Ohio.
January 30, 1078.
9. Berens, A. R., "The Solubility of Vinyl
Chloride In Polyvlnyl Chloride," AOS-Dlvl-
slon of Polymer Chemistry, Polymer Pre-
prints IS (9) : 107, 1074.
3. Berens, A. R., "The Diffusion of Vinyl
Chloride in Polyvlnyl Chloride," ACS-Dlvi-
elon of Polymer Chemistry,' Polymer Pre-
prints IS (9) : 903, 1074...
4. Berens, A. R., L, B. Crider, 0. J. Toma-
nek and J. M. Whitney, Analysis for Vinyl
Chloride in PVO Powders by Head-Space Oas
Ohromatography," to be published.
[FR Doo.70-30840 Filed 10-9
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Cali-
fornia on Behalf of Santa Barbara
County Air Pollution Control District
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the Stat*> of California on behalf of the
Santa Barbara County Air Pollution Con-
trol District, dated September 17, 1976.
EPA is today amending 40 CFR 61.04,
Address, to reflect this delegation. A No-
tice announcing this delegation is pub-
lished in the Notices section of this issue
of the FEDERAL REGISTER. The amended
f 61.04 is set forth below. It adds the ad-
dress of the Santa Barbara County Air
Pollution Control District to which must
be addressed all reports, requests, ap-
plications, submittals, and communica-
tions pursuant to this part by sources
subject to the NESHAPS located within
Air Pollution Control District.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective im-
mediately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective
on September 17, 1976 and It serves no
purpose to delay the technical change
of this addition of the Air Pollution Con-
trol District's address to the Code of
Federal Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority of
section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended (42 U.S.C. 1857c-7).
Dated: October 20,1976.
PAUL DE FALCO, Jr.,
Regional Administrator,
EPA, Region IX.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
u follows:
1. In J 61.04 paragraph (b)(3i is
amended by revising subpara graph F to
read as follows:
§ 61.at Addrcx*.
• • • • •
(b) • * •
(3) • • *
(A)-(E)
F—CALIFORNIA
Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Con-
trol District. 420 Church St. (P.O. Box 487),
Salinas, CA 03901.
Northern Sonoma County Air Pollution
Control District, 3313 Chanate Ed., Santa
Rosa, CA 96404.
Sacramento County Air Pollution Control
District, 3701 Branch Center Road, Sacra-
mento, CA 95827.
San Joaquln County Air Pollution Control
District, 1601 E. Hazelton St. (P.O. Box 3009),
Stockton, CA 96201.
Santa Barbara Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 4440 Calle Real, Santa Barbara, OA
93110.
Stanislaus County Air Pollution Control
District, 820 Scenic Drive, Modesto, CA 95350.
Trinity County Air Pollution Control Dto- •
trlct, Box AJ, Weavervllle, CA 96093.
Ventura County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 626 X. Santa Clara St., Ventura, OA
93001.
[FR Doc.78-32105 Filed 11-3-76:8:46 am]
HDEKAl MOISTIR, VOL. 41, NO. 213
WEDNESDAY, NOVEMBER 3, 1976
30
Bay Area Air Pollution Control District,
939 Ellla St., San Francisco, CA 94109.
Del Norte County Air Pollution Control
District, Courthouse, Crescent City, CA
96531.
Fresno County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 615 8. Cedar Avenue, Fresno, CA 93702.
Humboldt County Air Pollution Control
District, 6600 S. Broadway, Eureka, CA 96601.
Kern County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 1700 Flower St., (P.O. Box 997), Bakeri-
fleld, CA 93302.
Madera County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 136 W. Tosemlte Avenue, Madera, CA
93637.
Mendoclno County Air Pollution Control
District, County Courthouse, Uklah, CA
96483.
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to Pima County
Health Department on Behalf of Pima
County Air Pollution Control District
Pursuant to the delegation of au-
thority for national emission standards
for hazardous air pollutant!) (NESHAPS)
to the Pima County Health Department
on behalf of the Pima County Air Pollu-
tion Control District, dated October 7,
1976, EPA is today amending 40 CFR
81.04. Address, to reflect this delegation.
A document announcing this delegation
is published today at 41 FR in the Notices
section of this Issue. The amended 8 61 04
te sot forth below. It odds the address of
IV-80
the Pima County All-Pollution Control
District to which must be addressed all
reports, requests, applications, submtt-
tnls. and communications pursuant
to this part by sources subject to
the NESHAPS located within the Air
Pollution Control District.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
October 7, 1976 and it serves no purpose
to delay the technical change of this ad-
dition of the Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict's address to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act. as
amended (42U.S.C. 1857c-7>.
Dated: November 19,1976.
R. L. O'CONNBLL.
Acting Regional Administra-
tor Environmental Protection
Agency, Region IX.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In J 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by adding subparagraph D to read as
follows:
§61.01 Addrcx.
• • • • •
(3) • * •
(A)-(C) • • •
D—Arizona
Pima County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 161 West Congress Street, Tucson A3
86701.
• • • . • •
(PR Doc.76-35583 Filed 12-2-76;8i *B ami
[PUL 618-1|
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Standard for Vinyl Chloride
Correction
In FR Doc. 76-30849 appearing at page
46560 in the FEDERAL REGISTER of Thurs-
day, October 21, 1976 the following cor-
rections should be made:
1. On page 46564, middle column, the
amendatory language in the sixth para-
graph, sixth and seventh line is cor-
rected to read "amended by revising the
authority and adding a new Subpart F
reading as follows".
2. On page 46567, in the first column,
In 561.65(b)(9)(i), fifteenth line, the
fourth word "The" should read "This".
". On page 46567, middle column, sec-
ond line from the top in \ 61.65(c)
should read "(1,250 gal) in volume for
which an emls-".
4. ia) On page 46568, middle column,
in S61.68ta), eighth line, first word
should read "emissions".
W On pope 46568, middle column, in
5 01.68'n' between the eighth-and ninth
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
lines Insert the following "§61.64taM2)
or to which fugitive emissions are re-
quired to be ducted in".
(c) On page 46568, third column, in
§ 61.68(c), the thirteenth to sixteenth
lines should read: "chloride which is de-
termined to be equivalent to the emis-
sion limit for that source based on the
emission test required by 5 61.67. The".
5. On page 46568, third column, in
§ 61.70 the first line should read "(a)
The owner or operator of any".
6. (a) On page 46570, first column, in
Appendix B, Method 106, paragraph
4.3.2, second line should read "steel,
2.0mX* * •"
(b) On page 46570, third column In
Appendix B, Method 106, paragraph 6.4,
sixth and seventh lines should read "of
a disc integrator or a planlmeter. Meas-
ure the peak height, Hm. Record Am, Hm,
and"
(c) On page 46570, third column, In
Appendix B, Method 106, paragraph 6.5,
the fifth line should read "determine and
record the water vapor con-".
7. On page 46573, top of second
column, in Appendix B, Method 107,
paragraph 9.2, figure 4, the last figure in
the equation should read
"m,"
f 4 '
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 41, NO. 234
FRIDAY, DECEMBER 3, 1*76
31
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Califor-
nia on Behalf cf San Diego County Air
Pollution Control District
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of California on behalf of the
San Diego County Air Pollution Control
District, dated November 8, 1976, EPA is
today amending 40 CPR 61.04, Address,
to reflect this delegation. A Notice an-
nouncing this delegation is published in
the Notices section of this issue, under
EPA (FR Doc. 76-36929). The amended
I 61.04 is set forth below. It adds the
address of the San Diego County Air
Pollution Control District to which must
be addressed all reports, requests, appli-
cations, submittals, and communications
pursuant to this part by sources subject
to the NESHAPS located within Air Pol-
lution Control District.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaklng effective imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
November 8, 1976 and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of this
addition of the Air Pollution Control
District's address to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and Is issued under the authority
of section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended (42 U.S.C. 1857c-7).
Dated: November 26,1976.
SHEILA M. PRINDIRVILLE,
Acting Regional Administrator,
Environmental Protection
Agency, Region IX.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In 5 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparagraph F to read as
follows:
§ 61.04 Address.
* * • • •
(b) « * *
-------
33
RULIS AND RIOULATIONS
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS TOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of Vermont
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of Vermont on September 3,
1976, EPA is today amending 40 CFR
61.04, Address, to reflect this delegation.
A Notice announcing this delegation is
published today in the FEDERAL REGISTER
(see FR Doc. 77-646 appearing in tha
notices section of this issue). Tha
amended 161.04, which adds tha address
of the Vermont Agency of Environmental
Protection to which all reports, requests,
applications, submittals, and communi-
cations to the Administrator pursuant to
this part must also be addressed, is set
forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaklng effective imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
September 3, 1976, and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of this
addition of the State address to the Code
of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended. 42 U.S.a 1847c-7,
Dated: December 17,1976.
JOHN A. 8. MoOLENNON, •
Regional Administrator.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
In I 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparagraph (UU) to read
as follows:
161.04 Addrew.
• * * • •
(b) • • •
(ITO)—State of Vermont, Agency of Environ-
mental Protection, Box 489, Montpeller, Ver-
mont 05002.
[FR DOC.77-54S Filed 1-5-77:8:45 am]
HDHAL MOISTM, VOL 42, NO. 4
THURSDAY, JANUARY 6, 1977
34
Title 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS
[FRL 673-«)
NEW SOURCE REVIEW
Delegation of Authority to the State of
South Carolina
The amendments below institute cer-
tain address changes for reports and ap-
plications required from operators of new
sources. EPA has delegated to the State
of South Carolina authority to review
new and modified sources. The delegated
authority Includes the reviews under 40
CFR Part 52 for the prevention of sig-
nificant deterioration. It also includes
the review under 40 CFR Part 60 for the
standards of performance for new sta-
tionary sources and review under 40 CFR
Part 61 for national emission standards
for hazardous air pollutants.
A notice announcing the delegation of
authority is published elsewhere In the
notices section of this issue of the FED-
ERAL REGISTER. These amendments pro-
vide that all reports, requests, applica-
tions, submittals, and communications
previously required for the delegated
reviews will now be sent to the Office of
Environmental Quality Control, Depart-
partment of Health and Environmental
Control, 2600 Bull Street, Columbia,
South Carolina 29201, instead of EPA's
Region IV.
The Regional Administrator finds
good cause for foregoing prior public
notice and for making this rulemaklng
effective immediately in that it is an ad-
ministrative change and not one of sub-
stantive content. No additional substan-
tive burdens are imposed on the parties
affected. The delegation which is reflect-
ed by this administrative amendment
was effective on October 19, and it
serves no purpose to delay the technical
change of this addition of the State ad-
dress to the Code of Federal Regula-
tions.
This rulemaklng is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of sections 101, 110, 111, 112, and 301
of the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42
U.8.C. 1857C-5, 6, 7 and 1857g.
Dated: January 11, 1977.
JOHN A. LITTLE,
Acting Regional Administrator.
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
DELEGATION or AUTHORITY TO THE
STATE or SOUTH CAROLINA
3. Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40, Code
of Federal Regulations, is amended by
revising subparagraph (PP) of | 61 04 (b)
to read as follows:
6 61.04 Address.
• * • • •
(b) • • •
(A)-(OO) • • •
(PP) Btate of South Carolina, Office of En-
vironmental Quality Control, Department of
Health and Environmental Control, 2000 Bull
Street, Columbia, South Carolina 28201,
• • » • •
|FR Doc,77-1060 Filed l-ai-77;8:46 am]
35
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 42, NO, IS
MONDAY, JANUARY 24, 1977
PART 81—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND*
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to City of
Philadelphia
Pursuant to tha delegation of author*
Jtf tor national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants fNESHAPfl) t*
the City of Philadelphia on September
30, 1976, EPA is today amending 40 CFR
61,04. Address, to reflect this delegation.
For a Notice announcing this delegation,
see PR* Doc. 77-3712 published in tha
Notices section of today's FEDERAL REGIS-
TER The amended $ 61,04,' which adds the
address, of the Philadelphia Department
of Public Health. Air Management Serv-
ices, to which all reports, requests, ap-
plications, submittals, and communica-
tions to the Administrator pursuant to
this part must also be addressed, is sat
forth below.
The Administrator finds' good causa-
for foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective im-
mediately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are Imposed on the parties affected. Tha
delegation which is reflected by this Ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
September 30. 197$ and it serves no
purpose to delay the technical change
of this address to the Code of Federal
Regulations. t
This rulemaking is effective Immedi-
ately, and is Issued under the authority
of section 112 of the Clean Air Act, aa
amended. 42 U.S.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: January 28, 1977.
1 A. R. MORRIS,
Acting Regional Administrator.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In 161.04, paragraph (b) is amended
by revising Subparagraph (NN> to read
aa follows:
§ 61.04 .
(A)-(MM) • • •
(NN)i'b) City of Philadelphia.
Philadelphia Department of Public Health.
Air Management Service*,
801 Arch Street,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19107.
[TO Doc.77-37U Filed 3-3-77:8:45 am]
[mil 689-5|
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND*
ARCS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS)
to the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
on September 30, 1976, EPA is today
amending 40 CFR 61.04. Address, to re-
flect this delegation. For a Notice an-
nouncing this delegation, see FR Doe
77-3713 published in the Notices section
of today's FEDERAL REGISTER. The'
IV-82
-------
amended 9 61.04. which adds the ad-
dress of the Pennsylvania Department
of Environmental Resources, Bureau of
Air Quality and Noise Control, to which
all reports, requests, applications, sub-
mittals. and communications to the Ad-
ministrator pursuant to this part must
also be addressed, Is set forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause for
foregoing prior public notice and for
making this rulemaking effective Imme-
diately in that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this Ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
September 30, 1976, and it serves no
purpose to delay the technical change
of this address to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authority
of section 112 of the Clean Air Act. as
amended, 42 U.S.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: January 25. 1977.
A. R. MORRIS,
Acting Regional Administrator.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In § 61.04. paragraph is amended
by revising Subparagraph (NN) to read
as follows :
§ 61.04 Address.
(A)-(MM) • • «
(NN) (a) Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
(except for City of Philadelphia and Alle-
gheny County)
Pennsylvania Department of Environmental
Resources,
Bureau of Air Quality and Noise Control,
Post Office Box 3063,
Harrlsburg, Pennsylvania 17130.
[FRDoc.TT-3710 Piled l-3-T7;8:« am) -
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOl. 42, NO. 24
FRIDAY, FEBRUARY 4, 1977
36
Title 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
(PBL
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Amendment to Asbestos Standard
• Purpose. The purpose of this amend-
ment is to clarify that the demolition and
renovation provisions of the asbestos
standard apply when friable asbestos
materials used for insulation and fire-
proofing are removed from non-load-
supporting structural members, such as
non-supporting walla and ceilings, as well
as from load-supporting structural
numbers. ••
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Under section 112 of the Clean Air Act,
M amended, 42 U.8.C. 1867c-7, (the
"Act"), the Administrator of the Envi-
ronmental Protection Agency promul-
gated the national emission standard for
the hazardous air, pollutant asbestos on
April 6,1973 (38 PR 8820). Amendments
to this standard were promulgated on
May 3,1974 (39 PR 15396) and on Octo-
ber 14, 1975 (40 FR 48292). The stand-
ard does not include a definition for the
term "structural member", and questions
have arisen concerning what constitutes
a structural member. The definition of
"structural member" is therefore being
added to 40 CFR 61.21 to clarify that the
standard applies to both load-supporting
and non-load-eupporting structural
members. The latter category includes
such items as ceilings and. non-load-sup-
porting walls.
The preamble to the proposed amend-
ments (39 FR 38064, October 25, 1974)
that were promulgated on October 14,'
1975, clearly stated thf.t EPA intended to
cover non-load-supporting structural
members. No contrary intent was ex-
pressed at the time of final promulga-
tion. The amendment promulgated below
clarifies EPA's Intent and should answer
future questions on the applicability of
the standard.
The Administrator finds that a pre-
promulgation public comment period on
this amendment would be "Impracticable,
unnecessary, or contrary to the public
Interest" within the meaning of 5 X7J3.C.
553 (b) (B) because the rulemaking clari-
fies and interprets an existing regula-
tion, does not alter the intended content
of that regulation, and enables EPA to
enforce the existing standard in a con-
sistent and proper manner. Also, the Ad-
ministrator finds that this rulemaking
should be effective upon promulgation
without a 30-day deferral within the
meaning of 6 U.S.C. 653(d), because of
the Immediate effectiveness requlied by
section 112(b) (1) (C) of the Act and the
interpretive nature of this rulemaiung.
Other questions have been raised re-
cently about the applicability of the
asbestos standard to decorative coatings.
The words of the current standard do not
apply to such coatings. EPA is propos-
ing amendments to the asbestos standard
elsewhere in this issue of the PKMMML
RXGISTEX to regulate such coatings.
(BMC. ija, OlMn Air Act M *ded by MO.
4(a) of Pub. L. «l-e04, 84 Bt»t. 1688 (43 U.8.C.
18S7C-7); MC. 114, Clean Air Act. u added
by MC. 4(a) of Pub. L. 01-404', 84 Stat. 1687.
and amended b; Pub. L. 93-310, MC. 6(a)
(4). 88 Stat. 980X43 U.S.C..1887C-0); tec. 801
(a), Clean Air Act, as amended by MC. IB
(C) (3) of Pub. L. 91-604, 84 Stat. 1713 (49
VM.0.1887g(a)).)
Dated: February 23,1977.
JOBN QVARLCS,
Acting Adminittrator.
In Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of
the Code of Federal Regulations, I 61.21
is amended by adding paragraph (x) as
follows:
Subpart B—National Emission Standard
for Asbestos
161 Jl Definition*.
• • • » «
(x) "Structural member" means any
toad-supporting member, such as beams
and load-supporting walls; or any non-
load-supporting member, such as ceilings
and non-load-supporting walls.
(!» Doc.77-6981 Piled 8-1-77:8:48 am]
MOUTH, VOL .41, NO. 41
W8PMMOAY, MAICH I, 1*77
IV-83
-------
37
FART Cl—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Region V Address; Correction
Section 61.04 paragraph (a) is cor-
rected by changing Region V Olllnoic,
Indiana. Minnesota, Michigan, Ohio,
Wisconsin), l North Wacker Drive, Chi-
cago, Illinois 60606 to Region V (Illinois,
.Indiana, Minnesota, Michigan, Ohio,
Wisconsin), 230 South Dearborn Street,
Chicago, Illinois 80604.
Dated: March 21, 1977.
GEORGE R. ALEXANDER,
Regional Administrator.
ire DOC.77-M07 FU«I »-»-77;«:46 am]
•ULES AND IEGULATIONS
ICTtL 708-8]
«WT 41— NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Delegation of Authority to the State of
— Wisconsin
Pursuant to the delegation of author-
ity for national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS) to
the State of Wisconsin on September 2».
1*76, EPA is today amending 40 CPU
61.04, Address, to reflect this delegation.
A Mottee announcing this delegation is
published today March SO, 1977, «t 42 *»
16845 in this FKDCKAL Racism. The
amended Section 61.04, which adds the
address of the Wisconsin Department of
natural Resources to which all reports,
requests, applications, aubmtttals. and
communications to the Administrator
pursuant to this part must Also be .ad-
dressed, is set forth below.
The Administrator finds good -cause
lot foregoing prior public notice and Sar
Tn«irtnp this "iU»m nUng effective immed-
iately In that it is an administrative
change and not one of substantive con-
tent. No additional substantive burdens
are imposed on the parties affected. The
delegation which is reflected by this ad-
ministrative amendment was effective on
September 28, 1976, and it serves no pur-
pose to delay the technical change of this
addition of the State address to the Code
of Federal'Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective Immedi-
ately. and is issued under ttie authority
of section 112 of the Clean Air Act, as
amended, 42 TJJ5.C. 1857c-7.
Dated: March 21, 1977.
GEOBGI R. ALEXANDER, Jr.,
Heffional Administrator.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations ie amended
as follows :
1. In 5 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by revising subparagrapb (YY> to read
«s follows:
1 61.04 Address.
» * * •• *
(b) • • •
(TT) Wisconsin —
WUoonmn Department of Nitura! Besouroct,
fO. Box 7B21, Ifaulisoc, Wisconsin 58707.
fFB Doe.T?-MOe Filed 8-28-77 ;«: 46 km)
FEDEKAl lEGlSTtR, VOL 42, NO 61—WEDNESDAY, MAICH SO, 1977
HDMAl tMISTM, VOL. 41, NO. !•*-
-TUUQAY. JWNf 7,
38
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Standard for Vinyl Chloride; Corrections
and Amendments
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: These amendments are be-
ing made to the vinyl chloride standard
which was promulgated under the au-
thority of the Clean Air Act on October
21, 1976. The standard contains some
typographical errors and needs clarifica-
tion in some parts. These amendments
are Intended to correct the typographical
errors and clarify the standard.
EFFECTIVE DATE: June 7,1977.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
Don R. Goodwin, Emission Standards
and Engineering Division, Environ-
mental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711,
telephone 919-688-8146, ext. 271.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
On October 21,1976, under section 112 of
the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C.
1857), the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) promulgated a national
emission standard for vinyl chloride (41
FR 46560). The standard covers plants
which manufacture ethylene dichloride,
vinyl chloride, and/or polyvlnyl chloride.
Since that time, it has become apparent
that a few sections of the standard and
Test Methods 106 and 107 are unclear.
The purpose of the amendments being
made at this time is to clarify these sec-
tions and to correct typographical errors.
These corrections are in addition to those
published on December 3, 1976 (41 FR
63017). The Administrator finds that
IV-84
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
food CMIM exists for omitting prior
notice and public comment on these
amendments as unnecessary and for
making them Immediately effective be-
cause they simply clarify and correct the
existing regulations and impose no ad-
ditional substantive requirements.
The most significant amendment In-
volves clarification of the requirements
for certification of the analysis of gas
cylinders which may be used to calibrate
testing and monitoring equipment. The
standard, as promulgated on October 21,
1976, requires that an analysis of the gas
used for calibration purposes, "• * 'be
traceable to the National Bureau of
Standards or to a gravlmetrically cali-
brated permeation tube." Comments
were received indicating that the term
"traceable" was unclear.
These amendments require that the
composition of gas cylinders which may
be used for calibration of testing and
monitoring equipment be certified by the
gas manufacturer. The certified compo-
sition must have been determined by di-
rect analysis of the gas contained in each
calibration cylinder using an analytical
procedure the manufacturer had cali-
brated on the day the analysis was per-
formed. Calibration of the analytical
procedure was to have been done using
gases for which the concentrations have
been verified: (1) By comparison with a
calibrated vinyl chloride permeation
tube, (2) by comparison with a gas mix-
ture prepared in acordance with the pro-
cedure described in ! 7.1 of Test Method
106 and using 99.9 percent vinyl chloride,
or (3) by direct analysis by the National
Bureau of Standards. These amendments
are being made to 55 61.65(b) (8) (ill)
and 61.68(c), which contain the moni-
toring requirements, and to {{ 5.2 and 6.2
of Test Methods 106 and 107, respec-
tively.
There are several other changes in
wording for clarification purposes. For
example, § 61.60 Is being amended
to clarify that the testing, reporting, and
recordkeeplng requirements apply to re-
search and development equipment sub-
ject to It 61.64 (a) (1), (b), (c), and (d),
and definitions for standard temperature
and pressure are being added to § 61.61.
The phrase "in vinyl chloride service" Is
being added to 861.85(b)(l) to clarify
that loading and unloading lines which
clearly do not contain vinyl chloride do
not have to be continuously tested to
demonstrate that fact. Section 61.67(d)
is being redeslgnated as §61.67(g)(I)
(11) to clarify that conducting a series
of three runs is not necessary when Test
Method 107 is being used to determine
emissions. A change is being made in
l61.67(g)U)(iii) [which was originally
promulgated as { 61.67fg) (1) (11) ] to es-
tablish that the.concentration emission
limits for gas streams are to be de-
termined on a dry basis. Similarly, word-
ing is being added to » 61.70(c> (2) (v) to
establish that vinyl chloride concentra-
tions in polyviny] chloride resin are to
be determined on a dry weight basis. An
additional change to this same section is
•emi made to clarify that a sample from
each batch of resin is to be measured for
its vinyl chloride content. Section 61.71
(a) is being changed to correct typo-
graphical errors and to clarify that daily
operating records for polyvlnyl chloride
reactors are required to be kept whether
a relief valve discharges or not.
Section 4.3.2 of Test Method 106 is
being revised to allow the option of using
Poropak T as the column packing in-
stead of OE SF-96 In a secondary gas
chromatographic column if acetaldehyde
is present. This packing has also been
shown to produce adequate separation
of vinyl chloride and acetaldehyde. Sec-
tion 61.67(e) of the regulation and § 6.2
of Test Method 106 are being amended
to Include a limit on the amount of time
a test sample can be kept before it is
analyzed for vinyl chloride. Section 1.2
of Test Method 107 is being amended to
clarify that chromatograph parameters
can be altered if the precision and re-
producibillty of analysis of vinyl chloride
cylinder standards is not impaired. Sec-
tion 5.3.2 of Test Method 107 is being
amended to allow the use of a pair of
Poropak Q columns if methane! or ac-
etaldehyde is present In the sample. Also
in Test Method 107 a clarification for the
term K« has been added to I 9.2.
The remaining changes are corrections
of typographical errors or are self-
explanatory.
These amendments are issued under
the authority of section 112 of the Clean
Air Act, sec. 4(a) of Pub. L. 91-604, 84
Stat. 1685 (42 U.S.C. 1857c-7) and sec-
tion 301 (a) of the Clean Air Act, sec. 2 of
Pub. L. No. 90-148, 81 Stat. 504, as
amended by sec. (15) (c) (2) of Pub. L.
91-604, 84 Stat. 1713 (42 U.S.C. 1857g
(a)). The amendments to §§61.67 and
61.68 are also Issued under the author-
ity of section 114 of the Clean Air Act.
as added by sec. 4(a) of Pub. L. 91-604,
84 Stat. 1687 and amended by Pub. L.
93-319, sec. 6(a)(4), 88 Stat. 259 (42
U.S.C. 1857c-9).
NOTE: The Environmental Protection
Agency has determined that this document
does not contain a major proposal requiring
preparation of an Economic Impact Analy-
sis under Executive Orders 11821 and 11949
and OMB Circular A-107.
Dated: May 26,1977.
EDWARD F. TUERK,
Acting Assistant Administrator
tor Air and Waste Management.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amended
as follows:
1. In § 61.60, paragraph (c) is
amended as follows:
§ 61.60 Applicability.
• • • • »
(c) Sections of this subpart other than
I! 61.61; 61.64 (a)(l), (b), (c), and (d);
61.67; 61.68; 61.69; 61.70; and 61.71 • • *.
2. In I 61.61 paragraphs (t) and (u)
are added as follows:
§61.61 Definition!.
(t) "Standard temperature" means a
temperature of 20° C '69° F).
(u) "Standard pressure" means a
pressure of 760 mm of Hg (29.92 in. of
Hg).
3. Section 61.62 Is corrected as follows:
§ 61.62 Emission standard for ethylene
dichloride plants.
(a) Ethylene dichloride purification:
The concentration of vinyl chloride In
all exhaust gases discharged to the at-
mosphere from any equipment used In
ethylene dichloride purification is not
to exceed 10 ppm, except as provided in
§61.65(a). This requirement does not
apply to equipment that has been opened,
is out of operation, and met the require-
ment In j 61.65(b> (6) (1) before being
opened.
(b) Oxychlorlnation reactor: Except
as provided in § 61.65(a), emissions of
vinyl chloride to the atmosphere from
each oxychlorination reactor are not to
exceed 0.2 g/kg (0.0002 Ib/lb) of the 100
percent ethylene dichloride product from
the oxychlorination process.
4. In §61.65, paragraphs (b)(l), (b)
(8) (ill) (A), and (b) (8) (ill) (B) are
amended as follows:
§ 61.65 Emission standard for ethylene
dichloride, vinyl chloride and poly-
vinyl chloride plants.
» • • • »
(b) * • •
U) Loading and unloading lines:
Vinyl chloride emissions from loading
and unloading lines in vinyl chloride
service which are opened to the atmos-
phere after each loading or unloading op-
eration are to be minimized as follows:
* • • • »
(8) * * •
(ill) * • •
(A) A calibration gas mixture pre-
pared from the gases specified in sections
5.2.1 and 5.2.2 of Test Method 106 and
in accordance with section 7.1 of Test
Method 106, or
(B) A calibration gas cylinder stand-
ard containing the appropriate concen-
tration of vinyl chloride. The gas com-
position of the calibration gas cylinder
standard is to have been certified by the
manufacturer. The manufacturer must
have recommended a maximum shelf life
for each cylinder so that the concentra-
tion does not change greater than -*-5
percent from the certified value. The date
of gas cylinder preparation, certified
vinyl chloride concentration and recom-
mended maximum shelf Me must have
been affixed to the cylinder before ship-
ment from the manufacturer to the
buyer. If a gas chromatosraph is used as
the vinyl chloride monitoring system.
these gas mixtures may be directly used
to prepare a chromatograph calibration
curve as described in section 7.3 of Test
Method 106. The requirements In sec-
tion B.2.3.1 and 5.2.3.2 of Test Method
106 for certification of cylinder stand-
ards and for establishment and verifica-
tion of calibration standards are to be
followed.
IDHAl MOISTM, VOl. 43, NO. 10*—TUISDAY, JUNI t. 1977
IV-85
-------
(•Mi, 1» and SOI(a). Clean Air Act (41
VM.0.18870-7 and USTgfa)).)
B. Button ei.67 to amended by deleting
and reserving paragraph (d), revising
paragraphs (•), (iHlHii) and <«X1>
(111), and by adding paragraph
(Iv) u follows:
161,67 Emii
(d) [Reserved]
(0) When at all possible, each sample
to to be analysed within 34 hours, but In
no ease In excess of 72 hours of sample
collection Vinyl chloride emissions are
to be determined within 30 days after the
emission test The owner or operator
shall report the determinations to the
Administrator by a registered letter dis-
patched before the cleat of the next busi-
ness day following the determination.
» • • t •
(f) •'• •
(!)•••
(11) Each emission test is to consist of
three runs. For the purpose of determin-
ing emissions, the average of results of
all runs is to apply. The average is to be
computed on a time weighted basis.
(ill) For gas streams containing more
than 10 percent oxygen the concentra-
tion of vinyl chloride as determined by
Test Method 106 is to be corrected to 10
percent oxygen (dry basis) for determi-
nation of emissions by using the follow-
ing equation:
_ 10.9
where:
Ci (•."•«•«* The concentration of vinyl
chloride In the exhaust gases, corrected
to 10-percent oxygen.
Ci—The concentration of vinyl chloride
as measured by Test Method 106.
20.9 —Percent oxygen in the ambient
air at standard conditions.
10.9— Percent oxygen in the ambient
air at standard conditions, minus the
10.0-percent oxygen to which the
correction is being made.
Percent Oi— Percent oxygen in the
exhaust gas as measured by Refer-
ence Method 3 in Appendix A of
Part 60 of this chapter.
(HO For those emission sources where
the emission limit is prescribed In terms
of mass rather than concentration, mass
emissions in kg/ 100 kg product are to be
determined by using the following equa-
tion:
C» (2.60)0 10-1 [100]
Z
where :
C»jr«kg vinyl chloride/100 kg prod-
uct.
C»«The concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride as measured by Test
Method 106.
2.60- Density of vinyl chloride at one
atmosphere and 20° C iu
kg/m».
Q*> Volumetric flow rate in m'/hr as
determined by Reference
Method 2 of Appendix A to
Part 60 of thia chapter.
10-'= Con version factor for ppm.
Z- Production rate (kg/hr).
IUIIS AND IIOULATIONS
6. Section 61.68 it amended by revis-
ing paragraphs (o) (1) and (c) (2) as fol-
lows:
161.68 Emission monitoring.
• • • • *
to) • ••
(1) A calibration gas mixture pre-
pared from the gases specified in sections
6.3.1 and 6.3.3 of Test Method 106 and
m accordance with section 7.1 of Test
Method 106, or
(3) A calibration gas cylinder stand-
ard containing the appropriate concen-
tration of vinyl chloride. The gas com-
position of the calibration gas cylinder
standard is to have been certified by the
manufacturer. The manufacturer must
have recommended a maximum shelf
life for each cylinder so that the concen-
tration does not change greater than
±8 percent from the certified value. The
date of gas cylinder preparation, certified
vinyl chloride concentration and recom-
mended maximum shelf life must have
been affixed to the cylinder before ship-
ment from the manufacturer to the
buyer. If a gas chromatograph is used as
the vinyl chloride monitoring system,
these gas mixtures may be directly used
to prepare a chromatograph calibration
curve as described in section 7.3 of Test
Method 106. The requirements in sec-
tions 8.3.3.1 and 6.3.3.3 of Test Method
106 for certification of cylinder stand-
ards and for establishment and verifica-
Won of calibration standards are to be
followed.
(Bsc*. 118, 114, and 801 (a), Clean Air Act (49
TTJ.0.1M7C-7,18B7«HTand 1864|(a)) )
7. In 161.70 paragraphs (c)(2>'(i)
and (c)(3)(v) are amended as follows.
8 61.70 Semiannual report.
(0) • » •
(1) If batch stripping is used, one rep-
resentative sample of polyvinyl chloride
resin is to be taken from each batch of
each grade of resin immediately follow-
ing the completion of the stripping op-
eration, and identified by resin type and
grade and the date and time the batch
is completed. The corresponding quan-
tity of material processed in each strip-
per batch is to be recorded and identi-
fied by resin type and grade and the
date and time the batch is completed.
* * * t »
(v) The report to the Administrator
by the owner or operator is to include
the vinyl chloride content found in each
sample required by paragraphs (c) (3)
(i) and (c) (3) (11) of this section, aver-
aged separately for each type of resin,
over each calendar day and weighted
according to the quantity of each grade
of resin processed by the stripper(s)
that calendar day, according to the fol-
lowing equation:
Ar<
where:
A"24-hour average concentration of
type Tt resin in ppm (dry
weight basis).
0—Total production of type T,
resin over the 24-hour period,
in kg.
7\-Type of resin; »-l,2 . . . m
where m is total number of
resin types * produced during
the 24-hour period.
W= Concentration of vinyl chloride
in one sample of grade Gt
resin, in ppm.
P«« Production of grade Oi resin
represented by the sample, in
kg.
column. See section*
4.3.3 and 8.4. If resolution of the vinyl
chloride peak U still not satisfactory for a
particular (ample, then chromatograph pa-
rameters can be further altered with prior
approval of the Administrator. If alteration
of the chromatograph parameters falls to
resolve the vinyl chloride peak, then sup-
plemental confirmation of the vinyl chloride
peak through an absolute analytical tech-
nique, such as mass spectroscopy, must b«
performed.
11. Section 4.1 of Test Method 106 is
corrected as follows:
4.1 Sampling (Figure 10«-l).
• 12. Section 4.1.3 of Test Method 106 is
corrected as follows:
4.1.3 Male (3) and female (3) stainless
steel quick-connects, with ball checks (one
pair without) located as shown in Figure
100-1.
FfDHUL MOUTH, VOl. 42, NO. 1O»—TUfiOAY, JUNI 7, 1*77
IV-8 6
-------
RULIS AND REGULATIONS
13. Section 4.1.10 of Test Method 106 la
corrected as follows:
4.1.10 Connecting tubino. Teflon, 6.4
mm ouUtdt diameter, to assemble sample
train (Figure 108-1).
14. Section 4.3.2 of Teat Method 108 Is
amended aa follows:
4,3.3 ChromatOffraphio column, Btalnlew
steel, 9 mx3.9 mm, containing 80/100 mesh
Chromasorb 109. A secondary column of OB
BF-96,90 percent on 80/80 mesh AW Ohroma-
sorb P, stainless steel, 9 mxS.9 mm or Pora-
pak T, 80/100 mesh, stainless steel, 1 mxS.9
mm is required if acetaldebyde is present. If
used, a secondary column is placed after the
Ohromasorb 109 column. Hie combined
columns should then be operated at 190* 0.
IS. Section 6.3 of Test Method 106 is
revised as follows:
8.3 Calibration. Use one of the following
options: either 5.9.1 and 8.2.3, or 6.9.8.
8.9,1 Vinyl chlorite, 98.9+ percent. Pun
vinyl chloride gas certified by the manufac-
turer to contain a minimum of 99.6 percent
vinyl chloride for use In the preparation of
standard gas mixtures in Section 7.1, If the
gas manufacturer maintains a bulk cylinder
supply of 99.9+ percent vinyl chloride, the
certification analysis may have been per-
formed on this supply rather than on each
gas cylinder prepared from this bulk supply.
The date of gas cylinder preparation and the
certified analysis must have been affixed to
the cylinder before shipment from the gas
manufacturer to the buyer.
8.9.9 Nitrogen gat. Zero grade, for prepa-
ration of standard gas mixtures.
8.9.8 Cylinder standards (3). Oas mix-
ture standards (60, 10, and 8 ppm vinyl
chloride In nitrogen cylinders) for which the
gas composition IMS been certified by the
manufacturer. The manufacturer must have
recommended a maximum shelf life for each
cylinder so that the concentration does not
change greater than ±8 percent from the
certified value. The date of gas cylinder prep-
aration, certified vinyl chloride concentra-
tion and recommended maximum shelf life
must have been affixed to the cylinder before
shipment from the gas manufacturer to the
buyer. These gas mixture etandards may be
directly used to prepare a chromatograph
calibration curve as described in section 7.3.
6.3.3.1 Cylinder standard* certification.
The concentration of vinyl chloride In nitro-
gen in each cylinder must have been certified
by the manufacturer by a direct analysis of
each cylinder using an analytical procedure
that the manufacturer had calibrated on the
day of cylinder analysis. The calibration of
the analytical procedure shall, as a minimum,
have utilized a three-point calibration curve.
It Is recommended that the manufacturer
maintain two calibration standards and use
these standards in the following way: (1) a
high concentration standard (between 60 and
100 ppm) for preparation of a calibration
curve by an appropriate dilution technique;
(2) a low concentration standard (between
5 and 10 ppm) for verification of the dilution
technique used.
6.2.3.3 Establishment and verification of
calibration standard!. The concentration of
each calibration standard must have been
established by the manufacturer using
reliable procedures. Additionally, each
calibration standard must have been veri-
fied by the manufacturer by one of the
following procedures, and the agreement
between the Initially determined concen-
tration value and the verification concen-
tration value must be within ± 6 percent:
(1) verification value determined by com-
parison with a calibrated vinyl chloride
permeation tube, (9) verification value
determined by comparison with a gas mix-
ture prepared In accordance with the pro-
cedure described in section 7.1 and using
99.9+ percent vlnyle chloride, or (3) verifi-
cation value obtained by having the
calibration standard analyzed by the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards. All calibration
standards must be renewed on a time
interval consistent with the shelf life of
the cylinder standards sold.
16. Section 6.2 of Test Method 106 is
•amended as follows:
63 Sample itorage. Sample bags must be
kept out of direct sunlight, when at all
possible analysis is to be performed within
94 hours, but in no case In excess of 79
hours of sample collection.
17. Section 7.1 of Test Method 106 is
'amended as follows:
7.1 Preparation of vinyl chlorite stand-
ard gas mixturei. Evacuate a sixteen-lnch
square Tedlar bag that has passed a leak
check (described In Section 7.4) and meter
in 6 liters of nitrogen. WhUe the bag is
filling, use the 0.8 ml syringe to inject
9604 of 99.9+ percent vinyl chloride
through the wall of the bag. Upon with-
drawing the syringe needle, immediately
cover the resulting hole with a piece of
adhesive taps, The bag now contains a
vinyl chloride concentration of 80 ppm. In
a like manner use the other syringe to
prepare gas mixtures having 10 and 6 ppm
vinyl chloride concentrations, Placs each
bag on a smooth surface and alternately
depress opposite sides of the bag 60 times
to further mix the gases. These gas mixture
standards may be used for 10 days from the
date of preparation, after which time prep-
aration of new gas mixtures Is required,
( CAUTION,—Contamination may be a prob-
lem when a bag is reused If the new gas
mixture standard contains a lower con-
centration than the previous gas mixture
standard did,)
18. Section 7.3 of Test Method 106 is
amended as follows:
7.3 Preparation of chromatograph cali-
bration curve. Make a gas ehromatographlc
measurement of each gas mixture standard
(described in section 6.2.3 or 7.1) using con-
ditions identical with those listed in sections
6.3 and 6.4. Flush-the sampling loop for 30
seconds at the rate of 100 ml/mln with each
standard gas mixture and activate the sam-
ple valve. Record C,. the concentration of
vinyl chloride Injected, the attenuator set-
ting, chart speed, peak area, sample loop
temperature, column temperature, carrier
gas flow rate, and retention time. Record the
laboratory pressure. Calculate A,, the peak
area multiplied by the attenuator setting.
Repeat until two Injection areas are within
6 percent, then plot these points v. C,. When
the other concentrations have been plotted,
draw a smooth curve through the points.
Perform calibration dally,, or before and after
each set of bag samples, whichever Is more
frequent.
19. Section 1.2 of Test Method 107 is
amended as follows:
1.2 This procedure Is suitable for deter-
mining the vinyl choride monomer (VCM)
content of inprocess wastewater samples, and
the residual vinyl chloride monomer
(K.VCM) content of polvvlnyl chloride
(PVC) resins, wet cake, slurry, and latex
samples. It cannot be used for polymer in
fused forms, such as sheet or cubes. If a
resolution of the vinyl chloride peak is not
satisfactory for a particular sample, then
chromatograph parameters may be altered
provided that the precision and reproducl-
blllty of the analysis of vinyl chloride cylin-
der standards are not Impaired. If there is
reason to believe that some other hydro-
carbon with an Identical retention time is
present in the sample, then supplemental
confirmation of the vinyl chloride peak
through an absolute analytical technique,
such as mass speotroscopy, should be per-
formed.
20. Section 5.3.2 is amended as follows:
6.3.3 Chromatographic column. Stainless
steel, 3 m x 3.2 mm, containing 0.4 percent
Oarbowax 1600 on Oarbopak A, Parkin-Elmer
Corporation No. 106-0133, or equivalent.
Oarbopak 0 can bn used in place of Carbopak
A. If methanol and/or acetaldehyde is pres-
ent in the sample, a pair of Poropak Q col-
umns In series (1m x 3.3 mm followed by
9 m x 3.9 mm) with provision for backflush
of the first column has been shown to pro-
vide adequate separation of vinyl chloride,
21. Section 6.3 of Test Method 107 is
revised as follows:
6.9 Calibration.
6.9.1 Cylinder standard* (4), Oas mixture
standards (60, 600, 9,000, and 4,000 ppm vinyl
chloride in nitrogen cylinders) for which the
gas composition has been certified by the
manufacturer. Lower concentration stand-
ards should be obtained if lower concentra-
tions of vinyl chloride samples are expected,
as the Intent is to bracket the sample con-
centrations with standards. The manufac-
turer must have recommended a maximum
shelf life for each cylinder so that the con-
centration does not change greater than ±6
percent from the certified value. The date
of gas cylinder preparation, certified vinyl
chloride concentration and recommended
maximum shelf life must have been affixed
to the cylinder before shipment from the
manufacturer to the buyer,
6,3.1,1 Cylinder standard* certification,
The concentration of vinyl chloride in nitro-
gen in each cylinder must have been certi-
fied by the manufacturer by a direct analysis
of each cylinder using an analytical proce-
dure that the manufacturer had calibrated
on the day of cylinder analysis, The calibra-
tion of the analytical procedure shall, as a
minimum, have utilized a three-point cali-
bration curve. It is recommended that the
manufacturer maintain two calibration
standards and use these standards in the
following way: (1) a high concentration
standard (between 4,000 and 8,000 ppm) for
preparation of a calibration curve by an ap-
propriate dilution technique; (9) a low con-
centration standard (between 60 and 600
ppm) for verification of the dilution tech-
nique used.
6.3.1.3 Establishment and verification of
calibration standards. The concentration of
each calibration standard must have been
established by the manufacturer using reli-
able procedures. Additionally, each calibra-
tion standard must have been verified by the
manufacturer by one of the following proce-
dures, and the agreement between the ini-
tially determined concentration value and
the verification concentration value must be
within ±6 percent: (1) verification value de-
termined by comparison with a gas mixture
standard generated In a similar manner to
the procedure described in section 7.1 of
Method 106 for preparing gas mixture stand-
ards using 99.9+ percent vinyl chloride, or
(3) verification value obtained by having the
calibration standard analyzed by the Nation-
al Bureau of Standards. All calibration stand-
ards must be renewed on a time interval
consistent with the shelf life of the cylinder
standards sold.
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 42, NQ. 109—TUESDAY, JUNE 7, 1977
IV-8 7
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
33, Section 7.8.2.d. of Test Method 107
IB corrected as follows:
d. W—StabiUMation time. Tbt normal set-
ttng u 03 minute*.
33. Section 9.2 of Test Method 107 Is
corrected as follows:
9.3 Residual vinyl chloride monomer con-
centration, or Ylnyl chloride monomer con-
centration.
Calculate C,,, as follows:
Equation 107-2
C,,.— Concentration of vinyl chloride
in the sample, in ppm.
P«— Laboratory atmosphere pros-
sure, mm Hg.
TWRoom temperature, °K.
M,- Molecular weight of VCM
(62.5).
V,™ Volume of vapor phase (vial
volume less sample volume).
m i" Weight of sample, grams.
R=0as constant [62,360 (cc-mm-
mole-degrees Kelvin)]
K=Henry's Law constant. For
VCM in PVC at 90° C,
K=6.52X10-»=K,. For
VCM in 1 cc (approximate)
wastewater sample at 90 C,
/f=5.0X10-«-X..
TI—Equilibration temperature, *K.
If the following conditions are met,
Equation 107-2 can be simplified as
follows:
1. ri=22° C (295° K)
• 2. T,=908 C (363° K)
3. P.= 750 mm Hg.
4. V,= V,-g-23.5-^
where
V,=Vial volume, cc (23.5).
5. Sample contains less than 0.5 percent
water.
:,„-£-'(4.197X10-'+
5.988 XlO-'\
Wl I /
Equation 107-3
The following general equation can be used for any sample which contains VCM,
PVC and water.
where:
rs-Total solids.
NOTE: K» must be determined for sam-
ples with a vapor volume to liquid volume
ratio other then 22.5 to 1. This ratio can
be obtained by adjusting the sample weight
through giving consideration to the total
solids and density of the PVC.
Equation 107-4
Results calculated using Equation 107-4
represent concentration based on the total
sample. To obtain .results based on dry
PVC content, divide by T8.
For a 1-cc wastewater sample (that is,
22.5 to 1 vapor volume to liquid volume
ratio), K» is B.OX10-'. Thus, Equation
107-4 can be simplified to the following:
Cr,,
6.988X10-'
+ (2,068X10-')] .Equation 107-5
(Sees. 112 and 301 (a) of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.8.C. 1857c-7 and 1857g(a).)
[PR 000.77-16838 Filed 8-«-77;8:4B e*n]
NBMAI- MOUTH, VOL. 42, NO. lOt—TUISDAY, JUNI 7, 1*77
EFFECTIVE DATE: July 21, 1977.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
J. Kevin Healy, Attorney, U.S. Envi-
ronmental Protection Agency, Region
n, General Enforcement Branch, En-
forcement Division, 36 Federal Plaza,
New York, New York 10007 (212-264-
1196).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
On May 9, 1977 EPA delegated author-
ity to the State of New Jersey to imple-
ment and enforce many categories of the
National Emission Standards for Haz-
ardous Air Pollutants regulations. A full
account of the background to this action
and of the exact terms of the delegation
appear in the Notice of Delegation which
is also being published in today's FEDERAL
REGISTER.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, since the Administrator has found
good cause to forego prior public notice.
This addition of the State of New Jersey
address to the Code of Federal Regula-
tions is a technical change and Imposes
no additional substantive burden on the
parties affected.
Dated: July 18, 1977.
BARBARA BLUM,
Acting Administrator.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amende<*
under authority of section 112 of tt.
Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857c-7) , as fol-
lows:
<1) In 161.04 paragraph (b) is
amended by revising subparagraph (FF)
to read as follows:
§ 61.04 Address.
(FP)— State of New Jersey: New Jersey De-
partment of Environmental Protection,
John Pitch Plaza, P.O. Box 3807, Trenton,
New Jersey 08828.
[PR Doc.77-31031 Piled 7-30-77:8:46 am]
39
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSIONI STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to the State of New
Jersey
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: A notice announcing EPA's
delegation of authority for certain cate-
gories of the National Emission Stand-
ards for Hazardous Air Pollutants reg-
ulations to the State of New Jersey is
published at page 37386 of today's FED-
ERAL REGISTER. In order to reflect this
delegation, this document amends EPA
regulations to require the submission of
all notices, reports, and other communi-
cations called for by the delegated regu-
lations to the State of New Jersey rather
than to EPA.
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 42, NO. 140-
-THURSDAY, JULY 21, 1977
-------
40
Title 4O—Prottctlon of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
(FRL rre-4]
PART 60—STANDARDS OF PERFORM-
ANCE FOR NEW STATIONARY SOURCES
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Authority Citations; Revision
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Fins! rule.
SUMMARY: This action revises the au-
thority citations for Standards of Per-
formance for New Stationary Sources
and National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants. The revision
adopts a method recommended by the
FEDERAL REGISTER for Identifying which
sections are enacted under which statu-
tory authority, making the citations
more useful to the reader.
HULK AND REGULATIONS
EFFECTIVE DATE: August 17, 1077.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
Don R. Goodwin, Emission Standards
and Engineering Division, Environ-
mental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, N.C. 27711, telephone
919-641-5371.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
This action is being taken in accordance
with the requirements of 1 CFR 31.41
and is authorized under section 301 (a)
of the Clean Air Act, as amended, 43
V.8.C. 1887g(a). Because the amend-
ments are clerical In nature and affect
no substantive rights or requirements,
the Administrator finds It unnecessary
to propose and Invite public comment.
Dated: August 12,1977.
DOUCHES M. COSTLB,
Administrator.
Parts 60 and «1 of Chapter X, Title 40
of the Code of Federal Regulations are
revised as follows:
* * *
4. The authority citation following the
table of sections in Part 61 Is, revised to
read as follows:
AOTKOHTT: See. 112, 801 (») of the Clraa
Air Aet M amended (43 U.8.0. 18870-7, iSfTg
(a)), unlMi otherwise noted.
I. Following 161.16, the following au-
thority citation is added:
-------
42
TUto 40 Protection of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AOENCY
[FRL 784-8]
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUT-
ANTS
Unto and Abbreviation*
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: This action revises the
General Provisions by reorganizing the
units and abbreviations, and adding the
international System of Units (SI). Un-
til recently, EPA did not have a preferred
system of measurement to be used in
its regulations issued under this part
Mow the Agency is using SI units in all
regulations issued under this part. This
necessitates that SI units be added to
the General Provisions to provide a
complete listing of abbreviations used.
EFFECTIVE DATE: October 31, 1077.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
Don R. Goodwin, Emission Stand-
ards and Engineering Division, Envi-
ronmental Protection Agency, Re-
search Triangle Park, N.C. 27711, tel-
ephone (910-541-8271).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Section 3 of Pub. L. 94-168, the Metric
Conversion Act of 1978, declares that the
policy of the United States shall be to
coordinate md plan the Increasing use
of the metric system in the United States.
On December 10,1976, a notice was pub-
lished in the FEDERAL REGISTER (41 FR
84018) that set forth the interpretation
and modification of the International
System of Units (SI), for the United
States. EPA incorporates SI units In
all regulations issued under 40 CFR Part
81 and provides common equivalents to
parentheses where desirable. Use of 81
units requires this revision of the abbre-
viations section (5 61.03) of the General
Provisions of 40 CFR Part 61.
' An explanation of the International
System of Units was presented in the
FEDERAL REGISTER notice mentioned
above (41 FR 54018). EPA is using the
Standard for Metric Practice (E 380-76)
published by the American Society for
Testing and Materials (A.8.T.M.) as its
basic reference. This document may be
obtained by sending $4.00 to A.S.T.M.,
1916 Race Street. Philadelphia, Pennsyl-
vania 19103.
fa this revision has no regulatory im-
pact, but only defines units and abbre-
viations used in this part, opportunity
for public participation was Judged
unnecessary.
This action is taken under the author-
ity of sections 112 and 301 (a) of the
Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C 1857g(a)
NOTE.—Tbe Environmental Protection
Agency baa determined that this document
does not contain a major proposal requiring
preparation of an Economic Impact Analysis
under Executive Orders 11821 and 11949 and
OMB Circular A-107.
•UUS AND IIOULATIONS
Dated: September 28,1977.
DOUGLAS M. COSTLE,
Administrator.
43pART 81—NATIONAL EMISSION STAND-
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
40 CFR Part 61 is amended by revising
I 61.03 to read as follows:
| 61 .03 Unili and abbreviation*.
Used in this port are abbreviations and
symbols of units of measure. These «re
defined as follows :
(a) System International (81) units
of measure:
A=unper»
i= hertz
J= joule
KsdHTtt Kelvin
kgskUogTMn
m= mater
m*= cubic mtter
mg=mlUigram=lO-' gram
an = millimeter = 10-' meter
Xg=mtgagrain=lo*gram
nolsiaole
K= new ton
ng=nanogram=: 10-' gram
pm= nanometer =10-* meter
P»=
]()••
V=volt
w=watt
Dsomh
*g=mierogrun=
(b) Other units of measure:
•C=degree Celsius (centigrade)
ofm=cubic fttt psr minute
cc=cubic centimeter
dsday
•F=degree Fahrenheit
ft>=square feet
ft»=cublo f*tt
gal=gallon
in=inch
in Bg=incnM of mercury
in B,OsinobM at water
1=liter
lb=pound
lpm=liter per mlnut*
nun=minut*
m=mUUliter=10-' liter
oB=ounoe*
ps|g=poundt per squve inch enge
•Rsdegrw Banfclnd
*1=mlcroliter = 10-* liter
T/V=volume per volume
yd>=squ«n yards
7T=ye»r
(c) Cbemical nomenclature:
Be=beryllium
Hg=mercury
H,O=water
(d) Miscellaneous:
»ct=actual
avg=average
I.D.=ln«lde diameter
M=molar
N=normal
O.D.=outside diameter
%= percent
std=standard
(Sections 112 and 301 (a) of the Clean Air
Act, as amended [43 C.S.C. l85Tc-7,
I857g(a)].)
[PR Doc 77-28718 Filed 9-28-77;8:45 am]
fEMIM UMStU. VOL. 42, NO. 189-
—THURSDAY, SEPTEMBEI 29, 1977
Delegation of Authority to the
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico
AGENCY; Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Final rule,
SUMMARY: A notice announcing EPA'*
delegation of authority for certain cate-
gories of the National Emission Stand-
ards for Hazardous Air Pollutants regu-
lations to the Commonwealth of Puerto
Rico is published at page 62196 of today's
FEDERAL REGISTER. In order to reflect thit
delegation, this document amends EPA
regulations, to require the submission of
all notices, reports, and other communi-
cations called for by the delegated regu-
lations to the Commonwealth of Puerto
Rico as well as to EPA.
EFFECTIVE DATE: December 9,1977
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
J. Kevin Healy, Attorney, U.S. En-
vironmental Protection Agency. Re-
gion II, General Enforcement Branch,
Enforcement Division, 26 Federal
Plaza, New York. N.Y. 10007, 212-
264-1196.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
By letter dated January 13, 1977 EPA
delegated authority to the Common-
wealth of Puerto Rico to implement and
enforce many categories of the National
Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants regulations. The Common-
wealth accepted this delegation by letter
dated October 17,1977, A full account of
the background to this action and of the
exact terms of the delegation appears in
the Notice of Delegation which is also
being published in today's FEDERAL
REGISTER.
Tills rulemaklng is effective immedi-
ately, since the Administrator lias found
good cause to forego prior public notice
This addition of the Commonwealth-of
Puerto Rico address to the Code of Fed-
eral Regulations is a technical change
and imposes no additional substantive
burden on the parties affected
Dated: November 22,1977.
ECKARDTC BECK.
Regional Administrator
Part 61 of Chapter I. Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amer.de>!
as follows:
(1) In § 61.04 paragraph 5 Sail-
farce, PR 00910
[FR Do,.- 77-35163 Filed 12-8-77.B 43 atu[
FEDERAL REGISTER VOt 47. NO 237—FRIDAr, DECEMBER 9.
IV-90
-------
44
TKIt 40—Protection of Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
[PRL 838-3)
AIR POLLUTION
Delegation of Authority to the State of
Minnesota for Prevention of Significant
Deterioration; Inspections, Monitoring
and Entry; Standard* of Performance for
New Stationary Sources; and National
Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants
AGENCY; Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: The amendment below In-
stitutes an address change for the imple-
mentation of technical and administra-
tive review and enforcement of Preven-
tion of Significant Deterioration provi-
sions; Inspections, Monitoring and Entry
provisions; Standards of Performance
for New Stationary Sources; and Nation-
al Emission Standards for Hazardous
Air Pollutants. The notice announcing
the delegation of authority is published
elsewhere In this issue of the FIDIRAL
RMISTH.
EFFECTIVE DATE: October 6,1977.
ADDRESSES: This amendment provides
that all reports, requests, applications,
and communications required for the
delegated authority will no longer be
sent to the U3. Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Region V Office, but will be
sent Instead to: Minnesota Pollution
Control Agency, Division of Air Quality,
10U West County Road B-2, Roseville,
Minn. 65113.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, CON-
TACT:
Joel Morbito, Air Programs Branch,
UB. Environmental Protection Agency,
Region V, 330 South Dearborn St.,
Chicago, m. 60604, 312-353-220S.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
The Regional Administrator finds good
cause for forgoing prior public notice
and for making this rulemaking effective
immediately in that it is an adminis-
trative change and not one of substantive
content. No additional substantive bur-
dens are imposed on the parties affected.
The delegations which are granted by
this administrative amendment were
effective October 6, 1977, and It serves
no purpose to delay the technical
change of this addition of the State ad-
dress to the Code of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaking Is effective immediately
and is Issued under authority of sections
101, 110, 111, 112, 114, 160-169 of the
Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.8.C.
7401, 7410, 7411, 7412, 7414.-7470-79,
7491). Accordingly, 40 CFR Parts 62, 60
and 61 are amended as follows:
RULIS AND RIOULATIONS
PART 81—NATIONAL EMISSIONS STAND.
ARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Subpart A—General Provisions
1. Section 61.04 Is amended by adding
a new paragraph (b) (Y) as follows:
161.04 Addreit.
• • « . * *
(b) • • •
(T) Minnesota Pollution Control Agency,
Dlvlilon of Air Quality, IMS Wait County
BoM B-2, RoMvllle. Minn. 88113.
Dated: December 21, 1977.
QIOROI AUXANDIR,
Regional Adminlttrator.
[PR Doe.77-37404 PUed 19-*0-77;*:4e km]
NDMAl MWSTn, VOL 41, NO. 1-
-TUMDAY, JANUARY I, ten
45
THteSO
CHAPTM I— fNVMONMINTM PXOTICTION
AOSNCY
SUeCHAPTM C— AM PROORAMf
[PRL 846-71
M0 AuMasMfftV tsft Mask CsBssBBBBaUI^Bf atssslMi
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: The amendments below
Institute certain address changes for
reports and applications required from
operators of new sources. EPA has del-
egated to the Commonwealth of Ken-
tucky authority to review new and
modified sources. The delegated au-
thority Includes the reviews under 40
CFR Part 62 for the prevention of sig-
nificant deterioration. It also include*
the review under 40 CFR Part SO for
the standards of performance for new
stationary sources and reviewed under
40 CFR Part 01 for national emission
standards for hazardous air pollutant*.
A notice announcing the delegation of
authority was published In the Notloes
Motion of a previous Issue of the FHV
nut Rtxjism. These amendment!
provide that all report*, requests, ap-
plications, submittslsi and communica-
tions previously required for the dele-
gated reviews will now be tent to the
Division of Air Pollution Control, De-
partment for Natural Resources and
Environmental Protection, We*t
Frankfort Office Complex, U.8. 127,
Frankfort, Ky. 40601, Instead of EPA'*
Region IV.
EFFECTIVE DATE: January 25,197S.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION,
CONTACT:
John Eagles, Air Program* Branch,
Environmental Protection Agency,
Region IV, 846 Courtland Street
NE., Atlanta, Oa. 80808, phone 404-
881-2864.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
The Regional Administrator find*
good cause for foregoing prior public
notice and for making this rulemaking
effective Immediately in that it Is an
administrative change and not one of
substantive content. No additional
substantive burdens are imposed on
the parties affected. The delegation
which is reflected by this administra-
tive amendment was effective on April
12, 1977, and It serves no purpose to
delay the technical change of this ad-
dition of the state address to the Code
of Federal Regulations.
(Sect. 101. 110, 111, 112, 301. Clean Air Act,
as amended, (42 D.8.C. 7401, 7410, 7411,
7412.7601).)
Dated: January 10,1978.
JOHN C. WHITE,
Regional Admlnittrator.
FAIT 41—NATIONAL IMISSION STANDARDS
FOR HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Part 61 of Chapter I. Title 40. Code
of Federal Regulations. Is amended as
follows:
4. In } 61.04, paragraph (b)(S) is
added as follows:
1*1.04 Addreti.
(b) • • •
(S) Division of Air Pollution Control, De-
partment for Natural Resource* and Envi-
ronmental Protection, UJS. 127, Frankfort,
Ky. 40601.
*****
[PR POC. 78-20S2 Filed 1-14-78; 8:45 am)
WOHAl RMKTIR, VOL. 43, NO. 17-WIDNISOAY, JANUARY 29,
IV-91
-------
46
PART «1—NATIONAL MAMMON STAMDAIM
KM HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
D*l«gotien of Authority to Stato of Dolawow
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: This document amend*
regulations concerning air programs to
reflect delegation to the State of Dela-
ware of authority to implement and
enforce certain National Emission
Standards for Hazardous Air Pollut-
ants.
EFFECTIVE DATE: February 18.
1978.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT:
Stephen R. Wassersug, Director, En-
forcement Division, Environmental
Protection Agency, Region III, 6th
and Walnut Streets. Philadelphia,
Pa. 19106. 215-597-4171.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
I. BACKGROUND
On September 7, 1977, the State of
Delaware requested delegation of au-
thority to implement and enforce cer-
tain National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants. The request
was reviewed and on September 30..
1977, a letter was sent to Pierre 8.
DuPont IV, Governor, State of Dela-
ware, approving the delegation and
outlining its conditions. The approval
letter specified that if Governor
DuPont or any other representative
had any objections to the conditions
of delegation they were to respond
within ten (10) days after receipt of
the letter. As of this date, no objec-
tions have been received.
II. REGULATIONS AFFECTED BY THIS
DOCUMENT
Pursuant to the delegation of au-
Ihority for National Emission Stan-
dards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
(NESHAPS) to the State of Delaware
on September 30, 1977, EPA is today
amending 40 CFR 61.04, Address, to re-
flect this delegation. A Notice an-
nouncing this delegation was pub-
lished on February 15, 1978, in the
FEDERAL REGISTER. The amended
161.04, which adds the address of the
Delaware Department of Natural Re-
sources and Environmental Control, to
which all reports, requests applica-
tions, submittals, and communicationa
to the Administrator pursuant to this
part must also be addressed, is set
forth below.
III. GENERAL
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and
for making this rulemaking effective
immediately in that it is an adminis-
trative change and not one of substan-
tive content. No additional substantive
burdens.are imposed on the parties af-
fected. The delegation which is reflect-
ed by this Administrative amendment
•MIS AND IMUlATIONf
was effective on September BO, 1*77,
and it serves no purpose to delay the
technical change of this address to the
Code of Federal Regulations.
This rulemaklng is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the author-
ity of section 112 of the Clean Air Act,
as amended, 42 U.S.C. { 1857c-7.
Dated: January 31,1978.
JACK J. SCHRAMM,
Regional Administrator.
Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amend-
ed as follows:
1. In S 61.04, paragraph (b) is amend-
ed by revising subparagraph (I) to
read as follows: •
161.04 Address.
(b)• • *
(AMH) • • •
(I) State of Delaware (for asbestos, beryl-
lium and mercury only): Delaware Depart-
ment of Natural Resources and Environ-
mental Control, Edward Tatnall Building,
Dover, Delaware 19901.
tFR Doc. 78-4267 Filed 2-16-78: 8:45 am]
PIOMAL UOMTH, VOL 43, NO. B»-
-THURSDAY, NMUARY, U, tftt
47
Title 40 Protection of Invlrenment
CTRL 848-2]
CHAPTER I—fNVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AOENCY
PART oO—STANDARDS OF PERFOR-
MANCE FOR NEW STATIONARY
SOURCES
PART 41—NATIONAL EMISSION
STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR
POLLUTANTS
AOENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA).
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: This action amends the
authority dilations for Standards of
Performance for New Stationary
Sources and National Emission Stan-
tards for Hazardous Pollutants. Tht
amendment adopts the ^designation
of classification numbers at changed
in the 1977 amendments to the Clean
Air Act. As amended, the Act formerly
classified to 42 UJB.C. 1857 et seq. hat
been transferred and is now classified
to42U.S.C. 7401 et seq.
EFFECTIVE DATE: March 3,1978.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT.
Don R. Goodwin. Emission Stan-
dards and Engineering Divtaton. En-
vironmental Protection Agency, Re-
search Triangle Park. H.C. ITTll
telephone »l»-*41-»m.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Thte action Is being taken In accor-
dance with the requirement* of 1 CPU
21.43 and is authorized under section
Ml(a) of the Clean Air Act, as amend-
ed, 42 U.S.C. 7601(a). Because the
amendments are clerical in nature and
affect no substantive rights or require-
ments, the Administrator finds it un-
necessary to propose and Invite public
comment.
Dated: February 24,1978.
DOUGLAS M. Costix,
Administrator.
Parts 60 and 61 of Chapter I. Title
40 of the Code of Federal Regulations
are revised as follows:
******
4. The authority citation following
the table of sections in part 61 is re-
vised to read as follows:
AUTHORITY: Sec. 112, 301(a.) of the Clean
Air Act as amended C42 X7.8.C. 7411,
TdOl(a)], unlcu otherwise noted.
161.16 [Amended]
5. Following {61.16, the foUowlng
authority citation is added:
(Sec. lie, Clean Air Act at amended («
TJ.O.C. 7416)).
1161.09, 61.10. 61.12.61.13, 61.14, 61.15,
61.24, 61.33, 61.34, 61.43, 61.44,
61.53, 61.54, 61.56. 61.67. 61.68,
61.69, 61.70, 61.71, and Appendices
A and B [Amended]
6. The following authority citation to
added to the above sections and ap-
pendices:
(Bee. 114 of the Clean Air Act a* amended
(42 0JS.C. 7414)).
IFR Doc. 7*-M47 PU«d «-«-7i; 1:41 am]
HMRAL RMMTM, VOL. 41, NO. 43-
-FRIDAY, MARCH «, It78
IV-9 2
-------
48
RULES AND REGULATIONS
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION
STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR
POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to State/
Local Air Pollution Control Agen-
cies in Arizona, California, and
Nevada
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Final rulemaking.
SUMMARY: The Environmental Pro-
tection Agency (EPA) is amending 40
CFR 61.04 Address by adding address-
es of agencies to reflect new delega-
tions of authority from EPA to certain
state/local air pollution control agen-
cies in Arizona, California, and
Nevada. EPA has delegated authority
to these agencies, as described in a
notice appearing elsewhere in today's
FEDERAL REGISTER, in order to imple-
ment and enforce the national emis-
sion standards for hazardous air pol-
lutants.
EFFECTIVE DATE: May 16,1978.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT:
Gerald Katz (E-4-3), Environmental
Protection Agency, 215 Fremont
Street, San Francisco. Calif. 94105,
415-556-8005.
Pursuant to delegation of authority
for national standards for hazardous
air pollutants (NESHAPS) to State/
Local air pollution control agencies in
Arizona, California, and Nevada from
March 30. 1977, to January 30, 1978.
EPA is today amending 40 CFR 61.04
Address, to reflect these actions. A
notice announcing this delegation is
published elsewhere in today's FEDER-
AL REGISTER. The amended §61.04 is
set forth below. It adds the address of
the air pollution control agencies, to
which must be addressed all reports.
requests, applications, submittals, and
communications pursuant to this part
by sources subject to the NESHAPS
located within these agencies' jurisdic-
tions.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and
for making this rulemaking effective
immediately in that it is an adminis-
trative change and not one of substan-
tive content. No additional substantive
burdens are imposed on the parties af-
fected. The delegation actions which
are reflected in this administrative
amendment were effective on the
dates of delegation and it serves no
purpose to delay the technical change
on these additions of the air pollution
control agencies' addresses to the
Code of Federal Regulations.
(Sec. 112, Clean Air Act. at amended (42
U.S.C. 7411).)
Dated: April 5.1978.
SHAILA M. PRINDIVILLE,
Acting Regional Administrator,
EPA, Region IX.
Part 61 of chapter I, title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amend-
ed as follows:
1. In § 61.04 paragraph (b) is amend-
ed by revising subparagraphs D, F,
and DD to read as follows:
§61.04 Address.
(b) • • •
(D) Arizona.
Marlcopa County Department of Health
Services, Bureau of Air Pollution Control,
1825 East Roosevelt Street, Phoenix, Ariz.
85006.
Pima County Health Department, Air
Quality Control District, 151 West Congress,
Tucson, Ariz. 85701.
(P) California.
Bay Area Air Pollution Control District,
939 Ellis Street. San Francisco, Calif. 94109.
Del Norte County Air Pollution Control
District, Courthouse, Crescent City, Calif.
95531.
Fresno County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 515 South Cedar Avenue, Fresno,
Calif. 93702
Humboldt County Air Pollution Control
District, 5600 South Broadway, Eureka,
Calif. 95501.
Kern County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 1700 Flower Street (P.O. Box 997). Ba-
kersfield, Calif. 93302.
Madera County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 135 West Tosemlte Avenue, Madera,
Calif. 93637.
Mendoclno County Air Pollution Control
District, County Courthouse, Ukiah. Calif.
94582.
Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Con-
trol District. 420 Church Street (P.O. Box
487). Salinas. Calif. 93901.
Northern Sonoma County Air Pollution
Control District, 3313 Chanate Road. Santa
Rosa, Calif. 95404.
Sacramento County Air Pollution Control
District, 3701 Branch Center Road. Sacra-
mento, Calif. 95827.
San Diego County Air Pollution Control
District, 9150 Chesapeake Drive, San Diego
Calif. 92123.
San Joaquln County Air Pollution Control
District, 1601 East Hazelton Street (P.O
Box 2009), Stockton, Calif. 95201.
Santa Barbara County Air Pollution Con-
trol District, 4440 Calle Real. Santa Bar-
bara, Calif. 93110.
Shasta County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict, 1855 Placer Street. Redding, Calif.
96001.
South Coast Air Quality Management Dis-
trict, 9420 Telstar Avenue, El Monte. Calif.
91731.
Stanislaus County Air Pollution Control
District, 820 Scenic Drive. Modesto. Calif.
95350.
Trinity County Air Pollution Control Dis-
trict. Box AJ. Weaverville. Calif. MOM.
Ventura County Air Pollution Control
District. 625 East Santa Clara Street. Ven-
tura, Calif. 93001.
(DD) Nevada.
Clark County, County District Health De-
partment. Air Pollution Control Division,
625 Shadow Lane, Las Vegas, Nev. 89106.
Washoe County District Health Depart-
ment, Division of Environmental Protection,
10 Kirman Avenue. Reno. Nev. 89502.
[PR Doc. 78-13012 Filed 5-15-78; 8:45 am]
KDBA1 UOISTBt, VOL 43, NO. »5-nifSOAY, MAY 16, 1«7|
IV-93
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
49
Title 40—Protection of the
Environment
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY
[PRL 869-7]
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION
STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR
POLLUTANTS
Amendments to Asbestos Standard
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA).
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: This rule amends the na-
tional emission standard for asbestos
by extending the requirements of the
provisions which apply to the spraying
of asbestos-containing materials and
to demolition and renovation oper-
ations. These amendments are a result
of a determination that the standard
did not require control of asbestos
emissions during spray application of
asbestos-containing materials other
than fireproofing and insulation or
during the demolition and renovation
of structures where friable asbestos
materials other than fireproofing and
insulation are present.
EFFECTIVE DATE: June 19, 1978.
ADDRESS: A summary of the public
comments on the proposed amend-
ments and EPA's responses is con-
tained in the Standards Support Docu-
ment which may be obtained upon
written request from the EPA Library
(MD-35), Research Triangle Park,
N.C. 27711 (specify Standards Support
Document' Promulgated Amendmenti
to National Emission Standard for As-
bestos, EPA 450/2-77-030, January,
1978). The Standards Support Docu-
ment is also available for public in-
spection and copying at the EPA
Public Information Reference Unit,
Room 2922 (EPA Library), 401 M
Street SW., Washington, D.C. 20460.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT:
Don R. Goodwin, Director, Emission
Standards and Engineering Division
(MD-13), Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park,
N.C. 27711, telephone number 919-
541-5271.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
On March 2, 1977 (42 FR 12121),
amendments to the national emission
standard for asbestos were proposed
under section"! 12 of the Clean Air Act.
Interested persons participated in the
rulemaking by submitting comments
to EPA. The comments have been con-
sidered and, where determined by the
Administrator to be appropriate,
changes reflecting these comments
have been incorporated Into the pro-
mulgated amendments.
Under section 112(e) of the Clean
Air Act, as amended in 1977, the Ad-
ministrator may promulgate a "design,
equipment, work practice, or oper-
ational standard, or combination
thereof" for control of a hazardous air
pollutant if it is infeasible to prescribe
an emission standard under section
112(b) for the pollutant. Such infeasi-
bility occurs, for example, when "a
hazardous pollutant or pollutants
cannot be emitted through a convey-
ance designed and constructed to emit
or capture such a pollutant" or when
"the application of measurement
methodology to a particular class of
sources is not practicable due to tech-
nological or economic limitations."
The spraying of friable asbestos mate-
rials and demolition or renovation of
buildings containing such materials
are sources of asbestos emissions for
which EPA believes it is not feasible to
prescribe a numerical emission stand-
ard. This is because asbestos cannot be
emitted through a conveyance which
readily captures emissions for mea-
surement and because such measure-
ment, in any event, would be techno-
logically and economically impractical.
Therefore, work practice standards
rather than emission standards are
being promulgated.
This promulgation is not affected by
the Supreme Court decision in Adamo
Wrecking Co. v. U.S. (No. 76-911, de-
cided January 10, 1978). That case
arose in the narrow context of a crimi-
nal enforcement proceeding and was
decided on an interpretation of section
112 prior to Its amendment in 1977.
The court held that the pre-1977 ver-
sion of section 112 did not authorize a
portion of the national emission stand-
ard for asbestos (prescribing certain
work practices for demolition and ren-
ovation activities) because it consisted
of requirements other than numerical
limitations on emissions. The 1977
amendments to section 112 now clear-
ly authorize the Administrator to pro-
mulgate work practice or other nonnu-
merical standards in order to control
emissions of hazardous air pollutants.
Another important 1977 amendment
to the Clean Air Act explicitly au-
thorizes citizens and States, under sec-
tion 304, to enforce work practice and
other nonnumerical standards promul-
gated under section 112.
SUMMARY OF AMENDMENTS
The national emission standard for
asbestos currently regulates demoli-
tion and renovation operations Involv-
ing asbestos-containing insulation and
fireproofing materials and prohibits
the spray application of these materi-
als if they contain more than 1 per-
cent asbestos. The promulgated
amendments extend coverage of the
demolition and renovation provisions
(40 CFR 61.22(d)> to all friable asbes-
tos materials and extend the coverage
of the asbestos spraying provisions (40
CFR 61.22(e)) to all materials which
contain more than 1 percent asbestos.
Materials in which the asbestos fibers
are encapsulated with a bituminous or
resinous binder and which are not fri-
able after drying are exempt from the
spraying provisions.
SUMMARY OF ENVIRONMENTAL AND
ECONOMIC IMPACTS
The promulgated amendments to
the asbestos standard will have a sig-
nificant beneficial environmental
impact by reducing emissions of asbes-
tos to the atmosphere. There will be
minimal solid waste and water pollu-
tion impacts from the increased
amount of friable asbestos materials
which must be removed and disposed
of in conjunction with demolition or
renovation. No impact on national
energy consumption is anticipated.
The amendments to the demolition
and renovation provisions may in-
crease the cost of demolition or ren-
ovation because of the increased
amount of friable asbestos-containing
materials which will be covered by
these regulations. Comments from
representatives of the demolition in-
dustry, however, did not address this
point. Therefore, this impact is not ex-
pected to be significant.
Spray-on asbestos-containing decora-
tive coatings are the primary products
prohibited by the amendments to the
spraying restrictions. Since substitutes
are available for these products, no
significant adverse economic impacts
are expected to result from prohibit-
ing their use.
.SIGNIFICANT COMMENTS
During the public comment period,
EPA received 24 letters commenting
on the proposed amendments. These
included 16 from industry, 3 from
other governmental agencies, and 5
from other interested parties. As a
result of these comments, there has
been only one significant change made
to the amendments since proposal.
This change involves the spraying re-
striction in |61.22(e). The proposed
amendments would have prohibited
the spraying of all materials contain-
ing more than 1 percent asbestos by
weight.
Several commenters, however, re-
quested that EPA exempt from the
spraying restrictions certain bitumi-
nous- and resinous-based asbestos-con-
taining coatings. These coatings are
typically used as roofing compounds,
waterproofing of insulation exposed to
the weather, automobile undercoat -
ings, and industrial maintenance coat-
ings.
Based on information supplied by
the commenters, there are no accept-
able substitutes available for these
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 43, NO. lie—MONDAY, JUNE 19, 1978
IV-94
-------
tULES AND REGULATIONS
uses of asbestos. Among the most
likely substitutes which have been In-
vestigated are glass, cotton, wood, cel-
lulose, mineral wool, hemp, and other
types of inorganic and organic fibers;
gelling and thickening agents; clay
thickeners, Including attapulgite;
ground cork; Btyrofoam; ground
rubber; vermiculite; feldspar; polyeth-
ylene fibrous powders; and ceramic
fibers. Generally, these substitutes
have been found to be unacceptable
because of unsatisfactory durability;
insufficient bulk; unsatisfactory quali-
ties related to fibrous reinforcing, ho-
mogeneity, and adhesiveness; agglom-
eration during spraying; and settle-
ment in the container over time. Fur-
thermore, if asbestos fibers are re-
leased during application of the coat-
ings, during their service life, or
during demolition or renovation, the
fibers will not remain airborne because
they are encapsulated by droplets of
the binder and are too heavy to
remain suspended.
Because there do not appear to be
acceptable substitutes available and
any beneficial environmental Impact
resulting from the prohibition of this
use of asbestos would be negligible,
the spraying of materials in which the
asbestos fibers are encapsulated by &
bituminous or resinous binder and
which are not friable after drying is
exempt from the provisions of
5 61.22(e) of the promulgated amend-
ments.
There were several other significant
comments which did not result in
changes to the amendments. To aid
enforcement of the proposed spraying
restrictions in {61.22(e), commenters
suggested that products should be la-
beled as to their asbestos content if
they contain in excess of 1 percent as-
bestos by dry weight and have the po-
tential for spray-on application. Re-
quiring labeling would constitute a sig-
nificant change in the amendments
and would require reproposal. Rather
than reproposing. the need for this
provision will be assessed during en-
forcement of the amendments and. If
appropriate, labeling requirements will
be proposed.
One commenter suggested that the
regulation be extended to require re-
moval of existing asbestos-containing
sprayed materials which present sig-
nificant risks to human health due to
deterioration, particularly in buildings
accessible to the public. The proposed
amendments would have only prohib-
ited the future application of asbestos-
containing spray material.
This problem is being addressed
through the preparation of a guidance
document which will assist govern-
mental agencies and private Individ-
uals who must decide on proper action
to take when sprayed asbestos materi-
als are found in existing buildings.
The first volume of this document dis-
cusses criteria for determining wheth-
er asbestos material in a building is a
problem; the current knowledge of
hazards from spray-on asbestos in
buildings; and alternative corrective
actions that may be taken, including
acceptable removal procedures and the
use of sealants for the coating of ma-
terial. The second volume of the docu-
ment, which is expected to be availa-
ble in late 1978, will present the re-
sults of studies which will be done on
sealants to determine their effective-
ness and acceptability for coating as-
bestos materials. Copies of the first
volume of this document may be ob-
tained upon written request from the
Emission Standards and Engineering
Division (MD-13), Environmental Pro-
tection Agency, Research Triangle
Park, N.C. 27711 (specify Sprayed As-
bestos-Containing Material* in Build-
ings: A Guidance Document).
The lack of EPA reference methods
for making various asbestos measure-
ments was of concern to some com-
menters. Specifically, they suggested
that EPA publish a method for deter-
mining the percentage of asbestos in
spray materials and reference OSHA-
NIOSH procedures for measuring air-
borne asbestos particulate matter
from spraying operations.
A number of methods for the analy-
sis of asbestos-containing samples are
now in use and the variability of re-
sults obtained by these methods is ex-
tremely wide. In an attempt to stand-
ardize procedures and reduce this vari-
ability, an EPA provisional electron
microscope procedure for measuring
the concentration of asbestos in air
samples has been developed. This
method can also be used for analysis
of material samples. It will be further
evaluated and refined for use in actual
field studies and it found acceptable,
may eventually serve as the basis for
an EPA reference method. The proce-
dure is available in a publication enti-
tled Electron Microscope Measure-
ment of Airborne Asbestos Concentra-
tions: A Provisional Methodology
Manual. EPA 600/2-77-176. August
1977. Copies of this document may be
obtained upon written request from
the Environmental Sciences Research
Laboratory (MD-49), EPA, Research
Triangle Park, N.C. 27711.
The OSHA-NIOSH method meas-
ures airborne asbestos fiber concentra-
tions by phase contrast microscopy. It
measures only those fibers which are
longer than 5 microns and does not
differentiate between asbestos and
other fibers. While such a method
may be sufficient for enforcing the
OSHA workplace asbestos standard, it
is not sufficient as an indicator of
total asbestos concentration in the am-
bient air. Many asbestos fibers are
smaller than the smallest measured by
the OSHA-NIOSH method and these
fibers can contribute significantly to
the amount of asbestos which may be
present in the ambient air. The provi-
sional electron microscope method de-
scribed above is useful for estimating
airborne asbestos fiber concentrations
with greater precision.
Some commenters suggested that
since asbestos is a carcinogen and no
threshold level for health effects has
been established, the 1 percent allowa-
ble asbestos content for spray-on ma-
terials permits too much environmen-
tal contamination and should be low-
ered considerably. If not completely
eliminated. The 1 percent allowable
asbestos content was selected primar-
ily to allow the spray application of
materials which contain trace amounts
of asbestos which occur in numerous
natural substances and which could
not be reduced or eliminated without
effectively banning the use of these
materials.
MISCELLANEOUS
NOTE.—The Environmental Protection
Agency has determined that this document
does not contain a major action requiring
preparation of an Economic Impact Analy-
Bis under Executive Orders 11821 and 11949
mud OMB Circular A-107.
Dated: June 13,1978.
BARBARA BLUM,
Acting Administrator.
In Part 61 of Chapter I, Title 40, of
the Code of Federal Regulations.
H 61.21 and 61.22 are amended as fol-
lows:
Subpart B—National Emission
Standard for Asb»«tos
1. Section 61.21 is amended by revis-
ing paragraphs (m), (q), and (r) to read
as follows:
{61.21 Definitions.
-------
RULES AND REGULATIONS
(d)(4Xiv), (e), and (e)(2); and adding
paragraph (e)C3) to read as follows:
§61.22 Emission standard.
of this
section. Rather than comply with the
wetting requirement, a local exhaust
ventilation and collection system may
be used to prevent emissions to the
outside air. Such local exhaust ventila-
tion systems shall be designed and op-
erated to capture the asbestos particu-
late matter produced by the stripping
of friable asbestos materials. There
shall be no visible emissions to the
outside air from such local exhaust
ventilation and collection systems
except as provided in paragraph (f) of
this section.
(e) Spraying. There shall be no visi-
ble emissions to the outside air from
the spray-on application of materials
containing more than 1 percent asbes-
tos, on a dry weight basis, .used on
equipment and machinery, except as
provided in paragraph (f) of this sec-
tion. Materials sprayed on buildings,
structures, structural members, pipes,
and conduits shall contain less than 1
percent asbestos on a dry weight basis.
(2) Any owner or operator who in-
tends to spray asbestos materials
which contain more than 1 percent as-
bestos on a dry weight basis on equip-
ment and machinery shall report such
intention to the Administrator at least
20 days prior to the commencement of
the spraying operation. Such report
shall include the following informa-
tion: ' • '
(3) The spray-on application of ma-
terials in which the asbestos fibers are
encapsulated with a bituminous or re-
sinous binder during spraying and
which are not friable after drying is
exempted from the requirements of
paragraphs (e) and (eX2) of this sec-
tion.
(Sees. 112 and 301(a) of the Clean Air Act as
amended (42 D.S.C. 7412, 7601(a).))
[FR Doc. 7&-16891 Filed 6-16-78; 8:45 am]
FEDERAL IECISTER, VOL. 43, NO. 11»—MONDAY, JUNE 19, 1978
IV-96
-------
50
PART 61—NATIONAL EMISSION
STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR
POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority for State of
Rhode Island
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA).
ACTION: Amendment.
SUMMARY: The delegation of au-
thority to the State of Rhode Island
for national emissions standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS)
was made on March 31, 1978. This
amendment, which adds the address of
the Rhode Island Department of Envi-
ronmental Management, reflects this
delegation. A notice announcing this
delegation is published today in the
FEDERAL REGISTER.
EFFECTIVE DATE: October 16, 1978.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT:
John Courcier, Air Branch, EPA
Region I, Room 2113, JFK Federal
Building, Boston, Mass. 02203, 617-
223-4448.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Under the delegation of authority for
the national emission standards for
hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPS)
to the State of Rhode Island on March
31, 1978, EPA is today amending 40
CFR 61.04, Address, to reflect this del-
egation. A notice announcing this dele-
gation is published today elesewhere
in this part of the FEDERAL REGISTER.
The amended §61.04, which adds the
address of the Rhode Island Depart-
ment of Environmental Management
to which all reports, requests, applica-
tions, submittals, and communications
to the Administrator pursuant to this
part must also be addressed, is set
forth below.
The Administrator finds good cause
for foregoing prior public notice and
for making this rulemaking effective
immediately in that it is an adminis-
trative change and not one of substan-
tive content. No additional burdens
are imposed on the parties affected.
The delegation which is reflected by
this administrative amendment was ef-
fective on March 31, 1978, and it
serves no purpose to delay the techni-
cal change of this addition of the
State address to the Code of Federal
Regulations.
This rulemaking is effective immedi-
ately, and is issued under the authori-
ty of section 112 of the Clean Air Act,
as amended, 42 U.S.C. 7411.
Date: September 18, 1978.
WILLIAM R. ADAMS, Jr.
Regional Administrator,
Region I.
RULES AND REGULATIONS
Part 61 of chapter I, title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations is amend-
ed as follows:
In § 61.04 paragraph (b) is amended
by adding subparagraph (OO) to read
as follows:
$61.04 Address.
(b) • ' •
(OO) State of Rh6de Island, Department
of Environmental Management, 83 Park
Street, Providence, R.I. 02908
[FR Doc. 78-29106 Filed 10113-78: 9:49 am]
51
PART 61— NATIONAL EMISSION
STANDARDS FOR HAZARDOUS AIR
POLLUTANTS
Delegation of Authority to State of
Texas
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Aeency.
ACTION: Final rule.
SUMMARY: This action Amend* Sec-
tion 61.4, Address, to reflect the dele-
gation of authority for the National
Emission Standards (or Hazardous Air
Pollutants (NESHAPS) to the State of
Texas.
EFFECTIVE DATE: February 7. 197D.
FOR FUKTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT:
James Veach, Enforcement Division,
Region a. Environmental Protection
Agency, First International Build-
Ing, 1201 Elm Street, Dallas, Texas
75270. telephone (214) 767-2760.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
A notice announcing the delegation of
authority is published elsewhere in
the Notice Section In this issue of the
FEDERAL REGISTER. These amendments
provide that, all reports and communi-
cations previously submitted to the
Administrator, will now be sent to the
Texas Air Control Board. 8520 Shoal
Oeek Boulevard, Austin. Texas, in-
stead of EPA's Region 6.
As this action is not one of substan-
tive content, but is only an administra-
tive change, public participation was
Judged unnecessary.
(Sections 111 and JO Ha) of the Clean Air
Act; Section 4(a> of Public Law •I-M4. 84
Stat. 1685; Section 2 of Public Law 90-148.
81 Stat. 604 [42 U.S.C. 7412 &n1 7'JO iiaO).
Dated: November 15, li /, .
ADIANE HA
Regional Ad inln ..- : rat or,
Region 6.
Part 61 of Chapter 1, Tiile 40, Code
of Federal Regulations, is an) ended as
follows:
In §61.04. paragraph (b> ;SS) is
amended as follows:
{61.04 Address.
(b) • • •
(SS) State of Texas. Texas Air Con-
trol Board, 8520 Shoal Creek Boule-
vard, Austin, Texas 78758.
CFR Doc. 79-4228 Filed 2-6-79; 8:45 am]
KMftAl IKMSTEt, VOL 44, NO. V
, «MUIARY r. W9
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 43, NO. MO—MONDAY, OCTOBER 16, 1971
IV-97
-------
SECTION V
PROPOSED
AMENDMENTS
-------
CV. PROPOSED REVISIONS
Section
B- Asbestos
F-Vinyl Chloride
42 FR 58543, 11/10/77- Proposed Develop-
ment of Asbestos Standard for the Pro-
duction and Use of Crushed Stone
42 FR 28154,6/2/77 - Proposed Amendment
to National Emission Standard for Vinyl
Chloride
Page
V-B-2
V-F-1
42 FR 40452, 8/10/77 - Extension of Comment V-F-7
Period
42 FR 44823, 9/7/77 - Extension of Comment V-F-8
Period
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
AGENCY
ASBESTOS
Hazardous Air Pollufants Proposed
National Emission Standards
SUBPART B
-------
PROPOSED RULES
[ 40 CFR Part 61 ]
(FRL 788-21
NATIONAL EMISSION STANDARDS FOR
HAZARDOUS AIR POLLUTANTS
Development of Asbestos Standard for the
Production and Use of Crushed Stone
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Advance notice of proposed
rulemaking.
SUMARY: The Environmental Protec-
tion Agency (EPA) is undertaking a
study of the crushed stone Industry to
determine the extent to which quarrying
operations are being conducted in areas
containing serpentinite rock deposits, to
determine the asbestos content of the
rock being mined, and to determine
whether the public is being exposed to
asbestos from various uses of the rock.
Serpentinite rock from a quarry location
in Rockville, Maryland, has been found
to contain significant quantities of
asbestos, and the use of unbound (with-
out a coating or binding agent) crushed
stone produced from this rock on crushed
stone roads has been shown to result in
high concentrations of asbestos in the
air near these roads. If EPA determines
that the production and use of asbestos-
containing serpentinite rock is causing
asbestos emissions proximate to the
public in a number of locations, stand-
ards will be proposed in the FEDERAL
REGISTER under Section 12 of the Clean
Air Act.
DATE: The information requested in this
notice must be submitted on or before
January 10, 1977.
ADDRESSEE: Information in response
to this Advance Notice of Proposed Rule-
making should be submitted to the Emis-
sion Standards and Engineering Division
(MD-13), Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C.
27711, Attention: Mr. Ron R. Goodwin.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
Mr. Don R. Goodwin, Director, Emission
Standards and Engineering Division (MD-
13), Environmental Protection Agency, Re-
search Triangle Park, N.C. 27711, 819-641-
5271.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: It
is well documented that airborne asbes-
tos fibers are related to human disease,
specifically pulmonary flbrosis, carcino-
ma, and pleural mesothelioma. The
quantification of the health risk asso-
ciated with specific airborne concentra-
tions, fiber dimensions, and chemical
composition of the fibers, however, is in-
exact. The problem of estimating the
magnitude of this risk to human health
is further complicated by the 20- to 40-
year latency period between the onset of
exposure and the appearance of disease.
In addition, cancer-causing agents ap-
pear to be "non-threshold" pollutants
so that no level can be set which is en-
tirely safe from cancer risk. Consequent-
ly, EPA believes that exposure to air-
borne asbestos should be reduced to the
greatest extent feasible. A hazardous
emission standard currently exists for
several sources of asbestos. See 40 CFR,
Part 61, Subpart B.
In early 1977, EPA tests indicated that
dust from the crushed stone produced
by a Rockville, Maryland, rock quarry
contained from 0.25 to 0.70 weight per-
cent chrysotile asbestos. Analyses of air
samples taken by EPA and Mt. Sinai
School of Medicine near several sites in
Montgomery County, Maryland, where
unbound crushed stone from this quarry
was in use, revealed ambient air concen-
trations of chrysotile asbestos as high as
17 million fibers per cubic meter and as
high as 6400 nanograms per cubic meter,
depending on distance from the road and
prevailing traffic conditions. These con-
centrations are as much as 1000 times
higher than those usually found in ur-
ban and metropolitan areas.
It is clear from the air monitoring
data that several uses of unbound
cruched stone from the Rockville, Mary-
land, quarry can cause elevated concen-
trations of asbestos in the air. The Mary-
land State Bureau of Air Quality and
Noise Control, the Montgomery County
Department of Environmental Protec-
tion, and the Montgomery County De-
partment of Transportation are taking
measures to control asbestos emissions
from roads and other public areas which
were surfaced with crushed .stone from
the Rockville quarry. Warning signs
have been posted in parks and school-
yards where asbestos-containing crushed
stone is in use and in many cases the
rock has been removed. Dust suppres-
sants and liquid asphalt has been ap-
plied to the roads where the most severe
dust problems existed. The Montgomery
County Department of Transportation
has issued a moratorium on the use* of
crushed stone from the Rockville quarry
and has notified all public users of the
rock and the largest private users that
the crushed stone they have used Is from
the Rockville quarry and may contain
asbestos. Maryland has also found that
the rock in several other quarries in the
State contains asbestos and, as a result,
is developing regulations to restrict the
future use of crushed stone containing
asbestos in certain applications and to
control emissions from certain areas
which have been surfaced with asbestos-
containing crushed stone in an unbound
form.
An analysis of geological survey maps
prepared by the United States Geological
Survey indicates that the Rockville,
Maryland, rock quarry and a number of
other rock quarries in the United States,
produce crushed stone from serpentinite
rock deposits. Geologists agree that most
serpentinite rock deposits contain at least
a small percentage of chrysotile asbestos.
This leads EPA to believe that a number
of crushed stone plants In the United
States may be producing asbestos-con-
taining crushed stone similar to that pro-
duced by the Rockville, Maryland, rock
quarry. Other types of rock deposits may
also contain asbestos; however, the cor-
relation between other rock types and the
presence of asbestos is not as clear.
EPA is therefore beginning a study to
determine the extent of the problem of
asbestos emissions that may exist from
the use of crushed stone produced from
serpentinite rock. This study is being
conducted in response to requests from
officials of Montgomery County, Mary-
land ; two Congressmen from the State of
Maryland; and the Environmental De-
fense Fund. The purpose of this study is
to determine whether EPA should de-
velop a Federal standard to limit asbestos
emissions from this source. In this study,
EPA will identify serpentinite rock quar-
ries within the United States, collect and
analyze rock samples from these quar-
ries, determine whether elevated levels
of asbestos in the air are occurring due
to the use of crushed stone containing
various asbestos contents, and determine
how widespread the problem appears to
be.
Currently both the State and local
agencies have indicated their intention
to take appropriate measures to control
this problem in Maryland, If EPA's Study
determines that this problem does not
warrant work on proposal of a Federal
standard, EPA assistance will be avail-
able to local agencies on a case-by-case
basis to deal with this problem.
EPA is requesting that all interested
I>ersons submit factual information con-
cerning crushed stone produced from
serpentinite rock, particularly informa-
tion on its production, sale, and use in
various applications; its asbestos con-
tent; and public exposure to ambient air
asbestos emissions resulting from its use
in various applications. It is expected
that such information will assist EPA in
determining whether to formulate any
regulations.
Dated: November 3, 1977.
DOUGLAS M. COSTLE,
Administrator.
[PR Doc.77-32666 Piled ll-9-77;8:45 ami
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOl. 4J, NO. 217—THURSDAY, NOVEMBER 10. 1977
V-B-2
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
AGENCY
Vinyl Chloride
Hazardous Air Pollutants Proposed
National Emission Standards
SUBPART F
-------
PROPOSED RULES
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
AGENCY
[40CFRPart61]
[PEL 788-e]
VINYL CHLORIDE
National Emission Standards for Hazardous
Air Pollutants
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Proposed rule.
SUMMARY: The proposed amendments
are being made to the vinyl chloride
standard which has promulgated Octo-
ber 21, 1976, and would apply to new
and existing ethylene dlchlorlde, vinyl
chloride, and polyvinyl chloride plants.
The standard and the proposed amend-
ments Implement the Clean Air Act and
are based on the Administrator's deter-
mination that vinyl chloride Is a hazard-
ous air pollutant. The intended effect of
the proposed amendments is to require
improved effectiveness of control tech-
nology at.existing plants, Impose more
stringent emission limits on new sources,
and prohibit an emission Increase within
the vicinity of an existing source due to
the construction of a hew source.
.DATES: Comments must be received on
or .before August 1,1077.
ADDRESSES: Comments should be sub-
mitted (preferably m triplicate) to the
Emission Standards and Engineering
Division, Environmental Protection
'Agency, Research Triangle Park, North
Carolina, Attention: Mr. Don R. Good-
win.
All public comments received may be
Inspected and copied at the Public In-
formation Reference Unit (EPA Li-
brary), Room 2922, 401 M Street, 8W.,
Washington, D.C.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
Don R. Goodwin, Emission Standards
and Engineering Division, Environ-
mental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711,
Telephone No. 919-688-8146, ext. 271.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
BACKGROUND
On October 21,1976, EPA promulgated
» standard for vinyl chloride under the
authority of section 112(b) (1) (B) of the
Clean Air Act, as amended (41 FR
46561). The standard applies to ethyl-
ene dlchloride, vinyl chloride, and poly-
vinyl chloride plants.
On November 19, 1976, the Environ-
mental Defense Fund (EDF) petitioned
the United States Court of Appeals for
the District of Columbia Circuit to review
the standard. Motions to intervene were
subsequently filed on behalf of the So-
ciety of the Plastics Industry. Inc., the
Goodyear Tire and Rubber Company and
Air Products and Chemicals, Inc., and
were granted by order of the Court on
January 18. 1977. On March 24, 1977,
EDF and EPA moved to dismiss the
proceedings In view of a settlement
agreement requiring EPA to take certain
additional actions. These include a re-
statement of EPA's policy for regulating
carcinogens under section 112 of the
Clean Air Act; the proposal of amend-
' ments which would require Increased
efficiency of existing control equipment,
require more stringent control at new
sources, and prohibit Increases in emis-
sions within the vicinity of an existing
source due to new construction; and the
Initiation of a review of the vinyl chlo-
ride standard three years after the pro-
mulgation of the amendments.
ZERO EMISSION GOAL
The vinyl chloride standard has been
criticized for allegedly placing unwar-
ranted emphasis on technological rather
than health considerations. Although
EPA disagrees with this criticism, it
seems appropriate to restate EPA's ap-
proach to the regulation of carcinogens
In general and under Section 112 of the
Clean Air Act, and to explain how the
vinyl chloride standard and the pro-
posed amendments are consistent with
this approach and with the protection
of public health.
On May 25. 1976, EPA published In-
terim procedures and guidelines for
health risk and economic Impact assess-
ments of suspected carcinogens (41 FR
21402), which define EPA's approach to
regulatory action for suspect carcino-
gens. As Indicated in that publication,
there are two steps Involved In the deci-
8lon-ma;" ng process with regard to the
regulati *j of a potential carcinogen. Al-
though different EPA statutory author-
ities impose different requirements, in
general two decisions must be made with
regard to each potential carcinogen. The
first decision is whether a particular sub-
stance constitutes a cancer risk. The
second decision Is what regulatory ac-
tion, if any, should be taken to reduce
that risk.
In deciding whether a cancer risk
exists, EPA will consider a substance a
presumptive cancer risk when it causes
a statistically significant excess Incidence
of benign or malignant tumors In hu-
mans or animals. In the case of vinyl
chloride, EPA evaluated all available
data and concluded that a cancer risk
exists. In deciding how and whether to
regulate, EPA examined section 112 of
the Clean Air Act. Section 112 of the Act
requires that emission standards be set
"at the level which In the judgment of
the Administrator provides an ample
margin of safety to protect the public
health from such- hazardous air pollut-
ants." This requirement appears to as-
sume that each pollutant regulated will
have a threshold level of effects below
which no health effects will occur. As
explained in the documentation for the
current standard (40 FR 59532, Decem-
ber 24, 1975; 41 FR 46560, October 21,
1976), it has not been possible to deter-
mine if there is a threshold level of
effects for vinyl chloride and It is not
certain that such a threshold may be
determined In the near future. In the
absence of strong evidence to the con-
trary, then, the only level of vinyl chlo-
ride which would appear to be absolutely
protective of health is zero, which may
be achievable only by banning vinyl chlo-
ride emissions completely. That, in turn,
would require closing the entire industry.
As explained In the eailier rulemaklng it
Is not clear that Congress would have
Intended this result, so Instead EPA re-
quired the lowest level achievable using
technological means. (See 40 FR 59534
and 41 FR 46562).
In order to insure that the standard
continues to approach the only level of
emissions which Is known to be abso-
lutely protective of health, namely zero
emissions, EPA Is proposing amendments
which require more efficient use of exist-
ing control technology at existing plants
and more effective controls at new
plants, and which encourage technology
to reach this goal without banning vinyl
chloride.
MORE STRINGENT STANDARDS FOR EXISTING
SOURCES
EPA Is proposing amendments which
would require sources presently subject
to a 10 ppm emission limit to reduce
emissions to 5 ppm within three years of
promulgation of the amendments. The
affected sources Include ethylene dichlo-
ride purification; vinyl chloride forma-
tion and purification; reactors, strippers;
mixing, weighing, and holding contain-
ers; monomer recovery systems; and
fugitive emissions which have been cap-
tured in accordance with the existing
regulation.* If the owner or operator of
a source believed that a control system
would not be capable of meeting the 5
ppm limit, he would be able to request
that the Administrator approve an in-
terim emission limit for that source.
Such requests would have to be made one
year before the compliance date. In re-
questing an Interim emission limit, the
owner or operator would have to submit
supportive data and meet with EPA to
discuss his particular problems In attain-
ing compliance. The meeting would be
announced in the FEDERAL REGISTER and
any Interested party would be allowed to
attend and submit written or oral com-
ments. If an Interim emission limit were
granted to the source, the required emis-
sion level would be specified In a written
notification from EPA and in the FED-
ERAL REGISTER. Each source granted an
Interim emission limit would be reviewed
every three years to determine whether
emissions could be reduced to 5 ppm, or
at least to a lower interim emission limit.
In proposing the reduction from 10 to
5 ppm, It is not EPA's intent that a con-
trol system which has been Installed to
•As an explanatory note, paragraph (b) ot
I 61.65 contains nine fugitive emission regu-
lation*. For several of these, the fugitive
emissions are required to be captured and
ducted to a control device meeting 19 ppm.
According to the proposed amendments, the
emissions from this control device would
have to be reduced to 6 ppm In the same way
any other source currently required to meet
10 ppm would have to do. R*ther than In-
corporating both the 6 and 10 ppm emission
limits In each paragraph In I61.66(b), a
separate paragraph (c) containing these
emission llmlta is being added to I 61.66. All
the other paragraphs In (b) Me CTOM-
referenced In paragraph (o).
FIDIRAL KGISTIR, VOL. 42, NO. 10«—THURSDAY, JUNI 2, 1977
V-F-2
-------
ftOfOSID MILES
meet the 10 ppm emission Ihntt be re-
moved and replaced with another more
efficient control system or that a second
control system be added behind the first
control system. The purpose of the pro-
posed amendment is to force owners and
operators to maximize the effectiveness
of existing control systems.
Jfou BnuMOKfT STANMKBS vox Niw
Sourness
The proposed amendments would also
require more stringent controls for new
sources; I.e., sources for which construc-
tion Is commenced after the date of pro-
posal of these amendments. According
to {81.02 of the General Provisions,
"commenced" means that an owner or
operator has undertaken a continuous
program of construction or modification
or that an owner or operator has entered
into a contractual obligation to under-
take and complete, within a reasonable
time, a continuous program of construc-
tion or modification.
New sources of types which would be
subject to the 10 ppm emission limit
under the current standard would be
required under the amendments to meet
a S ppm emission limit at the time of
startup. With new sources there would be
no provision allowing requests for EPA
approval of an Interim emission limit.
New sources would be required to meet
the more stringent emission limit at fog
time of startup, because they have an
opportunity to design their equipment to
meet the 5 ppm emission limit at the time
construction is commenced. Existing
sources, on the other hand, require time
to maximize the effectiveness of their
control systems.
The proposed amendment would also
require ethylene dlchlorlde-vinyl chlor-
ide plants to control emissions from new
oxychlorlnation reactors to 6 ppm. This
requirement Is based on installation of
a recycling and oxygen feed system with
an incinerator or equivalent control de-
vice. The current standard limits emis-
sions from the oxychlorlnation reactor
to OJ2 g/kg (0.0002 Ib/lb) of the 100 per-
cent ethylene dlchloride product from
the oxychlorlnation reactor. This emis-
sion limit can be met by changing proc-
ess parameters, rather than Installing a
control device. During the development
of the current standard EPA considered
requiring existing sources to control
emissions with an incinerator or equiva-
lent technology, but rejected this ap-
proach because a large quantity of fuel
would be required to reduce emissions
from a relatively small source. An exist-
ing oxychlorlnation reactor typically has
a large volume, low hydrocarbon effluent
gas stream, and large quantities of sup-
plemental fuels would be required for
combustion of Its emissions.
A new plant can reduce the volume of
. Its effluent gas stream and make It more
concentrated by recycling the gas stream
and using oxygen Instead of air to feed
into the process.
Optimum stripping consists of a set of
operating conditions which must be de-
veloped experimentally on an individual
basis for the many resins. In developing
the current standard, EPA recognized
that stripping technology for dispersion
resins had not been refined to the same
extent as it had been for other resins and
that there was more difficulty in strip-
ping dispersion resins than other resins.
For this reason a less stringent emission
limit was established for dispersion res-
ins. Dispersion resins are permitted a
higher emission limit under the proposed
amendment for the same reason.
EPA believes that for some resins,
companies have already developed strip-
ping technology which would meet the
proposed amendment (2) For other
resins, the proposed standard would re-
quire additional improvement in strip-
ping technology. If stripping technology
has not been developed to the extent
necessary to meet the proposed amend-
ment for a particular resin, the manu-
facturer would have the option of de-
veloping the technology or not producing
the resin.
The current standard, unlike' the
proposed amendment, was not based on
the premise that an owner or operator
would have the option of not producing
a particular resin. It is EPA's judgment
that the owner or operator making a new
product has more freedom of choice than
the owner or operator already making a
particular product In selecting those
resins which are to be produced. EPA's
standard would be Included in the
variables under consideration when
decisions are being made as to which
resins are to be produced.
The proposed amendment would apply
to any new source, whether it constituted
replacement of an existing source in an
existing plant, the expansion of an exist-
ing plant, or part of an entirely new
plant. That Is, if a new oxychlorlnation
reactor or a Hew polyvlnyl chloride re-
actor were Installed at an existing plant,
it would be subject to the emission limits
for new sources. This means that as
existing sources are gradually replaced
with new sources in an existing plant,
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 42, NO. 106—THURSDAY, JUNE 2, 1977
V-F-3
-------
PROPOSED ftULES
the overall emission level from that
existing plant would be reduced.
EMISSION OFFSET
Because the present vinyl chloride
standard focuses on reducing emissions
rather than attaining a particular am-
bient air quality concentration, there la
no provision for limiting the size of
plants or the clustering of plants In a
geographical area. The doubling of the
size of an existing plant or the construc-
tion of a new plant beside an existing
plant would considerably Increase the
ambient air concentrations of vinyl
chloride in the vicinity of the plant (s)
even if the vinyl chloride standard was
met. EPA determined at the time of
promulgation of the current standard
that the costs of prohibiting the produc-
tion of vinyl chloride and polyvinyl
chloride were too high and the continued
operation of existing plants should be
allowed. EPA believes, however, that the
standard should include a mechanism
for prohibiting an Increase hi ambient
concentrations of vinyl chloride due to
new construction in areas where existing
sources are already located.
Accordingly, EPA is proposing an
amendment which would prohibit an In-
crease in emissions within 8 kilometers
(km) (approximately five miles) of an
existing source due to the construction
of a new emission source. This means
that if a new source were added to an
existing plant, the increase in emissions
due to that new source would have to be
offset by a reduction in emissions from
other existing sources within that plant
or at other plants within 8 km of the
construction site of the new source. Simi-
larly, a new .plant could not be con-
structed within 8 km of an existing
plant(s) unless the emission increase
due to the new plant were offset by an
emission reduction at the existing plant
or plants. This provision may result in
few existing plants being expanded and
few new plants being constructed in the
vicinity of existing plants. However, the
proposed amendment does not preclude
this possibility.
The offset provision would apply only
to new construction which results In an
Increase in production rate. Replacing or
adding equipment such as pumps, com-
pressors, agitators', sampling equipment
and unloading hoses is a routine practice
at existing plants. Additions of equip-
ment of this nature would, In and of it-
self, be expected to result in little, if any,
Increase in emissions. In EPA's judg-
ment, a plant should not be required to
prove this fact each time one of these
pieces of equipment is added. The addi-
tion of this type of equipment In con-
junction with major process equipment,
however, is likely to result in both an In-
crease hi emissions as well as an In-
crease In production rate, and is there-
fore covered by the offset provision.
If the offset provision were adopted,
the reduction In emissions could be
achieved hi the production rate of an
existing source or sources. The baseline
emission rate would be determined based
on the maximum production rate which
had been attained by each existing
source. The allowable emission rate for
each source would be based on the maxi-
mum production rate at which that
source would be operated in the future.
Also, if the emissions from an existing
source were already below the emission
limit applicable to it, the proposed
amendment would give the source credit
for the difference between the emission
limit and the actual emission level. That
Is the baseline emission rate would be
based on the standard rather than on an
emission test. It is EPA's judgment thait
this is a more equitable approach than
penalizing a source which has already
taken measures to reduce emissions below
the standard. Such a source would have
less room for further reducing emissions.
The emission limits applicable to both
the existing and new sources involved
in the offset arrangement would be con-
tained in the approval of new construc-
tion granted by the Administrator under
40 CFR 61.08.
EPA believes that a policy of no net
Increase hi emissions due to new con-
struction Is justified because of the haz-
ardous nature of vinyl chloride. How-
ever, EPA recognizes the potential diffi-
culties in Implementing such a policy
and Interested persons are urged to sub-
mit comments and factual information
relating to this policy.
REVIEW OF STANDARD
EPA plans to undertake a full-scale
review of Subpart P of 40 CPR Part 81
beginning three yeanrfrom the promul-
gation of any amendments. In the study
EPA will review information concerning
technological advances in the control of
vinyl chloride emissions to determine
what further changes might then be ap-
propriate to move toward the goal of
zero vinyl chloride emissions. EPA will
also consider recent health data to de-
termine whether the approach for regu-
lating vinyl chloride should be altered.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
The proposed amendment, In contrast
to the current standard, would encourage
the development of new technology and
improvements in existing technology and
would have the following three positive
environmental Impacts: (1) further re-
duction of emissions at existing plants,
(2) no increase in emissions within 8 km
of an existing source, a.nd (3) lower
emissions from new sources than would
be accomplished through the current
standard regardless of the "construction
site. These environmental impacts would
provide progress toward the ultimate
goal of zero emissions without banning
vinyl chloride, and in the process would
provide additional protection of public
health by further minimizing the health
risks to the people living in the vicinity
of existing plants and to any additional
people who are exposed as a result of new
construction.
Specifically, for those existing sources
which are currently subject to a 10 ppm
emission limit, emissions would be re-
duced by half within three years after
the promulgation date of these amend-
ments. At both an existing average-sized
ethylene dlchloride-vinyl chloride plant
and an existing average-steed polyvinyl
chloride plant, which contain other
sources than the ones required to meet
a 5 ppm emission limit, it is estimated
this will have the effect of reducing total
emissions by less than one percent. Emis-
sions at existing plants would be further
reduced as existing oxychlorinatlon re-
actors are replaced with new oxychlori-
natlon reactors and as new polyvinyl
chloride resins are produced to replace
existing ones.
Under the proposed amendment, emis-
sions from new plants would be consider-
ably lower than they would be under the
current standard. For a typical new
average-sized ethylene dlchloride-vlnyl
chloride plant (318xlO« kg/yr or 700
X10' Ib/yr produced), the hourly emis-
sions would be 5.1 kg (11.5 Ib) Instead
of 10.3 kg (23.1 Ib). For a typical new
average-sized dispersion polyvinyl chlo-
ride plant (46x10* kg/yr or 100x10*
Ib/yr production), the emissions would
be about 9 kg/hr (20 Ib/hr) Instead of
17.5 kg/hr (39 Ib/hr) and for a typical
new average-sized suspension polyvinyl
chloride (68x10* kg/yr or 150x10* Ib/yr
production) the emissions would be 13.5
kg/hr) (30 Ib/hr) Instead of 16 kg/hr
(36 Ib/hr). These emissions are calcu-
lated based on the emission factors pub-
lished in the documentation for the ex-
isting standard. U) Ambient air concen-
trations are expected to be reduced
proportionately.
The only negative environmental im-
pact would be an increase hi hydrogen
chloride emissions at ethylene dichlo-
rlde-vlnyl chloride plants if Incineration
were used to control emissions from new
oxychlorinatlon reactors. However, due
to the corrosion problems which would
otherwise occur on plant property and
in the community, plants are expected
to use scrubbers to control the hydrogen
chloride emissions. The proposed amend-
ment Is not expected to have a signifi-
cant impact on energy consumption.
ECONOMIC IMPACT
The potential economic Impacts of the
proposed standard are:
(1) Costs for research and develop-
ment of Improved methodology for oper-
ation of existing control technology so
that it can be used to meet the 5 ppm
emission limit.
(2) Costs for research and develop-
ment of Improved stripping techniques
to meet the standard for new polyvinyl
chloride resins.
(3) Cost of research and development
or licensing for converting over to the
oxygen system for a new oxychlorinatlon
reactor.
(4) Possibly increased transportation
costs of raw materials in the case that
the offset policy results in the construc-
tion of a new plant farther from an
existing plant than it otherwise would
have been.
(5) Costs of building a new plant more
than 8 km from an existing plant in the
event that the offset requirement pre-
cluded the expansion of an existing
plant.
FCDIIAL HOISTIR, VOL 47, NO. 10*—THURSDAY, MINI 1, 1*77
V-F-4
-------
PROPOSED MILIS
(6) Delay in the production of a par-
ticular resin due to .time spent develop-
ing stripping technology for that resin.
(7) No growth in the production of a
particular resin due to the inability to
strip that resin to required levels.
The types of costs which have been
named would be difficult to quantify. The
costs would be expected to vary consider-
ably from one plant to another depend-
ing on the amount of research and de-
velopment than had already been done,
the extent to which technology could be
transferred from other plants and proc-
esses, and the plans for new construction.
One area in which cost estimates can
be generated is the use of an oxygen-
recycle oxychlorination process as op-
posed to an air-based system. The pro-
posed amendment does not require the
use of the oxygen-recycle system, but
many plants would be expected to em-
ploy this system to avoid the high costs
of incinerating the high volume gas
stream from a typical air-based system.
The primary cost of using the oxygen-
recycle system is the cost of the oxygen
itself. The cost of the oxygen for a par-
ticular plant would depend on whether
the plant was located where there is a
considerable demand for both the oxygen
and nitrogen products of air separation.
According to one recent article, if it is
assumed that such a demand exists, the
cost of the oxygen ($14.34/ton) would
be approximately equivalent to the cost
of compressing air for use in the air-
based system. (1) Another report in
which this assumption was not made and
the economics of the air and oxygen sys-
tems were being compared, it was con-
cluded that overall production economics
"favor the oxygen process even if vent
(as incineration would not be required
tor an air-based plant since the sum of
all remaining advantages offered by
oxygen-based plant operation more than
outweighs the incremental cost for the
oxygen feed." (2)
Miscellaneous: The Administrator In-
vites comments on all aspects of the pro-
posed amendments.
(Section 112 of the Clean Air Act, sec. 4(a) of
Pub. L. 91-604, 84 Stat. 1685 (42 U.8.C. 1867c-
7) and section 301 (a) of the Clean Air Act,
aec. 2 of Pub. L. No. 90-148, 84 SJat. 604 as
•mended by sec. (16) (c) (2) of PuB. L. 91-604,
84 Stat. 1713 (42 U.S.C. 1867 g(a)). Sees.
fll.67 and 61.68 also proposed under the au-
thority of section 114 of the Clean Air Act,
as added by sec. 4(a) of Pub. L. 91-604, 84
Stat. 1687 and amended by Pub. L. 93-319,
sec. 6(a)(4), 88 Stat. 269 (42 tr.S.C.
18570-9).)
NOTE.—The Environmental Protection
Agency has determined that this document
does not contain a major proposal requiring
preparation of an Economic Impact Analysis
under Executive Orders 11821 and 11949 and
OMB Circular A-107.
Dated: May 27,1977.
DOUGLAS M. COSTLE,
Administrator.
REFERENCES
(1) Standard Support and Environmental
Impact Statement: Emission Standard for
Vinyl Chloride, BPA-450 12-76-009, October,
1976.
(9) "Qoodrich Reports Impressive !
In Solving Vinyl Chloride Problem," Ameri-
can faint and Coatings Journal, Vol. 60, No.
81, January 12, 1976, p. 24.
(3) E. W. Wlmer and R. E. Feathers, "Ox-
ygen Gives Low Cost VCM," Hydrocarbon
Processing, March 1976, pp. 81-84.
(4) Peter Reich, "Air or Oxygen Por
VCM?," Hydrocarbon Processing, March,
1976, pp. 86-89.
It is proposed that Subpart F of 40
CPR Part 61 be amended as follows:
1. In f 61.08, paragraph (b) Is revised
to read as follows:
§ 61.08 Approval by the Administrator.
*****
(b) If the Administrator determines
that a stationary source for which an
application pursuant to I 61.07 was sub-
mitted will not, if properly operated,
cause emissions in violation of the
standard or violation of { 61.73, he will
approve the construction or modification
of such source.
2. Section 61.62 is revised-to read as
follows:
§ 61.62 Emission standard for ethylene
dichloride plants.
An owner or operator of an ethylene
dichloride plant shall comply with the
requirements of this section and § 61.65.
(a) Ethylene dichloride purification:
Except as provided in 861.65(a), the
concentration of vinyl chloride in all
exhaust gases discharged to the atmos-
phere from any equipment used in
ethylene dichloride purification is not
to exceed the appropriate emission limit
as follows:
(1) Each source for which construc-
tion had commenced on or before (date
of proposal of these amendments), 10
ppm until (date three years after pro-
mulgation of these amendments) and
5 ppm after (date three years after the
promulgation of these amendments).
(2) Each source for which construc-
tion commenced after June 2, 1977, 5
ppm.
(b) Oxychlorination reactor: Except
as provided in |61.65(a), emissions of
vinyl chloride to the atmosphere are
not to exceed the appropriate emission
limit as follows:
(1) Each source tor which construc-
tion had commenced on or before (date
of proposal of these amendments), 0.2
g/kg (0.0002 Ib/lb of the 100 percent
ethylene dichloride product from the
oxychlorination reactor.
(2) Each source for which construc-
tion commenced after June 2, 1977, 5
ppm.
(c) The requirements of this section
do not apply to equipment that has been
opened, is out of operation and met the
requirement in 5 61.65(b) (6) (i) before
being opened.
3. Section 61.63 is revised to read as
follows:
§ 61.63 Emission standard for vinyl
chloride plants.
An owner or operator of a vinyl chlo-
ride plant shall comply with the require-
ments of this section and 9 61.65.
(a) Vtajrl chloride formation and pu-
rification: Except as provided in
161.65(a), the concentration of vinyl
chloride in all exhaust gases discharged
to the atmosphere from any equipment
used in vinyl chloride formation and/or
purification is not to exceed the appro-
priate emission limit as follows:
(1) Each source, for which construc-
tion had commenced on or before June 2,
1977, 10 ppm until (date three years af-
ter promulgation of these amendments)
and 5 ppm after (date three years after
promulgation of these amendments).
(2) Each source for which construc-
tion commenced after June 2, 1977, 5
ppm.
(b) The requirements of this section
do not apply to equipment that has been
opened, is out of operation, and met the
requirement in { 61.65(b) (6) (i) before
being opened.
4. Section 61.64 Is amended by revis-
ing paragraphs (a) (1), (b), (c), (d) and
(e) and by adding paragraph (f) as fol-
lows:
§ 61.64 Emission standard for polyvinyl
chloride plants.
• An owner or operator of a polyvinyl
chloride plant shall comply with the re-
quirements of this section and { 61.65.
(a) Reactor: The following require-
ments apply to reactors:
(1) Except as provided in paragraph
(a) (2) of this section and { 61.65(a), the
concentration of vinyl chloride in all ex-
haust gases discharged to the atmos-
phere from each reactor is not to exceed
the appropriate emission limit as fol-
lows:
(i) Each source for which construction
had commenced on or before June 2,1977
10 ppm until (date three years after pro-
mulgation of these amendments) and 5
ppm after (date three years after pro-
mulgation of these amendments).
(11) Each source for which construc-
tion commenced after June 2, 1977, 5
ppm.
* » • * •
(b) Stripper: Except as provided in
561.65(a), the concentration of vinyl
chloride in all exhaust gases discharged
to the atmosphere, from each stripper is
not to exceed the appropriate emission
limit as follows:
(1) Each source for which construc-
tion had commenced on or before June
2, 1977 10 ppm until (date three years
after promulgation of 'these amend-
ments) and 5 ppm after (date three
years after final promulgation of these
amendments).
(2) Each source for which construction
commenced after June 2, 1977, 5 ppm.
(c) Mixing, weighting, and holding
containers: Except as provided in J 61.-
65(a), the concentration of vinyl chlo-
ride in all exhaust gases discharged to
the atmosphere from each mixing, weigh-
ing, or holding container in vinyl chlo-
ride service which precedes the stripper
(or the reactor if the plant has no strip-
per) In the plant process flow Is-not to
exceed the appropriate emission limit as
follows:
(1) Each source, for which construc-
tion had commenced on or before (date
FEDERAL REGISTER, VOl. «, *IO. 106—THURSDAY, JUNE 2,
V-F-5
-------
PROPOSED RULES
of proposal of these amendments), 10
ppm until (date three years after pro-
mulgation of these amendments) and 6
ppm after (date three years after pro-
mulgation of these amendments).
(2) Each source for which construc-
tion commenced after June 2, 1977, 5 •
ppm.
(d) Monomer recovery system. Except
as provided In { 61.65 (a), the concentra-
tion of vinyl chloride In all exhaust gases
discharged to the atmosphere from each
monomer recovery system Is not to ex-
ceed the appropriate concentration as
follows:
(1) Each source for which construc-
tion had commenced on or before (date
of proposal of these amendments), 10
ppm until (date three years after pro-
mulgation of these amendments) and 5
ppm after (date three years after pro-
mulgation of these amendments).
(2) Each source for which construc-
tion commenced after June 2, 1977, 5
Ppm.
(e) Sources following the stripper(s):
The following requirements apply to
emissions of vinyl chloride to the atmos-
phere from the combination of all
sources following the stripper(s) [or the
reactor(s) If the plant has no stripper]
In the plant process flow Including, but
not limited, to centrifuges, concentra-
tors, blend tanks, filters, dryers, conveyor
air discharges, • baggers, storage con-
tainers, and Inprocess wastewater.
(1) In polyvinyl chloride plants using
•tripping technology to control vinyl
chloride emissions:
(1) For a grade or grades of polyvlnyl
chloride resin which have been produced
by the plant on or before June 2, 1977,
the weighted average residual vinyl
chloride concentration in all the grades
processed through the stripping opera-
tion on each calendar day, measured im-
mediately after the stripping operation
to completed, may not exceed the appro-
priate emission limit as follows:
(A) 2,000 ppm for polyvlnyl chloride
dispersion resins, excluding latex resins;
(B) 400 ppm for all other polyvlnyl
chloride resins, Including latex resins,
averaged separately for each type of
resin;
(11) For a grade or grades of polyvlnyl
chloride resin which have not been pro-
duced by the plant on or before June 2,
1977, the weighted average residual
vinyl chloride concentration in all the
trades processed through the stripping
operation on each calendar day, meas-
ured immediately after the stripping op-
eration is completed, may not exceed the
Appropriate emission limit as follows:
(A) 500 ppm for polyvlnyl chloride
dispersion resins, excluding latex resins;
(B) 100 ppm for all other polyvlnyl
chloride resins, Including latex resins,
averaged separately for each type of
resin; or
(2) In polyvinyl chloride plants con-
trolling vinyl chloride emissions with
technology other than stripping or in
addition to stripping:
(i) For sources being used to process
a grade or grades of polyvinyl chloride
resin all of which had been produced by
the plant on or before June 2,1977:
(A) 2 g/kg (0.003 Ib/lb) product from
the strlpper(s) [or reactor(s) If the
plant has no stripper (s) ] for dispersion
polyvlnyl chloride resins, excluding latex
resins, with the product determined on
a dry solids basis;
(B) 0.4 g/kg (0.004 Ib/lb) product
from the s tripper (s) (or reactor(s) If
the plant has no stripper (s)) for all
other polyvlnyl chloride resins, including
latex resins, with the product deter-
mined on a dry solids basis.
(11) For sources being used to process
any grade of polyvinyl chloride resin not
produced by the plant on or before June
2, 1977:
(A) 0.5 g/kg (0.0005 Ib/lb) product
from the stripper(s) (or reactor(s) if the
plant has no stripper (s)) for dispersion
polyvlnyl chloride resins, excluding la-
tex resins, with the product determined
on a dry solids basis;
(B) 0.1 g/kg. (0.0001 Ib/lb) product
from the strippers (or reactor(s) if the
plant has no stripper (s)) for all other
polyvlnyl chloride resins, Including
latex resins, with the product deter-
mined on a dry solids basis.
(f) The requirements of paragraphs
(b), (c), and (d) of this section do not
apply to equipment that has been
opened, is out of operation, and met the
requirement In, J 61.65(b) (6) (1) before
being opened.
5. Section 61.65 la amended as follows:
A, By replacing the phrase "10 ppm"
with the phrase "the appropriate emis-
sion limit specified In S 61.65(c)" in
paragraphs (b) (1) (11), (b) (2), (b) (3)
(1);
61.63(a)(l); 61.64 (aXIXi), (b)(D,
(cXl), (d)(l); and/or 61.65(c)(l) on
or before (date three years after pro-
mulgation of these amendments), the
owner or operator of that source may re-
quest that the Adminstrator approve an
interim emission limit for that source.
The request is to be in writing and Is to
be submitted to the Administrator within
six months prior to (date two years after
promulgation of these amendments).
The request is to include:
(1) The reasons the source is in-
capable of being in compliance with the
5 ppm emission limit and data to support
those reasons, and
ffOMAl MCISTK, VOL. 47, NO. 104—THUISDAY, JUNE i. 1977
V-F-6
-------
tt> A suggested interim emission limit
and description of the methodology tor
attaining that limit.
(b) Any owner or operator of a source
who has submitted to the Administrator
• written request for an Interim emis-
sion limit In accordance with I 81.72(a),
•hall within 60 days of the date of the
written request meet with the Admin-
istrator concerning the information con-
tained In the request. The meeting Is to
be open to interested persons, who are
to be allowed to submit oral or written
testimony relevant to compliance of the
source.
(o) The Administrator will within 120
days of receipt of the written request
required by paragraph (a) of this sec-
tion, notify the owner or operator in
writing of approval or denial of approval
of an Interim emission limit.
(d) If an Intertrti emission limit la ap-
proved the notification Is to Include the
level of the interim emission limit, which
Bay be the level requested or a more
stringent one.
(e) A determination to deny approval
of an interim emission limit is to set
forth the specific grounds on which such
denial is based.
(f) Approval for any interim emission
Bmlt granted for any source under
161.72(c) shall expire three years from
the date of issuance. The owner or op-
erator may request an extension of ap-
proval for an interim emission limit or a
lower Interim emission limit. The re-
tuest is to be in writing, is to be sub-
mitted within six months prior to a year
before the expiration date and la to in-
clude the information listed In {61.72
(b), (c), (d), and (e) are to apply.
0. A new 161.73 is added to read as
follows:
| 61.7S Offset of emluloiu due to new
conjunction.
(a) No owner or operator is to con-
struct a new source which alone or in
combination with other sources-being
constructed at the same time results in
an increased production rate unless he
demonstrates to the Administrator's sat-
isfaction that such construction will not
cause an increase In vinyl chloride emis-
sions within 8 km of any other source
which is subject to this subpart.
(b) Reduction in production rate is
an allowable mechanism for attaining an
offset In emissions.
(c) The baseline emission rate is to be
determined based on the level of emis-
sions allowable by the standard.
(d) Reducing emissions from an In-
terim emission limit to the standard for a
source is not an acceptable means of
achieving an emission offset.
(e) In the application for approval of
construction required by ( 61.07, owners
or operators of sources subject to this
subpart shall Include, in addition to the
information required by i 61.07, the fol-
lowing Information:
(1) The name, address, and location
of any plant subject to this subpart
which is located within 8 km of the pro-
posed location of the source to be con-
structed.
ftOPOSID RUUS
(f) The emission limits applicable to
both the new source (s) andthesource(s)
at which emissions are being reduced to
balance the Increase In emissions due to
the new construction are to be estab-
lished by the Administrator in the ap-
proval for construction required by
161.08.
(8«os. 113 and 801 (a) of the Clean Air Act,
see. 4(a) of Pub. L. No. 81-804, 84 8t»t. 1688;
mo. 3 at Pub. L. No. 00-148, 81 Btet. 804 (48
U.B.O. 18580-7, 1867g(»)). Bee*. 61.67 and
61.ee also Issued under see. 114 of the Clean
Air Act, eeo 4(») of Pub. L. No. 91-604, 84
•Mat 1687 (43 U.S.O. .18570-9).)
IPB Doo.77-16578 Piled 6-1-77:8:45 am]
NDHAL MOISTM, VOL.-41, NO. 10*-
-THUtSOAY, MNI t, If77
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
AGENCY
140 CFR Part 61 ]
[FRL 776-3]
VINYL CHLORIDE
National Emission Standards for Hazard-
ous Air Pollutants; Extension of Com-
ment Period
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Proposed rule.
SUMMARY: The deadline for submlttal
of comments on the amendments to the
vinyl chloride standard which were pro-
posed on June 2. 1977 (42 FR 28154), is
being delayed from August 1,1977, to Au-
gust 19, 1977. The Society of Plastics
Industry, Inc., because of the time re-
quired to make the proceedings from the
public hearing available, has asked that
the deadline for comments be delayed so
that they will have ample opportunity to
review the proceedings.
DATE: Comments must be received on
or before August 19,1977.
ADDRESS: Comments should be sub-
mitted (preferably in triplicate) to the
Emission Standards and Engineering Di-
vision (MD-13), Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Research Triangle Park,
N.C. 27711, attention: Mr. Don R. Good-
win.
All public comments received may be
Inspected and copies at the Public In-
formation Reference Unit (EPA Li-
brary), Room 2922, 401 M Street SW.,
Washington, D.C.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
Don R. Goodwin, Emission Standards
and Engineering Division, Environ-
mental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, N.C. 27711, telephone
919-541-5271.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
On June 2, 1977 (42 FR 28154), the En-
vironmental Protection Agency proposed
amendments to the vinyl chloride stand-
ard which was promulgated under the
authority of section 112 of the Clean Air
Act on October 21, 1976 (42 FR 46561).
The notice of proposal requested public
comments on the amendments by Au-
gust 1,1977.
On July 19, 1977, a public hearing on
the proposal Was held In Washington,
D.C. The proceedings were made avail-
able to the Agency on July 28, 1977. Ad-
ditional time was required to make copies
of the proceedings and distribute them
to Interested parties. The Agency be-
lieves that an extension of the comment
period through August 19, 1977, is justi-
fiable.
Dated: August 2,1977.
EDWARD F. TURK,
Acting Assistant Administrator
for Air and Waste Management.
[FR Doo.77-22991 Piled 8-9-77:8:45 atn]
HDIRAL REGISTER, VOL. 42, NO. 154—WEDNESDAY, AUGUST 10, 1*77
V-F-7
-------
[ 40 CFR Part 61 ]
[FRL 786-8]
VINYL CHLORIDE
National Emission Standards for Hazard-
ous Air Pollutants; Extension of Com-
ment Period
AGENCY: Environmental Protection
Agency.
ACTION: Proposed rule, extension of
comment period.
SUMMARY: The deadline for submittal
of comments on the amendments to the
vinyl chloride standard which were pro-
posed on June 2, 1977 (42 FR 281541,
is being delayed from August 19, 1977,
to September 23, 1977. Due to the com-
plexity of the issues w'hich have been
raised with regard to the proposed
amendments, EPA believes that addi-
tional time is needed for submission of
factual information to the Agency which
can be used in evaluating the proposal.
DATE: Comments must be postmarked
on or before September 23, 1977.
ADDRESS: Comments should be submit-
ted (preferably in triplicate) to the
Emission Standards and Engineering
Division (MD-13), Environmental Pro-
tection Agency, Research Triangle Park,
N.C. 27711, attention: Mr. Don R. Good-
win.
All public comments received may be
inspected and copied at the Public In-
formation Reference Unit (EPA Li-
brary), Room 2922, 401 M Street SW.,
Washington, D.C.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT:
Don R. Goodwin, Emission Standards
and Engineering Division, Environ-
mental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, N.C. 27711, telephone
919-541-5271.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
On June 2, 1977 (42 FR 28154), the En-
vironmental Protection Agency proposed
amendments to the vinyl chloride stand-
ard which was promulgated under the
authority of section 112 of the Clean Air
Act on October 21, 1976 (42 FR 46561).
The notice of proposal requested public
comments on the amendments by Au-
gust 1, 1977. On August 10, 1977 (42 FR
40452), in response to a request by the
Society of Plastics Industry, Inc., EPA
delayed the deadline for submittal of
comments on the proposed amendments
until August 19,1977. The purpose of the
delay was to allow ample opportunity for
interested parties to review and comment
on the transcript of the proceedings from
the public hearing held on July 19, 1977.
A number of technological and legal
issues have been raised on the proposed
amendments both in statements made at
the public hearing and in written com-
ments received by the Agency. Because
of the complexity of these issues, EPA
has decided to extend the comment pe-
PROPOSEO RULES
riod to allow additional time for submit-
ting factual data to the Agency which
can be used in evaluating the proposal.
EPA believes that an extension of the
comment period through September 23,
1977, is needed for this purpose.
Dated: August 26,1977.
EDWARD F. TUERK,
Assistant Administrator for
Air and Waste Management.
1KB Doc.77-25876 Piled fr-6-77;8:46 am]
KDUAL MClSm, VOL 42, NO. 179—WEDNESDAY, SOTEMBH 7, If77
V-F-8
-------
TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
(Please read Instructions on the reverse before completing/
1. REPORT NO.
EPA 340/1-79-006
2.
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants: A Compilation
7. AUTHOR(S)
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
PEDCO ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.
11499 Chester Road
Cincinnati .Ohio 45246
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Division of Stationary Source Enforcement
Washington, D.C. 20460
3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
5. REPORT DATE
April 1,1979
6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO.
P/N 3370-3-nn
10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.
68-01-4147, T.O. 73
13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
Final" to Aoril 1 1979
14. SPONSORING AGENCY C"dl5g
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
DSSE Project Officer: Kirk Foster
16. ABSTRACT
This manual presents a compilation of the Environmental Protection Agency
National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) . Since their
inception in 1971, the NESHAP have been expanded and revised several times.
This manual is intended to serve as a convenient reference and source of current
information to those persons who will be working with the NESHAP regulations.
The manual includes the full text of the standards as they appear now (April 1,1979
with all revisions, corrections, and additions where applicable, and the full text
of all revisions and other Federal Register notices pertaining to the standards.
17.
KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
a. DESCRIPTORS
Emission Standards
Federal Regulations
18. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT
Release Unlimited
b.lDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS C. COSATI Field/Group
National Emission ^B
Standards for Hazardous
Air Pollutants
19. SECURITY CLASS (This Report) 21. NO. OF PAGES
Unclassified 180
20. SECURITY CLASS (This page) 22. PRICE
Unclassified
EPA Form 2220-1 (9-73)
*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1979-640- 013 42 38REGION NO. 4
------- |